Europaudvalget 2023
KOM (2023) 0228
Offentligt
2737181_0001.png
EUROPEAN
COMMISSION
Strasbourg, 18.4.2023
SWD(2023) 225 final
COMMISSION STAFF WORKING DOCUMENT
IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT
Accompanying the
Proposals for a
DIRECTIVE OF THE EUROPEAN PARLIAMENT AND COUNCIL
amending Directive 2014/59/EU as regards early intervention measures, conditions for
resolution and financing of resolution action
REGULATION OF THE EUROPEAN PARLIAMENT AND COUNCIL
amending Regulation (EU) 806/2014 as regards early intervention measures, conditions
for resolution and financing of resolution action
DIRECTIVE OF THE EUROPEAN PARLIAMENT AND COUNCIL
amending
Directive 2014/49/EU as regards the scope of deposit protection, use of deposit guarantee
schemes funds, cross-border cooperation, and transparency
{COM(2023) 226-228 final} - {SWD(2023) 226 final} - {SEC(2023) 230 final}
EN
EN
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
Table of contents
GLOSSARY ...................................................................................................................... III
1.
2.
INTRODUCTION: POLITICAL AND LEGAL CONTEXT................................... 12
PROBLEM DEFINITION ........................................................................................ 19
2.1. Problem 1: Insufficient legal certainty and predictability in the
management of bank failures ............................................................................. 23
2.2. Problem 2: Ineffective funding options and divergent access to funding
conditions in resolution and outside resolution ................................................. 28
2.3. Problem 3: Uneven and inconsistent depositor protection and lack of
robustness in DGS funding ................................................................................ 33
2.4. How will the problems evolve? ......................................................................... 35
3.
WHY SHOULD THE EU ACT? .............................................................................. 36
3.1. Legal basis ......................................................................................................... 36
3.2. Subsidiarity: Necessity and added-value of EU action ...................................... 36
4.
OBJECTIVES: WHAT IS TO BE ACHIEVED? ..................................................... 41
4.1. General objectives.............................................................................................. 41
4.2. Specific objectives ............................................................................................. 41
5.
WHAT ARE THE AVAILABLE POLICY OPTIONS? .......................................... 41
5.1.
5.2.
5.3.
5.4.
5.5.
5.6.
6.
Approach to design of policy options ................................................................ 41
Review of the 2013 Banking Communication on State aid rules ...................... 42
What is the baseline from which options are assessed?..................................... 43
Overview of the policy options .......................................................................... 45
Common elements across the packages of options ............................................ 45
Options discarded at an early stage.................................................................... 46
WHAT ARE THE IMPACTS OF THE POLICY OPTIONS AND HOW DO
THEY COMPARE? .................................................................................................. 46
6.1. Assessment of policy options ............................................................................ 47
6.2. Comparison and choice of preferred options ..................................................... 82
6.3. Common elements across the packages of options ............................................ 84
7.
8.
PREFERRED OPTION ............................................................................................. 85
HOW WILL ACTUAL IMPACTS BE MONITORED AND
EVALUATED? ......................................................................................................... 92
ANNEX 1: PROCEDURAL INFORMATION ................................................................ 95
ANNEX 2: STAKEHOLDER CONSULTATION ......................................................... 101
ANNEX 3: WHO IS AFFECTED AND HOW? ............................................................. 113
ANNEX 4: ‘ZOOM-IN’ ON CORE ELEMENTS OF THE CRISIS
MANAGEMENT AND DEPOSIT INSURANCE FRAMEWORK ...................... 126
ANNEX 5: EVALUATION OF THE CMDI FRAMEWORK....................................... 140
I
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
ANNEX 6: OVERVIEW OF DEPOSIT INSURANCE ISSUES COVERED IN
THE IMPACT ASSESSMENT............................................................................... 215
ANNEX 7: ANALYTICAL METHODS ........................................................................ 237
ANNEX 8: IMPACT ASSESSMENT OF TECHNICAL TOPICS THAT WERE
NOT EXHAUSTIVELY COVERED IN THE MAIN BODY OF THE
IMPACT ASSESSMENT ....................................................................................... 315
ANNEX 9: SELECTED CASES OF APPLICATION OF THE CMDI
FRAMEWORK SINCE 2015 ................................................................................. 349
ANNEX 10: RATIONALE AND DESIGN FEATURES FOR A COMMON
DEPOSITOR PROTECTION IN THE BANKING UNION .................................. 358
ANNEX 11: EBA RESPONSE TO THE CALL FOR ADVICE ................................... 384
ANNEX 12: ANALYTICAL WORK BY THE JOINT RESEARCH CENTRE ........... 385
ANNEX 13: OTHER QUANTITATIVE ANALYSES .................................................. 386
ANNEX 14: OPTIONS DISCARDED AT AN EARLY STAGE .................................. 413
II
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0004.png
G
LOSSARY
Please note: All acronyms and relevant terms used in this impact assessment are
explained in this glossary. In order to avoid duplication these are not repeated in the
main body. The reader should revert to the glossary when needed.
Term or acronym
Alternative funding arrangements
Meaning or definition
Member States must ensure that DGSs have adequate alternative
funding arrangements in place to enable them to meet any claims
against them (Article 10(9) DGSD). These alternative funding
arrangements can, for instance, include temporary State financing
(which will ultimately be repaid by the DGS). DGSs can also raise
extraordinary contributions from those institutions covered by the
DGS where they do not have enough money immediately available
in their fund. DGSs can also choose to establish borrowing
arrangements between themselves, provided the respective
national law provisions allow them to do so.
DGS have in some Member States in the context of national
insolvency proceedings the capacity to intervene with other
modalities than direct payout as allowed in Article 11(6) DGSD.
Such measures intend to preserve the access of depositors to
covered deposits, including transfer of assets and liabilities and
deposit book transfer. A condition for such measures is that the
costs borne by the DGS do not exceed the net amount of
compensating covered depositors at the credit institution
concerned.
Anti-Money Laundering/Combating the Financing of Terrorism
Anti-Money Laundering Directive
An asset is encumbered if it has been pledged or if it is subject to
any form of arrangement to secure, collateralise or credit enhance
any transaction from which it cannot be freely withdrawn.
Additional Tier 1
AT1 is a component of Tier 1 Capital and it encompasses
instruments that are perpetual in nature and may be automatically
written-down or converted into CET1.
A bail-in is a legal procedure that may be used in bank resolution.
Carrying out a bail-in means that the claims of shareholders and
certain creditors in a bank are written-down or converted into
capital, meaning that they are forced to accept losses incurred by
the bank and to contribute to its recapitalisation.
A bail-out involves the rescue of a financial institution through the
intervention of the government using taxpayers’ money for
funding.
The 2019
Banking package
(also referred to as the “risk reduction
package”) amends the BRRD as regards the ranking of unsecured
debt instruments in insolvency hierarchy. It also implements in the
CRR II, the SRMR II and the BRRD II the minimum Total Loss-
Absorbing Capacity (TLAC) requirement for EU G-SIIs and
includes a revision of the MREL requirement for all banks with
strengthened eligibility and subordination criteria. These
amendments were adopted in 2019.
Alternative measures (in insolvency)
AML/CFT
AMLD
Asset encumbrance
AT1
Bail-in
Bail-out
Banking Package
III
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0005.png
bn
BRRD
billion
Bank recovery and resolution Directive
A directive establishing a common framework of rules and powers
for EU Member States to intervene in the case of failing banks.
The directive gives broad powers to national authorities to
prevent, intervene early and conduct the resolution of troubled
banks. Such powers include selling the bank (in whole or in
parts), setting up a temporary bridge bank, and bailing-in
shareholders and creditors of the bank.
Burden sharing is generally referred to when losses in a bank are
borne by the bank’s shareholders and creditors.
Central Credit Union
Credit Default Swap
A CDS is a financial swap agreement that the seller of the CDS
will compensate the buyer in the event of a debt default (by the
debtor) or other credit event.
Centre for European Policy Studies
Common Equity Tier 1
CET1 is a component of Tier 1 Capital, and it encompasses
ordinary shares and retained earnings.
The level of CET1 equity absorbing losses prior to the
determination of a bank as FOLF
Call for advice
Crisis management and deposit insurance
References to the CMDI framework in the impact assessment
relate to the harmonised EU rules in the BRRD/SRMR and DGSD,
while national insolvency proceedings, which are unharmonized,
are outside of the framework. However, the decision by the
resolution authority whether to place a failing bank in resolution
or in national insolvency proceedings is part of the CMDI
framework (public interest assessment). The CMDI framework,
through the DGSD, also encompasses preventive measures (under
Article 11(3) DGSD) and alternative measures in insolvency
(under Article 11(6) DGSD) as national options, which are only
available in national laws in a minority of Member States and
regulates the access conditions for these measures (such as the
least cost test)
Capital markets union
The capital markets union is a Commission initiative to create a
single market for capital, in order to get investments and savings
flowing across the EU so that they can benefit consumers,
investors and companies, regardless of where they are located.
In the event that the Single Resolution Fund is depleted, the
European Stability Mechanism can act as a common backstop. It
can lend the necessary funds to the SRF to finance resolution by
providing a revolving credit line. The aim of the common backstop
is to strengthen the resilience and crisis resolution capacity of the
Banking Union.
The part of the eligible deposits that can be repaid by the DGS (as
a rule, up to EUR 100 000).
Burden sharing
CCU
CDS
CEPS
CET1
CET1 depletion
CfA
CMDI
CMDI framework
CMU
Common backstop
Covered deposits
IV
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0006.png
CRD
Creditor hierarchy in insolvency
(hierarchy of claims)
Capital Requirements Directive
The order according to which creditors must be repaid in the
context of the insolvency proceedings (in accordance with
national insolvency laws). While some elements of the creditor
hierarchy have been harmonised at EU level, this order is largely
determined by national law.
Capital Requirements Regulation
Council working party on financial stability and Banking Union
The CWP is a preparatory body created by the Council in January
2016 (previously named Ad-hoc working party) following the
Commission’s proposal to establish a European Deposit
Insurance Scheme (EDIS). Its functions are to address initiatives
and legislative proposals to the objective of strengthening the
banking union and to establish Council’s position on the EDIS.
The European Central Bank and the Single Resolution Board are
invited as observers to its meetings.
Directorate General for Financial Stability, Financial Services and
Capital Markets Union
Deposit guarantee scheme Directive
Deposit Insurance Fund
The hybrid EDIS model is built around the idea of a coexistence of
a deposit insurance fund at central level (DIF) and funds
remaining within the national DGSs.
European Banking Authority
EBA’s reply to the Commission’s Call for Advice on the review
of the CMDI framework.
European Central Bank
European deposit insurance scheme
EDIS would provide liquidity support to a beneficiary DGS, once
the latter has exhausted its funds (following one or multiple
interventions). Liquidity support is an essential element to avoid
that possible shortfalls in DGS funding would have to be financed
by governments. Liquidity support is eventually reimbursed by the
beneficiary DGS (on the basis of recoupments or replenishment
contributions from the banks in its remit).
European Economic Area
Expert Group on Banking, Payments and Insurance
The EGBPI is a consultative entity composed of experts appointed
by EU countries that provides advice and expertise in the
preparation of draft delegated acts in the area of banking,
payments and insurance for the Commission and its services.
Early intervention measures
Early intervention measures are taken by competent authorities to
avert a bank failure when a bank shows signs of distress
(Articles 27-30 BRRD).
Emergency Liquidity Assistance
Deposits that are protected by the DGS, i.e. deposits that are not
CRR
CWP
DG FISMA
DGSD
DIF
EBA
EBA CfA report
ECB
EDIS
EDIS liquidity support
EEA
EGBPI
EIM
ELA
Eligible deposits
V
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0007.png
excluded from the repayment guaranteed by the DGS.
ESM
EU
Ex ante
contributions to DGS
European Stability Mechanism
European Union
These are regular financial contributions by the industry to build
up and maintain the fund, to ensure that depositors in all Member
States enjoy a similarly high level of protection.
These are extraordinary financial contributions to the DGS that
are collected, in case the fund does not accommodate the needs,
e.g. after a bank failure to replenish the fund.
Fit for the Future Platform
The
F4F platform
is a high-level expert group that provides input
for the REFIT part of the ‘Better Regulation’ agenda of the
Commission for stepping up the efforts on simplification,
modernisation and burden reduction of EU legislation.
Failing or likely to fail
The first condition for resolution, relating to the imminent or
inevitable inability of the bank to continue operating under
normal conditions. It takes into account the financial situation of
the bank as well as compliance with the requirements for
authorisation.
In case there is no public interest in its resolution, a failing bank
will normally be expected to be wound up under national
insolvency proceedings.
‘Franchise value’ means the net present value of cash flows that
can reasonably be expected to result from the maintenance and
renewal of assets and liabilities or businesses and includes the
impact of any business opportunities, as relevant, including those
stemming from the different resolution actions that are assessed
by the valuer. Franchise value may be higher or lower than the
value arising from the contractual terms and conditions of assets
and liabilities existing at the valuation date.
Financial Stability Board
The term “fully-fledged EDIS” is generally used when referring to
final shape of EDIS as proposed by the Commission in 2015. In
this steady state, EDIS would also progressively cover potential
losses. Potential losses could emerge if the DGS intervention is
not fully recouped from the insolvency estate. In 2018, the
Commission proposed to reach this so-called coinsurance phase
of EDIS, after a reinsurance phase, in which EDIS would only
provide liquidity coverage to national DGS.
The Group of 20 (i.e. G20) is a group formed in 1999 of finance
ministers and central bank governors from 19 of the world's
largest economies, along with the European Union. The G20 has
the mandate to promote global economic growth, international
trade, and regulation of financial markets.
‘Going concern’ is an accounting term for a bank that is assumed
it will meet its financial obligations when they fall due.
‘Gone concern’ is an accounting term for a bank that has already
failed to meet its financial obligations or is expected to do so in
the near future.
Ex post
contributions to DGS
F4F Platform
FOLF
Franchise value
FSB
Fully-fledged EDIS
G20
Going concern
Gone concern
VI
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0008.png
G-SIIs
Hierarchy of claims (or creditor
hierarchy in insolvency)
Global systemically important institutions
The order according to which creditors must be repaid in the
context of the insolvency proceedings (in accordance with
national insolvency laws). While some elements of the creditor
hierarchy have been harmonised at EU level, this order is largely
determined by national law.
High Level Working Group
The High Level Working Group (HLWG) on EDIS is an inter-
governmental forum mandated by the Eurogroup in 2018 to
discuss the progress on EDIS and which later broadened its scope
of analysis beyond EDIS (the CMDI review, market integration
and the regulatory treatment of sovereign exposures and financial
stability). Representation in this group is at the level of Directors
in Finance ministries. In 2020, the HLWG was mandated to
develop a time-bound and concrete work plan on reaching the
steady stated in the Banking Union.
HLWG
Home and host resolution authorities
These are the resolution authorities in charge of group level or
subsidiary level entities.
Home Member State
Member State hosting the group/parent level of a cross-border
banking group.
The term is generally used to describe the relationship between
Member States from the point of view of the cross-border
coordination and collaboration regarding policies affecting
parent level entities and subsidiaries.
Member State hosting subsidiaries of banking groups established
in another Member State.
The so-called hybrid EDIS model refers to a concept of EDIS
where a new central fund and funds remaining within the national
DGSs coexist. A central fund and possible mandatory lending
among DGSs would provide liquidity support to DGSs to cover
the shortfall on a given intervention. The design of hybrid EDIS is
evolutionary and could in a second phase gradually evolve
towards a loss-sharing phase.
Institutional protection scheme
IPSs are defined in the Capital Requirements Regulation
(Article
113(7))
as a contractual or statutory liability
arrangement, which protects its member institutions and in
particular ensures that they have liquidity and solvency needed to
avoid bankruptcy where necessary. IPSs referred to in this
document are to be understood as IPSs recognised as DGS.
Joint Research Centre
Least cost test
The least cost test assesses whether a DGS may intervene through
other actions than payout of depositors (e.g. in resolution or
through the use of alternative measures). The DGS may only
intervene in resolution if the cost of such intervention does not
exceed the net amount of compensating covered depositors of the
failing member institution. There are no detailed rules on the least
cost test and Member States apply it differently.
A situation where a failing bank for which there is no public
interest in using resolution, can also not be placed in insolvency
because the requirements for the latter are not met.
Home-host
Host Member State
Hybrid EDIS
IPS
JRC
LCT
Limbo situation
VII
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0009.png
m
Market-conform measures
million
These are measures carried out by a public body at normal
market conditions, therefore are not considered to constitute State
aid.
Markets in Financial Instruments Directive
Management information systems
Money laundering or terrorist financing
Minimum requirement for own funds and eligible liabilities
MREL is the minimum amount of equity and debt that a bank is
required to meet so as to be able to absorb losses and restore its
capital position, allowing them to continuously perform their
critical functions during and after a crisis. MREL is one of the key
tools in enhancing bank’s resolvability.
National Competent Authority
NCA means a public authority or body officially recognised by
national law, which is empowered by national law to supervise
institutions as part of the supervisory system in operation in the
Member State concerned.
No creditor worse off
A general principle governing resolution, it provides that
creditors cannot receive a worse treatment in resolution than the
treatment they would have received had the bank been wound up
under insolvency proceedings instead of being resolved.
Eligible deposits, in the amount exceeding the coverage level
provided by the DGS, that are not preferred in the creditor
hierarchy in insolvency at EU level pursuant to Article 108(1)
BRRD. These generally refer to the part of the deposits of large
enterprises whose repayment is not guaranteed by the DGS, and
which currently rank below preferred non-covered deposits.
National resolution authority
Official Journal of the EU
Options and national discretions
EU legislation tries to accommodate for national specificities
through options and national discretions. These are provisions
that Member States may choose to implement/apply if they deem it
appropriate to reflect their respective national circumstances.
MiFID II
MIS
ML/TF
MREL
NCA
NCWO
Non-preferred, non-covered deposits
NRA
OJ
OND
Open bank bail-in resolution strategy
The application of the bail-in resolution tool, in combination with
the restructuring of the failing bank, in a way that allows that
bank to meet the conditions for its authorisation and to continue
carrying out its activities without requiring its exit from the
market.
Ordinary unsecured claims
Claims that, in the creditor hierarchy in insolvency, are neither
secured, preferred nor subordinated. Also referred to as ‘senior
claims’.
Other Systemically Important Institutions
O-SIIs are institutions that, due to their systemic importance, are
more likely to create risks to financial stability.
O-SII
VIII
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0010.png
Pari passu
When claims hold the same ranking in the hierarchy of claims
according to the applicable insolvency law.
Repayment by the DGS of the covered deposits with a bank, once
they have been determined unavailable.
The key task of the DGS is to protect depositors against the
consequences of the insolvency of a credit institution. This
protection implies a direct reimbursement of depositors and is
called pay-box function.
Public interest assessment
Resolution authorities perform the public interest assessment to
examine whether the resolution of a particular bank that is failing
or likely to fail would be necessary to maintain financial stability,
to protect covered depositors and/or safeguard public funds by
minimising reliance on public financial support. If the PIA is
negative, no resolution actions would be taken and national
insolvency proceedings would apply.
Capital or liquidity support provided to solvent banks through the
use of public funds that may be exceptionally allowed by the
BRRD without triggering the declaration that the bank is failing
or likely to fail.
Eligible deposits, in the amount exceeding the coverage level
provided by the DGS, and that are preferred in the creditor
hierarchy in insolvency at EU level pursuant to Article 108(1)
BRRD. These generally refer to the part of the deposits of natural
persons and micro, small and medium-sized enterprises whose
repayment is not guaranteed by the DGS.
In integrated banking groups, resources such as liquidity, capital
and internal MREL are pre-positioned by the parent entity on the
balance sheet of subsidiaries, i.e. provided or subscribed by the
parent, to comply with such requirements on an individual level as
required by legislation. Pre-positioning is not required where
waivers are granted by competent or resolution authorities.
Option in Article 11(3) DGSD that allows the use of DGS funds to
prevent the failure of a bank, subject to certain safeguards.
See creditor hierarchy in insolvency
National authorities set up in each Member States, in compliance
with the BRRD and the Single Resolution Board created by the
SRMR in the Banking Union, with the objective to plan, prepare
and execute the orderly resolution of banks in case of failure.
References to the resolution framework in the impact assessment
relate to the harmonised EU rules in the BRRD/SRMR.
Application of resolution tools and powers to a failing bank with
the aim of ensuring the continuity of its critical functions while at
the same time minimising the impact of the failure on the financial
system and the real economy. It can lead to the restructuring of
the failing bank or the transfer of its activity to a third party and
subsequent exit from the market.
Resolution Fund/Single Resolution Fund
Arrangements funded by the industry through contributions paid
before or following the resolution of a bank (so-called ex ante and
Payout
Pay-box function (of the DGS)
PIA
Precautionary measures
Preferred, non-covered deposits
Pre-positioned resources
Preventive measures
Ranking of liabilities
Resolution authorities
Resolution framework
Resolution of a bank
RF/SRF
IX
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0011.png
ex post contributions) to provide financial support to the
resolution of a bank in case its internal loss absorption capacity is
not sufficient. The SRF is the resolution fund for the banks in the
Banking Union and is financed by all banks in the Banking Union.
For non-Banking Union Members States, the national resolution
fund that has been established in each Member State is financed
by the domestic industry/banks.
Risk reduction package
Safety nets
See banking package
Industry funded safety nets, such as the national resolution funds
outside the Banking Union, the Single Resolution Fund in the
Banking Union and the national DGS funds, created to underpin
the crisis management and deposit insurance framework to avoid
or minimise the usage of taxpayer money.
Possible option to further harmonise the ranking of deposits in the
hierarchy of claims entailing removing the super-preference of
covered depositors and the DGS, preferring all deposits (general
depositor preference) meaning that all deposits as well as the
DGS would rank above ordinary senior unsecured claims and all
deposits rank at the same level amongst themselves (single-tier
approach).
The Single Rulebook is the backbone of the Banking Union and of
the financial sector regulation in the EU in general. It consists of
legal acts that all financial institutions in the EU must comply
with. The Single Rulebook lays down a single set of harmonised
prudential rules (among other things) governing the capital
requirements for banks, ensuring better protection for depositors
and regulating the prevention and management of bank failures.
Micro, small and medium-sized enterprises
Senior non-preferred debt
Senior non-preferred debt is a type of subordinated instrument
issued by banks which ranks junior to ordinary unsecured debt
and senior to classical subordinated debt in the hierarchy of
claims. Created as part of the 2019 Banking Package to assist
banks in raising MREL-subordinated eligible liabilities.
Single point of entry resolution strategy
Resolution strategy whereby resolution tools are applied to one
resolution entity in a resolution group, while other non-resolution
entities upstream their losses to the parent entity and are not
being placed in resolution themselves.
Single resolution fund
See RF/SRF
Single resolution mechanism Regulation
Single supervisory mechanism Regulation
In the creditor hierarchy in insolvency, the higher priority ranking
of the claims of covered deposits, and of the DGS subrogating to
the claims of covered deposits in insolvency following a payout,
than the ranking of preferred, non-covered deposits and non-
preferred, non-covered deposits. The claims of covered deposits
and of DGS must be repaid before the claims of all other deposits.
Treaty on the Functioning of the European Union
Single-tier depositor preference
Single Rulebook
SME
SNP
SPE
SRF
SRMR
SSMR
Super preference of DGS
TFEU
X
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0012.png
THB
Tier 2
Temporary high balances
Layer of a bank's capital composed of items such as revaluation
reserves, hybrid instruments and subordinated term debt.
Total Loss-Absorbing Capacity
International standard published by the FSB to ensure that G-SIIs
have sufficient internal capacity to absorb their losses and
contribute to their recapitalisation in the event of resolution in a
way that ensures they can continue performing their critical
functions without endangering public funds or financial stability.
It was implemented in the EU for the EU G-SIIs through the
Banking package.
Total liabilities, including own funds
Financial institutions, which, due to their size, complexity and
interconnectedness, would cause serious harm to the financial
system and to the real economy in case of failure. During the
global financial crisis, the bail-out of several banks was needed to
prevent their disorderly insolvency and contagion risks. As a
consequence, financial reforms to increase the resilience of the
financial system were promoted at the international and EU level,
with the creation of the resolution framework being a key
outcome.
trillion
Resolution action entailing the transfer of the activity and the
critical functions of the failing bank to a private purchaser or to a
bridge institution controlled by the resolution authority, ultimately
leading to its exit from the market. The transfer of the shares of
the failing bank is also possible.
Total risk exposure amount
Calculated in accordance with Article 92(3) CRR.
Current situation in the hierarchy of claims, where covered
deposits are super-preferred and rank above preferred deposits
(natural persons and SMEs above EUR 100 000) which in turn
rank above other (non-preferred) deposits. According to
applicable national laws in some Member States, these non-
preferred deposits rank pari passu (i.e. at the same level) with
ordinary unsecured claims. In other Member States, these non-
preferred deposits rank above ordinary unsecured claims. See
Annex 8, section 2.
Possible option to further harmonise the ranking of deposits in the
hierarchy of claims, where all deposits rank above ordinary
senior unsecured claims (general depositor preference) and in
terms of deposits ranking relative to each other, some deposits
would rank above others (e.g. covered deposits/DGS could rank
above non-covered deposits or covered deposits/DGS and
preferred deposits could rank above non-covered non-preferred
deposits)
TLAC
TLOF
Too big to fail
tr
Transfer resolution strategies
TREA
Three-tier depositor preference
Two-tier depositor preference
XI
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0013.png
1. I
NTRODUCTION
: P
OLITICAL AND LEGAL CONTEXT
In the aftermath of the global financial and sovereign crises, the EU took multiple
decisive actions, in line with international calls for reform
1
, to create a safer financial
sector for the EU single market and provide the tools and powers to handle the failure of
any bank in an orderly manner, while preserving financial stability, public finances and
depositor protection. The Banking Union was created in 2014 based on a blueprint laid
out in 2012
2
, relying on a Single rulebook
3
for the EU: a Single Supervisory Mechanism
(SSM) and a Single Resolution Mechanism (SRM) equipped with a Single Resolution
Fund (SRF) (Error!
Reference source not found.).
In November 2020, the Eurogroup
agreed on the creation and early introduction of a common backstop to the SRF by the
European Stability Mechanism (ESM)
4
. However, the Banking Union is still incomplete
5
and misses its third pillar: a European Deposit Insurance Scheme (EDIS). The
Commission proposal
adopted on 24 November 2015
to establish EDIS is still pending.
Figure 1: State of play of the implementation of the Banking Union
Notes: Green = implemented, blue = pending. Implementation of the common backstop 2022-24.
Source: European Commission,
Banking Union infographic.
The EU bank crisis management and deposit insurance (CMDI) framework consists of
three EU legislative texts adopted in 2014 acting together with relevant national
legislation: the
Bank Recovery and Resolution Directive (BRRD),
the
Single Resolution
G20 (September 2009),
Leaders’ Statement.
European Commission (12 September 2012),
Communication from the Commission to the European
Parliament and Council: A Roadmap towards a Banking Union.
All non-euro area Member States can opt
to participate the Banking Union before joining the euro area.
3
The most relevant legal acts of the Single rulebook are: the Capital Requirements Regulation (CRR –
Regulation (EU) 575/2013), the Capital Requirements Directive (CRD – Directive 2013/36/EU), the Bank
Recovery and Resolution Directive (BRRD – Directive 2014/59/EU), the Single Resolution Mechanism
Regulation (SRMRM – Regulation (EU) 806/2014) and the Deposit Guarantee Schemes Directive (DGSD
– Directive 2014/49/EU). The winding up Directive (Directive 2001/24/EC) is also relevant to the
framework.
4
Eurogroup (30 November 2020),
Eurogroup conclusions and statement.
The implementation will take
place over 2022-2024.
5
Furthermore, there is still no agreement on a credible and robust mechanism for providing liquidity in
resolution in the Banking Union, in line with the standard set by international peers.
1
2
12
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0014.png
Mechanism Regulation (SRMR)
and the
Deposit Guarantee Schemes Directive (DGSD)).
The 2019 Banking package (so-called “risk reduction package”) included measures
delivering on Europe's commitments made in international fora
6
to take further steps
towards completing the Banking Union by providing credible risk reduction measures to
mitigate threats to financial stability, as published in the European Commission’s 2015
Communication
7
.
The objectives of the CMDI framework
The CMDI framework was designed to avert and manage the failure of credit institutions
of any size, while protecting financial stability, depositors (households and businesses)
and aiming to avoid the risk of excessive use of taxpayer money (see Annex 4 for a
description of the fundamental elements of the CMDI framework).
The CMDI framework provides for a set of instruments that can be applied in the
different stages of the lifecycle of banks in distress: early intervention measures,
measures to prevent the failure of a bank, a resolution toolbox when the bank is declared
failing or likely to fail (FOLF) and it is deemed that the resolution of the bank (rather
than its liquidation) is in the public interest in order to avoid financial instability.
Conversely, national insolvency proceedings, which are outside of the CMDI
8
framework, continue to apply for those failing banks, where insolvency proceedings are
deemed more suitable than resolution without harming public interest or endangering
financial stability.
The CMDI framework is intended to provide a combination of funding sources to
manage failures in an economically efficient manner, protecting financial stability and
depositors, maintaining market discipline, while reducing recourse to the public budget
and ultimately the cost to the taxpayers. The cost of resolving the bank is first covered
through the bank’s own resources, i.e. losses are allocated to the shareholders and
creditors of the bank (constituting the bank’s internal loss absorbing capacity), which
also reduces moral hazard and enhances market discipline. If needed, these resources can
be complemented by funds from deposit guarantee schemes (DGS) and resolution
financing arrangements funded by the industry (national resolution funds (RF) or a
Single Resolution Fund (SRF) in the Banking Union). These funds are built through
contributions by all banks irrespective of their size and business model. In the Banking
Union, these rules were further integrated by entrusting the Single Resolution Board
(SRB) with the management and oversight of the SRF, which is funded by contributions
from the industry in the participating Member States of the Banking Union. Depending
on the tool applied to a bank in distress (e.g. preventive, precautionary, resolution or
6
The Basel Committee on Banking Supervision and the Financial Stability Board (FSB). Financial
Stability Board (2014 updated version),
Key Attributes of effective resolution regimes for financial
institutions.
7
European Commission communication (November 2015),
Towards the completion of the Banking Union.
8
National insolvency proceedings are unharmonized and are outside of the CMDI framework. However,
the decision by the resolution authority whether to place a failing bank in resolution or in national
insolvency proceedings is part of the CMDI framework (discretionary assessment by the resolution
authority of the public interest assessment). If the resolution authority decides to place a failing bank in
insolvency, the latter will be treated at national level, where the assessment of initiation of insolvency
proceedings takes place, according to specificities of national insolvency regimes.
13
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0015.png
alternative measures under national insolvency proceedings) and the specificities of the
case, State aid
9
control may be necessary for interventions by a RF, a DGS or public
funding from the State budget.
The CMDI framework also fosters depositor confidence by requiring that deposits are
protected up to EUR 100 000 per depositor and per bank, regardless of whether the bank
is put into resolution or liquidation under national insolvency proceedings. In insolvency
under national proceedings
10
, the primary function of a DGS is to payout covered
depositors within seven days of a determination of unavailability of their deposits. Under
the DGSD, DGSs may also have other functions. The latter are aimed at preserving
depositor confidence, provided they are less costly than a payout of covered deposits in
insolvency, such as: financing preventive measures, contributing financially to the
resolution of a bank or, in insolvency, financing measures other than payout, i.e. a
transfer of assets and liabilities to a buyer, to preserve the access to covered deposits.
A resolution framework to overcome the shortcomings of insolvency proceedings
National insolvency proceedings are not always suited to handle bank failures because
banks cannot be liquidated like any other corporate business due to their unique
vulnerability to deposit/bank runs, their impact on financial stability and their role in the
functioning of the economy through financial intermediation (deposit-taking, provision
of credit), monetary policy transmission and their role in the payment system. In view of
these elements, any bank failure as opposed to ordinary corporate failures (see references
in Box 6 in Annex 4) is more likely to give rise to public policy concerns, which would
often lead to bail-out actions to limit the fallout of piecemeal liquidation. Resolution
offers an alternative to disorderly insolvency, where there is a public interest in resolving
a bank, instead of using existing insolvency proceedings. The introduction of the
resolution framework, in line with the international key attributes for effective resolution
regimes published by the Financial Stability Board in the aftermath of the global
financial crisis
11
, aimed to fill an important gap in the management of banking crises,
reducing risks for financial stability, depositors and taxpayers.
The resolution framework brings a number of very important benefits. Contrary to
liquidation under normal insolvency proceedings, resolution increases the efficiency in
handling bank failures in terms of costs, by preserving the franchise value of bank’s
assets and the client relationship through restructuring/ sale of business to a buyer and
avoiding cutting access of the bank’s customers to their client accounts and loans (i.e.
individuals/households, small and medium enterprises (SMEs), corporates, public
institutions, other financial institutions which may include other banks, insurance
companies, other industry players). This way, it avoids any public perception of
9
State aid rules are intrinsically interconnected with and complementary to the CMDI framework. These
rules are not subject to this review and this impact assessment. In order to ensure consistency between the
two frameworks, the
Eurogroup invited the Commission in November 2020
to conduct a review of the State
aid framework for banks, and to complete it in parallel with the CMDI framework review, ensuring its
entry into force at the same time with the updated CMDI framework.
10
Insolvency proceedings across the EU are unharmonised; some allow for certain transfer tools similar to
resolution financed by DGSs, others only allow for piecemeal liquidation proceedings.
11
Financial Stability Board (October 2011, updated in 2014),
Key attributes for effective resolution
regimes for financial institutions.
The key attributes represent the foundation on which jurisdictions around
the world built their resolution regimes following the global financial crisis.
14
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
discontinuity in the operations of the bank, thereby stemming the propagation of adverse
effects on broader confidence and financial stability. Resolution also better redistributes
costs by shifting away losses from taxpayers to the failing bank’s shareholders and
creditors and the industry overall, where industry-funded safety nets are used. It also
fosters consumer confidence in the banking sector by significantly reducing the risk of
spiralling contagion to other banks and mitigating the risks that bank clients may start
questioning the solidity of the system and its safety nets as it could happen under
insolvency proceedings.
Another merit of the resolution framework is providing predictability and level playing
field when handling failing banks and enhancing preparedness (recovery and resolution
planning) for crisis times, including by imposing requirements on banks to absorb
possible losses internally or via the safety nets. Lastly, resolution may lower the impact
of a bank’s failure on DGS financial means in a liquidation under normal insolvency
proceedings, which requires the DGS to payout all covered deposits (up to EUR 100 000)
and bears a high risk of depleting the national DGS funds. Notwithstanding its overall
benefit, another downside of the payout of covered deposits is that it can be disruptive to
depositor confidence because of its impact on uncovered deposits (leaving uncovered
deposits above EUR 100 000 to take losses). All these benefits of resolution strengthen
financial stability, preserve value, reduce moral hazard and the risk of inflicting the cost
of failure on citizens.
A resolution framework applicable to any bank
In terms of scope of application, the determination of the resolution or liquidation
strategy is not automatically driven by bank size or structure of banking sectors but,
instead, is made by the resolution authority on the basis of the public interest assessment
on a case-by-case basis. From its inception in 2014 and rooted in the international
experience of dealing with bank crises over decades, the resolution framework was
created with the intention to cater for the orderly management of any bank failure,
irrespective of its geographical footprint (i.e. domestic or operating across borders), its
size or business model, when this best serves the objectives. Of course, resolution is
widely expected by all stakeholders to be the only credible option to manage the failure
of large systemic banks, because it provides a clear set of tools and adequate funding (in
the form of high buffers of own funds and eligible liabilities to absorb losses through
bail-in, and commensurate access to resolution funds) to avoid further contagion to the
real economy or financial markets.
However, as recital 29 of the existing BRRD points out, it is crucial, in order to maintain
financial stability, that resolution authorities have the possibility to resolve any bank due
to their critical functions or potential systemic nature. While the idiosyncratic failures of
large banks tend to be more disruptive to the financial system than failures of small
banks, this is justified by the risks to financial stability (especially in the case of
concomitant failures of several small/mid-sized banks during times of crisis), the
destruction of economic value locally/regionally or the disruption of depositors
confidence in particular for small jurisdictions (see Box 6 in Annex 4 for references
regarding the impact of failing small/mid-sized banks on financial stability). For similar
15
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0017.png
reasons, all banks contributing to the safety nets should be able to benefit from them, if
the conditionality to access these safety nets is fulfilled.
In practice, except for the 120 banks under direct SRB remit
12
, national authorities
remain responsible for the application of the resolution framework and the discretionary
choice between using a resolution or a liquidation strategy to manage a failing bank. The
public interest assessment takes into account considerations that go beyond the size of
the bank, such as its functions that are critical for the broader economy (e.g. deposit
taking, lending, payments) and their substitutability, interconnectedness to other actors in
the financial system, risk profile, nature of activity, which are important when assessing
the impact of a bank failure on financial stability. For these reasons, it is necessary to
ensure a coherent application of the framework, which has not been the case until now.
Insolvency proceedings remain available for those banks, where no contagion risks or
other significant risks to financial stability exist and where there are no critical functions,
provided that the authorities assess that these banks are not in the public interest.
The test of time and the need for a reform
Notwithstanding the progress achieved since 2014, the application of resolution has been
scarce, especially in the Banking Union and areas for further strengthening and
adjustment were identified with regard to the CMDI framework in terms of design,
implementation and most importantly, incentives for its application. These issues concern
in particular the category of small and medium-sized banks that are often “too big to
liquidate” under normal insolvency regimes.
To date, and as shown in Chapter 2, Annex 5 (evaluation) and evidenced in Annex 9,
most failing small and mid-sized banks were managed under national regimes often
involving the use of taxpayer money (bailouts) instead of the required bank’s internal
resources (bail-in)
13
. This goes against the intention of the framework as set up after the
global financial crisis, which involved a major paradigm shift from bail-out to bail-in
(required amount of burden sharing) and industry-funded safety nets, such as the SRF in
the Banking Union, so far unused in resolution. In this context, the opportunity cost of
the resolution funds financed by all banks is considerable.
The resolution framework underperformed with respect to key overarching objectives,
notably facilitating the functioning of the EU single market in banking by ensuring level
playing field, handling cross-border and domestic crises and minimising recourse to
taxpayer money.
The reasons are mainly due to misaligned incentives in choosing the right tool to manage
failing banks, leading to the non-application of the harmonised resolution framework, in
favour of other avenues. This is overall due to the broad discretion in the public interest
assessment, difficulties in accessing funding in resolution without imposing losses on
12
As of 1 January 2021, the SRB was directly responsible for 120 banks (significant banks and cross
border less significant banks) in the Banking Union. National resolution authorities in the Banking Union
deal with about 2.200 less significant institutions (SRB,
Annual Report 2021).
In total, there were
approximately 4.600 banks in the European Union in 2020 (European Banking Federation,
Facts and
Figures 2021).
13
Burden sharing by shareholders and subordinate debt holders was implemented under State aid rules, but
not corresponding to the 8% total liabilities and own funds required by the BRRD/SRMR.
16
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0018.png
depositors and easier access to funding outside of resolution, raising risks of
fragmentation and suboptimal outcomes in managing banks’ failures, in particular of
those smaller and mid-sized banks that are often too big to liquidate under normal
insolvency regimes.
The review of the CMDI framework (BRRD/SRMR/DGSD) and the interaction with
national insolvency proceedings should provide solutions to address these issues and
enable the framework to fully achieve its objectives
14
and be fit for its purpose for all
banks in the EU irrespective of their size, business model and liability structure, if
required by prevailing circumstances. The revision should aim at ensuring a coherent
application of the rules across Member States, delivering level playing field, while
protecting financial stability and depositors, containing contagion and reducing recourse
to taxpayer money. In particular, the CMDI framework could be improved to facilitate
the resolution of small and medium-sized banks as initially expected, by mitigating the
impacts on financial stability and the real economy without recourse to public funding,
but also fostering confidence of their depositors that consist primarily of households and
SMEs
15
.
The objectives of the reform would bring the EU framework closer to the frameworks of
international peers, especially the United States (US). The extensive experience and
excellent track record of the US Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation, spanning over
many decades, where failing smaller and mid-sized banks are routinely transferred to a
buyer with the support of a common fund financed by the contributions of the industry,
can reveal how some features of the CMDI framework could be improved (see Annex 8,
section 11)
16
.
The CMDI reform and the broader implications for the Banking Union
Together with the CMDI reform, a complete Banking Union, including its third pillar,
EDIS, would offer a higher level of financial protection to Europe’s households and
businesses, foster trust and strengthen financial stability as necessary conditions for
growth, prosperity and resilience in the Economic and Monetary Union and, more
generally, in Europe. The Capital Markets Union complements the Banking Union as
both initiatives would help finance the twin transition (digital and green), enhance the
international role of the euro and strengthen Europe’s open strategic autonomy in a
changing world, particularly considering the current challenging economic and
geopolitical environment.
14
15
See Chapter
Error! Reference source not found.
on the objectives.
As such, the reform envisaged does not have a direct impact on households and businesses such as SMEs
e.g. on the credit supply and lending behaviour of banks. However, to the extent that the reform would
improve the crisis management for smaller and medium-sized banks with a view to strengthen depositor
protection, depositors such as households and SMEs could indirectly benefit from a more efficient bank
crisis framework that would limit the impact of a bank failure on financial stability and the real economy.
See also section 8 of Annex 8.
16
Between 2000 and 2020, the FDIC intervened through transfer tools, with deposit insurance fund
support, to preserve access to deposits in failed banks in 95% of cases and paid out covered deposits in
piecemeal liquidation in only 5% of cases. The FDIC estimates that, between 2008 and 2013, the use of
transfer tools saved USD 42 bn, or 43%, compared with the estimated cost of using payout of covered
deposits in insolvency.
17
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0019.png
On the one hand, European banks have proven robust so far, including in terms of capital
adequacy and liquidity buffers. Moreover, the reforms undertaken to implement the first
pillars of the Banking Union in the aftermath of the 2008 global financial crisis have
helped in strengthening the position of European banks. Any fallout was managed with
the available toolkit (either provided by the CMDI framework such as moratoria,
resolution tools, or tools under national insolvency frameworks) even when the
circumstances of the failure were particularly unusual
17
.
On the other hand, the profitability and cost-efficiency of European banks is arguably
structurally weak and asset quality concerns may resurface amid increased credit risk
fuelled by the deterioration in the macroeconomic outlook and the energy crisis triggered
by geopolitical tensions.
Therefore, more adverse conditions are possible in the future, making the need to proceed
with the current reform of the CMDI framework, improve its use and to step-up the
efforts for the completion of the Banking Union more pressing and compelling. Under
the status quo, a large proportion of failing banks would continue to be restructured or
liquidated outside the harmonised resolution framework, under existing heterogeneous
national regimes, where in some cases only disorderly and costly insolvency proceedings
or solutions involving taxpayer money exist. This would weaken consumer confidence in
the EU banking sector and the predictability and level playing field of our single market
for banking, and of the Banking Union in particular.
In June 2022, the Eurogroup was not able to reach a political agreement on a
comprehensive work plan to complete the Banking Union
18
. Instead, the Eurogroup
invited the Commission to table legislative proposals for reforming the EU framework
for bank crisis management and national deposit insurance. This was one of four
workstreams discussed in the context of the Banking Union completion workplan (in
addition to EDIS, the regulatory treatment of exposures to sovereigns and enhanced
cross-border market integration). The other workstreams have been put on hold until the
next institutional cycle.
In parallel, the European Parliament also stressed in its 2021 annual report on the
Banking Union, the importance of completing it with the establishment of an EDIS and
supported the Commission in putting forward a legislative proposal on the CMDI review.
This impact assessment covers the analysis of policy measures for the review of the
CMDI framework. While EDIS was not explicitly endorsed by the Eurogroup, it would
have made the CMDI reform more robust and delivered synergies and efficiency gains
for the industry. Some of these elements are included in this impact assessment for
technical completeness and illustration of the internal consistency among the elements of
a robust framework, also reflecting technical discussions which took place on EDIS in
the past years in expert groups, Council working parties and inter-governmental fora.
Such a legislative package would be part of the agenda for the completion of the Banking
Union, as emphasised in President von der Leyen’s
Political Guidelines,
which also
included the implementation of EDIS.
17
18
See information on the Sberbank case in Annex 9, section 5.
Eurogroup (16 June 2022),
Eurogroup statement on the future of the Banking Union.
18
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
This impact assessment report reflects analyses based on information and data up until 31
January 2023 and does not include references to subsequent developments.
2.
P
ROBLEM DEFINITION
This section outlines the problems identified in the evaluation of the current framework.
It explains how the problems have been identified, what their drivers are, and why action
is necessary. More details are available in the evaluation in Annex 5, including an
assessment of the CMDI functioning against various criteria.
The most relevant evidence underpinning the analysis of problems and their drivers in
this chapter includes, among others: analysis of past cases of bank failures, quantitative
analysis illustrating banks’ difficulty to access safety net funding, the divergent
approaches to the public interest assessment, the issues with the creditor hierarchy,
divergences between failing or likely to fail and insolvency triggers or the shortcomings
regarding early intervention measures. These are complemented by references to external
analyses pointing to the lack of clarity regarding the least cost test for DGS uses and the
inability of DGS funds to intervene in resolution (EBA opinions), other assessments of
business model specificity of small and mid-sized banks (ECB) and DGS funds
robustness (Joint Research Centre). This evidence is referenced throughout the impact
assessment and in the relevant annexes. A complementary, more exhaustive summary of
the evidence used in the impact assessment is also provided in Annex 1, sections 3 and 4.
Main considerations related to the limited use of resolution and why it is a problem
The evaluation of the current rules shows that the introduction of the CMDI framework
in 2014 brought important benefits in terms of maintaining financial stability,
significantly improving depositor protection and contributing to boosting consumer
confidence in the EU banking sector (illustrated by a reduction in bank runs and an
overall increase in depositing money in banks). However, its practical application failed
to achieve some important objectives or achieved them only partially, namely,
simultaneously, protecting taxpayer money and depositors, while ensuring level playing
field and a fair treatment of creditors across the EU single market (see Annex 5).
In particular, recent experiences show that the resolution framework is not entirely fit to
handle the failure of small and medium-sized banks, whose business model,
predominantly funded with deposits, may affect authorities’ incentives to use the
resolution framework as initially intended. This problem is particularly relevant when
external funding (e.g. RF/SRF) is necessary to support the failure of the bank, for
instance to facilitate a sale to a buyer, and when this access to funding is not possible
within the resolution framework without imposing losses on deposits. Managing these
bank failures outside resolution is not a problem per se. However, the concern is that
these choices were driven by the difficulty to access appropriate funding in resolution
(despite its availability), while on the contrary, other avenues entailed a recourse to
public funding to avoid disorderly failure.
The evidence in this chapter as well as in Annex 5 (evaluation) and Annex 9 (list of past
cases) shows that, most failing small and mid-sized banks were managed under national
regimes (preventive and alternative measures in insolvency) often involving the use of
19
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
taxpayer money (bailouts, sometimes by local public authorities), instead of the industry-
funded safety nets, such as the SRF in the Banking Union, which will amount to
approximately EUR 80 billion by 2024. In total, more than EUR 58 bn were provided by
national or regional governments to bail-out banks (as shown in Chapter 2, section 2.2)
since 2015, when the resolution framework started to apply. More than 60% of banks in
distress in the EU were managed outside of the resolution framework. For banks within
the Banking Union, this number exceeds 70%. When considering only cases from 2016
onwards, when the bail-in tool started to apply, the proportion of measures other than
resolution rises to 75% of the cases for the EU and to 84% for the Banking Union
(Chapter 2, section 2.1).
The scarce application of resolution, and the preference by resolution authorities to look
for alternative avenues often with the support of public money, are mainly due to the
misalignment of incentives to choose the appropriate tool to address a bank failure.
Major concerns have been raised about imposing losses on depositors, such as
households and owners of small businesses in a region and the impact this would have on
financial stability, depositor protection, thereby creating incentives to find alternative
solutions (see Box 1 below, Annex 8, section 1 and Annex 4, Box 6). The prevalence of
deposits in the liability structure of these banks increases the likelihood of imposing
losses on depositors to comply with the conditions to access RF/SRF when the resolution
avenue is chosen. Many stakeholders (Member States, citizens/depositors) consider that
imposing losses on depositors, beyond the protection of EUR 100 000 granted by the
DGS, would have financial stability implications which may fuel concerns on the
protection of deposits in the system as a whole. It may lead to bank runs and increase the
risk of contagion to other institutions. Resolution authorities have therefore been
reluctant to use measures, such as the bail-in tool in resolution that aims to absorb losses
through the bank’s shareholders and creditors, when it would lead to imposing losses on
depositors (such as households and SMEs). This may particularly be the case for small
and mid-sized banks that are anchored in the local/regional economy and where the bail-
in of depositors could inflict substantial damage to the (local) real economy. Faced with a
trade-off between preserving financial stability and limiting the impact on the real
economy on one hand, and using taxpayer money on the other hand, authorities
(European, national or regional) may therefore have delayed the start of the crisis
management procedures in search of alternatives causing the financial situation of the
bank in distress to further deteriorate. The choice of such alternatives often resulted in
preferring certain objectives (protecting financial stability and depositor protection) over
others (avoiding the use of public funds and level playing field and fair treatment of
depositors and taxpayers in the single market). This shows that, for certain small and
mid-sized banks, the CMDI framework cannot simultaneously fulfil all the four
objectives agreed by co-legislators in the framework at its inception in 2014, and which
are in line with the international consensus on the attributes of effective resolution
regimes. Resolution authorities were faced with choosing which objectives to protect –
financial stability and depositors over public budgets and level playing field, leading to a
sub-optimal performance of the framework and risks to its credibility. Therefore, the
CMDI framework needs to be amended to avoid such trade-offs in the future and
20
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0022.png
facilitate the simultaneous achievement of the objectives of protecting financial stability,
depositors as well as taxpayer money and level playing field for all banks.
Box 1: Why resolution has not been applied in some cases
This stylised example shows how the business model of a bank can impact its ability to
meet the minimum conditions to access the resolution fund, in cases where external
funding is needed to support the execution of the resolution strategy.
The higher prevalence of deposits in the balance sheet of small/medium-sized banks
amplifies the risk that the depositors would have to be bailed-in to fulfil the minimum
access conditions (in the form of a bail-in of at least 8% of the bank’s total liabilities and
own funds).
The possible impacts on financial stability and depositor confidence may incentivise the
search by the supervisory and resolution authorities for other avenues than resolution.
Importantly, the counterfactual of resolution would be the piecemeal liquidation and
payout of the covered deposits, which can be very costly for a DGS, while at the same
time not fully averting impacts on depositor confidence and the real economy because all
other uncovered deposits would be exposed to losses, until a possible (partial) recovery
under the prevailing insolvency proceeding.
Figure 2: Stylised example – bail-in of depositors
Source: Commission services
The evaluation shows that the misalignment of incentives when deciding which tools to
apply to a failing bank can be explained by several drivers ranging from the flexibility
and room for arbitrage that exist when choosing the right tools, the divergences in
conditions to access financing by the safety nets (DGS, RF/SRF) or benefit from public
support and the resulting vulnerabilities of the depositor protection in the EU.
21
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0023.png
These drivers directly affect the predictability of the framework, creating inefficiencies in
the management of bank failures. On this basis, the framework does not appear adequate
to handle the failure of certain institutions in respect of all the objectives, be it on an
idiosyncratic basis or under a systemic scenario with multiple bank failures, where these
problems would be exacerbated.
The problem tree
Figure 3 displays the problem tree, covering the three main high-level problems
identified as well as the problem drivers and their related consequences.
Figure 3: The problem tree
19
Source: Commission services
The
first problem
groups together all issues related to the current lack of legal certainty
and predictability in the application of the framework. Most importantly, the decision of
public authorities whether to resort to resolution or insolvency tools for failing banks
may differ considerably depending on the solutions available for a specific failing bank
in the national framework. The
second problem
focuses on unresolved funding issues
(sources, access conditions) and is central to the application of the framework
20
. The
19
The focus here is on the main problem drivers, but other relevant causes for the scarce application of the
CMDI framework are detailed in Annex 8 (e.g. inadequate early intervention framework and timeliness of
determining the bank as failing or likely to fail and diverging triggers for national insolvency proceedings).
20
The problems are presented following the lifecycle of events taking place in a bank in distress but such a
sequence is not indicative of the relative importance of each problem in relation to the others.
22
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0024.png
third problem
highlights the need to improve depositor protection, including the potential
lack of sufficient resources in case several banks in a Member State were to fail.
The persistence of these problems suggests that the CMDI framework in its current form
is unable to ensure adequate and proportionate solutions for all bank failure regardless of
the size and business model, while preserving overall consistency of outcomes and a
level playing-field, aligning incentives and limiting risks to financial stability, moral
hazard, and exposure of taxpayer funds. Also, the problems related to depositor
protection and handling of the failure outside the harmonised framework impair the
functioning of the single market and affect depositor confidence, which could lead to
bank runs and undermine financial stability.
2.1. Problem 1: Insufficient legal certainty and predictability in the
management of bank failures
The resolution framework introduced strategies, powers and tools to restructure failing
banks while protecting depositors, financial stability and taxpayers. However, so far
resolution has only been scarcely applied, in particular in the Banking Union under the
SRMR. Instead, other tools have been more frequently used such as insolvency
proceedings involving DGS funds, precautionary recapitalisation or measures to prevent
the failure and the exit of the bank from the market altogether. These measures often
involved the use of taxpayer money (bail-outs), instead of the bank’s internal resources
(bail-in) to the extent required by the resolution framework
21
and industry-funded safety
nets, such as the Single Resolution Fund (SRF) in the Banking Union (EUR 80 bn by
2024), so far unused. Since 2015, more than 60% of banks in distress in the EU were
managed outside of the resolution framework. For banks within the Banking Union, this
number increases to more than 70%. When considering only cases from 2016 onwards,
when the SRMR and the bail-in tool started to apply, the proportion of tools other than
resolution rises to 75% of the cases for the EU and to 84% for the Banking Union.
Error! Reference source not found.
depicts the tools applied in past cases of banks in
distress in the EU from 2015 to date. For a complete list of cases, please see Annex 9. It
is worth noting that a number of these cases dealt with “legacy issues” which occurred
since the start of the financial crisis in 2008 or before
22
.
21
Burden sharing by shareholders and subordinate debt holders was implemented under State aid rules, but
not corresponding to the 8% TLOF required by the BRRD/SRMR.
22
While legacy issues may have played a role in past cases and can be expected to have a lesser impact
going forward, this does not impair the validity of the considerations made in this chapter, nor puts into
question the need to reform the framework to ensure efficacy in managing potential future crises.
23
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0025.png
Figure 4: Variety of tools applied in bank crises cases from 2015 to date in the EU (as
a percentage of all cases and absolute number)
Notes: Banks that received different support measures throughout the time are counted for every tool
applied. Out of the 13 FOLF banks that went into resolution (positive public interest assessment), seven
were Banking Union cases (out of which four occurred before the entry into force of the minimum 8%
TLOF bail-in requirement and before the SRB became responsible for the handling of these cases). In ten
out of those 13 cases national resolution funds were used. Beyond these 13 cases, most other cases of
support measures encountered (18 out of 20 cases) were Banking Union cases.
Source: European Commission
Although certain aspects of the framework are still in a transitional period
23
and despite
the variety of tools to manage failing banks or to intervene before failure, its scarce
application can be linked to the conditions to activate such measures that vary
substantially across Member States, are subject to discretion and sometimes lack clarity
or leave room for arbitrage, increasing legal uncertainty, uneven protection of depositors,
ineffective and inefficient use of funds available.
In particular, a number of problem drivers emerge: (i) lack of clarity and adequate
framing of the application of DGSD preventive measures and BRRD precautionary
measures, (ii) broad legal discretion in the application of the public interest assessment to
place a bank in resolution (under the EU framework)
versus
insolvency (under national
rules) and (iii) divergence in the hierarchy of claims in national insolvency laws
24
.
The variety of tools allowed are preserving a margin of manoeuvre to account for legacy
situations
25
. This ensures that the framework remains flexible and proportionate to
address various types of bank failures. At the same time, the divergences mentioned
above create a risk of inconsistent solutions across Member States and reduce the
predictability of the framework. Moreover, the possibility to use public budgets (i.e.
taxpayers’ funds) outside resolution, which in principle should be avoided or strictly
limited to avoid risks of moral hazard, begs the question whether the framework could
better achieve its objectives. This would promote a more consistent approach to the
23
For example, the build-up of resolution buffers is expected to be completed on 1 January 2024 according
to the revised BRRD/SRMR.
24
Throughout this document, the terms ‘hierarchy of claims’, ‘creditor hierarchy in insolvency’ and
‘ranking of liabilities’ are used as synonyms and describe the same concept (see glossary).
25
In particular, certain banks had accumulated over the years a significant amount of non-performing
loans, largely as a legacy of the financial crisis.
24
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0026.png
management of bank failures, including in terms of increased level playing field at EU
level.
2.1.1. Lack of clarity and framing of the BRRD precautionary measures and the
DGSD preventive measures
The current set of DGSD rules provides for measures to support a bank before it faces
serious deterioration in its financial situation and the triggering of resolution or
insolvency, the so-called preventive measures.
Currently, Article 11(3) DGSD enables the use of DGS funds for preventive measures as
a national option and discretion (OND). Not all Member States have transposed it into
national law
26
.
These measures to prevent the failure of a bank are subject to conditions ensuring their
sufficient soundness from a financial perspective, and that the DGS resources are not
used excessively. The safeguards
27
should also ensure the correct interaction with the
FOLF determination. However, the current legislative text provides insufficient clarity on
such conditions and safeguards
28
. In past interventions, DGSs granted support to banks
which were rather close to a situation of failure implying an inefficient use of DGS funds
or a circumvention of resolution/liquidation. While the current rules do not prevent this,
there is scope to reflect on possible improvements in the legislative framework to
reinforce the role of these measures as preventive actions, which should, in principle,
intervene when a bank’s financial conditions deteriorate but still far from a failure.
Moreover, the DGS intervention could be qualified as either private or public for the
purpose of State aid control by the Commission. Such an assessment is made on a case-
by-case basis, taking into consideration elements such as the governance and decision-
making procedure of the DGS and circumstances relating to the measure. The
determination whether a DGS intervention constitutes State aid or not, has an impact on
the legal treatment of the DGS intervention, under the BRRD. In particular, the
qualification of the intervention as State aid would
de facto
impede the intervention of
the DGS in a preventive capacity, as this would trigger a determination of FOLF under
the BRRD, i.e. the bank would have to be resolved or put into insolvency. Evidence
shows that some preventive measures were assessed as being private (i.e. EUR 5.35 bn
funded by the private arm of a DGS fund or through market conform measures) and
therefore neither qualified as State aid (see section 3.2.13 of Annex 6 and Annex 9) nor
triggered FOLF under BRRD.
The BRRD further provides for a set of precautionary measures
29
(in the form of
recapitalisation or guarantees/liquidity) which can be granted to solvent banks to address
hypothetical financial issues identified in a stress test or equivalent exercise. BRRD
provides for strict conditions and safeguards to grant support in this form, to ensure that
26
27
See Annex 5 (evaluation), section 7.1.3.3, nine Member States transposed these provisions.
These include the requirement that the cost of the measure does not exceed that of fulfilling the mandate
of the DGS as well as a requirement that the DGS has appropriate procedures in place for selecting and
implementing the measures and to monitor affiliated risks.
28
See Annex 5 (evaluation), section 7.1.3.3.
29
Which are also mirrored in the SRMR.
25
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0027.png
the support does not benefit a bank that is too close to failure and to avoid (for
precautionary recapitalisation) that the support is used to cover losses that were already
incurred by the bank or are likely to be incurred.
Past practice in the application of these measures has provided the opportunity for the
Commission to identify issues which may require an interpretative effort and hence
would require legal clarification, particularly with respect to the concept of solvency, the
determination of the amount of support allowed (by virtue of distinguishing between
incurred, likely and unlikely losses) as well as to the additional clarity needed as to the
use of precautionary recapitalisation to support impaired asset measures (see section
7.1.3.3 in Annex 5 (evaluation) and section 9 in Annex 8 for more information on the
legal clarity issues identified for precautionary measures).
Improving the clarity of the legal provisions would help limit the risk that support for
preventive and precautionary measures would allow existing creditors to exit their claims
on the bank shortly before FOLF is triggered and resolution/insolvency is applied, which
may in turn result in a higher use of financing sources (RF/SRF in resolution or DGS
funds under insolvency proceedings).
2.1.2. Discretionary application of the public interest assessment
As highlighted in the evaluation (see Annex 5, section 7.1.3.4), the BRRD and SRMR
leave a margin of discretion to resolution authorities when carrying out the public interest
assessment (PIA). While a certain degree of flexibility when assessing the different
factors relevant for the PIA is needed, the divergent applications and interpretations may
not fully reflect the logic and intention of the legislation. In the Banking Union, the test
was so far applied rather restrictively and resolution action was taken only on three
occasions
30
. Resolution was used more frequently outside the Banking Union and in
some Banking Union Member States when it took place under the direct governance of
national resolution authorities (ten out of 13 cases)
31
.
In essence, the PIA compares resolution and the normal insolvency proceedings available
at national level against a set of objectives which include (i) the impact on financial
stability (a wide-spread crisis may yield a different PIA than an idiosyncratic failure), (ii)
the assessment of the impact on the bank’s critical functions and (iii) limiting the use of
extraordinary public financial support
32
.
Regarding the notion of critical function, there are divergences in interpretation among
resolution authorities on whether the impact of its interruption should be assessed for the
30
Two of these cases concern the resolution of entities under the Sberbank Europe AG group which was
carried out by the SRB. As further explained in Annex 9 due to the very special circumstances the group
was faced with (experiencing significant deposit outflows due to the reputational impact of geopolitical
tensions) there was a deviation from the resolution plan (which provided for the preservation of the group
structure) and different solutions (resolution/liquidation) where applied to different banking entities of the
group.
31
Out of the ten cases: (i) six cases concern non-Banking Union Member States and (ii) four cases
occurred, within Banking Union Member States, before the entry into force of the minimum 8% TLOF
bail-in requirement and before the SRB became responsible for the handling of these cases.
32
This notion includes any support granted to preserve or restore a bank’s viability, solvency or liquidity
and which is qualified as State aid. It also extends to support granted at supranational level which, if it was
granted at national level, would be qualified as State aid (for example from the SRF).
26
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0028.png
economy of an entire Member State or at local/regional level. However, the BRRD and
SRMR (particularly if read in conjunction with the relevant delegated act)
33
are not
meant to exclude the impacts
within
a Member State (i.e. in a region/locally) or to restrict
the assessment of the financial stability to (at least) an entire Member State.
Moreover, with the objective of an efficient use of external sources of funding in mind,
the requirement to compare the use of funding in resolution and in insolvency could be
clarified as this would help deliver a broader choice of resolution tools which are often
more cost-effective compared to insolvency. In particular, when resolution provides a
possibility to use DGS resources more effectively and efficiently than in insolvency (for
example because it would be cheaper for the DGS to contribute to resolution than to
insolvency, where the only possible use of a DGS would be to pay out covered
depositors), this element should provide additional grounds for a positive PIA finding via
the application of the framework. Furthermore, the objective to limit the cost for
taxpayers could benefit from a further distinction between the use of public funds from
the State budget and the use of the RF/SRF or the DGS, which are financed by all banks.
2.1.3. Divergence in the hierarchy of claims in national insolvency laws
The BRRD harmonised at EU level certain rules concerning the order according to which
creditors must be repaid (hierarchy of claims) in national laws governing bank insolvency
proceedings, especially regarding covered deposits, preferred non-covered deposits
34
and
subordinated classes of instruments. However, certain divergences in the hierarchy of
claims remain, in particular, when it comes to the ranking of ordinary unsecured claims,
other deposits and exclusions from bail-in. This creates the potential for uneven treatment
of creditors, including depositors, in resolution and in insolvency, across Member States.
Such divergences have the potential to create an uneven playing field in the single market
and complicate the no creditor worse off (NCWO) assessment, which ensures that
creditors are not worse off in resolution than under insolvency proceedings, especially for
cross-border groups including across Member States participating in the Banking
Union
35
.
More precisely, the NCWO principle imposes that the allocation of losses to shareholders
and creditors under the resolution scenario should not exceed the losses that those
shareholders and creditors would otherwise have incurred under a normal insolvency
proceeding, which would be counterfactual. If it does, those shareholders/creditors
should be compensated. Hence, when applying resolution tools, the outcome of the
NCWO assessment together with the identification of the relevant counterfactual,
33
Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/778 of 2 February 2016 supplementing Directive
2014/59/EU of the European Parliament and of the Council with regard to the circumstances and
conditions under which the payment of extraordinary
ex post
contributions may be partially or entirely
deferred, and on the criteria for the determination of the activities, services and operations with regard to
critical functions, and for the determination of the business lines and associated services with regard to core
business lines, OJ L 131, 20.5.2016, p. 41.
34
The part of deposits from natural persons and micro, small and medium-sized enterprises (SMEs) that is
eligible for DGS protection but that exceeds the DGSD coverage level (Article 108(1)(a)), as well as
deposits that would be eligible deposits from natural persons and SMEs were they not made through
branches located outside the Union of banks established within the Union.
35
See Annex 8, section 2 for more details on the issue pertaining to the divergences in depositor ranking.
27
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0029.png
depending on the specific national insolvency regime, can lead to varying conclusions in
terms of treatment of creditors across Member States, which is especially relevant as it
could create difficulties and creditors’ unequal treatment in cases of cross-border group
resolution.
2.2. Problem 2: Ineffective funding options and divergent access to funding
conditions in resolution and outside resolution
The evaluation of the framework identified a second problem, i.e. the divergent
conditions for accessing funding in resolution and outside resolution. When funding from
the safety nets (RF/SRF and DGS) is used to complement the bank’s internal loss
absorbing capacity, the requirements to access such funding are very different (i.e. the
least cost test to access the DGS fund in and outside resolution as well as the minimum
8% bail-in rule to access the RF/SRF are very divergent and impact creditors, including
deposits differently). More specifically, funding outside resolution is generally more
easily accessible than in resolution, in particular for certain banks, as explained more in
detail in section 2.Error!
Reference source not found.
36
. Funding issues are driven by
(i) structural difficulties in fulfilling the minimum conditions to access the RF/SRF by
certain banks
37
, (ii) divergent requirements to access funding from the resolution fund as
compared to other sources of funding outside resolution, and (iii) the lack of clear,
adequate and consistent rules in accessing DGS funding in resolution and insolvency.
Based on available information, there are indications that this second problem led to the
use of public money in crisis management
38
.
2.2.1. Difficulty in fulfilling the conditions to access resolution funds for certain
banks
To facilitate the execution of resolution strategies and the application of resolution
tools
39
, banks are required to hold sufficient loss-absorbing capacity composed of own
funds and eligible liabilities (MREL). More specifically, they are required to hold a
sufficient and proportionate amount of liabilities, which are easily bail-inable. The
resolution authority determines the MREL requirement on a bank-by-bank basis
depending on the chosen resolution strategy and envisaged resolution tools. For instance,
in the case of open bank bail-in, the MREL requirement is calibrated to ensure that bank
is able to bear the losses and, to get recapitalised and restructured so it can continue its
36
37
See also the evaluation in Annex 5, in particular section 7.1.2.3.
See Annex 7 on the data underlying the difficulties to reach the minimum target of bailing in 8% of the
bank’s total liabilities including own funds.
38
See Annex 5 (evaluation), section 7.1.
39
The CMDI framework created several resolution tools that define the resolution strategy, which
resolution authorities may use as stand-alone or in combination when dealing with failing banks with a
positive PIA: (i) open bank bail-in (activities are restructured and the bank is recapitalised via the bail-in of
shareholders and creditors to continue its activity on the market) and transfer strategies including (ii) sale
of business strategy (part or the entire business is sold to a/several buyer(s) and any remaining part could
be liquidated or transferred to an asset management vehicle), (iii) bridge bank strategy (part of the activities
are temporarily transferred into a different bridge entity until a buyer is found) and (iv) asset separation
vehicle used in combination with another tool (problematic assets/liabilities are transferred into a vehicle
that manages their work-out to generate proceeds). The MREL requirement needs to be proportionate to
the chosen resolution strategy and tools, e.g. MREL requirements for open bank bail-in strategies may be
higher than requirements for transfer strategies.
28
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0030.png
activity. Resolution authorities may provide complementary financing support, if needed,
through the use of the RF/SRF, provided that certain conditions are met. Among these,
key conditions to access the RF/SRF for solvency support are: imposing losses on
shareholders and creditors for not less than 8% of total liabilities including own funds
(TLOF) and a limitation on the contribution from the fund, which cannot exceed 5%
TLOF
40
per bank. While not clearly mentioned in the legal text and remaining subject to
legal interpretation, it is considered that accessing the RF/SRF for liquidity support does
not require a minimum bail-in of 8% TLOF.
As developed in the evaluation in Annex 5, the need to access resolution funding may
arise for any bank (whether executing an open bank bail-in or a transfer as resolution
strategy) and the conditions to access the RF/SRF under the current framework do not
sufficiently account for distinctions on grounds of proportionality based on the resolution
strategy, size and/or business model. The ability of banks to fulfil the access conditions
to the RF/SRF depends therefore only on the stock and the type of bail-inable
instruments available in their balance sheets at the time of the intervention, while it
should be based on a case-by-case assessment of the bank and the resolution strategy.
Overall, banks have considerably increased their MREL capacity and, by 2024, they will
be expected to comply with the requirements set in BRRD II. The build-up of MREL is
gradual and a necessary transition to address the legacy risks. However, evidence (see
analyses in Annexes 7 and 13) suggests that, for some (smaller) banks in certain markets,
the difficulty to build up MREL is of a structural rather than of a transitional nature
41
.
Analyses underpinning this conclusion focused on: (i) the structure of banks’ liabilities,
in particular assessing the amount of liabilities that are bail-inable and whether deposits
would need to be subject to bail-in in order for the bank to be able to reach the 8% TLOF
and access the RF/SRF
42
(ii) the level of MREL shortfalls and (iii) market information
on issuances by certain smaller/medium-sized banks
43
. For some banks, considering their
specific liability structure, certain deposits
44
would need to be bailed-in in order to access
the RF/SRF, which may raise concerns of financial stability and operational feasibility
considering the economic and social impact in a number of Member States. This is
particularly the case, for example, where banks are relying significantly on deposit
funding and where bail-in may have a profound impact on certain portions of the real
economy.
40
Article 44(5) BRRD requires a minimum bail-in of 8% TLOF and provides for a maximum RF
contribution of 5% TLOF (unless all unsecured, non-preferred liabilities, other than eligible deposits, have
been written down or converted in full) when a resolution authority decides to exclude or partially exclude
an eligible liability or class of eligible liabilities, and the losses that would have been borne by those
liabilities have not been passed on fully to other creditors, or when the use of the RF indirectly results in
part of the losses being passed on to the RF (Article 101(2) BRRD).
41
Nevertheless, it needs to be kept in mind that the non-issuance of MREL instruments by such banks,
which are presently earmarked to be placed in insolvency rather than resolution, may be an
active/deliberate choice of the institution.
42
This point (i) is developed in Annex 7.
43
These points (ii) and (iii) are developed in Annex 13.
44
Such as deposits not covered and not preferred, i.e. deposits of large corporates, governments, other
financial institutions, other institutions.
29
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0031.png
According to the empirical evidence presented in Annex 7 (section 3.2.1), out of a
sample of 187 banks that would go into resolution if they failed as of Q4 2019, deposits
in 44 banks in 18 Member States would have to bear losses for an aggregate amount of
EUR 14.16 bn under the baseline scenario (status quo) in order to reach 8% TLOF and be
able to access the RF/SRF. As explained in section 8 of Annex 8, retail and SME
deposits are predominant in smaller and medium-sized banks across the EU. Such
considerations may explain the reluctance of some resolution authorities to impose losses
on depositors, leading to sub-optimal crisis management choices outside resolution
financed by public budgets.
2.2.2. Divergent access requirements for the resolution fund and for funding
outside resolution
Precautionary measures, preventive measures and liquidation aid under national
insolvency proceedings are different forms of public support available outside resolution.
In past cases, these measures have been used quite extensively (see Annex 9).
Following the entry into force of the resolution framework in 2015, available evidence
shows that European banks benefitted from public support amounting to over
EUR 58.2 bn mainly under insolvency proceedings and in the form of precautionary aid
measures
45
, in addition to the burden sharing required by the State aid rules (Figure 5).
All these measures are subject to burden sharing requirements
46
pursuant to State aid
rules, requiring that, after losses are first absorbed by equity, contributions by hybrid
capital holders and subordinated debt holders may be necessary. This requirement is
generally less demanding for bank debt holders than the corresponding requirements
under BRRD, which entails that losses are absorbed by shareholders and creditors,
potentially including depositors (e.g. through bail-in) for a minimum of 8% TLOF before
the resolution fund can be accessed.
45
EUR 28.1 bn were provided as precautionary liquidity measures in the form of guarantees under the
BRRD, and EUR 30.1 bn as capital/guarantee measures, of which EUR 10.8 bn as precautionary
recapitalisation under the BRRD, EUR 17.5 bn as liquidation aid under national law in the form of cash
injection and guarantees, and EUR 1.8 bn as public aid in resolution under the BRRD (the latter public aid
measure concerns a case, which occurred before the entry into force of the minimum 8% TLOF bail-in
requirement).
46
With the exception of liquidity support measures, which are meant to be of temporary nature and have a
less distortive effect, and as a result are subject to more lenient State aid requirements (including as regards
the requirements for adequate burden sharing) compared to more permanent measures such as
recapitalisation or impaired asset measures.
30
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0032.png
Figure 5: Sources of complementary external funding in crisis, cases between 2015
and 2022 (in EUR bn)
Notes: The contribution from the RFs amounting to EUR 6.9 bn, includes the amount of EUR 1.4 bn
contributed jointly by the Polish RF and DGS in the case of resolution of Getin Noble bank SA (see Annex
9 for more details on this case). Information on the amounts contributed by RFs and DGSs in some of the
bank cases are not publicly available.
Source: European Commission calculations
In the case of preventive and precautionary aid (such as precautionary recapitalisation or
preventive measures), the framework provides for specific conditions to be met to ensure
that these are granted to banks which are in financial difficulties but are still solvent and
not failing. These conditions are well intended to ensure consistency with the overall
logic of the resolution framework and to avoid that the burden sharing rules under State
aid, in cases where they lead to a lower requirement create an opportunity to resort to
these measures to “escape” the more demanding bail-in requirement under BRRD.
However, as mentioned in section 2.1.1, some banks were declared FOLF shortly after
receiving precautionary support on grounds,
inter alia,
of being solvent as confirmed by
the competent supervisor.
Liquidation aid in national insolvency proceedings can also be useful to provide financial
support to banks to the extent necessary to ensure their orderly exit from the market.
However, the issue observed is that the availability of such support under different and
generally more advantageous conditions from the point of view of the bank’s creditors
47
may create room for arbitrage and incentivise resolution authorities to look for solutions
outside the resolution framework, particularly in light of the discretionary nature of the
PIA
48
. This effect is exacerbated by the fact that, resolution authorities, when applying
the PIA, rarely compare the need for external funding in resolution (through the
resolution fund or DGS) and in insolvency (liquidation aid), leading to the choice of
inefficient tools to manage the bank’s failure.
47
Paragraphs 40-42 of the 2013 Banking Communication set out the minimum burden-sharing requirement
for equity, hybrid capital holders and subordinated debt holders in those cases.
48
See also the Box 9 in Annex 5 (evaluation), section 7.1.2.3 point b, explaining the differences between
the CMDI framework and the Banking Communication.
31
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0033.png
2.2.3. Limited scope to grant DGS funding in resolution and insolvency
Under the current framework, DGS funds can be used to finance some interventions both
in resolution and in insolvency. Article 109 BRRD provides for the use of DGS funding
in resolution, in addition to the resolution fund. The provision sets out several conditions
for the DGS intervention. The DGS support in resolution is limited to an amount equal to
the losses borne by covered deposits if they were exposed to bail-in or if they could bear
losses under another resolution strategy. In addition, the DGS’s liability is limited to the
amount of losses that the DGS would have borne when paying out covered deposits
under an insolvency counterfactual (least cost test). The combination of these rules,
coupled with the limitations posed by the super-preference for the DGS in the ranking of
liabilities in insolvency (which entail that in most cases DGS would not be exposed to
losses in the counterfactual insolvency
49
) makes the use of DGS in resolution more
costly, creating several issues in applying the framework concerning the use of DGS in
resolution. The DGS can only provide an amount up to the losses it would bear in case of
a hypothetical payout in insolvency. These losses are given by the difference between the
amount disbursed by the DGS in case of a payout and the amount the DGS would
recover from the sale of the bank’s assets in insolvency. Given the very high ranking of
the DGS in the hierarchy of claim (super-preference of DGS claims), the DGS has the
possibility to recover part or all of its expenditure in the hypothetical insolvency,
depending on circumstances (i.e. nature and features of insolvency regimes, quality of
assets being liquidated). As a result, and as explained in the evaluation, this provision has
never been used in practice
50
.
The DGS may also finance a transfer of business in insolvency proceedings (Article
11(6) DGSD), to the extent that this is necessary to preserve access to covered deposits
and if it complies with the least cost test and State aid rules. The conditions to grant DGS
funding in resolution and insolvency are not entirely aligned, which makes the use of
DGS funds subject to uncertainty. Also in this case, the DGS’ super preference
substantially limits the possibility for the DGS to provide funding.
Finally, the opportunity to use DGS funding in resolution or insolvency produces
different consequences depending on whether the potential intervention is in a Banking
Union or non-Banking Union context. For non-Banking Union Members States, both
resolution and DGS funds are financed by the domestic industry, possibly facilitating a
combined use of these funds. However, in the case of Banking Union Member States, the
SRF is financed by all banks in the Banking Union while the financing of DGS fund is
national, hence only by domestic banks, creating an “asymmetry” in the burden of the
costs in case DGS would “substitute” the SRF. Moreover, a risk of shortfall in DGS
funds (see problem 3 below) may occur and illustrates the potential benefits possible
through pooling DGS funds at central level.
49
50
See section 6.1.1.4 in Chapter 6 and sections 4.1.1 in Annex 7.
It should however be mentioned that, in an effort to tackle some these limitations under the current text,
the Commission services have supported a more extensive reading of the provision in Article 109 BRRD.
See more details in the Annex 5, Section 7.1.2.3.
32
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0034.png
2.3. Problem 3: Uneven and inconsistent depositor protection and lack of
robustness in DGS funding
The third problem identified in the evaluation relates to discrepancies in depositor
protection across Member States both in terms of scope of protection and payout
processes and in terms of vulnerability to shortfalls due to a lack of a robust and
central/common safety net in the absence of EDIS
51
. The DGSD, recast in 2014, includes
a high number of national options and discretions, which entitles depositors in certain
Member States to different levels of protection. Beyond this inconsistent application
52
of
the rules, depositor protection and confidence in the Banking Union could be undermined
by the lack of an appropriate common safety net to national DGSs and equal treatment of
all depositors. National DGSs still remain vulnerable to asymmetric shocks, which may
put DGS funds at risk and create pro-cyclical effects for the banking sector as additional
contributions may need to be raised in some Member States depending on the shock. By
contrast, pooling national resources at a central level would deliver diversification effects
and increase the robustness of depositor protection, possibly even lowering the burden on
the industry in terms of replenishment needs.
The drivers behind this problem can be summarised as follows: (i) discrepancies in
national depositor protection across Member States and (ii) insufficient means of national
DGS to weather the impact of a large financial shock.
2.3.1. Discrepancies in national depositor protection across Member States
Gaps and fragmentation in the deposit protection and in the functioning of national
deposit guarantee schemes persist due to the inconsistent application of the DGSD across
Member States and various ONDs. This creates divergences in the robustness of DGS
funds and uneven playing field in the protection that depositors enjoy in different
Member States. The EBA published four opinions
53
highlighting the need for
clarification in the DGSD
54
and reducing discrepancies in national depositor protection.
The main discrepancies – also assessed in the evaluation and Annex 6 – are explained
below.
In terms of scope of protection, the main problem relates to the divergence in coverage of
temporary high balances (deposits above EUR 100 000) which are also protected under
the DGSD. The coverage level varies among Member States and ranges from
EUR 200 000 to an unlimited amount, creating uneven playing field. Other ONDs
leading to discrepancies refer to the types of depositors, such as client funds of other
51
This was for example indicated by some speakers at the High-level conference on the CMDI review in
March 2021 as well as by some respondents of the consultations. See also Annex 5, Section 7.1.4 and
Annex 6.
52
See Annex 6 for further details on the inconsistent application of the DGSD and the recommendations
developed by EBA in this regard.
53
EBA opinions on DGS payout (30
October 2019),
on the eligibility of deposits, coverage level and
cooperation between DGS (8
August 2019),
on funding and uses of DGS funds (23
January 2020)
and the
interplay between the AMLD and DGSD (11
December 2021).
54
The EBA opinions were discussed with Member States in the EGBPI and many suggestions were
supported (see Annex 6).
33
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0035.png
financial institutions or public authorities which are protected differently across Member
States
55
.
In addition, the robustness of the DGS funding varies across Member States due to
differences in the national implementation of alternative funding arrangements, which
could be relied on in case the DGS funds were depleted. The lack of additional resources
in some Member States could impact the ability to pay out depositors (or conduct
alternative interventions to support a bank) and endangers consumer confidence and
financial stability.
Furthermore, when it comes to the use of preventive and alternative measures foreseen
under Articles 11(3) and 11(6) DGSD, divergences in the least cost tests applied across
types of intervention and Member States, hamper the predictability of the framework.
They create inconsistencies around the requirements for the various possible uses of DGS
funds (including in resolution), which are unclear and differently interpreted among
Member States. As regards preventive measures, Article 11(3)(c) DGSD provides that
costs of fulfilling the statutory or contractual mandate of the DGS should not be
exceeded. Some Member States use the same least cost test for both preventive and
alternative measures, while others did not develop a least cost test methodology for
preventive measures (see Annex 6, section
Error! Reference source not found.).
This
has the potential of creating an uneven playing field in depositor protection across the
EU.
As also identified in the evaluation (see Annex 5, section 7.4), the interplay between the
DGSD and other pieces of EU legislation raised coherence issues. As regards the
interplay with the Anti-Money Laundering (AML) Directive, the EBA highlighted the
need to clarify the roles and responsibilities of the DGS and other stakeholders during a
payout and strengthen their cooperation and exchange of information to minimise the risk
of payout to depositors suspected of money laundering. As regards the Payment services
and E-money Directives, the DGS protection of client funds of non-bank financial
institutions such as payment and e-money institutions or investment firms, varies across
Member States and requires further clarification and harmonisation.
2.3.2. Insufficient means of national DGSs
Member States are steadily building up their DGS means to reach 0.8% of total covered
deposits by 2024, as required under the DGSD. Despite this continuous build-up, DGSs
remain vulnerable to asymmetric shocks. Such shocks may put a national scheme under
stress, making it difficult to settle individual depositor claims within the statutory time or
to intervene through other possible use of DGS funds. In such situations, a DGS may find
it difficult to call upon pro-cyclical extraordinary
ex post
contributions from its members
to make up for the shortfall. Alternative funding arrangements could include private or
public sources, making eventually the sovereign the ultimate guarantor to national DGSs.
Some national DGSs faced in the past considerable funding needs, representing a
significant share of their available financial needs, resulting in continued reliance by
55
For example, Member States may ensure that the deposits of small local authorities (Article 5(2) DGSD)
or deposits held by personal pension schemes and occupational pension schemes of small or medium sized
enterprises (Article 6(1) DGSD) are protected up to EUR 100 000.
34
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0036.png
national DGSs on the state as a backstop for depositor protection, which strengthens the
bank-sovereign nexus (see Annex 5, section
Error! Reference source not found.).
There is a high risk that DGS interventions could be impaired under a severe crisis
56
. The
lack of consumer confidence in this context may also trigger deposits outflows,
conducive to bank runs. Under a severe crisis in one bank or Member State, depositors
could be incentivised to transfer their funds in another bank or even another country,
potentially exacerbating financial difficulties of the initial bank or national banking
sector
57
.
The absence of a common deposit guarantee scheme (i.e. EDIS) at Banking Union level
which would optimise the allocation of financial means, represents a significant
drawback for DGS resilience and an all-encompassing depositor protection. Failing to
unlock the unused benefits inherent in the pooling of funds at a central level and larger
firepower for industry-funded safety nets represents a lost opportunity to significantly
increase the efficiency of national DGS protection and lower the burden on the industry
in terms of
ex ante
contributions or
ex post
replenishment requirements. The absence of
EDIS also deprives depositors from a seamless guarantee of protection regardless of the
bank and country where they are located, potentially weakening consumer confidence.
As experienced in the 2008 financial crisis, a strong bank-sovereign nexus may create
risks to financial stability through contagion and negative consequences for the single
market. The costs of an incomplete Banking Union lacking EDIS are high, while the
benefits for taxpayers and the industry are not materialising to their full potential.
2.4. How will the problems evolve?
As the problem analysis shows, there is a need to improve several aspects of the current
framework to address the inconsistencies, improve clarity and predictability of outcomes,
foster the use of industry-funded sources (RF/SRF and DGS), avoid using public funds
for the orderly handling of bank failures, to ensure that the original objectives of the
CMDI framework of preserving financial stability, minimising the use of public funds
and strengthening depositor confidence are reached. The improvement of the framework
is particularly relevant, at this juncture, for better preparing the European banks for the
adverse conditions that may potentially arise in the medium term, such as the ones
stemming from asset quality deterioration as a result of a weaker macroeconomic
outlook.
Failing to address the above shortcomings, as also analysed in the evaluation, exposes the
framework to the risk of unbalanced outcomes, without exploiting its full potential and
the possibility to resolve any credit institution, when this would yield a better outcome
than insolvency. If solutions based on the use of industry-funded safety nets are not made
56
See Annex 10, section
Error! Reference source not found.,
presenting the findings from the Joint
Research Center (JRC) analysis. There is a probability of 87% at aggregate level in the Banking Union that
DGSs would not have available funds to fully reimburse all covered depositors in at least one bank in case
of a crisis comparable to the one of 2008 (see also JRC’s report (Annex 12, Tables 16 and 18)).
57
Depositor outflows were experienced in the 2008 global financial crisis due to uncoordinated increases
in coverage levels across the Union, leading the co-legislators to introduce a harmonised coverage level in
the
DGSD adopted in 2009
(see recital 19 DGSD). Outflows continued to be observed e.g. in the case of
Cyprus following the financial crisis, see Annex 8.1.
35
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0037.png
more proportionate and accessible, these resources will remain idle, even though banks
will continue to raise contributions and issue MREL eligible liabilities. At the same time,
this may lead to prolonged recourse to public finances (which at this juncture face
competing priorities), persisting bank-sovereign links and risks of moral hazard.
Ensuring the coherent and cost-effective application of the framework is even more
important, given the continued absence of EDIS means risks to the robustness and
resilience of depositor protection (including under large economic shocks) as well as to
the funding toolkit of the framework. It deprives the European consumer of a mutualised
safety net financed by industry contributions, which would also reduce the continued
tension on public finances.
Ultimately, the Banking Union is not complete without reforming the crisis management
and deposit insurance, its second pillar, and implementing EDIS, its third pillar. An
incomplete Banking Union bears costs and risks, including risks in terms of financial
stability, market fragmentation, under-performing banking sector, where failing banks
are not always exiting the market, leading instead to regular calls for public support. The
completion of the Banking Union together with the deepening of the Capital Markets
Union are pivotal to ensure financial stability, foster market integration and support a
genuine Economic and Monetary Union. The latter two are fundamental steps towards
enhancing the EU’s open strategic autonomy and the international role of the euro.
3.
W
HY SHOULD THE
EU
ACT
?
3.1. Legal basis
The regulatory requirements for crisis management and deposit insurance are already set
at EU level (both via Regulation and Directive). Consequently, the legal basis for the
CMDI review is the same as the legal basis of the original legislative acts, namely
Article 114 TFEU for the BRRD and SRMR, and Article 53(1) TFEU for the DGSD.
3.2. Subsidiarity: Necessity and added-value of EU action
The rationale for a specific and harmonised EU resolution regime for all banks in the EU
was laid out at the inception of the framework in 2014
58
and its main features reflect
international guidance and the key attributes for effective resolution regimes developed
by the Financial Stability Board in the aftermath of the global financial crisis.
The principle of subsidiarity is embedded in the existing CMDI framework, as its
objectives could only be achieved at Union level through EU action – the harmonised
resolution and deposit insurance framework. This is underpinned by recital 131 of BRRD
I, which stipulates that the effect of a failure of any institution in the whole Union
justifies action at EU level:
“Since the objective of this Directive, namely the
harmonisation of the rules and processes for the resolution of institutions, cannot be
sufficiently achieved by the Member States, but can rather, by reason of the effects of a
failure of any institution in the whole Union, be better achieved at Union level, the Union
may adopt measures, in accordance with the principle of subsidiarity as set out in Article
58
See Chapter 1, Annex 4 and Annex 5 (evaluation).
36
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
5 of the Treaty on European Union. In accordance with the principle of proportionality,
as set out in that Article, this Directive does not go beyond what is necessary in order to
achieve that objective.”
The intention of the existing CMDI framework has always been to provide a common
toolbox to deal effectively with any bank failure, irrespective of its size, business model
or location, in an orderly way, preserving financial stability of the EU, the Member State
or the region in which it operates, and protecting depositors without relying on public
funds. In this context, recital 29 of BRRD I outlined that ‘due
to the potentially systemic
nature of all institutions, it is crucial, in order to maintain financial stability, that
authorities have the possibility to resolve any institution’.
The review aims to amend certain provisions of the BRRD, SRMR and DGSD and for
technical completeness, also considers one policy option including EDIS (see Chapters 5
and 6). The problems identified in Chapter 2, unveiled that the European CMDI
framework should be improved, in particular when it comes to its application to small
and medium-sized banks, as otherwise it may not reach its objectives (see Chapter 4).
The following considerations justify the need for EU action with regard to the CMDI
reform and highlight that the review fully complies with the principle of subsidiarity.
First, the merits of having in place a resolution framework that could potentially be
applied to any bank, irrespective of its size, remain unchanged. Placing small and mid-
sized banks under national insolvency proceedings (also applicable to non-financial
corporates) may not always be appropriate for managing their failure, as explained in
Chapter 2. Moreover, a system where the EU harmonised resolution framework would
only cover larger banks with cross border activities, while national regimes would cover
domestic, small/mid-sized banks would not be conducive to a level playing field in the
single market as it would risk creating a two-tier system for banks in the EU, making
small and domestic banks that are too big to liquidate more risky/unattractive for
consumers and businesses relative to larger ones, because their failure would be managed
under national insolvency laws, which do not guarantee the continuation of critical
functions, the protection of client relationship and of the bank’s franchise asset value and
may inflict losses on uncovered deposits.
Second, the non-application of the harmonised resolution framework in one Member
State may have cross border repercussions. In the EU single market, and in particular in
the Banking Union, it is key to enhance preparedness for crisis time and to equip
resolution authorities with a common toolbox and harmonised set of powers to preserve
the level playing field and competitiveness among industry players, depositors and
taxpayers across the single market. The value-added of EU action also consists in
enhancing preparedness for crisis – thanks to the requirement for banks to set-up internal
loss absorbing buffers, remove impediments to resolution and the set-up of industry-
funded safety nets complementing these internal bank buffers – to avoid recourse to
public funds for all banks and not only cross-border ones. The possibility to access the
EU harmonised CMDI framework acts as a safeguard at the level of each Member State,
but also for the EU as whole, to ensure that the management of a bank’s failure does not
put at risk financial stability, the integrity of the single market, the resilience of the
European Monetary Union. Risks to financial stability, depositor confidence or the use of
37
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0039.png
public finances in one Member State may have far-reaching impacts on a cross border
basis and may ultimately contribute to a fragmentation of the single market and an
intensification of the sovereign-bank nexus.
Third, acting at EU level to reform the CMDI framework will not prescribe the strategy
that should be taken when banks fail. The determination of choosing an EU harmonised
resolution strategy/tool or the national liquidation strategy is at the discretion of the
resolution authority on the basis of the public interest assessment, which is tailored to
each specific failure case and not automatically driven by considerations such as the bank
size, the geographical outreach of its activities and structure of the banking sector. This
makes,
de facto,
the public interest assessment the subsidiarity test in the EU. Overall,
other considerations beyond size, such as functions that are critical for the broader
economy (deposit taking, lending, payments) and their substitutability,
interconnectedness to other actors in the financial system, risk profile and nature of
activity are important for resolution authorities when assessing the impact of a bank’s
failure on financial stability and the public interest to resolve the bank.
Fourth, the decision-making process regarding the choice between EU harmonised
measures
versus
national specific measures to tackle a failing bank remains at the
discretion of the authority in charge and aims to address a variety of cases depending on
the circumstances. Outside the Banking Union, decisions on whether to apply the
resolution framework or national procedures are taken at a national level (by the national
resolution authority). Within the Banking Union, decisions are made via the Single
Resolution Mechanism – a dual mechanism where the SRB (Banking Union level
authority) works closely and cooperates with national resolution authorities in joint
resolution teams. Decisions are centralised at Banking Union level for the largest banks
(120 banks under the direct SRB remit) and left at national level for the less significant
ones (about 2200 less significant institutions (SRB,
Annual Report 2021)),
therefore fully
preserving the capacity of these national authorities to put a bank in liquidation if the
objectives would not be best met using resolution. Thus, while a case-by-case basis needs
to be used for assessing whether a bank undergoes resolution or not, it is critical that the
possibility for all banks to undergo resolution is preserved, due to the, potentially,
systemic nature of all institutions, as already foreseen in BRRD I and also evidenced in
Annex 4, Box 6.
Fifth, Member States may still consider liquidation for the smaller banks under the
reformed CMDI framework. In this respect, national insolvency regimes (unharmonised)
remain in place when an insolvency procedure is deemed superior to resolution. For
some small banks, liquidation is likely to apply. The continuum of tools is preserved in
this way, including tools outside resolution: preventive and precautionary measures,
resolution tools, alternative measures to payout in insolvency and payout of depositors in
case of piecemeal liquidation in insolvency. Among those tools, only the resolution tools
and payout of depositors in liquidation are available to all banks in all countries.
The reforms envisaged with regard to the DGSD, which provide for improvements to
depositor protection, also comply with the subsidiarity principle. This is due to the fact
that the harmonisation of insurance coverage, scope, eligibility of depositors and payout
delays can be better achieved at EU rather than at national level, to ensure a level playing
38
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0040.png
field and fair and equal treatment of depositors across the EU. This was also underlined
by the EBA in its opinions on the DGSD.
Importantly, Member States
59
and the European Parliament agree that the CMDI
framework needs to be fixed in a way that EU action via the harmonised resolution
framework can be used for any bank where needed. Despite the widely shared intention
of protecting taxpayer money embedded in the CMDI framework since 2014, some
Member States have continued to make recourse to taxpayer money when handling
failing banks, since the establishment of the framework, as evidenced in Chapter 2 and
Annex 5. This is not because they find it politically or economically acceptable to do so,
but because they had to choose between protecting financial stability and depositors on
one hand and protecting taxpayer money on the other hand. Appropriate level of MREL
must remain the first line of defence for all banks that are put in resolution. At the same
time, certain small and mid-sized banks find it challenging to access resolution funding,
which some banks can only attain if deposits bear losses. However, inflicting losses on
deposits would pose a significant risk to financial stability, as depositors would lose
confidence in the banking sector and likely provoke bank runs and spiralling contagion,
which can reverberate also into the real economy, as seen during the global financial
crisis. More concretely, the failure of a small/mid-sized banks active in a local region and
community may cause losses to its clients regarding their claims exceeding the coverage
level of EUR 100 000 when placed under national insolvency proceedings (households,
SMEs, corporates, local and regional public institutions such as schools, hospitals, other
financial institutions).
Figure 6 shows the repercussions the identified problems have on the general objectives.
Figure 6: Implications of the identified problems on the general objectives
PROBLEMS
Problem 1
Insufficient legal certainty and
predictability in the
management of bank failures
GENERAL OBJECTIVES
Foster financial stability, ensure market
discipline and the continuity of critical
functions for society
Problem 2
Ineffective funding options and
divergent access conditions in
resolution and insolvency
Problem 3
Uneven and inconsistent
depositor protection and lack of
robustness in DGS funding
Safeguard the functioning of the Single
market and ensure a level playing field
across the EU
Minimise recourse to taxpayer money and
weaken the bank-sovereign loop
Protect depositors and ensure consumer
confidence
Source: Commission services
The objectives pursued by the existing legislative acts can be better achieved at EU level
rather than by different national initiatives:
Foster financial stability, ensure market discipline and the continuity of critical
functions for society: Due to the strong interlinkages between national financial
sectors and the risk of spill-overs, the objective of financial stability in bank crisis
59
Eurogroup (June 2022),
Eurogroup Statement on the future of the Banking Union.
39
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0041.png
management and deposit insurance can be better achieved by EU action compared
to individual national actions.
Safeguard the functioning of the single market and ensure a level playing field
across the EU: Given the freedom of banks to establish and provide services in
other Member States, EU action is preferable to prevent distortions to the single
market and ensure a level playing field, which is a pre-condition for a symmetric
impact of the ECB’s single monetary policy. Action at EU level can for instance
ensure that credit institutions operating in more than one Member State are
subject to the same requirements concerning DGSs, which avoids unwarranted
compliance costs for cross-border activities. EU action also fosters convergence
of supervisory and resolution practices across the EU. An intervention at EU level
also promotes further market integration by ensuring that cross-border bank
failures can be resolved in a predictable, effective and equitable manner. At the
same time, also smaller banks that primarily operate on domestic markets should
– in the spirit of the single market – be treated in a similar manner, regardless
their location, while respecting proportionality.
Minimise recourse to taxpayer money and weaken the bank-sovereign loop: For
banking groups that are active in a cross-border context, national solutions,
without coordination among Member States, would be costlier for citizens and
taxpayers than if the failure of banking groups was governed by comprehensive
and harmonised rules and arrangements and in the case of Banking Union banks,
managed centrally at EU level. On another scale, banks active on a more
local/regional level are often interlinked with the local economic fabric and may
constitute a risk for the local real economy, including households and SMEs that
hold deposits in such banks. In addition to banks’ loss absorbing capacity,
national safety nets (resolution funds and DGS) financed by the industry could be
used in a complementary way to better achieve the framework’s objectives. If
losses were not covered by prudential capital buffers of individual institutions and
safety net funding, this may lead to recourse to public funds (sometimes at sub-
regional level) aiming to safeguard financial stability and protect depositors.
Also, for smaller banks operating primarily on domestic markets, national
procedures available and the reliance on the sovereign should not create an
unlevel playing field among and also within Member States. The lack of action at
EU level for less significant banks and their perceived exclusion from a
mutualised safety net would also potentially affect their ability to access markets
and attract depositors when compared to significant banks. Consequently,
national solutions to tackle bank failures would worsen the sovereign-bank link
and undermine the idea behind the Banking Union of introducing a paradigm shift
from bail-out to bail-in.
Protect depositors and ensure consumer confidence: By harmonising the
financing by DGSs, depositor confidence is maintained and cross-border
distortions of competition are avoided (the same holds for possible competition
distortions within Member States). Otherwise, during a crisis time, bank
customers might shift their funds from banks with less depositor protection to
other ones with more protection (within the same Member States or in another
40
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
one). This may potentially lead to fund outflows with potential adverse financial
stability and real economy consequences. Moreover, the harmonisation of
coverage, scope, eligibility of depositors and payout delays pursued in the DGSD
review cannot be sufficiently achieved if Member States were to act
independently from each other and can be consequently better achieved at EU
level.
4.
O
BJECTIVES
: W
HAT IS TO BE ACHIEVED
?
4.1. General objectives
The review of the CMDI framework will aim to achieve an adequate balance among the
following general objectives:
(1) Contribute to financial stability, ensure market discipline and the continuity of
critical functions for society;
(2) Safeguard the functioning of the single market and ensure a level playing field
across the EU;
(3) Minimise recourse to taxpayer money and weaken the bank-sovereign loop;
(4) Protect depositors and ensure consumer confidence (see
Error! Reference
source not found.2,
Annex 5).
4.2. Specific objectives
The impact assessment will consider the following specific objectives:
(1) Further enhance legal certainty and predictability and strengthen a level playing
field as regards the coherent application of the tools available in bank resolution
and insolvency;
(2) Facilitate access to safety nets in case of bank failure and improve the clarity and
consistency of funding rules;
(3) Further align the national approaches to depositor protection, including in terms
of coverage, and upgrade the capacity of national DGSs’ to withstand local
shocks.
5.
W
HAT ARE THE AVAILABLE POLICY OPTIONS
?
5.1. Approach to design of policy options
The CMDI and the State aid frameworks for banks are strongly inter-related. Jointly
reformed, they would create a system of European rules and incentives, where the
availability of tools and funding sources (subject to conditions for access), combined
with discretionary assessments by resolution authorities, determine the choice of crisis
41
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0043.png
management strategies and procedures to deal with failing banks
60
. The creation of a
common safety net for the protection of deposits, for example via EDIS
61
would support
national DGS funds in need, enhance the funding sources available to handle failing
banks (beyond the internal loss absorption capacity and the RF/SRF) and achieve
synergies in the framework. However, EDIS is not part of the preferred option for
reforming the CMDI framework due to lack of political feasibility, in the absence of an
endorsement by Member States and the European Parliament.
Given the critical interplay among key policy aspects (e.g. the availability of funding, the
scope of resolution through the PIA, outcome of the least cost test), the approach to
formulating policy options needs to be a holistic one. It bundles together relevant design
features of the framework to deliver consistency in the resulting packages of options. The
aim is to provide a coherent and logical articulation for each encompassing package of
policy options. However, each package delivers different degrees of effectiveness and
efficiency in achieving the key objectives, as envisaged and assessed in Chapter 6.
Interchanging elements across option packages could create inconsistencies and reduce
the intended improved effectiveness, efficiency and coherence of the framework.
Such approach is also indispensable to remedy the inconsistencies (as well as the
incentives for using the framework and avoid fragmentation in the single market) which,
as described above, have often occurred because the individual legislative texts
(comprising the EU bank crisis management and deposit insurance framework) were
originally proposed and negotiated on a standalone basis and not assessed jointly
62
.
5.2. Review of the 2013 Banking Communication on State aid rules
The Commission has direct enforcement powers in relation to State aid rules which
derive from the Treaty (Article 107 TFEU). In the context of the global financial crisis,
the Commission clarified its assessment of compatibility of State aid measures, in several
Communications, including, among others, the 2013 Banking Communication. The State
aid framework for banks is closely interlinked with, and complementary to, the CMDI
framework. In particular, it governs the burden sharing requirements, a condition to use
public funds qualified as State aid for resolution
63
, preventive and precautionary
measures or alternative measures in insolvency. The two frameworks are applied
consistently by the Commission. For example, the Commission checks if a public or
private support qualified as a State aid measure violates intrinsically linked provisions of
the CMDI framework and cannot authorise it, if it does so. Despite their natural
interlinkages, the two frameworks are meant to tackle different issues: State aid rules’
main purpose is to limit competition distortions from such support to banks, while the
CMDI framework’s primary objective is to limit risks to financial stability from the
60
See Annex 5 (Evaluation) and Chapter 2 for details on how the triggers, funding availability and funding
conditions form a system of rules and incentives defining the possible outcomes when dealing with banks
in crisis conditions.
61
See glossary and Annex 10.
62
Nevertheless, the review of the State aid rules is not covered as part of the CMDI review, see section 5.2.
63
If the public funds do not qualify as State aid within the meaning of Article 107(1) TFEU then burden
sharing is not applicable.
42
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0044.png
disorderly management of bank failures while avoiding or minimising the use of public
funds.
In November 2020, the Eurogroup invited the Commission to carry out and finalise its
review of the State aid rules for banks, in parallel to the review of the CMDI framework,
ensuring their entry into force at the same time as the revised CMDI framework. Such
timeline aims at ensuring consistency between the two frameworks, adequate burden
sharing of shareholders and creditors to protect taxpayers and depositors and preserve
financial stability
64
. In June 2022, the Eurogroup took note of the intention of the
European Commission to finalise the review of the State aid framework for banks, to
ensure consistency between the State aid framework and the renewed CMDI framework.
Having the objective of coherence in mind, it is important to underline that the CMDI
framework is subject to co-legislation, which will require time before implementation,
and its outcome as compared to the Commission proposal is uncertain, while an update
of the State aid rules requires a Commission Communication, which, when decided by
the Commission, could take effect immediately.
Notwithstanding the interactions between the various components of the current
legislative framework, the reform of the State aid rules is not part of the present impact
assessment nor of the subsequent legislative proposal. A separate process to assess the
need for a review of the State aid rules is ongoing, in parallel to the review of the CMDI
framework, also in light of different procedures to amend the relevant acts
65
.
Provided coherence is maintained within the packages of policy options, all the options
envisaged for CMDI would bring an improvement compared to the baseline (status quo),
irrespective of the changes to the State aid rules (or status quo) which may take place. An
enhanced alignment between the frameworks would usefully complement the changes
proposed to the CMDI rules.
5.3. What is the baseline from which options are assessed?
Under the baseline option, the existing CMDI framework as well as national regimes for
handling failing banks would continue to apply without any legislative changes and
would function without a common deposit guarantee scheme in the Banking Union in the
absence of an agreement on a Banking Union work plan including EDIS by the
Eurogroup in June 2022 and of progress on the EDIS file in the European Parliament
66
.
Despite ongoing developments in the interpretation and methodological approach to the
PIA
67
, broad discretion in its application would continue to be exercised by resolution
64
Eurogroup (November 2020),
Statement of the Eurogroup in inclusive format on the ESM reform and the
early introduction of the backstop to the Single Resolution Fund.
The intention of the Eurogroup is to
ensure that the outcome of the State aid rules review is aligned with the outcome of the negotiations of the
CMDI review by co-legislators.
65
In March 2022, the Commission has launched a
Call for Evidence
together with a
public
and
targeted
consultation to seek stakeholder feedback on the evaluation of State aid rules for banks in difficulty. The
input collected and a study will feed into the evaluation that the Commission aims to publish. .
66
The 2015 Commission proposal on fully-fledged EDIS is still on the table, but in practice, not discussed
by the co-legislators.
67
SRB (May 2021), the SRB revised its approach to PIA,
System-wide events in the public interest
assessment.
43
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0045.png
authorities, with the risk of maintaining the divergence across the EU on the scope of
banks placed in resolution or insolvency. This means that similar bank failures would
continue to be managed under divergent frameworks. Some may continue to be handled
under the harmonised resolution framework, while others would be bailed-out with
taxpayer money, thus continuing to create issues for the EU’s single market in banking
and the equal treatment of banks’ shareholders, creditors and customers.
In terms of funding, the framework would continue to rely on two existing safety nets
under divergent access conditions: the RF/SRF in resolution and the national DGS funds
covering different types of interventions (preventive measures, resolution, payout of
covered deposits and alternative measures in insolvency). The condition to access the
RF/SRF
68
for liquidity support would remain subject to interpretation. Access to the
RF/SRF for certain smaller and medium-sized banks for solvency support would remain
challenging in view of the minimum bail-in access condition of 8% TLOF (despite their
contribution to the RF/SRF). Tapping the DGS for contribution to various interventions
would continue to be difficult and unclear from a legal point of view, due to divergent
access conditions across Member States, in particular the least cost test (as shown in
Chapter 2 and the evaluation). Persisting differences in the hierarchy of claims would
continue to make the level of depositor protection vary per Member State, creating
difficulties for resolution authorities when assessing the risks for creditors being worse
off in resolution than in insolvency
69
, while the super-preference of the DGS would make
it almost impossible for DGS funds to be used in resolution or insolvency under the least
cost test (see in Annex 7).
In addition, the current room for regulatory arbitrage would remain unchanged, leaving
the possibility to apply restructuring measures under national insolvency laws financed
through DGS alternative measures or through taxpayer money because of the more
favourable conditions for banks’ creditors than under resolution, rather than merits in
terms of effectiveness and efficiency.
At the current juncture, in the context of the challenging macroeconomic outlook fuelled
by the energy crisis and the geopolitical situation, the need to improve the CMDI
framework is pressing if the likelihood of failures were to increase in case distress in our
banking sector started to materialise. Under the status quo, even those failing banks for
which resolution would be in the public interest, would continue to be restructured or
liquidated outside the harmonised resolution framework, under existing heterogeneous
national regimes, where in some cases only disorderly and costly insolvency proceedings
or solutions involving taxpayer money exist. This would weaken consumer confidence in
the EU banking sector and the predictability and level playing field of our single market
for banking, and of the Banking Union in particular.
More concretely, first, the handling of banks’ failure would remain inefficient from a
cost perspective, as taxpayer money would continue to be used despite the build-up of
considerable MREL buffers and very significant safety nets (e.g. the SRF is forecasted to
exceed EUR 80 bn by the end of 2023 in the Banking Union and the aggregate amount of
68
Minimum bail-in rule of 8% TLOF for solvency support, while no minimum bail-in rule for liquidity
provision.
69
See Annex 8, section 2.
44
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0046.png
national DGSs to exceed EUR 56 bn across the EU). Also, the franchise value of the
failing bank’s assets and its client relationship would deteriorate, leading to overall loss
of value. Second, costs would not be sufficiently redistributed from taxpayers to
shareholders and creditors, despite this being one of the main objectives of the
BRRD/SRMR and the Banking Union created in the aftermath of the global financial
crisis. Third, the baseline option would not foster consumer confidence in the banking
sector, in particular when the certainty of outcomes cannot be guaranteed, which may
create spiralling contagion to other banks and the risk that bank clients may start
questioning the solidity of the system and its safety nets, with no improvement over what
could happen under insolvency proceedings.
The European Parliament and the Council have also acknowledged this risk and
repeatedly called on the Commission to deliver the CMDI legislative package with high
urgency.
5.4. Overview of the policy options
Figure 7: Overview of policy option packages and the interaction of their key elements
Source: Commission Services
* Eurogroup statement of 16 June 2022
.
5.5. Common elements across the packages of options
Some changes proposed are common across all option packages (except the baseline).
These include elements related to: depositor protection, early intervention measures,
triggering of failing or likely to fail status of a bank (FOLF) and winding-up under
insolvency.
The packages of options closely follow the advice provided by the EBA for the CMDI
review through the set of four opinions dedicated to the review of the DGSD functioning
and the response to the call for advice on funding in resolution.
As shown in the evaluation in Annex 5 and the problem definition, these aspects would
require amendments to improve the framework, however they are not driving the
distinctions among the option packages. Alternatives to the proposed policy changes on
the common elements have been analysed and evaluated in Annexes 6, 7 and 8 and
45
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0047.png
subsequently, the preferred option for the common elements was integrated in this impact
assessment (section 6.3). As shown in these annexes, the analysed alternatives to the
preferred policy options would not have addressed the problems of clarity and
predictability of the framework to the same extent as the preferred options. Including all
possible variations for these elements in the packages of options as alternative options
would have resulted in a very large number of possible combinations. Some of these
would have been rather arbitrary and would have complicated the reading of the options
without adding value in terms of coherence and consistency.
In view of these considerations, the main report will focus on the core elements driving
the main differences across the coherent packages and which are described in Chapter 6:
the scope of resolution (PIA), the funding solution and access conditions to the industry-
funded safety nets, DGS interventions and related conditions and possible cost synergies
for banks. In the absence of EDIS, the governance and decision making process on the
use of funds between national and European authorities (SRB) would not change in
principle under this initiative.
Figure 8: Elements common across all option packages (see also section 6.3 and
Annex 8)
Source: Commission Services
5.6. Options discarded at an early stage
Additional policy options were analysed and discarded at an early stage: (i) resolution as
the sole procedure for banks needing restructuring, (ii) set-up of a parallel harmonised
national regime in insolvency – an orderly liquidation tool, (iii) withdrawal of the 2015
Commission EDIS proposal without a replacement and (iv) incompatible permutations
between elements in the option packages presented in Chapter 6. The assessment of these
additional options together with a rationale for their discarding is presented in Annex 14.
6.
W
HAT ARE THE IMPACTS OF THE POLICY OPTIONS AND HOW DO THEY COMPARE
?
In this section, each package of policy options considered is assessed against how it
addresses the identified problems and problem drivers (see Chapter 2) along the criteria
46
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0048.png
of effectiveness (general objectives), efficiency (benefits-costs), political considerations,
feasibility
70
and coherence with EU rules.
Each of the three packages of policy options (other than the baseline) strives to create an
incentive-compatible framework where the application of resolution tools and of
alternatives outside resolution is achieved in a more consistent manner, increasing legal
certainty and predictability, levelling the playing field to safeguard the functioning of the
single market, facilitating access to common safety nets, protecting depositors and
ensuring consumer confidence, while reducing the contingency for taxpayer funds.
Depending on the degree of ambition embedded in their design, the packages of options
achieve these objectives to a different extent, also with a varying degree of political
feasibility.
The key features analysed under each option in relation to the mentioned criteria and
which drive the differences across the option packages, are: the clarification of the
resolution scope through the PIA, the conditions to access industry-funded safety nets,
the use of DGS funds and the harmonisation of its access conditions across various types
of interventions, implementing a depositor preference in the hierarchy of claims and
synergies through cost reductions for the industry. These dimensions are the most
important in the overall comparison of option packages because they touch on the core
issues identified in Chapter 2 and they determine the coherence and interdependence
between the sub-elements of the consistent packages of options.
The policy option packages 2 and 3 are assessed against the background of the 2015
EDIS proposal under the assumption that political negotiations remain on hold
71
, while
the policy package 4 is a technical option included for completeness, assuming the
implementation of EDIS as the third pillar of the Banking Union (although EDIS has not
yet been politically endorsed by the Council or European Parliament).
The most relevant evidence underpinning the analysis of policy options in this chapter
includes, among others, analysis of past cases of bank failures, data provided by the EBA
in its opinions on the functioning of the DGSD in the current framework, empirical
evidence by the EBA in its reply to the Commission’s call for advice on funding issues in
resolution and empirical evidence provided by the Commission’s JRC regarding key
policy options pertaining to the DGSD related policy options. A complementary, more
detailed summary of the evidence used in this impact assessment is also provided in
Annex 1, sections 3 and 4.
6.1. Assessment of policy options
6.1.1. Option 2 – Slightly improved resolution funding and commensurate
resolution scope
70
Political considerations and feasibility are important aspects in the assessment of the option packages. In
particular, certain elements of a potential reform – such as the use of funds, conditions to access funding or
the completion of the Banking Union with its third pillar, EDIS implying mutualisation of funds are
inherently political, as shown also by the interrupted negotiations of the 2015 proposal.
71
I.e. 2015 EDIS proposal not withdrawn and no new hybrid EDIS proposal tabled.
47
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0049.png
This option entails a revision of several elements of the CMDI framework, where slightly
more resolution funding would be made available and, therefore, a commensurate larger
scope of banks would be placed in resolution compared to the baseline. However, the
outcome in terms of fixing the issues identified and reaching the objectives listed in
chapter 4 will be marginal in comparison with options 3 and 4.
6.1.1.1. Public interest assessment
Under this option, a widening of the PIA scope would be achieved through legislative
change to ensure that, following this assessment, resolution would be applied to more
institutions than under the baseline option, when this best achieves the objectives of
preserving financial stability, protecting deposits and taxpayer funds. While retaining the
discretionary nature of the PIA decision by the resolution authority, the PIA legal
amendments would include additional considerations for the achievement of the
resolution objectives such as: (i) a regional dimension in the assessment of critical
functions of the bank and of risks to financial stability (in addition to national one as in
the current framework), (ii) the need to preserve DGS resources and (iii) the possible
granting of State aid in insolvency
72
. However, under this option, the amendments to the
PIA would not include a positive presumption of public interest/resolution unlike under
option 4. Option 2 would improve, to some extent, the legal certainty in applying the PIA
and determining the scope of banks going in resolution and better frame the discretion of
resolution authorities. However, higher risks of divergences across the EU are likely to
remain in the absence of sufficient access to funding. Such a relative expansion of the
resolution scope to more small/medium-sized banks under this option is coherent with a
relatively less robust funding solution when compared to options 3 and 4. As described in
the next section, the funding solution of option 2 may fail to effectively underpin a
broader application of resolution tools to more smaller/medium-sized banks due to the
lack of sufficient funding to sustain resolution actions. The number of additional banks
that were earmarked for liquidation strategy under the baseline and would go in
resolution under this option cannot be estimated upfront, as the PIA remains a case-by-
case assessment by resolution authorities, retaining elements of discretion and is highly
dependent on the financial condition of the bank at the moment of failure as well as on its
access to funding (bank’s loss absorption capacity and safety nets) to conduct a
successful resolution. Moreover, the strategy set out for a bank by the resolution
authority at the planning stage (resolution
versus
liquidation) is a presumptive path based
on backward looking information which allows deviations to take account of the specific
situation at the moment of failure (e.g. idiosyncratic
versus
systemic crisis, level of
losses, available loss absorbing capacity in the bank, existence of a buyer, access to
funding from safety nets if needed, impact on deposits and on financial stability).
6.1.1.2. Conditions to access industry-funded safety nets
SRB (May 2021), SRB’s updated approach to PIA,
System-wide events in the public interest assessment.
The SRB already took steps to clarify the PIA in its internal policy. Also, please refer to Chapter 2, section
2.1.3 and the evaluation Annex 5, section 7.1.3.4.
72
48
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0050.png
Broadening the scope of PIA and placing more banks in resolution without facilitating
access to more funding in resolution, in particular for small/medium-sized banks with a
large deposit base, would increase the risk to financial stability or recourse to taxpayer
money. Therefore, the design of these two features, scope expansion and funding, have to
be approached consistently and holistically.
The core access condition to the RF/SRF (minimum bail-in of 8% TLOF) remains in
place to ensure protection of the fund against moral hazard
73
. Under this option and only
in case of transfer strategies
74
, depositors (including beyond covered ones) could be
shielded from taking losses in order to meet this requirement, provided that such
discretionary exclusion from bail-in is justified on financial stability grounds, as already
foreseen by the framework. To achieve this objective, once the first line of defence
against losses – the internal loss absorbing capacity of the bank (except deposits) is used,
the DGS would intervene
75
to support transfer strategies with market exit and cover
losses that would have otherwise been allocated to depositors to meet the 8% TLOF
requirement in order to access the RF/SRF. The DGS can intervene to this effect, if
allowed, and up to the amount determined by the least cost test to ensure that the
intervention is less costly than in a payout of covered deposits. Subject to conditions and
safeguards (only transfer strategies with market exit and least cost test - see also Box 2
for further details), this adjustment would facilitate the use of RF/SRF (a combination of
DGS and RF/SRF) for a larger number of smaller/medium-sized banks with a large
deposit base, while maintaining a strict access condition to the fund, avoiding moral
hazard and at the same time allowing resolution authorities to shield depositors from
taking losses when that is a threat to financial stability
76
.
As shown by the statistical analysis in Annex 7 (section 3.2.1), under a baseline
scenario
77
, deposits (non-preferred, preferred and in a few cases also covered) in 96
banks (26.1%) located in 20 Member States would suffer losses when reaching the 8%
TLOF threshold up to an aggregate amount of EUR 18.3 bn, based on balance sheet data
as of Q4 2019. In three Member States, deposits in more than half of the banks in the
sample would be affected. When only institutions which already had resolution strategies
under the 2019 PIA decision were considered, deposits in 44 banks would be affected up
to an aggregate amount of EUR 14.2 bn in 18 Member States. Under more severe
scenarios of equity depletion in the run up to a crisis, the share of affected banks would
A minimum bail-in of 8% TLOF must be applied to the bank’s shareholders and creditors (which may
include depositors) before accessing the resolution fund for solvency support.
74
See Annex 13 section 4 for an overview of resolution strategies by types of banks (size, business model).
75
The DGS can intervene in resolution under Article 109 BRRD, which could offer alternative funding for
smaller/medium-sized banks. See section 6.1.1.3.
76
Shielding deposits from taking losses as part of the resolution process may encourage the application of
resolution to more banks and facilitate the process of finding potential buyers interested in taking over
(parts of) the failed bank. The objective of shielding depositors from losses was in some of the past cases,
one of the reasons why tools other than resolution were used to deal with these cases, since the same
outcome could not be achieved with sufficient credibility and legal certainty as part of the resolution action
under the current framework. The review would address this.
77
Baseline scenario in Annex 7 refers to status quo assumptions: no equity depletion in the bank at
moment of failure and existing depositor preference (including super-preference of DGS) in the hierarchy
of claims. See section 3.2.1 in Annex 7. Other (combined) scenarios are also explored there.
73
49
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0051.png
increase significantly
78
. This would be mitigated to an extent when changing the tiered
depositor preference in the hierarchy of claims to a two-tier depositor preference (see
section 6.1.1.4) by virtue of prioritising all deposits
versus
other senior ordinary
unsecured claims.
The revisions under this option would improve the access to funding in resolution and
introduce more proportionality for banks that would be resolved under transfer strategies,
by protecting deposits from bail-in
79
, addressing in an effective manner the problem
pertaining to funding identified in Chapter 2.
Box 2: The DGS bridge mechanism to reach the RF/SRF
All packages of policy options other than the baseline propose the possibility to use the
national DGS funds as a bridge to reach the RF/SRF in specific cases and under framed
conditions in order to address problem 2 (described in Chapter 2). For certain banks with
a high prevalence of deposits, reaching 8% TLOF may only be possible when imposing
losses on depositors, despite compliance with the minimum requirement for own funds
and eligible liabilities (MREL)
80
. Hence, the DGS funds would contribute to supplement
the bail-in of the bank’s internal loss absorbing capacity (i.e. shareholders and creditors
other than deposits) to reach 8% TLOF and enable access to the RF/SRF, while shielding
deposits from losses, if necessary.
The DGS’ intervention in resolution to act as a bridge to reach the RF/SRF would be
framed by the following important safeguards:
(i)
Only applied when the resolution authority would have considered, on a case-
by-case basis, and only at resolution execution stage, that bailing-in deposits
would create financial stability issues and would consider the need to exempt
those deposits from bearing losses under Article 44(3) BRRD. In these cases,
the DGS could intervene only to replace losses that would have otherwise
been borne by depositors (covered and non-covered). Conversely, the
framework would retain the possibility for resolution authorities to bail-in
deposits rather than use the DGS fund, if appropriate;
Only if allowed under the reformed least cost test (see also Box 3) and only
up to the maximum between the amount allowed by the least cost test and the
gap required to reach 8% TLOF;
(ii)
78
From 96 banks with an aggregate EUR 18.30 bn affected deposits (44 banks with resolution strategy and
an aggregate EUR 14.16 bn affected deposits) under the baseline scenario, to 246 banks with an aggregate
EUR 83.1 bn affected deposits (117 banks with resolution strategy and an aggregate EUR 71.6 bn affected
deposits) under the next more severe CET1 depletion scenario assuming 75% depletion of buffers).
79
Shielding deposits, including non-covered ones, from bail-in is likely to improve the odds of finding a
buyer interested in acquiring the bank or parts of it (deposit book). Imposing losses on the uninsured part of
deposits increases the likelihood of runs and contagion, which is very likely to deter potential buyers from
purchasing (parts of) the failing bank.
80
Under the BRRD, deposits may be MREL eligible liabilities if they fulfil all eligibility criteria including
the remaining maturity over one year. Many smaller/mid-sized banks comply with their MREL
requirement by also relying on deposits (see
EBA MREL report as of December 2020,
in particular Figures
9, 10, 14, 15 and 17 which show that wholesale deposits (uncovered) are part of MREL resources for banks
with a total balance sheet size of up to EUR 50 bn). However, in a failing or likely to fail situation, it is
likely that deposits would be excluded from bail-in on financial stability grounds (under Art 44(3) BRRD),
leaving a gap compared to the MREL requirement.
50
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0052.png
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
Only applicable to banks with transfer strategies leading to market exit, to
avoid distorting competition with banks that would be restructured and
planned to remain on the market;
Only applicable to banks for which the resolution plan foreseen the
application of a resolution strategy and not wind-down under national
insolvency proceedings, to avoid incentives to resolve banks earmarked as
liquidation entities and which would not have built-up their MREL buffers;
Only for banks where the bail-in of liabilities consisting of shareholders and
creditors other than deposits cannot reach 8% TLOF.
In light of the above conditions, in practice, it is likely that this tool could be used for
smaller and medium-sized banks because they are more likely candidates for transfer
strategies and often rely on deposit funding.
Using DGS as a bridge to reach the 8% TLOF threshold to access RF/SRF is expected to
have numerous positive impacts. The primary purpose of the DGS bridge, as also shown
in the detailed description of policy options in Chapter 6 (sections referring to the
resolution financing arrangements and the hierarchy of claims under each option) and in
the analyses performed in Annex 7, section 4, is to enable access by more small and mid-
sized banks to resolution funding under the harmonised CMDI framework, so that more
such banks’ failures can be handled more efficiently under resolution, where there is a
public interest. It will reduce the cost of managing a bank failure, by using resolution as
the less costly procedure compared to insolvency. It will reduce the risk of imposing
losses on deposits, a factor that has been identified as one of the key reasons for avoiding
the application of the resolution framework in the past. This mechanism would therefore
make resolution a more credible option to handle a bank failure compared to other
avenues that often relied on taxpayer money.
The least cost test acts as a critical safeguard to ensure that the DGS bridge mechanism
reaches its goal and enables access to RF/SRF for more banks. However, the least cost
test is mainly dependent on the ranking of the DGS in the hierarchy of claims and limited
by the super-preference of DGS (see also Box 3). It is therefore very important to bundle
together changes that remove the super-preferred ranking of DGS in the hierarchy of
claims with the DGS bridge mechanism to ensure that the potential to place more banks
in resolution when this best meets the objectives is materialising.
It must be also clearly acknowledged that the least cost test will not allow the use of DGS
in all cases where it may be required to avoid inflicting losses on deposits in a sale of
business strategy, and that a tail scenario of cases will remain, where resolution funding
remains out of reach, potentially leading to bailing in deposits.
Importantly, strict access conditions to the resolution fund (RF/SRF), in the form of a
mandatory bail-in of at least 8% TLOF, are key to ensure a level playing field and avoid
moral hazard. The proposal does not weaken the 8% TLOF threshold and does not
disincentivise banks to hold sufficient amount of MREL for the following reasons:
(i) Incentives to reach MREL are built into the governance of the framework.
Resolution authorities calibrate MREL requirements for all banks with resolution
strategies, including smaller/mid-sized banks where appropriate, according to the
existing legal provisions. Failure to comply may be addressed through several
measures (e.g. restrictions to distribute dividends/ variable remuneration,
51
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0053.png
supervisory measures, penalties, procedure to remove impediments to
resolvability, early intervention measure or failing or likely to fail determination)
as well as market stigma when disclosing the MREL requirement and capacity to
the markets via market discipline. In other words, there are strong safeguards
already in the law to ensure that each bank would receive an appropriate MREL
requirement that would be enforced;
(ii) MREL requirements do not incorporate the 8% TLOF for smaller and medium-
sized banks, therefore a possible bridge to the 8% would not impact MREL as
such. The 8% TLOF access condition to the resolution fund is linked to a
minimum amount of bail-inable liabilities, not MREL eligible ones (which are a
subset of bail-inable liabilities). MREL requirements depend on the resolution
strategy chosen by the resolution authority, and the legislation does not introduce
a minimum level of MREL that would correspond to 8% TLOF for all banks (it is
only the case for the largest ones, with limited exceptions). In fact, most of the
small/mid-size banks are subject to transfer strategies, which generally imply a
lower level of MREL than for bail-in strategies in order to cover losses and
ensure market exit
81
. Therefore, by construction, there is no link between the 8%
TLOF threshold and MREL levels for smaller/mid-sized banks already in the
current framework. This does not mean, however, that these banks should never
access the resolution fund, and they are in fact contributing to its build-up;
(iii) There would be a very big price to pay (market exit) to use the DGS bridge
mechanism, therefore the latter cannot be considered as providing incentives not
to build sufficient buffers (MREL) for a crisis. The use of DGS as bridge facility
would be limited to cases where banks are subject to a transfer strategy that leads
to a market exit in case of failure. It would also be at the discretion of the
resolution authority (no automaticity). Furthermore, since the failed bank will
disappear and not be resurrected after resolution should DGS funds be used, this
mechanism de facto prevents any perceived advantage with regard to MREL
calibration or the use of DGS funds compared to other banks that would continue
operating after being restructured;
(iv) Moral hazard is, on the contrary, rather encouraged outside resolution via the
implicit subsidy provided by the availability of public funds in insolvency. By
allowing a more credible use of resolution via the DGS facility for specific banks,
the reform aims to disincentivise the recourse to taxpayer money, which may
affect market expectations
ex ante,
leading to more market discipline and
lowering moral hazard;
(v) Higher exposures to possible replenishment contributions for the industry as a
whole could result in peer pressure and further reduce moral hazard. Making use
81
8% TLOF is part of the MREL calibration only for global systemically important institutions (G-SIIs)
and top-tier banks (total assets above EUR 100 bn) as per BRRD II provisions. This BRRD II calibration of
MREL is targeted at open-bank bail in strategies, where the failing banks do not exit the market after
resolution, hence they need sufficient loss absorption and recapitalisation buffers. The latter component
(recapitalisation amount) is needed to a lesser extent for other resolution strategies leading to exit, which
preserves proportionality.
52
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0054.png
of industry-funded safety nets more frequently may increase the scrutiny by
market participants of risks taken by their peers, as banks may become liable to
replenish the funds once these are used to handle a bank failure. The DGS facility
may therefore increase market discipline in the framework.
Moreover, alternative approaches lowering the 8% TLOF threshold (for example by
allowing the use of the resolution funds even if 8% TLOF is not met) have been
explicitly discarded on the ground of increasing the risk of moral hazard (Chapter 6, or
Annex 14).
On this basis, allowing DGSs to bridge the gap to access the resolution funds would
introduce more proportionality for smaller/medium-sized banks under transfer strategies
and make the framework functional for these types of banks as well, without weakening
the minimum bail-in condition to access the resolution funds or increasing the risk of
moral hazard.
Figure 9: Stylised example DGS bridge mechanism versus status quo
This stylised example (further building on Box 1 in Chapter 2) shows the benefits of
using the DGS bridge mechanism compared to possible alternative avenues under the
status quo (resolution with bail-in of depositors, use of public funds, insolvency with
DGS payout of covered deposits). The example also highlights the potential impacts of
each approach on financial stability, depositor confidence and the use of taxpayer money.
It also shows that the involvement of DGS via such bridge mechanism would put a
significantly lower pressure on DGS financial means than a payout in insolvency.
Source: Commission services
53
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
54
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0056.png
6.1.1.3. Use of DGS funds
As under all options, the DGS would continue to contribute to the payout of covered
deposits, as well as to the use of preventive, resolution and alternative measures in
insolvency. In order to facilitate an effective DGS intervention, the following
adjustments and clarifications to the access conditions to the DGS funds would be
required:
DGS contribution and access condition to preventive measures: the conditions for
the intervention of a DGS for preventive measures (Article 11(3) DGSD) would
be improved by including relevant safeguards, i.e. ensuring that preventive
measures would be subject to an adequate least cost test and that a solid rationale
exists to justify the DGS intervention
82
. To ensure consistent, credible and
predictable outcomes when applying crisis management tools, the least cost test
would be harmonised to govern the use of DGS funds outside payout of covered
deposits in insolvency
83
but would take into account the specificities and timing
of preventive measures.
DGS contribution and access condition in resolution and insolvency: the
provision on the DGS use in resolution (Article 109 BRRD) would clarify
84
that
the DGS could also finance the transfer of deposits beyond the covered ones, if
needed to execute a sale of business transaction in resolution. The least cost test
conditioning the DGS intervention in resolution would be fully aligned with the
least cost test for alternative measures in insolvency.
Least cost test: the least cost test conditioning the DGS interventions would
provide elements for its quantification and the types of costs (direct and/or
indirect) that it could include
85
.
These adjustments to the conditions for accessing DGS funds would significantly
increase the legal clarity and applicability of rules and simplifying the framework by
harmonising some of the conditions, addressing problem 2 described in Chapter 2. These
amendments which are closely inter-related would contribute to a more coherent and
incentive-compatible framework.
6.1.1.4. Harmonisation of depositor preference in the hierarchy of claims: two-
tier preference
As explained in section 2 of Annex 8 and sections 4.1.1 to 4.1.3 of Annex 7, the super-
preference of the DGS, in line with the current framework (baseline scenario) and its
impact on the least cost test, is the main reason why the DGS cannot be used outside a
payout event under the least cost test
86
(see also Box 3). Withdrawing this super-
82
See Annex 6.
83
As foreseen by the
Eurogroup statement of 16 June 2022.
84
The legal interpretation under the current rules is that the DGS can be used to finance the transfer of the
whole deposit book in resolution. However, the legal text would benefit from clarification on this point.
85
See Annex 6.
86
The DGS can only provide an amount up to the losses it would bear in case of a hypothetical payout of
covered deposits in insolvency. These losses are given by the difference between the amount disbursed by
the DGS in case of a payout and the amount the DGS would recover from the sale of the bank’s assets in
55
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0057.png
preference and envisaging a more harmonised depositor preference, when compared to
the current situation with a three-tier depositor preference, is instrumental in accessing
funding in resolution and making resolution effective for smaller and medium-sized
banks. Option 2 explores the impacts of achieving a two-tier depositor preference
without the super-priority of covered deposits and DGS in the hierarchy of claims.
Box 3: The impact of DGS ranking in the hierarchy of claims
The objective of the least cost test safeguard is to ensure that any DGS intervention other
than paying out covered deposits would not expose the DGS to losses greater than the
ones it would incur in a payout of covered depositors in an insolvency counterfactual.
The amount of losses in the insolvency counterfactual depends, to an extent, on the
ranking of the DGS in the hierarchy of claims. Abstracting from other factors
influencing the recovery rates in insolvency (i.e. quality of assets, effectiveness of
insolvency regimes, overall duration of insolvency processes), the higher the ranking, the
higher the recovery for the DGS and therefore the less likely for the DGS to incur losses
in insolvency, which, in turn, makes it less likely for the least cost test to allow a DGS
contribution to support measures other than payout.
A quantitative analysis carried out by the EBA in the response to the Commission’s call
for advice (CfA) on funding in resolution
87
looked at the losses that depositors would
bear in order to meet the 8% total liabilities and own funds (TLOF) threshold and access
the resolution fund. This analysis, also reflected in Annex 7 (section 3.2.1), showed that,
under a baseline scenario
88
, deposits (non-preferred, preferred and in a few cases also
covered) in 91 banks (out of 368 banks in the sample) located in 20 Member States
would suffer losses up to an aggregate amount of EUR 18.3 bn (based on balance sheet
data as of Q4 2019) in order to reach the 8% TLOF threshold and access the resolution
fund.
When only institutions which already had resolution strategies under the 2019 PIA
decision were considered, deposits in 44 banks would be affected up to an aggregate
amount of EUR 14.2 bn in 18 Member States. Under more severe scenarios of equity
depletion in the run up to a crisis, the share of affected banks would increase
significantly
89
. This would be mitigated to an extent when changing the tiered depositor
preference in the hierarchy of claims to preferring all deposits
versus
other senior
ordinary unsecured claims and removing the super-preference of the DGS.
insolvency. Given the super-preferred ranking of the DGS in the hierarchy of claim, the DGS has, in some
Member States, the possibility to recover most or all its expenditure in the hypothetical insolvency.
However, this recovery rate is heterogeneous among Member States, depending on the efficiency of
judicial systems, quality of assets to be liquidated, time required to conduct the insolvency proceedings and
other factors. As a result, the DGS has very limited scope to intervene in resolution because the least cost
test on the basis of which the use of resolution tools would have to be assessed, would not allow for it.
87
EBA (October 2021),
Call for advice regarding funding in resolution and insolvency.
88
Baseline scenario refers to status quo assumptions: no equity depletion in the bank at moment of failure
and existing depositor preference (including super-preference of DGS) in the hierarchy of claims.
89
From 96 banks with an aggregate EUR 18.30 bn affected deposits (44 banks with resolution strategy and
an aggregate EUR 14.16 bn affected deposits) under the baseline scenario, to 246 banks with an aggregate
EUR 83.1 bn affected deposits (117 banks with resolution strategy and an aggregate EUR 71.6 bn affected
deposits) under the next more severe CET1 depletion scenario assuming 75% depletion of capital buffers).
56
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0058.png
Summary of impacts of various depositor preference scenarios on bailing-in deposits
when reaching 8% TLOF
Institutions that would
Of which: Institutions
require DGS
for which DGS can
intervention to reach
intervene (positive least
8% TLOF to avoid
cost test)
losses on depositors
91
3
48
41
Of which: Institutions
for which DGS
interventions under the
LCT are sufficient to
reach 8% TLOF
2
31
13
2
2
Baseline
Single-tier preference
Two-tier preference (no
48
18
super-preference)
Two-tier preference
48
3
(with super-preference)
Three-tier preference
48
3
(with super-preference)
Source: EBA Call for advice, summary of evidence from Annex 7, section 4.1.1.
Note: analysis based on a total sample of 368 banks at consolidated level. The figure above assumes no
CET1 depletion in the event of failure. If CET1 depletion were factored in, the impact on deposits would
increase very significantly.
The EBA analysis also considered the possibility to use the DGS fund as a bridge to
reach the 8% TLOF and avoid such losses on depositors. The analysis has shown that,
under the current framework, the least cost test would yield a positive result and allow
for DGS use in resolution, for only three out of 91 banks (out of a total sample of 368
banks) where deposits would bear losses to access resolution funding (8% TLOF),
considering an 85% recovery rate in insolvency
90
. The least cost test would allow a
sufficient DGS support to reach 8% TLOF for two out of these three banks.
Preferring all deposits
versus
ordinary unsecured claims would reduce the number of
banks where deposits would be impacted when reaching 8% TLOF, from 91 banks in the
baseline scenario to 48 (out of 368 banks in total).
It can be concluded based on this evidence that, under the baseline (status quo), the DGS
can almost never be used for measures other than the payout of covered deposits in
insolvency (see table above and section 4.1.1 of Annex 7) because its ranking and
consequently high likelihood to get its claims paid before other creditors make the
counterfactual of a payout in insolvency artificially less costly, despite the fact that a
DGS contribution to resolution or an alternative measure could be more cost efficient
(involve a lower need for cash disbursement from the DGS to support a sale of business
strategy, compared to a full payout of all covered deposits), better preserve depositors’
confidence and facilitate a more efficient crisis management. On one hand, paying out
covered deposits in insolvency is likely to require a very significant upfront cash
disbursement by the DGS (especially in cases of predominantly deposit-funded mid-
sized banks with significant amounts of covered deposits)
91
. On the other hand, an
90
An 85% recovery rate is a conservative assumption and for several Member States, recovery rates are
actually lower. Therefore, in those cases their DGS funds would recover less after a payout of covered
deposits in insolvency (i.e. the burden of the counterfactual of the payout is underestimated) and in reality,
the LCT could be even more favourable to other alternatives to payout of covered deposits in insolvency,
such as DGS intervention in resolution.
91
See a more detailed analysis in Annex 5 (evaluation), sections 7.1.4.4 and 7.2.2.6 and ECB (October
2022),
Protecting depositors and saving money - why DGS in the EU should be able to support transfers of
assets and liabilities when a bank fails.
57
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0059.png
intervention in resolution to support the transfer of a failing bank to a buyer may require
only a portion of those DGS financial means. Transfer transactions can unfold in many
ways, depending on the quality of assets and the funding/liabilities to match these, as
well as the appetite of the buyer and the offered price. Considering the likely need to
plug a gap between the value of assets and deposits to be transferred to a buyer, the
DGS/resolution fund contribution to support such transfer may be much lower than the
total value of covered deposits that would need to be paid out in insolvency. Under the
current set-up, the DGS super-priority ends up protecting the financial means of the DGS
and of the banking industry from possible replenishment burden by hindering any DGS
intervention, without bringing a better protection for covered deposits. The protection of
covered deposits does not depend on their ranking in the hierarchy of claims; rather, it is
insured through the obligation to be paid out under the DGSD when accounts become
unavailable and the mandatory exclusion from bearing any losses in resolution.
The implementation of a two-tier depositor preference without the super-preference of
DGS and covered deposits would require two changes in the BRRD rules on the ranking
of deposits (Article 108 BRRD). First, the legal preference in the hierarchy of claims
would be harmonised at EU level to include all deposits, meaning deposits would rank
above ordinary senior unsecured claims in all Member States. Second, the current three-
tier approach would be replaced with a two-tier ranking, whereby covered and preferred
deposits would rank
pari passu
and above non-preferred non-covered deposits
92
. Annex
7 and 8 further describe the detailed impact of different depositor preference scenarios
assessed, varying in scope and relative ranking among deposits.
Introducing a depositor preference in the hierarchy of claims (be it a two-tier or single-
tier, as proposed in option 3) would facilitate the bail-in of ordinary unsecured claims
and potentially decrease the likelihood of inflicting losses on deposits. It would also
mitigate risks related to potential breaches of the NCWO safeguard currently existing in
the baseline option, which could arise when some of the deposits that rank
pari passu
with ordinary unsecured creditors are discretionarily excluded from bail-in by the
resolution authority, on contagion and financial stability grounds
93
. This, in turn, may
give rise to legal challenges and potential compensation claims by the ordinary unsecured
creditors if they can prove that they were treated worse-off in resolution than in
insolvency, particularly when they represent a significant share of the ordinary senior
unsecured class. At the same time, keeping via the two-tier approach a distinction
between covered and preferred deposits (i.e. eligible deposits of natural persons and
SMEs) on one hand and the remaining non-covered deposits on the other hand, would
facilitate the bail-in of the latter deposits, in situations where that would not affect
financial stability, thereby preserving some flexibility by resolution authorities on how to
allocate losses. However, as explained in Annex 8, considering that smaller and medium-
sized banks primarily serve retail and SME clients and that the volume of “wholesale”
deposits may not be material in some banks, this flexibility may not be used in all cases.
92
See also Figure 29 in Annex 8, section 2, for a stylised view of creditor hierarchy in insolvency with a
two-tier depositor preference and without the super-preference of DGS/covered deposits.
93
Pursuant to Article 44(3) of the BRRD.
58
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0060.png
The removal of the DGS super-preference would increase to a relative extent, compared
to the baseline, the amount of funds the DGS could contribute for measures other than
payout under the least cost test. However, because the DGS would still be a preferred
creditor in relation to non-covered non-preferred deposits, the increase in DGS funds
unlocked under the least cost test for these measures would be significantly lower than
under a single-tier depositor preference explored in options 3 and 4, where all deposits
would rank
pari passu
in the hierarchy of claims.
According to the quantitative analysis in Annex 7 (section 4.1.3), 48 banks would require
additional resources to meet 8% TLOF and access the resolution fund without imposing
losses on depositors when preferring deposits
versus
ordinary unsecured claims, as
opposed to 91 banks under the current hierarchy of claims, which does not feature a
preference of deposits. A two-tier depositor preference without the super-preference for
DGS would lead to a least cost test result where the DGS could contribute for 18 banks
out of the 48 to bridge financing needs to shield deposits from losses and help meet the
8% TLOF condition to access the RF/SRF. The number of banks where the DGS funds
could contribute under a two-tier preference without super-priority for DGS would be
improved compared to the baseline, where only three banks could benefit from DGS
contributions but it would be lower than under a single-tier depositor preference where
41 banks could benefit from DGS contributions (considered under options 3 and 4).
Under the two-tier depositor preference without the super-priority for DGS claims, the
DGS intervention to plug the gap towards accessing the resolution fund would be
sufficient to meet 8% TLOF in 13 cases (out of the 48)
versus
two under the baseline and
31 banks under a single-tier depositor preference (options 3 and 4). In terms of euro
amount, the DGS could be allowed to contribute under the least cost test for an estimated
amount of EUR 0.21 bn under a two-tier depositor preference without the super-priority
for DGS, compared to EUR 0.05 bn under the baseline and EUR 0.98 bn under a single-
tier depositor preference. Table 25 in Annex 7 also shows that maintaining the super-
preference of DGS does not unlock more funds compared to the baseline, even if all
depositors were preferred compared to ordinary unsecured claims. Therefore, removing
the DGS super-preference is an important element of the preferred policy option to reach
the objectives envisaged by this initiative.
Annex 8 explains in detail why the removal of the super-preference of covered deposits
and the DGS in the hierarchy of claims does not impede in any way on the protection
enjoyed by covered deposits, but it allows for the use of DGS funds earlier and in a more
effective and efficient manner.
Some stakeholders (including a few Member States and banks) argue that preserving a
super-priority for DGS in the hierarchy of claims is instrumental in ensuring the recovery
of funds used to payout covered deposits in insolvency, even if the creditor payout in
insolvency can take many years (depending on the judicial system in each Member State
and the approach to liquidate assets
94
). Importantly, the amount of cash the DGS must
94
In some Member States and in specific cases, the approach to liquidate assets in insolvency is to sell
those assets to buyers which may take several years to complete. In other cases, depending on the bank’s
business, a solvent wind-down of assets may be pursued, meaning that proceeds are recovered by
respecting the reimbursement schedule of assets, which for certain loan portfolios such as mortgages can
take tens of years.
59
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0061.png
disburse in a payout in insolvency corresponds to the total amount of covered deposits in
bank (plus other direct costs) and, as shown in the evaluation (sections 7.1.4.4. and
7.2.2.6), it is likely to be significantly higher than the amount the DGS would need to
contribute to fund the gap between assets and liabilities for facilitating a transfer strategy
in resolution or as alternative measure. Additionally, by facilitating transfer strategies in
resolution, the franchise value of the failing bank’s assets is preserved as opposed to
insolvency
95
and so is the client relationship, which is transferred to a new bank rather
than being interrupted, avoiding thus potential contagion effects and impacts on financial
stability. Therefore, the difference in costs for the DGS between pursuing more
resolution
versus
insolvency lies in the more efficient usage of funds, facilitated by
removing the super-preference of DGS in the hierarchy of claims.
6.1.1.5. Use of industry-funded safety nets and cost synergies for banks
The assessment of costs and potential synergies for the industry looks at two main
aspects: (i) impacts on banks’ contributions to safety nets and (ii) the impact of the policy
measures on the banks’ requirements to hold loss absorbing capacity.
Regarding the contributions to safety nets, under option 2, banks will continue to
contribute to the safety nets (RF/SRF and DGS) as under the baseline option (status quo),
without any changes to the contribution levels. However, facilitating the use of DGS
funds to support the financing of various measures outside payout by modifying the
hierarchy of claims may lead to a more frequent usage of these funds and potentially
drive up the replenishment burden for the industry, despite the mitigation by the least
cost test. It should be noted however, that depending on the features of the sale of
business transactions and the form of the support measures required, such replenishment
obligations/ex
post
contributions may not materialise for banks (e.g. DGS may contribute
with guarantees to the buyer rather than cash injection). Moreover,
ex post
industry
contributions to replenish a depleted DGS fund may not only be triggered by the uses of
DGS in resolution or alternative measures; they may also occur when the recovery of
proceeds from the insolvency estate following a payout event takes very long time. The
net impact for the industry in terms of DGS replenishment needs cannot be estimated as
it would be a case-by-case assessment in function of the nature of the transfer transaction
(full or partial), the amount of losses and DGS contribution under the least cost test. In
any case, this possible cost increase for the banking industry would not be compensated
by any cost reduction in the DGS contributions, contrary to option 4 where the pooling of
funds in EDIS opens this possibility.
Another relevant aspect when assessing costs for the industry is the usage of the SRF
versus
DGS funds in the Banking Union. Since the SRF is a central fund consisting of
pooled contributions by all banks in the Banking Union, its use would trigger
replenishment needs spread out over the Banking Union population of banks. DGS funds,
in the absence of EDIS, remain national under this policy option meaning that
replenishment needs bear on the national banking system in the Member State where the
95
According to the valuation methodology, the haircut imposed on assets in a transfer transaction is lower
than the haircut that could be imposed in some situations in insolvency. This may not be the case in a wind-
down liquidation which may take a very long time to complete.
60
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0062.png
DGS funds were used. From a cost synergy perspective at system level, it is therefore
more interesting, in the absence of EDIS, to use SRF funds and, in order to do so more
credibly, the DGS could provide a financing bridge to meeting the SRF access condition,
as explained in section 6.1.1.2 above.
Regarding the banks’ loss absorbing capacity, smaller and medium-sized banks
previously earmarked for liquidation and which would enter the resolution scope due to
the PIA changes under this option, would need to comply with a MREL requirement. The
MREL target would be calibrated proportionately and in line with the preferred
resolution strategy, which for transfer strategies could be lower than for open bank bail-
in strategies. This is because the loss absorbing capacity would support a transfer of (a
set of) assets, rights and liabilities of a bank to a buyer with a simultaneous market exit of
the former and not a full restructuring and recapitalisation to allow the bank to continue
to operate in the market on a standalone basis.
Looking at the funding equation as a whole and in order to substitute potential public
funds injections (frequently observed in the past), the private sources of financing for a
bank failure would be a combination of banks’ loss absorption capacity, contributions by
RF/SRF and contributions by DGS, where option 2 would have the potential to
marginally improve the balance among the elements (resolution scope and funding) and
enhance economic efficiency of the funding equation though not at a zero net cost for the
industry (compared to the baseline).
6.1.1.6. Assessment of Option 2
Benefits
The main benefit of option 2 would be a relative expansion of the scope of resolution to
include smaller/medium-sized banks by slightly increasing the availability of funding
solutions for some specific resolution strategies leading to market exit. This option would
ensure a more flexible and harmonised use of DGS funds thanks to changes in the
hierarchy of claims and harmonisation of the least cost test and increasing the
proportionality when accessing the RF/SRF in resolution, under specific conditions and
safeguards. These changes to the funding equation would make transfer strategies
96
easier and more credible to plan and implement than under the baseline, contributing to
the orderly handling of failed banks and ensuring their market exit without impacts on
financial stability or depositor protection while reducing the recourse to public funds. In
terms of access to external funding, this option would indeed lower to some extent the
recourse to public funds, as banks’ loss absorbing capacity complemented, where needed,
by industry-funded safety nets would be used instead to fund more resolution actions for
more banks under the harmonised framework.
These changes are also likely to increase the convergence in resolution practices, legal
certainty, level playing field and simplify and standardise the access conditions to DGS
funds (through a harmonised least cost test and clearer conditions for a contribution to
preventive measures). The review of certain DGSD aspects (see section 6.3) and the
96
Whether transfer strategies in resolution or under insolvency proceedings, where available.
61
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0063.png
legislative changes concerning the PIA leading to an increased application of resolution
tools would also improve depositor confidence and preserve a continuous access of
depositors to their accounts, which can be particularly important in EU’s increasingly
digitalised economies.
Moreover, enabling the application of resolution tools such as transfer tools on a broader
scale and the related funding could be conducive to further financial stability and cross-
border market integration.
Costs
The main drawback of this option is the untapped potential expansion of the resolution
scope because of an insufficiently effective improvement in the funding equation. This
may impact the efficiency and effectiveness of the framework and may not provide an
optimal solution to address some of the issues identified in Chapter 2. Implementing
option 2 requires indeed similar legal amendments as foreseen under option 3, but with
more modest effects in terms of outcomes, implying therefore comparatively higher
adjustment costs for resolution authorities when assessed against results. Option 2 would
yield a lower probability of PIA expansion for the same number of banks and a lower
amount of DGS funds unlocked under the least cost test for measures other than the
payout of covered deposits in insolvency, than options 3 and 4 (i.e. as shown in Annex 7,
a two-tier depositor preference would deliver a lower total amount of DGS funds that
could contribute for a smaller number of banks to fund resolution or alternative measures
than under a single-tier depositor preference analysed in option 3).
A consequence of a broader use of DGS funds for interventions other than payout of
covered depositors in insolvency (depending also on the needs to access the RF/SRF and
protected by safeguards such as the least cost test and the two-tier depositor preference)
is a risk of shortfall in national DGS funds. Without EDIS, the probability of DGS
shortfalls ranges from 20.7% to 56% depending on the severity of the simulated crisis
97
and independently of a possible CMDI impact compounding the risk of shortfalls in
national DGSs. These shortfalls could be mitigated through extraordinary contributions
by the banking industry or lending from other DGSs. DGS shortfalls could also be
mitigated through lending from the market, or recourse to public funds; however the
latter would reinforce the bank-sovereign nexus. DGS’ vulnerability to large shocks may
also impair depositor confidence in the banking sector. In addition, the limited potential
for cost synergies for banks (e.g. diversification and compensation effects leading
potentially to a lower target level or contributions) would not materialise in this option.
Option 2 would also require additional coordination and consultation between resolution
and DGS authorities. The DGS intervention to bridge the gap to 8% TLOF to access to
the RF/SRF would require additional preparation. However, despite more preparation
work, such a mechanism would ensure broader access to resolution funding for
smaller/medium-sized banks and address to some extent the funding-related problems
97
The amounts of these DGS shortfalls would range from EUR 0.3 bn to EUR 0.5 bn. However, these
amounts are probably significantly underestimated as they are calculated only on a sample of banks. See
Annex 7, section 4.4.2.
62
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0064.png
identified, slightly reducing costs in other areas (taxpayer money, loss of franchise value
and loss of depositor confidence).
In addition, placing more banks in resolution than under the baseline option entails a
requirement for them to ensure adequate levels of internal loss absorbing capacity
(MREL) to allow for the execution of resolution strategies (bail-in or transfer strategies).
The MREL requirement is bank-specific, proportionate to the chosen resolution strategy
and it may be complied with own funds and eligible liabilities. It is impossible to
estimate
ex ante,
whether such a policy change would lead to a need for banks to issue
additional MREL capacity, mainly due to two factors: (i) the level of bank-specific
MREL targets that resolution authorities would set for banks entering the resolution
scope needs case by case calibration and cannot be estimated in advance and (ii) the
starting point in terms of outstanding stock of MREL eligible instruments that each bank
holds combined with the level of the requirement determines the issuances needs of each
bank which cannot be estimated in advance
98
. Nevertheless, it should be recalled that, in
line with the fundamental objectives of the CMDI, the first line of defence in case of
bank distress, should always be the banks’ internal loss absorption capacity. A mitigating
factor for failing banks would be avoiding the bail-in of depositors and preserving asset
value by using the safety nets in case the MREL capacity were not sufficient to support
the resolution action, subject to safeguards.
Moreover, banks entering the scope of resolution for the first time would also be subject
to the obligation to enhance recovery plans, provide information to resolution authorities
on a more frequent basis for the preparation of more extensive resolution plans and
ensure they become resolvable. While this would also involve additional costs for banks,
these are estimated to be marginal, because banks earmarked for liquidation already
report data to resolution authorities who prepare resolution plans albeit on a less frequent
basis (simplified obligations). Banks entering the resolution scope would also need to
invest in projects to become more resolvable (i.e. enhancing their management
information systems, valuation capabilities, revising contracts to assure resolution stays
with counterparts, other projects related to the organisation structure and separability).
The benefits of improving preparedness and resolvability of banks in case of failure
would increase the chances of preserving financial stability and taxpayer funds and
exceed such costs.
Finally, increasing depositor preference, by rendering all deposits senior to ordinary
unsecured debt (be it through a two-tier depositor ranking or a single-tier depositor
ranking under options 3 and 4) has the potential to lead to marginally higher issuance
costs for ordinary unsecured debt (and by extent to marginally higher funding costs for
banks) by reducing their potential recovery prospects in the event of a bank’s insolvency.
However, this pricing impact is not supported by empirical evidence
99
. Moreover, any
potential marginal cost impact must be weighed against the added benefits that depositor
preference brings in terms of enforcing market discipline on financial investors to
98
99
See Annex 13, section 5.
See for example, the IMF Working Paper 13/172 (July 2013),
Bank Resolution Costs, Depositor
Preference, and Asset Encumbrance,
from a review of previous studies it concludes that introducing a
single-tier depositor preference in the US had “little “systemic effect” on overall bank funding costs.
63
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0065.png
monitor banks’ risks more closely, once their expectation that they will be bailed-in
(instead of being bailed-out under a less effective CMDI framework) becomes more
credible.
Overall assessment
Effectiveness, efficiency and coherence: Under option 2, the slightly broader use of
resolution tools thanks to a slightly improved access to funding for more banks
(compared to the baseline option) would enhance financial stability and decrease to some
extent the recourse to taxpayer money, however not to the full potential that a more
comprehensive CMDI reform could achieve (as described under option 3 or 4). Critical
functions for the society (e.g. deposit taking, lending, payments) and the franchise asset
value of failing institutions would be better maintained by applying resolution tools more
broadly than today and enabling the more extensive use of industry-funded safety nets
such as the RF/SRF and DGS funds, subject to the minimum 8% TLOF bail-in access
condition and the least cost test safeguard respectively. However, the relatively moderate
increase in the scope of resolution (see PIA section 6.1.1.1) correlated with a slight
improvement in accessing DGS funds through the implementation of a two-tier depositor
preference in the hierarchy of claims and the use of DGS funds to fill the gap in
accessing the RF/SRF, would still maintain a higher degree of uncertainty and potential
divergences in the application of the PIA than under other options. The absence of EDIS
would also render it less effective in ensuring depositor protection and sufficient liquidity
in case of DGS funding shortfalls, contributing therefore comparatively less than option
4 to protecting taxpayer funds and breaking the bank-sovereign nexus. Moreover, absent
EDIS, the potential for cost synergies through lower contributions to the RF/SRF and
DGS funds by the industry would not materialise (unlike in option 4). On the contrary,
some banks may face increased costs (potentially raising MREL eligible instruments,
ex
post
replenishment needs for the safety nets as well as the obligation to enhance their
recovery plans and become more resolvable because of broadening the resolution scope)
which may be passed-through, to some extent, to customers.
Stakeholder views and political considerations: The majority of Member States favouring
a strong CMDI reform could consider this option as sub-optimal because of the untapped
potential for broadening the scope of resolution supported by a more ambitious revision
of the funding equation, in particular the harmonisation of the depositor preference. One
Member State is reluctant to facilitate the usage of industry-funded safety nets in
resolution (RF/SRF) for non-systemic banks and, in this context, favours handling the
failure of smaller/medium-sized banks at national level and with national DGS funds
rather than under the harmonised framework. Depositors in particular would greatly
benefit from solutions that avoid inflicting losses on them and ensure their uninterrupted
access to their accounts
100
. They may therefore regard this option as sub-optimal because
the resolution scope would not be expanded to its full potential, meaning that some
deposits may still be on the line to bear losses when applying resolution tools.
Regarding the industry, the majority of stakeholders from both big and small/medium
sized banks see merit in targeted amendments of the framework to improve its practical
100
See responses to the
public
and
targeted
consultations.
64
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0066.png
application, in particular views converge on the need to improve the predictability and
transparency of the PIA assessment and to avoid paying additional contributions into
industry funded safety nets. However, views of some small and large banks diverge on
the need to broaden the scope of resolution. On one hand, some smaller/medium-sized
banks, in particular cooperatives and savings banks
101
may prefer to stay outside the
scope of resolution to avoid costs related to additional requirements (MREL, reporting
obligations to resolution authorities for resolution planning and MREL calibration,
increased scrutiny by markets) or possible
ex post
contributions to the safety nets
(RF/SRF or DGS). Many large banks, on the other hand, are supportive of bringing more
smaller/medium sized banks into the resolution scope, regardless of their size and
country of origin, and enhancing the credibility, predictability and consistency of the
framework as well as level playing field in the single market. Large banks also support
minimising risks to taxpayer money and minimising moral hazard by ensuring a use of
internal resolution buffers and a consistent and careful approach across the EU for the
use of industry funded safety nets subject to a harmonised least cost test, supporting
market discipline and avoiding competitive distortions. On the other hand, they are
critical of the prospect of paying additional contributions into the safety nets, if these
were to be used more frequently to handle the failure of more small/mid-sized banks
102
.
Winners and losers: Reduced risks to financial stability through a potentially slightly
broader application of resolution tools under this option would benefit taxpayers and
depositors. Depositors, including individuals and SMEs, would be better off than under
the baseline option due to continued access to their deposits and the continuity of the
bank’s critical functions through more extensive use of resolution and thanks to a more
effective use of DGS resources in general. This impact, however, would be limited to the
resources available in the DGS until there is progress on EDIS and would be less certain
than under options 3 and 4 where the expansion of resolution is broader given a positive
presumption of public interest and hence resolution.
Resolution authorities are also winners in this option. They would benefit from legal
clarifications of the PIA and more consistent rules on access to funding in resolution and
insolvency. This would reduce their risk of legal challenge. The increased access to
funding in resolution for transfer strategies would permit them to confidently take
positive PIA decisions and facilitate their implementation, although this would imply
additional work in improving the planning of such strategies.
The impact on the DGS funds and consequently on banks’ contributions is twofold. On
the one hand, DGS funds could be used more frequently than under the baseline if
cheaper than paying out covered deposits in insolvency (thanks to harmonising the
hierarchy of claims by implementing a two-tier depositor preference which facilitates
meeting the least cost test, although not as much as under a single-tier preference
explored under option 3), potentially increasing the need to replenish depleted DGSs on
the basis of industry contributions. On the other hand, such an impact could be mitigated
by a broader use of transfer strategies, increasing the cost efficiency of DGS
101
ESBG (The European Savings and Retail Banking Group) (October, 2022),
Short paper on the CMDI
framework.
102
AFME (Association for Financial Markets in Europe – an association of large banks) (October 2022),
Position paper on the CMDI review.
65
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0067.png
interventions, and better preserving DGS available financial means, compared to a more
costly payout in insolvency
103
.
As originally intended by the framework but not observed in its application to date (see
evaluation), banks’ senior creditors
104
would likely be losers under option 2, as they
could bear relatively more losses if more banks are put in resolution upon failing. In this
context, option 2, when compared to the baseline, may transfer some benefits from
banks’ creditors back to taxpayers, depositors and the society. Importantly, enabling
access to resolution financing by using the DGS fund for transfer strategies would not
discriminate against banks with open bank bail-in strategy because the latter would be
recapitalised, restructured and continue their operations, while banks under transfer
strategies would need to exit the market as a condition for the more proportionate
funding access.
6.1.2. Option 3 – Substantially improved resolution funding and commensurate
resolution scope
Option 3 envisages reviewing certain elements of the CMDI framework (BRRD/SRMR,
DGSD) achieving a robust reform of the funding equation, which would facilitate a more
credible and significant expansion of the resolution scope to more smaller and medium-
sized banks whose failure may not be handled in insolvency without consequence on
financial stability, taxpayer money and depositor protection. This option is designed to
deliver a broader use of resolution tools supported by a more substantial access to
funding than under option 2, but not as broad as under option 4 where EDIS as a
common central fund would act as a backstop to the national DGS funds.
6.1.2.1. Public interest assessment
Legislative amendments to the PIA under this option (in line with option 2) would
include regional economic considerations in the assessment of critical functions and
financial stability implications, the need to preserve DGS resources and the possible
granting of State aid in insolvency as part of the considerations on the resolution
objectives
105
. Importantly and differently from option 2, the legislative amendments to
the PIA would also clarify that national insolvency proceedings should be selected as the
preferred strategy only when they achieve the framework’s objectives better than
resolution (as oppose to achieving them in the same manner, as under the baseline and
option 2), leading to an increased prevalence to put banks in resolution, as the resolution
authorities would face a slightly increased burden of proof to place banks in insolvency.
Nevertheless, the PIA decision will remain at the discretion of the resolution authority on
a case-by-case basis. The outcome, in terms of expanding the resolution scope under
option 3, would be less ambitious than under option 4, where the inclusion of EDIS in the
funding solution would allow an even larger scope to apply resolution and a general
103
104
See Annex 6.
Banks’ shareholders and junior creditors would bear losses first, as also the case under State aid rules.
However, the BRRD already foresees that the claims held by senior creditors could also be bailed-in, in
order to cover losses and recapitalise an institution.
105
SRB (May 2021), SRB’s updated approach to PIA,
System-wide events in the public interest
assessment.
The SRB already took steps to clarify the PIA in its internal policy.
66
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0068.png
presumption of positive PIA. As also mentioned under other options, the number of
additional banks channelled through resolution under this option cannot be estimated
upfront as the PIA remains a case-by-case assessment by resolution authorities.
However, the strengthening of the PIA provisions in the legislation coupled with credible
funding in resolution are likely to allow a significant broadening of resolution
application.
6.1.2.2. Conditions to access industry-funded safety nets
From the perspective of improving access to funding in resolution, the adjustments to
access criteria under this option would be the same as under options 2 and 4, i.e.
implementing the possibility to use DGS funds as a bridge to meet 8% TLOF and reach
the RF/SRF for transfer strategies with market exit in order to avoid imposing losses on
deposits, where that is desired on financial stability grounds. The key distinction in the
funding solution between options 2 and 3 is the amount of DGS funds made available for
potential interventions outside the payout event, in particular resolution strategies leading
to market exit (see section 6.1.2.4 for the corresponding change to the hierarchy of
claims envisaged). This more ambitious reform to the funding solution in resolution is
matched by a more ambitious expansion of the resolution scope.
6.1.2.3. Use of DGS funds
Under Option 3, DGS funds would contribute to the payout of covered deposits,
preventive, resolution and alternative measures under insolvency proceedings. Access
conditions would be clarified in the same way as under option 2.
These adjustments would address the problem of unclear and inconsistent rules in
accessing DGS funding, contributing to improved level playing field also delivering
clearer rules leading to more legal certainty (e.g. the least cost test).
6.1.2.4. Harmonisation of depositor preference in the hierarchy of claims:
single-tier depositor preference
Option 3 explores a harmonisation of the ranking of deposits in the hierarchy of claims
through a single-tier depositor preference and by removing the super-preference of
covered depositors and the DGS in the hierarchy of claims
106
. This entails two changes
being introduced in the BRRD. First, as under option 2, the legal preference at EU level
would be extended to include all deposits (general depositor preference), meaning that all
deposits, including eligible deposits of large corporates and excluded (uninsured)
deposits
107
, would rank above ordinary senior unsecured claims. Second, the existing
different relative ranking of deposits (i.e. the current three-tier approach) would be
replaced by a single ranking, whereby all deposits rank at the same level (i.e.
pari passu)
amongst themselves (single-tier approach). Annex 7 further describes the different
106
See Figure 29 in Annex 8, section 2, for a stylised view of creditor hierarchy in insolvency with a
single-tier depositor preference.
107
The deposits of public authorities would no longer be deemed as excluded deposits (see Annex 6,
section 3.2.6).
67
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0069.png
depositor preference scenarios assessed, varying in scope and relative ranking among
deposits.
Annexes 7 and 8 (section 2) provide evidence that the general depositor preference with a
single-tier ranking would best address the objective of the revised framework, because it
would: (i) protect deposits in resolution by reducing the amount that would be otherwise
bailed-in to reach 8% TLOF and access the RF/SRF; (ii) maintain intact the protection
enjoyed by covered deposits which does not depend on their ranking and (iii) unlock the
largest amounts of funds that the DGS could contribute to measures other than the payout
of covered deposits under the least cost test, which is critical for facilitating more cost-
efficient interventions by the DGS, as proposed under this option. It should also be
acknowledged that, by placing non-covered non-preferred deposits (e.g. deposits of large
corporates) on the same ranking as covered and preferred deposits (deposits of
households and SMEs) and facilitating the use of the DGS bridge, banks would need to
replenish the DGS funds to protect not only covered and preferred deposits, but also
deposits of large corporates in the context of a transfer strategy. While it may expose the
DGS industry-funded safety nets to more frequent contributions by the banks, it would
reduce the likelihood and extent of recourse to taxpayer money, improve financial
stability and depositor protection and safeguard the financial means of the DGS to a
greater extent than a payout of covered deposits in insolvency.
As highlighted in Annex 7 (section 4.1.3), a comparative analysis of depositor preference
scenarios showed that the single-tier preference would best shield deposits from bearing
losses by reducing most significantly the number of banks where deposits would be
impacted when reaching 8% TLOF, from 96 banks in the baseline scenario to 48 (out of
368 banks in total), reducing the value of impacted deposits from EUR 18.3 bn in the
baseline to EUR 6.4 bn and unlocking on aggregate up to 20 times more funds for DGS
contributions under the least cost test (EUR 0.98 bn) than under the baseline or the
alternative scenarios retaining the super-preference of DGS (EUR 0.05 bn). Under the
single-tier preference, the DGS intervention under the least cost test would be sufficient
to bridge the gap towards 8% TLOF in 76% of cases when considering the entire sample
and in 88% of cases when considering only banks with resolution strategy
108,109
.
The analysis shows that some deposits in a number of banks would not be shielded from
losses in case the 8% TLOF needs to be met. In view of a greater protection of deposits,
alternatives solutions for certain tail scenarios may be explored. For instance, should the
DGS support not be sufficient or not be able to intervene due to the least cost test to
cover the gap between the assets and the deposits transferred
110
, the RF/SRF might
108
The resolution or liquidation strategy of banks in the analysed sample reflects the PIA decisions as of
Q4 2019. Given the intended expansion of the PIA, the results based on the entire sample as well as the
ones considering only banks with resolution strategies as of Q4 2019 are provided for comparison in
Annex 7.
109
These results are based on an assumption for a recovery rate of 85% in the insolvency counterfactual
when conducting the least cost test. A lower recovery rate would mean that the DGS would be able to
contribute more and shield more depositors in a larger number of banks, as explained in Annex 7, section
4.5, while a higher recovery rate would have the opposite effect.
110
DGS contributions to reach 8% TLOF may not be sufficient due to the least cost test limit or the cap
when using the DGS funds for an individual bank (0.4% of covered deposits, or 50% of the DGS means).
68
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0070.png
provide additional financial support (irrespective of whether the 8% TLOF has been
reached or not), when justified based on financial stability grounds or other exceptional
circumstances. However, this additional flexibility was discarded as the 8% TLOF access
condition to the resolution fund is generally perceived as a critical safeguard against
moral hazard.
Regarding the argument of cost-efficiency associated with the use of DGS funds in
resolution or alternative measures
versus
the cost of a payout of covered deposits, an
ECB report on DGS alternative measures
111
shows that 261 banks, banking groups or
hosted subsidiaries in the Banking Union could individually deplete their fully-filled
DGSs with a single payout of covered deposits in insolvency. While 129 of these banks
are significant institutions likely to involve resolution rather than a depositor payout in
insolvency, the 132 remaining are less significant institutions or their hosted subsidiaries,
which also have covered deposits exceeding the target level of their DGSs.
6.1.2.5.Use of industry-funded safety nets and cost synergies for banks
The nature of the impacts on banks and industry-funded safety nets, and the potential
cost synergies related to these are the same as described under option 2. The main
distinction under option 3 is the intensity of these impacts. Since the access to funding
from DGS would be facilitated more substantially under this option (as a result of the
single-tier depositor preference in the hierarchy of claims), DGS replenishment needs via
ex post
industry contributions could be higher. However, this potential higher cost for the
industry would be counter-balanced by the following effects: (i) increased depositor
protection including for non-covered deposits, which could facilitate more effective and
efficient transfer strategies (restructuring and market exit) thereby fostering
competitiveness for the sector; (ii) increased financial stability through credible financing
of transfer tools in resolution or alternative measures for more failing banks in a credible
manner, preserving asset value, reducing contagion and ensuring the continuation of
client relationship, and (iii) reduced recourse to taxpayer funds while synergies between
RF/SRF and DGS would be more efficiently combined, in particular in the Banking
Union where the SRF and DGSs do not have the same base for the bank contributions.
The combined use of the safety nets would enhance the resilience of the industry-funded
source of funding available for bank failures and, to some extent, reduce the
procyclicality of
ex post
contributions bearing on the sector
112
.
However, foregoing the pooling effects that the implementation of EDIS could have
brought, this option would not result in savings related to lower safety net contributions
by the banking sector (see option 4). Therefore, the combined target level contributions
for DGSs would remain as under the baseline option (0.8% of covered deposits).
111
ECB (October 2022)
Protecting depositors and saving money - why DGS in the EU should be able to
support transfers of assets and liabilities when a bank fails.
112
As replenishment needs are spread across a larger population of banks, not only on the domestic
banking sector in case a DGS is used.
69
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
6.1.2.6. Assessment of Option 3
Benefits
Option 3 would broaden the application of the EU harmonised framework for resolution
to more smaller/medium-sized banks on the back of more ambitious improvements in the
funding solution. The legal clarification of the PIA would deliver a broad application of
resolution tools. Legal clarity and level playing field would be significantly enhanced
and the uncertainty regarding the handling of smaller and medium sized banks through
diverging national solutions greatly reduced. The problems identified in the current
framework regarding the difficulty to access funding sources and the broad discretion
when deciding whether to place a bank in resolution or insolvency, would be addressed
to a large extent. A more extensive use of resolution underpinned by a mechanism to
improve access to the DGS and resolution funding, while meeting the 8% TLOF
minimum bail-in condition, would limit further the recourse to public funds and enhance
financial stability. At the same time, allowing DGS funds to bridge the gap to access the
RF/SRF would introduce more proportionality for smaller/medium-sized banks under
transfer strategies in accessing safety nets without weakening the minimum bail-in
condition to access the RF/SRF. Implementing a single-tier depositor preference would
shield more depositors from taking losses and enable more DGS funds’ contribution to
finance transfer tools in resolution or alternative measures under the least cost test. This
would
de facto
provide more scope for DGS funding interventions for a larger population
of banks than under the baseline and option 2, to either facilitate transfer transactions
directly or help bridge the gap to meet the access condition of RF/SRF (provided market
exit as a safeguard is observed).
The implementation of option 3 would strengthen the level playing field in the EU,
improve legal certainty and predictability, and make the CMDI framework more
incentive-compatible across all possible interventions available in the toolbox, whether
they are embedded in the harmonised framework (BRRD/DGSD) or available under
national insolvency procedure. Similarly to the other options, option 3 would facilitate
the use of DGS funds in resolution, but also better frame interventions outside resolution
such as preventive and alternative measures by clarifying access conditions (least cost
test), leading to more standardisation, transparency, predictability of rules and an
equitable treatment of depositors, creditors and taxpayers across the EU.
Option 3 would deliver tangible benefits to resolution authorities by increasing the legal
certainty of the framework and providing them with stronger financing solutions to
credibly handle bank failures. It would also enhance depositor protection and a more
efficient use of industry funds, whose main purpose is to finance crisis management
measures. Additionally, enabling and significantly strengthening the funding of
resolution strategies, such as transfer tools, would be conducive to further cross-border
market integration and consolidation.
Costs
The nature of the costs assessed under option 2 would largely remain valid under option
3, with the distinction that some costs under option 3 may be somewhat higher or
70
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
applicable to more banks, while at the same time comparatively delivering greater
benefits (see above). These costs, as already explained under option 2, include: (i)
potential additional replenishment needs by the industry without benefiting from lower
contributions (in the absence of EDIS), (ii) risks of shortfalls in national DGS funds,
which may require borrowing (from other DGSs or the market) or for a backstop by the
sovereign, reinforcing the bank-sovereign nexus, (iii) additional coordination efforts
between resolution and DGSs authorities, (iv) the need for banks earmarked for
resolution due to the changes to the PIA to raise the required levels of MREL and (v)
costs related to marginal reporting needs by banks entering the resolution scope for the
first time.
A more substantial improvement in accessing industry-funded safety nets (RF/SRF and
DGS funds), both in terms of higher amounts unlocked and for a larger population of
banks (thanks to the single-tier depositor preference), may increase the risk of shortfalls
in national DGS funds. Without EDIS, these shortfalls could be mitigated through
extraordinary contributions by the banking industry, which may lead to pass-through
costs effects from banks to their customers. DGS shortfalls could also be mitigated by
lending from other DGSs, lending from the market or recourse to public funds. However,
the latter would reinforce the bank-sovereign nexus. As under option 2, in the absence of
EDIS, cost synergies for the industry in the form of reduced contributions to safety nets
would not materialise and DGS’ vulnerability to large shocks may continue to impair
depositor confidence in the banking sector.
The implementation of this option would also require additional coordination among
resolution and DGS authorities when using the DGS fund to reach the resolution fund. It
would also imply additional tasks for resolution authorities to prepare additional
resolution plans and set bank-specific MREL requirements due to the extension of the
PIA. However, these costs would be mitigated by the benefits of using the framework as
intended and ensure the market exit of failing banks without consequences on financial
stability.
This option would also impact banks through the requirement to ensure adequate levels
of internal loss absorbing capacity to allow for the execution of resolution strategies
(bail-in or transfer strategies) and investing in projects to become more resolvable (i.e.
enhancing their management information systems, valuation capabilities, revising
contracts to assure resolution stays with counterparts, other projects related to the
organisation structure and separability). However, whether new MREL requirements
would translate into higher costs is a case-by-case assessment that cannot be estimated
upfront, depending on the required MREL targets, the outstanding stock of eligible
instruments that banks already hold as well as on bank individual features and market
conditions. A mitigating factor for banks would be avoiding the loss of franchise value
and the continuation of critical functions via a transfer to a buyer, avoiding the bail-in of
depositors by using DGS to fill the gap towards accessing resolution funding, in case
MREL capacity were not sufficient to support the resolution action, subject to
safeguards.
While option 3 would address to a larger extent than option 2 the problems identified in
chapter 2, it should be acknowledged, however, that the resolution scope and necessary
71
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0073.png
funding may not be secured in all cases under this option due to remaining discretion and
the inherent limitations in the conditions to access funding (least cost test)
113
. As a
consequence, the problem of insufficient legal certainty and predictability may not
always be fully addressed and there may be some residual uncertainty in the treatment of
certain bank liability holders in the event of a bank failure.
Overall assessment
Effectiveness, efficiency and coherence: Under option 3, the broadening of the resolution
scope would be achieved with increased legal certainty and mirror the increased
availability in funding. It would materially tackle the problem of level playing field,
convergence in practices and use of public funds to manage failing banks, unlike the
baseline or option 2 which would deliver a weaker reform in the same direction.
Providing the funding and the PIA legal clarity to place more smaller/medium-sized
banks in resolution would contribute to improving financial stability, depositor
protection, limiting contagion and preserving critical functions in banking compared to
the baseline and option 2, however to a lesser extent than under Option 4 where EDIS
would significantly reinforce the funding equation. In this context, the issues related to
the existing room for arbitrage and lack of clarity and predictability in the application of
crisis management tools, as identified in Chapter 2, would be largely resolved, despite
some residual risks that may remain due to certain inherent limitations in the access to
funds (least cost test) and the remaining discretion. The possibility to use the DGS funds
as a bridge to access the RF/SRF if conditions are met would require enhanced
coordination between the SRB and national DGS authorities. However, this does not
imply any change in governance. As explained above, the reforms envisaged in option 3
would entail certain costs, which would be outweighed by the benefits brought by the
improvements to the framework in terms of financial stability, depositor protection, level
playing field and taxpayer money.
The policy option package 3 (as well as 2) is assessed against the background of the 2015
EDIS proposal under the assumption that political negotiations remain on hold. However,
option 3 is neutral but open to the introduction of EDIS at a later stage. Within the
Banking Union, the establishment of EDIS (whatever the design), would enhance the
effectiveness and efficiency of the framework under this option, as the firepower of
deposit guarantee schemes to contribute to transfer strategies would increase, and with
EDIS in place, there would be a better alignment between the level of the decision taking
(EU or national) and the responsibility related to financing.
Stakeholder views and political considerations: The reform proposed under option 3 is
fully aligned with the vision put forward by the Eurogroup in its statement of 16 June
2022
114
. The Eurogroup in inclusive format agreed on a clarified and harmonised public
interest assessment, broader application of resolution tools in crisis management at
European and national level, including for smaller and medium-sized banks where the
113
Even under a single-tier depositor preference, the least cost test would not allow DGS fund intervention
in all cases. Therefore, funding in resolution may remain beyond reach for a number of banks, provided the
resolution authority wanted to include them in the scope. See Annex 7 section 4.
114
Eurogroup (16 June 2022),
Eurogroup statement on the future of the Banking Union.
72
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0074.png
funding needed for effective use of resolution tools is available, notably through MREL
and industry-funded safety nets. The Eurogroup also agreed to further harmonise the use
of national DGS funds in crisis management, while ensuring appropriate flexibility for
facilitating market exit of failing banks in a manner that preserves the value of the bank’s
assets. It called for a harmonised least cost test to govern the use of DGS funds outside
payout of covered deposits to ensure consistent, credible and predictable outcomes.
Given diverging views among Member States on the merits and risks of implementing a
single-tier depositor preference, the Eurogroup statement deferred the impact analysis
and policy making to the Commission.
While many Member States find the idea of expanding resolution and a more extensive
use of the RF/SRF appealing, some remain reluctant to facilitating the access to
resolution funding due to concerns related to moral hazard and redistribution effects in
case of replenishment needs following a depletion of the SRF in the Banking Union. At
the same time, many Member States support the idea of expanding the resolution scope
and framing the discretion regarding the PIA, while at the same time integrating more
proportionality in the rules to access funding. One Member State is reluctant to facilitate
the usage of industry-funded safety nets in resolution (RF/SRF) for non-systemic banks
and, in this context, favours handling the failure of smaller/medium-sized banks at
national level and with national DGS funds rather than under the harmonised framework.
The European Parliament supports adjustments to the CMDI framework with the goal of
ensuring more coherent, credible and effective approaches across all Member States,
including facilitating market exit of failing banks to the benefit of financial stability,
taxpayers’ protection and depositors’ confidence
115
. In particular, the European
Parliament supports a clarification of the PIA criteria, so that the framework is applied in
a more consistent and predictable manner. It is also supportive of using DGS funds: (i) to
fill the gap towards reaching the minimum bail-in rule (8% TLOF) to access resolution
funding for smaller/medium sized banks with a transfer strategy or (ii) to support
alternative measures in national insolvency for those banks, subject to a stringent,
harmonised least cost test. The European Parliament therefore calls for more clarity on
the least-cost principle and to the conditions for the use of DGS funds. It has finally
stressed the need to explore a possible alignment of specific aspects of insolvency law for
the purpose of aligning incentives and ensuring a level playing field.
The views of the industry, as for all options, are confirming the need to bring forward
targeted amendments for improving the practical application of the CMDI framework, in
particular with regard to improving the predictability of the PIA assessment. As under all
options, on one hand, some smaller/medium-sized banks, in particular cooperatives and
savings banks
116
may prefer to stay outside the scope of resolution to avoid costs related
to additional requirements (MREL, reporting obligations to resolution authorities for
resolution planning and MREL calibration, increased scrutiny by markets) or possible
ex
post
contributions to the safety nets (RF/SRF or DGS). Many large banks, on the other
115
116
European Parliament (June 2022),
European Parliament 2021 annual report on Banking Union.
ESBG (European Savings and Retail Banking Group) (October, 2022),
Short paper on the CMDI
framework.
73
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0075.png
hand, are supportive of bringing more smaller/medium sized banks into the resolution
scope, regardless of their size and country of origin, and enhancing the credibility,
predictability and consistency of the framework. Large banks also support minimising
risks to taxpayer money and minimising moral hazard by ensuring a consistent and
careful approach across the EU for the use of industry funded safety nets subject to a
harmonised least cost test, supporting market discipline and avoiding competitive
distortions. On the other hand, they are critical of the prospect of paying additional
contributions into the safety nets, if these were to be used more frequently to handle the
failure of more small/mid-sized banks
117
. However, the principle of industry funding
(internal absorption capacity and safety nets) absorbing losses in case of distress/failure
as opposed to public bail-out would inevitably come as a cost. Overall, the majority of
stakeholders agree that resolution and insolvency tools should be applied more
consistently, thereby ensuring a better level playing field in the treatment of similar
banks across the EU.
In addition, some international institutions
118
acknowledge the more efficient use of
funds in resolution rather than through payout in insolvency and the economic
inefficiency, at a system level, of having significant funds sitting idle and untapped,
while public funds are being employed to handle failures. Also, some industry players
acknowledge the need for additional market consolidation in the EU and ensuring that
smaller/medium-sized institutions actually exit the market when failing. Depositors,
including SMEs, and consumer organisations support the reform proposed under option 3
because it would reduce the need for recourse to taxpayer funds and because they would
be shielded to a greater extent from bearing losses in a failure, while industry-funded
safety nets would take the second line of defence (after banks’ internal loss absorbing
capacity) to cover losses and sustain the financing of the crisis management measures.
Winners and losers: Depositors, including households and SMEs, are likely winners
under option 3 by retaining uninterrupted access to their accounts under the assumption
of a broader use of resolution tools delivered by legal clarifications in the PIA and
enhancement of funding options. Taxpayers would also be better off under this option
since banks’ failures would be financed by industry-funded safety nets created for this
purpose.
Smaller and medium-sized banks relying on equity and deposits and their clients would
essentially be in a better situation if they were to fail, thanks to alternatives to access
RF/SRF without bailing-in deposits and a more credible possibility of being transferred
to a buyer while preserving their franchise asset value. Alternatively, under national
AFME (Association for Financial Markets in Europe – an association of large banks) (October 2022),
Position paper on the CMDI review.
118
For instance, the Financial Stability Institute (FSI) insights on policy implementation no.45 (July 2022)
“Counting
the cost of payout: constraints for deposit insurers in funding bank failure management”
argues
that (p.4):
“Financial stability may benefit from broader use of deposit insurance funds in the management
of a failing bank….(DGS) support for non-payout measures such as transfer transactions, bridge banks or
capital and liquidity support under bank insolvency and resolution frameworks can achieve the same
objective by minimising interruptions to depositors’ access to their funds and, in addition, potentially offer
wider benefits for financial stability. Those benefits stem from a broader range of failure management
options for authorities which avoid the uncertainties and frictions of lengthy liquidation proceedings and
achieve closure at a much earlier stage”.
117
74
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0076.png
insolvency regimes, they would have to rely on the national DGS funds to transfer the
business or payout covered deposits under a liquidation process. However, the banking
sector in general may face costs due to potential replenishment needs for DGS and
RF/SRF, which would be used more broadly to substitute public funds. Absent any
reduction of contributions to the safety nets, option 3 may be more expensive for the
banking industry compared to option 4, while providing less benefits in terms of
depositor protection and not addressing the bank-sovereign nexus in the absence of
EDIS. Option 3 may also be potentially more expensive for the industry than option 2,
however it would deliver superior benefits, as explained above. Banks newly subjected to
resolution strategy would also need to invest in projects to become more resolvable
(negative aspects from a banks’ cost perspective, while a very positive one for financial
stability). As under the other options, facilitating the access to resolution financing by
using the DGS for banks with transfer strategies aims at ensuring an orderly market exit
for such banks and it would not create an undue advantage compared to banks with open
bank bail-in strategies, which are meant to be recapitalised and continue their operations
post-resolution.
Resolution authorities would be winners under this option, benefiting from additional
legal clarity stemming from the PIA legal amendments, a strong toolkit underpinned by
more accessible safety nets and more consistent rules on access to funding in resolution
and insolvency. Achieving standardisation and transparency thanks to the harmonisation
of the least cost test, the reform under option 3 would solve the problem of misaligned
incentives when deciding on the type of measures and tools to apply, leading to more
convergence, legal certainty and improved level playing field. It would also reduce the
authorities’ legal risk (litigations).
Banks’ creditors, and specifically senior ordinary unsecured creditors
119
, would be more
exposed to the risk of bearing losses under this option, since the banks in which they hold
claims are more likely to be placed in resolution in case of failure than under the baseline
and option 2, but to a lesser extent than under option 4. The degree of this impact
depends on whether the bank would have a possibility to be restructured under national
insolvency law under the current legislation.
6.1.3. Option 4 – Ambitious reform of the CMDI framework including EDIS
Option 4 envisages a review of the CMDI framework coupled with the implementation
of EDIS as the third pillar of the Banking Union architecture. However, EDIS as
envisaged under option 4 does not correspond to the fully fledged mechanism put
forward in the 2015 Commission proposal, which did not make progress in co-legislative
negotiations. Instead, it is consistent with a hybrid, intermediate mechanism more
recently discussed in inter-governmental format since 2018 (see Annex 10, section 2).
While this option was explicitly not endorsed by the Eurogroup, the Commission and
119
The depositor preference (valid across all options) means that senior ordinary unsecured creditors
become junior to deposits in the hierarchy of claims, while they previously ranked
pari passu
with non-
covered non-preferred deposits. This would facilitate bailing in these creditors without creating a no
creditor worse off risk, as under the baseline, in case non-covered non-preferred deposits would be shielded
from losses.
75
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0077.png
many stakeholders continue to underline its importance, pointing that EDIS would make
the CMDI framework more robust. The interplay between the CMDI framework and a
possible EDIS in the future is important to bear in mind for the conceptual logic and
policy design of the review. Therefore, it has been included in this impact assessment for
technical completeness and consistency and in sign of acknowledgement of all the
political and technical discussions which took place on EDIS in the past years.
6.1.3.1. Public interest assessment
Option 4 would deliver an expansion in the scope of resolution that would exceed in
intensity the one under option 3, primarily thanks to a more ambitious funding solution
including EDIS as a complementary central industry-funded safety net alongside the SRF
in the Banking Union. The more extensive application of resolution, compared to other
options, would be achieved through the same legislative amendments as proposed under
options 2 and 3 plus loosening, more than under option 3, the burden of proof for
resolution authorities to place banks in resolution thanks to a “general positive
presumption of public interest”. As also mentioned under other options, the number of
additional banks that would go in resolution under this option cannot be estimated
upfront, as the PIA remains a case-by-case assessment by resolution authorities.
However, the strengthening of the PIA provisions and the presumption of public interest
in the legislation are likely to result in a significant broadening of resolution application.
6.1.3.2. Conditions to access industry-funded safety nets
For a credible application of resolution tools on a broad scale, the access to resolution
financing is key, especially for smaller/medium-sized banks with a large deposit base,
likely to be resolved under transfer strategies. Importantly, as under options 2 and 3, the
minimum bail-in requirement of 8% TLOF remains unchanged, to safeguard against
moral hazard when using the RF/SRF. However, when deemed important for financial
stability, deposits would not be required to cover losses to meet such requirement, if
certain conditions are met. More specifically, the DGS/EDIS can intervene to support
transfer strategies
120
leading to a market exit and cover losses
in lieu
of deposits up to the
amount determined under the least cost test. This approach as in options 2 and 3 is
justified by the need to ensure consistency with the broader approach to the PIA and the
expectation that more adequate access to funding in resolution needs to be available for
certain strategies.
Extending the scope for resolution combined with the possibility to access funding more
broadly and credibly (RF/SRF, DGS/EDIS) would improve legal certainty in applying
the PIA, achieve more convergence and level playing field in applying resolution across
jurisdictions and, importantly, address the funding issues identified in Chapter 2.
Implementing an EDIS central fund as a backstop to the DGS funds would tackle the
problem of potential shortfalls in available resources of national DGSs that may be
caused by significant shocks, which no other option can credibly tackle without engaging
taxpayer funds. As under the other options, the targeted DGS/EDIS contribution to
120
Concerning other enhancements made in the proposed reform to promote the use of DGS for transfer
strategies, see Chapter 6, section 1.1.2.
76
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
reaching the condition to access RF/SRF for transfer strategies would introduce more
proportionality, while at the same time safeguarding against moral hazard by maintaining
the minimum condition of 8% TLOF.
6.1.3.3. Use of DGS funds/ EDIS role and governance
Option 4, which is the most ambitious in terms of resolution scope combined with a
central fund in EDIS, also aims to address the problem pertaining to unclear rules and
access conditions to DGS/EDIS funds per type of intervention, eliminating legal
uncertainties. In terms of scope of intervention, support from EDIS would be called for
all DGSs functions: payout of covered deposits, preventive measures, contribution in
resolution and alternative measures in insolvency. The following clarifications would be
made:
Clarify and harmonise the conditions for financing of preventive measures by
DGS/ EDIS contribution;
Clarify the scope of intervention and least cost tests of DGS/ EDIS in resolution;
Clarify and harmonise the least cost test for DGS contributions and access
conditions to EDIS alternative measures in insolvency;
EDIS to contribute, as a backstop to the DGS, to the payout of covered deposits
in insolvency.
These adjustments would contribute to clearer rules leading to more legal certainty,
simplification of the least cost test and eliminating difficulties in its application,
enhanced level playing field and address the issue of inconsistent solutions to funding.
Under option 4, with the establishment of EDIS, the governance in the Banking Union
would be revised and strengthened. In order to reflect the substantial concentration of
resources at central level, a key role for the SRB in the decision-making process
concerning the funding measures (including use of DGS/EDIS) would be required under
this option. The SRB would therefore be empowered to take decisions in all scenarios
where EDIS would need to be tapped. For certain elements of the decision-making
process, and particularly the least cost test calculation, the SRB may however still decide
to rely on input from national authorities when more specific national considerations are
concerned (e.g. the ranking of liabilities at national level or an estimate of the recovery
rates for assets).
6.1.3.4. Harmonisation of depositor preference in the hierarchy of claims
Option 4 envisages the implementation of a single-tier depositor preference in the
hierarchy of claims and removing the super-priority of DGS/EDIS/covered deposits, as
also explained under option 3. The only distinction is that the benefit of implementing a
single-tier preference for depositors would also entail facilitating the use of EDIS under
the least cost test where necessary as backstop to national DGS funds.
77
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0079.png
6.1.3.5. Use of industry-funded safety nets and cost synergies for banks with
EDIS in place
Option 4 would generate significant synergies between the SRF and EDIS, both in terms
of funding structure, liquidity depth and scope of intervention in resolution and
insolvency. By design, pooling resources and increasing risk diversification would allow
to increase the level of depositor protection, while creating room for lowering the target
level and, consequently, reducing the contributions burden for the banking sector. The
quantitative analysis
121
demonstrates the possibility to maintain or even increase the
current level of depositor protection with a lower target level, even under systemic crisis
simulations. The more resources are pooled the higher the potential reduction of
contributions would be. For instance, assuming an ambitious pooling, EDIS would
significantly lower the probability and the amounts of liquidity shortfall compared to the
status quo with a 0.6% target level
122
. The cost savings for the banks in the Banking
Union could represent on aggregate EUR 14 bn or 25.5% of total DGS contributions, as
estimated based on Q4 2020 data. However, given the risk-based nature of contributions,
the cost reduction would not affect all banks to the same extent
123
.
However, if Member States wish to retain and cover the residual national options and
discretions (other than preventive and alternative measures) under the DGSD (not fully
harmonised), they would be required to finance them with funds above the target level.
The current target level of 0.8% of covered deposits would continue to apply in the
Member States outside the Banking Union.
6.1.3.6. Assessment of Option 4
Benefits
Option 4 would deliver a decisive step forward towards completing the Banking Union
with its third pillar, EDIS. It would be broadening the application of the EU harmonised
framework for resolution. In the Banking Union, it would create a central EDIS fund
with pooled resources available to handle multiple bank failures
,
which would enhance
the financial stability of participating Member States, strengthen the single market in
banking and underpin the Economic and Monetary Union.
The legal clarification of the PIA would deliver a broad application of resolution tools.
Legal clarity and level playing field would be significantly enhanced and the uncertainty
regarding the handling of smaller and medium sized banks through diverging national
solutions greatly reduced. The problems identified in the current framework regarding
the robustness of funding sources, the difficulty to access them and the broad discretion
when deciding whether to place a bank in resolution or insolvency, would be addressed
to a large extent. An extensive use of resolution underpinned by central industry-funded
121
In terms of calibration, a lot of work has been carried out in various fora (Council working parties,
HLWG on EDIS, EGBPI, JRC reports) assessing various possibilities to pool funds into a central fund in a
gradual manner. See Annex 10.
122
There is a 95% probability that the hybrid EDIS with such a reduced target level provides a better
protection than the status quo. See Annexes 10 and 12.
123
The riskier the bank, the smaller the cost reduction and vice-versa.
78
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0080.png
safety nets and a mechanism to improve access the resolution fund while meeting the 8%
TLOF would limit further the recourse to public funds and enhance financial stability,
weakening the bank-sovereign nexus in the Banking Union.
Improvements to conditions for DGS/EDIS contribution to various interventions other
than payout would render the use of DGS/EDIS more efficient when compared to a
payout scenario
124
and boost depositor confidence, including due to continued access to
their accounts also ensuring level playing field with an equitable treatment of depositors,
creditors, taxpayers across the EU.
At the same time, allowing DGS/EDIS to bridge the gap to access the RF/SRF would
introduce more proportionality for smaller/medium-sized banks under transfer strategies
without weakening the minimum bail-in condition to access the RF/SRF.
This option would deliver cost synergies for the banking sector through a lower
combined target level and related contributions, while providing extensive benefits via
the available pooled resources.
Moreover, enabling and significantly strengthening the funding of resolution strategies
such as transfer tools would be conducive to further cross-border market integration. It
could also contribute to the efficiency of the EU resolution regime by promoting a
functional framework able to cater for the failure of smaller/medium-sized banks, as it is
the case in other jurisdictions (e.g. US with the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation).
In line with this more centralised use of funding, including when it comes to EDIS, this
option proposes a governance structure with a prominent role for the SRB to manage
funding for banks under its remit.
Costs
The creation of EDIS would involve set-up costs to pool funds in a central EDIS fund.
However, these costs would be likely marginal, when compared to the set-up of the
SRM/SRB/SRF in 2015, as the functioning of EDIS would build on already existing and
functioning funds (DGS funds and SRF) and established processes, workflows and
authorities (national DGS authorities and the SRB). While the set-up costs of this option
would be higher than zero, the benefits of available liquidity in case of DGS shortfalls
would render the cost-effectiveness of this option comparatively higher than that of other
options.
The implementation of this option would also require additional coordination among
authorities when using the DGS/EDIS to reach the resolution fund. It would also imply
additional tasks for resolution authorities to prepare additional resolution plans and set
bank-specific MREL requirements due to the extension of the PIA. However, these costs
would be mitigated by the benefits of using the framework as intended and ensure the
market exit of failing banks without consequences on financial stability.
This option would also impact banks which would need to comply with the requirement
to ensure adequate levels of internal loss absorbing capacity to allow for the execution of
resolution strategies (bail-in or transfer strategies) and investing in projects to become
124
See also Annex 10.
79
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0081.png
more resolvable. However, whether new MREL requirements would translate into higher
costs is a case-by-case assessment, depending on the required MREL targets, the
outstanding stock of eligible instruments that banks already hold as well as on bank
individual features and market conditions. A mitigating factor for banks would be
avoiding the bail-in of depositors by using DGS/EDIS to fill the gap towards reaching the
minimum bail-in rule (8% TLOF) to access resolution funding for banks with transfer
strategy, in case MREL capacity were not sufficient to support the resolution action,
subject to safeguards. However, using the DGS/EDIS fund and the RF/SRF would also
entail re-couping those funds through
ex post
contributions from the industry.
Overall assessment
Effectiveness, efficiency and coherence: Option 4 would be a step forward towards
completing the Banking Union with its third pillar. It would contribute by design to a
greater application of resolution tools than any other option (through legal amendment
including a general presumption of positive PIA), also strengthening financial stability,
limiting significantly the recourse to taxpayer money, thanks to stronger, more accessible
industry-funded central safety nets. This option is the one that would best preserve
critical functions and the franchise value of assets in failing banks given the extensive
use of resolution. This option would also contribute to better legal clarity and aligned
incentives in the choice of applicable procedure (resolution or insolvency) as well as
enhancing the EU level playing field. It would boost depositor protection and ensure they
are treated equitably, irrespective of their location.
Stakeholder views and political considerations: Given the outcome of the June 2022
Eurogroup and the lack of agreement on a comprehensive roadmap to complete the
Banking Union including EDIS, this option is considered politically unfeasible, at least in
the current institutional cycle.
In its recent report on Banking Union
125
, the European Parliament has stressed the
importance of completing the Banking Union with the establishment of an EDIS, as its
third pillar. In particularly, the European Parliament stresses the importance of EDIS, for
improving the protection for depositors in the EU and their trust in the banking sector
and for reducing the link between banks and sovereigns. However, the Parliament has not
yet concluded its first reading of the Commission’s 2015 EDIS proposal.
The potential to place more banks in resolution, benefiting from strong central safety nets
and reducing financing costs (i.e. for EDIS in the Banking Union), is appreciated by the
banking industry (banks of all sizes and business models), which considers that national
DGSs are limited in size and firepower and a fully-fledged EDIS would be an essential
piece of the Banking Union architecture. This view is not shared by IPS members, which
consider their solidarity model as sufficient to avert failures. Some respondents to the
targeted and public consultations
126
underlined that a fully-fledged EDIS would reduce
the burden on banks while minimising the probability of a call for
ex post
contributions,
also avoiding pro-cyclical impacts on banks’ balance sheets. However, certain
125
126
European Parliament (June 2022),
European Parliament 2021 annual report on Banking Union.
See Annex 2.
80
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0082.png
smaller/medium-sized banks which would come into the scope of resolution may need to
bear additional obligations to enhance recovery plans, provide more extensive
information to resolution authorities for the preparation of resolution plans, ensure
compliance with MREL requirements and become more resolvable
127
.
Consumer organisations are supportive of a centralised deposit insurance scheme
128
to
ensure a uniform level of depositor protection and reinforce consumer confidence.
Consumers support any solution that limits the use of public money to rescue failing
banks. They would however prefer solutions where capital requirements for banks would
be increased, and State aid in liquidation proceedings and of precautionary support would
be subject to a stricter test
129
.
Winners and losers: Taxpayers, depositors and Member States would benefit greatly
from an improved and more proportionate CMDI framework with a strong EDIS in the
Banking Union. Such a framework, given the expected application of resolution and the
improved functioning of measures outside of resolution, would significantly reduce risks
for financial stability, and would preserve banking critical functions for the society. The
reduced recourse to public funds and the corresponding increased use of industry-funded
safety nets (RF/SRF, DGS/EDIS) would have a positive impact on weakening the bank-
sovereign nexus. More depositors would be likely better off than under other options, due
to continued access to their deposits and depositor protection thanks to a robust EDIS in
the Banking Union. Such a construction may also increase the appeal of the Banking
Union with non-participating Member States, paving the way towards a more integrated
and centralised single market in banking.
Smaller and medium-sized banks relying on equity and deposits, which are generally
candidates for transfer strategies, and their shareholders, creditors and employees would
also benefit from more proportionality by being able to access the RF/SRF more easily,
without the need to systematically inflict losses on depositors. Such banks would be able
to access the RF/SRF through DGS contributions under the least cost test, while being
subject to safeguards (e.g. market exit if they fail). However, the smaller and medium-
sized banks subject to an extended PIA would also need to comply with MREL
requirements in line with the resolution strategy and invest in projects to become more
resolvable (negative aspects from a banks’ cost perspective, while a very positive one for
financial stability). As under the other options, facilitating the access to resolution
financing by using the DGS for banks with transfer strategies aims at ensuring an orderly
market exit for such banks and it would not create an undue advantage compared to
banks with open bank bail-in strategies, which are meant to be recapitalised and continue
their operations post-resolution.
Resolution authorities would be winners under this option (even more so than under
other options), benefiting from a strong toolkit underpinned by robust safety nets in the
Banking Union and more consistent rules on access to funding in resolution and
127
Yet, as a mitigating factor for these additional obligations, the BRRD provides for a proportionate
treatment of smaller institutions by allowing for simplified obligations in terms of planning preparation and
reporting of information to relevant authorities.
128
Respondents to the consultation did not specify whether a centralised deposit insurance should take the
form of the 2015 proposal or a hybrid model as under this option.
129
See responses to the
public
and
targeted
consultations.
81
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0083.png
insolvency. This option would achieve more convergence and legal certainty in the
application of rules, leading to improved level playing field. It would also reduce the
authorities’ legal risk (litigations).
Banks’ creditors, and specifically senior bond holders, would be more exposed to the risk
of bearing losses since the banks in which they hold claims are more likely to be placed
in resolution in case of failure than under the baseline and other options. The degree of
this impact depends on whether the bank would have a possibility to be restructured
under national insolvency law under the current legislation.
6.2. Comparison and choice of preferred options
Table 1 provides a high-level summary of how the previously-described options compare
(for the sake of readability of the tables, the labels of the options have been shortened).
Table 1: Summary of how the options compare
EFFECTIVENESS
Minimise
Level
recourse to
playing
taxpayer
field, single
money
market
EFFICIENCY
(cost-
effectiveness)
Financial
stability
Depositor
protection
COHERENCE
OVERALL
SCORE
Option 1
Do nothing
0
+
0
+
0
+
0
+
0
+
0
++
0
+
Option 2
Slightly improved resolution
funding and commensurate
resolution scope
Option 3
Substantially
improved
resolution
funding
and
commensurate
resolution
scope
++
++
++
++
++
++
++
Option 4
Ambitious
CMDI
including EDIS
reform
+++
+++
+++
+++
+++
+++
+++
Magnitude of impact as compared with the baseline scenario (the baseline is indicated as 0): +++ very
positive; ++ positive; + slightly positive; +/- mixed effect; 0 no effect; – slightly negative; -- negative; ---
very negative.
Leaving aside option 4 which, although technically the most robust option, is not
politically feasible at this stage, option 3 would, on balance, deliver solutions to most
problems identified in chapter 2. It is therefore considered to be the preferred option.
In particular, in terms of effectiveness, option 3 would deliver a crisis management
reform contributing comparatively more than other options to strengthening financial
stability, while facilitating market exit of failing banks. It would likely reduce the
recourse to public funds by creating the funding conditions to handle more failures of
smaller/medium-sized banks in the CMDI framework, using industry-funded safety nets.
Increased access to funding in resolution or for alternative measures would open the
possibility of shielding depositors from bearing losses, maintaining the client relationship
and the franchise value of assets by creating room for a successful transfer of failing
banks. Option 3 would also improve the legal clarity and predictability of the framework
by standardising and harmonising the access condition to DGS funds for all contributions
other than payout of covered deposit, ensuring incentive compatibility among the various
82
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0084.png
measures (preventive, resolution, alternative measures in insolvency) that could be used
to handle bank failures.
In terms of cost-efficiency, option 3 would deliver benefits exceeding its costs by
ensuring that already established industry-funded safety nets could be used more broadly
and in a more efficient manner
130
. Additional obligations on banks generated through this
reform would be mitigated by increased societal benefits, through protecting financial
stability and taxpayer money, more market consolidation and transferring the benefits
from banks’ creditors to depositors and taxpayers. In comparison, option 4 would deliver
more cost synergies to the industry through reductions of contributions to EDIS, thanks
to the pooling effects that a central fund would create. However, in option 3 (as in option
2), the potential increase in costs for banks due to calls to replenish depleted safety nets,
requirements to build-up loss absorbing capacity and other additional requirements,
which come with having a resolution strategy (e.g. reporting, becoming more resolvable),
would not be balanced by any cost reduction in contributions to the safety nets under this
option.
In terms of coherence, all option packages, including option 3 have been designed with
internal coherence among the various elements in mind (e.g. ambition on the PIA
expansion matched by funding solutions).
The changes envisaged under option 2 go into the same direction as the ones described
for option 3, however they would deliver a less extensive reform and, as a result, achieve
a less effective outcome in terms of the objectives of the framework. This is mainly due
to a less effective outcome in terms of potentially unlocking DGS funds as a result of
implementing a two-tier depositor preference as opposed to a single-tier depositor
preference as envisaged under option 3, which may limit the potential to place more
banks in resolution. The overall costs of option 2 may be somewhat lower than in option
3, but so are the benefits delivered, i.e. a narrower scope to broaden resolution matched
by a narrower increase in funding, as explained in the respective sections in Chapter 6.
When ranking the effectiveness of the various reform options envisaged and measured in
terms of PIA scope, access to industry funding and depositor protection, the benefits
delivered under option 2 would improve the current framework (baseline) less
significantly. Option 3 would make a more substantial impact than option 2. Based on the
sample analysed in Annex 7, section 4.1.3, the funding unlocked under option 3 would be
20 times higher than under the baseline, while it would be five times higher than under
option 2. In this regard, option 3 would lead to an increased protection of taxpayer
money and depositors, although it would also come at a potentially higher cost for the
banking sector.
130
Using the DGS fund for measures other than payout may result in lower disbursement needs than when
paying out covered deposits in insolvency. See sections 7.1.4.4 and 7.2.2.6 in the evaluation (Annex 5) and
ECB (October 2022),
Protecting depositors and saving money - why DGS in the EU should be able to
support transfers of assets and liabilities when a bank fails.
83
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0085.png
6.3. Common elements across the packages of options
This section provides an assessment of additional policy changes envisaged to enhance
depositor protection and which are common across all packages of options. The
remaining common elements across all packages of options (early intervention measures,
timing of FOLF trigger, interaction between FOLF and insolvency triggers) listed in
section 5.5 are of a more technical nature and presented in Annex 8.
Depositor protection
As observed in the four EBA opinions, the consistency of depositor protection in the EU
needs to be improved across all options
131
. In addition to the current standard protection
of EUR 100 000 per depositor per bank applicable across the EU, more convergence
focusing on specific depositors (i.e. public authorities) or types of deposits (i.e. client
funds of financial institutions, so-called temporary high balances) would contribute to a
more equal treatment of depositors across the EU. The organisation of depositor payouts,
addressing various situations involving money-laundering concerns in a cross-border
context, or specific elements of information disclosure would also benefit from
improvements. Having regard to the increasing volume of cross-border and Fintech
services
132
, these improvements would also help depositors navigate the different legal
regimes to claim the repayment of their deposits in other Member States.
Key areas for further improvements are:
-
Eligibility for depositor protection (e.g. public authorities);
-
DGS payout processes (prescription timelines, determination of repayable
amount, set off);
-
Specific improvements to information disclosure for depositors;
-
Cooperation between DGSs (reimbursements in host Member States, passported
services and transfers of contributions in the event of changes to DGS affiliation);
-
DGS funding (definition of available financial means, use of funding sources);
-
More convergence in the application of national options and discretions, e.g.
temporary high balances, third country branches;
-
The treatment of client funds held by non-bank financial institutions.
Box 4: Implementing the EBA advice
The analysed policy options closely follow the opinions provided by the EBA for the
CMDI review through two main channels.
First, the options retain 16 out of 19 recommendations from a set of four opinions
dedicated to the review of the DGSD functioning (Table 10, Annex 6, section 2). The
only exceptions are related to definitions of certain concepts discarded based on
technical and legal considerations, or to recommendations which received no support
131
See Chapter 2, section 2.3.1 and Annex 6.
Fintech services refer to technology and innovation that aims to compete with traditional financial
methods in the delivery of financial services (e.g. payments, investment).
132
84
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0086.png
from Member States. This is the case for the following elements:
-
the recommendation to clarify the concept of “normal banking transaction” in the
definition of deposit in light of recent case law
133
that clarifies whether certain
funds held on an account fall within the definition of a deposit will be subject to a
case-by-case assessment;
the recommendation to assess whether there was a need to revise the definition of
low-risk assets related to investments of the DGS available financial means led to
the conclusion that there was no need to change this definition based on the
feedback received from Member States where a majority did not see merit in
changing the current definition;
the recommendation on the possibility to use failed institutions’ assets for a DGS
payout was discarded based on the low likelihood that a failed institution would
have a significant amount of liquid assets to pay depositors in the DGS’ stead.
-
-
Second, the EBA report responding to the Commission’s call for advice regarding
funding in resolution and insolvency was fully taken into account. The policy options of
the impact assessment mirror the different scenarios of changes in the creditor hierarchy
analysed by the EBA, from the unharmonised three-tier depositor preference (status quo)
to the harmonised single-tier depositor preference (preferred option). The EBA provides
evidence that equally preferring all deposits to other ordinary unsecured claims could
significantly increase the number of institutions that could be more efficiently managed
in case of failure, by (i) reducing the overall cost (as the value of the bank is better
preserved when it can be sold in resolution, as opposed to its assets sold in pieces in
insolvency), (ii) accessing resolution financing arrangements (funded by the industry as
opposed to taxpayers) and (iii) avoiding a bail-in of deposits (and deriving financial
stability concerns and possible contagion generated by the unavailability of deposits in a
liquidation). The impact assessment leverages on this pivotal conclusion to justify its
policy choices in Annex 7 and reproduces the EBA’s quantitative material in the
numerical tables reported in this Annex.
7.
P
REFERRED OPTION
The packages of policy options outlined above would all provide an improvement to the
status quo. All of them address, to some extent, some of the core issues identified in the
problem definition and follow a similar direction. In particular, they would allow (to
various degrees) a more extensive application of resolution, more proportionate and
consistent access to funding sources in resolution and outside, and incentivise a more
extensive use of the sources of financing which are funded by the industry (resolution
fund, DGS) as a possible complement to the internal loss absorption capacity of the bank
concerned. This would foster financial stability, depositor protection and limit recourse
to taxpayers’ funds. As an important distinguishing element, option 4 would also
implement EDIS as a central fund
134
, which would backstop the national DGS funds and
reduce the link between banks and sovereigns, which cannot be achieved under the other
133
The EU CJEU has clarified the meaning of the concept ‘normal banking transactions’ in the judgment
of 22 March 2018 (Joined cases C 688/15 and C 109/16 Anisimovienė and Others v. Snoras).
134
However, a different mechanism (hybrid) than the fully fledged EDIS put forward in the 2015
Commission proposal.
85
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0087.png
options. Although option 4 would be an important step towards completing the Banking
Union, it cannot be implemented politically at this point in time.
All the options provide improvements with respect to the legal certainty and
predictability in the management of bank failures. In particular, the clarifications to
important provisions such as the harmonisation of the least cost test contribute to
clarifying and resolving certain interpretive issues which have led to uncertainty in the
application of the framework.
In the same vein, the proposed clarifications to some elements of the toolbox (detailed in
section 6.3 of Chapter 6 and in Annex 8) which are important to ensure early action
before the bank’s failure (early intervention measures, preventive DGSD measures,
BRRD precautionary measures) are effective in ensuring a better framed and more
consistent use of these tools. Additionally, clarifications regarding advancing the
timeliness of resolution action (by ensuring an adequately early FOLF triggering) would
bring significant net societal benefits in terms of cost minimisation. While there may be
limitations to the degree of ambition for advancing the determination in time of a bank as
FOLF
135
, the earlier this determination is made, the more resources (capital, liquidity) are
available in the failing bank to facilitate the execution of a successful resolution action
with potentially less need to impose losses on deposits. Finally, clarifications to the
FOLF triggers and their coordination with triggers for insolvency (see Annex 8) would
improve clarity with respect to the need for a swift exit of a failing bank from the market
when there is no public interest in resolution. This in turn reduces the burden for
authorities and banks in ensuring compliance with the legislative provisions. Since many
of these amendments and clarifications are common to all options, it can be concluded
that they all equally achieve the mentioned objective.
However, with respect to the objective of improving the effectiveness of the funding
options and address the divergent access conditions in resolution and outside resolution,
not all options are able to achieve the policy objectives to the same extent. From this
perspective, the design features on access conditions to, and availability of funding are
intrinsically linked with the scope of resolution that would be achieved as predicated by
the PIA under the various options. In this respect, option 3 is the preferred option
retained, as it achieves a strong funding from industry-funded safety nets aimed at
supporting transfer strategies for failing banks in resolution or under alternative
measures, if available, setting the stage for a credible broadening of the resolution scope.
Option 3 would make more DGS funds available for measures other than the payout of
covered deposits in insolvency by harmonising the ranking of deposits through a single-
tier preference in the hierarchy of claims and removing the super-priority of the DGS.
Option 2 would enable a more modest use of DGS funds through a two-tier depositor
preference without the super-priority of DGS, and thus lead to a less ambitious CMDI
reform, which would require the same types of legislative changes as option 3 only with
a lower impact in terms of achieving the overall objectives of the framework. It should,
however, be acknowledged that option 3 would reduce the flexibility for resolution
135
FOLF may not be triggered if private solutions are available to avert the bank’s failure.
86
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0088.png
authorities to allocate losses to non-covered non-preferred deposits without breaching the
“no creditor worse off” principle, as they would rank
pari passu
with other deposits
excluded from bail-in. The preferred option 3 provides for a reinforced role of DGSs in
the context of the CMDI framework. In particular, it promotes a more efficient use of
more DGS resources for transfer strategies and introduces the possibility for DGSs to
contribute to bridge the gap between deposits and 8% TLOF, under the least cost test.
All these changes are likely to translate into a more intensive use of DGS funds for
measures other than the payout of covered deposits, which in turn may lead to higher
costs for the industry in case of replenishment needs and potentially, higher risks of
shortfalls. The magnitude of these costs for the industry may be higher under option 3
than under option 2, but they would also be balanced by addressing the identified
problems to a greater extent and in a more credible manner and achieving greater societal
benefits through a considerably higher likelihood to preserve financial stability, protect
public funds and deposits. Also, as shown in the evaluation (sections 7.1.4.4. and 7.2.2.6)
using DGS funds to facilitate transfer transactions in resolution or alternative measures is
likely more efficient than paying out covered deposits in insolvency (baseline).
In the absence of EDIS, the only available avenues to remedy a DGS shortfall would be
recourse to industry
ex post
contributions, alternative funding arrangements
136
and, in
insolvency, to supplement the DGS intervention with liquidation aid financed by the
State. In all cases, the solutions are less efficient than receiving financing from a
centralised EDIS, which would provide an opportunity for lowering banks’ contributions
and a much more easily accessible source of financing compared to borrowing from other
DGSs or the market. Moreover, an EDIS backstop to national DGS funds would weaken
the bank-sovereign link. The political reality, however, has removed the implementation
of EDIS as part of this CMDI reform package. But even without EDIS, the CMDI reform
would improve the framework substantially by ensuring more banks could be handled via
the harmonised framework by using the banks’ loss absorbing capacity and industry-
funded safety nets rather than taxpayers’ funds.
Finally, also when it comes to the objective of addressing the uneven and inconsistent
depositor protection, all options provide clarifications aimed at reducing the divergences
in the protection of depositors across Member States (see further Annex 6). However, the
lack of robustness in DGS funding identified as an issue in Chapter 2 cannot be fixed via
this reform in the absence of EDIS.
The proposed policy options would not have a significant impact on administrative costs
(i.e. information provision obligations by banks and resolution authorities), which would
remain low under all options. This is because, the very marginal increase in reporting
burden for banks entering the scope of resolution for the first time
137
would be offset by
136
Article 10(9) DGSD Recourse to alternative funding sources would entail borrowing from the market,
from other DGSs or from the State’s public budget.
137
Banks entering the scope of resolution for the first time would also be subject to the obligation to
enhance recovery plans, provide information to resolution authorities on a more frequent basis for the
preparation of more extensive resolution plans and ensure they become resolvable. While this would also
involve additional costs for banks, these are estimated to be marginal, because banks earmarked for
87
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0089.png
the relief resulting from removing the MREL decision for liquidation entities where the
MREL requirement is equal to own funds, as also shown in Annex 3.
Box 5: What this reform could mean for depositor protection and DGSs
Proposed changes under this reform
Facilitated use of DGS funds in resolution to support the transfer of deposits, including non-
covered deposits, from smaller/medium-sized banks funded by deposits that would have a
positive PIA in case of failure, to other viable acquirers;
Possibility to shield more depositors from losses, if conditions are met, at a lower cost for the
DGS compared to a payout of covered deposits under insolvency;
Harmonising the depositor preference in the hierarchy of claims by achieving a single-tier
depositor preference, reducing unlevel playing field and NCWO issues in cross-border cases;
Allowing a more cost-efficient use of DGS funds:
-
Changing the creditor hierarchy would enable unlocking DGS funds for resolution and
alternative measures, under the least cost test, with increased cost efficiency compared to
the cost of payout events. However, this would also potentially increase the use of DGS
funds for transfer strategies with a call on the industry to replenish them;
-
Facilitating transfer strategies and better preserving the DGS financial means and
protecting also non-covered deposits, as they would generally be more cost-effective than
the payout of covered deposits. Transfer strategies in resolution could be more cash
efficient and preserve the DGS funding capacity (e.g. by providing guarantees), or strongly
limit the potential final loss but be more cash consuming (e.g. by providing loans) (see
Annex 10);
-
The use of DGS funds in measures alternative to payout of covered deposits ensures intact
client relationships and continued access of depositors to their accounts without any
interruption of services, an important aspect in digitalised economies;
-
A clearer and more consistent approach to preventive measures would also be cost-
effective for depositors by avoiding the bank’s deterioration, depositor service interruption
and costly payout events.
Least cost test:
-
Removing legal uncertainty and inconsistency regarding the least cost test and the DGS
intervention in preventive measures, resolution and alternative measures in insolvency
(clarification and harmonisation of applicable conditions under Articles 11(3), 11(6)
DGSD and Article 109 BRRD);
-
The inclusion of indirect costs in the least cost test calculation may be envisaged, but this
alone would not replace the effect that the changes in the hierarchy of claims have on its
outcome.
liquidation already report data to resolution authorities who prepare resolution plans albeit on a less
frequent basis (under simplified obligations).
88
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0090.png
What stays the same
The DGS coverage level (eligible deposits up to, generally, 100,000 EUR) and the DGS target
level (in principle, 0.8% of covered deposits);
Covered deposits and of the remaining part of eligible deposits of natural persons and SMEs
(preferred deposits) would continue to rank senior to ordinary unsecured creditors;
The protection of covered deposits, which continues to be ensured by:
-
the mandatory exclusion of covered deposits from bail-in as per Article 44(2) BRRD
-
The repayment of the covered amount guaranteed by the DGS, in case of unavailability
-
the possibility for the DGS to contribute to interventions other than the payout of covered
deposits, such as contribution to resolution or to preventive measures and alternative
measures in insolvency;
The counterfactual in the least cost test (referring to the losses that covered deposits would
have incurred in insolvency).
Rationale for shielding also (non-covered) depositors from losses
Allowing more credible transfer strategies by facilitating the inclusion in the transfer
perimeter of entire deposit contracts and not only the covered part. This avoids compromising
the customer relationship and the franchise value, which would otherwise increase the risk of
deposit runs and potentially impair the appetite of the acquirer for the transfer;
Maintaining the integrity of deposits, which are considered by most national authorities
instrumental to bank intermediation in the economy (i.e. channelling savings into investments
and lending), one of the main pillars of confidence in the banking system and an important
element to financial stability and the functioning of the payment system;
Deposits fulfil a different role in the economy than investor claims. Depositors use banks,
primarily, as a secure place for placing their savings, for meeting future needs, while investors
take a (remunerated) claim in the bank after having analysed related risks and rewards;
Alignment with past experiences of handling banks’ failures showing a high interest in
protecting deposits, where State aid was granted,
inter alia,
with the aim of protecting
depositors and where the use of those public funds did not require the burden sharing of any
depositor.
It can be concluded that, from a technical point of view, Option 3 is the one that would,
on balance, meet most of the objectives in the most effective, efficient and coherent
manner. This would entail a legislative proposal addressing the funding and the incentive
compatibility problems in the CMDI, namely measures to improve the proportionality of
accessing the resolution fund for deposit-based banks, by opening the possibility for the
DGS to be used to cover some of the losses that would otherwise be borne by depositors
(in order to reach the 8% TLOF and access resolution financing). The improvement in
proportionality is necessary in order to make the framework work for smaller/medium-
sized banks and it does not go beyond what is strictly necessary for the sake of meeting
the policy objectives.
89
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0091.png
These technical considerations are aligning well with the equally relevant political ones
expressed by Member States in the June 2022 Eurogroup statement and by the European
Parliament
138
. While the Commission retains full authority and independence in
proposing legislation, it is appropriate and efficient to take into account the elements
emerging from the related political discussions. Striking a balance between a solution
which can satisfactorily address the identified problems while being sufficiently
supported politically should form the basis for a successful negotiation between the co-
legislators.
REFIT
The proposed reform will bring about benefits with respect to administrative efficiency
and cost savings. These are largely the result of the various proposed measures to
increase the harmonisation of certain elements of the framework and to clarify points,
which have led to considerable discussion to achieve agreed interpretations.
In this respect, the measures proposed on the least cost test and the use of a consistent
methodology across different uses of DGSs will bring more simplification. Similar
positive impacts should be expected from the proposed clarifications to the use of DGSs
in resolution (Article 109 BRRD), and the use of resolution fund resources for liquidity
purposes. Other relevant clarifications in this respect are those related to the use of early
intervention measures, where simplification and clarity is achieved by removing overlaps
with supervisory measures, which have so far impaired the use of early intervention
measures. In addition, clarifications of FOLF triggers and the concept of winding down
under national measures applying in case of negative PIA will ensure further certainty
and consistency of outcomes of the procedures available.
Additionally, the proposed harmonisation of the ranking of depositors will bring about
more consistency and harmonisation across Member States on the treatment of deposits,
avoid uncertainties and potential unlevel playing field. It will also facilitate the role of
the resolution authorities when assessing the existence of breaches of the no creditor
worse of principle. In the same manner, the proposed technical improvements in the
DGSD
139
are expected to remedy application issues and improve, overall, the consistency
of depositor protection in the EU.
Finally, the improvements included in this initiative are “future-proof” and deemed to
significantly enhance the preparedness of banks and resolution authorities in dealing with
emerging and future crises cases, especially in the context of the deteriorating economic
environment due to geopolitical tensions.
138
See also section 6.1.2.6 on the main considerations of the European Parliament related to the CMDI
reform.
139
See section 6.3 and Annex 8 on the ‘Common elements across the packages of options’.
90
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0092.png
Other impacts
Climate and environmental impacts
Pursuant to Article 6(4) of the European Climate Law
140
, no direct climate or
environmental impacts and no significant harm, either direct or indirect, are expected to
arise from the implementation of the preferred option. The initiative may have some
indirect positive impacts on fostering the transition to a more sustainable economy by
increasing financial stability and the overall resilience of the banking sector, therefore
enabling banks’ contribution to green transition goals. This effect would be however
indirect and is not possible to quantify. The initiative is considered to be consistent with
the objectives of the European Climate Law.
Social impacts
Employees are not directly impacted. A robust and resilient banking sector and enhanced
protection of depositors in cases of bank failures, including of SMEs and larger corporate
depositors, would increase the likelihood that employees would be able to keep their jobs
in companies that hold deposits and are clients in banks. Moreover, a solid banking
sector could better contribute to financing the economy and promoting growth which
would benefit the non-financial sector and their employees. No further significant social
impacts are expected.
SMEs
The CMDI review is not directly addressed to SMEs, however they would benefit from
the improvements that the reform is expected to bring, in their quality of depositors and
bank customers. The initiative aims to ensure that the crisis management toolbox can be
flexibly applied to more smaller/medium-sized banks in a manner that achieves the
framework’s objectives, including the protection of depositors, which can be SMEs.
Additionally, enabling crisis management tools facilitating the transfer of the failing
bank’s business to a buyer would ensure the continued client relationship for depositors,
including SMEs and avoid the interruption of access to the accounts and the risk of
losing the non-insured part of their deposit, as in case of an insolvency.
Digitalisation
This initiative has a slightly positive impact on digitalisation, arising notably through the
proposed option to broaden the use of DGS funds for supporting the handling of failing
banks through measures other than payout in insolvency (i.e. resolution, preventive or
alternative measures), which would be disruptive for customers’ continued access to their
accounts for a significant period of time. Based on our assessment, the preferred option
would ensure continued access to customer accounts, an important element encouraging
digitalisation in banking services.
140
Regulation (EU) 2021/1119 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 30 June 2021 establishing
the framework for achieving climate neutrality and amending Regulations (EC) No 401/2009 and (EU)
2018/1999 (‘European Climate Law’)
91
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0093.png
External impacts
This initiative does not specifically target third countries or their entities, as it is focused
on reforming the EU CMDI framework. However, certain benefits arising from further
legal clarity, harmonisation and standardisation (i.e. depositor preference in the creditor
hierarchy) would also benefit entities of third country banks operating in the EU.
Impact on fundamental rights
The preferred option respects the rights and principles set out in the Charter of
Fundamental Rights. The free movement of persons, services and establishment
constituting one of the basic rights and freedoms protected by the Treaty on the European
Union and the Treaty on the Functioning of the European Union is relevant for this
measure.
The preferred option will not have any negative impacts on fundamental rights since
most Member States recognise that the need to safeguard the rights of banks’
shareholders and creditors must be balanced against the rights of taxpayers, depositors
and the general interest of protecting economic value and financial stability. Overall, the
impact on fundamental rights will be neutral.
8.
H
OW WILL ACTUAL IMPACTS BE MONITORED AND EVALUATED
?
The Commission shall carry out an evaluation of this package of proposed amendments,
five years after its entry into application and present a report on the main findings to the
European Parliament, the Council and the European Economic and Social Committee.
The evaluation shall be conducted according to the Commission's better regulation
Guidelines. Member States shall provide the Commission with the information necessary
for the preparation of that report. The evaluation will be based on a list of specific and
measurable indicators that are relevant to the objective of the reform, as presented in the
following table.
Summary of indicators
Data
already
collected?
Yes
Yes
Yes
Actor(s)
responsible
for data
collection
EBA/NRAs/
SRB,
Commission
EBA/NRAs/
SRB
Commission
EBA,
Commission
EBA
Objectives
Indicator
Source of information
Information from the
NRAs/SRB,
Official Journal
Information from the
NRAs/SRB
Official Journal
Information from the
DGSs,
Official Journal
Information from
NCAs/SSM
Number of banks undergoing resolution
Further enhance
legal certainty
and strengthen
an even playing
field as regards
the application
of the tools
available in bank
resolution and
insolvency.
Number of different resolution tools and powers
applied (e.g. transfer tools, bail-in)
Number of banks benefitting from precautionary
aid measures, which subsequently are determined
to be FOLF
Number of banks benefitting from DGS
preventive measures, which subsequently are
determined to be FOLF
Number of banks (for which EIM triggers have
been met) addressed through an EIM measure
Yes
No
92
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0094.png
Number of positive PIA assessments by the
NRAs/SRB for banks determined to be FOLF and
type of elements included in the
PIA assessments
Number of winding up procedures
Average period between the issuance of a
negative PIA assessment and the initiation of the
orderly winding up proceedings for failing banks
that cannot be resolved
Complaints about competitive disadvantages due
to different insolvency rankings of ordinary
unsecured claims and other deposits
Ad-hoc statistical analysis e.g. correlation
between CDS banking sector and CDS of
sovereign, correlation between bank share price
and sovereign spread (*)
Number of banks (of small/medium/large size)
which are determined to be FOLF accessing
resolution funding and amount of resolution funding
provided.
Percentage of banks (of small/medium/large size)
which are determined to be FOLF accessing
resolution funding
Number of banks undergoing resolution
accessing DGS funding in resolution and amount
of the DGS funds provided in resolution in
relation to the two possibilities: (a) bridging the
gap to the 8% minimum bail in requirement
otherwise required, for transfer strategies, or
(b) other uses in resolution than bridging the gap
to the 8% minimum bail in requirement otherwise
required, for transfer strategies.
Number of banks accessing DGS funding for
alternative measures and amount of DGS funds
provided for alternative measures.
Number of banks accessing DGS funding for
preventive measures and amount of DGS funds
provided for preventive measures.
Number of national DGSs without any alternative
funding arrangements in place
Final amount of losses incurred by DGSs for any
type of intervention
Information from the
NRAs/SRB
Information from the
NCAs/DGSs
Information from the
NCAs/NRAs/DGSs
No
EBA
Yes
EBA
No
EBA
Stakeholder feedback
No
Commission
Market data
Yes
EBA
Information from the
NRAs/SRB;
Official Journal
Yes
EBA,
Commission
Facilitate access
to safety nets in
case of bank
failure and
improve the
clarity and
consistency of
funding rules.
Information from the
DGSs/SRB,
Official Journal
Yes
EBA/DGS/
SRB,
Commission
Information from the
DGSs,
Official Journal
Information from the
DGSs,
Official Journal
Yes
EBA,
Commission
EBA,
Commission
Yes
Further align the
Stakeholder feedback
No
Commission
coverage level of
depositors and
Information from the
No
EBA
upgrade the
DGSs
capacity of
Number of cases where third country branches
national DGS’s
Information from the
were granted a derogation from the obligation to
No
EBA
to withstand
responsible authority
participate in the DGS.
local shocks.
(*) This type of indicators would capture several of the general objectives of the CMDI framework (such as
financial stability, breaking the sovereign-bank nexus, etc.) and disentangling the individual effects would
not be possible.
Compliance and enforcement will be ensured on an ongoing basis including, where
needed, through infringement proceedings for lack of transposition or for incorrect
transposition and/or application of the legislative measures. Reporting of breaches of EU
law can be channelled through the European System of Financial Supervision, including
the national competent authorities, EBA as well as through the ECB. EBA will also
continue publishing its regular reports, such as the reports taking stock of the compliance
with MREL in the EU. This is run in parallel with the quarterly MREL dashboard
93
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
published by the SRB for the Banking Union. EBA will also continue to assess and
monitor the resilience and the funding levels of the national DGSs.
94
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0096.png
A
NNEX
1: P
ROCEDURAL INFORMATION
1.
L
EAD
DG, D
ECIDE
P
LANNING
/C
OMMISSION WORK PROGRAMME REFERENCES
This impact assessment report was prepared by Directorate D “Banking, insurance and
financial crime” of the Directorate General “Directorate-General for Financial Stability,
Financial Services and Capital Markets Union” (DG FISMA).
The Decide Planning references are:
PLAN/2020/8120: BRRD Review – Proposal for a Directive of the European
Parliament and of the Council amending Directive 2014/59/EU (BRRD)
PLAN/2020/8121: DGSD Review – Proposal for a Directive of the European
Parliament and of the Council amending Directive 2014/49/EU (DGSD)
PLAN/2020/8122: SRMR Review – Proposal for a Regulation of the European
Parliament and of the Council amending Regulation (EU) 806/2014 (SRMR)
This initiative was part of the Commission’s 2021 Work Programme
141
, though its timing
was determined by the long-awaited political agreement on a comprehensive work plan
to complete the Banking Union, which was not achieved in the June 2022 Eurogroup.
Instead, the Eurogroup invited the Commission to table legislative proposals for
reforming the CMDI framework
142
.
2.
O
RGANISATION AND TIMING
Eight Inter-Service Steering Group (ISSG) consultations – chaired by SG – were held
between 2020 and 2023:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
19 October 2020
25 March 2021
11 May 2021
4 June 2021
18 May 2022
12 to 16 September 2022 (under written procedure)
25 November 2022
17 January 2023.
The ISSG consisted of representatives from various Directorates-General of the
Commission: BUDG, COMP, ECFIN, GROW, JUST, REFORM, TRADE, SG and SJ.
The contributions of the members of the Steering Group have been taken into account in
the content and shape of this impact assessment.
Adoption of the package is expected in April 2023.
141
Commission Work Programme 2021: A Union of vitality in a world of fragility, 19 October 2020,
COM(2020)690 final.
142
Eurogroup (16 June 2022),
Eurogroup statement on the future of the Banking Union
95
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0097.png
3.
C
ONSULTATION OF THE
RSB
An upstream meeting was held with the Regulatory Scrutiny Board (RSB) on 28 April
2021.
The draft report was sent to the RSB on 28 September 2022 and the hearing took place
on 26 October 2022. The RSB delivered a negative opinion on 28 October 2022. The
report was resubmitted to the RSB on 9 December 2022; the RSB then issued a positive
opinion on 17 January 2023.
The principal areas/topics raised by the RSB’s opinion of 28 October 2022 are addressed
and clarified in this Impact Assessment in the following manner:
Recommendations of the RSB
Elements to improve (section (C) of the
Opinion)
(1) The report needs to better identify and
explain the substantive problem and
shortcomings in the current framework it
seeks to address and substantiate it with
robust evidence. In doing this, it should
draw on the conclusions of the evaluation
that the EU resolution framework is
sparsely used. It should examine exactly
why this is a problem and what the drivers
behind it are by clearly setting out the
disincentives for Member States (and
banks) to practical bank resolution using
the EU framework. It should explain why
the current arrangements and incentives
have failed and why Member States have
shown a strong preference for resolution
outside of the EU framework. It should
demonstrate why this poses a risk to the
wider financial stability of the EU. It
should show why the current arrangements
would not be fit for purpose in a large scale
financial crisis scenario. Finally, it should
better explain the international experience
in handling bank failures and the lessons
that can be drawn from these.
How the comments have been addressed
Clarifications of the objective, design
and scope of the crisis management and
deposit insurance framework and the
merits of resolution compared to
national insolvency proceedings
(Chapter 1 and Annex 4 for additional
details).
Summary of the problems identified
during the implementation of the
framework and the reasons why this
reform is necessary, in particular why
the framework should also be
applicable to small and mid-sized
banks; additional evidence showing
that the failure of smaller banks can
also impact financial stability including
a stylised example to illustrate these
problems (Chapter 2, Annex 4, Box 6)
Details on the nature and magnitude of
the risk of maintaining the framework
as it stands, considering the problems
identified and their impacts on financial
stability, depositor protection and
public finances (Chapter 5, section 5.3)
Update of relevant figures on the
implementation of the framework to
take into account a recent resolution
case in Poland (Chapter 2 and Annexes
5 and 9)
Details on the how recent cases of
failure managed under the CMDI
framework relate to the identified
problems (Boxes 8, 10 and 11, Annex
5)
Explanations on how the principle of
subsidiarity is addressed in the reform
(2) While the resolution framework is
designed to cover all banks in the EU, in
96
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0098.png
practice its use has been limited. The report
should recall and better explain that all
banks are covered by the existing
framework and demonstrate, with evidence,
the need to facilitate the practical use of the
EU resolution framework for smaller and
mid-sized banks. It should demonstrate
how this is consistent with the principle of
subsidiarity. This should include evidence
to demonstrate the clear cross-border
nature of the problem including by
providing evidence on the composition of
the banking sector in different Member
States and the differing scale and
geographical spread of the potential
recipients. It should provide evidence of
the risk of EU-wide contagion in the
internal market and for public finances if
the current arrangements persist. Finally, it
should better set out the division of roles
between the EU state aid framework (and
its upcoming revision) and the resolution
framework and how coherence will be
ensured between the two.
(3) The report should better explain the
links between the EBA advice and the
options set out in the report. It should
clarify the envisaged bridging facility, its
scope and limitations, and its envisaged
impacts. It should explain that EDIS under
the most comprehensive option 4 is
different from the 2015 EDIS proposal. It
should better articulate how the analytical
and policy coherence between option 3
(which does not include EDIS and for
which a further legislative proposal is
envisaged) and the pending 2015 EDIS
proposal will be ensured. In view of this
specific context and the results of the
presented analysis the report should reflect
whether analytically it is not more useful to
leave the choice of the preferred option
open.
(4) The report should be revised to make it
self-standing and accessible to the non
specialist reader. While technical language
is necessary in certain parts for experts
practitioners, and in particular in annexes,
it is important that the main narrative
remains clear for political decision makers.
and evidence on risk of contagion and
systemic nature of small banks
(Chapter 3, section 3.2, Annex 4, Box
6)
Details on the interactions between the
CMDI and the State aid rules under the
current framework and how
consistency will be achieved with the
revision of the CMDI framework
(Chapter 5, section 5.2 and Annex 4)
Some amendments listed to address
recommendation (1) are also relevant for
recommendation (2).
Details on how the advice provided by
EBA has been taken into account in the
design of the policy options (Chapter 6,
section 6.3, Box 4)
Details on the functioning of the DGS
bridge financing, including on the
scope and safeguards and a stylised
example with a visual presentation of
the CMDI reform on this point
(Chapter 6, section 6.1.1.2, Box 2)
Clarification that EDIS envisaged
under option 4 in the packages of
policy options is not the same
mechanism as envisaged as the
Commission 2015 proposal (Chapter 6,
section 6.1.3 - Option 4, section 6.1.2.6
– Option 3 and footnote in Chapter 7)
Executive summaries of EBA and JRC
reports used in, and annexed to, this
impact assessment respectively
(Annexes 11 and 12)
A general review of the core impact
assessment and the glossary to clarify
technical terms and contribute to make
the report more self-standing for a non-
expert audience.
Additions to, and review of, the
97
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0099.png
(5) The report should better integrate the
views of all stakeholders in the main report,
by better distinguishing between the views
of different groups on all key aspects.
glossary
Additional information on stakeholder
views with a distinction between small
and large banks (Chapter 6, sections
6.1.1.6 Assessment of Option 2 –
Overall assessment and 6.1.2.6
Assessment of Option 3 – Overall
assessment)
The limited suggestions raised by the second RSB’s opinion of 17 January 2023 are
addressed and clarified in this Impact Assessment in the following manner:
Recommendations of the RSB
Elements to improve (section (C) of the
Opinion)
(1) The report should address the ‘One In:
One Out’ requirements. If quantitative
estimates cannot be produced, or if these
are negligible, or the proposal is considered
to have no ‘One In: One Out’ implications,
this should be explained.
(2) While the report presents general views
of large and small banks on the policy
options, Annex 2 still does not provide a
general overview of differentiated
stakeholder views. Annex 2 should
consider responses by type of stakeholder.
4.
E
VIDENCE
,
SOURCES AND QUALITY
How the comments have been addressed
Additional information on the ‘One In
One Out’ clarifying the neutral effect
of the initiative on administrative costs
added in Annex 3 and referenced also
in Chapter 7 when describing the
preferred option.
Additional information on stakeholder
views with a distinction between small
and large banks included in Annex 2,
in line with the description of
stakeholder views in Chapter 6.
The impact assessment evaluation drew on a broad range of information sources such as
results of consultations with stakeholders, reports from the EBA, and additional desk
research by the Commission services. More specific sources included:
Eurogroup’s Statement of June 2022
143
;
The Commission’s 2019 review report of the BRRD and SRMR
144
;
Overview of past cases of bank failures, including those handled under State aid
rules
145
;
11 expert group meetings with Member States as part of the Commission’s Expert
Group on Banking, Payments and Insurance (EGBPI);
The European Parliament’s 2021 report on the Banking Union
146
;
143
144
Eurogroup (June 2022),
Eurogroup statement on the future of the Banking Union of 16 June 2022.
European Commission (April 2019),
Report from the Commission to the European Parliament and the
Council on the application and review of Directive 2014/59/EU (BRRD) and Regulation 806/2014
(SRMR).
145
See Annex 9.
146
European Parliament (June 2022),
European Parliament 2021 annual report on Banking Union.
98
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0100.png
Feedback from the inception impact assessment which took place between 10
November – 8 December 2020 and gathered 15 responses from EU and third
countries (see Annex 2);
Two public consultations on the experience with the application of the CMDI
framework and views on its revision (see Annex 2):
o
a public (general) consultation
147
which ran for 12 weeks from 25
February– 20 May 2021 and gathered over 90 responses from a broad
range of stakeholders across the EU, and
o
a targeted (technical) consultation
148
which took place between 26 January
and 20 April 2021 with over 90 responses received from a broad range of
stakeholders across the EU, as well as third countries;
Feedback from DG FISMA’s conference organised on 18 March 2021 discussing
the challenges in the current CMDI framework and exploring potential avenues
for its review
149
(see Annex 2);
An administrative arrangement (N FISMA/2020/003/D3/AA) with the Joint
Research Centre in 2020/21 on Financial Safety Nets in the European Union
(FinSafEU) for analytical assessments in particular on risk-based contributions,
temporary high balances, different EDIS designs and the review of the BRRD
framework (see Annex 12);
A Call for advice to the EBA targeted on funding issues in the CMDI
framework
150
(see Annex 11);
Four reports from the EBA on the implementation of the DGSD
151
;
EBA reports, i.e. on the application of early intervention measures in the EU
152
;
ECB’s occasional paper on why DGSs in the EU should be able to support
transfers of assets when a bank fails
153
;
A study financed under the European Parliament’s pilot project “Creating a true
Banking Union” on the options and national discretions under the DGSD and their
treatment in the context of a European Deposit Insurance Scheme (EDIS)
154
;
A study financed under the European Parliament Pilot Project “Creating a true
Banking Union” on the differences between bank insolvency laws and their
potential harmonisation
155
;
147
148
Public consultation
on the review of the bank crisis management & deposit insurance framework.
Targeted consultation
on the review of the bank crisis management & deposit insurance framework.
149
High-level conference –
Strengthening the EU’s bank crisis management and deposit insurance
framework: for a more resilient and efficient banking union.
150
European Commission (19 April 2021)
Call for advice to the EBA regarding funding in resolution and
insolvency as part of the review of the crisis management and deposit insurance framework.
151
EBA opinions of
8 August 2019, 30 October 2019, 23 January 2020
and
28 December 2020
issued
under Article 19(6) DGSD in the context of the DGSD review. See also Annex 6.
152
EBA (27 May 2021),
Report on the application of early intervention measures in the European Union
in accordance with Articles 27-29 of the BRRD,
EBA/REP/2021/12.
153
ECB (October 2022),
Protecting depositors and saving money - why DGS in the EU should be able to
support transfers of assets and liabilities when a bank fails.
154
European Commission (28 November 2019) under the European Parliament’s Pilot Project “Creating a
true Banking Union”
Study on the Options and national discretions under the DGSD and their treatment in
the context of a European Deposit Insurance Scheme.
155
European Commission (28 November 2019) under the European Parliament’s Pilot Project “Creating a
true Banking Union”
Study on the differences between bank insolvency laws and on their potential
harmonisation.
99
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0101.png
50 bilateral meetings with resolution and competent authorities between 2019 and
2022;
Third party events (e.g. seminars, workshops, conferences) on the topic of the
CMDI framework
156
;
58 bilateral stakeholder meetings with banks, industry associations, think-tanks
(between 2019 and 2022);
The Risk reduction monitoring report prepared jointly by the Commission
services, the ECB and the SRB for the Eurogroup meeting of 30 November 2020
in view of the political decision to approve the ESM Treaty reforms and the early
introduction of the backstop to the SRF
157
and the Eurogroup meeting of May
2021
158
and subsequent edition of November 2021
159
.
Discussions in the High Level Working Group (HLWG) on EDIS and the
Council’s Working Party (CWP)
160
;
Eurogroup conclusions of November 2020
161
, calling for a review of the CMDI
framework and which agreed the early introduction of a common backstop to the
SRF in 2022;
The Fit for the Future (F4F) Platform’s opinion on the completion of the Banking
Union.
162
The Financial Stability Board’s (FSB) Too big to fail (TBTF) report
163
evaluating
the application of resolution frameworks for global systemically important banks
around the world.
The Commission services also took into consideration the report by the European Court
of Auditor’s on the functioning of the Single resolution mechanism
164
and on the control
of State aid to financial institutions
165
.
For example, workshop at the Banca d’Italia on
The crisis management framework for banks in the EU -
How can we deal with the crisis of small and medium-sized banks.
157
European Commission, ECB and SRB (November 2020),
Joint monitoring report on risk reduction
indicators.
158
European Commission, ECB and SRB (May 2021),
Joint monitoring report on risk reduction
indicators.
159
European Commission, ECB and SRB (November 2021),
Joint monitoring report on risk reduction
indicators.
160
The outcome of these discussions is mostly in public domain on the
Council webpage.
161
Eurogroup (30 November 2020),
Eurogroup conclusions.
162
F4F Platform Opinion (10 December 2021),
Completing the Banking Union.
163
Financial Stability Board (1 April 2021),
Too big to fail report.
164
European Court of Auditors (January 2021),
Special report: Resolution planning in the Single
Resolution Mechanism.
165
European Court of Auditors (October 2020), Special Report 21/2020,
Control of State aid to financial
institutions in the EU: in need of a fitness check.
156
100
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
A
NNEX
2: S
TAKEHOLDER CONSULTATION
1.
I
NTRODUCTION
The European Commission is currently reviewing its CMDI framework and is expected
to make legislative proposals in Q1 2023. In order to understand better the performance
of the framework as well as the possible scope for improvements, the Commission
undertook extensive exchanges through different consultation tools to reach out to all
stakeholders involved. Annex 2 provides a summary of the consultation activities that
were considered while preparing the impact assessment.
2.
C
ONSULTATION STRATEGY
To ensure that the Commission’s proposal on the CMDI framework review adequately
takes into account the views of all interested stakeholders, the consultation strategy
supporting this initiative builds on the following main consultation activities:
-
-
-
-
An
Inception Impact Assessment
A targeted consultation
open for a total period of 12 weeks
A public consultation
open for a total period of 12 weeks
Targeted consultations
of Member States and bilateral exchanges with
stakeholders and resolution/competent authorities
-
A high-level conference
-
EBA opinions
-
The
F4F Platform’s opinion
on the completion of the Banking Union
The results of each component are presented in the synopsis report below.
3.
F
EEDBACK ON THE COMBINED INCEPTION IMPACT ASSESSMENT
/
ROADMAP
The combined Inception Impact Assessment and roadmap aim to provide a detailed
analysis on the actions to be taken at the EU level and the potential impact of different
policy options on the economy, the society and the environment. The feedback period
for the Inception Impact Assessment lasted four weeks (10 November – 8 December
2020). The Commission received 15 responses through the
“Have Your Say!”
portal
from different stakeholder groups: banking associations (5), public authorities (4),
company/business organisations (2), trade union (1), academia (1) and “other” (2).
All respondents acknowledged the need for a targeted review of the CMDI framework
to increase its efficiency, proportionality and overall coherence. Some respondents
emphasised the need for improving the applicability of existing resolution tools.
Most feedback, including from both large and small/medium-sized banks, supports
levelling the playing field in the management of bank failures, in particular, by reducing
discretion and ensuring more consistency in the application of the public interest
assessment (PIA) and by limiting incentives for resorting to solutions outside resolution.
One respondent underlined that any initiatives for further harmonising the creditor
hierarchy and increasing the level of protection of (certain) creditors, should be treated
101
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0103.png
with caution, while a detailed assessment of the associated costs will need to be
reflected in the impact assessment.
As regards funding solutions (sources, access conditions) in resolution and insolvency,
most feedback supported that the CMDI framework should include proportionate and
adequate solutions for the management of failures of any type of bank, but without
compromising the principle of burden sharing which is inherent to the Bank Recovery
and Resolution Directive (BRRD). According to most respondents, a review of the
conditions for granting State aid in- and outside resolution would be necessary. One
respondent called for a simpler and more transparent methodology for calculating the
contributions to the Single Resolution Fund (SRF), and requested the same for the
methodology for contributions to a European deposit insurance scheme (EDIS).
As regards depositor protection, some feedback called for a preservation of national
protection systems and of national options such as preventive and alternative measures
that have worked well in the past. However, most of the views converged that there is a
need for improving the efficiency of these measures, in particularly through clarification
of their conditions, limits and purpose. One respondent flagged that risk-reducing
specificities of institutional protection schemes (IPS) should be duly considered.
Most respondents underlined that any policy options should consider the potential
ramifications with regard to the discussions on EDIS. Three respondents support that the
pooling of funds from various sources should be avoided or not form part of the review.
Two respondents were of the view that EDIS should not be part of the review.
4.
P
UBLIC AND TARGETED CONSULTATIONS
The Commission launched two consultations
166
to seek stakeholder feedback on the
application of the CMDI framework and views on possible modifications. The
targeted
consultation,
covering 39 general and specific technical questions, was available in
English only and open from 26 January to 20 April 2021. The
public consultation
consisted of 10 general questions
167
, available in all EU languages and the feedback
period ran from 25 February to 20 May 2021. Both consultations were open for 12
weeks. In total, the Commission received 188 official responses and three additional
replies were submitted informally. All but five respondents were stakeholders from the
EU. Responses received were from a variety of stakeholders representing EU citizens
(26%), business organisations (24%), business associations (16%), public authorities
(19%), consumer organisations (2%) and academia (3%). It is also important to point
out that numerous answers provided (in particular to the
public consultation)
were of the
same wording and stance, thereby suggesting that certain respondents cooperated when
drafting their response prior to submitting their final answers.
The Commission services published a ‘summary report’ on the feedback to both
consultations on 7 July 2021 on the respective consultation pages. Below is a summary
of the views expressed with regard to the experience with the framework so far and to
future action to make the framework more resilient.
166
167
See consultation pages of the
targeted consultation
and the
public consultation.
The questions of the public consultation were a subset of the questions of the targeted consultation.
102
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
I.
General objectives and review focus
a. Policy objectives
Respondents overall agreed that the CMDI framework is an improvement compared to
the situation pre-2014/15 and that the objectives of the framework have been achieved
to a large extent. Nevertheless, improvements are warranted. While respondents were
satisfied with the protection of depositors and the reduced risk for financial stability
stemming from bank failures, the framework, however, seemed to have failed in
protecting taxpayer money and breaking the bank/sovereign loop. Respondents noted
that more could be done with respect to minimising the recourse to taxpayer money and
improving the level playing field among banks from different Member States, with
certain respondents perceiving EDIS as a missing element to reach this objective.
b. Available measures in the CMDI framework
The majority of respondents who provided a view (88%) believed that some of the
measures in the CMDI framework succeeded in fulfilling the intended policy objectives
and the management of banks’ crisis, notably precautionary measures, provided that the
latter remain limited in use. Early Intervention Measures (EIMs), however, were widely
criticised by stakeholders pointing out the need to eliminate the overlap between EIMs
and supervisory powers, with a significant preference for a merger in order to increase
efficiency. The resolution tools were overall described as satisfying with certain
institutions calling, however, for a more appropriately tailored mechanism for smaller
and medium-sized banks and for an instrument for liquidity in resolution. Opinions on
deposit guarantee scheme (DGS) preventive measures were split, with several
respondents being in favour, while others demanding further harmonisation and
clarifications on the relationship between State aid and DGSs. It was also noted that a
harmonised European insolvency framework should be provided.
c. Exclusivity of the BRRD tools
Several respondents, including small and medium-sized banks as well as other
stakeholders (ministries of finance), expressed caution to mix resolution tools with
national insolvency systems, claiming that this would increase complexity and legal
uncertainty. They suggested that smaller and medium-sized banks should continue
undergoing national insolvency proceedings. Conversely, most respondents in the
targeted consultation suggested that the tools and powers in the BRRD should be subject
to changes and supported the extension, particularly through a wider use of the PIA to
cover smaller and medium-sized banks. In terms of the different funding sources in
resolution and insolvency, 55% of respondents were against a potential alignment of the
access conditions (i.e. imposing the access condition to the resolution fund everywhere),
fearing the creation of additional complexities and the infringement of the
proportionality principle. By contrast, those in favour of the introduction of harmonised
tools outside resolution strongly highlighted their preference for the creation of a
harmonised “orderly liquidation tool”, notably for smaller and medium-sized banks, to
prevent divergences in handling failing banks under national insolvency systems.
103
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0105.png
The need for a reform is generally supported by the industry, which sees merit in targeted
amendments aimed at improving its practical application. Respondents from large and
small/medium-size banks support an improved transparency and predictability of the PIA
and agree to avoid paying additional contributions into industry-funded safety nets.
In terms of the possible expansion of the scope of resolution, several respondents
representing smaller/medium-sized banks, in particular cooperatives and savings banks,
may prefer to stay outside the scope of resolution to avoid costs related to additional
requirements or possible
ex post
contributions to the safety nets. By contrast, several
respondents representing large banks generally support bringing more smaller/medium
sized banks into resolution to ensure a level playing field in the single market and
improve the credibility of the framework. In this vein, these respondents also support the
need to minimise moral hazard and the risks for public finances through holdings of loss-
absorption buffers as a first and main line of defence, calling for caution over an
extended use of industry funded safety nets for small/medium-sized banks and the
prospect of additional future contributions to address replenishment needs.
d. Measures available before a bank’s failure
EIMs: Respondents showed broad support for improving the conditions for EIMs or
other features of the framework in order to facilitate their use. However, a few
stakeholders (banks) are of the opinion that EIMs should be deleted as supervisory
powers are sufficient, while a few stakeholders (IPS, public sector) mentioned that they
do not see an overlap between EIMs and supervisory powers.
Precautionary recapitalisation: Most respondents expressed a wish to maintain
precautionary recapitalisation within the crisis management toolbox in order to provide
flexibility and address exceptional situations. However, respondents consider that its
application should remain limited to specific circumstances and be sufficiently strict.
Others considered conditions as too strict. A few respondents called for a phase-out of
the provision or refer explicitly to the need to avoid using precautionary recapitalisation.
Most respondents are in favour of targeted amendments for clarification.
Preventive measures: Broad consensus was visible on the necessity to provide
clarifications for the application of DGS preventive measures. Most respondents would
welcome a more harmonised approach in the least cost test application. Several
stakeholders (public sector, banks) highlighted that the conditions for the application of
preventive measures should be aligned with the conditions for precautionary
recapitalisation, while many respondents underlined the need to clarify that using the
measures does not trigger a declaration of failing or likely to fail (FOLF). Regarding the
application of State aid rules, DGS respondents supported that minimum burden sharing
requirements should apply irrespective of the governance arrangements in place.
Conversely, a sizeable number of respondents (mainly banks) believe that State aid rules
should not be applicable for the DGS’ use for preventive measures, independently from
the DGS private or public legal nature. Respondents from Member States that have IPSs
noted the indispensability of preserving the well-proven national discretion for granting
preventative measures. Some respondents from these Member States stressed that it is
important that the functioning of IPSs recognised under Article 113(7) CRR can
104
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0106.png
continue unchanged. In view of EDIS, the ring-fencing of losses absorbed by a national
DGS within the local Member State to avoid that these losses are borne by other
banking sectors is important for stakeholders from the banking industry. Views were
split about the need for changing or not the creditor hierarchy (and extending the
coverage to all deposits), in order to encourage or mitigate, respectively the use of such
measures.
II.
Experience with the framework and lessons learned for the future framework
a. Resolution, liquidation and other measures to handle banking crisis
In general, the majority of respondents consider that the resolution toolbox already
caters for all types and sizes of banks, provided that the available tools are applied
consistently in case of a failure of banks that are of public interest. Insolvency laws are
generally seen as providing an appropriate framework for a liquidation of an institution,
bearing in mind Member States’ specificities, but possibly at the expense of consistency
in public interest assessments or scope of interventions of DGS due to the differing
counterfactual insolvency scenarios. Regarding the accessing conditions to funding
sources in resolution, the majority noted that DGS and EDIS funds should remain
separated from the RF/SRF, with a few stakeholders underlining the necessity to
improve the liquidity provision to banks post-resolution. A limited amount of
respondents demanded an alignment between the source of funding and governance
structures, stating that for national funding sources national authorities should have a
prominent role. If funding were to rely mostly on European centralised funds,
governance should accordingly be more centralised.
PIA: Most respondents acknowledge that the PIA must offer room for interpretation by
authorities, but consider that the provision, as regulated now, gives opportunity for
many different interpretations, thereby creating level playing field issues and
uncertainty. Many respondents argue that the outcome of the PIA in the planning phase
should be more predictable.
Small and medium-sized banks: While the extension of the PIA threshold to facilitate
small and medium-sized banks’ access to resolution funds has been partly supported,
numerous respondents defined the funding sources for smaller and medium-sized banks
as sufficient. Many state that bail-in of shareholders and creditors should remain the
main source of financing in resolution and stressing the existence of other relevant tools
to help smaller and medium-sized banks (i.e. winding-up under insolvency proceedings
sometimes involving State aid). The importance of the minimum requirement for own
funds and eligible liabilities (MREL) was emphasised due to its role in preserving
financial stability and ensuring depositor protection. Other respondents stressed that
small and medium-sized banks should be liquidated and that therefore their MREL
should not exceed the loss absorption amount. A few noted the role that retained
earnings and other forms of equity could play in ensuring that small and medium-sized
banks comply with their MREL.
FOLF: Regarding the existing legal provisions and their alignment between the
conditions required to declare a bank FOLF and the triggers to initiate insolvency
proceedings, the majority supports full or maximum possible alignment, bearing in mind
105
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0107.png
restrictions in national law. Others raised caution when the FOLF assessment is based
on likely infringements of prudential requirements. Furthermore, the vast majority of
participants support the possibility of granting power to the supervisor to withdraw a
licence, but not in all FOLF cases, typically covering resolution scenarios where such
withdrawal would not be appropriate to preserve critical functions. The definition of
FOLF was perceived as sufficiently flexible to assess scenarios on a case-by-case basis,
while others highlighted the challenge to trigger FOLF based on likely infringements
that are not related to the bank’s financial position.
Potential introduction of an orderly liquidation tool: The introduction of such tool, while
welcomed by a few respondents, raised concerns with respect to its implementation.
Several respondents insisted on the need to avoid amending/deteriorating existing tools,
or considered possible impacts on constitutional features and existing national legal
frameworks. In terms of differences between a liquidation tool and the sale of business
tool in resolution, some respondents pointed at the fact that the orderly liquidation tool
and normal insolvency proceedings pursue different goals, with the former aiming at
mitigating effects on financial stability while the latter striving to maximise the proceeds
for the creditor.
b. Level of harmonisation of creditor hierarchy and impact on no creditor
worse off (NCWO) principle
A large majority of respondents indicated that the differences between bank creditor
hierarchies across Members States could complicate the application of resolution action
as they viewed these divergences as a source of increased fragmentation in the EU and
differentiated treatment amongst creditors. The respondents who did not agree with the
need to further harmonise the creditor hierarchy noted that insolvency laws are deeply
rooted in national tradition/practices and interlinked with other (non-bank related) fields
of law. With regard to the ranking of deposits, some respondents were in favour of a
general depositor preference and of removing the super-priority of covered deposits, the
latter with the purpose of allowing the effective use of DGS funds. However, a larger
number of respondents were against this super-priority elimination, on the basis of
minimising DGSs’ costs and liquidity needs, maintaining depositor confidence and
financial stability and avoiding moral hazard.
c. Deposit insurance
Most respondents noted that deposits of public and local authorities should also be
protected by the DGS, given that their exclusion creates additional management
difficulties (consumer organisations and saving banks). Conversely, several banks and
associations opposed adding additional groups, fearing it would increase their costs
since both the target levels of national DGS and SRF would increase. The view of the
majority of banks and DGSs is that the current regular information disclosure is
sufficient and that no changes were necessary. Digital communication was often
considered as the most suitable to save costs. Consumer organisations demanded that
Article 16 of the Deposit Guarantee Scheme Directive (DGSD) on depositor
information as well as the template in Annex I of the DGSD should be updated, clarified
and more consumer friendly. Savings banks from one Member State highlighted that
106
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0108.png
disclosure should take place only at the beginning of the business relationship, in case of
relevant changes and only in digital format.
Regarding the EDIS, a majority of respondents supported its introduction. Some of them
considered that national DGSs are limited in size and firepower and a fully-fledged
EDIS would be an essential piece of the Banking Union. Moreover, others underlined
that a fully-fledged EDIS would reduce the burden on banks, while minimising the
probability of a call for
ex post
contributions, also avoiding pro-cyclical impacts on
banks’ balance sheets. In contrast, other respondents underscored that EDIS would
make the European financial system riskier because of contagion effects from one
national banking sector to the other. As regards the efficiency of EDIS, some
respondents considered that the more resources are shared in a common central pool, the
more cost-effective the system would be. In contrast, other respondents believed that
EDIS would not be cost efficient and that it would entail higher administrative costs,
and more payout cases than under the current framework. Numerous respondents raised
different concerns in relation to the transfer of funds from the national DGSs to the
central fund of EDIS.
Some respondents (especially IPSs) highlighted that IPSs recognised as a DGS must be
excluded from EDIS. In the event that they were included, being a member of an IPS
should be considered as risk reducing factor when calculating the contributions.
Conversely, other respondents insisted that IPSs should be included in EDIS in order not
to weaken its firepower, to maintain a level playing field and depositor confidence.
Concerning specific parameters of EDIS, participants raised various views and concerns
with the majority of responses underlining the need for caps in order mitigate the first
mover advantage while others mentioned the maturity of the loans from EDIS to the
national DGS as a crucial parameter. In relation to options and national discretions
(ONDs), views were split, with some expressing opposition to the financing of ONDs
covered by central financing, others being in favour of expanding the common deposit
insurance mechanism to include the coverage of ONDs and some calling for a
harmonisation of ONDs. Views were split as regards to whether SRF and EDIS funds
should be merged, with those against stressing that the roles of these funds are different.
5.
T
ARGETED CONSULTATIONS OF
M
EMBER
S
TATES
From 2019-2021, the Commission discussed topics analysed in this impact assessment
with Member States, resolution authorities and designated authorities for the DGS
during 11 meetings of the Expert Group on Banking, Payments and Insurance (EGBPI).
To this effect, 17 non-papers including questionnaires were prepared:
-
On 5 December 2019, the two studies commissioned by the Commission to external
contractors, with the financial support of the European Parliament, under the Pilot
project “Creating a true Banking Union” were presented. The studies covered the
national options and discretions under the DGSD and their treatment in the context
of EDIS
168
and the differences between bank insolvency laws and their potential
168
See
CEPS study.
107
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0109.png
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
harmonisation
169
. There was also a presentation on protection of client funds of
payment and e-money institutions.
On 27 January 2020, members were invited to comment on the advice from the
EBA regarding the DGSD review, more specifically on the EBA opinions on
eligibility of deposits, coverage level and cooperation between DGS, payouts,
funding and uses of DGS funds.
On 20 February 2020, the Commission presented possible approaches on further
harmonisation of insolvency triggers, clarification of certain aspects of
precautionary recapitalisation and improvements to the use of EIM.
On 23 and 24 June 2020, there was an exchange of views with members on the use
of DGS funds under DGSD and BRRD and continued the discussion on the EBA
opinion regarding the DGSD review.
On 16 July 2020, the Commission invited members to provide their views on the
PIA and continued the discussion on the EBA opinion on the DGSD review.
On 28 September 2020, the Commission continued the discussions on resolution
and insolvency triggers and on the least cost test methodology for the use of the
DGS, and consulted members on the harmonisation of the ranking of deposits in the
creditor hierarchy in insolvency.
On 15 October 2020, the Commission presented a preliminary assessment of the
funding sources in the EU crisis management framework through stylised examples
and gathered views on further elements on the creditor hierarchy harmonisation in
insolvency and the protection of client funds of payment and e-money institutions.
On 12 November 2020, members were asked for their views on the use of DGS in
resolution and insolvency through stylised examples and on the legal feasibility of a
potential harmonised liquidation tool in insolvency.
On 14 December 2020, members discussed funding in resolution and enhancement
of market integration through the application of existing legal provisions in a home-
host balanced manner. One member presented their experience with high recovery
rates for subordinated creditors and the impact of NCWO.
On 25 February 2021, the SRB presented its views on the resolution of smaller to
medium-sized banks reliant on deposit funding and members were asked to provide
feedback on the EBA opinion on the interplay between the DGSD and the anti-
money laundering Directive (AMLD).
On 26 April 2021, the Commission presented the outcome of surveys distributed in
previous meetings.
In addition to the written input provided by the EGBPI members to the questionnaires
following each meeting, two detailed surveys were circulated to members: (i) on the
harmonisation of insolvency for banks (December 2019) and (ii) on mapping of DGSs
in Member States (January 2020).
In parallel to the discussions in the Commission’s Expert Group, the issues addressed in
this impact assessment were also covered in meetings of the Council’s preparatory
169
See
VVA study.
108
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0110.png
bodies, namely the Council Working Party on financial stability and the Banking Union
(CWP) and the High-Level Working Group on EDIS (HLWG).
In what concerns the most recent discussions, in the second semester of 2020 the CWP
was chaired by the German Presidency. Of relevance for this impact assessment,
Member States exchanged views on the following topics: interaction between
supervisory powers under the Capital Requirement Directive (CRD) and EIM in BRRD,
the resolution triggers and possible alignment with the national bankruptcy triggers, the
creditor hierarchy in insolvency, the crisis management framework for smaller banks
(with references to the PIA, a possible “EU bank liquidation regime”, the least cost test
for the DGS and governance) and furthering market integration. In the CWP, the
Commission presented an overview of the data collection exercise carried out to support
the development of the methodology for calculating risk-based contributions under
EDIS and the results of a survey on the parameters of the hybrid model.
170
In the first semester of 2021, when the CWP was chaired by the Portuguese Presidency,
the discussions focused on the design of the hybrid model for EDIS (with focus on the
inclusion of non-CRD/CRR entities, IPS recognised as DGS and third country
branches), the treatment of the ONDs in the DGSD (particularly the financing of
preventive and alternative measures), the risk-based contributions, the build-up of the
central deposit insurance fund, the transition to the steady-state and the articulation
between EDIS and the CMDI framework
171
.
In what concerns the HLWG, the discussions held at that level were structured around
four work streams.
172
Of relevance to this impact assessment were the work streams on
crisis management (which discussed topics such as early intervention measures, targeted
amendments to the insolvency legislation for banks in the EU, handling of the failure of
banks whose resolution is not in the public interest and need for expansion of the
liquidation toolbox) and on EDIS (parameters and sequencing for the hybrid model,
scope of common deposit insurance, conditionality, risk-based contributions,
transitional path towards the steady state, articulation with the CMDI framework).
Further, 50 bilateral meetings with resolution and competent authorities as well as 58
bilateral stakeholder meetings (banks, industry associations, think tanks) took place over
the period 2019-2022. In those meetings counterparts explained their country or
business model specific situation and/or expressed their views on the CMDI framework
orally, as also done through the consultations. More recent meetings in 2021-2022
focused on the possible policy options and their calibration possibilities. Requests for
bilateral exchanges were accepted to the extent that the overall balance was maintained.
The input provided is reflected in the impact assessment.
The views heard from Member States and industry stakeholders confirmed many of the
Commission findings regarding the functioning of the current framework and need for
reform. The input provided has been considered throughout the impact assessment.
170
European Council (23 November 2020), German Council
Presidency Progress Report
on the
Strengthening of the Banking Union.
171
European Council (2 June 2021), Portuguese Council
Presidency Progress Report
on strengthening the
Banking Union.
172
See
Letter by the HLWG Chair to the President of the Eurogroup
(December 2019).
109
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0111.png
6.
H
IGH
-
LEVEL CONFERENCE
On 18 March 2021, the Commission hosted the High-level conference “Strengthening
the EU’s bank crisis management and deposit insurance framework: for a more resilient
and efficient Banking Union”.
173
Amongst keynote speakers and panellists:
representatives from the banking industry/associations, Ministries, national resolution
authorities, DGSs, the SRB, the ECB, Members of the European Parliament, the EBA
and academia. Many speakers confirmed the importance of an effective CMDI
framework but also highlighted the current weaknesses. Although views were not fully
converging, there was consensus regarding room for improvement to make the
framework fit for purpose for all banks while protecting financial stability and
preserving depositors’ trust.
The keynote speakers emphasised as core elements of a robust CMDI framework and
Banking Union: (i) setting up EDIS, (ii) a careful calibration of the tools in resolution
and insolvency to cater for specificities of smaller banks and (iii) a more effective use of
funds in resolution and insolvency, including access to funding for smaller banks.
In the
first panel,
dedicated to issues pertaining to the tools in resolution and
insolvency, most panellists agreed that changes to the toolbox are warranted. Panellists
shared their experience with the framework and stressed the importance of predictability
and called for an alignment of the Commission’s Banking Communication with the
resolution framework. There was broad agreement on extending resolution to more
banks, however on the exact scope views differed. Panellists stressed the importance of
a clarification of the PIA. Some also noted the benefits of a harmonisation of insolvency
frameworks. One panellist highlighted that the review should not hinder the role of
banks to support the real economy and should strengthen financial stability.
In the
second panel,
dedicated to the issues of funding in resolution and insolvency,
speakers highlighted that the current rules were too constraining and proposed different
solutions to overcome the lack of access of smaller and medium-sized banks to
financing sources. Panellists shared their experiences and noted that circumventions to
resolution and burden sharing should be prevented. Further, the need to review the
constraints to the use of the DGS and EDIS, to tailor MREL to the resolution strategy of
each bank and to make the 8% requirement more flexible were highlighted. Some
harmonisation of bank insolvency laws would also be welcomed.
The
third panel
voiced their views on how the deposit insurance framework could be
further enhanced taking into account experiences from anti money-laundering cases or
fintech companies. The increase in fintech players and the COVID-19 response
measures led to a strong increase in deposits. Panellists noted that the current framework
would benefit from further harmonisation and a better interplay of the DGSD with
AMLD rules, the Payment Services Directive and State aid rules. Also, consumer
confidence and trust should be reflected in the DGSD review (pointing at the Greensill
case) as well as the situation of smaller markets. Further, panellists called for EDIS, to
strengthen depositor confidence and reduce costs for the banking sector.
See the European Commission’s
conference webpage
for details on the programme, the speakers and
the recoding of the event.
173
110
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0112.png
The Commission services invited stakeholders to provide their views through the two
open consultations, which would be duly considered in the assessment and proposal.
7.
EBA
OPINIONS
The Commission requested advice from the EBA on possible areas where the DGSD
could be strengthened. In 2019 and 2020, the EBA issued four opinions under Article
19(6) DGSD
174
.
See EBA opinions and Annex 6 for more information on the
recommendations and how these were integrated into the impact assessment.
8.
T
HE
F4F P
LATFORM OPINION
The Banking Union completion topic and the CMDI review were included in the 2021
Annual Work Programme of the F4F Platform. In its final opinion, which was issued on
10 December 2021, the F4F Platform considers that there is room for improvement to
make the CMDI framework fit for purpose for all banks, in a proportionate manner,
taking into consideration potential impact on depositors’ confidence and on financial
stability. The Platform also considers important, given the technical complexity and
significance of the objectives pursued with the legislation, to factor in a proper time for
allowing the markets and the public authorities to deploy the regulation correctly. To
this end, the Platform brings forward five concrete suggestions for improvements:
Suggestion 1:
Broadly merging of supervisory powers and EIM
The Platform calls for broadly merging the supervisory powers under the CRD with the
early intervention powers under the BRRD and leaving only the most intrusive measures
in the BRRD. According to the F4F Platform, this improvement will help ensuring that
measures do not overlap but complement each other, thus increasing the consistency of
EIM and its overall usage. The Platform also highlights that it should be ensured that the
application of the EIM does not pose legal uncertainties with regard to the application of
the Market Abuse Regulation which requires public disclosure.
See Annex 5 (evaluation) and section 4 of Annex 8, for more information on how the
relevant suggestion of the Platform has been taken into consideration in this impact
assessment.
Suggestion 2:
Clarification of Article 16 DGSD – Periodic information on deposit
protection
The Platform suggests that the provision of periodic information on deposit protection to
depositors, as per Article 16(1) DGSD, should only take place at the beginning of the
business relationship, or in case of relevant changes, as this could help in reducing the
administrative burden.
Suggestion 2 flags an issue that is analysed in this impact assessment. However, as
explained in section 3.2.8 of Annex 6, the approach proposed on this issue is to follow
the EBA recommendation, which was supported by the vast majority of the experts in
the EGBPI, that the annual information disclosure should not be altered because of its
positive impact for depositor awareness.
174
See Annex 1.
111
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
Suggestion 5:
Improve the consistency between the DGSD, Payment Services and E-
Money Directives and increase the protection of client funds of e-money institutions and
payment institutions
The Platform expresses the view that an improvement in the interaction between the
DGSD, the Payment services and E-money Directives is warranted for increasing
depositor protection and public trust in digital payment services offered by non-banks.
In particularly, the Platform calls for improvements in the DGSD for clarifying the
conditions, under which, client funds deposited with a credit institution by payment
institutions or e-money institutions would be eligible for depositor protection under the
DGSD. See Annex 5 (evaluation) and section 3.2.4 of Annex 6 for more information in
how the relevant suggestion was taken into consideration in this impact assessment.
Finally, the Platform formulated suggestions for improving the legal clarity in the
provisions concerning the FOLF triggers
(Suggestion 3)
and the assessment of the public
interest for resolution
(Suggestion 4).
According to the Platform, legal changes in these
two areas would be helpful for increasing the legal certainty and consistency in the
handling of failed banks.
112
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0114.png
A
NNEX
3: W
HO IS AFFECTED AND HOW
?
1.
P
RACTICAL IMPLICATIONS OF THE INITIATIVE
The objectives of this Annex are to summarise how option 3 (assessed as technically
superior) addresses the identified problems and to set out the practical implications for
the main stakeholders affected by this initiative, mainly the banking sector and their
shareholders and creditors, resolution and supervisory authorities, as well as depositors
and the taxpayers. The initiative aims to simultaneously address the following problems
described in Chapter 2:
Problem 1:
Insufficient legal certainty and predictability in the management of
bank failures;
Problem 2:
Ineffective funding options and divergent access conditions in
resolution and insolvency; and
Problem 3:
Uneven and inconsistent depositor protection and lack of robustness
in deposit guarantee scheme (DGS) funding.
By ensuring a timelier and expanded scope for resolution, which would limit the
destruction of banks’ value when compared to liquidation proceedings, option 3 would
enhance financial stability and generate net overall gains for taxpayers, depositors,
including small and medium enterprises (SMEs), resolution authorities, but also the
markets and the society at large. Banks’ costs may increase due to a broader use of DGS
funds which would require replenishment through
ex post
industry contributions, which,
in the absence of a European deposit insurance scheme (EDIS) cannot be lowered.
Banks’ creditors may lose under these options due to bail-in when resolving more
smaller/medium-sized banks, however this would contribute to reducing moral hazard
and ensuring that losses are internalised to the bank’s claim holders rather than
externalised to the society.
Option 3 would address the three problems identified by strengthening the legal certainty
and clarity of the presumptive path for action in case of failing banks, ensuring more
effective funding options and harmonised conditions to access them. Legal certainty and
level playing field would be achieved through more standardisation and harmonisation of
rules on: the application of the public interest assessment (PIA), use of DGS funds for
various interventions, early intervention measures and failing or likely to fail declaration,
the requirement to wind-down banks and foster market exit in case of negative PIA (to
avoid legal limbo situations) and the harmonisation of depositor preference in the
hierarchy of claims
175
. The revision of the least cost test for DGS interventions would
improve the effectiveness and efficiency of the use of DGS funds, ensuring coherent and
consistent approaches across Member States.
While most of these elements are similar across the option packages presented in
Chapters 5 and 6, the changes proposed to the PIA under option 3 deliver a more
175
As explained in Chapter 2.
113
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0115.png
significant expansion of the scope for resolution than other options. This goes hand in
hand with the ease of accessing funding under the retained option.
Option 3 would improve the access to the resolution funds (RF) or the Single Resolution
Fund (SRF)
176
and DGS funds in resolution for an increasing number of smaller and
medium-sized banks coming in the scope of resolution through an extended PIA. This
implies, in particular, that the restructuring of failing smaller and medium-sized banks,
possibly under transfer strategies in resolution or alternative measures in insolvency
would be financed more credibly and with more proportionality than under other options.
The access to the RF/SRF would be facilitated without compromising the principle of
minimum bail-in condition, which safeguards against moral hazard (i.e. making sure the
bank’s shareholders and creditors are first in line to bear losses before any industry
funded safety nets are employed).
The implementation of option 3 would largely benefit depositors (i.e. retail clients,
SMEs, municipalities, other public institutions, large corporates, financial institutions)
and taxpayers by shielding them from losses, which would be covered by the bank’s
internal loss absorbing capacity and industry funded safety nets. Depositors would
benefit from placing more smaller/medium-sized banks in resolution and having their
deposits transferred to a healthy bank with the help of the DGS funds, as they would
preserve continued access to their accounts, avoid a run on the bank and benefit from a
more efficient use of DGS funds. Taxpayers would benefit as well since handling
distressed banks would be more likely financed through industry-funded safety nets
rather than public money. The size of available funding to enable transfer transactions is
directly proportional with the protection of the respective depositors and taxpayers in the
EU.
Banks and their shareholders, investors, employees and depositors would also benefit
from the retained option from the perspective of enhanced legal clarity and level playing
field in the application of rules and enhanced standardisation. While depositors would be
more protected from losses under these options, other investors may see their claims
written-down or converted into capital by applying bail-in. However, option 3 would
benefit most stakeholders through the preservation of banks’ franchise value and the
safeguarding of commercial relations through a transfer transaction of parts or all the
failing business to a healthy acquirer rather than by applying piece-meal liquidation. This
may come at a cost for banks, as the more extensive use of DGS funds would require
recouping the funds (possibly) disbursed through
ex post
industry contributions.
However, this tendence would be compensated by a more efficient use of funds in
resolution/alternative measures as opposed to a full payout in insolvency.
Resolution authorities would also benefit from the retained option, by relying on clearer
and more harmonised rules when implementing the provisions of the law, reducing legal
risks. Their incentives to decide on the application of certain crisis management tools
would be more aligned and focused on the preservation of value, effectiveness and
efficiency of outcome.
176
Through the use of DGS funds to bridge the gap towards the minimum access condition to the RF/SRF,
as explained in Chapter 6.
114
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0116.png
The initiative is neutral in terms of impact on administrative costs
177
, meaning, on
aggregate, it neither adds nor removes administrative burden on banks, citizens or
resolution authorities. Therefore, the initiative does not have a significant impact on the
Commission’s ‘one in, one out’ approach
178
, seeking to scrutinise and monitor new
and/or removed administrative costs (both one-off and recurring) for businesses. This is
because, on one hand, banks earmarked for liquidation under the current framework and
which would be entering the scope of resolution for the first time under this initiative,
would be subject to the obligation to enhance their recovery plans, provide information to
resolution authorities on a more frequent basis for the preparation of more extensive
resolution plans and ensure they become resolvable. While this would involve some
additional costs for banks, these are estimated to be marginal, because banks earmarked
for liquidation already report data to resolution authorities who prepare resolution plans
albeit
on a less frequent basis (under simplified obligations). On the other hand, the
initiative offsets these effects by providing some relief through waiving the need to adopt
MREL decisions for a scope of banks earmarked for liquidation, where MREL is equal to
own funds requirements (see Annex 8, section 8). The impact of this change is more
meaningful for resolution authorities than for banks (due to the reduction in MREL
decisions to be adopted and communicated to banks) and is rather localised in those
Member States with less concentrated banking sectors (many small banks which have
liquidation as preferred strategy in case of failure) and where the MREL requirement
would not exceed own funds.
Additionally, the society would benefit from financial stability and the protection and
continuation of critical functions that banks deliver to citizens, more convergence and
clarity on the presumptive path in the application of the rules and level playing field,
fostering more confidence in the banking sector and the single market in banking.
Tables 2 and 3 summarise the impacts of the preferred option.
According to the Commission’s Better Regulation Toolbox (#58), administrative costs are the costs
incurred by enterprises, the voluntary sector, public authorities, and citizens in meeting administrative
obligations towards public authorities or private parties. Administrative obligations in a broad sense
include labelling, reporting registration, monitoring, and assessment needed to provide the information. In
some cases, the information must be transferred to public authorities or private parties. In others, it only
must be available for inspection or supply on request.
178
The Commission has committed to the ‘one in, one out’ (OIOO) approach (see Political Guidelines of
President von der Leyen, ‘better regulation’ Communication of 29 April 2021, COM(2021) 219). This
means offsetting new burdens resulting from the Commission’s proposals by reducing existing burdens in
the same policy area. The ‘better regulation’ Communication COM(2021) 219, sets out the main principles
of the approach (identification through cost estimation methods and reporting for the purpose of OIOO).
OIOO only applies to cost implications originating from Commission proposals and covers the impact of
new regulatory requirements (not ‘business as usual’ costs). Costs imposed by other parties – co-legislators
or by Member States and local, regional authorities – are not included.
177
115
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0117.png
Table 2: Overview table depicting winners and losers
Summary of winners and losers
Taxpayers
Depositors
Banks
Creditors
Resolution
authorities
Problem 1:
Insufficient legal certainty and predictability in the management of bank failures
Problem 2:
Ineffective funding options and divergent access conditions for the financing of resolution and insolvency
Problem 3:
Uneven and inconsistent depositor protection and lack of robustness in DGS funding
Baseline:
Do nothing
0
0
0
0
0
Option 3:
Substantially improved resolution funding
++
+++
+/-
+/-
179
+++
and commensurate resolution scope
Table 3: Overview table depicting to what extent the options achieve the objectives
Effectiveness
Financial stability
Minimise recourse
to taxpayer money,
weaken bank-
sovereign loop
Level playing field,
single market
Depositor
protection
Proportionality
Efficiency
Coherence
Problem 1:
Insufficient legal certainty and predictability in the management of bank failures
Problem 2:
Ineffective funding options and divergent access conditions for the financing of resolution and insolvency
Problem 3:
Uneven and inconsistent depositor protection and lack of robustness in DGS funding
Baseline: Do nothing
0
0
0
0
0
0
Option 3:
Substantially improved
resolution funding and
+++
+++
+++
++
++
+++
commensurate resolution scope
179
0
++
Bank’s creditors would benefit from a higher valuation in resolution than under piecemeal liquidation and preservation of the franchise value of the bank, however, some of them
may be bailed-in if the access to the RF/SRF is required to resolve the bank.
116
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0118.png
2.
S
UMMARY OF COSTS AND BENEFITS
Table 4: Overview of the benefits
I. Overview of Benefits (total for all provisions) – Retained Options
Amount
Direct benefits
Description
Enhanced legal certainty,
harmonisation and simplification
of certain rules leading to
convergence and level playing
field.
Comments
No available amount
ex ante.
Strengthening the single rulebook and harmonising
crisis management rules will unify the regulatory environment and increase the
level playing field, possibly fostering more integration in the single market,
which could be monitored in the future.
By harmonising the application of the PIA, the depositor preference in the
hierarchy of claims, the least cost test to access DGS funding for various
interventions, the retained option would enhance legal clarity and achieve a
significant simplification of rules.
Resolution authorities would be the main
recipients of these benefits, especially when
working on cross-border banking groups, mainly
due to increased standardisation, simplification
and streamlining of rules. Additional legal
clarity would reduce the risk of legal challenge
for authorities related to the planning,
formulation of requirements to banks and
execution of the preferred strategy.
Market participants would also benefit from
standardisation, as they would be in a better
position to assess risks related to banks.
Depositors would also be the recipients of these
benefits, as the harmonisation of depositor
preference in the hierarchy of claims would
ensure their fair their treatment across Member
States.
Taxpayers would be the main recipients of this
benefit. A more efficient use of DGS funds
would reduce the risk of DGS liquidity shortfall
and the need of public intervention as a backstop
to the DGS.
Reduced recourse to taxpayer
money.
No amount available
ex ante.
Taxpayer money would be more protected when
handling failing banks by using resolution or alternative measures more
consistently, mainly because shareholders, creditors and, if needed, the resolution
fund/ DGS would bear losses and support executing the resolution strategy.
Estimating the amount of taxpayer funds savings that would be enabled by these
reform would be bank-specific. As an indication based on the past, when
considering the examples of failing banks between 2015 and 2022, taxpayer
117
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0119.png
exposures to such contingent liabilities reached EUR 58.2 bn (out of which EUR
28.1 bn were used for liquidity support). However, future uses of taxpayer money
cannot be gauged on past cases.
Strengthened depositor
confidence through continued
access to accounts, greater
protection of eligible deposits
(also non-covered) and avoidance
of bank runs.
No amount available
ex ante.
Alternative use of DGS for paying out covered
deposits under insolvency would limit the disruption caused by blocked deposit
accounts. It would be confidence enhancing and less prone to contagion/bank
run. Moreover, non-covered deposits (above EUR 100 000) in the EU (amounts
not reported to EBA) would also be more protected from bail-in under transfer
strategies as per the retained option, while they are not protected under a payout
scenario (only covered deposits are protected in that case). This prospect would
potentially deter depositors from running on the bank.
In a payout event, where depositors must be reimbursed within seven days,
interrupted access to accounts, social benefits and credit facilities for even a short
period in prevalently cashless societies, using or operating with credit and debit
cards and electronic systems, could impact the overall economy. The failure of
smaller and medium-sized banks can also create substitutability issues because of
challenges for a high number of depositors and banks to simultaneously open
new accounts to receive their reimbursement.
No amount available
ex ante.
The cost of a DGS intervention measure either in
resolution or under alternative measures in insolvency would be cheaper than the
cost of paying out covered depositors under a piecemeal liquidation. A payout of
covered depositors is usually cash consuming as the DGS would be required to
reimburse the amount of covered deposits to all eligible covered depositors
before recovering (part of) this amount during the insolvency proceedings.
Moreover, the least cost test ensures that the DGS contributions under resolution
or alternative measures in insolvency are always lower than those in a payout
event. Therefore, facilitating other measures than payout would better preserve
the financial means of the DGS, reducing the amounts of losses that may arise
through the DGS intervention.
However, it is very challenging to provide an amount corresponding to the cost
reduction for the DGS as this would be bank-specific.
Covered and non-covered eligible depositors are
the main recipients of these benefits because
their deposits would be less likely to be bailed-
in. More generally, depositor confidence in the
banking sector would be strengthened by
limiting DGS payout events and facilitating the
use of DGS funds for measures preserving their
continued access to their accounts (e.g.
resolution or alternative measures in
insolvency).
More efficient use of DGS funds
in managing banks in crises.
Banks contributing to the DGS funds and DGS
authorities are the main recipients of this
benefit.
By preserving DGS available financial means,
banks would be called on to contribute less to
replenish the spent funds. Additionally, DGS
authorities would benefit from a more efficient
usage of DGS available financial means.
118
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0120.png
More credible and proportionate
access to RF/SRF for smaller and
medium-sized banks.
No amount available
ex ante.
A more credible and proportionate access to
RF/SRF for smaller and medium-sized banks would lead to a wider application of
resolution tools (transfer of deposit book), preserving more value, in particular
when compared to a piecemeal liquidation or a procedure under non harmonised
national insolvency rules. The use of the industry-funded safety net would
replace in many cases the bail-in of non-covered depositors.
However, estimating the amount of the RF/SRF that would be required is not
possible
ex ante
because it would depend on a case by case analysis and the
specific circumstances of each bank at the moment of failure (e.g. level of losses
at the point of failure, the financial fundamentals of the bank, the composition of
its liabilities, all of which feed into the results of the valuation exercise).
Non-covered depositors would be the main
recipients of this benefit. They would not see
their deposits wiped out in case their bank
would be failing and resolved under a transfer
strategy. Rather, the DGS and the RF/SRF
which are industry-funded safety nets would
step in to facilitate the resolution of that
respective bank.
Franchise value of a failing bank
preserved when facilitating
transfer strategies.
No amount available
ex ante.
The transfer of the (whole or partial) business
Stakeholders in a failing bank, the other banks
would preserve the franchise value to a greater extent than under a piecemeal
contributing to safety nets, as well as taxpayers
liquidation approach. It would avoid the destruction of the business brand,
are the main recipients of this benefit.
preserving the commercial relationships with the clients and consequently better
maintaining the profitability of, and the return on the assets. Transfer strategies
could be applied in resolution. Where resolution is discarded (negative PIA),
alternative measures in insolvency maintain an incentive to maximise the
franchise value, thereby minimising the cost for the DGS. However, an amount
reflecting the preservation of value cannot be estimated. Doing so would be fully
case-dependant and specific to the circumstances of each bank at the moment of
failure.
119
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0121.png
Indirect benefits
Better aligned incentives to apply
resolution tools and benefit from
funding solutions to execute the
strategy.
No amount available. Improving the incentives to apply an improved and
Taxpayers, depositors, resolution authorities,
more standardised framework would lead to less circumvention in application banks and markets would all be recipients of
and more level playing field at EU level.
this benefit.
However, this cannot be quantified, as it would be the sum of the benefits
stemming from the protection of taxpayers and depositors, more efficient use
of DGS funds and more legal certainty in using tools for the banks, resolution
authorities and markets.
No amount available. Fixing the tools and the funding to deal with
smaller/medium-sized banks which are predominantly deposit taking would
preserve such traditional business models across the EU, on the condition
that they remain viable.
n/a
The society at large is the recipient of this
benefit.
Preservation of Europe’s diversity in
banking business models.
Administrative cost savings related to the ‘one in, one out’ approach*
n/a
n/a
(1) Estimates are gross values relative to the baseline for the preferred option as a whole (i.e. the impact of individual actions/obligations of the preferred option are aggregated
together); (2) Please indicate which stakeholder group is the main recipient of the benefit in the comment section;(3) For reductions in regulatory costs, please describe details as to how
the saving arises (e.g. reductions in adjustment costs, administrative costs, regulatory charges, enforcement costs, etc.); (4) Cost savings related to the ’one in, one out’ approach are
detailed in Tool #58 and #59 of the ‘better regulation’ toolbox. * if relevant.
120
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0122.png
Table 5: Overview of costs
II. Overview of costs – Retained options
Citizens/Consumers /Businesses
One-off
n/a
n/a
Banks
One-off
More banks coming
into the scope of
resolution would
require investing in
projects enhancing
their resolvability (e.g.
IT systems, timely
data reporting, legal
structure, review
contracts in view of
implementing
resolution stays,
valuation capabilities,
liquidity monitoring,
etc.). As resolution
authorities continue to
retain discretion in
their decision to place
banks in resolution vs
insolvency, the
number of banks that
Administrations
Recurrent
One-off
Applying resolution
tools presumably
more often, due to
the expansion of the
resolution scope,
depending on the
occurrence of failure
events.
This cost cannot be
estimated upfront, as
resolution authorities
continue to retain
discretion in their
decision to apply
resolution vs
insolvency.
Recurrent
Recurrent
Preparing more
resolution plans,
conducting more
resolvability
assessments and
setting MREL
requirements for more
banks as part of
yearly resolution
planning cycles. The
number of banks
which would enter the
resolution scope and
therefore this cost
cannot be estimated
upfront, as resolution
authorities continue to
retain discretion in
their decision to apply
resolution vs
insolvency.
Expanding the
scope of
resolution
through clarified
PIA
Direct adjustment costs
Raise MREL eligible
instruments in case
of shortfalls against
the set targets. This
cost cannot be
estimated upfront
because it depends
on the features of the
bank
180
, its potential
bank-specific MREL
target, the
outstanding stock of
eligible instruments
already held and
market conditions.
180
E.g. rating, creditworthiness, financial fundamentals (such as quality of assets, capitalisation, etc.).
121
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0123.png
II. Overview of costs – Retained options
Citizens/Consumers /Businesses
One-off
Recurrent
One-off
would enter the scope
of resolution cannot
be estimated.
Moreover, the
additional costs that
each bank may incur
to become more
resolvable depends on
the specific situation
of each bank (efficacy
of management
information systems,
valuation capabilities,
etc.)
Direct administrative
costs
Direct regulatory fees
and charges
Direct enforcement
costs
Indirect costs
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
Additional costs
for banks may be
passed on to
clients. However,
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
Banks
Recurrent
Administrations
One-off
Recurrent
122
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0124.png
II. Overview of costs – Retained options
Citizens/Consumers /Businesses
One-off
Recurrent
such costs should
be limited.
Facilitating the
use of funds in
resolution and
alternative
insolvency
measures
Facilitating the use of
DGS funds may
increase the costs for
the banking sector
due to additional
contributions to
replenish the DGS
upon depletion. No
quantification
available, as an
estimate would
strongly depend on
the amount of funds
the DGS would use
which reflects the
losses in case of a
failure. However,
this cost would be
compensated through
more efficient use of
DGS in resolution
compared to payout
in insolvency.
More complex
processes and
additional tasks for
resolution authorities
when DGS can
contribute towards
the minimum 8%
TLOF bail-in
condition to access
the RF/SRF.
Banks
One-off
Recurrent
Administrations
One-off
Recurrent
Direct adjustment costs
123
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0125.png
II. Overview of costs – Retained options
Citizens/Consumers /Businesses
One-off
Direct administrative
costs
Direct regulatory fees
and charges
Direct enforcement
costs
Indirect costs
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
Banks
One-off
n/a
n/a
n/a
Costs by
small/medium-sized
banks which have
already raised MREL
instruments and can
access RF/SRF
without DGS
contribution.
n/a
n/a
n/a
Administrations
Recurrent
n/a
n/a
n/a
Recurrent
One-off
n/a
n/a
n/a
Recurrent
Costs related to the ‘one in, one out’ approach
Direct adjustment costs n/a
Indirect adjustment
costs
Administrative costs
(for offsetting)
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
(1) Estimates (gross values) to be provided with respect to the baseline; (2) costs are provided for each identifiable action/obligation of the preferred option otherwise for all retained
options when no preferred option is specified; (3) If relevant and available, please present information on costs according to the standard typology of costs (adjustment costs,
124
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0126.png
administrative costs, regulatory charges, enforcement costs, indirect costs;); (4) Administrative costs for offsetting as explained in Tool #58 and #59 of the ‘better regulation’ toolbox.
The total adjustment costs should equal the sum of the adjustment costs presented in the upper part of the table (whenever they are quantifiable and/or can be monetised). Measures
taken with a view to compensate adjustment costs to the greatest extent possible are presented in the section of the impact assessment report presenting the preferred option.
3.
R
ELEVANT SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT GOALS
(SDG
S
)
III. Overview of relevant Sustainable Development Goals – Retained option
Expected progress towards the Goal
Relevant SDG
Comments
SDG no. 8 – decent work and
economic growth, nr. 13 – climate
action, no. 9 – industry, innovation
and infrastructure
181
Increased financial stability, a more integrated single market and level playing field will
lead to increased resilience for the EU banking sector, which in turn, is more likely to
finance the economy creating growth and contribute to the sectors’ green and digital
transition (‘twin transition’). These contributions to economic growth and the twin
transition cannot be quantified in relation to this initiative.
181
United Nations’
Sustainable Development Goals
(2015).
125
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0127.png
A
NNEX
4: ‘Z
OOM
-
IN
ON CORE ELEMENTS OF THE CRISIS
MANAGEMENT AND DEPOSIT INSURANCE FRAMEWORK
This Annex explains the core elements of the CMDI framework for a deeper
understanding of the topic.
Since 2014, the Bank Recovery and Resolution Directive (BRRD) lays down a
comprehensive and harmonised regime for the recovery and resolution of failing banks
across the EU. The Single Resolution Mechanism Regulation (SRMR) complements that
harmonised framework for the Banking Union. The Deposit Guarantee Scheme Directive
(DGSD) lays down a set of harmonised rules for depositor protection. Besides
reimbursing depositors in case of a failure of the institution up to EUR 100 000, deposit
guarantee schemes (DGS) funds can be used to prevent the failure or to finance measures
in insolvency (subject to the national transposition of this option) or in the resolution of
credit institutions under certain conditions. On the contrary, insolvency is not harmonised
and national bank insolvency proceedings differ substantially across the EU.
The CMDI framework was designed to avert and manage the failure of credit institutions
of any size while protecting depositors and taxpayers. The framework provides for a set
of instruments that can be applied in the different stages of the lifecycle of banks in
distress. Before a bank is declared failing or likely to fail (FOLF), these instruments
allow a timely intervention to address a financial deterioration (early intervention
measures), to prevent the failure of a bank (preventive measures with funding from the
DGS
182
) or precautionary recapitalisation measures financed by the public budget under
strict conditions. When a bank is considered FOLF and there is a public interest in
resolving it
183
, the resolution authorities will intervene in the bank by using the tools and
powers granted by the BRRD
184
in absence of a private solution. These include the power
to sell the bank or parts of it to one or more buyers, to transfer critical functions to a
bridge institution and to transfer non-performing assets to an asset management vehicle.
Moreover, it includes the power to bail-in the bank’s shareholders and creditors by
reducing their claims or converting them into capital, to provide the bank with loss-
absorbing or recapitalisation resources. In the Banking Union, the resolution of systemic
banks and cross-border groups is carried out by the Single Resolution Board (SRB). In
the absence of a public interest for resolution, the bank failure should be handled through
national orderly winding up proceedings, sometimes with financing from the DGS or
other sources, carried out by national authorities.
182
183
Article 11(3) DGSD.
Resolution is considered in the public interest when resolution is necessary for the achievement of and
proportionate to one or more resolution objectives and normal insolvency proceedings would not achieve
the resolution objectives to the same extent (Article 32 BRRD).
184
In the following, reference to the BRRD should be understood as including also corresponding
provisions in the SRMR.
126
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0128.png
Figure 10: Measures and bodies of the CMDI framework
Source: European Commission
The framework is intended to provide a combination of funding sources to manage
failures in an economically efficient manner, while preserving the bank’s franchise value
and reducing recourse to the public budget and ultimately the cost to the taxpayers. The
costs of resolving the bank (i.e. the losses) are first allocated to the shareholders and
creditors of the bank itself (bank’s internal loss absorbing capacity), which also reduces
moral hazard. If needed, resources can be complemented by resolution financing
arrangements funded by the industry (through the national resolution funds (RF) or the
Single Resolution Fund (SRF) in the Banking Union and the DGSs) to cover the
remaining losses. In the Banking Union, these rules were further integrated by entrusting
the SRB with the management and oversight of the SRF, which is funded by
contributions from credit institutions and certain investment firms in the participating
Member States of the Banking Union. Depending on the tool applied to a bank in distress
(e.g. preventive, precautionary, resolution or alternative measures) and the specificities of
the case, compliance with the State aid rules may be necessary for interventions by a RF,
a DGS or public funding from the State budget.
The State aid rules for banks
185
are intrinsically interconnected with, and complementary
to the CMDI framework. The two frameworks are applied consistently by the
Commission (e.g. the Commission checks if a a public or private support qualified as a
State aid measure violates intrinsically linked provisions of the CMDI framework and
cannot authorise it, if it does so). Despite their natural interlinkages, the two frameworks
185
The Commission has direct enforcement powers in relation to EU State aid rules, which derive from the
Treaty (Article 107 TFEU). In the context of the global financial crisis, the Commission clarified its
assessment of compatibility of State aid measures to banks under Article 107(3)(b) TFEU in several
Commission Communications, including the 2013 Banking Communication.
127
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0129.png
are meant to tackle different issues: State aid rules’ main purpose is to limit competition
distortions from such support to banks, while the CMDI framework’s primary objective
is to limit risks to financial stability from the disorderly management of bank failures
while avoiding or minimising the use of public funds and ensuring depositors’ protection.
In order to ensure consistency between the two frameworks, in November 2020, the
Eurogroup invited the Commission to carry out and finalise its review of the State aid
rules for banks, in parallel to the review of the CMDI framework, ensuring its entry into
force at the same time as the revised CMDI framework. Such timeline aims at ensuring
consistency between the two frameworks, adequate burden sharing of shareholders and
creditors to protect taxpayers and depositors, and preserve financial stability
186
. In June
2022, the Eurogroup took note of the intention of the European Commission to finalise
the review of the State aid framework for banks, to ensure consistency between the State
aid framework and the renewed CMDI framework.
Having the objective of coherence in mind, it is important to underline that the CMDI
framework is subject to co-legislation, which will require time, and its outcome as
compared to the Commission proposal is uncertain, while an update of the State aid rules
requires a Commission Communication, which, when decided by the Commission, could
take effect immediately.
Notwithstanding the interactions between the various components of the current
legislative framework, the reform of the State aid rules is not part of the present impact
assessment nor of the subsequent legislative proposal. A separate process to assess the
need for a review of the State aid rules is ongoing, in parallel to the review of the CMDI
framework, also in light of different procedures to amend the relevant acts
187
.
In terms of deposit protection, deposits are protected up to EUR 100 000 per depositor
and per bank, under the DGSD, regardless of whether the bank is put into resolution or
insolvency. In insolvency
188
, the primary function of a DGS is to pay out depositors
within seven days of a determination of unavailability of their deposits. Under the
DGSD, DGSs may also have other functions (all aimed at preserving depositor
confidence) such as financing preventive measures or, financing measures in insolvency
other than payout, i.e. a transfer of assets and liabilities to a buyer, to preserve the access
to covered deposits (DGS alternative measures). The DGSD provides a limit as regards
the costs of such preventive and alternative measures. They can never be more costly
than a payout of the covered amount. Moreover, DGSs can contribute financially to a
bank’s resolution, under certain conditions.
186
Eurogroup (November 2020),
Statement of the Eurogroup in inclusive format on the ESM reform and
the early introduction of the backstop to the Single Resolution Fund.
The intention of the Eurogroup is to
ensure that the outcome of the State aid rules review is aligned with the outcome of the negotiations of the
CMDI review by co-legislators.
187
In March 2022, the Commission has launched a
Call for Evidence
together with a
public
and
targeted
consultation to seek stakeholder feedback on the evaluation of State aid rules for banks in difficulty. The
input collected and a study will feed into the evaluation that the Commission aims to publish.
188
Insolvency proceedings across the EU are unharmonised; some allow for certain transfer tools similar to
resolution financed by DGSs, others only allow for piece-meal liquidation proceedings.
128
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0130.png
The functioning of the DGSs and the use of their funds cannot be seen in isolation from
the broader debate on the European deposit insurance scheme (EDIS).
Notwithstanding the progress achieved, areas for further strengthening and adjustment
were identified with regard to both the resolution and depositor insurance framework.
The evaluation of the current rules (see Annex 5) has identified issues with the
framework’s design, implementation and application. The review of the CMDI
framework should provide solutions to address these issues and enable the framework to
fully achieve its objectives
189
and be fit for its purpose.
The revision of the CMDI framework as well as a possible further harmonisation of
insolvency laws are foreseen in the respective review clauses of the legislative texts. The
review is part of the agenda for the completion of the Banking Union, as emphasised in
President von der Leyen’s
Political Guidelines.
Although the political guidelines
included the creation of EDIS, it will not be part of the current initiative because political
discussions on EDIS and other workstreams of the Banking Union completion plan have
yet to be finalised.
Insolvency
National insolvency proceedings are not part of the CMDI framework, but they are
alternative to it. The resolution authority may conclude that the bank does not need to be
put in resolution because its failure would not have a significant impact on financial
stability or would not endanger any critical function and that the tools available in the
insolvency law of the relevant Member State are adequate to manage the bank’s failure
(i.e. the public interest assessment is negative). In this case, the bank is put in insolvency
according to national law. Very small banks are likely candidates for being credibly
handled when they fail through insolvency proceedings, without creating ripple effects in
the financial system or the real economy.
The procedure and tools available in this case depend on the national legislation. These
may vary widely from Member State to Member State. Some foresee a judicial
“atomistic” insolvency procedure, leading to the sale of the assets in a piecemeal fashion
to repay the creditors in order of their ranking in the hierarchy of claims, similar to the
insolvency available for regular corporations (in some countries the insolvency procedure
is actually the same for banks and other companies).
Certain Member States’ legislations provide for administrative insolvency proceedings
for banks. These are generally managed by an administrative authority in cooperation
with the relevant court. Concretely, these procedures provide for measures similar to the
resolution tools, such as selling the whole business (i.e. also the liabilities) to a buyer
without the consent of the failing bank’s creditors.
Normally, funding from sources outside of the bank’s assets should not be required in
insolvency, as creditors are expected to bear losses and share any value realised through
the liquidation (sale) of assets, in order of their ranking in the hierarchy of claims.
189
See Chapter
Error! Reference source not found.
on the objectives.
129
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0131.png
However, for the insolvency of banks, the DGS has the possibility to use an alternative
measure to payout, aiming at preserving the depositors’ access to covered deposits, such
as a transfer of the assets and liabilities and deposit book to an acquiring bank. This tends
to be a more efficient and effective solution than payout, however it is only available in
11 Member States (who transposed this national option). Actions under national
insolvency law can also be financed with support from the public budget (State aid).
Merits of resolution versus insolvency, including for smaller and mid-sized banks in
the CMDI framework
The fundamental principle of the EU harmonised resolution framework is to provide a
common toolbox to deal effectively with any bank failure (irrespective of its
geographical location, its size or business model i.e. domestic or operating across the
border) in an orderly way, preserving financial stability and protecting depositors without
relying on public funds. For many banks, such objectives cannot be met to the same
extent under national insolvency frameworks, which, in some cases, are not adapted to
the specificities of bank failures.
The CMDI framework implements in the EU regulatory framework the international
consensus emerging after the global financial crisis (G20, Financial Stability Board
decisions) that banks should never again be bailed out with public money. The set-up of
the resolution frameworks around the world constituted a major paradigm shift from bail-
out to bail-in (i.e. banks should pay for their own resolution/liquidation with their own
resources as well as with industry-funded resources as opposed to public bail out).
This principle of not using taxpayer money for the financial industry is already well
rooted in the EU. As an illustration, the Recovery and Resilience Facility
190
, an
instrument part of NextGenerationEU adopted in the context of the COVID-19 pandemic
and aimed at helping the EU emerge stronger and more resilient from that crisis
explicitly excluded funding to banks and the financial sector. Similarly, the EU state Aid
Temporary Framework
191
adopted in 2020 to enable Member States to use the full
flexibility foreseen under State aid rules to support the economy in the context of the
coronavirus outbreak also explicitly excluded State Aid to banks.
This principle of protecting taxpayer money was also at the heart of the CMDI
framework when adopted in 2014. In addition to this objective, a common resolution
framework and toolbox has a number of very important benefits compared to national
insolvency proceedings:
provides predictability and level playing field when handling (any) failing banks,
which means that taxpayers, deposits and bank creditors are treated in the same
manner across the EU,
enhances preparedness, through recovery and resolution planning for crisis times,
including by imposing requirements on banks to become resolvable and absorb
possible losses internally or via the safety nets (thereby shifting away losses from
taxpayers and internalising losses with the industry),
190
191
European Commission (February 2021),
The Recovery and Resilience Facility.
European Commission (2020),
The State Aid Temporary Framework.
130
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0132.png
increases efficiency in handling bank failures as it facilitates a restructuring/ sale
of business to a buyer, preserving the bank’s franchise value without cutting
access to client accounts and client relationships,
fosters consumer confidence in the banking sector, significantly reducing the risk
of spiralling contagion to other banks and mitigating the risks that bank clients
may start questioning the solidity of the system and its safety nets as it could
happen under normal insolvency proceedings,
ensures losses can be internalised by in the industry, by requiring banks to build
resolution buffers and setting up industry-funded safety nets complementing
internal bank buffers to absorb losses and avoid recourse to public funds for all
banks and not only cross-border ones,
fosters confidence between Member States that banks failures will be addressed
in an effective way, thus preserving financial stability in the single market and the
Banking Union, and
protects Member States’ fiscal capacity which may be limited in crisis times.
However, despite the widely shared intention of protecting taxpayer money embedded in
the CMDI framework since 2014, some Member States have continued to make recourse
to taxpayer money when handling failing banks, since the establishment of the
framework, as evidenced in Chapter 2 and Annex 5. This is not because they find it
acceptable politically or economically to do so, but because they had to choose between
protecting financial stability and deposits on one hand and protecting taxpayer money on
the other hand. The current framework poses entry barriers for certain small and mid-
sized banks through the onerous access condition to resolution funding, which some
banks can only attain if deposits bear losses. However, bailing-in depositors would pose
a significant risk to financial stability, as depositors would lose confidence in the banking
sector and likely provoke bank runs and spiralling contagion, which can reverberate also
into the real economy, as seen during the global financial crisis. There is therefore, a
political consensus among Member States that the CMDI framework needs to be fixed in
a way that resolution can be used for any bank where needed.
Background on the principle of subsidiarity in the CMDI framework (why should
small/mid-sized banks be dealt with under the harmonised resolution framework vs
national insolvency proceedings)
The resolution framework as it was created in 2014 was meant to be applicable to any
bank when it fulfils the objectives of protecting financial stability, taxpayer money and
depositors better than national insolvency proceedings
192
. The merits of resolution vs
insolvency are assessed through the PIA, which is a case by case judgement, based on
criteria on whether to place a bank in resolution or national insolvency proceedings. The
PIA is,
de facto,
the subsidiarity test in the CMDI framework, as also indicated by recital
13 and Article 32(5) of BRRD I
193
.
Recital 29 BRRD I: “Due
to the potentially systemic nature of all institutions, it is crucial, in order to
maintain financial stability, that authorities have the possibility to resolve any institution”,
193
Recital 13 BRRD I:
“The use of resolution tools and powers provided for in this Directive may disrupt
the rights of shareholders and creditors. In particular, the power of the authorities to transfer the shares or
192
131
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0133.png
In the Banking Union, the PIA decisions are made by the SRB for banks under its remit
(systemic banks and less systemic cross border banks) and by the national resolution
authorities for smaller banks, for which they are responsible (less significant institutions).
Outside the Banking Union, national resolution authorities have the role to determine the
path for managing a failing bank in all cases (PIA). This governance structure embedded
in the CMDI illustrates the flexibility of resolution authorities to decide what is the
pathway that best attains the sought objectives. The EU level rules do not impose or
prescribe a treatment for any bank of any size, it provides the necessary discretion to
resolution authorities to take the best decision. At the same time, to enable such
decisions, the continuum of tools, including the harmonised resolution tools and national
tools (preventive measures, administrative insolvency measures, piece-meal judicial
insolvency measures) to handle failing banks are preserved in the framework.
In terms of scope of application, the framework applies to all banks. CMDI rules are
appropriate for systemic banks, which are “too big to fail” and which will likely go into
resolution (in general open-bank bail-in strategy) and be bailed-in if they failed. The
framework is also deemed appropriate for very small banks, which are more likely to be
placed in insolvency and be liquidated if they failed. However, there is a middle category
of banks, which are not “too big to fail” but “too big to liquidate” for which the
framework cannot be credibly used in all cases where it would be needed and for which
other avenues involving taxpayer money were used in the past (see Chapter 2, the
evaluation in Annex 5 and Annex 9 showing past cases of bank failures).
The CMDI review aims to improve the rules in a way that the harmonised resolution
framework can also be used for this category of small to mid-sized banks, when
resolution best achieves the objectives. To do so, the initiative will revisit: the PIA to
include additional criteria to help authorities decide on the best avenue, the access to
funding in resolution by using the DGS funds in certain framed circumstances, the least
cost test for using DGS funds in and outside resolution to make sure it is harmonised
among the various DGS funds uses. This would align incentives between choosing
resolution and other avenues and ensure the choice is based on merits/objectives and not
on cheaper access to funding.
Box 6: Evidence depicting the systemic impact of failing small/mid-sized banks on
financial stability
Small and medium-sized banks, whether purely domestic or cross-border, have an impact
on financial stability; albeit a commensurately smaller one than that of large global
systemic banks. In line with their size, risk footprint, their interconnectedness and their
business strategy, the prudential and liquidity requirements that small and mid-sized
banks are asked to comply with, are proportionately lower than those of large systemic
banks. They may be also granted access to liquidity assistance by central banks (under
all or part of the assets of an institution to a private purchaser without the consent of shareholders affects
the property rights of shareholders. […] Accordingly, resolution action should be taken only where
necessary in the public interest and any interference with rights of shareholders and creditors which
results from resolution action should be compatible with the Charter of Fundamental Rights of the
European Union (the Charter)…”
132
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0134.png
eligibility conditions) if needed. They should be also able to fail in an orderly manner
under the harmonised resolution framework if it best achieves the objectives.
This box aims to provide additional references and examples depicting the impact of
small and mid-sized banks on financial stability.
The
Financial Stability Institute (FSI),
part of the Bank for International Settlements
argues in its paper
“How to manage failures of non-systemic banks”
from 2018
194
that
“the
social and economic significance of banks’ activities mean that even the failure of
small, non-systemic banks may entail public interest concerns”.
The paper notes that
insolvency regimes may provide a viable alternative to resolution, while respecting the
principle of no bailout agreed internationally after the global financial crisis of 2008-
2009. The paper also states that “the
unique susceptibility of banks to runs and the role of
even non-systemic banks in the functioning of the real economy through activities such as
deposit-taking and provision of credit and transmission of payments mean that bank
failure is significantly more likely to give rise to public policy concerns than ordinary
corporate failures”.
It analyses the appropriateness of insolvency regimes for dealing
with failing banks and finds that these should fulfil four features in order to be
considered adequate to deal with bank failures: (i) include depositor protection in the
objectives of the insolvency in addition to that of maximising proceeds from asset sales
to satisfy creditor claims, (ii) include wider range of grounds for opening insolvency
regimes (forward looking criteria and likelihood of failure); (iii) role of administrative
authorities and courts; and (iv) more reduced role of creditors in bank versus corporate
insolvency regimes. Otherwise, ordinary corporate insolvency regimes are not best suited
to the specific characteristics of banking business and particular risks that arise when a
bank fails, which motivated the development of resolution regimes.
In a subsequent occasional paper called
“Bank failure management in the European
banking union: What’s wrong and how to fix it” from 2020, the FSI
195
notes that the
EU CMDI framework cannot guarantee the handling of bank failures without taxpayer
money, which is deemed unacceptable as per the international consensus which emerged
following the global financial crisis of 2008-2009. It suggests focusing the reform on
options for dealing with the failures of small and medium-sized banks, by facilitating
greater use of resources from deposit guarantee schemes to fund transfer transactions
(sale of business) in resolution and insolvency. The paper clarifies that there are no
adequate strategies in the Banking Union for dealing with the failure of mid-sized banks
that are too large to be liquidated, but too small and too traditional to be resolved using
bail-in. It recommends that transfer strategies could be the most suitable strategy for
facilitating an orderly exit for failed small and mid-sized banks, but this is hindered by
restrictions to access funding to support such transfer tools (industry funded safety nets).
194
195
Financial Stability Institute (FSI), (October 2018),
How to manage failures of non-systemic banks.
Financial Stability Institute (FSI), (July 2020),
Bank failure management in the European banking
union: What’s wrong and how to fix it
133
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0135.png
A
working paper by the European Systemic Risk Board (ESRB)
from 2021
196
analyses
the impacts of bank failures on the real economy by focusing on the credit channel (i.e.
interruptions to lending causing a temporary credit shortfall due to a sudden closure of a
bank when placed in insolvency proceedings). The paper found that, the application of
the harmonized CMDI framework is especially useful for medium-sized banks, which
can be considered “grey area” or “middle class” institutions, as defined by Restoy et al.
(2020), as it provides insights to reduce the uncertainty on whether their resolution is in
the public interest. At the same time, simulations suggest that the failure of similar banks
could have effects of heterogeneous severity across jurisdictions.
The
US savings and loan crisis from the 1980s
197
refers to very wide-spread contagion
among very small financial institutions dealing with mortgage financing (i.e. exposed to
similar sector of activity), on the backdrop of high inflation and rising interest rates.
There were more than 4,000 such savings and loans institutions in the US in 1980, with
assets totalling USD 600 bn. Given the very high costs to taxpayers of paying insured
deposits in these institutions (roughly USD 25 bn), regulatory forbearance led to having a
large number of insolvent (zombie) institutions still operating on the market, which
worsened the situation. In 1989, the Resolution Trust Corporation closed 747 savings and
loans institutions with assets over USD 407 bn, with an ultimate cost to taxpayers of
USD 124 bn. The use of public money was needed to shield the clients of these
institutions from losing their life savings, as it would have happened were they simply
put in bankruptcy proceedings.
A
study by the Dutch National Bank
conducted in 2018
198
looked at the implications of
banking sector size on financial stability. Their analysis suggests that the relationship
between banking sector size and financial stability is not clear-cut. For example, several
countries with a large banking sector relative to GDP, such as Iceland and Ireland, were
hit very hard during the crisis, as they bailed-out large banks with significant impact on
sovereign debt. At the same time, however, countries with small, domestically oriented
banking sectors, such as Greece, Italy and Portugal, also turned out to be very vulnerable.
The study finds that, the size of the banking sector relative to GDP is significantly
correlated with most systemic risk measures (as defined by the European Systemic Risk
Board (ESRB) in 2013). However, indicators like domestic orientation and sovereign
exposures are negatively correlated with size, meaning that small banking sectors are less
diversified and tend to be more focused on their home country and government, creating
high concentration risks. Among the conclusions of the paper is that the large
discretionary power of authorities in deciding how to resolve bank failures may also be
an issue.
A
study entitled ‘Too many to fail’
tabled for a seminar on systemic risk and financial
regulation seminar
199
in 2010 found that it is not only the size that can cause an
196
ESRB (European Systemic Risk Board) (June, 2021),
Measuring the impact of a bank failure on the
real economy: an EU wide analytical framework.
197
Federal Reserve,
Federal Reserve History – Savings and Loans crisis 1980 – 1989.
198
Dutch National Bank (2018),
Size of the banking sector: implications of financial stability.
199
Johannes Gutenberg University Mainz (2010),
Too many to fail,
thesis in the course of the seminar
‘systemic risk and financial regulation’.
134
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0136.png
individual bank to be of systemic importance. It is the nature of the bank’s strategy and
its interconnectedness to other banks that can also make it systemic. Many small banks
that are exposed to the same risk factors can be systemic together because they could all
fail at the same time, which would in aggregation have a large effect on the financial
system (“too many to fail”). Archaya et al (2009) also defines systemic risk as the “joint
failure risk arising from the correlation of returns on asset side of bank balance sheets.”
The paper also recalls the significant social cost of liquidating insolvent banks, which can
increase drastically with the number of such banks.
The
examples of bank failures shown in Annex 9
clearly illustrate that, in many cases of
small/mid-sized banks failing, public money or other forms of financial aid (DGS) were
used in the national insolvency proceedings. The reason for using these resources was to
protect financial stability and avoid imposing losses on depositors, which proves that
even small or mid-sized banks cannot be left to simple liquidation, which would not
require additional financial resources.
Other main features of the CMDI framework
Preparedness and prevention
In order to prevent banking crises, all banks in the EU are required to prepare recovery
plans under the supervision of competent authorities. Those plans set up a monitoring
system integrated in the banks’ risk management, leading to the implementation of
recovery options by the banks to restore their financial position at an early stage of
distress (before failure). Additionally, resolution authorities draw up resolution plans
outlining the preferred strategy and course of action in case of failure and setting a
minimum requirement for own funds and eligible liabilities (MREL) with the aim of
ensuring that the shareholders and creditors of the bank can absorb its losses and
contribute to its recapitalisation
200
. If, during the planning process, the authorities
identify obstacles to recovery or resolvability, such obstacles will be removed by taking
appropriate measures
201
. For significant institutions within the Banking Union, the
ECB/SSM is the relevant authority assessing the recovery plans, taking into account the
recommendations of the SRB
202
. The SRB is responsible for the resolution of significant
and cross-border institutions, after consulting with the ECB or the national competent
authorities. For all other banks, inside and outside the Banking Union, the relevant
resolution authorities remain national
203
.
200
For and cross-border banking groups, the BRRD requires that resolution colleges of home and host
authorities are set up to coordinate group-wide resolution strategies and implementation of resolution
action.
201
Such measures can be of a structural, organisational, financial or information-related nature.
202
Article 6(4) BRRD.
203
Nevertheless, within the Banking Union, national competent and resolution authorities carry out their
functions within the framework laid down by Single Supervisory Mechanism Regulation (SSMR) and
SRMR and under the general guidance of the ECB and the SRB. Moreover, if the implementation of
resolution action to a less significant institution requires the use of the SRF, the resolution scheme must be
adopted by the SRB.
135
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0137.png
Before failure – early intervention, preventive and precautionary measures
In case of a deteriorating financial position, the BRRD, SRMR and DGSD foresee
specific intervention measures at an early stage to prevent a bank from failing. In
particular, the supervisors have an expanded set of powers to intervene via so-called
early intervention measures
204
. These powers include, for example, the ability to dismiss
the board or management of a bank and appoint a temporary administrator, or to require
the bank to draw up a debt restructuring plan with its creditors. Similarly, DGS funds can
be used to prevent the failure of a bank under certain conditions (so called preventive
measures
205
). Finally, under certain conditions, the BRRD and SRMR exceptionally
allow for the use of State aid without triggering resolution – the so-called precautionary
recapitalisation and precautionary liquidity
206
. Such a public support to solvent banks is
allowed to cover capital shortfalls identified during a supervisory stress test.
Failing or likely to fail
If a bank’s failure is deemed inevitable, the BRRD and SRMR require the competent
207
(or the resolution) authority to determine that it is “failing or likely to fail” (FOLF). The
resolution authorities assess whether resolution is in the public interest, via a public
interest assessment (PIA) on the basis of the need to pursue the resolution objectives,
having also in mind the applicable national insolvency proceedings. In case of a positive
PIA, the resolution authority will apply resolution tools. These may include selling the
business to a private purchaser, setting up a temporary bridge bank to operate critical
functions, separating bad assets through the transfer to an asset management vehicle and
writing down debt or converting it to equity (bail-in). When the PIA is negative, the
failing institution must be orderly wound up under national proceedings. The applicable
creditor hierarchy
208
plays an important role in this context because it provides the order
in which claims bear losses both in resolution and insolvency.
Financial safety nets
The framework sets up industry-funded safety nets that contribute to reducing the risk of
bail-out by taxpayers. Resolution and deposit guarantee funds, financed by the industry,
can provide financial support to failing banks in resolution if needed to complement the
internal loss-absorbing capacity.
With the BRRD and SRMR, national resolution funds and the SRF for banks in the
Banking Union
209
were set-up in 2015 and 2016 respectively. National resolution funds
are established in each Member State and managed by the national resolution authorities.
204
205
These powers are laid down both in the BRRD as well as in the CRD and SSMR.
Article 11(3) DGSD.
206
Article 32(4) BRRD.
207
ECB/SSM as the competent authority for all significant banks in the Banking Union and the national
competent authority for all other banks.
208
Each Member State has a specific insolvency hierarchy of claims. Hence, when a bank goes into normal
insolvency proceedings, creditors are allocated to different classes, according to the national ranking of
creditors. See VVA, Grimaldi & Bruegel (2019)
Study on the differences between bank insolvency laws
and on their potential harmonisation
209
Further, the
Eurogroup agreed in November 2020
to introduce a common backstop to the SRF. It will
be provided by the ESM and its size will be aligned to the size of the SRF, up to a nominal cap of
EUR 68 bn. The backstop will be introduced by 2022.
136
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0138.png
The SRF is established in the Banking Union and it is managed by the SRB. The
resolution funds are expected to reach their target levels by 2024, which correspond to at
least 1% of the covered deposits of all credit institutions operating in their remit.
210
Banks' (including certain investment firms) annual contributions to the national
resolution funds and the SRF are based on their liabilities and risks. The resolution funds
may be used only to the extent necessary to ensure the effective application of the
resolution tools and as a last resort. Resolution measures financed by a resolution fund
can take the form of contributions in lieu of the bail-in of certain creditors and loans or
asset guarantees.
In order to access the RF/SRF for solvency (loss coverage) support, a minimum bail-in of
8% of total liabilities and own funds of shareholders and creditors (which may include
depositors) must be carried out beforehand. A series of liabilities in the banks’ balance
sheets are mandatorily excluded from bail-in, including covered deposits
211
. Although
not explicitly stated in BRRD and SRMR, a systematic interpretation of the relevant legal
provision indicated that the minimum bail-in condition does not apply when accessing
the RF/SRF for liquidity support. If the RF/SRF does not have sufficient financial means
to fund resolution,
ex post
contributions are raised to cover the additional amounts
212
. On
an annual basis, the RF/SRF is replenished by
ex ante
industry contributions to ensure
that the level of available funds is not below the target level
213
.
In line with the DGSD, national DGSs were established in each Member State and
managed by the national DGS authorities. DGS funds are expected to reach a target level
equivalent to at least 0.8%
214
of covered deposits in the respective Member State by July
2024. The primary objective of DGS funds is to ensure a harmonised protection of
EUR 100 000 (or equivalent amount in the local currency) across the EU by paying out
covered depositors up to that level in case their deposits become unavailable. Beyond the
so-called “pay box function”, DGSs can also support, under specific conditions,
proceedings in resolution
215
and insolvency
216
, as well as preventive measures to avoid
the failure of a credit institution
217
.
The conditions to access DGS funds for resolution, preventive measures and alternative
measures diverge
218
. In resolution, the DGS may be liable for the losses that covered
depositors would have borne were they not excluded from loss absorption, up to the limit
of the losses the DGS would have suffered in insolvency.
In insolvency, the DGS has the possibility to use an alternative measure to payout
219
aiming at preserving the depositors’ access to covered deposits, such as a transfer of the
210
211
As of July 2021, the SRF holds approximately EUR 52 bn, see SRB (2021)
Compartments.
Article 44(2) BRRD listing mandatory exclusions from bail-in. Article 44(3) lists discretionary
exclusions from bail-in.
212
Articles 71 SRMR and 104 BRRD.
213
Articles 70 SRMR and 103 BRRD.
214
In certain cases, this level is lowered to 0.5%.
215
As laid down in Article 109 BRRD.
216
As alternative measures laid down in Article 11(6) DGSD.
217
As laid down in Article 11(3) DGSD.
218
As laid down in Article 109 BRRD, Article 11(3) DGSD and Article 11(6) DGSD respectively.
219
Article 11(6) DGSD.
137
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0139.png
assets and liabilities and deposit book to an acquiring bank. Under Article 11(6) DGSD,
the DGS can finance an alternative measure if its cost is limited to the “net amount of
compensating covered depositors”. In this context, the DGS has to compare the cost of
the payout and the cost of the alternative measure (i.e. the least cost test), and applies the
least costly option.
For non-failing banks, preventive measures aim to prevent the failure of a bank so that it
continues as a going concern. Such intervention is subject to conditions. Under
Article 11(3)(c) DGSD, the cost of the measures cannot exceed “the costs of fulfilling the
statutory or contractual mandate of the DGS”. The interpretation of this condition varies
among Member States. Some apply a least cost test similar for preventive and alternative
measures, while others do not apply any least cost assessment for preventive measures.
When the financial means of the DGS are not sufficient to fund the necessary measures,
the DGS may seek to obtain the missing funds through
ex post
contributions raised with
the industry, through borrowing with other DGSs and/or through a loan from the State
budget (which is the backstop of the DGS). Once the DGS funds have been depleted, the
fund is replenished through
ex ante
industry contributions
220
.
220
Two requirements have to be met: (i) the target level must be reached by 2024, and (ii) after 2024, if the
fund is depleted, it has to be replenished within 6 years (Article 10(2) DGSD).
138
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0140.png
Figure 11: EU resolution and insolvency framework
Timing
Measure/procedure
Responsible
authority
Supervision:
For systemic
banks in the
Banking Union:
SSM
For all others:
national
competent
authorities
* See “resolution”
below
Planning and early
actions
Stress test (by EBA)
Enhanced supervision
Recovery plans (to be prepared by banks)
Resolution plans*, MREL decision (drawn up by resolution authorities)
Supervisory powers (CRD/CRR/SSMR)
Early intervention measures (BRRD)
Preventive and pre-FOLF
Solvency
Assessment:
ECB/national
supervisor
For BRRD
precautionary
measures:
Member State,
COM
For DGSD
preventive
measures:
DGS authority
Is the institution falling or likely to fail?
Failing bank –
Resolution or insolvency
Is it in the public interest to put the
bank into resolution?
Resolution:
For Banking
Union: SRB as
a central
authority
For all others:
National
resolution
authorities
Resolution under
the BRRD
Funding
through bail-in mechanism and
resolution funds
Tools and powers:
selling (parts of) the
bank to an acquirer, transfer critical functions
to a bridge bank, transfer bad assets to an
asset management vehicle or apply bail-in by
reducing creditors’ claims or converting them
into capital to recapitalise the bank
Insolvency:
National
authorities
Source: Commission services
139
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0141.png
A
NNEX
5: E
VALUATION OF THE
CMDI
FRAMEWORK
1.
E
XECUTIVE
S
UMMARY
The EU bank crisis management and deposit insurance framework lays out the rules for
handling bank failures and ensuring the protection of depositors. It was built around the
objectives of maintaining financial stability, protecting depositors, minimising taxpayer
losses, limiting moral hazard and improving the internal market for financial services.
The EU CMDI framework implements the commitments by the G20 leaders in
September 2009 that bank failures should be managed in an orderly manner through
cross-border resolutions and that the moral hazard stemming from banks being
considered “too big to fail” should end
221
. The EU went beyond the recommendations
addressed to the global systemically important banks, implementing a crisis management
framework for all banks.
While the CMDI framework applies to all EU Member States, in the Banking Union,
further integration is achieved with the Single Supervisory Mechanism (first pillar of the
Banking Union), the Single Resolution Mechanism (second pillar of the Banking Union)
and the European deposit insurance scheme (EDIS – the still missing third pillar of the
Banking Union)
222
.
The framework covers three EU legislative texts which, together with the related
implementing and delegated acts and relevant national legislation form the rulebook for
handling bank failures: the Bank Recovery and Resolution Directive (BRRD), the Single
Resolution Mechanism Regulation (SRMR) and the Deposit Guarantee Schemes
Directive (DGSD)
223
. All three legislative texts have been applicable for over five years
at the time of the review and the evaluation will cover the period since their introduction
until the present. The three legislative texts contain review clauses anticipating a possible
revision of the resolution framework, further harmonisation of insolvency law as well as
a report on the progress concerning the implementation of depositor protection rules
224
.
This evaluation also provides a state of play regarding the third pillar of the Banking
221
222
G20 Pittsburgh Summit (September 2009),
Leaders Statement,
paragraph 13, last bullet point.
In its
Communication
of 12 September 2012, “A
Roadmap towards a Banking Union”,
COM
(2012)0510 final, the Commission called for a Banking Union that would place the banking sector on a
more sound footing and restore confidence in the euro as part of a longer term vision for economic and
fiscal integration. The
report
by the Presidents of the European Council, the Commission, the Eurogroup
and the European Central Bank of 26 June 2012
“Towards a genuine Economic and Monetary Union”
endorsed this vision.
223
Provisions complementing the crisis management framework are also present in the Capital
Requirements Regulation (CRR – Regulation (EU) 575/2013) and the Capital Requirements Directive
(CRD – Directive 2013/36/EU). The winding up Directive (2001/24/EC) is also relevant to the framework.
224
Under Article 19(6) DGSD, the Commission, supported by EBA, shall submit to the European
Parliament and the Council a report on the progress towards its implementation by 3 July 2019. This report
has been postponed due to EBA’s work on the technical advice that was completed in January 2020. In this
context, four opinions were submitted by EBA: on
eligibility, coverage level and cooperation agreements,
on
DGS payouts,
on
DGS funding and use of DGS funds
and
on the AMLD and DGSD interplay.
The
evaluation covers the assessment of the progress of the implementation of depositor protection rules based
on this work conducted by EBA. Consequently, there will be no other progress report issued.
140
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0142.png
Union. The Commission put forward a proposal for EDIS in 2015
225
which, to date, is
still not agreed by the co-legislators, leaving the Banking Union incomplete.
This evaluation complements the impact assessment of the CMDI review and its
conclusions feed into the problem definition. It is based primarily on the results of
consultations with stakeholders, regular exchanges with experts from the Member States
(Ministries of Finance, resolution authorities, deposit guarantee schemes authorities),
reports from the EBA, studies commissioned by the European Parliament and exchanges
with Members of the European Parliament, discussions with the European Central Bank
ECB and the SRB – the central supervisory and resolution authorities in the Banking
Union and additional desk research of the Commission services. A detailed description of
the methods used to conduct this evaluation and inform the impact assessment for the
review of the framework are provided in Section 5.
On the basis of the evidence and in line with better regulation principles, the framework
was evaluated against five criteria: efficiency, effectiveness, relevance, coherence and
added-value of EU action.
This evaluation concludes that the application of the framework brought important
benefits in terms of maintaining financial stability, mainly through more robust crisis
preparedness and contingency planning, enhanced banks’ resolvability, including through
the build-up of resolution buffers and pre-funded deposit guarantee and resolution funds,
improved market discipline and curbed moral hazard. The implementation of the
framework significantly improved depositor protection and contributed to boosting,
overall, consumer confidence in the EU banking sector.
Yet, the practical application failed to achieve some important objectives or achieved
them only partially. Experience with the application of the CMDI framework from 2015
until now reveals that, while it can be a very effective tool in addressing problems of
bank failures, in some areas, there is scope to improve its functioning. The Commission
is therefore reviewing it as part of the work on completing the Banking Union. This
review represents an opportunity to improve the functioning of the second pillar of the
Banking Union (the Single Resolution Mechanism) to revisit areas of risks related to its
application and ensure it is fit for purpose. It also aims to evaluate the need for and make
progress on EDIS, the third and still missing pillar of the Banking Union.
The four opinions and reports
226
from the EBA on the implementation of the depositor
protection rules also substantiate the need for clarifying a number of DGSD provisions
and improving depositor protection and payout processes in the context of this review.
Considering the effectiveness criterion, two out of the four objectives of the framework
have been evaluated as being partially achieved, while the others have not been achieved
in a satisfactory manner, except in a limited number of cases. More specifically, the
framework partially achieved its objective of containing risks to financial stability and
protecting depositors, but it failed to achieve other key overarching objectives, notably
225
European Commission (November 2015)
Commission proposal for a Regulation of the European
Parliament and of the Council amending Regulation (EU) 806/2014 in order to establish a European
Deposit Insurance Scheme
( “the 2015 EDIS proposal”).
226
See Annex 1.
141
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0143.png
enhancing the functioning of the single market and minimising recourse to taxpayer
money. In a significant number of cases, the fulfilment of objectives cannot be directly
attributed to the European framework, but to the application of tools at national level,
outside of resolution and with recourse to public budgets and taxpayers’ funds. The
management of bank failures differed across Member States, depending on the existing
national regime, which raises questions about the coherence of the framework, resulting
in sub-optimal outcomes for level playing field and the single market in banking.
Figure 12: Overview of effectiveness – traffic light analysis
Source: Commission services assessment.
Under the efficiency criterion, the evaluation found that the CMDI framework is not
sufficiently cost-effective. On one hand, the main benefits of the framework include
enhanced crisis preparedness, contingency planning, increased loss-absorption capacity in
banks and the disciplining influence that the existence of the framework exerts on banks
and markets. On the other hand, the operationalisation of the CMDI framework came
with costs for the banking industry, Member States and resolution authorities. Yet,
despite the costs, the framework and its tools and powers have been scarcely used in
practice, especially in the Banking Union under the SRMR. The Single Resolution Fund
(SRF) has remained idle so far and beyond the losses absorbed by the banks, deposit
guarantee scheme (DGS) have been used often backed by public funds. In addition, the
use of public funding in recent cases of bank failures indicates a redistribution of costs
from banks’ senior unsecured creditors to the taxpayers, despite scrutiny on such usage of
public funds through the EU State aid rules. Furthermore, available evidence suggests
that these costs are uneven between Member States, as national requirements and
practices diverge widely.
From a coherence perspective, further improvements are necessary to ensure a better
internal interaction and consistency between the various pieces of legislation forming the
CMDI framework, in particular the coherence between the CMDI framework and the
State aid rules
227
most prominently in respect of access to funding requirements to
227
State aid rules are intrinsically interconnected with and are complementary to the CMDI framework.
These rules are not subject to this review and this impact assessment. In order to ensure consistency
between the two frameworks, the
Eurogroup invited the Commission in November 2020
to conduct a
142
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0144.png
support tools outside resolution, the Capital Requirements Directive (CRD) and the
Single Supervisory Mechanism Regulation (SSMR) in what concerns the early
intervention measures, the Anti-Money Laundering Directive (AMLD), the Payment
Services and the E-money Directives in what concerns interactions with the DGSD.
The framework remains very relevant and adds EU value because cross-border crisis
management cannot be left to the national level without consequence on public finances,
the bank-sovereign nexus, the single market in banking and level playing field for banks,
creditors, depositors and taxpayers. The addition of a common safety net such as EDIS
would further boost the framework’s relevance and EU-value added.
Identified problems are grouped as follows:
uneven playing field and uncertainty in the management of bank crisis situations –
mainly driven by the lack of legal clarity and framing of the application of DGSD
preventive measures and BRRD precautionary measures, broad legal discretion in
the PIA when placing banks in resolution (under EU framework)
versus
insolvency
228
(under national rules), divergence in the triggers for national
insolvency proceedings, divergence in the hierarchy of claims in national
insolvency laws
229
, an inadequate early intervention framework and timeliness of
the FOLF determination;
ineffective funding options and divergent access conditions for the financing of
resolution and insolvency – mainly driven by structural challenges for some banks
in fulfilling the conditions to gain access to resolution funds/SRF, divergent
requirements to access funding from the resolution fund and other sources of
funding outside resolution and unclear rules to access DGS funding in resolution
and insolvency;
uneven and inconsistent depositor protection and lack of robustness in DGS
funding – mainly driven by different national provisions as well as vulnerability
to large shocks in national depositor protection in the Banking Union due to the
lack of centralised safety nets (e.g. EDIS).
I
NTRODUCTION
2.
Purpose of the evaluation
The focus of the evaluation is to assess whether appropriate tools and means exist to
manage in an orderly manner the failure of all banks irrespective of their location, size or
business model. In addition, it evaluates whether adequate mechanisms are in place to
ensure depositor protection, in particular in the Banking Union considering the third
missing pillar.
review of the State aid framework for banks and to complete it, in parallel with, the CMDI review,
ensuring its entry into force at the same time with the updated CMDI framework.
228
Insolvency proceedings across the EU are unharmonised; some allow for certain transfer tools similar to
resolution financed by DGSs, others only allow for piece-meal liquidation proceedings.
229
Throughout this document the terms ‘hierarchy of claims in insolvency’, ‘hierarchy of claims’, ‘creditor
hierarchy’, ‘ranking of claims’ are used as synonyms and describe the same concept.
143
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0145.png
In line with better regulation principles, the evaluation of the EU CMDI framework seeks
to assess the extent to which the requirements and the application of the framework have
fulfilled the principal objectives in an efficient and effective way, while at the same time
being coherent, relevant and providing EU added-value. In particular, with regard to
effectiveness, the evaluation assesses whether the implementation of the framework has
met its objectives and identifies the areas where there is room for improvement.
This retrospective evaluation was conducted back-to-back with the impact assessment
and it feeds into the problem definition chapter. Where the framework fails to fulfil the
policy objectives across these criteria, the review initiative aims to propose solutions to
address identified issues that would enable the framework to achieve fully its objectives.
Scope of the evaluation
The scope of the evaluation covers all institutions and entities within the scope of the
BRRD, SRMR and DGSD. It covers the measures preparing for and preventing bank
failures, those applicable once a bank has been declared failing or likely to fail and those
concerning depositor protection. In the area of prevention, the evaluation focuses on
preventive measures under Article 32 of the BRRD (the so called “precautionary
measures”), as well as on measures by the competent authorities (early intervention
measures) to address financial deterioration at an early stage or to prevent a bank’s failure
using funding from the DGS (preventive measures under Article 11(3) DGSD) subject to
the safeguards set out in the DGSD. In the area of execution of resolution, the evaluation
looks at the overall incentive set-up in bank crisis management, the determination to
place banks in resolution or insolvency, the coherence of various triggers, the application
of resolution tools, funding issues, including the use of DGS funding prior to resolution,
in resolution and insolvency, the level of depositor protection and its vulnerability to
financial shocks from the perspective of financial stability.
The updates to BRRD/SRMR adopted in 2019
230
are out of the scope of this evaluation,
as they have only been applicable for a short period of time and the effects of their
implementation are still to be observed.
3.
B
ACKGROUND TO THE INITIATIVE
The global financial crisis revealed structural issues accumulated in our inter-connected
global financial system, some of which had wrongly been considered part and parcel of
an inter-connected global financial system delivering deep markets and liquidity. Banks
were generally undercapitalised and became highly leveraged in search for ever higher
yields and return on equity, which the customer deposit funding model could not deliver.
The maturity transformation function that banks had historically provided to the real
economy became a point of weakness and fragility once short-term funding could not be
extended to support long-term assets. Moral hazard and other agency issues were widely
spread. When coupled with accelerated financial innovation and securitisation as well as
regulatory forbearance, this generated substantial financial misconduct and poor
management of risks.
230
See section 3 of the Evaluation, for further details on the 2019 updates of the BRRD/SRMR.
144
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0146.png
The supervisory tools available at the time of the crisis did not capture this complexity
nor addressed the underlying issues. They did not provide for well-structured action
plans to deal with bank failures based on
ex ante
prepared scenarios. This forced
regulators and supervisors into unchartered territory such as: massive bail-outs including
through asset relief programs, capital injections, guarantees and provision of liquidity
directly into the financial system, unprecedented "lender of last resort" operations,
nationalisations as a temporary measure to stabilise systemic banks, or capital controls to
reduce the effects of liquidity flight and buy time for devising restructuring and
restoration plans.
Once the situation was stabilised, albeit with considerable burden for public finances (aid
granted by the Member States between 2007 and 2014 amounted to EUR 671 bn in
capital and repayable loans and EUR 1 288 bn in guarantees
231
), significant reforms
meant to address the root causes of the crisis were enacted, including to address poor
capital adequacy ratios and loopholes in risk management practices, agency issues, the
lack of resolution regimes and the insufficient depositor protection in some countries.
This wave of measures set the foundation of the Banking Union and its pillars. The first
pillar set up a Single Supervisory Mechanism (SSM) and implemented Basel III in
Europe through the revised Capital Requirements Regulation and Directive
(CRR/CRDIV) finalised in 2013. The second pillar set up a Single Resolution
Mechanism (SRM), adopted the first recovery and resolution regime for banks
(BRRD/SRMR) and revised the DGSD in 2014. The BRRD established an orderly
resolution mechanism for all banks (including those with cross-border operations),
requiring banks to build up internal loss-absorbing capacity and providing resolution
authorities with comprehensive powers and tools (including a bail-in tool) to intervene
when a bank meets the conditions for resolution. A legislative proposal by the
Commission in 2015 for an EDIS, and which would constitute the Banking Union’s third
pillar, is not yet adopted.
The BRRD was published in the Official Journal on 12 June 2014 and became applicable
starting 1 January 2015. The provisions related to the bail-in tool became applicable from
1 January 2016. The SRMR was published in the Official Journal on 30 July 2014 and
became applicable starting 1 January 2016 with the exception of some provisions which
became applicable earlier. Technical aspects and the phase-in schedule of certain core
requirements were further specified via implementing and delegated acts, including rules
on: preparation of recovery and resolution plans
232
, determination of critical functions
(contributing to the public interest assessment)
233
, conduct of the resolvability
231
European Commission (February 2015)
Competition State aid brief-
State aid to European banks:
returning to viability.
232
European Commission (March 2016),
Commission delegated regulation (EU) 2016/1075
specifying the
content of recovery plans, resolution plans and group resolution plans, […], the conditions for group
financial support, the requirements for independent valuers, the contractual recognition of write-down and
conversion powers, […] and the operational functioning of the resolution colleges.
233
European Commission (February 2016),
Commission delegated regulation (EU) 2016/778
with regard
to the circumstances and conditions under which the payment of extraordinary
ex post
contributions may
be […] deferred, and on the criteria for the determination of […] critical functions.
145
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0147.png
assessment, calibration of the MREL requirement
234
, valuation rules and calculation of
contributions to national resolution funds and the SRF
235
.
The DGSD was published in the Official Journal on 16 April 2014 and most articles
became applicable on 3 July 2015, following transposition, while other parts (depositors’
access to funds to cover the cost of living) became applicable on 31 May 2016.
Yet for all the post-crisis progress achieved, areas for further strengthening and
adjustment were identified both with regards to the prudential and resolution
frameworks. As a result, the Banking package (also known as the “risk reduction
package”) proposed by the Commission in 2016 was adopted in 2019
236
. The Directive
(EU) 2017/2399 (the so-called Bank creditor hierarchy Directive) amending the BRRD
was adopted and published earlier in 2017
237
. Building on the previous prudential and
resolution legislation, the 2019 Banking package included measures delivering on
Europe's commitments made in international fora
238
and acted on the EU commitment to
take further steps towards the completion of the Banking Union by providing credible
risk reduction measures to mitigate threats to financial stability, as published in the
European Commission's 2015 Communication
239
. This targeted update of the CMDI
framework through the 2019 Banking package is out of scope of this evaluation due its
recent entry into force. The effects of its implementation are still to be observed, in
particular where transitional arrangements extend until 2024.
The general policy objectives of the CMDI framework are to: (i) limit potential risks of
adverse effects for financial stability caused by the failure of banks, including by
preventing contagion and ensuring market discipline and the continuity of critical
functions for society
240
, (ii) minimise losses for society, in particular mitigate recourse to
taxpayers’ money
241
and weaken the bank-sovereign nexus, (iii) enhance the functioning
of the single market in banking, including by handling of cross-border crises and
fostering a level playing field among banks from different Member States, particularly in
234
European Commission (May 2016),
Commission delegated regulation (EU) 2016/1450
specifying the
criteria relating to the methodology for setting the MREL.
235
European Commission (October 2014),
Commission delegated regulation (EU) 2015/63
with regard to
ex ante
contributions to resolution financing arrangements.
236
As part of the
Banking package
(also referred to as the “risk reduction package”) published in the
Official Journal of the EU (OJEU) in June 2019, Regulation (EU) 2019/876 (CRR II), Regulation (EU)
2019/877 (SRMR II) and Directive (EU) 2019/879 (BRRD II) implement a minimum TLAC requirement
for EU G-SIIs applicable as of 27 June 2019 and a revision of the MREL requirement for all banks with
strengthened eligibility and subordination criteria (applicable upon transposition, from 28 December 2020).
237
European Commission (December 2017)
Directive (EU) 2017/2399 (Bank Creditor Hierarchy
Directive),
amending the BRRD as regards the ranking of unsecured debt instruments in insolvency
hierarchy.
238
International fora refer to the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision and the Financial Stability
Board (FSB). EU commitments in these fora refer to incorporating elements of the prudential framework
and extending the resolution framework to tackle the "too big to fail" problem by implementing the Total
Loss Absorbing Capacity (TLAC) Standard into EU law.
239
European Commission Communication (November 2015),
Towards the completion of the Banking
Union.
240
The continuation of critical functions is a resolution objective as provided by Article 31 BRRD.
241
Overarching objective of the resolution framework as per Article 31 BRRD.
146
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0148.png
the Banking Union
242
and (iv) protect depositors and ensure consumer confidence across
the EU irrespective of the place of incorporation of the bank
243
.
Figure 13: General objectives of the CMDI framework
1. Financial stability, market
discipline, continuity of
critical functions for society
4. Protect depositors,
ensure consumer
confidence
CMDI
framework
2. Single market
functioning, level
playing field
3. Minimise recourse to
taxpayer money, weaken
bank-sovereign loop
Source: Commission services.
The evaluation assesses the effectiveness of the framework with regard to these
overarching general objectives of the BRRD/SRMR/DGSD as provided in the 2014
legislative texts.
The intervention logic (Figure 14) provides a description – in a summarised diagram
format – on how the CMDI framework (BRRD/SRMR/DGSD and EDIS (as a third and
still missing pillar in the Banking Union) was expected to work. It is also used to carry
out the evaluation and answer specific questions.
242
General objective in both BRRD/SRMR and DGSD. Level playing field and the even treatment of
creditors and of banks across Member States is an overarching principle in BRRD/SRMR. In DGSD it is
mentioned as an objective in Recitals 3 and 54 as well as in the 2012 impact assessment.
243
General objective in both BRRD/SRMR and DGSD.
147
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0149.png
Figure 14: Intervention logic
Context
1. G20 commitment to reduce risks to financial stability stemming from banking crises (September 2009)
2. Communication from the Commission to the European Parliament and the Council ‘A Roadmap
towards a Banking Union’ (September 2012)
Need
Create a European framework to manage the failure of banks by ensuring level playing field, an effective
resolution toolkit and the protection of depositors
EU input
1. Bank Recovery and Resolution Directive (BRRD)
2. Single Resolution Mechanism Regulation (SRMR)
3. Deposit Guarantee Scheme Directive (DGSD)
4. The 2015 EDIS proposal (not yet agreed by the co-legislators)
Objectives
1. Limit risks to financial stability, reduce moral hazard
2. Minimise losses for society, mitigate recourse to taxpayer money, reduce bank-sovereign link
3. Enhance single market in banking, fostering level playing field
4. Protect depositors and ensure consumer confidence
Output
Consistent and legally
predictable rules for handling
failed banks across the EU
Output
Effective early intervention and
resolution toolkit and funding
solutions to manage any failed
bank with minimised recourse to
taxpayer money
Result
Access to funding solutions is
effective and proportionate for all
banks and impact on taxpayers
reduced
Output
Removed discrepancies,
increased robustness and
resilience in depositor
protection across the EU
Result
Failed banks treated in consistent
manner and with legal certainty
across the EU
Result
Depositors are protected in
an even and robust manner
across the EU
-
-
-
-
-
Impacts
Enhanced level playing field for the banking sector in the EU
Reduced recourse to tax-payer money, weakened bank-sovereign loop
Increased depositor confidence, reduced risk of deposit runs
Reduced moral hazard (shareholders and creditors bearing losses) and better market discipline
Improved financial stability
Source: Commission services
148
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0150.png
Description of the situation before the adoption of the CMDI framework
The baseline scenario, assuming the CMDI framework had not been adopted, is one in
which the EU would continue to rely on the limited (or non-existing) EU legislation
244
and diverging national legislations and arrangements in situations of bank crises.
In terms of preparation and prevention, supervisors would continue to rely on previous
practices for detecting risks at credit institutions. In the absence of contingency plans,
they would lack key information about the possible de-risking strategies of credit
institutions or about their recovery or resolution possibilities (including their financing).
Authorities would not have any power to ask overly complex, large or interrelated
institutions to reorganise or simplify their operations, which could be a major hurdle in a
possible resolution. This would entrench moral hazard risk in banks that are too big,
complex or interconnected to fail.
In the case of early intervention by supervisors, the absence of the initiative would mean
that supervisors in different Member States would have different powers and intervention
tools for different members of the same cross-border banking group. They would be
required to intervene at different times, under different conditions and implement
different measures, leading to uneven playing field, ring fencing of resources and highly
inconsistent outcomes, likely triggering contagion to other members of the group located
in different Member States.
If no special bank resolution tools and powers were granted to authorities, the resolution
of banks (i.e. allocating losses and preserving the critical functions in the bank under an
administrative procedure) would be impossible to execute and bail-out would remain the
only alternative. If authorities could intervene in certain countries only when banks are
formally insolvent, those countries would bear much higher social cost stemming from
banks’ failure.
The lack of an EU framework would also represent a source of distortion in the internal
market. Faced with a cross-border bank insolvency, different national authorities would
continue to focus only on the respective legal entity located in their territory. Conflicting
interests would likely impede a more optimal reorganisation solution for the group as a
whole, taking into consideration the interest of all Member States. National solutions with
divergent and inadequate resolution tools would likely be costlier for citizens and
taxpayers than if the failure of banking groups was governed by comprehensive rules and
arrangements and, in the case of the Banking Union a central authority (SRB). There
would be no private resources (resolution funds) raised from the industry to finance
resolution. This accordingly means continuing to rely on prudential capital buffers at the
244
Before the BRRD/SRMR, there were no comprehensive arrangements, at EU level, governing the
orderly resolution of failing banks at national level or for tackling cross-border banking failures. Beyond a
minimum set of arrangements for the winding-up and reorganisation of credit institutions with cross border
branches (Directive
2001/24/EC on the reorganisation and winding up of credit institutions),
no EU
framework existed which set out how and under which conditions authorities should act in the event of a
crisis arising in a bank. Before DGSD,
Directive 94/19/EC on Deposit Guarantee Schemes
set out a
minimum harmonisation of national guarantee systems in the EU Member States for the protection of
depositors, which however, had to be comprehensively revised to restore and maintain depositors’
confidence in the aftermath of the global financial crisis.
149
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0151.png
level of individual institutions and DGS to the extent that these are able to finance
resolution measures. If losses would not be covered by those means and in view of
possible DGS shortfalls, recourse to public funds may continue to be the only option for
governments to safeguard financial stability and protect depositors.
From a DGSD perspective, in the baseline scenario, the objectives of protecting
depositors, preventing bank runs and contributing to financial stability would not be fully
met. While the coverage level was already fixed at EUR 100 000, the risk of bank runs
and its economic consequences would not be avoided or reduced, because of the long
payout delays
245
by national DGS and the lack of financial capacity of some schemes.
Further, the potential of the internal market would be hampered by fragmentation and a
lack of coordination. A varying scope of covered products and different eligibility criteria
for protected depositors in the EU, combined with the lack of information on whether
deposits are covered, would lead to depositors searching for the 'best DGS' when
depositing their money instead of looking for the 'best product' or 'best service'. This and
the lack of mutual cooperation between schemes in cross-border situations and the
perspective of having to deal with a DGS in another language
246
would lead to choosing
between domestic banks only.
Banks, in particular those operating cross-border, would still suffer from an unlevel
playing field due to divergent
ex post
and
ex ante
contribution systems implying they
would have to pay high contributions in one Member State, but none in another one so
long as there is no bank failure. In the latter case, they would have to provide funding to
the DGS in times of general stress on banks’ liquidity. Banks would also suffer from
adverse selection, if a sound and prudent bank had to pay the same contributions as a
bank of the same size operating under an aggressive business model at the margin of
prudential regulation and incurring higher risks.
4.
E
VALUATION QUESTIONS
This section summarises the review questions addressed in this evaluation.
Question 1 - How effective has the EU intervention been? What have been the
effects of the EU intervention?
To what extent have the general objectives of the CMDI framework
(BRRD/SRMR/DGSD) been achieved and what factors were relevant in that
regard?
Question 2: How efficient has the EU intervention been?
To what extent have the rules regarding the recovery and orderly resolution of
banks under the BRRD/SRMR and the ones regarding depositor protection under
the DGSD been cost-effective? Are there significant differences in costs or
benefits between Member States and what is causing them?
245
246
The payout delays of DGS were set at 4 to 6 weeks from the moment a bank is declared insolvent.
As it has been the case after the failure of the Icelandic banks.
150
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
Question 3: How relevant is the EU intervention?
To what extent are the rules still relevant and how well do the original objectives
of these legislative initiatives (BRRD/SRMR/DGSD) correspond to the current
needs within the EU?
To what extent do the risks to financial stability stemming from bank crises
continue to require action at EU level?
Have new challenges arisen which were not existent at the time of introduction of
the CMDI framework and which need to be tackled by the framework?
How is the absence of a common depositor guarantee scheme for depositors, in
the Banking Union, such as EDIS affect the relevance of the framework?
Question 4: How coherent is the EU intervention?
To what extent are rules on the recovery and resolution of banks and depositor
protection in the BRRD/SRMR/DGSD coherent as a framework, is the framework
coherent with provisions in other pieces of relevant legislation or
communications, in particular State aid rules, national insolvency regimes, the
CRD, AML/e-money, payment services and E-money Directives?
Question 5: What is the EU-added value of the intervention?
Compared to the previous national approaches, to what extent have the provisions
of CMDI framework (BRRD/SRMR/DGSD) helped improve the functioning of
the single market in banking, contributed to financial stability and increasing the
level playing field among banks, and consumer confidence taking into account the
inherent cross-border nature of banking in the EU?
How does the gap of the third missing pillar of the Banking Union (common
depositor protection) affect the EU-added value of the framework?
M
ETHOD
5.
This evaluation draws on a broad range of information sources such as results of
consultations with stakeholders (e.g. two public consultations, high-level conference,
bilateral meetings), exchanges with Member States (e.g. expert group meetings, ad-hoc
working party meetings, bilateral meetings), pilot studies of the EP, exchanges with
relevant authorities (ECB, SRB and EBA), reports from the EBA (e.g. opinions, a call for
advice, reports, discussion papers), reports from the JRC and additional desk research of
the Commission services. A detailed list of all specific sources can be found in Annex 1
of the impact assessment.
Limitations
First, the current evaluation of the effectiveness and efficiency of the CMDI framework
is conducted while certain aspects of the framework are still in a transitional period. For
instance, banks are still building their resolution buffers (MREL compliance with BRRD
II requirements is expected by 2024 for most banks) and the resolution funds/SRF/DGS
151
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0153.png
will have reached their target level by 2024
247
. Banks are also making progress in
improving their resolvability. Resolution authorities continuously improve resolution
planning and monitoring resolvability, updating internal policies, in particular on the
rules regarding the MREL, setting requirements for resolution entities and subsidiaries in
banking groups, enhancing their preparedness for the application of resolution action,
collecting contributions to the resolution funds/SRF and relevant data to conduct their
work. In addition, some of the crisis cases that occurred since the entry into force of the
framework were legacy situations, with their own particularities. However, these aspects
are taken into account, when forming conclusions on the evaluation of the framework.
Second, it is not always possible to attribute observed outcomes to the CMDI reforms.
The evaluation has sought to establish a causal link between the reforms and observed
outcomes. However, some CMDI reforms were only recently implemented, other reforms
have been implemented in parallel, and the evolution of monetary policy may have
affected the evolution of key considerations regarding for instance the preservation of
financial stability and depositor confidence.
Third, certain aspects of this evaluation pertaining to the funding issues of the framework
were analysed based on data as of Q4 2019 (banks’ liability structure). A dynamic
analysis showing the implementation progress over several reporting periods was not
feasible, due to lack of data and a lack of comparability owing to the significant evolution
in MREL methodology and sample coverage, over the past years
248
. The database also
did not capture the impact of the COVID-19 pandemic on the banking sector. This was
because existing data collection schedules set by resolution authorities and the EBA did
not allow for more recent data. However, certain additional information pertaining to the
MREL targets, issuances and shortfalls available as of Q3 2022 and more generally,
certain qualitative considerations regarding the impact of the COVID-19 crisis have been
integrated in the analysis in order to partially mitigate this caveat. Similarly, new
supervisory reporting requirements for banks came into force with the adoption of the
relevant secondary legislation in 2021, and public disclosure of MREL will be required
from 2024 onwards
249
. Nevertheless, the evaluation draws from the data collected by
European public authorities and bodies (i.e. SRB, EBA) on the basis of rules, which were
in place when the analysis was conducted, as well as the responses to the public
consultations. For a comprehensive view, please refer to Annexes 7 and 13 of the impact
assessment.
Fourth, the database which informed the quantitative analyses for this evaluation and
impact assessment reflects a limited sample of EU banks, while remaining nevertheless a
representative subset (see Annex 7 for details). Additionally, some evidence provided in
this evaluation is drawn from SRB sources of data only, meaning that it is only limited to
247
248
In 2023 as regards the SRF.
Implementation policies created by resolution authorities evolved between 2017 – 2019 to reflect
developments in delegated regulations, new legal interpretations, increase in coverage (number of
institutions) of applicability of the rules by resolution authorities as part of their phase-in of the rules and
the coming into force of the 2019 Banking package.
249
Public disclosure is only required from 2024 onwards (or from the date of the transitional period set for
each entity, if the period ends after 2024), see Article 3(1), 3
rd
subparagraph, BRRD II.
152
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0154.png
banks under its remit and it does not cover less significant institutions in the Banking
Union and other non-Banking Union banks.
6.
I
MPLEMENTATION
S
TATE OF PLAY
(
RESULTS
)
Overview of requirements in place
250
The CMDI framework is in force since 1 January 2015 for the BRRD (except the bail-in
provisions which came into effect one year later), 1 January 2016 for the SRMR and 3
July 2015 for the DGSD with the exception of certain provisions, which became
applicable on 31 May 2016.
The framework provides for a set of instruments that can be used before a bank is
considered failing or likely to fail (FOLF). These allow a timely intervention to address a
financial deterioration (early intervention measures) or to prevent a bank’s failure
(preventive measures under the DGSD or precautionary measures under the BRRD). In
particular, the CMDI framework includes measures that could be used in exceptional
circumstances of serious disturbance to the economy. In these circumstances, it allows
external financial support for precautionary purposes (precautionary measures) to be
granted.
When a bank is considered FOLF and there is a public interest in resolving it,
251
the
resolution authorities will intervene in the bank, absent of a private solution, by using the
specific powers granted by the BRRD
252
. In the Banking Union, the resolution of
significant institutions (or cross-border less significant institutions) with a positive public
interest assessment is carried out by the SRB. In the absence of a public interest for
resolution, the bank failure should be handled through winding-up under normal
insolvency proceedings available at national level.
The CMDI framework provides for a wide array of tools and powers in the hands of
resolution authorities as well as rules on the funding of resolution actions. These include
powers to sell the bank or parts of it, to transfer critical functions to a bridge institution
and to transfer non-performing assets to an asset management vehicle. Moreover, it
includes the power to bail-in creditors by reducing their claims or converting them into
equity capital, to absorb the losses of the bank and recapitalise it to the extent required.
When it comes to funding, in order to reduce moral hazard, the overarching principle is
that the bank should first cover losses with private resources (through the reduction of
shareholders’ equity and the bail-in of creditors’ claims) and that external financial
support can be provided only after certain requirements are met (access requirements to
resolution funds and DGS). In line with their resolution strategy and preferred tools (e.g.
open bank bail-in, sale of business, bridge banks, asset separation), banks are required by
resolution authorities to hold MREL instruments in an amount determined in order to
250
251
See also Annex 4 of the impact assessment.
Resolution is considered in the public interest when resolution is necessary for and proportionate to one
or more of the resolution objectives (Article 31 BRRD) and normal insolvency proceedings would not meet
those objectives to the same extent.
252
In the following, reference to the BRRD should be understood as including also corresponding
provisions in the SRMR.
153
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0155.png
facilitate the execution of the selected strategy. The primary sources of external financing
of resolution actions (should the bank’s own resources be insufficient) are provided by a
resolution fund and the DGS, funded by the banking industry, rather than taxpayers’
money. Other (public) sources of external funding are possible under certain conditions.
In the context of the Banking Union, for banks under the SRB remit, funding was further
integrated by providing for a Single Resolution Fund (SRF) composed of contributions
from credit institutions and certain investment firms in the participating Member States
of the Banking Union. However, a common deposit guarantee scheme in the Banking
Union is still missing.
Deposits are protected up to EUR 100 000 regardless of whether the bank is put into
resolution or insolvency. In insolvency, the primary function of a DGS is to pay out
depositors within seven days of a determination of unavailability of their deposits. In line
with the law, DGSs may also have functions other than the payout of depositors. As
payout may not always be suitable in a crisis scenario due to the risk of disrupting overall
depositor confidence
253
, some Member States allow the DGS’ funds to be used to prevent
the failure of a bank (preventive measures) or finance a transfer of assets and liabilities to
a buyer in insolvency to preserve the access to covered depositors ( alternative
measures). The DGSD provides a limit as regards the amount of funds allowed to be used
for such preventive and alternative measures. Moreover, DGSs can contribute financially
to a bank’s resolution, under certain circumstances.
State of play of transposition of the Directives (BRRD/DGSD)
Both Directives have been transposed in all Member States.
The transposition deadline for the BRRD was 31 December 2014. Only two Member
States notified complete transposition of the BRRD within that deadline. To date, all
Member States have notified complete transposition and the respective infringement
cases for non-communication were closed. The deadline for DGSD transposition expired
on 3 July 2015 and all Member States notified a complete transposition
254
. The
Commission has verified that the BRRD and the DGSD are fully transposed in all
Member States. The Commission is currently concluding its verification of the
correctness of national transposition measures, with only a limited number of outstanding
issues concerning a small group of Member States needing to be finalised.
State of play of implementation of the resolution framework by resolution authorities
The implementation of BRRD/SRMR is ongoing in the EU. Since its introduction, a
number of resolution colleges were set up with the objective to jointly agree resolution
plans, conduct resolvability assessments and set MREL requirements among home and
host authorities in charge of resolving banking groups in the EU
255
. In the Banking
The main challenges are related to (i) the short-term interruption of depositors’ access to their deposits
for payouts, (ii) the cost to the DGS and to the economy, and (iii) the inherent risk of destruction of value
in insolvency.
254
The transposition deadline of Article 13 DGSD was – under specific circumstances laid out by Article
20(1) DGSD – delayed to 31 May 2016.
255
EBA (17 August 2021),
Resolution colleges – Annual report 2020.
253
154
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0156.png
Union, the SRB is carrying out the process of preparing resolution plans and, when the
need arises, executing resolution actions for banks under its remit.
In terms of coverage, resolution planning, resolution strategies and MREL targets have
been set by resolution authorities for the majority of banks under their remit. This has
allowed banks to make progress on removing impediments to resolvability and build-up
MREL buffers. While good progress has been achieved to date by authorities in setting
external MREL requirements and by resolution entities in issuing eligible instruments on
the market, the setting of internal MREL requirements for subsidiaries in groups
following a single point of entry (SPE) resolution strategy and the pre-positioning of this
capacity within groups is still ongoing, following a phased approach.
Since its inception in 2015, the SRB prepared resolution plans for most banks under its
remit (104 resolution plans for EU banks)
256
.
Table 1: Overview of resolution planning for the Banking Union
MS
Resolution plans expected
MREL decisions
to be adopted in the 2021
expected during the
resolution planning
2021 resolution planning
cycle(*)
cycle
BE
8
7
6
12
BG
1
1
0
4
DE
21
21
21
37
EE
3
3
1
1
IE
6
6
6
15
EL
4
4
4
4
ES
13
11
11
15
FR
12
13
11
22
HR
0
0
0
7
IT
12
12
12
41
CY
3
3
3
5
LV
3
3
1
1
LT
3
3
1
1
LU
5
5
4
12
MT
3
3
2
2
NL
6
7
5
12
AT
8
8
8
23
PT
4
4
3
9
SI
2
3
3
6
SK
0
0
0
5
FI
3
3
2
3
Total
120
120
104
237
(*) Resolution Planning Cycle 2021 runs from April 2021 to March 2022 Source: SRB 2021 annual report.
Number of SRB
banks on 1
January 2021
Number of SRB
banks on 31
December 2021
In addition, over the past years, the SRB developed policy guidance to ensure
convergence in the implementation of the framework
257
. The SRB published operational
guidance on bail-in implementation
258
, critical functions
259
, the public interest
assessment
260
as well as on Brexit and mergers and acquisitions expectations. In its
256
257
SRB (2022),
SRB Annual report 2021.
SRB policy documents.
258
SRB (2020),
Operational guidance on bail-in implementation.
259
SRB (2017),
Critical functions: SRB approach.
260
SRB (2019),
Public interest assessment (PIA): SRB approach,
and 2021 and 2022 updates on
system
wide events in the PIA
and on
deposit guarantee scheme considerations.
155
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0157.png
expectations for banks
261
policy document, the SRB outlines best practice on key aspects
of resolvability and sets out a roadmap with general phase-in dates for compliance with
the various dimensions. Over the next four years, banks are expected to develop full
capabilities in a number of areas, including governance, MREL capacity, development of
bail-in playbooks, liquidity and funding in resolution, operational continuity and access
to financial market infrastructures
262
, updating management information systems for bail-
in execution and valuation as well as communication plans, separability and
restructuring, as appropriate.
With respect to the MREL, the SRB’s approach has evolved from being based on
informative targets in 2016, to the gradual inclusion since 2017 of binding requirements
for the largest and most complex banks and the set-up of internal MREL requirements for
subsidiaries, as well as bank-specific adjustments addressing both the quality and
quantity of the MREL. In particular, the impact of the introduction of the 2019 risk
reduction Banking Package has been factored into the SRB resolution planning cycles:
already in 2019 with statutory requirements for global systemically important institutions
(G-SIIs), and through the subsequent reviews to the MREL policy in 2020, 2021
263
and
2022
264
, taking into account developments in level two legislation and other legal
interpretations.
In addition to implementation measures taken by the SRB, resolution authorities outside
the Banking Union have also published policy documents guiding the operational
implementation of the framework.
For the EU as a whole and following the publication of the 2019 Banking package, the
Commission services held two transposition seminars (February and July 2020) and
published two notices providing answers to transposition questions, which clarify certain
legal provisions and are aimed at facilitating implementation.
265
More generally, the
EBA’s Single Rulebook Questions and Answers tool provides replies to a large number
of questions submitted by authorities and industry stakeholders on the interpretation and
application of BRRD and DGSD provisions and of related delegated and implementing
acts. In complement to level one provisions, seventeen implementing and delegated acts
related to the BRRD have been published between 2016 and 2019, providing additional
rules on implementation.
266
Finally, a legislative proposal specifying the method for
indirect issuances of loss absorbing capacity in groups with more than one layer of
ownership (so-called “daisy chains”) has been adopted on 27 October 2022
267
.
261
262
SRB (April 2020),
Expectations for banks.
SRB (2020),
Operational guidance on operational continuity in resolution
and
Operational guidance
for FMI contingency plans.
263
SRB (May 2021),
2021 MREL policy
264
SRB (June 2022),
2022 MREL policy
265
European Commission (September and November 2020),
(2020/C 321/01) Commission notice relating
to the interpretation of certain legal provisions of the revised bank resolution framework in reply to
questions raised by Member States’ authorities
and (2020/C
417/02) - second Commission Notice.
266
European Commission (2016 - 2019),
Implementing and Delegated Acts on Directive 2014/59/EU
267
European Commission (October 2022),
Regulation (EU) 2022/2036 of the European Parliament and of
the Council of 19 October 2022, as regards the prudential treatment of global systemically important
156
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0158.png
State of play of the implementation of the deposit insurance framework
The DGSD has been implemented in all Member States. Nevertheless, the four EBA
reports and opinions
268
, a study contracted by the Commission on national options and
discretions
269
and the outcome of the transposition check substantiate the need to clarify
a number of DGSD provisions in the context of this review
270
.
The EBA opinions highlighted the scope for clarification of the current text in many
aspects in order to ensure a consistent application of the depositor protection and
depositors’ equal treatment, but also to protect financial stability. The EBA
recommended that the protection of the client funds safeguarded on accounts by non-
bank financial institutions, such as payment and e-money institutions, or investment
firms merits clarification. The lack of protection of such client funds in some Member
States could be acute for both depositors and Fintech providers if bank failures occur and
multiply. In particular, in light of the Brexit context, the treatment of third country
branches should be clarified. EBA also identified the need to clarify the interplay
between the AMLD and DGSD in a payout situation. In terms of robustness of DGS
funding (e.g. alternative funding arrangements and investment strategy), it was
highlighted that many national transpositions do not cater for concrete measures,
available to obtain funds if DGSs are depleted, at the expense of sufficient crisis
preparedness. DGS funds are often invested in sovereign bonds and, in two instances,
even integrated in the budget, which may have unpredictable consequences in the current
COVID-19 induced circumstances
271
.
Further, the DGSD contains more than 22 ONDs. In general, those ONDs allow the EU
legislator to demonstrate respect for national legal traditions and regulatory practices as
well as to reduce implementation costs, especially in Member States with existing
national frameworks. However, ONDs also have the potential to distort the level playing
field and lead to fragmentation in the single market. In addition, they can create higher
complexity, including higher compliance costs, and reduce transparency.
Most notably, the Commission’s conformity assessment of national transpositions
revealed different approaches with respect to a number of issues and confirmed the need
institutions with a multiple point of entry resolution strategy and methods for the indirect subscription of
instruments eligible for meeting the minimum requirement for own funds and eligible liabilities.
268
See also section 1 of the evaluation and Annex 1.
269
CEPS study
prepared for the Commission on national options and discretions under the DGSD and their
treatment under EDIS (November 2019),
CEPS study.
270
See also Annex 6 of the impact assessment for more details on the DGSD review.
271
In its
opinion
of
23 January 2020,
on the funding and use of DGSs funds, EBA highlighted that in a
number of cases funds are invested exclusively or almost exclusively in national debt, despite the
requirement to ensure sufficient diversification, the EBA discussed the rationale for requiring that DGS
funds should be invested in a sufficiently diversified manner. In this regard, it should be considered that the
funds are available when needed in a crisis, irrespective of the situation in the market for a particular type
of instrument; in particular, where funds are invested in national debt, to break the nexus between banking
and sovereign crises (p. 106).
157
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0159.png
to clarify certain provisions within the context of the DGSD review. While several of
them could negatively impact either the deposit protection or the equal treatment of
depositors, there are also issues which do not seem to give rise to substantial problems
(e.g. as there are no third country branches in the respective Member States). The
majority of instances identified were divergent approaches i.e. to the determination of
unavailable deposits under Article 2(1)(8) and 3(2) DGSD, the transfer of contributions,
the protection of temporary high balances, alternative and preventive measures, client
funds safeguarded by payment institutions on bank accounts, to the protection of public
authorities
272
or to the share of payment commitments of the total available financial
means under Article 10(3).
State of play of the common deposit guarantee scheme (EDIS) in the Banking Union
The Banking Union from its inception in 2012 was conceived to have three pillars, with
the third being a common system for deposit guarantees
273
. The Commission adopted a
legislative proposal to this end on 24 November 2015 on EDIS
274
, followed by the
publication of an effects analysis in 2016
275
. This proposal was contentious from the start
and political discussions have been stalled for some time, though technical work
remained ongoing. Discussions on the interaction between risk reduction and risk sharing
had an impact on the EDIS negotiations, both within the Council and the European
Parliament, despite continued acknowledgment of the importance of EDIS as part of a
fully-fledged Banking Union, such as in the Five President’s Report of 2015
276
. This is
also reflected in the 2016 Banking Union roadmap
277
by the Council, which signalled that
negotiations at political level on EDIS would start as soon as sufficient further progress
has been made on the measures on risk reduction.
A comprehensive package of risk reduction measures was put forward by the
Commission and negotiated by the co-legislators since then. A Communication that set
out an ambitious yet realistic path to ensure agreement on all the outstanding elements of
the Banking Union, based on existing commitments by the Council, was put forward by
the Commission in 2017
278
. Therein, suggestions were also outlined with regard to the
EDIS proposal in order to facilitate progress in the European Parliament and the Council
on the file.
272
In some Member States, public authorities do not fall under the scope of the DGSD. For example, the
recent Greensill Bank AG case in Germany showed that
public authorities
were not protected by the
mandatory DGS. According to the
German press,
some public authorities (with around EUR 340 m) had
deposits with Greensill bank. However, it remained unclear if the voluntary top-up scheme reimbursed
them.
273
Communication
from the Commission to the European Parliament and the Council, A Roadmap towards
a Banking Union, 12 September 2012, COM(2012)0510 final, and the
report
by the Presidents of the
European Council, the Commission, the Eurogroup and the European Central Bank of 26 June 2012.
274
Proposal for a Regulation of the European Parliament and of the Council amending Regulation (EU)
806/2014 in order to establish a European Deposit Insurance Scheme, 24 November 2015, COM(2015) 586
final. For a more detailed description of the 2015 proposal, please see Annex 10 of the impact assessment.
275
Effects analysis
on the European Deposit Insurance Scheme, 11 October 2016.
276
The Five President's Report:
Completing Europe's Economic and Monetary Union, 22 June 2015.
277
Council Conclusions on a Roadmap to complete the Banking Union,
17 June 2016Error!
Bookmark n
ot defined..
278
Communication
to the European Parliament, the Council, the European Central Bank, the European
Economic and Social Committee and the Committee of the Regions on completing the Banking Union,
11.10.2017, COM(2017) 592 final.
158
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0160.png
In June 2018, the Euro Summit asked that work would start on a roadmap for beginning
political negotiations on EDIS
279
and in December 2020, on a stepwise and time-bound
work plan on all outstanding elements needed to complete the Banking Union
280
. This
work, which took place in the intergovernmental format within the HLWG on EDIS, was
broadened to encompass four files: (i) EDIS, (ii) the review of the CMDI framework, (iii)
cross-border integration and (iv) the regulatory treatment of sovereign exposures. Despite
intensive discussions among Member States and a major political effort by the Eurogroup
president, an agreement for completing the Banking Union in a comprehensive manner
did not materialise in the June 2022 Eurogroup
281
.
The technical discussions that took place on EDIS over the last years gave rise to various
other models than the model proposed by the Commission in 2015
282
. The so-called
hybrid model
283
emerged as a possible compromise
284
between those Member States
supporting the original proposal and those underlining the pre-condition of risk reduction
before agreeing to share risks across the EU banking sector. As outlined in the impact
assessment, EDIS and the review of the CMDI framework are closely interlinked. The
set-up of EDIS would also unlock further market integration, in particular cross-border
consolidation.
7.
A
NSWERS TO THE EVALUATION QUESTIONS
This section presents the assessment of the CMDI framework based on the five
evaluation criteria (effectiveness, efficiency, relevance, coherence and EU value added)
and related evaluation questions set out in section 4. This is complemented by an
assessment of the main issues coming from past experiences with the framework or raised
by stakeholders during the various consultation activities, as summarised in Annex 2 of
the impact assessment.
7.1. Effectiveness
How effective has the EU intervention been? To what extent have the general
objectives of the CMDI framework (BRRD/SRMR/DGSD) been achieved and what
factors influenced the achievements observed?
As depicted in section 3, the general objectives of the CMDI framework are to:
1. limit potential risks of adverse effects for financial stability caused by the failure
of banks, including by preventing contagion, moral hazard, ensure market
discipline and the continuity of critical functions for the society;
2. minimise losses for the society, in particular mitigate recourse to taxpayers’
money and weaken the bank-sovereign nexus;
279
280
Statement
of the Euro Summit, 29 June 2018.
Statement
of the Euro Summit, 11 December 2020.
281
Eurogroup (16 June 2022),
Eurogroup statement on the future of the Banking Union.
282
For a more detailed description of the other models, please see Annex 10 of the impact assessment.
283
For a more detailed description of the hybrid model, please see Annex 10 of the impact assessment.
284
Letter
by the High-Level Working Group on EDIS Chair to the President of the Eurogroup, ‘Further
strengthening the Banking Union, including EDIS: A roadmap for political negotiations’, 3 December
2019.
159
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0161.png
3. enhancing the functioning of the single market in banking, including by handling
of cross-border crises and fostering level playing field among banks from
different Member States, particularly in the Banking Union; and
4. protect depositors (covered deposits), investors (covered by investor
compensation schemes) and client assets and funds, thereby ensuring consumer
confidence across the EU, irrespective of the place of incorporation of the bank.
Summary assessment:
Evidence regarding the treatment of bank crisis situations since the adoption of the
framework shows that two of the four objectives of the framework have been partially
achieved, while the others have not been achieved in a satisfactory manner, except in
a limited number of cases.
More specifically, the framework partially achieved its objectives of containing risks
to financial stability and protecting depositors, but it failed to achieve other key
overarching objectives, notably facilitating the functioning of the single market when
handling cross-border crises, including by ensuring level playing field, and
minimising recourse to taxpayer money. In a significant number of cases, the
fulfilment of objectives cannot be directly attributed to the framework, but to the
application of tools at national level, outside of resolution and with recourse to public
budgets (taxpayers’ funds). The management of bank failures differed across Member
States, depending on the existing national regime, which raises questions about the
coherence of the framework, resulting in sub-optimal outcomes for level playing field
and the single market in banking.
The assessment of the framework’s effectiveness has been done objective by objective.
7.1.1. Objective (1): did the framework achieve the objective of limiting risks to
financial stability, including by preventing contagion, moral hazard,
ensuring market discipline and the continuity of critical functions for the
society?
Risks to financial stability, contagion and spillover effects from the banking sector to the
real economy were significantly reduced after the global financial crisis and the society’s
access to critical banking functions
285
was preserved. Certain elements of the framework
and their application such as pre-resolution preparedness had a positive impact on
financial stability, the containment of contagion, reduction of moral hazard and ensuring
market discipline. Similarly, the resolution framework introduced strategies, powers and
tools to restructure failing banks while protecting depositors, financial stability and tax
payers. However, so far resolution has only scarcely been applied, in particular in the
Banking Union under the SRMR. A lack of application of those critical elements of the
285
Examples of critical functions include the continued access to deposits and client funds, to payment and
settlement systems, lending or other banking services which cannot be easily and timely substituted in case
of a bank failure.
160
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0162.png
framework in the majority of assessed cases of banks in distress
286
was observed. In those
cases, the preservation of financial stability was possible, to a great extent, through the
application of other tools and funding resources at national level, which were available to
manage failing banks or to intervene before failure. The conditions to activate such tools
vary substantially across countries, are sometimes not fully framed in the EU legislation
or leave room for arbitrage
287
. In addition, when funding (mostly from public budgets)
was used to support such measures, the requirements to access such funding were very
different (and more specifically, funding outside resolution is generally more easily
accessible than in resolution, in particular for certain banks, as explained in more details
in section 7.1.2.3). All in all, despite the good progress made in resolution preparedness
and contingency planning, the lack of application of the resolution tools (in many cases),
led to a lack of certainty and predictability in the handling of a distressed bank (break in
the continuum of outcomes from going to gone concern) while the central principle that
taxpayers’ money should not be used in the handling of a bank failure, was not fully
respected.
In conclusion, the partial achievement of this objective can only be partially credited to
the CMDI framework, which was applied in a restricted manner, especially in the
Banking Union.
Main factors influencing the objective’s achievement
Factors influencing performance against Overall impact on objective
objective
1) Level of crisis preparedness and resolvability
Positive
(ex
ante
contingency planning
of banks
in form of recovery and resolution
plans, resolution strategies, enhanced
coordination,
increased
banks’
resolvability with some aspects still
work in progress (MREL compliance,
management information systems
(MIS), liquidity in resolution)
2)
Reduction of “too big to fail” and moral
Mainly positive
(reduction of funding
hazard problems
cost advantage for G-SIIs, increase in
bail-inable own resources, more
adequate pricing of risk by investors,
however most cases of distressed
banks dealt outside resolution, senior
unsecured creditors did not bear
losses)
3) Effectiveness of the early intervention
Negative
(scarcely applied)
framework
4) Availability of resolution processes, powers
Mainly positive
(enhanced market
and tools to intervene in failing banks
discipline,
however
lack
of
application)
286
Since 2015, more than 60% of banks in distress in the EU were managed outside of the resolution
framework. (See Annex 9 of the impact assessment:
“Table of Bank cases since 2015”).
287
See also sections 7.1.2.3 and 7.1.3 of the Evaluation for further details on the relevant issue.
161
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0163.png
7.1.1.1. Level of crisis preparedness and resolvability of banks
The BRRD/SRMR requires institutions and authorities to develop
ex ante
contingency
planning (recovery and resolution plans) and update these plans on a yearly basis. It
requires banks to prepare recovery plans to overcome financial distress and it grants
resolution authorities powers to collect information and prepare resolution plans laying
out the resolution strategy and tools aimed at an orderly resolution of the failed bank with
minimal costs for taxpayers. The framework requires authorities to conduct regular
resolvability assessments to identify and remove any impediments to resolvability.
As also described in section 6, significant progress was achieved by resolution authorities
in drawing up resolution plans, assessing banks’ resolvability and setting MREL
requirements and by banks in drawing up recovery plans and, generally, becoming more
resolvable than they were before the introduction of the framework. While
implementation in certain areas is still ongoing (e.g. setting internal MREL for
subsidiaries, overall MREL compliance and enhancement in other areas of resolvability),
the enhanced level of preparedness of the financial system contributed to achieving
financial stability.
7.1.1.2. Reduction of ‘too big to fail’ and moral hazard problems
Prior to the CMDI reforms, the failure of a vast majority of financial institutions
(including in particular the ones deemed too big to fail) was addressed through
government bail-outs to prevent contagion and financial instability or to mitigate
significant negative consequences for the real economy. The option of placing financial
institutions in insolvency was deemed likely to lead to great destruction of value, costly
litigation and contagion, threatening financial stability. The expectation that a bank may
be bailed-out represented an implicit government subsidy, with implications on the
behaviour of banks and markets
288
. With the granting of public support, such implicit
subsidies turned into explicit subsidies, discouraging the banks from bearing the
consequences of their decisions. Such resulting moral hazard caused economic
distortions by providing funding cost advantages, conducive to insufficient market
discipline and excessive risk-taking to the detriment of competition. The latter also
weakened the overall resilience of the financial system and the provision of financing to
the real economy.
The Financial Stability Board (FSB) assessed in 2020–2021 the impact of resolution
reforms in member jurisdictions on reducing the too big to fail problem.
289
In the absence
of concrete cases of G-SIIs failing, the FSB report looked at how the reforms, including
the CMDI framework in the EU, addressed the observed shortcomings, i.e. reduced the
implicit funding subsidies enjoyed by large banks, increased the creditors’ risk
sensitivity, the de-risking of balance sheets and corporate/legal changes as a result of
resolvability improvements. The FSB’s report concluded that, while the indicators of
288
E.g. creditors may be more willing to fund banks that are too big to fail at lower rates than other banks
and may be insensitive to the credit risk of the borrower.
289
Financial Stability Board (April 2021),
Report on the Evaluation of the Effects of the Too Big to Fail
Reforms
162
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0164.png
systemic risk and moral hazard have moved in the right direction with potential net
benefits to the society, there are still gaps to be addressed. These include: obstacles to
resolvability (e.g. resolution funding mechanisms, build-up of buffers, valuation
capabilities, cross-border coordination), continued state support for some distressed
banks (EU examples
290
), room to improve on data disclosure and transparency to markets
and potential risks arising from a shift of credit intermediation to non-bank financial
intermediaries.
Judging from the practical application of the CMDI framework, the moral hazard
problem is not satisfactorily reduced, as senior unsecured creditors continued in some
cases to avoid bearing losses, with direct consequence for public finances.
7.1.1.3. Effectiveness of the early intervention framework
The BRRD provides supervisory authorities with the powers to apply EIMs, which are
intended to prevent further deterioration of the financial conditions of an institution and
to reduce, to the extent possible, the risk and impact of a possible resolution One of the
operational objectives of the EIM framework was to allow the competent authority to
intervene rapidly in order to address the financial deterioration of banks in case of
breaches/likely breaches of prudential requirements. These powers are activated when
specific triggers
291
are met, to allow competent authorities to take measures such as
requiring the institution’s management to draw up an action programme or to change the
institution’s business strategy or its legal and operational structure. Competent authorities
can, in this context, also replace the institution’s management
292
.
As also pointed out by the Commission’s 2019 report on the application of BRRD, while
the policy objectives of the EIMs are to strengthen financial stability, avoid contagion
and moral hazard, its application so far has been extremely limited. The EBA indicated
that, in most situations where the EIM triggers were met, competent authorities decided
to address the situation through the use of supervisory powers (e.g. measures based on
Article 104 CRD, which are mirrored in Article 16 of the SSMR)
293
. The EBA grouped
the challenges that competent authorities encountered in the application of the current
regulatory framework on EIMs in three categories
294
.
See Annex 9 of the impact assessment: “Table of Bank cases since 2015”.
Article 27 BRRD provides power to competent authorities to activate early intervention measures when
“an institution infringes or due,
inter alia,
to a rapidly deteriorating financial condition, including
deteriorating liquidity situation, increasing level of leverage, non-performing loans or concentration of
exposures, as assessed on the basis of a set of triggers, which may include the institution’s own funds
requirement plus 1.5 percentage points, is likely in the near future to infringe the requirements of
Regulation (EU) No 575/2013, Directive 2013/36/EU, Title II of Directive 2014/65/EU or any of Articles 3
to 7, 14 to 17, and 24, 25 and 26 of Regulation (EU) No 600/2014 […]”
292
Such a decision was taken in 2019 by the ECB with respect to Carige bank (Cassa di Risparmio di
Genova e Liguria). See ECB’s press release (2 January 2019),
ECB appoints temporary administrators for
Banca Carige.
293
See EBA (27 May 2021),
Report on the application of early intervention measures in the European
Union in accordance with Articles 27-29 of the BRRD,
EBA/REP/2021/12 (EBA report) pp 17-19.
294
See EBA report, pp 23-25.
290
291
163
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0165.png
The first set of challenges in the application of EIMs, relate to the interaction between,
and potential overlap
295
of, early intervention powers conferred to competent authorities
on the basis of national laws implementing the BRRD and the supervisory powers which
they can exercise under CRD. The overlap between these two sets of measures creates
legal uncertainty and procedural challenges for competent authorities and merits further
analysis. Also, with respect to the Banking Union, the provisions on early intervention
powers contained in the BRRD are not replicated in a uniform and directly applicable
legal basis, i.e. their application by competent authorities may hinge on potentially
diverging national transposition measures.
A second set of challenges, relates to disclosure requirements and the signalling effect
that the EIMs may entail. According to the EBA, there is uncertainty whether institutions
are obliged to disclose to market participants the fact that EIMs have been applied to
them under the EU market abuse regime. In case the adoption of the EIMs has to be
disclosed, there could be a risk of signalling to markets that the bank is in a deteriorating
situation, leading to adverse investor reactions and ultimately accelerating instead of
mitigating an ongoing crisis.
A final challenge in the application of the EIMs relates to the specific triggers for their
application. Article 27(1) BRRD includes one example of EIM quantitative trigger
‘the
institution’s own funds requirement plus 1.5 percentage points’.
However, it is not clear
from the BRRD text, which “own funds requirement” should be used for the purposes of
this provision i.e. the one corresponding to the minimum capital requirement (Pillar 1) or
also taking into account additional own fund requirements (Pillar 2).
7.1.1.4. Availability of resolution processes, powers and tools to intervene in
failing banks
The BRRD/SRMR provides extensive processes, powers and tools for resolution
authorities to handle failed banks in an orderly manner, while respecting the framework’s
objectives. The framework sets comprehensive coordination processes among various
authorities to assure the necessary exchange of information underpinning resolution
decisions concerning both preparation and execution. It ensures that shareholders and
creditors effectively support losses and establishes a number of resolution tools for the
authorities to deal with banks in resolution. Depending on the specific case, authorities
may decide to use the sale of business tool, to create a bridge bank or an asset
management vehicle, and to carry out bail-in
296
. The framework also provides for rules
concerning the provision of external financial support to banks in resolution through the
creation of resolution financing arrangements, funded by levies
ex ante
collected from the
banks.
The set-up and availability of said resolution processes, powers and tools has an overall
positive effect on financial stability, potentially reducing moral hazard and ensuring the
295
This overlap can be verified in what concerns the powers at the disposal of competent authorities under
the two different legal bases and also the conditions for the respective use.
296
Bail-in is defined in BRRD/SRMR as “the
mechanism for effecting the exercise by a resolution
authority of the write-down and conversion powers in relation to liabilities of an institution under
resolution […]”
(Article 2(1)(57) BRRD and Article 3(1)(33) SRMR).
164
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0166.png
preservation of critical functions. However, existing exogenous and endogenous
incentives, not to apply the resolution framework
297
cause significant drawbacks in
achieving other objectives, i.e. enhancing the functioning of the single market and level
playing field, reducing moral hazard and the recourse to taxpayer money (see next
Sections),
while preserving financial stability.
7.1.2. Objective (2): Did the framework achieve the objective of minimising losses
for the society, in particular mitigating the recourse to taxpayer money and
weakening the bank-sovereign nexus?
One of the cornerstones of the current framework is the objective of shielding public
money from the effects of bank failures, while protecting depositors and preserving
financial stability. In order to limit the extensive use of public funds observed during the
global financial crisis, the framework created resolution tools and financing arrangements
complementing the internal loss absorption of banks (e.g. RF/SRF, national DGS funds)
aimed at shielding national budgets.
Nevertheless, in the Banking Union, while there were only three cases of a positive
PIA
298
under the SRMR, SRF resources were not used and the accumulated resources
remain idle since 2016. National RFs have been used in ten out of 13 cases of failing
banks
299
with positive PIA determination, representing less than half of the total number
of cases of distressed banks. On the contrary, public funds have provided support in 2 out
of 9 of the cases of distressed banks with negative PIA, amounting to over EUR 17 bn,
while an additional amount of almost EUR 40 bn of public funds were used for
precautionary aid measures (of which around EUR 28 bn was for precautionary liquidity
support). This evidence indicates that the framework failed to achieve this objective in a
satisfactory manner in all cases.
297
298
See for more details section 7.1.2.1 of the Evaluation.
Two out of these three cases concern the resolution of entities belonging to the Sberbank Europe AG
group (see Annex 9 for more details), whereby due to the very special circumstances the group was faced
with (experiencing significant deposit outflows due to the reputational impact of geopolitical tensions)
there was a deviation from the resolution plan (which provided for the preservation of the group structure)
and different solutions (resolution/liquidation) where applied to different banking entities of the group.
299
In seven of those cases, the intervention took place before the minimum BRRD bail-in requirement
entered into force on 1 January 2016. In addition, four of those cases concerned Banking Union Member
States, but they took place before the SRB becoming the responsible resolution authority.
165
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0167.png
Main factors influencing the objective’s achievement
Factors influencing performance against objective
Overall impact on objective
1) Availability and usage of private financing
Negative
(private financing arrangements
arrangements for bank resolution
scarcely used under the SRMR)
2) Timeliness of FOLF determination
Negative
(timing for triggering FOLF can
be improved to address the depletion of
resources and destruction of value in the
run up to resolution, and the related need
for more external funding (possibly
public))
Negative
(divergent access requirements
for the resolution fund
versus
funding
outside resolution, difficulty in accessing
resolution funding by certain banks,
limited scope to grant DGS funding in
resolution and insolvency)
3) Conditions to access external funding
7.1.2.1. Availability and usage of private financing arrangements for bank
resolution
The framework provides for rules concerning the provision of external financial support
to banks in resolution and requires the creation of national resolution financing
arrangements (outside the Banking Union) and the SRF (in the Banking Union) – funded
by the industry – which, according to the BRRD/SRMR, should be the main sources of
external financial support for banks in resolution beyond the own resources of the banks.
The SRF was established under the control of the SRB as an essential part of the Single
Resolution Mechanism and is governed by a complementary inter-governmental
agreement. The total target size of the funds/ SRF will equal at least 1% of the covered
deposits of all banks in the respective Member States/ Banking Union.
Ex ante
contributions to national resolution funds/ SRF are accruing over eight years, beginning
in 2016 until the end of 2023 and 2024 for the SRF and national RFs, respectively.
Subject to conditions laid out in BRRD/SRMR (a minimum level of bail-in of the bank’s
own resources), the national RF/SRF could be accessed, and in that case
ex post
contributions may be called on to rebuild the funds (in case the
ex ante
contributions are
not sufficient to cover the losses, costs or other expenses incurred).
Subject to the availability of funds in the national RF/SRF, the legislative intention was
for these resources to be used to support resolution action when the private means
available in the bank did not suffice to execute the resolution strategy. In the Banking
Union, while there were only three cases of a positive PIA
300
, SRF resources were not
used and the accumulated resources remain idle since 2016. National RFs were used in
non-Banking Union Member States and in some Banking Union Member States, but
300
Two out of these three cases concerned the resolution of Sberbank group (see Annex 9 for more details).
166
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0168.png
before the 8% minimum TLOF bail-in requirement entered into force
301
, in ten out of 13
cases of banks placed in resolution for a total amount of at least EUR 6.9 bn
302303
.
However, when looking at the broader picture, the contribution of the RFs dwarfs in
comparison to the amount deriving from other sources of funding (mostly from public
budgets) to handle distressed banks, outside of resolution, which exceeded EUR 58 bn (of
which EUR 28.1 bn was provided for liquidity purposes)
304,305
.
Figure 15: Sources of complementary external funding in crisis cases (in EUR bn)
Source: European Commission calculations, based on bank cases between 2015 – 2022.
The causes for this situation seem to be twofold. First, certain banks would face structural
difficulties in fulfilling the conditions to access resolution funding where the bail-in
requirement would entail bailing-in ordinary unsecured creditors, including non-
preferred, non-covered deposits
306
, which could be politically unpalatable and creating
financial stability risks. Second, different resolution authorities would seemingly have
different propensities to deploy the resolution funds.
301
302
On 1 January 2016.
Includes an amount of EUR 1.4 bn, contributed jointly by the Polish RF and DGS, in the case of
resolution of Getin Noble Bank SA (see Annex 9 for more information).
303
Information on the amounts of national resolution funds contributed in some of the bank cases are not
publicly available.
304
As also mentioned in section 5, while legacy issues may have played a role in past cases and can be
expected to have a lesser impact going forward, this does not impair the validity of the considerations made
in this or other Sections of the evaluation, nor it puts into question the need to reform the framework to
ensure efficacy in managing potential future crises.
305
Without counting support channeled to preventive private or preventive public measures that have been
assessed as market conform.
306
See section 7.1.2.3 and Annexes 7 and 8 of the impact assessment for further details. As explained in
Annex 8, section 2, non-covered, non-preferred deposits rank together with ordinary unsecured claims in
19 Member States (no depositor preference). Moreover, as presented in Annex 7, section 3, depending on
the equity depletion at the moment of failure and the liability structure, in particular the deposit prevalence
of medium-sized banks, preferred and even covered deposits could be impacted when bailing-in 8% TLOF,
in order to gain access to the RF/SRF.
167
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0169.png
Recent cases of distressed banks reveal, therefore, a shift from the intended use of the
means of funding available in resolution towards public funds (bail-outs) facilitated by
the application of tools outside the resolution framework and with funding accessible
under different and often more advantageous conditions from the point of view of the
bank’s creditors and very discretionary PIA
307
. This means, in practice, that national
budgets shouldered distressed banks, while private money raised through
ex ante
industry
contributions remained unused, undermining one of the key objectives of the framework.
Please refer to Section 7.2.2.2 describing the costs associated with the build-up of
resolution funds by the industry.
7.1.2.2. Timeliness of FOLF determination
The timeliness of the FOLF determination is crucial with respect to the amount of private
resources left in the bank to execute the resolution strategy. In the current framework, the
FOLF determination is usually made by the competent authority
308
. While the competent
authority needs to comply with the conditions laid down in Article 32 BRRD/18 SRMR,
in the absence of a hard trigger, the framework allows a certain amount of discretion for
the supervisor as to the exact timing of the FOLF determination. Therefore, the
supervisor needs to balance out the severity of the deterioration in the banks’ financial
fundamentals against a potential recovery by private means and take a timely decision.
While it is very challenging to quantify the impact of a late FOLF triggering on the
amount of financing required in resolution, it can be ascertained that a relatively “early”
FOLF determination may ensure that more financial resources are left in the bank to
absorb losses. On the contrary, a “late” FOLF determination results in a more significant
depletion before resolution of equity and potentially other instruments that could be
triggered in resolution as well as a depletion of liquidity. As the situation of the bank
deteriorates further short-term funding providers may refrain from rolling over their
commitments and depositors may potentially run on the bank.
The governance structure and the degree of cooperation between competent and
resolution authorities may play a role in the timeliness of the FOLF determination. In
Member States outside the Banking Union, where competent and resolution authorities
are often part of the same institution, the continuum between going concern, deterioration
(FOLF declaration) and resolution may be better served than in the Banking Union,
where the governance and hence, the decision-making, in a crisis scenario, are split
between the central authorities (ECB and SRB), but possibly also involving national
competent authorities and national resolution authorities. Those decisions are, however,
interdependent and require the close coordination of the authorities and an alignment of
their (sometimes) different incentives for acting early, or waiting for more time to elapse,
before taking their respective actions, when faced with a bank crisis situation. On the one
hand it is important to ensure that FOLF is declared only when the respective conditions
307
Paragraphs 40-42 of the 2013 Banking Communication set out the minimum burden-sharing
requirement for equity, hybrid capital holders and subordinated debt holders in those cases. See also Box 9
in section 7.1.2.3 regarding the
“Divergences in conditions to access funding for resolution fund and for
funding outside resolution under the State aid framework”.
308
In addition to the competent authority, the resolution authority may make the FOLF determination,
subject to specific conditions set out in Article 32(2) BRRD.
168
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0170.png
are fulfilled to ensure that the FOLF determination is legally sound. On the other hand,
the practice so far showed a risk of overly cautious approach to FOLF declarations in the
Banking Union, which may negatively impact the room for manoeuvre in resolution for
the resolution authority. The BRRD takes this into account to a certain degree, by
providing Member States with the option to enable also the resolution authority to make a
FOLF determination, which the SRMR also foresees for the SRB, subject to certain
conditions. This procedure, however, encounters other limitations, mainly related to the
fact that the elements necessary for a FOLF determination are generally known by the
supervisor, which continuously monitors the bank’s situation.
7.1.2.3. Conditions to access external funding
The availability of sufficient sources of funding in resolution and the provision of
proportionate conditions to access them are central to ensuring that the resolution
framework is adequate to cater for potentially any bank’s failure. The CMDI framework
provides for two sources of funding resolution measures: the national RF/SRF in the
Banking Union and the DGS funds, provided that conditions to access these sources are
met.
Outside resolution, past experiences with preventive measures (precautionary measures
and DGSD preventive measures have shown the use of either public funds under State
aid rules (including in the form of market-conform public measures, the conformity of
which with market conditions are also assessed under these rules but do not qualify as
State aid
309
) or private means to avert the further deterioration of a bank in distress. Also,
under certain insolvency proceedings in some Member States, which allow for transfer
tools (i.e. the sale of a part of the business/ deposits to an acquirer), State aid funding can
be used, provided it complies with the required burden sharing conditions.
The following sub-sections develop: (a) the ineffective funding options for some banks,
(b) the divergent conditions for accessing funding from the resolution fund and other
sources of funding outside resolution, and (c) the use of DGS funds, which together have
contributed to the use of public money (bail-outs) in crisis management.
a) structural difficulties for some banks in fulfilling the minimum conditions for
accessing the RF/SRF under the resolution rules, which may incentivise
authorities to find other solutions when such banks enter into distress;
b) divergent access requirements for the resolution fund and for funding outside
resolution;
c) limited scope to grant DGS funding in resolution and insolvency, with the risk of
weakening the available funding sources for handling a bank failure.
309
Refers to measures carried out by a public body, in line with normal market conditions, therefore are not
considered to constitute State aid.
169
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0171.png
a) Challenges for some banks to access the RF/SRF
Impact of resolution strategies
The CMDI framework makes the access to the RF/SRF conditional on bailing-in
shareholders and creditors for no less than 8% of total liabilities including own funds
(TLOF) and limits the contribution of the fund to 5% TLOF
310
. The minimum 8% TLOF
bail-in requirement and subsequent 5% cap on the use of the RF/SRF do not apply in
terms of the use of the RF/SRF for the provision of liquidity in resolution.
311
As part of resolution planning, resolution authorities are defining the preferred and
variant resolution strategies and preparing the application of the relevant tools to ensure
their execution
312
. For large and complex institutions, open-bank bail-in is, in general,
expected to be the preferred resolution tool, implying the write-down and conversion of
own funds and eligible liabilities to absorb losses and recapitalise the bank emerging
from resolution. The successful execution of this strategy comes hand in hand with the
minimum requirement to hold sufficient own funds and eligible liabilities (MREL),
therefore, the calibration of MREL and the build-up of MREL buffers by banks
contribute to ensuring that they can fulfil the condition for accessing resolution funding.
In view of this principle, the changes to the calibration of the overall MREL requirement
and MREL subordination under the 2019 revision of the rules (BRRD II/SRMR II)
sought to increase the certainty of meeting the minimum 8% TLOF requirement,
especially for large institutions.
In parallel, certain smaller and medium-sized institutions with business models based
predominantly on funding through equity and deposits may be candidates for transfer
tool strategies. Transfer strategies involve selling parts or all of the business to a
purchaser, transferring critical functions and related assets and liabilities to a bridge
institution and transferring non-performing assets to an asset management vehicle. A mix
of tools can also be part of the optimal strategy, depending on a case-by-case assessment
by resolution authorities. The potential benefits of transfer tools depend on the
characteristics of the banks and their financial situation and on how the specific transfer
transaction is structured. Challenges to transfer strategies may be due, among other
factors, to “overcapacity” in the EU banking sector, which, on average, struggles to
remunerate capital, further diminishing returns on mergers and acquisitions. Therefore,
the “franchise value” of some ailing banks may be small and potential buyers would
often be willing to enter into a deal only at negative prices. Hence, depending on the
valuation of assets and the perimeter of a transfer, there may still be a need to access the
310
Article 44(5) BRRD requires a minimum bail-in of 8% TLOF and provides for a maximum RF
contribution of 5% TLOF (unless all unsecured, non-preferred liabilities, other than eligible deposits, have
been written down or converted in full) when a resolution authority decides to exclude or partially exclude
an eligible liability or class of eligible liabilities, and the losses that would have been borne by those
liabilities have not been passed on fully to other creditors, or when the use of the RF indirectly results in
part of the losses being passed on to the RF (Article 101(2) BRRD).
311
According to the informal interpretation of the Commission’s services of the provisions in
Article 101 BRRD, which are replicated in Article 76 in the SRMR and that set out the purposes for the use
of the RF/SRF.
312
In light with recital, 20 of the
Commission delegated regulation (EU) 2016/1075,
resolution authorities
should also assess whether liquidation under normal insolvency proceedings can credibly and feasibly
achieve the resolution objectives.
170
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0172.png
RF/SRF
313
by complying with the access conditions, in order to complete the transfer
transaction. The level of the MREL requirement reflects the preferred resolution strategy,
meaning that banks under a transfer strategy may be allowed lower MREL targets, taking
into consideration that the main purpose of these strategies is to facilitate the exit of these
banks (in whole or in part) from the market and that MREL will be mainly used, in such
cases for loss absorption and only to, a limited degree, for recapitalisation purposes
314
.
Conversely, banks under an open bank bail-in strategy, will continue to operate in the
market, on a standalone basis, therefore they would require a higher MREL buffer in
order to absorb losses and fully rebuild their capital base.
Importantly, the need to access resolution funding may arise for any bank (whether
executing an open bank bail-in or a transfer strategy). However, despite differences in
MREL requirements reflecting different resolution strategies, in line with the bank’s
systemic footprint and complexity, the conditions to access the RF/SRF are the same for
any bank, without any distinction on grounds of proportionality based on the planned
resolution strategy, size and business model. This means that a large bank with open bank
bail-in strategy (expected to build-up MREL buffers to cover its loss absorption and
recapitalisation needs), must fulfil the same minimum 8% TLOF bail-in condition to
access the fund as a smaller, deposit taking bank under a transfer strategy leading to exit
of the market and which would be required to hold a lower amount of MREL resources.
The ability of banks to fulfil the access conditions to the RF/SRF depends therefore on
the stock of bail-inable instruments
315
available at the time of the intervention. In order to
assess the ability of EU banks to access the fund, quantitative analyses have been carried
out on (i) the level of MREL shortfalls as of the most recent reporting date (Q4 2020);
and (ii) the structure of banks’ liabilities, in particular assessing whether deposits would
be subject to bail-in in order to access the fund.
MREL shortfalls
The build-up of MREL buffers by banks is in transitional period, with full compliance
required for the majority of banks by 1 January 2024, while intermediary targets were to
be met by 1 January 2022.
According to the most recent EBA 2022 quantitative MREL report
316
, as of Q4 2021, out
of 245 resolution groups in the sample, 70 EU resolution groups (and individual
resolution entities) had an MREL shortfall estimated at EUR 33 bn, down by 42%
compared to Q4 2020 on a comparable basis. The reduction in shortfalls should be
considered against strong issuance levels in 2021 and 2022.
313
The DGS may also be used in resolution, for ensuring continued access for covered depositors to their
deposits in line with the access conditions of Article 109 BRRD.
314
In the case of a bridge institution, the smaller perimeter of the assets transferred and the consequent
reduction in the risk weighted assets, as well as the non or limited assumption of new activities, implies a
smaller amount of recapitalisation needs than if the bank were to continue to operate in the market on a
going concern basis.
315
These would be instruments that could be bailed-in, without giving rise to a right for exclusions or
voluntary exclusions from bail-in, in light of Article 44(3) BRRD (for example for reasons of avoiding
widespread contagion, disruption to critical functions, etc.)
316
EBA (January 2023),
EBA quantitative MREL report and impact assessment
171
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0173.png
In the Banking Union, as per the SRB’s MREL Dashboard as of Q3 2022
317
showing
BRRD II/SRMR II data, the average final MREL target represented 23.3% of total risk
exposure amount (TREA) (EUR 1 760 bn), and 26.4% TREA (EUR 1 988 bn) when
including the combined buffer requirement, growing over the quarter driven by the
expansions of banks’ balance sheets. In terms of build-up of eligible instruments, the
average stock of MREL eligible liabilities and own funds reached EUR 2 353 bn, up by
EUR 134.2 bn (or 6%) year-on-year. This trend was in line with the banks’ funding plans
to meet the biding final MREL targets by 1 January 2024. The average MREL shortfalls
against the final target (2024) amounted to 0.2% TREA (EUR 18.1 bn) in Q3 2022, and
0.4% TREA (EUR 30.5 bn) when including the combined buffer requirement.
While compliance with MREL targets is a matter of transitional period and most banks
are expected to fulfil their requirements once the transitional period expired, certain
banks may be facing more structural issues to comply with their requirement.
See Annex 13, for a full overview of the MREL shortfalls and the build-up of the buffers
during the transitional period.
Structural issues in issuing MREL eligible instruments and the likelihood of bailing-
in deposits
Analyses show that certain smaller and medium-sized banks face structural difficulties in
fulfilling the minimum 8% TLOF condition to access resolution funding. These
challenges are due to the liability structure of these banks, which rely significantly on
equity and deposits for their funding and are not into the business of issuing debt to raise
(subordinated) resolution buffers. Some of the barriers hindering a switch in business
model for such banks include, but are not limited to: (i) increased costs to issue
(subordinated) debt in addition to or substituting existing funding due to perceived risks
by investors, which would translate into higher spreads
318
, (ii) lack of, or poor rating, (iii)
not being listed and (iv) potential lack of demand by the market. Such challenges in
accessing resolution funding may be difficult to eliminate in the short to medium-term, in
particular in the current environment of low profitability driven mainly by over-capacity,
competition from the fintech sector and upcoming new regulatory requirements which
may impact balance sheets (Basel III).
See also Annex 13 for more information on such structural issues.
317
318
SRB (February 2023),
SRB MREL Dashboard Q3 2022
Replacing deposit funding and/or secured funding by subordinated or even senior unsecured issuances
could be costly.
172
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0174.png
Box 7: Excerpt speech by Governor Visco at Banca d’Italia conference (15 January
2021)
319
on the ability of some banks to issue debt
“One fundamental question concerns the sources of funding to finance a transfer
strategy, be it in resolution or in liquidation. Under the current BRRD framework, a
successful resolution strategy premised on the bail-in tool requires adequate levels of
eligible liabilities (Minimum Requirement for own funds and Eligible Liabilities, MREL),
preferably subordinated, to avoid losses being imposed on depositors and other retail
creditors.
However, most medium-sized banks (not to mention smaller ones) are not equipped to
tap capital markets in order to issue MREL instruments. Around 70% of the significant
banks under the direct supervision of the ECB are not listed, 60% have never issued
convertible instruments, and 25% have not even issued subordinated debt. These shares
rise sharply, of course, for smaller institutions. Requiring these banks to issue MREL
eligible liabilities to non-retail investors would therefore force them to resort to the
wholesale market, obtain a credit rating and change their funding structure significantly.
It could therefore have a strong impact on banks’ margins and even force some of them
out of the market, since issuance costs could prove too high to bear.”
Analysed data shows that for some banks, the stock of bail-inable liabilities excluding
deposits is lower than the minimum requirement for bail-in in order to access the
RF/SRF. This means that, in order for these banks to gain access to resolution funding
(i.e. minimum 8% TLOF bail-in condition), some deposits
320
would need to be bailed-in.
While in some Member States this is feasible and has been done in the past, in the
majority of Member States bailing-in deposits may not be socially acceptable, since
depositors are considered differently from investors. Depositors use banks, primarily, as
a secure place for placing their savings, for meeting future needs, while the investors take
a claim in the bank after having analysed the related risks and rewards. Moreover,
bailing-in deposits would negatively impact the franchise value, which would impair the
success of a transfer transaction to a purchaser, who may be interested in acquiring the
entire deposit book. In the majority of Member States, maintaining the integrity of
deposits is considered by the national authorities, instrumental to bank intermediation in
the economy (i.e. channelling savings into investments and lending) and an important
element to financial stability and the functioning of the payment system.
321
Banca d’Italia (15 January 2021),
Welcome address by Governor Ignazio Visco.
Such as deposits not covered and not preferred, i.e. deposits to corporates, governments, other financial
institutions, other institutions.
321
The significance of deposits for the banking systems is recognised in the BRRD. Article 108 BRRD
requires from Member States to give deposits of individuals and SMEs a higher ranking in national
insolvency than the claims of ordinary unsecured, non-preferred creditors.
319
320
173
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0175.png
Box 8: Case illustrating issues regarding funding options - the Getin Noble Bank S.A.
case
Getin Noble Bank S.A. was among the ten largest Polish banks with total assets of
approximately EUR 9.2 bn (PLN 44 bn). On 30 September 2022, based on the opinion of
the Polish Financial Supervision Authority (Komisja Nadzoru Finansowego, ‘KNF'), the
Polish national resolution authority (Bankowy Fundusz Gwarancyjny, ‘BFG') formally
declared the bank to be FOLF and determined that placing the bank into resolution
(rather than to follow insolvency proceedings under national law) was in the public
interest (positive PIA). Subsequently, the bank was resolved with the use of the bridge
bank and bail-in tools. Equity and subordinated debt were fully written down to absorb
(part of) the losses. The bridge bank serves as a temporary solution to provide sufficient
time to organise an orderly sales process for the assets and liabilities transferred to the
bridge bank. The BFG, which is responsible for both the resolution of banks and the
guarantee of deposits in Poland provided the newly created bridge bank with direct
support measures in the form of cash injections worth around EUR 1.4 bn (PLN 6.9 bn)
that were financed through (i) the national resolution fund; and (ii) the national deposit
guarantee fund, both under the BFG's responsibility.
In addition, the Polish Commercial Banks' Protection System (System Ochrony Banków
Komercyjnych, ‘SOBK'), comprising the eight largest commercial banks active on the
Polish market, was created and decided, on a voluntary basis, to (i) support the operation
with approximately EUR 735 million (PLN 3.5 bn) to absorb further losses; and (ii)
temporarily purchase a 49% share in the bridge bank
322
. In this particular case, the
balance sheet structure of the bank was mainly funded by deposits
323
. Instead of
liquidating the bank and paying out covered depositors, authorities decided to resolve the
bank (preparing for future sale and exit from the market). Meeting the conditions (i.e.
minimum 8% TLOF bail-in) for accessing resolution funding would have implied
compromising the integrity of its deposits book and imposing losses on depositors. This
situation is likely to have motivated the decision of other commercial banks in Poland to
voluntarily intervene and contribute to the resolution cost (complementing DGS support)
and, in that way, avoid risks of widespread contagion in the national financial market that
could have stemmed from the bailing-in of (some) deposits in Getin Noble Bank S.A.
This multi-layered funding arrangement illustrates the weakness of the current
framework, in particular, the difficulties encountered by certain banks in meeting access
conditions for resolution funding and the importance of exploiting synergies between
DGSs and RFs
324
.
In what concerns the general depositor preference, consultations with stakeholders
confirmed that the bail-in of any deposits is deemed to carry a significant contagion risk
to the financial system and to entail political sensitivities, so much so that, despite only
covered deposits being in the list of mandatory exclusions from bail-in in Article 44(2)
Source: European Commission’s press release (01 October 2022)
State aid: Commission approves aid
to support the resolution of the Polish Getin Noble Bank S.A.
323
Source: BGF (3 October 2022) –
Resolution of Getin Noble Bank SA.
324
Relates to problem 2 and its first driver addressed in this impact assessment (Chapter 2, section 2.2.1)
and in section 7.1.2.3 of the evaluation.
322
174
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0176.png
BRRD, resolution authorities generally expect to have to exclude (all) other deposits on a
discretionary basis from bearing losses in resolution under Article 44(3) BRRD. When
some of those deposits rank
pari passu
with senior bail-inable liabilities, their exclusion
has the potential to create NCWO
325
problems, particularly considering that they tend to
represent a significant percentage of the total senior class.
326
Besides the challenges described above in meeting the minimum 8% TLOF
327
condition
to access resolution funding, the 5% TLOF cap on the usage of such funding
328
may also
be problematic for certain banks, in particular when it results in a small amount of
funding allowed to be used, which may not be deemed sufficient to ensure the execution
of the resolution strategy.
It is arguable that a proportionate approach to managing bank failures should ensure that
entities can access funding sources without having to structurally modify their business
model. The existence of a variety of business models is an important element to ensure a
diversified, dynamic and competitive banking market.
a) Divergent access requirements for the resolution fund and for funding outside
resolution
In two cases of banks for which a FOLF determination was issued by the competent
supervisory authority, there was no need to look into possible difficulties in accessing
resolution financing due to a negative PIA and the usage of tools outside resolution and,
inarguably, with more easily accessible sources of funding. In the Banking Union, in the
above-mentioned two cases where resolution was not deemed to be in the public interest,
banks benefited from public support under national insolvency proceedings (including
from the public budget). In other past interventions observed, national authorities granted
support to banks, which were rather close to a situation of failure, in the form of
preventive measures under Article 11(3) DGSD. Both the use of aid under national
insolvency proceedings and Article 11(3) DGSD are subject to different (and arguably
less-stringent) conditions than those for the use of the resolution funds under the SRMR
and BRRD leading to a disincentive to use resolution.
In particular, public support may be available outside resolution and accessible under
more advantageous conditions from the point of view of allocating losses to the bank’s
creditors. Some of these solutions are of preventive nature, and the lower burden sharing
is combined (and justified) by additional conditions ensuring that the bank is not FOLF.
First, public funds can be used to provide capital injections or liquidity support to banks
in a “precautionary” way, under specific circumstances, set out in the BRRD. The
relevant provisions (Article 32 BRRD) provide requirements and conditions to ensure
that the intervention is timely and precautionary in nature, in particular, that the support
is granted to a solvent bank whose financial condition has not deteriorated to a point of
325
Resolution authorities must ensure that the application of resolution tools would not make creditors
worse-off than they would have been in insolvency (“no creditor worse off” (NCWO) principle).
326
See also Annex 8 of the impact assessment.
327
As explained in sub-section (a), according to the informal interpretation of the Commission’s services of
the relevant legal provisions in the BRRD/SRMR, the use of the RF/SRF for the provision of liquidity in
resolution is not subject to the 8% minimum bail-in requirement.
328
The cap could be exceeded under condition that all unsecured, non-preferred liabilities, other than
eligible deposits, have been written down or converted in full (Article 44(7)(b)).
175
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0177.png
failure and that the aid is minimised. Second, DGS funding of measures, pursuant to
Article 11(3) DGSD which can be used to prevent the bank’s failure (preventive
measures) may also qualify, as State aid or not, depending on the circumstances of the
case.
329
Also, in this case, conditions exist to ensure that the support is granted as a
preventive measure to a non-FOLF bank. As outlined in Chapter 2 of the impact
assessment, the functioning of these measures in line with the logic of resolution is
dependent on these conditions being clear and correctly applied.
In addition to these precautionary and preventive measures, funding of the failure of a
bank through public budgets is possible, in insolvency proceedings, when the PIA is
negative (liquidation aid). Alternative measures financed by the DGS in insolvency
proceedings may also be subjected to the State aid conditionality for liquidation aid, on a
case-by-case basis.
Compared to the 8% TLOF bail-in requirement to access resolution funding, which could
entail bailing-in senior unsecured creditors, including non-preferred, non-covered
deposits
330
, access conditions under the State aid rules (mainly governed by the
Commission’s 2013 Banking Communication
331
) require adequate burden-sharing
entailing, after losses are first absorbed by equity, contributions by hybrid capital holders
and subordinated debt holders, which may be less demanding. The fact that external
financing outside resolution could be easier to access and could be provided with fewer
limitations for the bank’s creditors, than financing arrangements in resolution, creates
room for arbitrage and may incentivise resolution authorities to look for solutions outside
the resolution framework. This effect is exacerbated by the fact that, in applying the PIA
so far, resolution authorities have not in all cases taken into consideration the possibility
of granting aid in insolvency (which would matter from the perspective of ensuring the
minimisation in the use of extraordinary financial support, see
Section 7.1.3.4
for more
details).
Box 9: Divergences in conditions to access funding for resolution fund and for
funding outside resolution under the State aid framework
Access conditions to resolution funding
The BRRD (recital 73, Article 44(5) and 37(10)) stipulates that, when discretionary
exclusions to bail-in are applied in connection with certain creditors (e.g. on grounds of
protecting financial stability or because such creditors would be difficult to bail-in within
a reasonable timeframe), and where the losses cannot be passed to other creditors, the
resolution financing arrangement may make a contribution to the institution under
resolution subject to a number of strict conditions. These conditions include the
requirement that losses totalling not less than 8% of total liabilities including own funds
(TLOF) have already been absorbed, and the funding provided by the resolution fund is
limited to the lower of 5% of TLOF or the means available to the resolution fund and the
329
330
See sub-section (c) for more details on the alternative and preventive measures under DGSD.
See Annex 7 on the impact of bail-in on uncovered (and in some cases covered) deposits under different
scenarios.
331
European Commission (2013),
Banking Communication.
176
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0178.png
amount that can be raised through ex post contributions within three years. In accordance
with the changes introduced in Article 59 BRRD by the 2019 Banking Package, the
amount by which CET1 items are reduced to absorb losses as identified in the valuation
carried out under Article 36, including the valuation for the purposes of assessing
whether the conditions for resolution are met, count towards the 8% of TLOF threshold.
Access conditions under State aid rules
The 2013 Banking Communication (paragraphs 40-42) sets out the minimum burden-
sharing requirement that would, provided that other considerations are also met, enable
the granting of aid. To reduce the moral hazard that State aid could cause, aid should
only be granted on terms which involve adequate burden-sharing by existing investors.
Adequate burden-sharing will normally entail, after losses are first absorbed by equity,
contributions by hybrid capital holders and subordinated debt holders. Hybrid capital and
subordinated debt holders must contribute to reducing the capital shortfall to the
maximum extent. Such contributions can take the form of either a conversion into
Common Equity Tier 1 or a write-down of the principal of the instruments. The State aid
rules do not require contribution from senior debt holders (in particular from insured
deposits, uninsured deposits, bonds and all other senior debt) as a mandatory component
of burden- sharing whether by conversion into capital or by write-down of the
instruments.
For a significant number of banks in the EU, bailing-in 8% TLOF to access resolution
funding would also entail bailing-in senior unsecured creditors, including non-preferred,
non-covered deposits. This concludes that the access conditions are stricter in resolution
than under the State aid rules. The design and interaction between funding solutions in
and outside the framework play a central role in the shaping of incentives to apply the
CMDI framework.
The divergences mentioned above can create a risk of inconsistent solutions across
Member States and reduce the predictability of the framework. Moreover, the possibility
to use public budgets (i. e. taxpayers’ funds) outside resolution, which in principle should
be avoided or strictly limited to avoid risks of moral hazard, creates a need to reconsider
whether the framework can be improved to achieve its objectives with more clarity and
predictability. This would in turn promote a more consistent approach to the management
of bank failures, including in terms of increased level playing field at EU level.
DGS funding in resolution and insolvency
Article 109 BRRD provides for the use of DGS funding in resolution, in addition to the
resolution fund. The provision sets out several conditions for the intervention. The DGS
support in resolution is established, in principle, to an amount equal to the losses borne
by covered deposits if they were exposed to bail-in or could bear losses under another
resolution strategy. In addition, the DGS’s liability is limited to the amount of losses that
the DGS would have borne under an insolvency counterfactual
332
. This provision has not
332
Based on the so-called least cost test.
177
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0179.png
been used, so far, in practice. The difficulties in providing funding in resolution from the
DGS relate to certain other conditions set out in Article 109 BRRD.
Particularly, conditions under paragraphs (1)(a) and (b) are restrictive and difficult to
operationalise, particularly the limitation that the DGS is liable for the losses that covered
deposits would have suffered had they been bailed-in at the same time as creditors with
the same ranking. Considering that covered deposits benefit from super-preference in the
ranking of claims and that the value of assets in resolution is in principle higher than in
insolvency, in most cases covered deposits would not have been called upon to bear
losses in resolution to enable the DGS to step in. Additionally, this provision introduces
limitations on the maximum amount of the DGS contribution, which may not exceed the
losses that the DGS would have borne in an insolvency counterfactual nor 50% of its
target level.
In order to operationalise the application of the provision, and to preserve its
effet utile
the Commission services support the interpretation
333
that under Article 109 BRRD, DGS
funds may be used to support the transfer of eligible deposits in resolution provided that
such contribution is instrumental to ensuring access of depositors to their covered
deposits. In particular, DGS funds may be used to inject an amount equal to the
difference between eligible deposits and assets, provided that the “least cost” principle is
respected (i.e. provided that the costs borne by the DGS do not exceed the net amount of
compensating covered depositors at the credit institution concerned, in the context of
national insolvency proceedings.) Notwithstanding this interpretation, it is appropriate to
consider revising the wording of the provision to clarify the reading of the provision in
line with the approach mentioned here.
As mentioned in sub-section (b) funding sources from the DGS are also available for
banks that do not meet the PIA and are put in insolvency according to the applicable
national law (alternative measures). The DGS can provide funding to support a transfer
transaction to the extent that this is necessary to preserve access to covered deposits and
that it complies with the least cost test (LCT) and State aid rules, as applicable. The LCT
requires that the loss for the DGS is lower than the loss it would have borne in case of
payout in insolvency, while the qualification of the DGS use as State aid would entail a
minimum burden sharing by shareholders, hybrid capital holders and subordinated
debtholders, for its authorisation. Also in this case, the DGS’ super preference creates a
substantial limitation to the possibility for the DGS to provide funding.
The access conditions to DGS funding in resolution and insolvency are not aligned,
which makes the use of funds subject to uncertainty. Finally, the opportunity to use DGS
funding in resolution or insolvency entails different arbitrage depending on whether the
potential intervention is in a Banking Union or non-Banking union context. For non -
Banking Union Members States, both resolution and DGS funds are financed by the
domestic industry, possibly facilitating the combination of the funds. In the case of
Banking Union Member States, the SRF is financed by all banks in the Banking Union
while the financing of DGS is national, creating an “asymmetry” in the burden of the
333
This interpretation has not been formally adopted yet by the Commission.
178
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
costs in case DGS would “substitute” resolution funds. Moreover, in the absence of EDIS
there may be a risk of a shortfall in DGS funds.
It is important therefore to review the access conditions for DGS funding in resolution
and insolvency to ensure level playing field, consistency and proportionality between the
applications of procedures.
7.1.3. Objective (3): Did the framework achieve the objective of enhancing the
functioning of the single market including by handling of cross-border
crises and fostering level playing field among banks from different Member
States, particularly in the Banking Union?
Many aspects of the CMDI framework improved the functioning of the single market in
banking and the level playing field among banks. The framework created a centralised
mechanism and governance for resolution (SRM) in the Banking Union, cross-border
coordination processes as well as tools and cooperation requirements (e.g. creation of
resolution groups and internal loss absorbing capacity for subsidiaries in host Member
States) to handle the failure of cross-border banking groups.
Cross-border coordination among national DGSs was enhanced by the DGSD, which also
facilitated access to the internal market through the freedom of establishment and the
freedom to provide financial services while increasing the stability of the banking system
and the protection of depositors.
Yet, despite these achievements, the operational handling of recent bank failures in some
Member States, was characterised by a lack of consistency and uneven playing field. This
was mainly caused by broad discretion in the conditions for the application of the
BRRD/SRMR measures, which leaves room for arbitrage in the decision of the public
authorities to resort to resolution or insolvency tools, depending on the solutions available
for a specific failing bank. This arbitrage is fuelled by several factors, the most important
being (i) divergent access conditions for the resolution funds and for funding outside
resolution and difficulties for certain banks in accessing resolution funds (see Section
7.1.2.3), (ii) differences in the track record between resolution authorities to make use of
industry-funded resolution funds and (iii) the availability of various national tools which
may be similar to resolution tools, with often heterogeneous and unclear activation
conditions.
The divergent application of rules, lack of harmonised hierarchies of claims and the
uneven playing field for banks, depositors and taxpayers emerging as a consequence of
these issues, among other elements, also contribute to market fragmentation in the EU,
reducing the level of cross-border market integration and the functioning of the single
market in banking. While the reduced incentives for cross-border market consolidation
through mergers and the more reduced volume of cross-border banking transactions
cannot be entirely linked with the application of the CMDI framework, the resolution
regime does have a bearing on it and its improvement would be conducive to more
market integration in the medium and long run.
The DGSD’s contribution to EU level playing field could also be further improved, in
particular with regard to ONDs and their potential impact on the internal market.
179
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0181.png
Moreover, the differences in robustness and firepower among national DGSs combined
with the lack of EDIS in the Banking Union may further exacerbate the uneven playing
field, especially if a large shock event were to materialise in one of the participating
Member States.
Overall, evidence from the application of the framework points out to the achievement of
a sub-optimal functioning of the single market and the need for significant improvements
to remove differences in treatment among banks, creditors, depositors and taxpayers in
different Member States.
Main factors influencing the objective’s achievement
Factors influencing performance against Overall impact on objective
objective
1) Centralised governance in the Banking Union
Positive
(creation of SRM, SRB, SRF)
2) Supervisory cooperation and EU oversight on
Positive
(enhanced
cross-border
convergence of supervisory practices
cooperation, EU resolution colleges, EBA’s
convergence mandate, positive impact on
market integration)
3) Precautionary and preventive measures
Negative
(lack of clarity and framing of
precautionary and preventive measures,
divergent
access
requirements
vs
resolution)
4) Predictability of legal framework and the
Negative
(lack of predictability of
approach to PIA
application, restrictive approach and across
EU, divergent application of PIA,
conducive to market fragmentation).
5) Interaction between national insolvency
Negative
(lack
of legal certainty due to
proceedings and resolution triggers
divergent triggers, legal limbo situations)
6)
National ranking of claims in insolvency
Negative
(unharmonised)
7.1.3.1. Centralised governance in the Banking Union
One of the most important achievements of the framework with respect to the single
market functioning was the creation of the Single Resolution Mechanism (SRM), the
second pillar of the Banking Union. The centralised decision making is built around the
Single Resolution Board (SRB) consisting of a Chair, a Vice Chair, four permanent
members, and the relevant national resolution authorities
334
. The SRB is directly
responsible for the resolution of the entities and groups directly supervised by the
European Central Bank (ECB) as well as other less significant cross-border groups. The
functioning of the SRM is enabled, among other factors, by its governance, in particular,
the strong cooperation and coordination between the SRB and national resolution
authorities via its Plenary Session
335
, various task force groups, forums and committees.
334
335
Composition of the Governing Body of the SRB in its extended Executive Session.
In the Plenary Session of the SRB, all of the NRAs are represented, together with the SRB Chair and the
four permanent Board Members.
180
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0182.png
This centralised decision-making system for the Banking Union contributed significantly
to the functioning of the single market in banking and to fostering consistent policies and
approaches, mainly in cases of cross-border resolution preparedness (and to, a lesser
extent, in terms of resolution execution).
7.1.3.2. Supervisory cooperation and EU oversight on convergence of
supervisory practices
The CMDI rules create a framework for coordination and communication processes,
exchange of information, as well as tools for competent and resolution authorities from
different Member States to cooperate and communicate effectively on crisis preparedness
and execution for cross-border banking groups. The legislation provides joint decision-
making processes for critical elements such as: the preparation of group recovery and
resolution plans, removal of impediments to group resolvability and setting up resolution
buffers (MREL).
Furthermore, the BRRD requires the creation of EU resolution colleges as a forum for the
group‐level resolution authorities, other relevant resolution authorities, supervisory
authorities, competent ministries and authorities responsible for DGS, to collectively plan
for and coordinate the resolution of cross-border banking groups
336
. The BRRD also
provides the rules for communication and exchange of information between EU and third
country resolution authorities and other international institutions.
In this context, the EBA is mandated by the framework to develop a wide range of
technical standards, guidelines and reports with the aim of ensuring effective and
consistent procedures across the Union, in particular with respect to cross-border
financial institutions. To fulfil the EBA’s role in ensuring EU convergence in the
application of the rules, national authorities must notify the EBA of any relevant
information as well as of any actions taken under the framework. The EBA publishes
non-confidential elements of these notifications on its website together with its
assessment of the supervisory convergence, including in the continuum between ongoing
supervision, recovery and resolution.
337
The creation of these effective cooperation and coordination arrangements and of a
centralised oversight of convergence of supervisory practices helped with tackling
challenges of cross-border banks vulnerabilities and failures and creating a level playing
field in the single market for EU banking products.
7.1.3.3. Precautionary and preventive measures
Precautionary measures allow the provision of extraordinary financial support from
public resources to a solvent bank, to diffuse the risks of a serious disturbance in the
economy of a Member State and to preserve its financial stability.
338
The available
measures comprise capital injections (precautionary recapitalisation) as well as liquidity
support. Possible uses of precautionary recapitalisation also include relief measures
336
337
Third country authorities may also be invited to attend colleges as observers.
EBA (14 March 2019),
EBA notes good progress in convergence of supervisory practices across the
EU.
338
These measures are provided in Article 32(4)(d) BRRD.
181
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0183.png
through the transfer of impaired assets
339
, and similar considerations have been extended
to asset protection schemes
340
. The provision of such support is an exception to the
general principle that the recourse to extraordinary public financial support to maintain
the viability, solvency or liquidity of a bank should lead to the determination that the
bank is FOLF. For this reason, specific requirements must be met in order to allow such
measures under the BRRD/SRMR
341
as well as under the State aid rules for banks
342
.
Notwithstanding the correct application of these safeguards in past practice, it also
occurred that two banks benefitted from multiple public supports in the form of
precautionary liquidity on grounds,
inter alia,
of being declared solvent by the competent
supervisor, only months before being assessed as FOLF. Based on this experience,
practices of the Commission and authorities involved in such situations were already
enhanced. For precautionary recapitalisation, the rules should take stock of the adjusted
approach developed based on past experience (see Annex 9 of the impact assessment), to
enforce the very stringent conditions already established, which are key to ensure that aid
in this form can be granted without impinging on the overarching objective of avoiding
moral hazard. Nonetheless, there is scope to improve the clarity of the relevant legal
provisions and to ensure the predictability and consistency of the outcome going forward.
In certain circumstances, DGS funds can be used to prevent the failure of a bank
(preventive measures under Article 11(3) DGSD) and be very useful in averting further
financial deterioration, which could lead to a crisis. Currently, the legal provisions
enabling the use of DGS funds for such preventive measures are optional and not all
Member States have transposed them into national law. Only nine Member States
(Austria, Croatia, France, Germany, Ireland, Italy, Malta, Poland and Spain) have
transposed this option in national law
343
.
Such measures are possible only if not qualified as State aid. Depending on several
elements, the DGS intervention could be qualified as private or public for the purpose of
State aid control by the Commission. Such an assessment is made on a case-by-case
basis, taking into consideration elements such as the governance and decision-making
procedure of the DGS, and the circumstances relating to the measure. It is therefore hard
to predict whether the intervention would qualify as State aid or not. However, this
qualification has an impact on the legal treatment of the DGS intervention. In particular,
the qualification of the intervention as State aid would
de facto
impede the intervention
of the DGS in a preventive capacity, as this would trigger a determination of FOLF under
339
The necessary conditions to allow the use of precautionary recapitalisation to support an impaired asset
relief measure are outlined in detail in the Commission Asset Management Companies blueprint, page 36,
see European Commission staff working document (March 2018),
AMC Blueprint.
340
European Commission (16 December 2020),
Communication from the Commission to the European
Parliament, the Council and the European Central Bank: Tackling non-performing loans in the aftermath
of the COVID-19 pandemic (COM(2020) 822 final,
p. 16).
341
In particular, BRRD and SRMR require that the measure is limited to solvent banks and it does not
cover incurred and likely losses. Also, the amount is limited to the shortfall identified in an asset quality
review, stress test or equivalent exercise.
342
Out of which rules, the most relevant for the purpose of this impact assessment, is the 2013 Banking
Communication, see European Commission (2013),
Banking Communication.
343
Source: CEPS study, p. 124.
182
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0184.png
the BRRD
344
. Available evidence shows that some preventive measures were assessed as
being private or in line with market conditions (i.e. EUR 5.92bn funded by private arm of
DGS fund or market-conform public measures) and therefore not qualified as State aid
(see Annex 9).
Moreover, the conditions for application of DGSD preventive measures should be clear,
harmonised, and consistent with other elements of the framework (e.g. FOLF criteria),
while safeguards should be applied to ensure that such interventions are sufficiently
sound from a financial perspective and would not impinge excessively on the DGS’
resources. However, the current legislative text does not provide adequate clarity on such
safeguards and conditions
345
. In past interventions observed, national authorities granted
support to banks, which were rather close to a situation of failure. While the current rules
do not prevent this, there is scope to reflect on possible improvements in the legislative
framework to reinforce the role of these measures as preventive actions, which should, in
principle, intervene in presence of a deterioration of the bank’s financial condition but
still far from a condition of failure. The interactions between preventive, precautionary
tools, early intervention measures and the timing and process of the FOLF determination
(laid down in Article 32 BRRD) are also unclear, which may lead to overly extensive use
of public/RF/DGS funds. In particular, the framework, gives the supervisor, significant
discretion for determining solvency, capital requirements, FOLF, as well as for the
timeframe handed to the bank for averting its failure (e.g. through a private solution or
early intervention measure). All these discretions interact with the conditions for the use
of preventive and precautionary tools. As mentioned above, this ambiguity led to
situations where banks received State aid in the form of precautionary liquidity on
grounds, inter alia, of being declared solvent, by the competent supervisor, only months
before being assessed as FOLF, as the banks’ solvency was assessed on the basis of a
point-in time (thus not forward looking) definition.
For both, DGSD preventive measures and BRRD precautionary measures, amendments
improving the clarity of the relevant legal provisions would help limiting the risk that
preventive support would allow existing senior creditors to exit their claims on the bank
shortly before FOLF is triggered and resolution/insolvency is applied, which may in turn
result in a higher use of financing sources (RF/SRF in resolution or DGS funds under
insolvency proceedings).
Box 10: Example of unclear interaction between precautionary measures and FOLF
determination – Case of the Venetian banks
In January 2017, two mid-sized Italian banks, Banca Popolare di Vicenza and Veneto
Banca (the “Venetian banks”), benefited from precautionary liquidity support, on
grounds, inter alia, of the bank being declared solvent by the supervisor, amounting to
EUR 6.5 bn, which was supplemented in April 2017 by another EUR 3.6 bn. The total
amount of the precautionary liquidity measures represented 16% of the banks’ combined
344
That is because according to Article 32(4)(d) BRRD the use extraordinary public financial support
(State aid), except in limited exceptions (such as in the case of precautionary measures) is one of the
criteria for FOLF determination and hence may lead to the resolution or insolvency of the bank.
345
See also Annex 6.
183
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0185.png
balance sheets at the time of the intervention. A few months later, in June 2017, both
banks were declared FOLF by the ECB, followed by a negative PIA by the SRB. As a
consequence, the banks entered compulsory administrative liquidation under the
management of the national resolution authority which approved a sale of business
transaction under national rules, funded by a cash injection (EUR 4.8 bn) and guarantees
by the State (EUR 12 bn) in order to facilitate the transfer to the acquirer.
Overall, the total amount of aid (precautionary and under national insolvency
proceedings) amounted to EUR 26.9 bn, representing 43% of the total combined balance
sheet size of both banks at the time of the intervention.
Thanks to the significant discretion left to supervisors for determining solvency, capital
requirements, FOLF, as well as for the timeframe handed to the bank for averting its
failure (e.g. through a private solution or early intervention measure), the Venetian banks
received a significant amount of public support (EUR 10.1 bn) in the form of
precautionary liquidity (which can only be granted to solvent banks) to, only a few
months later, be declared FOLF. These unclear interactions between precautionary tools,
lack of forward looking solvency assessment and the process of the FOLF
determination
346
, affected the predictability of the framework and did not act as strong
filter to prevent an extensive use of public funds.
7.1.3.4.Predictability of legal framework and the approach to PIA
Beyond other factors described above, the use of tools outside resolution was made
possible by the sometimes restrictive approach to the PIA as the entry gate to resolution.
The BRRD and the SRMR provide in Article 32 and Article 18 respectively that
resolution authorities should take a resolution action in relation to institutions only if they
consider that a number of conditions are met. One of those conditions is that the
resolution action is necessary in the public interest
347
and this determination is made by
carrying out a PIA. This assessment requires a comparison between resolution and
insolvency, in order to decide which procedure better meets the resolution objectives
348
.
The resolution objectives are considered to be of equal importance and must be balanced
as appropriate to the nature and circumstances of each case. Moreover, the framework
also requires that, when pursuing the resolution objectives, the resolution authority
should seek to minimise the cost of resolution and avoid destruction of value unless
necessary to achieve the resolution objectives. Additionally, the BRRD
349
provides that
authorities should have the possibility to resolve any institution, in order to maintain
financial stability.
However, the BRRD and SRMR leave a margin of discretion for resolution authorities
when carrying out this assessment, which led to divergent applications, as well as to
346
Relates to problem 1 and its first driver addressed by this impact assessment (chapter 2, section 2.1.1)
and evaluation (section 7.1.3.3).
347
Article 32(1)(c) BRRD and Article 18(1)(c) SRMR.
348
As per Article 31 BRRD, continuity of critical functions, avoidance of significant adverse effect on the
financial system, protection of public funds, protection of deposits and investors covered by investor
compensation schemes, protection of client funds and client assets.
349
See recital 29 BRRD.
184
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0186.png
interpretations which may not fully reflect the logic and intention of the legislation.
While in the Banking Union, the test has been applied rather restrictively and resolution
was used only three times
350
so far under the SRMR, outside the Banking Union,
resolution has been used more extensively (six out of 13 cases)
351
.
Some resolution authorities have taken the approach that only a limited number of
institutions should meet the PIA. However, several factors are relevant when carrying out
the PIA and the assessment should not be reduced simply to a matter of size of the
institution.
A first factor in the assessment is the type of normal insolvency proceedings available at
national level (the counterfactual to resolution), which may lead to different PIA results
for banks in different Member States. A national insolvency law allowing only piecemeal
liquidation is likely to be considered inadequate to manage the failure even of a medium-
sized entity, as the sudden interruption of certain functions (e.g. deposit taking and
payment services) could have a negative effect on financial stability and depositors’
confidence and undermine the payment system. A different conclusion could be reached
if the national insolvency proceedings allow additional ways to manage the bank's
failure, such as the transfer of the bank’s deposit book.
A second factor in the PIA is the impact on financial stability, which should be assessed
taking into consideration the economic environment at the moment of failure. In the
event of a widespread crisis, which would potentially weaken several institutions at the
same time, even the failure of a smaller institution may create ripple effects and impact
other players in the market. This could justify a decision to put that respective bank in
resolution rather than insolvency.
A third factor which is crucial to the PIA is the assessment of the impact on critical
functions. The conclusion that winding up the institution under normal insolvency
proceedings would disrupt its critical functions provides a strong basis for a public
interest finding. The critical nature of a function depends on the effect of an abrupt
interruption on the economy, the possibility for substitution and other factors. There are
divergences among resolution authorities in the interpretation of the PIA with respect to
the geographical reach of critical functions, i.e. whether a function can be deemed critical
only when its interruption has an impact on the economy of an entire Member State or
whether local/regional impact can be deemed sufficient. Similarly, the scope of the
assessment of the impact on financial stability was set at the level of one or several
Member States.
352
However, the BRRD/SRMR refer also to effects
within
a Member
State (i.e. within a region) and do not restrict the assessment to impacts on the financial
stability of (at least) an entire Member State. Additionally, the relevant Delegated
350
Two of those cases relate to the failure of banking entities belonging to the Sberbank Europe AG group,
which took place under special circumstances (see also Annex 9 for more information on the resolution of
the Sberbank group)
351
The remaining four cases with a positive PIA, concerned resolution in Banking Union Member States
but before the entry into force of the minimum 8% bail-in requirement and before the SRB became
responsible for the resolution handling of these cases.
352
SRB (3 July 2019),
Public Interest Assessment: SRB Approach,
p. 8.
185
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0187.png
Regulation
353
also provides for the assessment of critical functions on a local, regional,
national or European level, as appropriate for the market concerned. The SRB is revising
its PIA policy, which may incorporate an approach more considerate of local
implications.
354
A fourth important factor for the PIA is the link with the funding sources which would
become potentially available, i.e. resolution fund/DGS funding in resolution
versus
aid in
insolvency. At the time of the PIA, due account should be given to the available sources
of funding under various tools and a comparison should be made in light of the best
fulfilment of the resolution objectives and the overarching principle underlying the
resolution framework i.e. avoiding recourse to bail-outs. Past applications of the PIA did
not manage to avoid a use of large amounts of public support in insolvency, leading to
sub-optimal results from the perspective of preserving financial stability, preventing
moral hazard or safeguarding level-playing field. Also, the objective to limit the cost for
taxpayers could benefit from a further distinction between the use of public funds from
the State budget and the use of the RF/SRF or the DGS, which are financed by the
industry.
Consultations with stakeholders
355
showed that most stakeholders consider that the
provision, as regulated now, gives opportunity for too many different interpretations and
therefore creates level playing field issues and uncertainty. Many respondents argue that
the outcome of the PIA in the planning phase should be more predictable.
7.1.3.5. Interaction between national insolvency proceedings and resolution
triggers
National insolvency proceedings have been so far chosen over resolution in most of the
recent cases of bank failures. However, these proceedings are very heterogeneous across
EU Member States, not always tailored to the specificities of banks. Therefore, there is
no consistency EU-wide as to how a bank failure will be managed if resolution is not
used. For example, some Member States have special regimes applicable only to banks,
while others have ordinary insolvency regimes applicable to all kinds of firms; some
implement judicial-based frameworks, while others administrative-based frameworks.
Some Member States aligned the triggers for commencing national insolvency
proceedings with the BRRD FOLF triggers. However, in many Member States, a lack of
such alignment may result in legal uncertainty in the management of the banks that are
not resolved (lead to a break in the continuum between going and gone concern), in
particular in cross-border cases.
This variety of procedures creates a level playing field problem, as creditors and
depositors may be treated differently across the EU, potentially impairing the single
353
Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/778 of 2 February 2016 supplementing Directive
2014/59/EU of the European Parliament and of the Council with regard to the circumstances and
conditions under which the payment of extraordinary
ex post
contributions may be partially or entirely
deferred, and on the criteria for the determination of the activities, services and operations with regard to
critical functions, and for the determination of the business lines and associated services with regard to core
business lines, OJ L 131, 20.5.2016, p. 41.
354
SRB (May 2021),
PIA policy
considerations.
355
Annex 2 of the impact assessment and the
published summary of the consultations.
186
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0188.png
market in banking and fuelling financial fragmentation. Importantly, the lack of
sufficient clarity on the need for exiting the market in a timely manner, in case of
winding up following a negative PIA, could be an incentive for governments to also
extend some forms of support to banks that lack a sustainable business model,
particularly contributing to generating a heavy legacy of excess capacity in the system.
The underlying assumption with respect to an insolvency procedure is that once the bank
is put in insolvency it must exit the market. This does not have to happen immediately
nor following a single procedure. A bank may be sold through liquidation (i.e. in a
piecemeal fashion) or (partial) sale of the business. However, a market exit should take
place within a reasonable timeframe.
Under the current rules on insolvency, however, this outcome is not necessarily
guaranteed. In certain cases, it is possible that no action at all can be taken, because when
the bank is declared FOLF as per the BRRD and there is no PIA to resolve it, the triggers
to initiate insolvency are not met. To address this potential “limbo” situation, the 2019
Banking Package introduced Article 32b BRRD, requiring Member States to ensure the
orderly winding up in accordance with the applicable national law of failing banks which
cannot be resolved due to negative PIA. However, it is still unclear whether the
implementation of this Article in the national legal framework would address any
residual risk of standstill situations, in particular in those cases where the bank was
declared FOLF on the basis of forward looking triggers (“likely to fail”).
These differences in insolvency that can be observed across the EU have consequences
even for banks that are resolved. This is due to the fact that normal insolvency
proceedings are used in resolution as the main element of comparison for assessing
compliance with the “no
creditor worse off”
(NCWO) principle.
The problem driver described above may further complicate the handling of failures of
cross-border banking groups, as the entities of the group are handled according to a mix
of European and national rules for triggering resolution and insolvency, respectively.
Box 11: Example of unclear interaction between FOLF triggers and national
insolvency triggers - Case of ABLV
In February 2018, the ECB’s FOLF decision for both the Latvian parent and its
Luxembourg subsidiary
356
, was based on an assessment that the bank would likely be
unable, in the near future, to pay its debts or other liabilities as they fall due. Following
the FOLF determination, the SRB assessed that a resolution procedure was not in the
public interest (i.e. negative PIA)
357
. Consequently, the winding up of the parent and the
subsidiary had to take place, under the national insolvency law of Latvia and
Luxembourg, respectively.
However, the Latvian insolvency law does not provide for the immediate start of the
liquidation of an entity, as long as, it still possesses a licence to operate and is able to
356
357
ECB (24 February 2018)
Press release on FOLF determination for ABLV Bank
SRB (24 February 2018)
Press release on SRB’s decision not to take a resolution action for ABLV Bank
and its subsidiary in Luxembourg
187
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0189.png
meet its payment obligations. As a result, although an assessment of the likely inability
of the bank to meet its payment obligations was sufficient reason for ECB to determine
that the parent and its subsidiary were FOLF, it did not constitute sufficient grounds for
opening winding up proceedings, under the national insolvency laws of Latvia and
Luxembourg, for the two FOLF entities. To end this limbo situation, the shareholders of
the Latvian parent bank had to be convinced to liquidate the bank, voluntarily. In
contrast, the Luxembourg subsidiary was subject to a suspension of payments regime
(moratorium) until the start of the judicial liquidation process almost two years later.
Consequently, the Luxembourg subsidiary was faced with a situation of legal
uncertainty, because it was declared FOLF, but could not exit the market for a prolonged
period of time
358
.
Feedback from the consultations with the stakeholders
359
revealed that the majority is in
general, supportive of a full or maximum possible alignment between national insolvency
proceedings and resolution triggers bearing in mind restrictions in national law (such as
Constitutional features). Some of the stakeholders explained that such alignment is
already in place in some jurisdictions.
7.1.3.6. Non-harmonised national ranking of claims in insolvency
Insolvency proceedings as a counterfactual to resolution play an important role when
assessing the application of resolution tools. Concretely, resolution authorities must
ensure that the application of resolution tools would not make creditors worse-off than
they would have been in insolvency (NCWO principle). Furthermore, liabilities absorb
losses and contribute to the recapitalisation of an institution in resolution in an order that
is largely determined by the hierarchy of claims in insolvency.
The BRRD harmonised certain rules on the priority ranking in national laws governing
normal insolvency proceedings of the following liabilities: (i) covered deposits and DGS
(Article 108(1)(b)), (ii) the part of eligible deposits from natural persons and micro, small
and medium-sized enterprises (SMEs) exceeding the DGSD coverage level (Article
108(1)(a))
360
, (iii) senior non-preferred debt instruments (Article 108(2) and (3)) and (iv)
own funds items (Article 48). However, important divergences in the hierarchy of claims
remain when it comes to the ranking of ordinary unsecured claims, other deposits and
exclusions from bail-in.
Such divergences have the potential to create uneven playing field in cross-border
resolutions and uneven treatment of creditors in resolution and in insolvency, as well as
additional complexity when conducting the NCWO assessment for cross-border groups,
particularly among jurisdictions participating in the Banking Union.
358
Relates to problem 1 that groups together all identified issues of legal certainty in the existing
framework, addressed by this impact assessment in chapter 2, section 2.1 and chapter 5, section 5.5, as well
as in annex 8 (section 6) and the evaluation (section 7.1.3.5).
359
See Annex 2 of the impact assessment.
360
As well as deposits that would be eligible deposits from natural persons and SMEs were they not made
through branches located outside the Union of institutions established within the Union.
188
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0190.png
Feedback from the consultations with the stakeholders confirmed that a large majority of
the respondents perceived that the differences between bank creditor hierarchies across
Members States could complicate the application of resolution action as they viewed
these divergences as a source of increased fragmentation in the EU and differentiated
treatment amongst creditors.
Box 12: Overview of main differences in national ranking of deposit claims
In recent years, an increasing number of Member States (BG, CY, EL, HR, HU, IT, PT,
SI)
361
have granted a legal preference in insolvency to the remaining deposits as a
complement to the protection already afforded to covered deposits and eligible deposits
of natural persons and SMEs under Article 108(1) BRRD.
362
While those deposits now
rank in insolvency above ordinary unsecured claims (including senior bondholders
eligible for MREL), they continue to rank below the deposits referred to in Article 108(1)
BRRD.
7.1.4. Objective (4): Did the framework achieve the objective of protecting
depositors and ensuring depositor confidence across the EU? In the
Banking Union, what is the impact of the absence of EDIS?
Overall, the framework achieved the objective of protecting depositors and ensuring
depositor confidence across the EU. In particular, the coverage level contributes to the
effectiveness of the DGSD framework and to depositors’ confidence, as it allows
protecting almost all deposited amounts and a very large part of the depositors’ wealth.
However, as the framework is not consistently applied across the EU, depositor
protection and confidence is achieved in a sub-optimal way.
Box 13: Information on covered deposits, available financial means
363
and target level
The amount of covered deposits is increasing. By the end of 2021, the target level of
0.8% of all covered deposits in the European Union amounted to EUR 64 bn, though the
DGS’s available financial means were 0.71% of covered deposits (or EUR 57 bn), a
difference which is consistent with the objective set in the Deposit Guarantee Schemes
Directive of reaching the target level by July 2024.
361
362
SRB
Liability Data Report and related guidance.
More specifically, these Member States have granted a preferred ranking to eligible deposits of large
corporates, in the part exceeding the coverage level of the DGS, and to deposits excluded from repayment
by the DGS pursuant to Article 5(1) DGSD, such as deposits held by public authorities, financial sector
entities and pension funds.
363
In the year 2021, the EBA published data for available financial means, make a delineation between
“qualified
available financial means”
(QAFM) and “other
available financial means”
(other AFM). The
QAFM constitute funds raised directly, or indirectly, from the banks, which count towards reaching the
minimum target level of 0.8% of covered deposits. Other AFM constitute funds which have not been
contributed by the banks but derive e.g., from taking a commercial loan. These funds do not count towards
the target level of 0.8% of covered deposits. Taken together, QAFM and other AFM add-up to the DGS’s
available financial means. For the years 2015-2020 the EBA data for available financial means did not
make such a delineation (see
EBA Deposit Guarantee Schemes data
for more information). As regards
2021, the European Commission calculations, for the purposes of this Annex, are based on the EBA
QAFM, which are relevant for the measurement of the target level of 0.8%.
189
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0191.png
Figure 16: Overview of covered deposits and available financial means in the EU
Source: EBA data and European Commission calculations
Main factors influencing the objective’s achievement
Factors influencing performance against Overall impact on objective
objective
1) Level of depositor protection across Member
Positive
(most of depositors are fully
States
covered)
2) Harmonised rules for depositors
Member States
3) DGS contribution in resolution
4) Robustness of DGS funds
across
Mainly positive
(there are still
discrepancies in depositors protection
among Member States)
Negative
(never used)
Mainly negative
(vulnerability to
large shocks, lack of EDIS)
7.1.4.1. Level of depositor protection across Member States
The level of depositor protection remains high since the entry into force of the DGSD, as
most of depositors are fully covered with a coverage level of EUR 100 000. The
Commission’s impact assessment of 2010 reported that the unweighted average ratio of
fully covered depositors to eligible depositors was 95.4% in 2007
364
. According to EBA
data of 2017
365
, 98.1% of depositors and 61.2% of eligible deposits are fully protected
with a coverage level of EUR 100 000 (i.e. the amount of their deposits is lower than
364
The weighted average ratio in terms of sums deposited i.e. the ratio of the amount of covered deposits to
eligible deposits was 71.8% in 2007.
365
EBA Opinion on ‘the eligibility of deposits, coverage level and cooperation between deposit guarantee
schemes’ (p. 37).
190
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0192.png
EUR 100 000). Moreover, JRC’s quantitative analysis
366
showed that the coverage levels
of the temporary high balances allow protecting a very large percentage of depositors’
wealth. In almost all Member States, the coverage level for temporary high balances
allows protecting more than 95% of depositors’ wealth.
7.1.4.2. Harmonised rules for depositors across Member States
As set out in Annex 6, despite improved depositor confidence, the experience with the
framework so far has also shown some weaknesses. A lack of clear and consistent rules
in the DGSD as well as certain flexibility for national interpretation/ discretion/
transposition of the rules seems to lead to discrepancies and coverage issues when it
comes to depositor protection across the EU.
In terms of scope of protection, the coverage level for THBs varies between Member
States from EUR 200 000 to an unlimited amount. While practical experience on this
matter has only been recorded in two Member States, it is estimated that up to 10% of
covered deposits
367
are impacted by this non-harmonised approach.
Consequently, depositors enjoy different levels and types of guarantees depending on
their location, leading to inconsistent access to financial safety nets for EU depositors.
Other ONDs lead to discrepancies in depositor protection. For instance, small public
authorities and agencies distinct from the government could be protected in some
Member States, but not across the EU. Similarly, clients whose funds are held through the
intermediary of non-bank financial institutions as payment or e-money service providers
may be covered only in some Member States.
In addition, the level playing field varies among Member States due to differences in the
implementation of the alternative funding arrangements. Some Member States put in
place concrete alternative funding arrangements, while other Member States did not. This
lack of additional resources to rely on in case the DGS were depleted could impact the
ability to payout depositors and endanger consumer confidence and financial stability.
Furthermore, some Member States transposed Articles 11(3) and/or 11(6) DGSD, while
others did not. As mentioned earlier in Section 7.1.3.3, nine Member States transposed
Article 11(3) DGSD allowing financing measures to prevent the failure of credit
institutions. Moreover, 11 Member States transposed Article 11(6) DGSD allowing
financing alternative measure to payout aiming at preserving the access to covered
deposits. These measures allow to use DGS funds to prevent the failure of the banks or to
finance alternative measure to payout respectively. The implementation of these options
may create unlevel playing field. Some DGSs could be more cost-effective as
transferring the bank to a buyer in case of alternative measure would preserve the
franchise value better than by selling assets in a piecemeal approach. Following the same
logic, preventive measures could minimise the costs for the DGS even more than when
the FOLF/insolvency trigger is reached as a result of higher losses. These differences in
See JRC report on THB’s (Annex 12) and Annex 6 of this impact assessment on DGSD review related
matters.
367
Source: CEPS study.
366
191
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0193.png
tools available could also lead to efficiency discrepancies among Member States (see
Section 7.2 on efficiency).
Another issue of consistency is related to the DGSD conditions associated with the
application of preventive and alternative measures, which are unclear and differently
interpreted among Member States
368
. Regarding the alternative measures, Article 11(6)
DGSD provides that “the
costs borne by the DGS do not exceed the net amount of
compensating covered depositors at the credit institution concerned”.
This least cost test
aims at comparing for the DGS, the cost of a payout with the cost of the alternative
measure. The less costly measure must be applied. However, Member States use
different methods in calculating this least cost test. For instance, some Member States
include indirect costs like potential cost for the banking sector, opportunity cost for the
DGS, impact on depositors’ confidence in calculating the cost of a payout. By contrast,
other Member States use a stricter method, only including direct costs (costs related to
the liquidation and payout process). As regards preventive measures, Article 11(3)(c)
DGSD provides that “the
costs of the measures do not exceed the costs of fulfilling the
statutory or contractual mandate of the DGS”.
Some Member States use the same least
cost test for both preventive and alternative measures, while other Member States did not
develop a least cost test methodology in case of preventive measure, considering that
comparing the cost of the preventive measure with the cost of a payout is not relevant as
no insolvency proceeding is expected.
7.1.4.3. DGS contribution in resolution
Under the existing CMDI framework, the main sources of funding in resolution, are the
bank’s own liabilities, which have to contribute through a minimum amount of bail-in
(8% of TLOF) before external funding in the form of the SRF under the SRM for the
Banking Union and national resolution funds for non-Banking Union Member States
may contribute to the resolution cost. DGS funding is a complementary source of funds
in resolution: in order to guarantee access to deposits in case of bank resolution, the
CMDI framework requires that national DGS contribute funds to finance certain
resolution actions and for alternative measures to depositor payouts in insolvency
369
. The
exact calibration of the amount depends on the used resolution tool.
Although the use of DGSs is foreseen in the existing framework, the access conditions
seem to prevent this because of the current methodology used to calculate the least cost
test and/or their super-preference in the creditor hierarchy
370
. Moreover, the funds
available in national DGSs are limited and, so far, the shortfall in available means often
required additional financing by the public budget. As a result, this instrument has so far
never been used.
368
369
For more details see also Annex 6 of the impact assessment.
This possibility is currently available as a national option under the DGSD enabling the DGS to finance
alternative measures in insolvency.
370
For more details see also Annex 6 of the impact assessment.
192
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0194.png
7.1.4.4.Robustness of DGS funds
Member States are steadily building up their DGS means to reach 0.8% of total covered
deposits by 2024 as provided for by the DGSD. Through their nature, DGS funds are
intrinsically linked to the contribution capacity of banks in their jurisdiction. This,
notwithstanding a significant crisis, may put under stress a national DGS, making it
difficult to settle individual depositor claims within the statutory time or to intervene
through another measure than payout. In such situations, a DGS may find it difficult and
pro-cyclical to call upon
ex post
contributions from its members to make up for the
shortfall. The next course of action available to the DGS would be to seek funding from
alternative arrangements pursuant to DGSD, which could include private or public
sources. Ultimately, the sovereign gives an explicit or implicit backing to the DGS and it
acts as ultimate guarantor to national DGSs.
DGS funds continuously increased over the past years. In terms of available financial
means, the volume rose from EUR 26.7 bn in 2015 to around EUR 57 bn at the end of
2021
371
. Yet, they remain vulnerable to asymmetric shocks, as deposit guarantee schemes
are organised at national level and no EDIS is in place. In recent years, some national
DGSs faced important funding needs, representing a significant share of their available
financial needs. The latter demonstrates that the risk of bank failures is relevant for all
institutions, from large to small and that payout is cash consuming for the DGS, even
though the final loss could be limited at the end of the insolvency proceedings.
Box 14: Impacts of covered deposit payouts in insolvency on the DGS robustness
In 2018, the failure of ABLV Bank depleted the Latvian DGS’ available financial means
by 312%, while the payout event in 2020 for Commerzial Bank Mattersburg im
Burgenland AG’s failure costed an equivalent of 72% of the available financial means of
the respective Austrian DGS. In Italy, one DGS intervention in 2020 amounted to 67%
of the available financial means of the involved DGS. In Germany, the cost in the
NordLB case amounted to 21% of the available financial means of the DGS related to
the saving banks. Some of these interventions led to an increase in
ex post
contributions
raised from the banking sectors, to avoid reducing the financial capacity of the DGS for
a lengthy period of time and to reach the target level by 2024. Similarly, and more
recently, the payout in the Greensill Bank case caused in 2021 a loss of 31% of the
available financial means of the respective German DGS and the payout in the Sberbank
failure amounted to an equivalent of 211% of the respective Austrian DGS’s available
financial means. These examples clearly show that failing smaller and medium-sized
banks have material impacts on the DGS robustness, even during a period without
systemic financial trouble.
More generally, the ECB’s occasional paper advocating for DGS’ intervention in
transfers of assets
372
shows that 261 banks, banking groups or hosted subsidiaries in the
371
372
EBA Deposit Guarantee Schemes data
and European Commission calculations.
ECB (October 2022),
Protecting depositors and saving money - why DGS in the EU should be able to
support transfers of assets and liabilities when a bank fails.
193
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0195.png
Banking Union could individually deplete their fully-filled DGSs with a single covered
deposits payout event in insolvency. While 129 of these banks are significant institutions
likely to involve resolution rather than a depositor payout in insolvency, the 132
remaining are less significant institutions or their hosted subsidiaries, which also have
covered deposits exceeding the target level of their DGSs.
The above also recalls one of the lessons of the euro area sovereign debt crisis from
2011/12 to weaken the link between banks and their national sovereign. A strong bank-
sovereign nexus may create risks to financial stability through contagion and negative
consequences for the single market. A decade later, the continued reliance by national
DGSs on the State as a buffer for depositor protection is a source of vulnerability that
needs to be addressed.
Where the payout ability of one national DGS could be impaired under a severe crisis,
mutualising resources would optimise the allocation of financial means where the
funding needs arise, significantly increasing the efficiency of the scheme. Based on
available evidence
373
, in case of a crisis similar to the 2008 one, the probability that some
depositors would not be fully reimbursed in at least one Member State is 87%.
374
The
analysis also showed that mutualising resources (at least partially) reduces the probability
of not being able to reimburse some depositors in case of crisis by 80%-90%. The more
resources are mutualised, the more effective the system is.
The lack of EDIS may also trigger movements in deposit location. For instance, under a
severe crisis in one bank or Member State, depositors could be enticed to transfer their
funds in another bank or even another country. Such practices may exacerbate the
financial difficulties of one bank or one national banking sector. One of the key
principles of EDIS is to provide a similar guarantee to depositors regardless of the
institution and their location, which means that depositors would not need to withdraw/
transfer their deposits, even under a severe crisis, contributing to stabilising the financial
situation.
The robustness of the DGS funds also relies on the investment policy. The DGS financial
means must be invested in a low-risk and sufficiently diversified manner (Article 10(7)
DGSD). For many DGSs, the investment policy leads to a very large exposure to their
sovereign. According to the EBA opinion on the uses of DGS funds
375
, nine Member
States reported that DGS funds are invested exclusively, or to a large extent, in national
debt. Moreover, the DGSD transposition checks revealed that, in three Member States,
the DGS deposited its available financial means (at least part of them) in an account in
the national budget or Treasury. These practices may strengthen the links between the
DGS and their sovereign. The DGSs that have invested most of their financial means in
national debt, could suffer a decrease of their available financial means in case the
sovereign bonds market is under pressure. In those Member States where DGS available
See also Annex 10 of the impact assessment – section “Establishment of a common scheme for liquidity
support”.
374
However, in some cases, the amount of covered deposits that cannot be reimbursed are very low.
375
EBA opinion
on DGS funding and uses of DGS funds (p. 103).
373
194
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0196.png
financial means are integrated into their national budget, a payout, following a bank
failure, would require the national treasury to issue sovereign bonds on financial markets
in order to fund the DGS, maintaining the sovereign-bank loop.
Lastly, the robustness of the DGS funds also relies on the available sources of funding
which are raised yearly and
ex post
contributions and alternative funding arrangements.
The latter take the form of loans from the private sector in case the available financial
means of the DGS are insufficient. The DGSD conformity checks showed that some
Member States did not put in place concrete alternative funding arrangements. The EBA
opinion on DGS funding and DGS funds also highlights that in nine Member States, there
is no concrete alternative funding arrangement in place
376
. In the absence of EDIS, this
could also compromise the ability of the DGS to reimburse depositors when its financial
means are depleted, at the risk of financial stability and depositors’ confidence.
7.2. Efficiency
How efficient has the EU intervention been? To what extent have the rules
regarding the recovery and orderly resolution of banks under the BRRD/SRMR
and the ones regarding depositor protection under the DGSD been cost-effective?
Are there significant differences in costs or benefits between Member States and
what is causing them?
Summary assessment:
The evaluation found that the CMDI framework is not sufficiently cost-effective.
On one hand, the main benefits of the framework include enhanced crisis preparedness,
contingency planning and the disciplining influence that the existence of the framework
exerts on banks and markets (i.e. through the creation of powers, loss absorption
requirements, resolvability requirements, reporting and more transparency and
disclosure, EU-wide DGSs). However, some of these benefits remain rather theoretical,
as the contingency planning measures, on several occasions, were not implemented and
alternatives to resolution were followed.
On the other hand, the implementation and operationalisation of the CMDI framework
came with significant costs for the banking industry, Member States, resolution
authorities. Yet despite the costs, the framework and its tools and powers have been
scarcely used in practice, especially in the Banking Union under the SRMR. In addition,
the use of public funding in recent cases of bank failures indicates a redistribution of
costs from banks’ senior unsecured creditors to the taxpayers, despite scrutiny on such
usage of public funds through the EU State aid rules. As taxpayers continue to bear the
cost of bank failures, contributions raised from the industry for the same purpose remain
idle. Furthermore, available evidence suggests that these costs are uneven between
Member States, as national requirements and practices diverge widely.
376
EBA opinion
on DGS funding on uses of DGS funds (p. 44).
195
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0197.png
7.2.1. Benefits of the framework
An accurate quantification of benefits generated by the implementation of the CMDI
framework is very challenging as it cannot be disentangled from other prudential policies
(e.g. Basel III), macroeconomic measures and central bank monetary policies which were
pursued in parallel with the implementation of the framework, following the global
financial crisis. Besides this complexity, many bank failures were handled using powers,
tools and funding outside of the resolution framework.
However, evidence by resolution authorities and the EBA, stakeholder feedback to our
consultations and the FSB’s
Too big to fail report
show some positive impacts of the
framework in reducing risks to financial stability, “too big to fail” and moral hazard on
one hand, and increasing market discipline, level of preparedness, resolvability and crisis
contingency planning on the other hand. In addition, some of these impacts can be
expected to be further supported by the fact that banks have been building their loss
absorbing capacity over the last few years. Moreover, depositors have been protected and
the society’s access to critical banking services preserved.
The main benefits of the framework are linked to the disciplining effects that the
existence of the framework had on banks and markets (i.e. through the creation of
powers, loss absorption requirements, resolvability requirements, reporting and more
transparency and disclosure, EU-wide DGSs). Yet, these benefits remain difficult to
disentangle and challenging to attribute directly to the application of the framework.
7.2.2. Costs of the framework
The implementation of the CMDI rules did not come without costs for the industry,
authorities, Member States and citizens.
7.2.2.1. Creation and set-up of new resolution authorities
First, the BRRD and SRMR mandated the creation and operationalisation of resolution
authorities in each Member State as well as the creation of the SRB as the central
resolution authority in the Banking Union. While there may have been some cost
synergies in creating the resolution authorities in Member States, especially in relation to
already existing supervisory and financial stability teams in central banks, the SRB had to
be created from scratch. The SRB’s annual budget for administrative expenses is funded
through
ex ante
industry contribution in accordance with the SRMR and Commission
Delegated Regulation (EU) 2017/2361
377
. According to the SRB’s budget for 2022
378
, the
amount for the administrative contributions by the industry is budgeted to EUR 120.4 m
(up from EUR 119 m in 2021). The cumulative administrative costs of the SRB, from
2014 to 2020, can be approximated from the administrative contributions raised by the
SRB over the same period, which amount to EUR 479 m
379
. The 2022 establishment plan
377
Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2017/2361
on the final system of contributions to the
administrative expenditures of the Single Resolution Board.
378
SRB (September 2021),
Budget 2022.
379
SRB,
Administrative Contributions.
196
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0198.png
included in the budget showed a budgeted headcount of 450 employees, which is same as
in 2020 and up from 400 in 2021
380
.
7.2.2.2. Contributions to resolution financing arrangements
Second, in order to finance resolution actions, the framework created national resolution
funds in each Member State (Article 100 BRRD) and the SRF in the Banking Union
(Article 70 SRMR). The resolution funds must reach at least 1% of the amount of
covered deposits of all credit institutions authorised in the participating Member States by
31 December 2023. Banks pay yearly contributions towards such target. Resolution
authorities are responsible for the calculation of
ex ante
contributions by applying the
methodology set out in the Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) No 2015/63 and the
Council Implementing Regulation (EU) No 2015/81, which guarantees a level playing
field among Member States. In the Banking Union, there is a system of transfers from the
national resolution funds to the SRF combined with mutualisation at the level of the latter
Fund, whereby the national resolution authorities are responsible for the collection of
ex
ante
industry contributions and for transferring these into the SRF. During the eight year
initial period (2016 – 2023), contributions raised at national level and transferred to the
SRF are allocated to national compartments corresponding to each participating Member
State. All national compartments will be merged and cease to exist at the end of the eight
year initial period
381
.
Table 2: 2021 situation of national compartments of the resolution funds (EUR bn)
Current size of national
compartment
AT
BE
CY
DE
EE
EL
ES
FI
FR
IE
IT
LT
LU
LV
MT
NL
PT
SI
SK
BG
HR
Total
1,50
1,96
0,13
13,73
0,05
0,58
5,35
1,08
15,43
0,84
5,23
0,05
0,90
0,04
0,05
4,28
0,79
0,07
0,15
0,10
0,11
52,43
Source: SRB data, 2021 compartments, data as of 14 July 2021. Figures are in EUR bn and rounded.
380
Data on the related costs for the NRAs and the national DGSs are not available. For national DGSs
under public governance and NRAs the budgeted headcounts are usually integrated in the budgets of
national central banks or other financial market authorities.
381
Council of the European Union (May 2014),
Intergovernmental Agreement on the transfer and
mutualisation of contributions to the Single Resolution Fund
(IGA).
197
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0199.png
Between 2016 and 2021, banks in the Banking Union contributed a total of EUR 52 bn
for the financing of this safety net. Since this target is defined by reference to the level of
covered deposits, it is dynamic, and as the latter have been growing more than anticipated
in the last couple of years, the yearly contributions by the industry are increasing (i.e. as
per the SRB’s 2022 budget, it expects to collect EUR 11.2 bn in the SRF in 2021,
compared with EUR 10.4 bn collected in 2021). Where the available financial means of
the resolution funds/ SRF are not sufficient to cover the losses, costs or other expenses
incurred by their use in resolution actions, extraordinary
ex post
contributions may be
raised in addition.
382
In a similar way, banks have also contributed to the funding of national DGS. Between
2015 and 2021, the contributions from the banks in the EU amounted to EUR 30.2 bn.
Consequently, the available financial means increased from EUR 26.7 bn to around
EUR 57 bn. It should be noted that the costs of depositor protection for the banking
sectors are higher than expected: the target level (i.e. 0.8% to be reached by 2024) is
defined as a percentage of the covered deposits, which have increased significantly over
the past years (from EUR 5 957 bn to EUR 8 039 bn between 2015 and 2021). Based on
the amount of covered deposits at end 2021 (EUR 8 039 bn but this amount is likely to
increase), the expected contributions amount to EUR 7.3 bn in order to reach the target
level by 2024.
Table 3: Situation of available financial means in the DGSs of EU Member States
(2021)
Current level of available financial
means in EU Member States
AT
1.08
BE
4.65
BG
0.75
CY
0.17
CZ
1.50
DE
12.15
DK
1.20
EE
0.27
EL
1.65
ES
5.27
FI
1.34
FR
5.84
HU
0.24
HR
0.75
IE
0.71
IT
3.22
LT
0.15
LU
0,29
LV
0.17
MT
0.15
NL
3.19
PL
4.07
PT
1.67
RO
1.38
SE
4.66
SI
0.12
SK
0.30
Total
56.9
Source: EBA data and European Commission own calculations, figures are in EUR bn and rounded.
382
Article 105 BRRD.
198
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0200.png
7.2.2.3. Costs of enhancing resolvability (MREL issuance, reporting, internal
projects geared towards resolvability)
The framework sets out the methodology for the setting up of the MREL on a on a bank
by bank basis. The BRRD/SRMR (Art 45b, 12c respectively) specify also the
subordinated MREL requirements, which ensure the build-up of a layer of instruments
which rank junior in the hierarchy of claims and can, therefore, absorb losses with greater
certainty in resolution.
Issuing MREL eligible instruments
383
bears a cost for the industry. Prior to the obligation
to hold MREL capacity, banks were funding their activity by issuing mainly senior
secured/unsecured debt on the markets or through deposits. With the implementation of
the MREL requirement, they must ensure compliance with the MREL eligibility criteria,
including, where relevant, subordination. Therefore, one way to approximate MREL-
related costs could be through the spread differential between ordinary secured/unsecured
debt and MREL eligible liabilities. The spread differential between subordinated and
senior instruments issued by banks (the former carrying higher issuing costs) reflects,
among other things, the risk assessment by investors. Such an assessment is inherently
affected by the prevailing market conditions such as the current low level of interest rate.
Looking forward, in view of the continuous roll-over needs to maintain compliance with
the requirements it is difficult to forecast the overall burden in terms of funding cost and
assess their long-term sustainability or possible impact on the funding structure.
While the cost of MREL debt increased significantly in the first quarter of 2020 on the
backdrop of the COVID-19 crisis, it stabilised in Q3 2020 and approached pre-pandemic
levels since January 2021. As shown in the SRB MREL Dashboard for Q3 2022, the
iTraxx indexes on subordinated and senior financial debt showed for some time a stable
trend over the period and a tight spread. As depicted in the next figure, as of Q2 2021 the
subordinated debt and senior debt index were 1.1 and 1.2 times pre-COVID-19 levels,
respectively, although the recent trend was negatively impacted by the volatile and
uncertain environment linked to geopolitical tensions and inflationary pressures.
383
For a comprehensive view of information related to MREL issuances please refer to Annex 13, section 5
of the impact assessment.
199
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0201.png
Figure 17: ITraxx Europe Financials (SRB dashboard, data until Q3 2022)
Source: SRB MREL dashboard Q3 2022
Beyond the costs of issuing MREL instruments, banks are also bearing costs associated
with the reporting of extensive information to resolution authorities for the preparation or
update of annual resolution plans, MREL calibration and for implementing internal
projects to remove impediments to resolvability. Banks are subject to legal resolution-
related reporting requirements whereby they must provide data in adequate format at pre-
defined cut-off dates. In addition to these established reporting requirements, resolution
authorities have the power to request ad-hoc data from banks, as considered relevant and
needed for carrying out their activity. The Commission’s fitness check on supervisory
reporting, which spanned several legal instruments, found that, in 2017, the costs
associated with reporting of information and potential overlaps among reporting
requirements was on average about 30% of total compliance costs or 1% of the annual
operating costs for a sample of regulated entities
384
.
Other types of costs borne by banks are associated with internal projects aimed at
enhancing their resolvability. Examples of such projects include but are not limited to:
upgrading management information systems (MIS) in order to enable the gathering of
information in a timely fashion to sustain a speedy valuation and other data reporting to
resolution authorities in case of, or in the run up to, resolution; implementing additional
reporting to monitor liquidity needs (inflow, outflows by counterparty, currency, cross
border, etc.); removing impediments to resolvability, for example by ensuring
separability of certain critical functions or business centres or entities, divesting certain
business lines, setting-up a holding company on top of the operating bank, transforming
subsidiaries into branches, or other structural changes that bear important costs.
Such costs may be difficult to quantify and potentially disentangle from other internal
projects implemented by banks, such as in the context of implementing digitalisation
strategies, or operational efficiency and in the absence of a comprehensive survey across
all EU banks.
European Commission (November 2019)
Commission staff working document – Fitness check of EU
Supervisory reporting requirements.
384
200
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0202.png
7.2.2.4. Costs for taxpayers
As illustrated in section 7.1.2.1, available evidence show that the use of significant
amounts of public money from State budget has been necessary to manage past cases of
distressed banks. In this context, we could also speak of a potential redistribution of costs
away from the banks’ senior unsecured creditors who hold financial claims against the
banks, to taxpayers who did not have such financial claims. At the same time, some of
the safety nets financed by the industry (SRF/RF, DGS) remained sometimes idle. This
means that the implementation of the framework has not yet triggered a full mentality
shift from bail-out to bail-in, putting a burden on public finances, and that certain
aspects, such as enhancing access to funding solutions within the resolution framework,
should be reviewed, so as to further reduce recourse to the public budget and ultimately
the cost to the taxpayers.
7.2.2.5. Mutualising national resources of DGS
DGS are managed at national level. This means, that national deposits are covered by
national resources. The JRC quantitative analysis on various depositors protection
designs
385
highlighted that mutualising resources creates synergies that could be
exploited to reduce the target level. Indeed, when mutualising resources, it would be
possible to maintain (or even increase) the current level of depositors’ protection with a
lower target level (i.e. lower contributions from the banking sectors). The more resources
are mutualised the lower the target level could be. Consequently, the cost-effectiveness
of the system is suboptimal and could considerably be improved
386
.
7.2.2.6. Other measures than payout could lead to a better cost-effectiveness
for the DGS
The DGSD allows financing other measures than payout (preventive and alternative
measures) that could be more cost-effective. Indeed, transferring the bank to a buyer in
case of alternative measure would preserve the franchise value better than by selling
assets in a piecemeal approach, thereby minimising the cost for the DGS. Following the
same logic, preventive measures could minimise the costs for the DGS even more than
when the FOLF/insolvency trigger is reached as a result of higher losses.
Even though it is very challenging to calculate the gain of efficiency resulting from
alternative and preventive measures, the EBA analysed data regarding four preventive
measures that tend to confirm the cost-effectiveness of measures other than payout. For
three preventive measures, the national DGS compared the cost of liquidating the bank
with the cost of the preventive measure.
JRC presentation on ‘measuring the effectiveness and the pooling effect of EDIS (CWP of 2 February
2021, slide 15).
386
See also Annex 10 of the impact assessment– section “Establishment of a common scheme for liquidity
support”
385
201
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0203.png
Box 15: Extract EBA analysis of impact of three preventive measures on DGS
For bank 1, the cost of liquidating the bank was estimated at 32% of the bank’s covered
deposits, while the cost of the preventive measure amounted to 31%.
For bank 2, the cost of the liquidation was estimated at 22% of covered deposits, while
the cost of the preventive measure amounted to 3% of covered deposits.
For bank 3, the cost of the liquidation was estimated between 4 and 9% of covered
deposits, while the cost of the preventive measure amounted to 3% of covered deposits.
Even though these numbers have to be interpreted cautiously as they are based on
national data and methodologies not harmonised at the European level, they indicate that
allowing the DGS to finance other measures than payout could be efficient.
7.2.2.7. Differences in benefits and costs among Member States
The benefits arising from increased crisis preparedness and contingency planning, more
resolvable banks and reduced moral hazard are equally shared among Member States.
However, the incidence of costs varies greatly, mainly because the incentives not to apply
resolution in favour of national insolvency proceedings are Member State-specific. They
are enabled by the particular set-up of the national insolvency regimes, tools and funding
sources available to deal with failures outside the EU resolution framework.
As shown in Annex 9 of the impact assessment, since the application of the CMDI
framework in 2015, measures other than resolution (precautionary measures, preventive
measures and national insolvency proceedings) have been applied to more than 60% of
cases of distressed banks. The public aid resulting from these operations amounted to
EUR 58.2 bn (of which EUR 28.1 was for liquidity purposes), not counting the amounts
spent by national DGSs or public budgets on preventive measures qualified as private or
market-conform public measures (which do not constitute State aid).
7.3. Relevance
How relevant is the EU intervention? To what extent are the rules still relevant and
how well do the original objectives of the legal instruments correspond to the
current needs within the EU? To what extent do the risks to financial stability
stemming from bank crises continue to require action at EU level? Have new
challenges arisen which were not existent at the time of introduction of the CMDI
framework and which need to be tackled by the framework? How is the absence of a
common guarantee scheme for depositors, in the Banking Union, such as EDIS
affect the relevance of the framework?
202
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0204.png
Summary assessment:
Despite certain important problems identified in this evaluation that need to be
addressed in the legislative review, the relevance of the CMDI framework remains
intact. The evaluation found that the initial policy objectives of protecting financial
stability, reducing the burden on public finances, increasing level playing field in the
single market and protecting depositors remain valid. In particular, the rationale for
completing the Banking Union and implementing its third missing pillar, a common
guarantee for depositors is still valid. The addition of a mutualised safety net such as
EDIS would further boost the framework’s relevance.
The CMDI framework represents one of the EU’s key responses to the global financial
crisis from 2008 and continues to remain very relevant also in today’s context.
Since its implementation, banks and resolution authorities are better prepared and
equipped to deal with crises. Contingency plans are drawn (recovery and resolution
plans) and resolvability assessment cycles carried out each year. Banks have become
more resolvable and are in the process of raising resolution buffers to secure sufficient
internal loss-absorbing capacity and reduce the likelihood of recourse to taxpayer money.
Compared to the period following the global financial crisis, the number of failing banks
has decreased substantially since the implementation of the rules in 2015: Between 2007
and (December) 2014, 112 European banking institutions were subject to restructuring or
orderly resolution with State aid support
387
, while since the entry into force of the
resolution framework, in 2015, the number of distressed banks in need of an intervention
(including precautionary measures or preventive private or market conform public
measures) fell to 33. While this positive outcome cannot be solely attributed to the CMDI
framework (as also other measures have been enacted approximately at the same time,
such as the CRR/CRD, EMIR) it nevertheless contributed to maintaining financial
stability and changing banks’ behaviours in a way that is more closely aligned to social
objectives.
The DGSD improved depositors’ protection and the level playing field. Depositors are
better-informed about their level of protection and the payout process in their Member
State, which enhances their confidence in the banking system. The introduction of the
risk-based contributions improved the level playing field, as the banks contribute to the
DGS funds based on their risk profile. Even though the methodology for calculating the
risk-based contributions is not fully harmonised among Member States, it is framed by an
EBA guideline, which aims to ensure some level of convergence.
Yet, the implementation of the CMDI framework is not yet complete. The 2019 Banking
package is being implemented and operationalised, related level-2 measures are being
finalised and the transitional period for banks to comply with their MREL buffers runs
387
European Commission (February 2015)
Competition policy brief
-
State aid to European banks:
returning to viability.
203
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
until 2024. The RF/SRF and DGS funds are also expected to reach their target level by
2024, as well as a common backstop to the SRF to be provided by the ESM.
Despite certain important problems identified in this evaluation that need to be addressed
in the legislative review, the relevance of the framework remains intact. The initial policy
objectives of protecting financial stability, reducing the burden on public finances,
increasing level playing field in the single market and protecting depositors remain valid
(see also Chapter 6 of this Evaluation,
Section
“State
of play of the common deposit
guarantee scheme in the Banking Union”).
The COVID-19 shock struck European economies at a time when the Banking Union is
still incomplete. As its impact may be increasingly felt, the COVID-19 crisis may put to
the test the viability of the post-financial crisis framework and exacerbate the pre-
existing challenges and vulnerabilities of the banking sector. Judging by the data
available to date, the increase in the resilience of the sector, combined with the flexibility
provided by supervisors and regulators to banks has helped them be part of the solution
to the crisis and continue financing households and businesses, albeit at a declining rate
following the start of the pandemic.
7.4. Coherence
How coherent is the EU intervention? To what extent are rules on the recovery and
resolution of banks and depositor protection in the BRRD/SRMR/DGSD coherent
as a framework, but also with provisions in other pieces of relevant legislation or
communications?
204
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0206.png
Summary assessment:
This evaluation assessed the overall internal coherence of the framework
(BRRD/SRMR/DGSD), as well as its coherence with provisions in other pieces of
relevant legislation or Communication, in particular, State aid rules, national insolvency
rules, the Capital Requirements Directive (CRD), AML Directive, and Payment
services and e-money Directives.
Regarding internal coherence, the evaluation found that there is room for improvement,
in particular as regards certain important BRRD provisions, such as the EIMs that are
not replicated in the SRMR. Internal inconsistency issues are also found to be present,
as regards provisions in the BRRD and DGSD concerning the access to DGS funding
for distressed banks, as well as, in the misalignment between control and liability, i.e.
the centralised SRM governance architecture
versus
the national funding of measures
respectively.
Regarding coherence with provisions in other pieces of relevant legislation or
Communication, the evaluation found that there is also scope for improvement, notably
vis-à-vis:
(i) the State aid rules in what concerns the conditions to access funding to
support tools outside resolution; (ii) the interaction between national insolvency
features and resolution, in particular with respect to triggers and hierarchy of claims and
strengthening predictability and legal clarity in cross-border cases; (iii) the coherence
with the CRD/SSMR, in particularly with regard to early intervention measures; (iv) the
AMLD, in particularly with regard to clarifying the roles and responsibilities of the
DGS and other stakeholders (insolvency practitioner, Financial Intelligence Unit, failed
institution) during a payout and strengthening their cooperation and exchange of
information; and (v) the Payment services and e-money Directives, and their interaction
with the DGSD, in particularly with regard to strengthening the protection by the DGSs
of client funds held by non-bank financial institutions such as payment and e-money
institutions or investment firms, which varies from one Member State.
7.4.1. Internal coherence: BRRD/SRMR/DGSD
The provisions constituting the three pieces of legislation evaluated are strongly inter-
related, which makes their coherence key in the overall functioning of the framework.
First, when assessing the internal coherence between the BRRD and SRMR, it is
important to note the intention behind their closely linked construction. The BRRD
created a harmonised recovery and resolution framework for the Union, applicable in all
Member States through transposition of the respective rules in the national laws and
regulations. The SRMR, in addition to creating the SRB and the SRF, laid down uniform
rules and procedures for the resolution of the entities established in euro area Member
States and in Member States, which chose to join the Banking Union. The SRMR, which
adapts the rules and principles of BRRD to the specificities of the SRM, is directly
applicable in those participating Member States. While many BRRD provisions have an
equivalence in the SRMR, particularly where needed for the purposes of granting specific
powers to the SRB, not all BRRD provisions were replicated in the SRMR. Those BRRD
205
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0207.png
provisions, as transposed by Member States, continue to be applicable in so far as they do
not conflict with the SRMR.
However, certain provisions are only found in the BRRD and applicable through national
transposition. The EIM is an example of such a set of such provisions. As described
under the effectiveness criterion (under the third objective), the choice for the legal
implementation of these provisions and the close interaction with CRD provisions on
supervisory powers are not conducive to a coherent application.
Second, the coherence between the BRRD/SRMR and the DGSD has also been
evaluated. As described under the effectiveness criteria, the coherence issues relate to:
insufficiently clear conditions to access DGS funding in resolution as per Article 109
BRRD, inconsistent access conditions to DGS funding as preventive measures and
national insolvency proceedings, where feasible, under Articles 11(3) and 11(6) DGSD
respectively.
Another potential incoherence between the resolution and depositor protection legislation
is due a misalignment between control and liability, i.e. the centralised SRM governance
architecture
versus
the national funding of measures respectively. The application of the
CMDI rules in the Banking Union led in the past to situations where the SRB decided
that the resolution of the bank was not in the public interest (by delivering a negative
PIA), triggering its entry into insolvency and with support from funding at national level
(DGS payout or alternative measures). Such a nationalisation of measures in the Banking
Union would be mitigated by the existence of a central mutualised fund such as EDIS.
The lack of EDIS contributes therefore to weakening the coherence within the
framework, as potentially insufficient DGS funds at national level are unlikely to address
the need for solid and reliable contributions to resolution funding under BRRD/SRMR.
7.4.2. Coherence with the 2013 Banking Communication (State aid rules)
As shown also in section 7.1.2.3, the coherence between the CMDI framework and the
State aid rules could be further improved, most prominently in what concerns conditions
to access funding to support tools outside resolution. The focus should be on avoiding
unwanted divergences with access to funding in resolution, to avoid risks of moral hazard
and promote a more consistent approach to the management of bank failures, including in
terms of increased level playing field at EU level. A separate process to assess the need
for a review of the State aid rules will be ongoing in parallel to the review of the CMDI
framework.
388
7.4.3. Coherence with national insolvency regimes
As described in section 7.1.3.5, the coherence between the CMDI framework and
national insolvency regimes could also benefit from further improvements. Some specific
areas include the interaction between national insolvency features and resolution, in
particular with respect to triggers. The legal “limbo” situation that may occur in practice
could be mitigated.
388
See section 5.2 in chapter 5 of the impact assessment.
206
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0208.png
Moreover, the problems identified around the lack of legal certainty in cross-border cases
due to NCWO and different hierarchies of claims (for deposits, exclusions from bail-in)
also need to be addressed in the legislative review.
7.4.4. Coherence with prudential rules (Capital requirements Directive (CRD)/
Single Supervisory Mechanism Regulation (SSMR))
As mentioned in section 7.1.1.3, the coherence between the CMDI framework and the
CRD in respect of the early intervention measures merits further improvement. The
overlap between the two set of early intervention powers in the BRRD and the
CRD/SSMR creates legal uncertainty and procedural challenges for competent
authorities. This issue was further flagged by the F4F Platform in its opinion on the
CMDI Review, which called for improvements in this area
389
.Also, with respect to the
Banking Union, the provisions on early intervention powers contained in the BRRD are
not replicated in a uniform and directly applicable legal basis, i.e. their application by
competent authorities may hinge on potentially diverging national transposition
measures.
7.4.5. Coherence between the DGSD and Anti-money laundering Directive
(AMLD)
As regards AML/TF issues, the roles and responsibilities of the DGS and other
stakeholders (insolvency practitioner, Financial Intelligence Unit, failed institution, etc.)
during a payout are not sufficiently clear
390
. Many Member States underlined that the
DGSs may face situations where AML suspicions arise and are concerned about repaying
suspicious depositors. They also consider that the DGSs should not be required to carry
out AML assessments because they often lack resources, expertise and information.
Consequently, the cooperation and exchanges of information between DGSs, DGS
designated authorities and anti-money laundering/counter terrorist financing authorities
should be specified. In addition, the tools that could be used if AML concerns arise
should also be clarified. The suspension of payout for suspicious depositors could be
envisaged in order to give time for further analysis. Yet, the full respect of the
fundamental freedoms has to be taken into account, and any withholding of a payout
must be based on more than a mere suspicion in order to prevent possible legal
challenges by the depositors.
7.4.6. Coherence between the DGSD, payment services and E-money Directives
Payment institutions, e-money institutions and investment firms are required to protect
the funds of their clients and have the possibility to do that by placing them in a bank
account.
389
390
See Annex 2.
In this regard, the EBA opinions of August 2019 on eligibility of deposits, coverage level and
cooperation between DGSs and of 23 October 2019 on DGS payouts, highlighted the need for several
clarifications of the Union legal framework. On 11 December 2020, the EBA published another opinion on
the interplay between the directives on money laundering and terrorist financing (AMLD) and on deposit
guarantee schemes (DGSD).
207
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0209.png
The Payment Services and the E-money Directives contain provisions applicable to
protect the client funds held by payment and e-money institutions. Article 10 of the
Payment Services Directive regulates the safeguarding requirements for payment
institutions. Under this provision, the latter shall safeguard the funds received from the
payment service users for the execution of payment transaction either by depositing them
in a separate account in a credit institution, by investing in secure liquid low-risk assets or
covering by an insurance policy. Similar safeguarding requirements apply to e-money
institutions. Investment firms are required to place promptly the received client funds into
an account opened with a credit institution, unless they choose a different way to
safeguard the funds. However, the protection by the DGSs of these client funds held by
non-bank financial institutions such as payment and e-money institutions or investment
firms varies from one Member State to another.
The DGS protects persons that are absolutely entitled to the sums held in an account.
Article 7(3) DGSD provides that where the depositor is not absolutely entitled to the
sums held in an account, the person who is absolutely entitled shall be covered by the
DGS provided that such persons have been identified or are identifiable. This provision
clearly applies to the beneficiary accounts held for example by notaries. However,
Member States do not consistently apply this provision as concerns the client funds of
non-bank financial institutions on beneficiary accounts.
This lack of consistent application appears due to other provisions in the regulatory
framework. Under Article 5(1)(d) and (e) DGSD, deposits by financial institutions and
investment firms are excluded from repayment by a DGS. However, under Article 5(1)(a)
DGSD, deposits by credit institutions are excluded from protection when they are ‘on
their own behalf and for their own account’ and ‘subject to Article 7(3)’. Under the latter
provision, the client funds of credit institutions are eligible for protection. According to
recital 29 DGSD, ‘electronic money and funds received in exchange for electronic money
should not be treated as a deposit and fall outside the scope of the [DGSD]’.
Besides, in view of developments in innovative financial services and required changes in
the regulatory framework, their safeguarding is of increasing importance to foster clients’
trust towards nonbank financial institutions. The lack of protection by a deposit guarantee
scheme (DGS) of such client funds could be critical for depositors and Fintech providers
if bank failures occur. The relevant issue was also flagged by the F4F Platform in its
opinion on the CMDI Review, which called for improvements in this area
391
. Based on
preliminary assessment, the size of client funds of payment and e-money institutions
seems to constitute only a small portion of covered deposits
392
.
391
392
See Annex 2.
Based on information from a limited number of Member States collected in the Commission services’
survey of 5 December 2019, the client funds of payment and e-money institutions do not exceed 3% of
covered deposits.
208
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0210.png
7.5. EU added-value
What is the EU-added value of the intervention?
Compared to the previous national approaches, to what extent have the provisions
of CMDI framework (BRRD/SRMR/DGSD) helped improve the functioning of
the single market in banking, contributed to financial stability and increasing the
level playing field among banks, and consumer confidence taking into account the
inherent cross-border nature of banking in the EU;
How does the gap of the third missing pillar of the Banking Union (common
depositor protection) affect the EU-added value of the framework?
Summary assessment:
Overall, the CMDI framework has clear added value by providing a harmonised and
comprehensive crisis management framework. In the absence of the framework,
national solutions would prevail, impacting the single market in banking and
exacerbating risks to financial stability, contagion, uneven playing field as well as
worsening the sovereign-bank feedback loop.
The DGSD harmonised the main elements of depositor protection by DGS, which was
crucial for maintaining financial stability and promoting depositor confidence across the
EU. However, the assessment suggests that a number of discrepancies in depositor
protection across Member States (owing to the presence of a range of national options
and discretions in the DGSD), are still observed and may need to be tackled, as they
could undermine the confidence in the financial safety nets. Nevertheless, the overall
outcome in tackling these challenges would still be sub-optimal for the Banking Union
in the absence of a mutualised safety net such as EDIS.
The EU-value added of the CMDI framework is undeniable. In a counterfactual where
crisis management would be handled purely at national level, all the problems described
in this evaluation would be exacerbated and additional issues impacting the single market
in banking would emerge. This would have consequences not only from the perspective
of risks to financial stability, contagion and unlevel playing field, but also potentially
impair business in going concern by cross-border banks, deepening market
fragmentation. The issue of unlevel playing field is also present in relation to smaller
banks, which may be handled under national insolvency proceedings, subject to a
negative PIA. Evidence has shown (see section 7.1.2.3 of the evaluation) that the
available national procedures may leave room for arbitrage and incentivise authorities to
resort to solutions outside resolution with less stringent conditions to access funding.
This creates an unlevel playing field between “purely national banks” and cross-border
operating banks that are acting on the same domestic market, but also between Member
States in a situation where banks are treated differently or taxpayer money is used in one
Member State, while it is not in another. Moreover, national solutions, if left to be used,
without proper safeguards, could worsen the sovereign-bank link and undermine the idea
behind the Banking Union.
209
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0211.png
Furthermore, the DGSD covered a gap that existed in legislation (i) by harmonising the
coverage, scope and eligibility of depositors, and of payout delays and (ii) by ensuring
that credit institutions operating in more than one Member State are subject to the same
requirements concerning DGS. In this context EU action is crucial to maintain financial
stability, ensure a level playing field, avoid unwarranted compliance costs for cross-
border activities and thereby promote further integration within the internal market.
Without harmonising the financing of DGS, depositor confidence could not have been
maintained. Nevertheless, discrepancies in depositor protection across Member States –
for example in terms of the scope of protection and payout processes – are observed and
may undermine the confidence in the financial safety nets. These discrepancies emerge
from a range of national options and discretions that the DGSD provided for and which
were implemented to a different degree.
However, even if addressing all shortcomings of the existing legislative initiatives found
by this evaluation, the overall outcome would still be sub-optimal in the absence of
EDIS. Having a mutualised safety net, alongside the SRF in the Banking Union would
contribute to alleviating in a credible manner some of the problems identified, in
particular in the funding solutions, robustness of DGS protection, level playing field and
weakening the bank-sovereign loop.
8.
C
ONCLUSIONS AND LESSONS LEARNT
8.1. Conclusions
The evaluation found that the CMDI framework brought benefits to society, in particular
through enhanced crisis preparedness and planning, reduced systemic risk and moral
hazard, increased market discipline, more resilient banks capable of absorbing losses in
case of distress and depositor protection. Yet, significant gaps remain which need to be
addressed.
In terms of effectiveness, the framework has partially achieved two out of its four
overarching objectives, while the others have not been achieved in a satisfactory manner,
except in a limited number of cases. More specifically, the framework partially achieved
its objectives of containing risks to financial stability and protecting depositors, but it
failed to achieve other key overarching objectives, notably facilitating the functioning of
the single market, including by ensuring level playing field, and minimising recourse to
taxpayer money. In a significant number of cases, the fulfilment of objectives cannot be
directly attributed to the framework, but to the application of tools at national level,
outside of resolution and with recourse to public budgets (i.e. taxpayer’s funds). The
management of bank failures differed across Member States, depending on the existing
national regime, which raises questions about the coherence of the framework, resulting
in sub-optimal outcomes for level playing field and the single market in banking.
In terms of efficiency, the evaluation found that the CMDI framework is not sufficiently
cost-effective. On one hand, the main benefits of the framework include enhanced crisis
preparedness, contingency planning and the disciplining influence that the existence of
the framework exerts on banks and markets. On the other hand, the implementation and
operationalisation of the CMDI framework came with significant costs for the banking
industry, Member States, resolution authorities. Yet despite the costs, the resolution
210
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0212.png
framework and its tools and powers have been scarcely used in practice, especially in the
Banking Union under the SRMR. The SRF funding has remained idle so far and beyond
the losses absorbed by the banks, DGS funds, often backed by public funds have been
used. In addition, the use of public funding in recent cases of bank failures showed a
redistribution of costs from banks’ senior unsecured creditors to the taxpayers, despite
scrutiny on such usage of public funds through the EU State aid rules. Furthermore,
available evidence suggests that these costs are uneven between Member States, as
national requirements and practices diverge widely.
From a coherence perspective, further improvements are necessary to ensure a better
internal interaction and consistency between the various pieces of legislation forming the
CMDI framework, but also between the CMDI framework and State aid rules (most
prominently in respect of conditions to access funding to support tools outside
resolution), the prudential rules (Capital Requirements Directive (CRD) and the Single
Supervisory Mechanism (SSMR)) in what concerns the early intervention measures
(EIMs), the Anti-Money Laundering Directive (AMLD), the Payment Services Directive
and the E-money Directive in what concerns interactions with the DGSD.
The framework remains very relevant and adds EU value because crisis management
cannot be left to the unharmonised national proceedings without consequence on public
finances, the bank-sovereign nexus, level playing field, proportionality, convergence,
equal treatment of stakeholders and operational efficiency of banking operations. This is
particularly relevant for cross-border cases but not only. The addition of a mutualised
safety net such as EDIS would further boost the framework’s relevance and EU-value
added.
8.2. Lessons learnt
The following points summarise the lessons learned in this targeted evaluation in terms of
the main areas for improvement in the CMDI framework.
The CMDI framework was designed to avert and manage the failure of credit institutions
of any size while protecting depositors and taxpayers. This evaluation concludes that the
application of the framework brought important benefits in terms of maintaining
financial stability, mainly through more robust crisis preparedness and contingency
planning, enhanced banks’ resolvability, including through the build-up of resolution
buffers and pre-funded deposit guarantee and resolution funds, improved market
discipline and curbed moral hazard. The implementation of the framework significantly
improved depositor protection and contributed to boosting, overall, consumer confidence
in the EU banking sector.
Yet, the practical application failed to achieve some important objectives or achieved
them only partially. Experience with the application of the EU bank CMDI framework
from 2015 until now reveals that there is scope to improve its functioning in the
following identified areas for improvement.
Insufficient legal certainty and predictability in the management of bank failures
The resolution framework introduced strategies, powers and tools to restructure
failing banks while protecting depositors, financial stability and tax payers.
211
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
However, so far this framework was only scarcely applied, in particular in the
Banking Union under the SRMR. Evidence shows that other tools have been
more frequently used such as insolvency proceedings involving DGS funds, or
precautionary recapitalisation or measures to prevent the failure of the bank
altogether.
The problem is not so much the variety of tools to manage failing banks or to
intervene before failure but rather that the conditions to activate such measures
vary substantially, are sometimes not fully clear or leave room for arbitrage. In
addition, when external funding is used to support such measures, the
requirements to access such funding are very different and, more specifically,
funding outside resolution is generally more easily accessible than in resolution,
in particular for certain banks.
First, as regards, preventive measures (which are national option under the
DGSD), the current legislative text does not provide adequate clarity on
safeguards and conditions which are necessary for ensuring that such
interventions are sufficiently sound from a financial perspective, will interact
correctly with the FOLF determination and would not impinge excessively on the
DGS’ resources. Similarly, in relation to the precautionary measures under the
BRRD, despite the safeguards foreseen and applied under the BRRD, it occurred
that two banks benefitted from public support in the form of precautionary
liquidity on grounds,
inter alia,
of being declared solvent by the supervisor, only
months before being assessed as FOLF. The review could take stock of the
already adjusted approach developed by the Commission and authorities involved
in such situations, based on past experience and improve the clarity of the
relevant legal provisions as well as enhance the predictability and consistency in
the use of such measures going forward.
Second, regarding the EIM, the assessment has shown that they have rarely been
applied though forming an integral part of the continuum of measures in the
framework. Improvements in this area could reduce the overlap of the EIM with
the supervisory powers provided in the BRRD (and also mirrored in the SRMR)
in order to reduce legal uncertainty and procedural challenges for competent
authorities in their application. In addition, some aspects relating, to the
governance structure and the degree of cooperation and exchange of information
between competent and resolution authorities could help in improving the
timeliness of the FOLF determination, which, is key in ensuring a smooth
continuum between going and gone concern.
Third, the divergent application and interpretation of the different factors relevant
for the PIA and the observed very restrictive application of the test in the Banking
Union so far, may not fully reflect the intention of the legislation. In particular,
the evaluation found that aspects of the PIA relating to (i) the impact on financial
stability; (ii) the assessment of critical functions; and (iii) limiting the use of
external sources of funding require further clarification.
Fourth, the current framework could introduce more clarity in Article 32b BRRD
in order to address any residual risk with standstill situations whereby a failing
212
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0214.png
bank for which there is no public interest in using resolution, can also not be
placed in insolvency because the trigger to initiate the national insolvency
proceedings has not been met.
Finally, feedback and evidence has shown that certain divergences, in the
hierarchy of claims remaining in national laws governing bank insolvency
proceedings, in particularly, when it comes to the ranking of ordinary unsecured
claims, other deposits and exclusions from bail-in, creates the potential for
uneven treatment of creditors, including depositors, in resolution and in
insolvency. Such divergences have the potential to create uneven playing field in
the single market. It also complicates the NCWO assessment especially for cross-
border groups including among jurisdictions participating in the Banking Union.
Ineffective funding options and divergent access conditions in resolution and
insolvency
The CMDI framework introduced a requirement for banks to hold sufficient loss
absorbing and recapitalisation capacity (MREL), in order to ensure that banks are
able to bear their own losses (and recapitalisation needs depending on the
foreseen strategy) and, where that is not sufficient, that they can fulfil the
conditions for accessing complementary financing in the form of resolution
funding if needed.
However, feedback and evidence shows that some banks are facing structural
issues in building up their MREL buffers and considering their specific liability
structure, certain deposits would need to be bailed-in in order to access the
resolution fund, which may raise financial stability concerns and operational
feasibility in view of the economic and social impact in a number of Member
States.
In addition, the current framework could provide more legal certainty and clarity
in areas related to the conditions for the use of DGS funding in resolution (which
has never been used in practise) as well as regarding the divergent access
conditions to DGS funding in resolution and insolvency, which affect negatively
the predictability of the framework.
There may be a need to further re-assess the DGS’ super preference as it creates
limitations to the possibility for the DGS to provide funding both in resolution
and in insolvency.
In the Banking Union, the resources accumulated in the SRF have remained idle,
while the recourse to DGS (funded by the domestic banking sector only) was
more frequent and in some cases complemented by public funds. Access to
common safety nets would appear asymmetric for some banks in the absence of
EDIS.
Uneven and inconsistent depositor protection
Depositor protection is central to the CMDI framework. The coverage level
contributes to the effectiveness of the DGSD framework and to depositors’
213
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
confidence, as it protects almost all deposited amounts and a very large part of the
depositors’ wealth. However, owing to existing ONDs in the DGSD, the
framework is not consistently applied across the EU, leading therefore, to uneven
results in depositor protection in the Member States.
Indeed, in terms of scope of protection, the framework could be improved by
addressing divergences, existing in the coverage level of temporary high
balances. Improvements in the availability of alternative funding arrangements,
which could be relied on in case the DGS were depleted, could further help in
boosting depositor confidence.
Beyond this lack of harmonisation in national rules and their application,
depositor protection and confidence in the Banking Union could be undermined
in case of asymmetric shocks, to which national schemes remain vulnerable.
The introduction of an appropriate mutualised safety net (e.g. EDIS) – could help
in alleviating the vulnerabilities of national DGSs and delivering equal treatment
of all depositors.
214
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0216.png
A
NNEX
6: O
VERVIEW OF DEPOSIT INSURANCE ISSUES COVERED
IN THE IMPACT ASSESSMENT
The DGSD constitutes a minimum harmonisation framework, with several features of
maximum harmonisation. Since its adoption in 1994, it is subject to its third revision
393
.
The current text sets a uniform level of protection for deposits
394
throughout the Union
based on common requirements for the funding mechanisms of DGSs and the
introduction of risk based contributions. The harmonised coverage of EUR 100 000
applies “per depositor per bank”
395
. The latter is complemented with a minimum DGS
funding target level of 0.8% covered deposits (to be reached by 2024), improved access
to DGSs and information disclosure for depositors, as well as rules for cross border
cooperation between DGSs. This set of rules contributed to eliminating market
distortions. However, the DGSD also contains more than 22 ONDs to accommodate for
various national specificities
396
.
The DGSD also provided two specific mandates to the EBA to issue guidelines for
specifying
methods for calculating contributions
and
payment commitments
to ensure
level playing field. Throughout the years, the EBA also issued on its own initiative a
number of other guidelines that have proven beneficial for a consistent application of the
DGSD and have become an essential part of the framework
397
. This annex details the
elements highlighted in the impact assessment concerning the review of the DGSD. It
leverages on the four EBA opinions, additional analysis (e.g. CEPS study, DG JRC’s
reports) and the transposition check.
1.
P
ROBLEM DEFINITION
The EBA, in cooperation with the DGSs and designated authorities in the EU and the
EEA, assessed the progress towards the implementation of the DGSD in accordance with
the mandate under Article 19(6) of the DGSD. It also took stock of the experience with
the application of the DGSD and analysed policy options to address the identified issues.
The EBA saw no need for changes of the key features such as the coverage or target
levels. However, it proposed a number of improvements of various other aspects of the
depositor protection, as listed in Section 1.2. The EBA’s suggestions aimed to improve
the level playing field for depositors and to enhance depositor payouts as well as the
functioning and funding of the DGS. In addition, the EBA analysis underlines that some
of the ONDs in the DGSD lead to divergent treatment of depositors across Member
393
European Commission (2009 and 2014),
Directive 2009/14/EC of 11 March 2009, Directive
2014/49/EU of 16 April 2014.
394
See also footnote 57.
395
The limit of EUR 100 000 applies to the aggregate deposits of a depositor in the same credit institution
irrespective of the number of deposits, the currency and the location in the Union.
396
See Chapter 1, Section
Error! Reference source not found..
397
EBA (2016),
Guidelines on stress tests of DGSs under Directive 2014/49/EU, Guidelines on
cooperation agreements between DGSs.
The EBA (2021) published a
Consultation paper on guidelines on
the delineation and reporting of available financial means.
215
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0217.png
States and makes the case for further convergence. The approach of the EBA consisted in
either proposing concrete recommendations or setting out the available policy options for
further clarification.
In addition, the revised DGSD could also include references to non-legislative initiatives,
such as the EBA guidelines. This would, in principle, introduce no substantial new
requirements beyond what is already in place and followed by Member States’
authorities, while limiting the risk of non-compliance or legal challenges.
2.
W
HAT ARE THE AVAILABLE POLICY OPTIONS
?
Table 4: Policy options for the DGSD review
Option label
Option 1:
Do nothing
Option 2:
Follow EBA
advice
Option description
This is the baseline. It would imply not following the EBA’s suggestion
and, hence, envisage no change to a specific provision of the DGSD.
Option 2 would imply either following a specific recommendation of the
EBA or, where the EBA invited the Commission to clarify a provision,
proposing a way forward.
Table 5
sets out the issues proposed for the review as well as the selected policy options.
The latter are either technical improvements or amendments that may affect the currently
applicable deposit protection across the EU Member States. All policy choices take into
account the EBA’s suggestions and the subsequent feedback received from Member
States’ experts in the context of the EGBPI as well as, where available, other analytical
evidence (JRC’s analysis, CEPS study, public consultation, F4F Platform opinion).
Table 5: Issues proposed for the review
Policy
options
1
1.
Clarify the definition of deposits which includes:
- the concept of ‘normal banking transaction’
- the treatment of structured deposits
- the treatment of dormant accounts
Clarify the rules on unavailable deposits which includes:
- the treatment of deposits that are unavailable because of reasons not directly related to
the financial circumstances of the credit institution;
- the concept of ‘current prospect’ of the credit institution to repay deposits and the link
to supervisory moratoria;
Clarify the treatment of DGS payouts with money laundering or terrorist financing (ML/TF)
concerns in consistency with the rules set out in the AMLD which also includes:
- the repayment of depositors not previously identified ‘through no fault of their own’
Clarify the protection of client funds of financial institutions such as payment and e-money
institutions or investment firms in consistency with the rules set out in the Payment Services
Directive
Revise the approach to temporary high balances which includes:
- aligning the level of coverage and the duration for depositor claims for temporary high
balances across EU Member States;
- clarifying the scope of protection of temporary high balances regarding real estate
transactions;
- increase depositors’ awareness about the protection of temporary high balances
2
x
x
2.
x
3.
x
4.
x
5.
x
216
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0218.png
6.
7.
Revise the protection of deposits of public authorities
Revise operational aspects of DGS payouts related to timelines for repayment which includes
-
repayment of beneficiary accounts
-
end of the payout period
8. Improve depositor information
9. Improve the cross-border cooperation between DGSs which includes:
-
enabling the home DGS to repay depositors at branches directly if it is ‘at least as easy’
as in the currently applicable procedure;
-
clarifying the treatment of passported services without having established branches;
-
revising the rules on the transfer of contributions in the event that a credit institution
changes its affiliation to DGS.
10. Revise the approach to set-off of liabilities fallen due
11. Clarify the definition of available financial means which include:
-
the reporting of the borrowed resources;
-
the administrative fees, funds recovered in insolvency, income from investments and
unclaimed repayments;
-
irrevocable payment commitments.
1.
-
the conditions around the cancellation of payment commitments
x
12. Clarify the rules on DGS funding sources and the related investment strategy which includes:
- the sequence in the use of DGS funding sources and the related investment strategy;
- the use of alternative funding arrangements.
13. Clarify the use of DGS funds for alternative uses other than payouts, including the least cost test.
14. Assess the adequacy of the definition of low risk assets
15. Explore the merits of the use of failed institutions’ assets for a DGS payout
16. Clarify the reference date for covered deposits data for the calculation of the target level in 2024
17. Clarify the treatment of third country branches which includes:
- requiring the third country branches of non-EU credit institutions to join an EU DGS,
with possible derogations
- clarifying the deposits of the third country branches of EU/EEA credit institutions
located outside the EU/EEA are not protected by the DGSD
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
3.
W
HAT ARE THE IMPACTS OF THE OPTIONS AND HOW DO THEY COMPARE
?
This section provides only a high-level summary of the comparison of options, as the
EBA assessed the options in detail (including quantitatively when relevant).
3.1. Option 1: Do nothing and maintain the current provisions
This is the status quo. In view of the feedback from the EGBPI on the EBA’s suggestions
on
issue 1
and
14,
no change is considered necessary to the applicable DGSD provisions
to be interpreted in line with recent case law
398
. Option 1 would also seem suitable
concerning the use of failed institutions’ assets for a payout as a new tool in the DGSD
(issue 15)
because of limited evidence to assess its costs and benefits. While this tool
seems available in two Member States, there is a low likelihood that a failed institution
would have important amount of liquid assets to pay depositors in the DGS’ stead.
Where a DGS would lack sufficient financial means, the presence of the common scheme
would achieve the same policy objective.
3.2. Option 2: Follow the EBA advice
398
The EU CJEU has clarified the meaning of the concept ‘normal banking transactions’ in the judgment
of 22 March 2018 (Joined cases C- 688/15 and C- 109/16 Anisimovienė and Others v. Snoras).
217
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0219.png
Option 2 would improve the depositor protection, while clarifying the existing provisions
to remedy the application issues. Lack of clarity also exists in the interplay between
DGSD rules and other sectoral legislation (see sections
Error! Reference source not
found.
and 7.4.6).
3.2.1. Treatment of structured deposits and dormant accounts
Issue
The EBA identified the lack of clarity and inconsistent application regarding the
treatment of the structured deposits under Article 4(1)(43) of MiFID II
399
and of the
dormant accounts. Both issues appear relatively immaterial but, if encountered, may
create operational difficulties. Notably, the market size for structured deposits seems
small
400
.
Analysis
In relation to dormant accounts, the best approach would be to clarify that DGSs are
required to aggregate the deposits on multiple accounts of a depositor if at least one of
them is active. In addition, the revised framework would modify the current rule that
prevents a DGS from repaying dormant account below a certain administrative threshold.
In principle, the DGSs should be in the position to repay also a dormant account because,
in practice, this may be less costly. The depositor should be entitled to request the
repayment of his/her dormant account, even if it is below an administrative cost.
3.2.2. Unavailable deposits
Issue
The key task of a DGS is to protect depositors against the consequences of the
insolvency of a credit institution. In this regard, authorities are required to determine
unavailable deposits where the credit institution is unable for reasons directly related to
its financial circumstances to repay the deposit
401
. The EBA pointed out a number of
instances where depositors were unable to withdraw their deposits for reasons other than
liquidity issues (e.g. Anti-Money Laundering/Combating the Financing of Terrorism
(AML/CFT) concerns, technical issues). While such cases are likely to remain rare, also
in view of the current efforts to strengthen the AML/CFT framework, the DGSD does
not cater for a solution for depositors unable to access their deposits for a long period in
such rare circumstances.
Analysis
399
Under Article 4(1)(43) MIFID II, structured deposits are deposits defined in Article 2(1)(3) DGSD,
which is “fully repayable at maturity on terms under which interest or a premium will be paid or is at risk,
according to a formula on index or combination of indices, financial instruments, commodities, foreign
exchange rates.”
400
EBA (January 2019),
EBA report on cost and past performance of structured deposits.
401
Article 2(1)(8)(a) DGSD provides: “the relevant administrative authority have determined that in their
view the credit institution concerned appears to be unable for the time being, for reasons which are directly
related to its financial circumstances, to repay the deposit and the institution has no current prospect of
being able to do so”.
218
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
The subsequent feedback from the EGBPI supported retaining the current responsibility
of the DGSs solely for cases where the credit institution has insufficient liquidity to repay
the deposits. While the DGSD already provides for stringent rules to make a
determination of unavailable deposits within a short timeline, it is somewhat part of an
authority’s administrative discretion to assess the lacking access to deposits as a
‘financial circumstance’ preventing the credit institution to repay. The discussions also
implied that Member States handle similar cases differently, sometimes triggering the
DGS and sometimes not irrespective of the depositors (and their inaccessible deposits).
In any case, there is merit to clarify that where the suspension of payment or delivery
obligations (national supervisory moratoria) is not directly related to the financial
circumstances of the credit institution (e.g. AML reasons, sanctions), deposits might not
be unavailable for the purposes of Directive 2014/49/EU. To maintain depositor trust and
confidence in the banking sector and maintain financial stability, it is appropriate to
require Member States to ensure that depositors have access to an appropriate daily
amount from their deposits, should they be made inaccessible due to a suspension of
payments for reasons other than leading to depositor payout.
3.2.3. DGS payouts with ML/TF concerns
Issue
The EBA identified the lack of explicit provisions regarding the interplay between the
DGSD and AML/CFT rules. These gaps have contributed to the adoption of divergent
approaches across Member States to the treatment of depositors in situations where
ML/TF concerns exist. Consequently, the obligations under the AML/CFT and DGSD
framework were not applied effectively, failing to reconcile their respective objectives,
i.e. to prevent criminals from exploiting the EU’s financial system to launder the
proceeds of their illicit activities and to protect financial stability.
Analysis
The feedback from the EGBPI supported the suggested enhancements of the cooperation
between the respective authorities (also addressed in the review of the AML/CFT
framework) and of the DGS preparedness prior and during payouts. In this view, the
appropriate approach would be to clarify the legal basis for suspending reimbursements
to depositors suspicious of ML/TF, in full respect of fundamental freedoms. Overall, the
clarifications aim to minimise the risk of the situations where ML/TF concerns arise
close to or during DGS payouts. In line with the feedback received, the mandate of DGSs
to repay depositors would remain unchanged. DGSs have no obligations pertaining to the
ML/TF assessment and should bear no liability even in the rare events where ML/TF
concerns are detected after the actual reimbursement.
3.2.4. Protection of client funds
Issue
The client funds are credited to an account of non-bank institutions at a credit institution
on behalf of their clients. Similarly to so-called beneficiary accounts (typically held by
notaries), they are characterised by a high number of ultimately entitled beneficial
owners and a high turnover of funds. The EBA highlighted inconsistent approaches to the
219
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0221.png
DGS protection of such client funds across Member States and suggested clarifications in
consistency with applicable sectoral legislation applicable to investment firms, payment
and e-money institutions.
On 27 October 2021, EBA published the opinion
402
on the treatment of client funds and
other aspects, including on the deposited volumes and potential concentration risk.
Analysis
The subsequent feedback from the EGBPI confirmed the importance of such protection
in the event of the credit institution’s failure. Subject to safeguarding requirements in the
sectoral legislation, this protection would benefit from more convergence with respect to
the moment when such client funds benefit from the DGS protection
403
. It would remove
the discrepancies observed in the protection granted to clients of investment firms,
payment and e-money institutions clients. It would also be consistent with the suggestion
of the F4F Platform for addressing this issue
404
.
Under a bespoke regime applicable for such accounts, DGSs would disburse to the
account holder for the benefit of the client (rather than directly to individual clients)
where necessary and appropriate to preserve the firms’ business continuity and to reduce
administrative burden on the part of DGSs. In addition, the sums of each client in client
accounts would not be aggregated with the sums on its regular deposit accounts. The fact
that depositors are usually neither aware nor in control over the choice of the bank
(selected by the account holder) would, therefore, justify a derogation from the principle
‘per depositor per bank’ whereby deposits are aggregated when calculating a repayable
amount. This policy choice, applied only in some Member States, is more favourable to
the depositors and conscious of the administrative burden, which would otherwise be
likely to increase under alternative policy choices
405
.
3.2.5. Temporary high balances
Issue
Temporary high balances are exceptional and short-lived deposits resulting from certain
life events including money deposited in connection with a real estate transaction, other
social events or insurance benefits. They result in larger balances and benefit from higher
protection.
The EBA highlighted divergent approaches to the temporary high balances across
Member States, notably in the amount and duration of the protection.
406
It noted that,
402
EBA/Op/2021/11
403
Under current legislation, the precise moment when client funds become a deposit varies depending on
the product. While investment firms are required to safeguard such funds promptly, payment and e-money
institution are required to do so no later than by the end of the business day following the day when the
funds were received.
404
See Annex 2.
405
Other alternatives were discussed in the EGBPI in order to ensure optimal DGS protection, e.g.
requiring the account holder to inform clients about the implications of the choice of the bank from the
perspective of DGS protection or placing burden of proof on a client about the inability to choose a
different bank.
406
See CEPS study for their detailed overview; see also evaluation (Annex 5) section 7.1.4.2.
220
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0222.png
based on current experience, the reported claims for this type of repayment were rare (i.e.
on average, one claim per bank failure). Further, it took the view that different cost of
living across Member States did not hinder a harmonised coverage level for covered
deposits. Thus, a different cost of living should not be a hurdle to harmonise the amount
of temporary high balances and for the same duration at 6 months. The EBA also
suggested clarifying other related aspects of the temporary high balances, notably
regarding the funds placed in an account in connection with a transaction to purchase or
sell a private residential property, and the eligibility of legal persons. The EBA also
recommended improving depositor information.
Analysis on temporary high balances
The impact assessment conducted by the EBA focused predominantly on the high
balances in connection with real estate transactions. Conversely, the other types of
balances related to events that serve social purposes and are linked to the life events such
as marriage, divorce, retirement, dismissal, redundancy, invalidity or death as well as
payment of insurance benefits or compensation for criminal injuries or wrongful
conviction, are considered much less material and, absent empirical evidence, also
subject to data limitations.
As regards the temporary high balances related to real estate transactions, the CEPS
study on the ONDs in the DGSD demonstrated the discrepancies in the coverage of
temporary high balances both in terms of coverage level and in term of duration. It also
found that their coverage amount could be harmonised at EUR 500 000.
Table 6: Temporary high balances: coverage level and duration of coverage
Up to EUR 200 000
EUR 200 000 – EUR 500 000
EUR 500 000
EUR 1 000 000 – EUR 10 000 000
unlimited
3 months
BG, CZ,
HR, HU,
LV, PL
FR, NL
6 months
CY, EE
9 months
12 months
RO
ES
EL, LT
BE, DE.
MT
IE
FI, SI
SE
AT
DK, LU
PT, SK
IT
Source: Commission transposition check/CEPS study
The feedback received from the EGBPI showed that a higher number of experts
supported the EBA’s recommendations to harmonise the duration of the protection at 6
months, including those who currently apply shorter timelines. As the EBA has not
proposed a precise amount to be harmonised, the discussions in the EGBPI explored the
identified options based on the CEPS’ analysis. However, a number of experts had
concerns about either lowering or increasing the current protection in their Member State
and the impact on cost neutrality. Hence, some of them preferred retaining the national
discretion. In this view, the additional analysis by the JRC of a possible threshold for
adequate protection largely confirmed the findings of the CEPS study. This analysis also
strived to identify an optimal common coverage amount and duration.
Based on both CEPS’ and JRC’s quantitative analyses, a very high share of temporary
high balances appears lower than EUR 500 000 in all Member States. Therefore, the
221
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0223.png
level of protection higher than EUR 500 000 would not significantly increase the amount
of protected deposits and there is limited risk that depositors could lose protection. In
addition, the best option would be to harmonise the duration of the protection at 6
months
407
because the additional amount of temporary high balances protected would
only be limited under a longer period. A higher number of Member States supported this
policy option, with few exceptions. Therefore, given the political considerations and the
available empirical (low number of claims) and modelling evidence, the best option
would be to provide for a minimum threshold of EUR 500 000 for the period of 6 months
to increase convergence across Member States for the benefit of depositors. It does not
prevent Member States from covering a higher amount of temporary high balances,
though with funds above the target level.
Box 16: Key results of the CEPS’ and JRC’s quantitative analyses
408
Figure 18
shows the sizes of protected THBs depending on different amounts of
coverage level and duration (see also Annex 12).
Figure 18: Average EU impact per coverage level and time of coverage (excluding
EUR 100 000)
Share of Covered Deposits
3%
2%
1%
0%
200 000
300 000
1 month
400 000
3 months
500 000
6 months
600 000
9 months
700 000
800 000
900 000
Upper limit coverage level (EUR)
12 months
Source: JRC Report, Annex 12
Conclusions:
- A very high share of temporary high balances is protected with the coverage level
of EUR 500 000 in the 6-month duration.
- Beyond EUR 500 000, the degree of protection does not significantly increase.
The feedback in the EGBPI was also supportive of clarifications regarding the scope of
the temporary high balances. The revised rules should encompass both funds placed for a
purchase or sale of a private residential property, combined with a specific provision on a
depositor’s burden of proof. While the temporary high balances should be in principle
407
This change would imply a higher duration in nine Member States (which apply a 3-month period) and
a lower duration in eight Member States (which apply a 9- or 12-month period). One Member State applies
a different timeline depending on the type of temporary high balance. See further CEPS study, p. 48.
408
See JRC report ‘Review on temporary high deposits balances related to certain transactions’ p. 6 – 11,
and especially section 4.3 p. 9.
222
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0224.png
limited to natural persons, legal persons would also be eligible for temporary high
balances related to insurance benefits.
Given that such reported claims are rare, improved depositor awareness around this type
of protection would mitigate any residual adverse effects on depositors as a result of
changes to the amount or duration of temporary high balances. These changes, broadly
supported by the EGBPI discussion, would improve depositors’ understanding how to
benefit from optimal deposit protection and encourage them to make the right financial
decisions, rather than leaving high balances above the coverage level on their deposit
accounts
409
.
3.2.6. Protection of public authorities
Issue
Currently, public authorities are excluded from DGS coverage (Article 5(1)(j) DGSD). A
number of Member States protect deposits of local authorities with an annual budget of
up to EUR 500 000 under a national option in Article 5(2) DGSD
410
.
The EBA recommended protecting deposits of all public authorities up to harmonised
coverage level irrespective of their budget. In this respect, the main benefit of this
approach would be the reduced administrative burden for banks and DGSs. The latter are
required to assess the eligibility profile of such depositors and the conditions concerning
the size of their budget. In addition, the EBA also highlighted that, in some Member
States, public authorities also include hospitals, schools or swimming pools, arguably
unsophisticated investors, which benefit from lesser protection compared to large
corporates, many of which are sophisticated investors. Most recently, the lack of
protection of public authorities emerged as an issue in the payout case of the Greensill
bank
411
.
Analysis
A high number of Member States supported the EBA recommendation in the EGBPI but
some also required further analysis. While the deposits of small local authorities, i.e. a
subset of public authorities, appears relatively small (up to 0.1% of covered deposits),
there are data limitations as concerns the total volumes of deposits of the public
authorities.
Nevertheless, the EBA’s qualitative analysis on the pros and cons of the policy options
substantiates revising the current approach, notably to address the lack of rationale for a
different treatment of the public authorities and large corporates and to reduce
409
This is consistent with other policies to increase consumer trust in retail investments, e.g. the
Commission retail investment strategy.
410
According to CEPS study, this option is transposed in seven Member States and the amounts protected
under this provision are limited, ranging between 0.00% and 0.11% of the total covered deposits.
411
According to the
FT,
some public authorities (around 50 municipalities that held up to EUR 500 m with
the lender) had deposits with Greensill bank. The compensation provided by the deposit guarantee scheme
excludes the groups of creditors specified in section 6 of the EinSiG (i.a. public authorities):
German towns
braced for EUR 500 m in losses from Greensill Bank collapse | Financial Times (ft.com)
223
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0225.png
administrative burden for all actors involved. Therefore, the revised rules would cover
public authorities up to EUR 100 000, just as corporates and other depositors.
3.2.7. Operational aspects of the DGS payout
Issue
The EBA recommended revising two aspects related to timeline for repayments. It
suggested replacing the existing 3-month period for repayment of beneficiary accounts
by 20 working days. The revised period would start running since a receipt of required
documentation because DGSs need sufficient time to verify the entitlements of ultimate
beneficiaries. The current period running since the determination of unavailable deposits
did not reflect the administrative needs by the DGSs, particularly when depositors
provide insufficient information to the DGS. Further, national approaches also vary
regarding the end of payout, subject to national option. The EBA considered that such
period should be sufficiently long to protect depositors although the effect of this change
is likely marginal as most reimbursements take place soon after payout
412
.
Analysis
The subsequent feedback from EGBPI supported the clarifications. Many views were in
favour of combining the revised timeline for repayment of beneficiary accounts with a
specific provision to enable DGSs to require the information about the beneficiaries’
entitlement directly from the account holder. This would aim to reduce their
administrative burden. The same reasoning applies to client funds and temporary high
balances. In relation to the end of payout, a higher number of experts supported a period
of 5 years as more beneficial for depositors, while stressing that DGSs should remain
able to subrogate into depositors’ claims in insolvency proceedings.
3.2.8. Depositor information
Issue
The EBA called for improvements of the depositor information sheet, including by
guidelines or regulatory technical standards. It also suggested revising the depositors’
entitlement to withdraw eligible deposits without penalties because of changes to the
credit institution (e.g. mergers, conversions into branches or subsidiaries) that impact
deposit protection. Under a revised setup, while all depositors should be informed about
the changes to a DGS affiliation, at least those depositors whose coverage would be
adversely impacted, should be informed of their right to withdraw their funds without
any penalty up to an amount equal to the lost coverage of deposits.
Analysis
The subsequent feedback from the EGBPI supported the suggestions on the depositor
information sheet and the right to withdraw under Article 16(6) DGSD. The EGBPI also
412
Under Article 9(3) DGSD, Member States may limit the time allowed for depositors to claim
repayment in the event that their deposits were not repaid or acknowledged by the DGS within the usual
deadlines. CEPS study sets out an overview of the currently applicable timelines and showed some periods
may be short.
224
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0226.png
explored the adequacy of regular communication of depositor information on annual
basis. While one expert preferred a disclosure based on actual needs (e.g. upon
concluding the contract and in the event of failure) to reduce costs
413
, the vast majority
supported the EBA’s analysis that the annual information disclosure should not be altered
because of its positive impact for depositor awareness.
3.2.9. Cross-border cooperation between DGSs
Issue
The EBA called for enhancements of the following three aspects. The regime whereby
the host DGS reimburses the depositors in branches on behalf of the home DGS should
be rendered more flexible. Under a revised setup, the home DGS could repay depositors
at branches directly if it is ‘at
least as easy’
as in the current default procedure whereby
the host DGS receives funding from the home DGS, including the compensation for the
costs incurred. Further clarifications would also be suitable for passported services. In the
absence of explicit provisions, the latter are currently treated as any other deposit in the
home Member State. This raises challenges for the home DGSs when liaising with
depositors located in host Member States. Lastly, the transfers of the last annual
contributions in the event that a credit institution changes its affiliation to DGS require a
revision.
Analysis
The subsequent feedback in the EGBPI broadly supported these clarifications, including
developing the revised rules and methodology through regulatory technical standards or
guidelines. It agreed with the objective to address the resulting operational hurdles for
DGSs, including when communicating with depositors located in the host Member
States. The current rules on transfer contributions proved ineffective in the situations
where DGSs transferred no contributions due to different contribution cycles or payment
deadlines, or because the transferring DGSs no longer raise contributions because their
target level was reached
414
. Consequently, they fail to deliver on their intended objective,
i.e. to reflect the potential increase in risk for the DGS receiving a new participating
member .
413
The F4F Platform also recommended, in its opinion on the CMDI review, a disclosure based on actual
needs for reducing the administrative burden. See Annex 2 for further details.
414
According to the EBA’s mapping of DGS’s practices, contributions are raised in monthly, quarterly or
on a semi-annual or annual basis. Similarly, DGSs send out the invoices on different days or always on the
same day in a year, with a maturity period of usually 60 days or longer. Some jurisdictions also specify the
payment date and some do not. As a result of these differences, no contributions were transferred, leaving
the receiving DGS and its participating credit institutions at a disadvantage to cover for the risk of a new
entrant.
225
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0227.png
3.2.10. Set off of liabilities fallen due
Issue
Under Article 7(4) DGSD, depositors obtain a reimbursement irrespective of their
liabilities (e.g. due loan instalments) towards the credit institution that are handled in an
insolvency estate. However, a national option under Article 7(5) DGSD derogates from
this principle. The latter allows a DGS to take into account depositors’ due liabilities
when calculating a repayable amount, if it is possible under statutory and contractual
provisions.
The EBA found that the actual set-off was immaterial from a DGS’ perspective,
involving very small amounts, and conducive to increased administrative burden when
determining the due liabilities and its permissibility e.g. in the contractual documents. It
also suggested improvements to address insufficient information available to depositors
about the set-off. The transposition check also revealed divergent approaches, deducting
the liabilities from either the aggregate deposits or the repayable amount (after the
application of the coverage limit).
Analysis
The feedback from the EGBPI supported the EBA’s suggestions. If this provision were
maintained, it would require clarifications that due liabilities are consistently deducted
from the aggregate deposits as well as the improvements in the depositor information.
The EGBPI also explored the option to remove the set off from the framework in view of
its low materiality and the administrative burden
415
. While the views on this issue were
split
416
, the best option would be to remove this provision. In line with the EBA’s
findings, this approach would also simplify the framework and be consistent with the
objectives pursued in the CMDI review. The provision applies only in the context of
payouts. Its use is already limited and is likely to be even more marginal because of the
intended regulatory changes, prioritising bank exits based on transfers of commercial
relationships (i.e. deposits and related loans) over payouts. Removing this national option
would foster consistent treatment of depositors.
3.2.11. Definition of available financial means
Issue
The EBA highlighted a lack of clarity and divergent national approaches concerning the
treatment of borrowed resources, administrative fees, funds recovered in insolvency,
income from investment and unclaimed payments in the calculation of available financial
means. The clarifications would ensure a more accurate view on the DGS’ financial
position. The EBA further supported clarifying the cancellation and irrevocability of
payment commitments.
415
CEPS study also recommended removing of the provision, in view of low materiality, administrative
burden and lack of practical use (so far in only two Member States).
416
Out of 17 Member States, who transposed the option, 7 experts supported removing it from the
framework and 9 experts preferred to retain it.
226
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
Analysis
In line with feedback from the EGBPI, the best approach would be to report borrowed
resources but exclude them from the calculation of the available financial means. This
change would ensure that they do not count toward the minimum target level, which was
the objective pursued by the EBA. Accordingly, the borrowed resources would be
published in the EBA’s annual reporting to ensure transparency on DGS funding. For the
majority of experts, while administrative fees should be excluded, other funding sources,
such as recovered funds from insolvency, investment income, should be included in the
calculation of available financial means. Based on the feedback received, the
clarifications around the irrevocability of payment commitments aim to increase
convergence across Member States .
3.2.12. Sequence in the use of DGS funding sources and the related investment
strategy
Issue
DGSs reimburse depositors from available financial means in the pre-funded schemes.
They are financed by annual and extraordinary contributions from credit institutions.
Alternative funding arrangements must be in place to obtain short-term funding to meet
claims against those DGSs.
The EBA highlighted a lack of clarity and divergent national approaches as concerns the
sequence of the above DGS funding sources. According to its analysis, there would be
merit for flexibility around the use of the different funding sources subject to a cost and
benefit analysis and a repayment plan. The EBA further noted the absence of concrete
alternative funding arrangements established in some DGSs. Lastly, it also suggested
specific improvements of provisions on investment strategy.
Analysis
The feedback from the EGBPI on the sequence of the use of DGS funding sources was
mixed. While some supported full flexibility, others had more nuanced views. The latter
preferred either a strict sequencing or a certain degree of flexibility, justified by
exceptional circumstances or involving no public resources. In view of this feedback, the
best way forward is to specify that DGSs may use alternative funding arrangements from
private sources before available financial means and funds collected through
extraordinary contributions. Such flexibility would allow DGSs to avoid having to
immediately raise extraordinary contributions where raising such contributions would
endanger financial stability (e.g. in a systemic crisis). Full flexibility is needed also to
allow DGSs to use their funds in the most efficient way and avoid a fire sale of their
assets (available financial means) at the point of crisis. At the same time, funding from
public sources should be constructed as a ‘backstop’ function in line with the principle
of moral hazard that the cost of financing the depositor protection should be first borne
by credit institutions themselves.
227
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0229.png
3.2.13. Use of DGS funds for purposes other than payout
Issue
The EBA pointed out the lack of clarity regarding the cost limitations of preventive and
alternative measures under Article 11(3) and (6) DGSD and the need for several technical
clarifications. It also took the view that the financing of preventive measures alone
should not cause a FOLF determination. It turned out that in some instances those
interventions could be assessed as imputable to the State under the applicable State aid
rules and hence, have the potential to trigger a FOLF determination under the BRRD, and
othes not. The uncertain treatment of DGS interventions financing Article 11(3) DGSD
measures in light of Article 32(4)(d) BRRD raises unlevel playing field concerns.
Analysis
Overall, the current provisions provide for a high-level determination of the least cost
test, subject to inconsistent application
417
. There is no clear methodology under the
current legal framework to calculate this least cost test. The feedback from the EGBPI
supported clarifying the main principles of the least cost test in a Level 1 text and
specifying the technical details in a delegated act. The views were split as regards the
appropriate methodology.
The Commission services set out below the respective findings as regards the application
of preventive and alternative measures and available policy options, taking into account
the EGBPI feedback.
(i)
Preventive measures under Article 11(3) DGSD
Currently, preventive measures are applied for non-failing banks by DGSs including
those IPSs that qualify as DGSs whose interventions comply with the applicable State aid
rules to be qualified as private support (i.e. non-aid). By contrast, if such interventions
amounted to a State aid, they would trigger resolution
418
.
Article 11(3) DGSD provides also a set of safeguards for preventive measures. These aim
to ensure that the intervention (i) is limited in amount, (ii) precedes resolution, and (iii) is
accompanied by adequate commitments and monitoring processes. The available
experience reveals inconsistent approaches across Member States regarding the
conditions around the preventive measures, including their cost limitations. While some
DGSs use the same least cost test for both preventive and alternative measures, others do
not use any least cost assessment at all.
Since the entry of DGSD into force in 2014, preventive measures were applied in five
instances. In all cases, the preventive measures led to a recapitalisation of the bank in line
with its prudential requirements or to an acquisition from a buyer or industrial partner.
Two of these institutions were placed under temporary administration. The period
417
418
See Annex 5, section
Error! Reference source not found..
See Chapter 2, Section
Error! Reference source not found.;
Chapter 5, sections
Error! Reference
source not found.
subsection (b) ‘Divergent access requirement for the resolution fund and for funding
outside resolution’ and 7.1.4.2, Annex 9, see overview of
Error! Reference source not found..
228
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0230.png
between the moment the DGS was informed of the distress situation of the bank and the
conclusion of the case involving the preventive measure ranged from nine to 16 months.
In these instances, the preventive measures were also combined with interventions by
other stakeholders (DGS ‘voluntary fund’, shareholders, acquiring bank/buyer). They
took various forms, e.g. capital injections, guarantees, loans, often aiming to reduce with
capital relief measures the amount needed in core capital and so facilitate the merger with
another bank. As regards the financial impact on the DGS, the final cost of these
operations was not always certain in advance (for instance for guarantees or capital
injection) and had been estimated in the least cost test.
Box 17: Examples of least cost test calculations under Article 11(3) DGSD
419
Based on anonymised information received from the EBA, a detailed least cost test
methodology was applied in three cases.
420
The different consecutive steps applied for
the calculation of the least cost test are explained below:
i)
-
Step 1 aims to calculate the costs of the payout for the DGS.
The direct cost of the payout for the DGS is mainly related to the value of the
assets of the bank in a piecemeal liquidation. The value of the assets of the bank
in liquidation is calculated based on the amount of estimated losses. This amount
represents the funds that could be recovered during the insolvency proceeding.
However, some of these assets will be used to pay (i) the preferred liabilities (i.e.
the liabilities with a higher rank than the covered deposits, like employees or
tax), and (ii) the secured liabilities. The amount of preferred and covered
liabilities are then deducted from the value of the assets in liquidation.
The operational costs related to the payout are also deducted from the value of
the assets (legal costs, valuation expertise and so on).
-
-
Accordingly, the direct cost of the payout for the DGS is calculated by deducting from
the value of assets in liquidation (A), the assets used for paying preferred and secured
liabilities (B), the operational and administrative costs (C), and the amount of covered
deposits (D). A positive result means that the DGS will recover, during the insolvency
proceedings, 100% of its funds. In other words, the direct costs for the DGS, after the
insolvency proceedings, is 0.
Subsequently, indirect costs are estimated
421
. In the cases at hand, the indirect costs
included the opportunity cost for the DGS (i.e. the lack of profitability resulting from the
use of DGS funds), the costs for the member institutions of this DGS that may have to
pay
ex post
contributions, additional funding costs for the banks and financial contagion
effects to risky banks.
ii)
419
Step 2 aims to calculate the cost of the measure.
These examples are for information only and should not be seen as an opinion of the European
Commission. The objective is to illustrate what a least cost test could be, based on an existing methodology
applied on real cases.
420
These cases were notified to the EBA under the Decision of 23 July 2018 on notifications to the EBA
relating to the DGSD.
421
The Commission services do not have at disposal a detailed methodology used to calculate the indirect
costs.
229
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0231.png
The cost of the preventive measure depends on the tools used by the DGS and is a case-
by-case assessment. For instance:
-
Under case A, the DGS injected capital in the bank and then sold the shares for 1
euro to a buyer. The final cost for the DGS was equal to the amount of the
capital injection.
-
Under case B, the DGS also injected capital in the bank but considered that it
would be able to sell the shares with a discount in several years. The final cost
for the DGS was then equal to the amount of the capital injection, minus the
following sale of the shares.
-
Under case C, the DGS provided a guarantee. It is assumed in this case that the
guarantee will be called.
iii)
Step 3 is a comparison between the cost of the payout and the cost of the
measure.
The DGS opted for the less costly option. It appears that, in these cases, the DGS would
not be allowed to finance the measure without the indirect costs and would have been
required to reimburse the depositors.
Table 7: Examples of least cost test calculations
The numbers in this table
Case A
were rescaled for
confidentiality purposes. For
each case, the
proportionality between the
numbers is preserved
Step 1 : calculating the cost of a payout
1.1 Direct costs for the DGS
A. Value of the assets of the 645
bank in a piecemeal
liquidation
B. Preferred and covered 261
liabilities
C. Operational costs
66
D. Amount of covered 300
deposits
E. Direct costs for the DGS A-B-C-D=18
(i.e. A-B-C-D). If positive, Direct costs for the
the amount retained is O.
DGS = 0
1.2 Indirect costs
F. Opportunity costs
15
G. Costs for banks related to 18
the additional contributions
to the DGS
H. Additional cost of 33
funding for other banks
I. Financial contagion effect 30
on other high risk banks
J. Indirect costs (F+G+H+I) 96
(i.e.
15+18+33+30)
1.3 Total cost of the payout
Case B
Case C
884
434
312
64
400
156
48
200
A-B-C-D=108
A-B-C-D=30
Direct costs for the Direct cost for the
DGS = 0
DGS = 0
28
0
14
4
24
36
0
0
88 (i.e. 28+24+36) 18 (i.e. 14+4)
230
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0232.png
K. Cost of the payout (E+J) 96 (i.e. 0+96)
Step 2 : Cost of the preventive measure for the DGS
Preventive measure
DGS
injected
capital,
and
immediately sold the
shares for EUR 1 to
a buyer.
Cost of the preventive
measure for the DGS
Step 3 : Least cost test
Comparison of the cost of
the payout and the cost of
the preventive measure
Source: Commission services.
88 (i.e. 0+88)
DGS
injected
capital
and
assumed to sell the
shares, with a
discount, within 4
years.
Between 8 and 16
18 (i.e. 0+18)
DGS provided a
guarantee to inject
capital.
93
6
Cost of the payout:
96
Cost of the measure:
93
Cost of the payout
: 88
Cost
of
the
measure: 8-16
Cost of the payout
: 18
Cost
of
the
measure: 6
In view of the above experience and as mentioned in Chapter 2, there is scope to improve
the provision, with a view to ensure more clarity and legal certainty on the use of these
measures with a view to preserve DGS financial means, as well as a more consistent
application. It would also be important to ensure that the intervention is granted at a
sufficiently early time, to avoid granting support to a bank that is too close to failure.
Following the feedback from the EGBPI, the following policy options could appear
suitable:
-
applying the same least cost methodology as for any other use of DGS (see
further point (ii));
-
applying a least cost methodology tailored to a specific nature of the preventive
measures;
-
using additional or strengthened criteria to ensure the timeliness of the
intervention and its economic rationale, combined with the least cost test used for
any other use of DGS as an additional safeguard.
The first option would have the benefit of ensuring consistency across different DGS
uses. At the same time, a least cost based on an insolvency counterfactual might fail to
capture all aspects of such a preventive intervention. At the time of a preventive measure,
the bank is meant to be ‘not yet failing’ (or in going concern) and it would not be
possible to know whether, in the event of failure, the bank would go into resolution or
insolvency as reference for the counterfactual in the LCT. Moreover, such a solution
would not improve the necessary safeguards. In particular, the least cost test alone might
not help in ensuring that the DGS intervention is sufficiently timely or based on adequate
economic rationale (other than being less expensive than an insolvency payout or other
counterfactual).
The second option would entail a least cost test that reflects the specific nature of
preventive measures and the type of DGS, e.g. the existence of a statutory or contractual
mandate to intervene. As explained in Annex 10, Box 19, preventive measures are crucial
for IPSs and applying a least cost test before granting support to an IPS member should
231
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
take into account the main IPS functions. This option would also require additional
technical analysis, developed through regulatory technical standards.
The third option, combining the first or second options, could reinforce the criteria to
ensure the timeliness and economic rationale of the intervention. For example, the
revised provision could ensure that the bank is solvent at the time of the intervention and
that there is no prospect of its failure within a certain period in the future. Also, further
conditions could require that the intervention is capable of ensuring the bank’s long term
viability. In addition to such safeguards, it would be sensible that the intervention meets
the least cost test, if compared with an appropriate counterfactual. Such an option would
merit further technical analysis through regulatory technical standards.
Finally, the interaction between this provision and Article 32 BRRD should be clarified.
At present, depending on the qualification of the intervention for State aid purposes,
there is a possibility that some DGSs cannot intervene in a preventive fashion because
the measure would trigger resolution. An option to avoid this problem would be to
explore a similar approach that already applies for precautionary measures, which
constitute an exception to the rule that extraordinary financial support should trigger a
FOLF determination for the bank. The exception is based on the fact that precautionary
measures are granted to solvent banks and under strict conditions (as to the amount for
example). Accordingly, under this approach, even in the event the DGS measures are
qualified as State aid (which is the basis to consider it as extraordinary public financial
support), it would be possible to use them without triggering resolution subject to
required conditions and safeguards.
(ii)
Alternative measures under Article 11(6) DGSD
Alternative measures are normally used for banks where there is no public interest in
resolution and which are to be liquidated under national insolvency proceedings (if
available under national law). In the context of the insolvency proceedings, the DGSs can
finance an alternative measure to payout, such as the transfer of the assets and liabilities
andor a deposit book, from a failing bank to an acquirer to preserve depositors’ access to
covered deposits and, at the same time, limit the destruction of value in a piecemeal
liquidation.
The Commission services were informed of one instance in which a DGS financed
alternative measures. This intervention also involved a least cost assessment,
corresponding to the total amount required to reimburse covered depositors
minus
the
estimated amount of proceeds the DGS would have received from the insolvency estate.
The bank in question was experiencing significant liquidity outflows and facing
difficulties to meet its capital requirements. It was declared failing or likely to fail and
went in insolvency, while searching for a potential buyer who would be interested in a
transfer of the assets and liabilities from the failed bank. The principles of this least cost
assessment are set out below.
232
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0234.png
Box 18: Example of least cost test calculation under Article 11(6) DGSD
422
i) Calculation of the cost of the payout
A. Value of the assets of the bank
B. Preferred liabilities
C. Direct and indirect costs related to the liquidation
D. Covered deposits
Cost of the payout
= A-B-C-D
600
32
150
540
-122
ii) Calculation of the cost of the alternative measure
In order to facilitate the transaction of the assets and liabilities of the failed bank to a
buyer, the DGS compensated the negative value of balance sheet of the failed bank (i.e.
the difference between the value of its assets and the value of its liabilities). This
compensation represented a loss for the DGS, estimated to 90. As the cost of the
transaction (i.e. 90) was lower than the cost of the payout (i.e. 122), the DGS was allowed
to apply the alternative measure.
In line with the feedback from the EGBPI, regulatory technical standards on the least
cost methodology would be developed based on the principles to be set out in the Level 1
text
423
. The principles would align the calculation of the costs for a payout with the
methodology used in the resolution framework based on a so-called valuation 3
424
.
The discussions also explored the inclusion of direct costs, such as the cost of
reimbursing covered deposits
425
, the valuation expertise, legal advisers, possible
litigation and costs for the receivers, and indirect costs related to a payout. The views
were split on the use of indirect costs, that may reflect the financial contagion effects,
additional costs for the banking sector related to the need to raise extraordinary
contributions to replenish the DGS and potential additional funding costs related to
disturbance on financial markets or opportunity costs for the DGS.
In this respect, for some experts, the argument against including the indirect costs relates
to the complexity to quantify them
426
or that they do not represent the direct costs for the
422
These examples are for information only and should not be seen as an opinion of the Commission
services. The objective is to illustrate what a least cost test could be, based on an existing methodology
applied on real cases. The numbers have been rescaled for confidentiality purposes, but the proportionality
between the numbers is preserved.
423
10 Member States agreed on this principle and two disagreed in the replies to the survey circulated by
the Commission during the EGBPI of 28 September 2020.
424
All respondents agreed on this principle in the survey circulated by the Commission during the EGBPI
of 28 September 2020.
425
The cost of reimbursing covered deposits are the amount of covered deposits minus the expected
amount recovered during by the DGS during the insolvency proceedings.
426
For instance, for the impact of a payout on the funding costs of the other banks or on the financial
stability.
233
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0235.png
DGS but for the contributing banks
427
. Some experts were open to including them as long
as they allow a more accurate estimation of the overall impact of payout and are based on
clear rules enabling their quantification and/or subject to safeguards, e.g. by introducing
a cap limiting their amount. Some also considered that, under the current legal
framework, the least cost test is unlikely to be met without indirect costs. Indeed, due to
the current high ranking of covered deposits in the creditor hierarchy, the likelihood of a
loss for a DGS in a payout is very limited and close to zero
428
.
The analysis in Annex 7, section
Error! Reference source not found.,
demonstrated
that, under the proposed options including notably the changes to the creditor hierarchy
(i.e. single-tier class for all deposits), the direct costs would allow 80%
429
of the banks,
which cannot reach the 8% TLOF without affecting the deposits, to finance the gap to the
8% TLOF threshold. For the remaining banks (i.e. 20% of the banks that cannot access
the RF/SRF without affecting the deposits), the amount of funds meeting the least cost
test would not be sufficient to reach the 8% TLOF threshold. If the objective were to
allow the DGSs to bridge the gap for more banks, indirect costs would need to be
included in the calculation of the least cost test. On average, for the subset of banks,
unlikely to meet the least cost test according to the simulation, the funds missing to
finance the gap to the 8% TLOF threshold would represent 0.25% of covered deposits
430
.
In this context, the impact assessment tested several scenarios of a financial crisis under
different versions of creditor hierarchy. The results confirm a low likelihood that DGS
funds could be used in crisis management for purposes other than payout under the
current least cost test, articulated as in the current framework and including only direct
costs. These results also confirm the four examples of least cost tests outlined above in
which the DGS would not have been allowed to finance a measure other than payout
without including indirect costs.
Therefore, the best option would be to develop a methodology, which includes both
direct and, at least to some extent, quantifiable indirect costs subject to further technical
analysis performed in the context of the regulatory technical standards. This least cost
test should apply also in resolution because of the same counterfactual, i.e. the losses
incurred in insolvency in case of payout, to ensure the aligned incentives between
resolution and insolvency.
3.2.14. Reference date for covered deposits data for the calculation of the target
level in 2024
Issue
The EBA recommended to clarify that the reference date for the calculation of the target
level in 2024 should be no earlier than 31 December 2023 and no later than 3 July 2024.
427
Some indirect costs are costs for the banks (additional costs of funding,
ex post
contributions to
replenish the DGS funds).
428
In addition, in case a loss is expected, its amount is probably very limited, leaving little room to finance
an alternative measure.
429
This conclusion would be different without any change in the creditor hierarchy.
430
This amount considers a recovery rate set at 85%. It is to be noted that results are strongly dependent on
the assumed percentage of recovery rate.
234
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0236.png
Analysis
While experts largely supported the EBA’s clarification, the discussions in the EGBPI
subsequently explored another alternative option. According to the latter, the available
financial means would at least reach a target level of 0.8% of covered deposits by 31
December 2024. This could take into account the differences in the collection of
contributions and allow Member States to report the DGS data for 2024 by March 2025.
As the views were split, the best option would be to follow the EBA’s advice.
3.2.15. Treatment of third country branches
Issue
The EBA pointed out the inconsistent treatment of third country branches located in the
EU and the various practices regarding the national equivalence assessments across
Member States. In EBA’s view, third country branches should be required to join a DGS
in the EU without an equivalence assessment to reduce administrative burden and to
align the different approaches. Given that most third country branches are presently
members of DGSs in the EU, the impact of this recommendation would be limited.
Further, it also proposed clarifications regarding the deposits in third country branches of
EU credit institutions, located abroad.
Analysis
The subsequent feedback from the EGBPI supported such clarifications.
There was a broad support for requiring third country branches to join DGSs in the EU
without prior equivalence assessment. However, some Member States suggested a
possible derogation from the participation of a third country branch in a national DGS.
This derogation, to be granted by national authorities, would be contingent on an
equivalent DGS protection of the third country at least in terms of coverage and a
deadline for repayment. However, any such derogations would also run against the
Banking Union objectives, in particular these aiming to decrease unnecessary national
discretions and the risk of regulatory arbitrage. The treatment of third country branches
and their possible authorisation requirements is currently assessed in the ongoing
revision of the CRD/CRR framework. These developments could address the concerns
raised in the context of the CWP discussion on EDIS
431
regarding the risk of third
country branches for the common scheme although the latter would remain under
national supervision and/or where they cumulate larger amounts of deposits in the EU.
Likewise, the clarification of the territorial scope of the DGS protection also received
broad support in the EGBPI to avoid exposing DGSs to risks in the third countries, which
is also important in the context of the common scheme. Taking this forward, this
discussion also highlighted a possible coverage of the deposits outside the EU as an area
for further work, mainly from the perspective of better competitiveness of EU banks and
the fact that branches are not separate legal entities.
431
European Council (2 June 2021),
Portuguese
Presidency Progress Report
on strengthening the Banking
Union.
235
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
4.
O
VERALL ASSESSMENT OF BENEFITS AND COSTS UNDER
O
PTION
2 (
FOLLOWING
EBA’
S ADVICE
)
4.1. Benefits
Option 2 (following EBA’s advice) would foster a consistent application across Member
States and clarify the interplay with other sectoral legislation. This would also enhance
legal certainty and depositor confidence as depositors increasingly navigate through
different legal regimes as the consequence of the cross-border and Fintech services. New,
or more detailed, rules would mainly reassert the principles laid down in the DGSD
where the evidence suggests ineffective outcomes, insufficient transparency and scope
for improvements compared to the current rules. Some of these modifications would aim
to improve the administrative burden of DGSs, while leaving the administrative burden
of the banking sector broadly unaltered. More harmonised rules would be necessary to
address divergences among Member States that have significant adverse impacts on
depositors. The DGSD framework should also be consistent across all EU Member
States, irrespective of whether these are members of the Banking Union, to ensure their
equal treatment. In several instances, detailed rules to be adopted through empowerments
for the delegated and implementing acts would be more suitable to prevent from
overburdening the generally applicable legal framework and ensure a consistent use of
DGS funding (e.g. through a least cost assessment). Overall, following EBA’s advice
would better contribute to the objectives to protect depositors and financial stability.
4.2. Costs
Option 2 (following EBA’s advice) would extend the coverage for certain types of
depositors and deposits, such as the inclusion of public authorities within the scope of
covered depositors (Issue 6), which could create additional costs for the contributing
banks and the DGS. Currently, the concrete costs for such an amendment cannot be
quantified as only eligible deposits are reported to the EBA. However, the subset of such
public authorities, currently protected in several Member States, as well as the reflection
in the contribution for all affiliated institutions, suggest the overall financial impact to be
relatively small. Conversely, other policy options likely to impact the coverage, e.g.
temporary high balances, client funds or other (Issues 4, 5, 14), would have a limited
financial impact for the DGS and contributing banks because such deposits are either
rare, relatively small in terms of volume and/or already covered by the DGS. Likewise,
as explained in Annex 7, the changes to the least cost test for the use of DGS other than
for payout and to the creditor hierarchy, could also have a financial impact for the DGS,
although difficult to quantify in net terms
ex ante.
However, more robust deposit
protection and effective CMDI framework constitute sufficient trade-offs of these
potential costs.
The revised rules may lead to certain implementation costs. However, as the revised
criteria aim to enhance clarity and hence reduce the incurred costs under the current
framework, the implementation costs are expected to decrease quickly over time.
236
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
A
NNEX
7: A
NALYTICAL METHODS
1.
O
BJECTIVE AND SCOPE
The objective of this Annex is to provide detailed quantitative information (static statistical
analysis and model-based simulations) to support the assessment of the policy options set out
in Chapters 5, 6 and 7 as well as certain aspects pertaining to funding in Chapter 2 and the
evaluation (Annex 5). In terms of scope, this Annex covers a wide range of technical topics
linked to the components of the CMDI framework and the design of EDIS, as well as
methodological sections. More specifically, it covers:
-
-
-
-
-
An overview of the methodology (section 2)
Analysis of banks’ capabilities to meet the condition to access the RF/SRF (section 3)
The potential for DGS intervention under the least cost test (LCT) and related
considerations (section 4)
Caveats and disclaimers (section 5)
Other methodological considerations (section 6).
The analyses on the banks’ capabilities to meet the conditions to access the RF/SRF and the
potential for DGS intervention are featuring a static statistical part and a model-based dynamic
approach. For the static and model-based analyses, the Annex refers to the EBA report replying
to the Commission’s Call for Advice regarding funding in resolution and insolvency as part of
the CMDI review (hereafter “EBA CfA report”), presenting the main conclusions in the
context of the assessment of the policy options following different scenarios. The EBA’s CfA
report was prepared in cooperation with the Commission’s Joint Research Centre that provided
the underlying quantitative analysis necessary to conduct the assessments included in that
report. Detailed information on methodological assumptions is available in each section where
these analyses are presented.
2.
O
VERVIEW OF THE METHODOLOGY
2.1. Data sources and references
Each area of analysis outlined above builds on the data provided by the SRB and the data used
in the EBA CfA report collected by the EBA directly from resolution authorities.
Table 8
provides a mapping of the data sources used in this Annex.
237
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0239.png
Table 8: Mapping data sources and references
Section #
Conditions to access the RF/SRF
DGS interventions
Least cost test
Use of DGS in resolution
Use of resolution fund
Availability of DGS funds and EDIS design
EBA CfA report
432
SRB data
Data sources and references
2.2. Use of models
The simulations reported in this Annex and in the EBA CfA report are based on the Systemic
Model of Banking Originated Losses (SYMBOL). SYMBOL simulates crisis scenarios in the
banking sector. In each scenario, a number representing a realization of the single risk factor is
randomly generated for each bank. To represent the fact that all banks operate in the same
economy, the risk factors are correlated between themselves. Given the realisation of the risk
factors, individual banks' losses are generated via Monte Carlo simulations using the Basel III
Fundamental Internal Risk Based (FIRB) loss distribution function and are based on an
estimate of the average default probability of the portfolio of assets of any individual bank,
which is derived from data on banks' minimum capital requirements and total assets. These
losses can then be applied to the bank’s liabilities by respecting the waterfall in the hierarchy of
claims, possibly triggering the use of resolution/insolvency tools and corresponding funding
sources. Given a sufficient number of loss scenario simulations (hundreds of thousands to
millions), it is possible to obtain statistical distributions of outcomes for the banking sector as a
whole. This concerns mainly the dynamic simulation related to DGS interventions (section 4).
More detailed information on SYMBOL, including model structure, analytical approach, key
assumptions, limitations and simplifications are available in section 3.2 of the EBA’s CfA
report.
2.3. Assumptions and scenarios for the static and model-based analyses
The static analyses and the simulations are based on a set of common assumptions to address
data quality issues (e.g. missing values), data processing (e.g. size classification criteria, level
of consolidation of the analyses, mapping of national creditor hierarchies into a simplified
hierarchy of claims which is used for all banks in a Member State) and data aggregation (e.g.
presentation of the results). The main scenarios tested relate to equity (CET1) depletion,
depositor preference in the hierarchy of claims, loss simulations and loss allocation within
banking groups depending whether the resolution group structure holds or not in resolution and
the run on short-term liabilities. Detailed information on these assumptions and scenarios is
available in sections 3.1 and 3.2 of the EBA CfA report.
432
EBA (2021),
Call for advice regarding funding in resolution and insolvency
238
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0240.png
The most relevant assumptions and scenarios used in analyses relying on the EBA CfA report
are described below.
-
Size classification
For the purpose of the assessments conducted in sections 3 and 4, institutions are
classified as “large”, “medium” or “small and non-complex” by the EBA in
accordance with the criteria in CRR.
433
Such criteria relate to balance sheet size and
systemic risk importance, but also elements of complexity such as trading activities
and the location of activity outside of the European Economic Area.
On the basis of this classification, the sample used in the EBA CfA report is made
of 368 institutions (parent and standalone entities)434, out of which 49 large, 124
medium and 195 small and non-complex institutions located in 27 Member States.
When also considering subsidiaries, the total sample of entities is made of 862
entities out of which 58 large, 304 medium and 500 small and non-complex entities.
Where appropriate, other analyses use size classification based on total assets.
Table 9: Size clustering criteria used in the EBA CfA report
Category
Criteria
Large
The institution meets any of the following conditions, with the exception of
condition (d) which acts like a binding threshold for all other conditions
435
:
(a) Identified as G-SII in accordance with Article 131(1) and (2) of Directive
2013/36/EU
(b) Identified as O-SII in accordance with Article 131(1) and (2) of Directive
2013/36/EU
(c) One of the three largest institutions in terms of total value of assets in the
Member State in which it is established
(d) The total value of the institution’s assets on the basis of its consolidated
situation is equal to or larger than EUR 30 bn
The institution is not a 'large' institution and meets all of the following
conditions:
(a) The total value of its assets on an individual basis or, where applicable, on a
consolidated basis in accordance with Regulation (EU) No 575/2013 and
Small (and
Directive 2013/36/EU is on average equal or less than the threshold of
non-
EUR 5 bn over the four-year period immediately preceding the current annual
complex)
disclosure period
(b) The total value of its derivative positions is less than or equal 2% of its total
on- and off-balance sheet assets, whereby only derivatives which qualify as
433
Regulation (EU) 2019/876 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 20 May 2019,
OJ L 150,
7.6.2019, p. 1–225.
The proposed criteria were simplified; see section 2.3.1 of the EBA CfA report.
434
This statistic is based on the sample of institutions at point of entry or parent entity level, irrespective whether
they have strategy resolution or liquidation (i.e. excluding subsidiaries).
435
i.e. banks with a balance sheet size below EUR 30 bn are not captured in the “large” category even if they are
O-SIIs or among the third largest institutions in their Member State.
239
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0241.png
Medium
positions held with trading intent are included in the calculating the derivative
positions
(c) More than 75% of both the institution's consolidated total assets and liabilities,
excluding in both cases the intragroup exposures, relate to activities with
counterparties located in the European Economic Area
The institution is neither “large” nor “small”
Source: EBA CfA report.
-
Funding structure classification
For the purpose of the assessments conducted in sections 3 and 4, institutions are also classified
according to their funding structure through an indicator describing the prevalence of deposits
in their balance sheet. The indicator takes into account all forms of deposits, irrespective of the
counterparty or the nature of the deposit (non-preferred, preferred, covered). Banks are
distributed in four categories of deposit prevalence: “low”, “mid”, “mid-high” and “high”. On
the basis of this classification, the sample used in the EBA CfA report is made of 368
institutions, out of which 107 with a low, 44 with a medium, 63 with a medium-high and 154
with a high prevalence of deposits.
Table 10: Funding structure – deposit prevalence as per criteria used in the EBA CfA report
Category
Share of deposits over TLOF
[0-60%]
Low
]60-70]
Mid
]70-80]
Mid-High
>80%
High
Source: EBA CfA report.
-
CET1 depletion scenarios
Five scenarios of CET1 depletion (presented in decreasing order of severity) are envisaged in
the analyses:
Baseline (Scenario 1):
assume no CET1 depletion, i.e. all the CET1 (including the
Pillar 1, Pillar 2 requirement, combined buffer and any management buffer) is
available to absorb losses at the moment of failure (in addition to other bail-inable
liabilities);
Scenario 2:
assume a 75% depletion of the combined buffer requirement at the
moment of failure (including any management buffer in addition to the buffer
requirements) i.e. CET1 held as Pillar 1, Pillar 2 requirement and 25% of the
combined buffer requirement are available to absorb losses at the moment of failure
(in addition to other bail-inable liabilities);
Scenario 3:
assume a 100% depletion of CET1 held as capital buffers, i.e. CET1
held as Pillar 1, Pillar 2 requirement are available to absorb losses at the moment of
failure (in addition to other bail-inable liabilities);
240
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
Scenario 4:
assume the depletion of CET1 where only Pillar 1 and 50% of Pillar 2
requirement are available to absorb losses at the moment of failure (in addition to
other bail-inable liabilities);
Scenario 5:
assume only Pillar 1 is still available to absorb losses at the moment of
failure (in addition to other bail-inable liabilities).
Five scenarios of equity depletion are considered when assessing the institutions’ ability to
reach 8% TLOF and access the RF/SRF. As explained in Chapter 2 and Annex 8, the timing of
triggering FOLF determines the amount of capital and liquidity remaining in the bank. At the
same time, the supervisor can only make the FOLF determination if the conditions foreseen in
Article 32 BRRD are fulfilled, which in the case of FOLF due to (likely) breaches of capital
requirements foresee that the (likely) breach needs to be severe enough to justify withdrawal of
the authorisation. It should therefore be acknowledged that in particular scenarios 1 and 2
would only be possible under very exceptional circumstances based on the existing legal
framework. It has been decided to include these scenarios in order to provide a more
comprehensive sensitivity analysis, also taking into account the possible impact resulting from
the treatment of historical losses according to the BRRD II which establishes that all equity
used to absorb losses identified in the resolution valuations counts toward the calculation of the
8% TLOF benchmark, even if depleted at the moment of FOLF triggering (Article 59(1b)
BRRD).
-
Short-term funding with a remaining maturity of less than 1 month
When allocating losses or analysing the incidence of the 8% TLOF to access the RF/SRF, one
relevant question is whether short-term liabilities can be relied upon to absorb losses or
whether those investors are likely to withdraw or not roll over their claims in the bank. A single
assumption is considered, namely that short-term liabilities with a remaining maturity below 1
month cannot be relied upon at the moment of failure and only liabilities with a longer
remaining maturity can be used to absorb losses. However, it is assumed that the exclusion of
short-term liabilities below 1 month does not affect the total size of the balance sheet or the
TLOF, as these liabilities would be replaced by secured ones. Other types of short-term
instruments such as sight deposits are included in the analysis because their exclusion would
require additional assumptions of deposit runs difficult to extrapolate to the entire sample.
-
Loss allocation within banking groups
When performing the allocation of losses, the group structure should be considered. In
particular, for subsidiaries which are part of resolution group and which are not resolution
entities themselves, two scenarios are relevant when performing the allocation of losses in
cases where the losses exceed the internal MREL requirement:
Scenario 1:
The resolution group structure holds and the losses of a subsidiary
exceeding its pre-positioned internal MREL requirement are transferred to the
resolution entity. Under this scenario, only the instruments pre-positioned by the
parent to the subsidiary can be written down (up-streamed to the parent) and it is
241
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
assumed that the parent entity will support its subsidiary beyond the internal MREL
eligible instruments present in the subsidiary. Concretely, at subsidiary level, the
allocation of losses starts with own funds and other internal MREL eligible
liabilities of the subsidiary at solo level up until the internal MREL requirement is
exhausted. Possible remaining losses are transferred to the parent level, where
together with the parent’s own losses they will be covered by taking into account
the own funds and liabilities in the order of hierarchy of the parent from its solo
balance sheet.
Scenario 2:
The resolution group structure breaks-down triggering the resolution of
the subsidiary and the allocation of the subsidiary’s losses is done at the subsidiary
solo level only, covering all the subsidiary’s balance sheet, according to the
applicable hierarchy of claims.
-
National creditor hierarchy assumptions
As also described in Annex 8, the hierarchies of claims are defined by national laws and differ
across Member States. While the ranking of certain types of claims are more harmonised across
Member States than others (own funds and subordinated instruments, preferred and covered
deposits) the ranking of a certain claim in a bank balance sheet may also be driven by
contractual clauses, which banks report to NRAs/SRB. Since the same typology of claim can
rank differently for the same bank and/or among banks within the same Member State in
function of contractual clauses, an assumption was necessary in order to generate an allocation
of claims to a simplified creditor hierarchy and build the scenarios of depositor preference
upon this foundation.
In this context, for liabilities in the dataset, which had an outstanding amount different from
zero, a mapping was performed into a simplified hierarchy of claims (section [X] of the EBA
CfA report).
-
Depositor preference
In order to assess the possibility to access resolution financing arrangements, the degree of
depositor protection or exposure to losses in this context (section 3 of this Annex) and the
potential use of DGS funds in resolution or under alternative measures in insolvency under the
LCT (section 4), five scenarios of depositor preference have been considered:
Baseline (Scenario 1):
current hierarchy of claims, i.e. three-tier depositor
preference unharmonised across Member States. In most Member States, covered
deposits are super-preferred, ranking above preferred deposits (natural persons and
SMEs above EUR 100 000), which in turn rank above other deposits, the latter
ranking
pari passu
with ordinary unsecured claims. However, some Member States
have a three-tier depositor preference where covered deposits rank above preferred
deposits, which rank above non-preferred deposits, the latter also ranking above
ordinary unsecured claims);
242
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
Scenario 2:
a single-tier depositor preference for all Member States, i.e. all types of
deposits rank
pari passu
among themselves and above ordinary unsecured claims;
Scenario 3:
a three-tier depositor preference harmonised for all Member States, i.e.
covered deposits rank above preferred deposits, which rank above non-preferred
deposits, the latter also ranking above ordinary unsecured claims;
Scenario 4:
a two-tier depositor preference in all Member States, where covered
deposits are super-preferred to preferred deposits, which rank
pari passu
with non-
preferred deposits, the latter ranking above ordinary unsecured claims;
Scenario 5:
a two-tier depositor preference in all Member States, where covered
deposits rank
pari passu
with preferred deposits, all of which rank above non-
preferred deposits, the latter ranking above ordinary unsecured claims.
All these alternative scenarios prefer depositors in relation to ordinary unsecured claims,
however with varying distinctions in terms of the relative order of deposits covered by DGSs,
preferred and non-preferred deposits. Out of the four alternative scenarios, two propose
removing the super-preference of covered deposits (scenarios 2 and 5), while the other two
scenarios retain the super-preference of covered deposits in a tiered approach (scenarios 3 and
4).
These scenarios (including the baseline) are applied under various quantitative analyses
throughout sections 3 and 4 of this Annex, aiming at assessing the access condition to the
RF/SRF (8% TLOF minimum bail-in requirement) and the DGS contribution to resolution and
insolvency under the LCT respectively. The quantitative outcome of these analyses are
presented in detail under the respective sections. The outcome of the analyses of the different
scenarios of depositor preference informed the assessments in Chapters 2, 5, 6, 7 as well as
Annexes 5 and 8 of this impact assessment.
-
Mandatory exclusions from bail-in
Mandatory exclusions from bail-in under Article 44(2) BRRD were considered in the analyses
presented in this Annex. For a complete view of the types of liabilities excluded from bail-in
and their materiality in the banks’ balance sheets, please see Annex 8.
The ranking of these liabilities diverges across Member States, in line with national
specificities pertaining to areas such as taxation, employee protection, social security or civil
law. In some Member States some of these excluded liabilities rank above deposits, in others,
some they rank below or among deposits. The relative ranking of these liabilities in relation to
deposits (in particular when ranking below or among deposits) has an impact on the allocation
of losses in the waterfall of claims and the assessment of banks’ ability to meet 8% TLOF to
access the RF/SRF, including the potential for DGS intervention. In order to reflect this,
assumptions were taken with regard to the ranking of excluded claims at the level of each
Member State, by extrapolating the ranking occurring most frequently by type of excluded
liability, as reported by banks.
243
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0245.png
-
Least cost test (LCT) – Insolvency haircut scenario
The objective of the LCT is to safeguard the DGS against losses when contributing to various
measures alternative to payout and to determine whether and for what maximum amount (if
any) the DGS could make such contributions in a less costly way than under a payout event in
insolvency. Assumptions with respect to losses in an insolvency counterfactual with a payout
event are therefore required for the purpose of conducting the LCT. The following primary
assumption is considered for all banks in the sample:
-
a 15% average haircut (loss) on all assets in insolvency (corresponding to a recovery
rate of 85%), on top of the entity’s losses.
The assumption takes into account the fact that a haircut on assets in insolvency is greater than
a haircut on assets in a scenario of sale of business using “disposal value” in the resolution
valuation. The assumption of 15% haircut in insolvency which is applied to EU banks in the
sample is slightly higher than the one taken by the SRB in its internal policy on the NCWO
assessment (10%) for banks under its remit, which also requires a comparison against a loss in
an insolvency counterfactual. The insolvency haircut of 15% on total assets has been already
used by the Commission when presenting quantitative examples of DGS intervention in its
Expert Group and the HLWG.
However, because the levels of insolvency haircuts (losses) and related recovery rates vary
greatly across banks and Member States, this Annex aims to show some of the results also for a
50% haircut in insolvency and 50% related recovery rate, as a secondary assumption, in order
to give a flavour of the scale of the differences in results (see section 4.5).
The assumptions on insolvency haircuts and recovery rates come with important caveats and
limitations. The heterogeneity of recovery rates across banks and Member States is driven by a
series of factors: (i) they are bank-specific, depending on asset quality, bank’s financial
position and market situation; (ii) they are strongly influenced by the national insolvency laws
and judicial systems, and in particular the duration of the proceedings; (iii) an EU benchmark
on average recovery rates or insolvency haircuts is absent and (iv) they may be also influenced
by the severity of the crisis. These limitations are also confirmed by the EBA’s findings on
DGS funding and uses of DGS funds published in 2020. An EBA-led survey of Member States
concluded that, 13 respondents reported recovery rates between 1-100% in cases of DGS
payout since the implementation of the DGSD, while two respondents reported recovery rates
between 20-95% in cases prior to the implementation of the DGSD
436
.
To mitigate the uncertainties deriving from these limitations, the interpretation of the results
provides qualitative clarifications to show how the results would be impacted if higher or lower
insolvency haircuts/recovery rates were considered.
436
EBA (January 2020),
Opinion of the European Banking Authority on deposit guarantee scheme funding and
uses of deposit guarantee scheme funds,
paragraph 27, p. 23, 24.
244
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0246.png
-
Bail-inable capacity
In order to assess the possibility to access resolution financing arrangements and the related use
of DGS in resolution or under alternative measures in insolvency, sections 3 and 4 of this
Annex also look at the banks’ internal loss-absorbing capacity under two scenarios of bail-
inable capacity to assess whether deposits would be bailed-in to access resolution financing
arrangements, and what is the eventual bail-inable capacity:
Scenario 1:
Use of the amount of bail-inable liabilities with complete or partial
exclusion of deposits, including MREL eligible deposits (shown in the tables
presented in the next sections);
Scenario 2:
Use of a proxy of the bail-inable capacity at least equal to steady-state
MREL requirements.
The first scenario allows measuring various degrees of severity based on the current bail-inable
capacity, singling out the types of deposits affected by the simulations. The complete or partial
exclusion of deposits also serves to cater for possible concerns related to the bail-in of deposits
for financial stability reasons. The second scenario assumes an estimated stock of eligible
liabilities held by the institutions assuming they will meet their MREL requirements by the end
of the transition period. This latter scenario does not take into account a change in the structure
of the balance sheets due to compliance with future MREL levels, as institutions retain
discretion on how they plan to comply with the requirements by the end of the transition
period
437
.
-
MREL requirements
When the MREL requirement is not reported for some resolution entities, a proxy is used, in
function of the strategy: for banks with liquidation strategy, the proxy MREL requirement
equals own funds requirements and for banks with resolution strategy, the proxy MREL
requirement is twice own funds requirements.
Where internal MREL requirement is not available for subsidiaries, a proxy is used, in function
of the materiality
438
and the strategy defined for the entity. For non-material entities and
entities with strategy liquidation, internal MREL is assumed to equal own funds requirements.
For material subsidiaries and those with strategy resolution, internal MREL is assumed to be
equal to twice own funds requirements.
-
Hybrid EDIS scenarios
437
In particular, the impact assessment does not make general assumptions applied to all banks on the type of
liabilities that would be issued, replaced or renewed and their relative location in the hierarchy of claims, nor on
other strategic choices made to comply with future requirements (restructuring, disposal of assets, etc.).
438
Material subsidiaries defined as representing 5% of resolution group TREA for non-Banking Union entities
and 4% for Banking Union entities.
245
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0247.png
For the purpose of assessing the effectiveness and efficiency of the hybrid/EDIS
439
models
compared to national DGSs to finance banks in resolution and insolvency, three scenarios of
hybrid EDIS calibration are considered, where the total DGS financial means amounting to
0.8% of covered deposits are distributed as follows:
-
-
-
Scenario 1:
Central fund 75% of the available funds, DGS 25%.
Scenario 2:
Central fund 50% of the available means, DGS 50%.
Scenario 3:
Central fund 25% of the available means, DGS 75%.
2.4. Key steps in the static and model-based approaches
In line with the policy options presented in Chapter 6, the analyses related to the access to
resolution financing arrangements and the DGS interventions are inter-related. Sections 3 and 4
of this Annex cover the analysis of banks’ ability to reach 8% TLOF to access the RF/SRF and
the potential to unlock DGS funding under the LCT for DGS interventions in resolution (i.e.
stand-alone or to bridge the gap towards 8% TLOF and accessing RF/SRF) and alternative
measures in insolvency, and must be considered following a consistent sequence of steps.
The assessments described in sections 3 and 4 are based on a two-fold approach.
First, a statistical analysis of the 8% TLOF requirement, the ability of DGS to intervene under
the LCT safeguard and the availability of DGS financial means are carried out under a baseline
scenario as well as under various assumptions related to CET1 depletion, depositor preference
and bail-inable capacity. This approach allows to test a wide variety of assumptions and
determine the relative and incremental impacts of changes to certain dimensions that can
support the design of policy options.
The outcome of this first analysis serves as a basis for comparison and defines the most
relevant scenarios (notably of depositor preference) to be used in a second approach, where a
model-based analysis relying on SYMBOL-generated losses is carried out, using a dynamic
approach whereby losses are allocated to each entity according to the waterfall of liabilities as
per the applicable hierarchy of claims, in line with the resolution group structure. The outcome
of the model-based approach is used to test the ability of DGS to intervene under the LCT,
assess the 8% TLOF requirement and the possible contribution of resolution funds, and
ultimately stress the DGS financial means under various hybrid EDIS designs, in particular
with different distributions of funds between national DGSs and the central fund.
This modelling approach complements the statistical analysis by using actual losses
simulations based on bank-specific characteristics and by adding a resolution group
439
The hybrid EDIS is built on the idea of coexistence of a deposit insurance fund at central level and funds
remaining within the national DGSs. The central fund aims at providing liquidity to DGS in the Banking Union,
once the latter have exhausted their funds. If the central fund were depleted at the time an intervention is needed,
the SRB, on behalf of the central fund, would be able to borrow from national DGSs through a mandatory lending
mechanism. See Annex 10 for more details on the hybrid models.
246
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0248.png
perspective, making the analysis closer to the effective implementation of the strategy defined
for the resolution group. It offers a more concrete, economically consistent, opportunity to
deepen the analysis and investigate credible scenarios related to the materiality and limits of
DGS and resolution fund interventions.
By design and for an improved readability of the results, the model-based approach relies on a
subset of assumptions that differ from the statistical approach: the analysis does not assume
standard CET1 depletion scenarios, but relies on the generation of simulated losses based on
bank-specific characteristics using SYMBOL, depositor preference and bail-inable scenarios
are limited to the most relevant ones for the purpose of the dynamic analysis. Still, the
incremental effects of each assumptions independently will have been described previously
through the outcome of the static statistical approach and can therefore provide valuable insight
on the possible impact of changing parameters in the modelling approach.
Based on the assumptions and scenarios detailed above, the data analysis related to the sections
3 and 4, building on the EBA CfA report, can be broken down into the following sequence of
steps.
Figure 19: Key steps in the data analysis – Access to 8% TLOF and DGS interventions
Source: Commission services
247
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0249.png
Table 11: Key steps in the data analysis (details) – Access to 8% TLOF and DGS interventions
Sections
Section 3:
Conditions
to access
the
RF/SRF
Objective
Scenarios/ assumptions
Scope
Perimeter
Identify the incidence of 8% Balance sheet as reported, All banks
Resolution
TLOF in the hierarchy of depositor
preference
entity (solo)
claims (impact on deposits) applicable in the Member
level
using the internal loss- State, available bail-inable
absorbing capacity under capacity.
baseline scenario.
B:
Static -
Identify the incidence of 8% Four additional scenarios All banks
Resolution
8% TLOF
TLOF in the hierarchy of of CET1 depletion
entity (solo)
(combined
claims (impact on deposits) Four additional scenarios
level
scenarios)
using the internal loss- of depositor preference
absorbing capacity under Two additional scenarios
alternative and combined of bail-inable capacity
scenarios.
The outcome of Step B serves to quantify the magnitude of the difficulty to reach 8% TLOF and is used as a
benchmark for policy options addressing the issue
C:
Static -
Continuation of Step B, Counterfactual: insolvency All banks
Resolution
LCT
assessing whether, based on haircut 15% of assets
entity (solo)
(baseline,
the LCT, institutions would be Four additional scenarios
level
combined
able to reach 8% TLOF via of CET1 depletion
scenarios)
DGS interventions under the Four additional scenarios
baseline,
alternative
and of depositor preference
combined scenarios.
Two additional scenarios
of bail-inable capacity
The outcome of Step C serves to define the most relevant scenarios (notably of depositor preference) to be used
in the dynamic assessment using SYMBOL
D:
Dynamic Continuation of Step C, Counterfactual: insolvency All banks
Resolution
- LCT, DGS relying on the model-based haircut 15% of assets
where the
entity (solo)
contributions approach using SYMBOL- Most relevant combined resolution
level
and 8%
generated losses.
scenarios
(depositor group
Entity (solo)
TLOF
preference,
bail-inable structure
level when
(model)
capacity)
can be
resolution group
structure breaks
E:
Dynamic
Continuation of Step D Two scenarios of loss identified
- Use of
assessing
whether allocation at entity level
resolution
contributions from resolution where the resolution group
funds
funds (5% TLOF) can be used structure holds or breaks.
(model)
and cover all losses
F:
Dynamic
Continuation of Step E
Resolution
- DGS
assessing
whether
DGS
entity (solo)
financial
financial means are sufficient
level
means
to cover the maximum amount
(model)
usable under the LCT.
G:
Static -
Continuation of Step C Counterfactual: insolvency All banks
Resolution
DGS
assessing
whether
DGS haircut 15% of assets
entity (solo)
contributions financial means are sufficient Most relevant combined
level
and financial to cover the maximum amount scenarios (CET1 depletion,
means
usable under the LCT.
depositor preference, bail-
(combined
inable capacity)
scenarios)
The outcome of Step G serves as a basis for comparison with the dynamic assessment based on economic and
bank-specific assumptions using SYMBOL (see Step F)
H:
Dynamic Continuation of Step G Same as E, F and G
Resolution
-Hybrid
assessing to what extent Three scenarios of hybrid
entity (solo)
EDIS
hybrid/EDIS models are more EDIS ambition
level
(model)
efficient than national DGSs
to finance banks in resolution
and insolvency and the scope
for target level reduction.
Steps
A:
Static -
8% TLOF
(baseline)
Section 4:
DGS
interventio
ns
248
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0250.png
3.
C
ONDITION TO ACCESS THE
RF/SRF
The objectives of this section are to assess to what extent institutions can access, after a
contribution of 8% TLOF through the bail-in of their own funds and eligible liabilities, the
RF/SRF, and to analyse to what extent deposits would need to bear losses to reach a level of
8% TLOF.
As underlined previously, the assessment is based on a static statistical approach using
predefined loss scenarios (see section 2.3), taking into account cross-dimensional impacts, i.e.
the amendments to the creditor hierarchy with respect to depositor preference and the scenarios
of bail-inable capacity. It intends to show how many institutions would be able to reach the 8%
TLOF threshold, under various scenarios and assumptions.
Baseline scenario.
In a first step, the assessments are based on a baseline scenario:
Baseline
Scope
Loss
simulation
Loss allocation
Creditor
hierarchy
Bail-inable
capacity
All bail-inable
liabilities
(except those
with maturity
below 1
month) with
gradual
exclusion of
deposits
Statistical
approach
Resolution
entities
(irrespective
of the
strategy)
All CET1
available
Not relevant
(simulated losses
applied directly on
the balance sheet of
the resolution
entity)
Applicable
creditor
hierarchy in
the Member
State
In a second step, the baseline scenario is further stressed by gradually amending each
dimension (level of CET1 depletion, creditor hierarchy and bail-inable capacity), all other
things remaining equal. These gradual changes will show the incremental impact of each
adjustment against the baseline scenario and allow for explanations on the independent effects
of each variable on the ability to reach the 8% TLOF threshold.
In a third step, the assessment focuses on several combined scenarios taking into account each
dimension in order to test the cumulative impact of such adjustments. Combined scenarios
provide a more accurate picture of the likely impact of a package of policy options, beyond the
mere incremental effects tested previously. For the sake of simplification, not all possible
combinations are represented in this Annex. However, the narrative attached to each section
intends to describe the main impacts stemming from further modifications, more or less severe,
of the combined scenarios.
All assessments include specific breakdowns, by size, strategy and funding structure aimed at
providing detailed information of the impact from multiple perspectives.
3.1. Composition of the liability structure
The liability structure of the institutions in the sample vary substantially, in particular
depending on their size and business model. Figure 20 and Table 12 show the breakdown of the
249
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0251.png
liability structure for the resolution entities covered in the analysis. The results are based on
aggregated amounts per instrument type shown as a percentage of aggregated TLOF.
The proportion of deposits represents 71.2% of the aggregated total liabilities and own funds of
the small and non-complex institutions and decreases to 46.5% for the large institutions. This
difference is sizeable with respect to covered and non-covered but preferred deposits,
highlighting the prevalence of retail-based funding structure for the smallest banks, compared
to non-preferred deposits that have a comparable share across the population of banks.
The composition of own funds also differs based on the size classification. In particular, CET1
represents 94% and 73.2% of the own funds for the small and non-complex and the large
institutions respectively. The use of other own funds instruments also varies across institutions.
AT1 instruments only represent a small share of the small and medium-sized institutions’ total
liabilities (0.2%), four times lower than that of large institutions
440
. Tier 2 instruments also
appear more frequently in medium and large institutions than in small ones.
Figure 20: Share of deposits in total liabilities and own funds (% based on aggregate
amounts)
Source: Commission services analysis, based on EBA CfA report and SRB data as of Q4 2019.
The composition of the liability structure also differs, although to a lesser extent, depending on
whether the strategy is resolution or liquidation. On average, institutions earmarked for
resolution tend to have a higher share of deposits, in particular non-covered non-preferred in
their balance sheet compared to institutions earmarked for liquidation. AT1 and Tier 2
instruments also represent a higher proportion of TLOF for banks with resolution strategies.
As shown in the following sections, the funding structure has an impact on the ability to reach
8% TLOF with or without bailing in deposits, in particular for smaller institutions.
440
Note: this is consistent with the outcome of the analysis on public issuances of own funds and eligible
liabilities, see Annex 13.
250
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0252.png
Table 12: Composition of the liability structure (resolution entities, % TLOF based on
aggregate amounts per category)
Type of liability
(% of TLOF)
Deposits
-
Covered
-
Non-covered but preferred
-
Non-covered non preferred
Own funds
-
Tier 2
-
AT1
-
CET1
Other liabilities
Total
Small
71.2%
38.5%
13.8%
18.9%
13.2%
0.6%
0.2%
12.4%
15.6%
100.0%
Medium
57.0%
28.1%
10.5%
18.4%
7.9%
1.0%
0.3%
6.6%
35.2%
100.0%
Large
46.5%
19.2%
7.7%
19.7%
8.3%
1.5%
0.8%
6.1%
45.1%
100.0%
Resolution
49.9%
21.8%
8.3%
19.8%
8.4%
1.4%
0.7%
6.3%
41.7%
100.0%
Liquidation
44.3%
19.3%
9.2%
15.7%
8.1%
0.9%
0.2%
6.9%
47.6%
100.0%
Source: Commission services analysis, based on EBA CfA report and SRB data as of Q4 2019.
3.2. Reaching 8% TLOF - Outcome of the statistical approach (Steps A and B)
3.2.1. Baseline
Table 13
shows, in aggregate, the ability of institutions to reach the 8% TLOF threshold under
the baseline scenario (i.e. no CET1 depletion, assuming the applicable creditor hierarchy in
each Member State and the use of the entire bail-inable capacity except liabilities with maturity
shorter than one month). Since the resolution strategy (resolution
versus
liquidation) of each
bank is based on past PIA decisions as of Q4 2019, and in view of the policy intention to
expand the PIA to a larger number of smaller/medium-sized banks
441
, the presentation of the
results is covering both perimeters: the whole sample (parent level or point of entry entities
442
),
irrespective of the current strategy (resolution or liquidation) and only banks with resolution
strategies.
Summary assessment – Baseline
When considering no CET1 equity depletion under the baseline scenario of depositor
preference (status quo), the majority of banks in the sample would be able to reach
8% TLOF in order to access the RF/SRF without imposing losses on any types of
deposits. However, deposits in 96 banks (26.1%) located in 20 Member States would
suffer losses when reaching the 8% TLOF threshold, up to an aggregate amount of
EUR 18.3 bn. In three Member States, deposits in more than half of the banks in the
sample would be affected. When only institutions with resolution strategies under the
2019 PIA decision are considered, deposits in 44 banks would be affected, up to an
aggregate amount of EUR 14.2 bn in 18 Member States.
441
See policy options on broadening the PIA in Chapter 6.
442
The sample of institutions referred to consists of so-called “point of entry” or parent level institutions,
irrespective whether they have strategy resolution or liquidation (i.e. excluding subsidiaries).
251
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0253.png
Detailed analysis
The analysis under the baseline scenario shows that overall, out of 368 banks in the sample,
272 banks (73.9%) would be able to reach 8% TLOF without impacting deposits (non-
preferred, preferred and covered) when all equity is taken into account under the baseline
creditor hierarchy (54.4% of these banks are small, 30.5% are medium-sized and 15.1% large).
The share of banks with resolution strategies as per the 2019 PIA decisions out of the total
sample is 187 (50.8%). Deposits would bear losses to reach 8% TLOF in 96 banks representing
26.1% of the sample (44 banks with resolution strategy, representing 23.5% of that sample).
In terms of geographical distribution, all banks in six Member States can reach 8% TLOF
without affecting deposits, while more than half of the banks in three Member States would
require the bail-in of deposits in order to reach 8% TLOF. When focusing on the size of banks,
deposits would bear losses when reaching 8% TLOF in 41 medium sized banks (of which 29
with resolution strategy) and 47 small banks (of which 10 with resolution strategy). Five banks
(of which two with resolution strategy) would not be able to reach the threshold at all.
In terms of materiality, approximately EUR 18.3 bn deposits would be impacted based on the
entire sample (EUR 14.2 bn for banks with resolution strategies). The impacted non-preferred
deposits represent EUR 14.2 bn or 1.3% TLOF for all medium-sized banks (EUR 11.6 bn or
1.3% TLOF for resolution strategies only) and EUR 0.8 bn or 1.5% TLOF for small banks
(EUR 0.2 bn or 1.1% TLOF for resolution strategies only). Expressed differently, the total
amount of deposits impacted when reaching 8% TLOF represent 0.7% of covered deposits for
all banks, the largest impact observed for medium banks (0.6%).
Table 13: Reaching 8% TLOF – Baseline
Institutions
Institutions
reaching 8%
reaching
TLOF with non-
8% TLOF
preferred
without
deposits and
deposits
amount used
Count
Count
%TLOF
N.
Institutions
reaching 8%
TLOF with
preferred non-
covered
deposits and
amount used
Count
%TLOF
Institutions
Institutions not
reaching 8%
reaching 8% TLOF
TLOF with
with deposits and
covered deposits
additional amount
and amount
required
used
Count
%TLOF
Count
%TLOF
Small
Medium
Large
Resolution
Liquidation
Low
Mid
Mid-High
High
Total
195
124
49
187
181
107
44
63
154
368
148
83
41
143
129
86
32
52
102
272
38
37
6
39
42
15
12
11
43
81
1.48%
1.30%
0.14%
0.57%
0.98%
0.47%
0.66%
0.58%
1.66%
7
1
0
1
7
1
0
0
7
8
1.99%
1.94%
0.00%
1.93%
2.02%
1.93%
0.00%
0.00%
1.96%
1
1
0
2
0
0
0
0
2
2
1.06%
4.45%
0.00%
4.35%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
4.35%
1
2
2
2
3
5
0
0
0
5
0.38%
0.46%
0.24%
0.31%
0.37%
0.34%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
Source: Commission services analysis, based on EBA CfA report and SRB data as of Q4 2019.
252
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0254.png
Figure 21 shows the outcome of the baseline scenario when considering additional granularity.
Among institutions earmarked for resolution, 82% and 67% of small and medium banks
respectively would reach 8% TLOF without bailing-in deposits. This proportion rises to 98%
and 97% when non-preferred deposits are affected, leaving a residual number of banks for
which more senior forms of deposits would have to be bailed-in to reach the 8% TLOF
threshold.
The proportions are slightly lower for small banks and stable for medium-sized banks
earmarked for liquidation
443
. In particular, 5% of these small institutions would need preferred
deposits to reach the threshold, and one medium-sized institution (out of 37) would not reach
the level of 8% TLOF even including covered deposits. Only 40% of the few large banks
earmarked for liquidation would access 8% TLOF without deposits.
In terms of funding structure, institutions going in resolution tend to have a similar proportion
for accessing 8% TLOF without deposits, ranging between 79% and 80%, except for the
category with the highest prevalence of deposits (i.e. deposits accounting for more than 80% of
TLOF), where this proportion falls to 70%. Covered deposits would be impacted by losses in
3% of the cases with a high deposit prevalence. The proportions vary more significantly for
institutions earmarked for liquidation, where 82% to 88% of the banks with a low or mid-high
prevalence of deposits, compared to 63% and 64% for banks with a mid and high proportion of
deposits in their balance sheet.
Figure 21: Reaching 8% TLOF – Baseline (granular), in function of depositor prevalence
444
Source: Commission services analysis, based on EBA CfA report and SRB data as of Q4 2019.
443
Presenting also results for banks with liquidation strategy may be relevant in case the PIA would be
broadened.
444
See section 2.3 of this Annex for details on the categories of banks in function of deposit prevalence.
253
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0255.png
3.2.2. Baseline versus more severe CET1 depletion scenarios
The
Table 14
shows the ability of institutions to reach the 8% TLOF threshold under various
scenarios of losses in line with the CET1 depletion assumptions described in section 2.3. All
other dimensions remain as per the baseline scenario.
Summary assessment – Baseline versus more severe CET1 depletion scenarios
As a general observation, increasing the severity of CET1 equity depletion, while
retaining the baseline scenario of depositor preference (status quo), triggers a
significant increase in the number of banks where deposits would need to be bailed-in
to reach 8% TLOF and in the amounts of affected deposits.
In particular, the number of banks where deposits would be affected would increase
from 96 with an aggregate EUR 18.3 bn affected deposits (44 banks with resolution
strategy and an aggregate EUR 14.2 bn affected deposits) under the baseline to 246
banks with an aggregate EUR 83.1 bn affected deposits (117 banks with resolution
strategy and an aggregate EUR 71.6 bn affected deposits) under the next more severe
CET1 depletion scenario assuming 75% depletion of buffers. For more severe
depletion scenarios, the impact is more significant.
While the bulk of affected deposits are non-preferred deposits, covered deposits
would also be more affected as the severity of the equity depletion scenarios
increases.
Detailed analysis
When considering all 368 banks in the sample (resolution and liquidation strategies), the
proportion of banks where deposits would be bailed-in increases significantly from 96 banks
(26.1%) under the baseline to 246 banks (66.8%), 282 (76.6%), 294 (79.9%) and 308 (83.7%)
under the four analysed CET1 depletion scenarios respectively. When considering only banks
with resolution strategies as per 2019 PIA decisions (187 banks), the share of banks where
deposits would be bailed-in increases from 23.5% under the baseline to 62.6%, 71.7%, 74.3%
and 80.2% under the four CET1 depletion scenarios respectively. The significant jump in the
number of banks with impacted deposits under the second scenario in order of severity
(depletion of 75% of buffers) compared to the baseline (full CET1 availability) is noteworthy,
which demonstrates the sensitivity of the treatment of equity in these hypothetical scenarios.
In terms of materiality, when considering all 368 banks in the sample, the aggregated amount
of deposits impacted increases from EUR 18.3 bn (0.7% of covered deposits) under the
baseline scenario to EUR 123.7 bn (4.6% of covered deposits) under the third (middle way)
CET1 depletion scenario (i.e. depletion of CET1 counting as buffers) and further to
EUR 147.8 bn (5.5% of covered deposits) under the most severe scenario (i.e. depletion of
CET1 except for Pillar 1). Over 90% of deposits impacted are non-preferred deposits. When
considering only 187 banks with resolution strategies as per Q4 2019 PIA decisions, the
aggregated amount of deposits impacted increases from a total of EUR 14.2 bn (0.5% of
254
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0256.png
covered deposits) under the baseline scenario to EUR 107.6 bn (4.0% of covered deposits)
under the mid-depletion scenario to EUR 129.7 bn (4.8% of covered deposits) under the most
severe scenario. Over 97% of impacted deposits are non-preferred deposits.
The breakdown by size of banks in the sample indicates that, the amount of impacted deposits
for medium-sized banks increases from 0.6% of covered deposits under the baseline scenario to
2.2% of covered deposits and 2.5% of covered deposits under the third and the most severe
scenario respectively.
In terms of geographical distribution, under the baseline scenario, covered deposits are
impacted in two Member States, the intensity of the impact ranging between 1.1% TLOF
445
and 4.5% TLOF, while the impact on non-preferred deposits ranges between 0.2% TLOF and
3.2% TLOF. Under the third scenario, the covered deposits are impacted in six Member States
with an impact ranging between 1.7% TLOF and 5.7% TLOF, while the impact on non-
preferred deposits ranges between 0.8% TLOF and 4.6% TLOF (with two Member States
recording values between 4-5% TLOF and eight Member States between 3-4% TLOF). Under
the most severe scenario, covered deposits are impacted in eight Member States for an average
ranging between 0.9% TLOF and 6.3% TLOF, while the impact on non-preferred deposits
ranges between 0.9% TLOF and 5.1% TLOF with four Member States recording values above
4% TLOF and six between 3-4% TLOF.
445
I.e. covered deposits which would bear losses when reaching the 8% TLOF threshold represent 1.1% of the
TLOF of the concerned bank(s) where those deposits would be affected in that particular Member State.
255
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0257.png
Table 14: Reaching 8% TLOF – Baseline versus CET1 depletion scenarios
Institution
s reaching
8% TLOF
without
deposits
Institutions
Institutions
Institutions
reaching 8%
reaching 8% TLOF
reaching 8%
TLOF with non- with preferred non-
TLOF with
preferred deposits covered deposits covered deposits
and amount used
and amount used and amount used
Institutions not
reaching 8%
TLOF with
deposits and
additional
amount required
N.
CET1
Depletion
Count
2 - Depletion 75% of buffers
Count
Count
%TLOF
Count
%TLOF
Count
%TLOF
Count
%TLOF
Small
Medium
Large
Resolution
Liquidation
Low
Mid
Mid-High
High
Total
195
124
49
187
181
107
44
63
154
368
60
37
25
70
52
62
14
22
24
122
98
78
22
107
91
37
29
40
92
198
2.30%
2.35%
0.75%
1.18%
1.80%
0.83%
1.41%
1.72%
2.78%
32
4
0
5
31
1
1
1
33
36
.
1.82%
1.72%
0.00%
2.27%
1.40%
3.50%
0.63%
0.27%
1.74%
4
1
0
2
3
0
0
0
5
5
1.23%
5.42%
0.00%
5.32%
1.19%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
3.48%
1
4
2
3
4
7
0
0
0
7
0.48%
0.40%
0.44%
0.36%
0.48%
0.42%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
N.
CET1
Depletion
Count
Institutions
reaching
8% TLOF
without
deposits
Institutions
Institutions
Institutions
reaching 8%
reaching 8% TLOF
reaching 8%
TLOF with non-
with preferred non-
TLOF with
preferred
covered deposits covered deposits
deposits and
and amount used and amount used
amount used
Institutions not
reaching 8%
TLOF with
deposits and
additional
amount required
3 - Depletion of all buffers
Count
Count
%TLOF
Count
%TLOF
Count
%TLOF
Count
%TLOF
Small
Medium
Large
Resolution
Liquidation
Low
Mid
Mid-High
High
Total
195
124
49
187
181
107
44
63
154
368
36
28
22
53
33
51
10
12
13
86
109
83
24
117
99
45
32
43
96
216
3.16%
2.90%
1.20%
1.69%
2.21%
1.16%
2.00%
2.35%
3.60%
41
8
1
12
38
1
2
7
40
50
2.52%
1.91%
0.33%
1.34%
2.20%
4.02%
1.96%
0.43%
2.37%
6
1
0
2
5
1
0
1
5
7
2.77%
5.74%
0.00%
5.65%
2.78%
1.66%
0.00%
3.53%
4.37%
4
4
2
3
7
10
0
0
0
10
0.55%
0.44%
0.52%
0.41%
0.54%
0.48%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
256
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0258.png
N.
CET1
Depletion
Count
Institution
s reaching
8% TLOF
without
deposits
Institutions
Institutions
Institutions
reaching 8%
reaching 8% TLOF
reaching 8%
TLOF with non- with preferred non-
TLOF with
preferred deposits covered deposits covered deposits
and amount used
and amount used and amount used
Institutions not
reaching 8%
TLOF with
deposits and
additional
amount required
4 - Depletion of all buffers and 50% of P2R
Count
Count
%TLOF
Count
%TLOF
Count
%TLOF
Count
%TLOF
Small
Medium
Large
Resolution
Liquidation
Low
Mid
Mid-High
High
Total
195
124
49
187
181
107
44
63
154
368
28
26
20
49
25
48
10
9
7
74
113
86
26
122
103
48
31
46
100
225
3.39%
3.05%
1.31%
1.83%
2.10%
1.22%
2.20%
2.56%
3.75%
44
7
1
11
41
1
3
7
41
52
2.41%
2.10%
0.53%
1.57%
2.19%
4.10%
0.88%
0.64%
2.49%
7
2
0
3
6
2
0
1
6
9
2.97%
2.87%
0.00%
2.87%
2.98%
1.69%
0.00%
3.53%
2.91%
4
4
2
3
7
10
0
0
0
10
0.55%
0.42%
0.52%
0.38%
0.55%
0.48%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
N.
CET1
Depletion
Count
Institutions
reaching
8% TLOF
without
deposits
Institutions
reaching 8%
TLOF with non-
preferred deposits
and amount used
Institutions
reaching 8%
TLOF with
preferred non-
covered
deposits and
amount used
Institutions
Institutions not
reaching 8%
reaching 8% TLOF
TLOF with
with deposits and
covered deposits additional amount
and amount used
required
5 - Depletion of all buffers and 100% of P2R
Count
Count
%TLOF
Count
%TLOF
Count
%TLOF
Count
%TLOF
Small
Medium
Large
Resolution
Liquidation
Low
Mid
Mid-High
High
195
124
49
187
181
107
44
63
154
18
24
18
39
21
43
9
4
4
121
87
28
130
106
52
31
50
103
3.58%
3.18%
1.34%
1.87%
2.22%
1.19%
2.36%
2.82%
4.02%
45
9
1
13
42
1
4
9
41
2.68%
2.09%
0.73%
1.65%
2.37%
4.39%
0.38%
0.80%
2.67%
6
2
0
3
5
1
0
1
6
3.22%
3.42%
0.00%
3.42%
3.22%
2.58%
0.00%
3.53%
3.37%
6
4
2
4
8
12
0
0
0
12
0.49%
0.42%
0.56%
0.42%
0.55%
0.49%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
Total
368
60
236
55
8
Source: Commission services analysis, based on EBA CfA report and SRB data as of Q4 2019
257
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0259.png
The impact of the increased severity embedded in each scenario is further highlighted in
Figure 22,
focusing on those institutions, which can access the 8% TLOF threshold without
impacting any form of deposits in each scenario of CET1 depletion. Increasing the severity of
the CET1 depletion scenario has a material impact on the smaller and medium-sized banks’
ability to access 8% TLOF without deposits: compared to the baseline, assuming 75% of the
buffers are depleted leads to a reduction of 59% for small banks and 55% for medium banks
which can access 8% TLOF without deposits.
Figure 22: Institutions able to reach 8% TLOF without deposits, comparison between
each scenario of CET1 depletion)
Source: Commission services analysis, based on EBA CfA report and SRB data as of Q4 2019.
3.2.3. Baseline versus alternative depositor preferences
Table 15
shows the ability of institutions to reach the 8% TLOF threshold under various
scenarios of depositor preference as described in section 2.3 and the share and amounts of
deposits impacted under each scenario. All other dimensions remain as per the baseline
scenario.
258
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0260.png
Summary assessment – Baseline versus alternative depositor preference scenarios
As a general observation and by design, preferring all deposits in relation to ordinary
unsecured claims increases the protection of deposits by leading to a significantly
higher number of banks able to achieve the 8% TLOF threshold without impacting
deposits compared to the baseline hierarchy of claims. The aggregated amount of
impacted deposits decreases from EUR 18.3 bn under the baseline scenario to
EUR 6.4 bn under each of the four depositor hierarchy scenarios (and from
EUR 14.2 bn under the baseline to EUR 4.6 bn under each of the four depositor
hierarchy scenarios when considering only banks with resolution strategy under the
2019 PIA decisions).
The impact on the three categories of deposits is influenced by their relative ranking
in relation to each other under the four alternative scenarios. For a complete view on
the impact of each deposit type, the results from this section need to be read together
with the ones under the LCT section 4.1.3.
Detailed analysis
As a general observation and by design, preferring all deposits in relation to ordinary unsecured
claims increases significantly the number of banks able to achieve the 8% TLOF threshold
without impacting deposits compared to the baseline hierarchy of claims. The impact on the
three categories of deposits is influenced by their relative ranking in relation to each other
under the four alternative scenarios.
When considering all 368 banks in the sample (resolution and liquidation strategies), the
number of banks able to reach the 8% TLOF threshold without impacting deposits increases by
16.5% from 272 under the baseline hierarchy of claims to 317 under each of the four
alternative scenarios of hierarchies of claims. In particular, no large banks would need deposits
to access 8% TLOF under the four alternative scenarios. When considering only banks with
resolution strategies as per 2019 PIA decisions (187 banks), the number of banks able to reach
the 8% TLOF threshold without impacting deposits increases by a similar percentage (16.1%)
from 143 under the baseline to 166 under each of the four alternative scenarios of hierarchies
of claims. However, the impact on non-preferred, preferred and covered deposits varies across
the four scenarios in function of when these rank
pari passu
or are preferred to each other. As
shown in
Table 15,
when comparing:
-
Baseline
versus
2
nd
scenario (single-tier deposit preference, all deposits
pari passu):
the
number of banks with impacted non-preferred, preferred and covered deposits changes
from 81, 8 and 2 respectively to 48 (when only banks with resolution strategies are
considered, it changes from 39, 1 and 2 banks respectively to 20);
Baseline
versus
3
rd
scenario (three-tier deposit preference, no
pari passu):
the number
of banks with impacted non-preferred decreases from 81 to 38, while the number of
banks with impacted preferred and covered deposits stays the same (8 and 2
respectively) (when only banks with resolution strategies are considered the decrease in
-
259
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
-
-
number of banks with impacted non-preferred deposits is from 39 to 17, from 2 to 1
with preferred deposits, and always one bank with covered deposits);
Baseline
versus
4
th
scenario (two-tier deposit preference with super-preference of
covered deposits, non-preferred and preferred deposits
pari passu):
the number of
banks with impacted non-preferred and preferred deposits changes from 81 and 8
respectively to 46, while the number of banks with impacted covered deposits stays the
same (2) (when only banks with resolution strategies are considered the number of
banks with impacted non-preferred and preferred deposits changes from 39 and 1
respectively to 18);
Baseline
versus
5
th
scenario (two-tier deposit preference with preferred and covered
deposits
pari passu):
the number of banks with impacted non-preferred deposits
decreases from 81 to 38, while the number of banks with impacted preferred and
covered deposits increase from 8 and 2 respectively to 10 (when only banks with
resolution strategies are considered, the number of banks with impacted non-preferred
deposits decreases from 39 to 17, while the number of banks with impacted preferred
and covered deposits increase from 1 and 2 respectively to 3).
In terms of materiality, when considering all banks in the sample, the aggregated amount of
impacted deposits decreases from EUR 18.3 bn under the baseline scenario to EUR 6.4 bn
under each of the four depositor hierarchy scenarios. When considering only banks with
resolution strategies as per Q4 2019 PIA decisions, the aggregated amount of impacted
deposits decreases from EUR 14.2 bn under the baseline to EUR 4.6 bn under each of the four
depositor hierarchy scenarios. This significant improvement in terms of depositor protection is
enabled by the preference of deposits in relation to senior unsecured claims.
The biggest improvement in terms of protected non-preferred deposits is recorded when
comparing the baseline (on aggregate EUR 17.2 bn (0.6% TLOF) impacted non-preferred
deposits for 81 banks) against the single-tier depositor preference scenario (EUR 2.7 bn (0.6%
TLOF) impacted non-preferred deposits for 48 banks) when reaching 8% TLOF. The
aggregated amount of covered deposits, which in theory would be impacted in this simulation
when reaching 8% TLOF, would increase from EUR 0.3 bn (4.4% TLOF) for two banks under
the baseline to EUR 2.8 bn (0.8% TLOF) for 48 banks under the single-tier preference.
However, the impact of changing the relative ranking of covered deposits vis-à-vis other
deposits by ensuring a single ranking does not affect or decrease in any way the protection of
the covered deposits. As also detailed in Annex 8 and Chapter 5 (section 5.5) this is because of
the following reasons: (i) covered deposits continue to be excluded from bail-in as per
Article 44(2) BRRD; (ii) the protection of covered deposits is not defined by their ranking, but
by being defined as eligible deposits (i.e. they are not excluded from DGS protection) up to the
coverage amount whose repayment is guaranteed by the DGS (generally, EUR 100 000); (iii)
the protection of cover deposits can be ensured by the DGS through alternative interventions
such as contribution to resolution (to bridge the gap to 8% TLOF in order to gain access to the
RF/SRF or independently from using the RF/SRF, e.g. when transferring deposits to an
acquirer as part of resolution action) or to alternative measures in insolvency (e.g. when
260
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0262.png
transferring deposits of a bank with negative PIA to an acquirer as part of insolvency
proceedings).
In terms of geographical distribution, in two Member States, the number of banks without
impacted deposits increased by 200% when comparing the baseline with a scenario where a
single-tier depositor preference is introduced and increased by more than 30% in four other
Member States when all the sample was considered.
Table 15: Reaching 8% TLOF – Baseline versus depositor preference scenarios
Instituti
Institutions
ons
reaching 8%
reaching
TLOF with non-
8%
preferred
TLOF
deposits and
without
amount used
deposits
Count
Count
%TLOF
N.
Institutions
reaching 8%
TLOF with
preferred non-
covered deposits
and amount used
Institutions
reaching 8%
TLOF with
covered
deposits and
amount used
Institutions not
reaching 8%
TLOF with
deposits and
additional
amount required
Hierarchy
Count
2 - Single-tier
Count
%TLOF
Count
%TLOF
Count
%TLOF
Small
Medium
Large
Resolution
Liquidation
Low
Mid
Mid-High
High
Total
195
124
49
187
181
107
44
63
154
368
166
102
49
166
151
102
38
60
117
317
28
20
0
20
28
2
6
3
37
48
0.70%
0.61%
0.00%
0.63%
0.60%
0.98%
0.27%
1.84%
0.51%
28
20
0
20
28
2
6
3
37
48
0.77%
0.27%
0.00%
0.27%
0.42%
0.48%
0.25%
0.30%
0.36%
28
20
0
20
28
2
6
3
37
48
0.92%
0.82%
0.00%
1.12%
0.40%
2.54%
1.32%
0.56%
0.69%
1
2
0
1
2
3
0
0
0
3
0.16%
0.44%
0.00%
0.41%
0.44%
0.42%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
261
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0263.png
N.
Hierarchy
Count
Institutions
Institutions
Institutions
reaching 8%
reaching reaching 8% TLOF
TLOF with
8% TLOF with non-preferred
preferred non-
without
deposits and
covered deposits
deposits
amount used
and amount used
Institutions
reaching 8%
TLOF with
covered deposits
and amount used
Institutions not
reaching 8%
TLOF with
deposits and
additional
amount required
Count
%TLOF
3 - Three-tier
Count
Count
%TLOF
Count
%TLOF
Count
%TLOF
Small
Medium
Large
Resolution
Liquidation
Low
Mid
Mid-High
High
Total
195
124
49
187
181
107
44
63
154
368
166
102
49
166
151
102
38
60
117
317
20
18
0
17
21
1
6
3
28
38
1.80%
1.16%
0.00%
1.21%
1.17%
1.00%
1.83%
2.54%
1.05%
7
1
0
1
7
1
0
0
7
8
1.99%
1.94%
0.00%
1.93%
2.02%
1.93%
0.00%
0.00%
1.96%
1
1
0
2
0
0
0
0
2
2
1.06%
4.45%
0.00%
4.35%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
4.35%
1
2
0
1
2
3
0
0
0
3
0.16%
0.44%
0.00%
0.41%
0.44%
0.42%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
N.
Institutions
Institutions
Institutions
reaching 8%
reaching reaching 8% TLOF
TLOF with
8% TLOF with non-preferred
preferred non-
without
deposits and
covered deposits
deposits
amount used
and amount used
Institutions
reaching 8%
TLOF with
covered deposits
and amount used
Institutions not
reaching 8%
TLOF with
deposits and
additional
amount required
Hierarchy
Count
4 - Two-tier (covered senior to preferred)
Count
Count
%TLOF
Count
%TLOF
Count
%TLOF
Count
%TLOF
Small
Medium
Large
Resolution
Liquidation
Low
Mid
Mid-High
High
Total
195
124
49
187
181
107
44
63
154
368
166
102
49
166
151
102
38
60
117
317
27
19
0
18
28
2
6
3
35
46
0.95%
0.83%
0.00%
0.89%
0.73%
0.99%
0.94%
2.03%
0.70%
27
19
0
18
28
2
6
3
35
46
1.45%
0.87%
0.00%
1.05%
0.77%
2.59%
0.90%
1.07%
0.94%
1
1
0
2
0
0
0
0
2
2
1.06%
4.45%
0.00%
4.35%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
4.35%
1
2
0
1
2
3
0
0
0
3
0.16%
0.44%
0.00%
0.41%
0.44%
0.42%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
262
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0264.png
N.
Institutions
reaching 8%
TLOF
without
deposits
Institutions
Institutions
reaching 8%
reaching 8% TLOF
TLOF with
with non-preferred
preferred non-
deposits and
covered deposits
amount used
and amount used
Institutions
reaching 8%
TLOF with
covered deposits
and amount used
Institutions not
reaching 8%
TLOF with
deposits and
additional
amount required
Hierarchy
Count
5 - Two-tier (covered
pari passu
with preferred)
Count
Count
%TLOF
Count
%TLOF
Count
%TLOF
Count
%TLOF
Small
Medium
Large
Resolution
Liquidation
Low
Mid
Mid-High
High
Total
195
124
49
187
181
107
44
63
154
368
166
102
49
166
151
102
38
60
117
317
20
18
0
17
21
1
6
3
28
38
1.80%
1.16%
0.00%
1.21%
1.17%
1.00%
1.83%
2.54%
1.05%
8
2
0
3
7
1
0
0
9
10
1.23%
0.46%
0.00%
0.46%
1.25%
0.31%
0.00%
0.00%
0.65%
8
2
0
3
7
1
0
0
9
10
0.78%
2.24%
0.00%
2.23%
0.77%
1.62%
0.00%
0.00%
1.90%
1
2
0
1
2
3
0
0
0
3
0.16%
0.44%
0.00%
0.41%
0.44%
0.42%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
Source: Commission services based on EBA CfA report and SRB data as of Q4 2019.
3.2.4. Baseline versus alternatives for bail-inable capacity
The results described in the previous sections assess the impacts of various scenarios when
considering the bail-inable capacity of banks (with the complete or partial exclusion of
deposits) as of Q4 2019. Additionally, as described in section 2.3, considering the final MREL
requirement that banks need to comply with by the end of the transitional period would
complement the previous results by also anticipating the ability of banks to meet 8% TLOF and
the assessment of DGS interventions in the steady state. However, based on the data available,
only one entity (out of 368) has a bail-inable capacity (including deposits) based on the 2019
balance sheet data that is currently lower than its estimated MREL target by the end of the
transition period. Irrespective of the possible changes of the bail-inable capacity linked to the
progressive path to the compliance with MREL requirements, the other analyses will therefore
not rely on this additional scenario (i.e. MREL requirement when higher than the bail-inable
capacity).
3.2.5. Combined scenarios
Combining the various dimensions of the statistical approach allows for a more accurate
description of the impacts along a set of reasonable assumptions underpinning the analysis of
the policy options.
The tables included in this section are based on three selected combined scenarios (static
approach). While a larger number of combined scenarios could have been shown (25
263
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0265.png
combinations of CET1 depletion and depositor preference), this section focuses on a selection
of reasonable combined scenarios in the context of the policy options. In particular, combined
scenario 1 underpins the retained policy option, while the additional combined scenarios
present a level of severity for CET1 depletion, which is the mid-point between the baseline and
the most severe scenario and the three-tier depositor preference, which retains the super-
preference of covered deposits:
Statistical
approach
Combined
scenario 1
Combined
scenario 2
Resolution
entities
(irrespectiv
e of
strategy)
Scope
Loss
allocation
Not
relevant
(simulated
losses
applied
directly on
the balance
sheet of the
resolution
entity)
Loss simulation
(CET1 depletion)
Scenario 1: No
depletion
Creditor
hierarchy
Bail-inable
capacity
Scenario 1: All
bail-inable
liabilities (except
those with
maturity below 1
month) with
gradual exclusion
of deposits
Scenario 2: Single-
tier depositor
preference
Combined
scenario 3
Source: Commission services.
Scenario 3: CET1
depleted down to
the level of Pillar 1
and Pillar 2
requirement
Scenario 3: Three-
tier depositor
preference
-
Combined scenario 1
reflects a situation without CET1 depletion, a single-tier
depositor preference and all bail-inable liabilities reported as of end-2019 (except short-
term liabilities) with gradual exclusion of deposits. The design of this combined
scenario is relevant insofar as it allows measuring the ability to access 8% TLOF by
considering all CET1 that could account for historical losses and relies on the depositor
preference scenario that maximises the equal treatment of depositors (pari
passu
across
all eligible categories) without lowering the level of protection and therefore creating
space for DGS interventions under the LCT (see also section 4).
Combined scenario 2
reflects a situation where the CET1 level is depleted and the bank
would enter resolution after all buffers absorbed losses, and assumes the same single-
tier depositor preference and bail-inable capacity as above. The design of this combined
scenario is relevant insofar as it allows a direct comparison with the first combined
scenario to measure the effect of further CET1 depletion, featuring larger losses or a
different timing for FOLF determination at the point where solvency conditions for
authorisation are at risk.
Combined scenario 3
reflects the same depletion of CET1 as above, but it considers a
three-tier depositor preference and applies the same bail-in capacity as the other
combined scenarios. The design of this combined scenario is relevant insofar as it
shows the effect, compared to the second combined scenario, of preserving more
discrimination in the depositor preference and retaining the super-preference of covered
deposits, which lowers the possible use of DGS via the LCT. As previous combined
scenarios, it also shows, compared to the baseline, the effect of introducing a general
depositor preference
vis-à-vis
ordinary unsecured liabilities.
264
-
-
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0266.png
Summary assessment – Combined scenarios
The analysis of the three combined scenarios enables a comparative view of impacts
on deposits when reaching the 8% TLOF threshold when different severity of CET1
depletion would be combined with different depositor preference.
Combining various levels of CET1 depletion and depositor preference shows that the
introduction of a single-tier depositor preference has an important effect on the ability
of banks to reach the 8% TLOF threshold without using deposits, irrespective of the
loss scenario used for the analysis. In particular, compared to the baseline scenario
(where the applicable creditor hierarchy is used), an additional 45 banks would be able
to reach the threshold without using deposits due to increasing the ranking of non-
preferred deposits against other ordinary unsecured liabilities. Assuming CET1
depleted down to the level of Pillar 1 and Pillar 2 requirement, under a single-tier
depositor preference, 45% of the banks would be able to reach the 8% TLOF threshold
without deposits compared to 23% when considering a similar magnitude of CET1
depletion but no change to the depositor preference. Given that all deposits would rank
pari passu,
the number of banks for which preferred and covered deposits would be
reached also increases, and may allow using DGS under the LCT (see also section 4).
Maintaining a super-preference for covered deposits would lead to an increased impact
on other forms of deposits, often leaving covered deposits unaffected (which has an
important impact on the LCT, see section 4), when assessing the ability to reach 8%
TLOF, in particular when loss scenarios are more severe.
Detailed analysis
The following tables shows the ability of institutions to reach the 8% TLOF threshold under the
three combined scenarios.
The analysis under the first combined scenario shows that, assuming no CET1 depletion and a
single-tier depositor preference, a total of 317 out of 368 institutions would reach the 8%
TLOF threshold without imposing losses on deposits, representing up to 89% of the sample for
the banks earmarked for resolution. In particular, deposits would have to be bailed-in in 12.5%
of the small and 15% of the medium-sized banks to reach the threshold, for an amount of EUR
0.21 bn and EUR 2.52 bn respectively. When considering the funding structure, banks
earmarked for resolution with a high prevalence of deposits are more prone to inflict losses on
deposits when reaching 8% TLOF (14 out of 60). The proportions are similar for banks
earmarked for liquidation, with 84% of small and 78% of medium-sized banks able to reach
8% TLOF without deposits. The impact of the funding structure for banks with high prevalence
of deposits is also comparable (76% of banks earmarked for liquidation would reach 8% TLOF
without deposits against 77% for banks earmarked for resolution). In addition, deposits in 13
Member States would be protected when reaching the 8% TLOF threshold under the combined
scenario 1, against seven Member States under the baseline.
265
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
The second combined scenario shows that, when considering a more severe CET1 depletion
scenario, the number of institutions where deposits would be protected when reaching the 8%
TLOF decreases materially, representing 54% of the banks earmarked for resolution. The effect
of the prevalence of deposits in the funding structure is more important: 31 banks earmarked
for resolution having a high or medium-high share of deposits out of 99 (31%) would reach 8%
TLOF without deposits. This proportion falls to 18.6% when considering banks earmarked for
liquidation.
In comparison, under the third combined scenario the same number of banks would not be able
to reach the 8% TLOF without imposing losses on deposits, with mostly non-preferred deposits
affected. Even with a three-tier depositor preference, covered deposits would be reached in 10
cases considering all banks irrespective of their strategy, mostly small institutions with high
prevalence of deposits.
In terms of materiality, when considering all banks in the sample, the aggregated amount of
impacted deposits decreases from EUR 18.3 bn under the baseline scenario to EUR 6.4 bn
under the first combined scenario where a single-tier depositor preference is introduced,
keeping all other parameters unchanged. Assuming a higher level of CET1 depletion, up to
EUR 47.4 bn of deposits would be affected under a single-tier or a three-tier depositor
preference (scenario 2 or 3), compared to more EUR 123.7 bn using currently applicable
depositor preference. This result must however be read in conjunction with the outcome of the
analysis performed in section 4.1.4, based on which the introduction of a single-tier depositor
preference allows for greater interventions of DGS to protect depositors.
266
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0268.png
Table 16: Reaching 8% TLOF – Combined scenarios
Institutio
ns
reaching
8%
TLOF
without
deposits
Institutions
Institutions
Institutions
reaching 8%
reaching 8% TLOF
reaching 8%
TLOF with non-
with preferred non-
TLOF with
preferred
covered deposits covered deposits
deposits and
and amount used and amount used
amount used
Institutions not
reaching 8%
TLOF with
deposits and
additional
amount required
N.
Comb.
Scenarios
Count
1 (No depletion, single-tier depositor preference)
Count
Count
%TLOF
Count
%TLOF
Count
%TLOF
Count
%TLOF
Small
Medium
Large
Low
Resolution Mid
Mid-
High
High
Total
Small
Medium
Large
Low
Liquidation Mid
Mid-
High
High
Total
56
87
44
63
25
39
60
187
139
37
5
44
19
24
94
181
49
73
44
61
22
37
46
166
117
29
5
41
16
23
71
151
7
13
0
1
3
2
14
20
21
7
0
1
3
1
23
28
1.27%
0.61%
0.00%
0.99%
0.24%
2.71%
0.38%
7
13
0
1
3
2
14
20
0.15%
0.28%
0.00%
0.00%
0.24%
0.10%
0.29%
7
13
0
1
3
2
14
20
0.36%
1.15%
0.00%
0.00%
1.50%
0.13%
1.03%
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
0.00%
0.41%
0.00%
0.41%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.50%
0.62%
0.00%
0.10%
0.33%
0.15%
0.68%
21
7
0
1
3
1
23
28
0.98%
0.24%
0.00%
0.48%
0.30%
0.39%
0.45%
21
7
0
1
3
1
23
28
1.10%
0.25%
0.00%
2.54%
0.90%
1.37%
0.23%
1
1
0
2
0
0
0
2
0.16%
0.47%
0.00%
0.44%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
267
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0269.png
N.
Comb.
Scenarios
Count
Institutions
Institutions
Institutions
Institutions
reaching reaching 8% TLOF reaching 8% TLOF
reaching 8%
8% TLOF with non-preferred with preferred non-
TLOF with
without
deposits and
covered deposits covered deposits
deposits
amount used
and amount used and amount used
Institutions not
reaching 8%
TLOF with
deposits and
additional
amount required
2 (Depletion of buffers, single-tier depositor preference)
Count
Count
%TLOF
Count
%TLOF
Count
%TLOF
Count
%TLOF
Small
Medium
Large
Low
Resolution Mid
Mid-
High
High
Total
Small
Medium
Large
Low
Liquidation Mid
Mid-
High
High
Total
56
87
44
63
25
39
60
187
139
37
5
44
19
24
94
181
20
45
36
55
15
19
12
101
40
20
5
35
8
10
12
65
36
40
8
6
10
20
48
84
97
15
0
5
11
14
82
112
1.16%
1.04%
0.65%
3.53%
0.29%
0.32%
1.61%
36
40
8
6
10
20
48
84
0.49%
0.45%
0.24%
0.33%
0.32%
0.26%
0.71%
36
40
8
6
10
20
48
84
1.35%
1.71%
0.65%
0.57%
1.46%
1.23%
1.51%
0
2
0
2
0
0
0
2
0.00%
0.34%
0.00%
0.34%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.91%
1.45%
0.00%
0.60%
0.41%
0.51%
1.96%
97
15
0
5
11
14
82
112
0.93%
0.62%
0.00%
0.72%
0.33%
0.53%
1.03%
97
15
0
5
11
14
82
112
2.09%
1.16%
0.00%
2.38%
1.01%
1.57%
1.61%
2
2
0
4
0
0
0
4
0.32%
0.47%
0.00%
0.46%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
268
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0270.png
N.
Comb.
Scenarios
Count
Institutions
Institutions
reaching 8%
reaching
TLOF with non-
8% TLOF
preferred
without
deposits and
deposits
amount used
Institutions
Institutions
reaching 8% TLOF
reaching 8%
with preferred non-
TLOF with
covered deposits covered deposits
and amount used and amount used
Institutions not
reaching 8%
TLOF with
deposits and
additional
amount required
3 (Depletion of buffers, three tier depositor preference)
Count
Count
%TLOF
Count
%TLOF
Count
%TLOF
Count
%TLOF
Small
Medium
Large
Low
Resolution Mid
Mid-
High
High
Total
Small
Medium
Large
Low
Liquidation Mid
Mid-
High
High
Total
56
87
44
63
25
39
60
187
139
37
5
44
19
24
94
181
20
45
36
55
15
19
12
101
40
20
5
35
8
10
12
65
30
33
7
6
10
16
38
70
56
13
0
3
9
10
47
69
2.84%
2.73%
1.43%
3.71%
2.07%
1.73%
3.03%
5
6
1
0
0
4
8
12
1.61%
1.94%
0.33%
0.00%
0.00%
0.41%
2.49%
1
1
0
0
0
0
2
2
2.61%
5.74%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
5.65%
0
2
0
2
0
0
0
2
0.00%
0.34%
0.00%
0.34%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
3.02%
2.72%
0.00%
2.35%
1.72%
2.55%
3.42%
36
2
0
1
2
3
32
38
2.69%
1.84%
0.00%
4.02%
1.96%
0.74%
2.26%
5
0
0
1
0
1
3
5
2.78%
0.00%
0.00%
1.66%
0.00%
3.53%
2.79%
2
2
0
4
0
0
0
4
0.32%
0.47%
0.00%
0.46%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
Sources: Commission services, based on EBA CfA report and SRB data as of Q4 2019.
Figure 23 shows the comparison among the combined scenarios and with the baseline on the
banks’ ability to reach 8% TLOF with or without deposits.
The top chart provides an overview of the impact of the introduction of a single-tier depositor
preference on the ability of banks to reach the 8% TLOF threshold, by comparing the first
combined scenario and the baseline. Compared to the baseline scenario (where the applicable
creditor hierarchy is used), an additional 45 banks are able to reach the threshold without using
deposits due to increasing the ranking of non-preferred deposits against other normal unsecured
liabilities. Given that all deposits would rank
pari passu,
the number of banks for which
269
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
preferred and covered deposits would be reached also increases, and may allow using DGS
under the least cost test (see section 5).
The second chart illustrates how the single-tier depositor preference would be impacted by a
greater severity of loss depletion scenario, by comparing the first and the second combined
scenario. Assuming a depletion of all buffers leads to a sharp decrease of the number of banks
able to reach 8% TLOF without deposits under a single-tier depositor preference,
commensurate to the increase of cases where deposits, all ranking
pari passu,
would be
touched. Under this scenario, 45% of the banks would be able to reach the 8% TLOF threshold
without deposits compared to 23% when considering a similar magnitude of CET1 depletion
but no change to the depositor preference.
The third chart describes the relative impact of the introduction of a single-tier depositor
preference compared to a three-tier depositor preference, by comparing the first and the second
combined scenario, i.e. both relying on the same level of CET1 depletion. Compared to a
single-tier system, a general three-tier depositor preference would significantly reduce the
number of banks able to reach the 8% TLOF even considering covered deposits.
270
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0272.png
Figure 23: Reaching 8% TLOF – Combined scenarios
Source: Commission services, based on EBA CfA report and SRB data as of Q4 2019.
271
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0273.png
4.
DGS
INTERVENTIONS
The objectives of this section are to determine: (i) the ability of DGS to intervene as per the
LCT under various scenarios to protect depositors and substitute possible losses born by
depositors, (ii) the extent to which DGS interventions are likely to absorb losses in insolvency
and, in resolution, to reach the 8% TLOF threshold after a bail-in of the eligible liabilities, and
(iii) the availability of DGS funds and the likely impact of hybrid EDIS. In this quantitative
analysis, the LCT amount is defined as the amount of covered deposits affected by the
simulated losses under an insolvency counterfactual, which represents the maximum amount of
DGS contribution to various measures.
As a first step, section 4.1 relies on the static approach, based on predefined scenarios of loss
simulations (i.e. CET1 depletion), depositor preference and bail-inable capacity, applied when
testing the ability to reach 8% TLOF. The focus is primarily on the scenario of depositor
preference that can support a DGS intervention.
On this basis, a second step is carried out in section 4.2 based on the modelling approach
described in section 2.4, whereby losses are simulated by the SYMBOL model and allocated
within resolution groups, primarily assuming that the resolution group structure is maintained
(i.e. losses are allocated to subsidiaries up until the level of internal loss absorbing
requirements, while and any remaining losses, if any, are transferred to the parent entity)
446
.
The most relevant scenarios from the static statistical analysis are used in the model-based
approach, which gives a more accurate view of the impact on institutions by simulating and
allocating losses according to bank-specific parameters. Results are presented for three types of
crises: a crisis similar to the global financial crisis of 2008 and two other crises, one less and
one more severe.
Overall, the results are very sensitive to the level of assumed recovery rate: the higher the
losses on the assets in insolvency (haircut), the lower the recovery rate in a payout in
insolvency and the higher the amount that the DGS could contribute to various measures, as
emerging from the LCT. This means that the alternative DGS interventions allowed by the
LCT are comparatively less expensive than a DGS payout in insolvency. As a result, DGS
interventions may become more frequent and contribute to a larger extent to the various
measures (compared to the status quo).
The recovery rate is instrumental in determining the amount of expected losses of the DGS in
case of payout (i.e. the insolvency counterfactual in the LCT calculation). Lowering the
recovery rate would increase the amount of expected losses in insolvency for the DGS and,
consequently through the LCT, unlock more DGS funds. As mentioned in section 2.3 in this
Annex, the assessments in this Annex are primarily based on an 85% recovery rate in the LCT
446
According to the BRRD, the resolution group structure is maintained when resolution tools are applied only to
the resolution entity (e.g. the parent entity), while other subsidiaries in the group which are not resolution entities
themselves absorb losses by transferring them to the resolution entity through the bail-in of internal loss absorbing
capacity (so-called internal MREL) which has pre-positioned
ex ante
by the parent entity on the balance sheet of
the subsidiary).
272
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0274.png
insolvency counterfactual, however results for a 50% recovery rate are also briefly described
(see section 4.5) in order to illustrate the sensitivity of the results to this parameter. Two main
impacts could be observed by applying a recovery rate lower than 85%
447
. First, it would
reduce the number of banks that cannot reach the 8% TLOF threshold as a result of an
insufficient or a negative LCT. Second, as more DGS funds would be used, it would also
increase the number of national DGSs unable to finance the gap to the 8% TLOF due to a
liquidity shortfall. The lower the recovery rate, the stronger these two impacts
448
.
Considerations on the impact of recovery rates can also be found in section 3.1.5 of the EBA
CfA report.
4.1. Least cost test and DGS interventions (statistical approach) (Step C)
This section complements the analysis in section 3 and assesses the maximum level of funds
unlocked by the LCT for DGS contributions in resolution or to finance an alternative measure
in insolvency
449
. Additionally, for those institutions where DGS interventions would be
deemed possible under the LCT, this section assesses to what extent the DGS contributions in
resolution would allow reaching the threshold of 8% TLOF. The analysis also shows the
number of cases where DGS interventions in resolution would not be sufficient to access
external financing via the resolution fund. Statistics on cases where the 8% TLOF cannot be
reached could inform the considerations of including indirect costs in the LCT calculation in
the new CMDI framework.
4.1.1. Baseline
Table 17
shows, in aggregate, the number of institutions for which DGS interventions are
possible (positive LCT) under the baseline scenario (no CET1 depletion, applicable creditor
hierarchy in each Member State, full bail-inable capacity except liabilities with maturity shorter
than one month) and, whether DGS contributions would allow reaching a level of 8% TLOF to
access the RF/SRF. As for previous analyses, the results concern all entities, irrespective of
their strategy.
Summary assessment – LCT Baseline
The LCT would yield a positive result for only three out of 91 banks that would
require a DGS intervention to reach the 8% TLOF under the baseline scenario
considering an 85% recovery rate in insolvency (out of a total sample of 368 banks).
The DGS support would suffice for two out of these three banks.
447
448
These impacts would be the same for all the figures in this section.
Conversely, a recovery rate higher than 85% would increase the number of banks unable to reach the 8%
TLOF due to an insufficient LCT and would reduce the number of DGSs facing a liquidity shortfall.
449
Where covered deposits would bear losses under various scenarios, and therefore determine the potential cost
of the payout for the DGS in an insolvency counterfactual.
273
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0275.png
Detailed analysis
Under the baseline scenario and an assumed recovery rate of 85%, the banks that cannot access
the 8% TLOF threshold without imposing losses on deposits would need to unlock DGS
intervention based on the LCT in order to access the RF/SRF. Out of the 91 banks (from a
sample of 368 banks) that would need deposits to reach 8% TLOF, the LCT would be positive
for only three banks, out of which the DGS support would be sufficient to bridge the gap until
the 8% TOLF threshold in only two cases. DGS interventions would not be possible (negative
LCT) for 88 banks thereby exposing deposits to losses in order to access resolution financing
arrangements unless public support would be envisaged. The results are very similar
irrespective of the size of the bank, the resolution strategy or its geographical location.
Table 17: LCT – Baseline
Institutions
reaching 8%
TLOF with
deposits,
requiring DGS
contribution
Count
N.
Of which:
Institutions for
which DGS can
intervene
(positive LCT)
Of which:
Institutions for
which DGS
interventions
under the LCT
are sufficient to
reach 8% TLOF
Count
Count
Small
Medium
Large
Resolution
Liquidation
Low
Mid
Mid-High
High
Total
195
124
49
187
181
107
44
63
154
368
46
39
6
42
49
16
12
11
52
91
2
1
0
1
2
1
0
0
2
3
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
2
2
Source: Commission services, based on EBA CfA report and SRB data as of Q4 2019, assuming an 85% recovery
rate.
4.1.2. Baseline versus more severe CET1 depletion scenarios
Table 18
shows the increasing risks for depositors under various scenarios of losses in line with
the CET1 depletion assumptions described in section 2.3. All other dimensions remain as per
the baseline scenario.
274
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0276.png
Summary assessment – Baseline versus more severe CET1 depletion scenarios
As a general observation, while the more severe CET1 depletion scenarios increase
the number of institutions where deposits would need to bear losses, the effects of the
scenarios remain limited with respect to the ability of DGS to intervene and
contribute enough to reach the 8% TLOF threshold due to the LCT.
Detailed analysis
As highlighted in section 3.2.2, a higher severity of CET1 depletion increases the number of
institutions where deposits would need to bear losses to reach the 8% TLOF threshold,
irrespective of the size classification.
Figure 24
highlights the changes in the number of banks
reaching 8% TLOF using deposits for each scenario of CET1 depletion. In aggregate, deposits
in 299 banks would be impacted to access resolution financing arrangements under the most
severe CET1 depletion scenario, i.e. an increase of 208 banks against the baseline scenario. In
total, deposits would have to bear losses in 88% of the small banks, 79% of the medium-sized
and 59% of the large banks in this most extreme CET1 depletion scenario.
Figure 24: Baseline versus depletion scenarios (number of institutions reaching 8% TLOF
with deposits, per scenario of CET1 depletion)
Source: Commission services, based on EBA CfA report and SRB data as of Q4 2019.
However, irrespective of the CET1 depletion scenario, the number of institutions where the
DGS can intervene under the LCT would remain limited to a maximum of six banks, of which
four small and two medium-sized institutions, most of them having a high prevalence of
deposits in their balance sheet. The results are identical in the three most severe CET1
depletion scenarios (i.e. as soon as buffers are depleted) showing the constraint imposed by the
LCT due in part to the applicable creditor hierarchies in each Member State.
275
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0277.png
Table 18: LCT – Baseline versus CET1 depletion scenarios
Institutions
reaching 8%
TLOF with
deposits,
requiring DGS
contribution
Of which:
Institutions for
which DGS
interventions
under the LCT
are sufficient to
reach 8% TLOF
2 - Depletion 75% of buffers
Of which:
Institutions for
which DGS can
intervene
(positive least
cost test)
Count
Count
N.
CET1 Depletion
Count
Small
Medium
Large
Resolution
Liquidation
Low
Mid
Mid-High
High
Total
195
124
49
187
181
107
44
63
154
368
134
83
22
114
125
38
30
41
130
239
3
2
0
2
3
1
0
0
4
5
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
2
2
N.
CET1 Depletion
Institutions
reaching 8%
TLOF with
deposits,
requiring DGS
contribution
Of which:
Institutions for
which DGS can
intervene
(positive least
cost test)
Of which:
Institutions for
which DGS
interventions
under the LCT
are sufficient to
reach 8% TLOF
3 - Depletion of all buffers
Count
Count
Count
Small
Medium
Large
Resolution
Liquidation
Low
Mid
Mid-High
High
Total
195
124
49
187
181
107
44
63
154
368
156
92
25
131
142
47
34
51
141
273
4
2
0
2
4
1
0
0
5
6
1
2
0
2
1
0
0
0
3
3
276
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0278.png
N.
CET1 Depletion
Small
Medium
Large
Resolution
Liquidation
Low
Mid
Mid-High
High
Total
195
124
49
187
181
107
44
63
154
368
Institutions
reaching 8%
TLOF with
deposits,
requiring DGS
contribution
Of which:
Institutions for
which DGS can
intervene
(positive least
cost test)
Of which:
Institutions for
which DGS
interventions
under the LCT
are sufficient to
reach 8% TLOF
Count
4 - Depletion of all buffers and 50% of P2R
Count
Count
164
95
27
136
150
51
34
54
147
286
4
2
0
2
4
1
0
0
5
6
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
2
2
N.
CET1 Depletion
Small
Medium
Large
Resolution
Liquidation
Low
Mid
Mid-High
High
Total
195
124
49
187
181
107
44
63
154
368
Institutions
reaching 8%
TLOF with
deposits,
requiring DGS
contribution
Of which:
Institutions for
which DGS
interventions
under the LCT
are sufficient to
reach 8% TLOF
5 - Depletion of all buffers and 100% of P2R
Of which:
Institutions for
which DGS can
intervene
(positive least
cost test)
Count
Count
Count
172
98
29
146
153
54
35
60
150
299
4
2
0
2
4
1
0
0
5
6
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
2
2
Source: Commission services, based on EBA CfA report and SRB data as of Q4 2019, assuming an 85%
recovery rate.
277
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0279.png
4.1.3. Baseline versus alternative depositor preference scenarios
This section shows when DGS interventions would be possible (positive LCT) under
various scenarios of depositor preference as described in section 2.3 and whether DGS
contributions would allow reaching a level of 8% TLOF. All other dimensions remain as
per the baseline scenario.
Summary assessment – Baseline versus alternative depositor preference scenarios
Under a comparative analysis, the introduction of depositor preference would
shield deposits from bearing losses by reducing most significantly the number of
banks where non-preferred deposits would be impacted when reaching 8% TLOF.
When assuming a 85% recovery rate, the number of banks where deposits would
be impacted would decrease from 91 banks in the baseline scenario to 48 under the
single-tier depositor preference (out of 368 in total), reducing the EUR value of
impacted deposits from EUR 18.3 bn in the baseline to EUR 6.4 bn and unlocking
the most significant amount of funds for DGS contributions under the LCT (on
average up to twenty times higher (EUR 0.98 bn) than under the baseline or the
alternative scenarios retaining the super-preference of covered deposits (EUR
0.05 bn)). The DGS intervention under the LCT would be sufficient to bridge the
gap towards 8% TLOF in 76% of cases when considering the entire sample and in
88% of cases when considering only banks with resolution strategy.
Detailed analysis
When assuming a 85% recovery rate and considering a single-tier depositor preference
(scenario 2) and the entire sample, DGS can intervene under the LCT for 89% of small
banks and 80% of medium banks for which deposits would be impacted when calculating
the 8% TLOF threshold (reminder: under the alternative scenarios of depositor
preference, no large banks would need deposits to access 8% TLOF). When considering
only entities for which the strategy is resolution, DGS interventions under the LCT are
possible for 80% of the banks for which deposits would be bailed-in, and would allow
reaching the 8% TLOF threshold in 88% of the cases. The proportion of banks for which
DGS interventions would be possible but insufficient to reach the 8% TLOF threshold is
particularly concentrated in one Member State (75% of banks in that Member State for
which deposits would need to be bailed-in), accounting for two-thirds of the total cases in
the sample where DGS interventions under the LCT are insufficient.
Changing the creditor hierarchy but retaining the super-preference of covered deposits
has no impact against the baseline. Finally, scenario 5, where covered deposits rank
pari
passu
with preferred deposits is an intermediate step between the baseline and the single-
tier depositor preference: under scenario 5, the LCT would enable the DGS intervention
for 18 banks to protect deposits when reaching 8% TLOF (against 41 under a single-tier
depositor preference), and these interventions would allow reaching a level of 8% TLOF
in 13 cases (against 31 under a single-tier depositor preference).
278
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0280.png
Table 19: LCT – Baseline versus depositor preference scenarios
Of which:
Institutions
Of which:
Institutions for
reaching 8%
Institutions for
which DGS
TLOF with
which DGS can
interventions
deposits,
intervene
under the LCT
requiring DGS (positive least
are sufficient to
contribution
cost test)
reach 8% TLOF
2 - Single-tier
Count
Count
Count
N.
Hierarchy
Small
Medium
Large
Resolution
Liquidation
Low
Mid
Mid-High
High
Total
195
124
49
187
181
107
44
63
154
368
28
20
0
20
28
2
6
3
37
48
25
16
0
16
25
1
5
2
33
41
20
11
0
14
17
1
5
2
23
31
N.
Hierarchy
Of which:
Institutions
Institutions
reaching 8%
for which
TLOF with
DGS can
deposits,
intervene
requiring DGS
(positive least
contribution
cost test)
3 - Three-tier
Count
Count
Of which:
Institutions for
which DGS
interventions
under the LCT
are sufficient to
reach 8% TLOF
Count
Small
Medium
Large
Resolution
Liquidation
Low
Mid
Mid-High
High
Total
195
124
49
187
181
107
44
63
154
368
28
20
0
20
28
2
6
3
37
48
2
1
0
1
2
1
0
0
2
3
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
2
2
279
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0281.png
N.
Hierarchy
Small
Medium
Large
Resolution
Liquidation
Low
Mid
Mid-High
High
Total
195
124
49
187
181
107
44
63
154
368
Of which:
Institutions
Of which:
Institutions for
reaching 8% Institutions for
which DGS
TLOF with
which DGS can
interventions
deposits,
intervene
under the LCT
requiring DGS (positive least
are sufficient to
contribution
cost test)
reach 8% TLOF
4 - Two-tier (super-preference for covered
deposits )
Count
Count
Count
28
20
0
20
28
2
6
3
37
48
2
1
0
1
2
1
0
0
2
3
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
2
2
N.
Hierarchy
Small
Medium
Large
Resolution
Liquidation
Low
Mid
Mid-High
High
Total
195
124
49
187
181
107
44
63
154
368
Of which:
Institutions
Institutions
reaching 8%
for which
TLOF with
DGS can
deposits,
intervene
requiring DGS
(positive least
contribution
cost test)
Of which:
Institutions for
which DGS
interventions
under the LCT
are sufficient to
reach 8% TLOF
5 - Two-tier (no super-preference for covered
deposits)
Count
Count
Count
28
20
0
20
28
2
6
3
37
48
12
6
0
4
14
1
1
1
15
18
10
3
0
2
11
1
0
1
11
13
Source: Commission services, based on EBA CfA report and SRB data as of Q4 2019, assuming an 85%
recovery rate.
Figure 25
depicts a comparative view of the ability to reach 8% TLOF with or without
deposits according to each depositor preference scenario. The shift from the baseline to
280
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0282.png
the single-tier deposit preference (scenario 2) would impact all deposits (non-preferred,
preferred, covered) to the same extent, however, in a smaller number of banks. As shown
in
Figure 26,
this would improve the depositor protection and attain the objective of
facilitating a greater DGS contribution to various measures (preventive, resolution,
alternative measures in insolvency) under the LCT. While some other scenarios maintain
the super-preference of covered deposits, they do not meet the objective of facilitating
DGS funding under the LCT, which due to the very nature of the LCT, would be less
costly than a payout intervention in insolvency. Please see also the explanations in
section 3.2.3 on maintaining the full protection of covered deposits under a single-tier
ranking preference.
Figure 25: Reaching 8% TLOF – Baseline versus depositor preference scenarios
Source: Commission services based on EBA CfA report and SRB data as of Q4 2019.
In fact, the following
Figure 26
highlights the relative impact of each scenario of
depositor preference against the baseline on the ability for DGS to intervene based on a
positive LCT. The dark blue bars represent the percentage of banks for which deposits
would need to be bailed-in to reach 8% TLOF, but where the LCT is negative, preventing
a DGS intervention. The introduction of a single-tier preference would have a
comparable effect across all size groups, irrespective of their strategy, with 55% to 71%
of banks benefiting from DGS interventions sufficient to reach 8% TLOF, under an
assumed recovery rate of 85%.
281
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0283.png
Figure 26: LCT – Baseline versus depositor preference
Source: Commission services, based on EBA CfA report and SRB data as of Q4 2019, assuming an 85%
recovery rate.
The type of depositor preference also impacts the maximum amount of DGS funds
allowed under the LCT in resolution or to finance alternative measures in insolvency. In
particular, the single-tier depositor preference unlocks the maximum amount of funds
pursuant to the LCT, on average up to twenty times higher than under the current creditor
hierarchy at national level or the alternative scenarios 3 and 4. The difference is
282
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0284.png
particularly sizeable for large and mid-sized institutions. The last scenario of depositor
preference (i.e. covered deposits ranking
pari passu
and preferred deposits) also allows
for larger DGS contributions, however, not as significant as under the single-tier
preference.
Table 20: LCT – Baseline versus depositor preference scenarios - Maximum amount of
DGS interventions under the LCT (EUR bn)
Maximum amount of DGS funds based on LCT (EUR bn)
Hierarchy
Small
Medium
Large
Resolution
Liquidation
Low
Mid
Mid-High
High
1
EUR
2
EUR
3
EUR
4
EUR
5
EUR
0.02
0.03
0.00
0.03
0.02
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.05
0.12
0.74
0.12
0.75
0.23
0.01
0.15
0.31
0.51
0.02
0.03
0.00
0.03
0.02
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.05
0.02
0.03
0.00
0.03
0.02
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.05
0.03
0.18
0.00
0.06
0.16
0.00
0.00
0.01
0.21
0.05
0.98
0.05
0.05
0.21
Total
Source: Commission services, based on EBA CfA report and SRB data as of Q4 2019, assuming an 85%
recovery rate.
4.1.4. Combined scenarios
The same combined scenarios as described under section 3.2.5 are also assessed in this
section order to determine the LCT and the extent of potential DGS contributions.
283
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0285.png
Summary assessment – Combined scenarios
The analysis of the three combined scenarios enables a comparative view of the
ability of DGS to intervene and possibly reach the 8% TLOF threshold when
different severity of CET1 depletion would be combined with different depositor
preference scenarios, under an assumption of 85% recovery rate.
As indicated in section 3.2.5, combining various levels of CET1 depletion and
depositor preference shows that the introduction of a single-tier depositor preference
has an important effect on the ability of DGS to intervene and support reaching a
level of 8% TLOF, irrespective of the loss scenario used for the analysis. In
particular, under the baseline scenario, DGS interventions would be possible under
the LCT for only 3.3% of banks for which deposits are needed to reach 8% TLOF.
The introduction of a single-tier depositor preference increases this proportion to
85% of banks when considering no depletion, and 69% when assuming that all
buffers have been depleted. Similarly, 76% of the DGS interventions would be
sufficient to reach 8% TLOF assuming no depletion (40% assuming all buffers are
depleted).
Maintaining the super-preference of covered deposits would prevent the DGS to
intervene and reaching the 8% TLOF to access the RF/SRF may have a high impact
on the other types of deposits, in particular under more severe loss scenarios.
Detailed analysis
Table 26 shows the number of institutions for which DGS interventions are possible
(positive LCT) and, whether DGS contributions would allow reaching a level of 8%
TLOF. It is complemented by
Figure 27
showing the comparison between the combined
scenarios and the baseline with regard to DGS’ ability to intervene under the LCT.
284
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0286.png
Table 21: LCT– Combined scenarios
Of which:
Of which:
Institutions for
Institutions for which DGS
which DGS
interventions
can intervene under the LCT
(positive least are sufficient
cost test)
to reach 8%
TLOF
Of which:
Institutions
Of which:
for which
Institutions Institutions for
DGS
reaching 8%
which DGS interventions
TLOF with
can intervene
under the
deposits
(positive least
LCT are
cost test)
sufficient to
reach 8%
TLOF
2 (Depletion of buffers, single-tier
preference)
Count
Count
Count
N.
Institutions
reaching 8%
TLOF with
deposits
Comb. Scenarios
Small
Medium
Large
Low
Mid
Mid-High
High
Total
Small
Medium
Large
Low
Mid
Mid-High
High
Total
56
87
44
63
25
39
60
187
139
37
5
44
19
24
94
181
1 (No depletion, single-tier preference)
Count
Count
Count
7
13
0
1
3
2
14
20
21
7
0
1
3
1
23
28
6
10
0
0
3
1
12
16
19
6
0
1
2
1
21
25
5
9
0
0
3
1
10
14
15
2
0
1
2
1
13
17
36
40
8
6
10
20
48
84
97
15
0
5
11
14
82
112
25
31
2
1
7
10
40
58
68
10
0
1
6
7
64
78
10
14
1
0
3
5
17
25
26
3
0
1
3
4
21
29
Resolution
Liquidation
285
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0287.png
N.
Comb. Scenarios
Small
Medium
Large
Low
Mid
Mid-High
High
Total
Small
Medium
Large
Low
Mid
Mid-High
High
Total
56
87
44
63
25
39
60
187
139
37
5
44
19
24
94
181
Of which:
Of which:
Institutions for
Institutions Institutions for
which DGS
reaching 8%
which DGS
interventions
TLOF with can intervene
under the LCT
deposits
(positive least
are sufficient to
cost test)
reach 8% TLOF
3 (Depletion of buffers, three-tier preference)
Count
Count
Count
36
40
8
6
10
20
48
84
97
15
0
5
11
14
82
112
0
2
0
0
0
0
2
2
3
0
0
1
0
0
2
3
0
2
0
0
0
0
2
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
Resolution
Liquidation
Source: Commission services, based on EBA CfA report and SRB data as of Q4 2019, assuming an 85%
recovery rate.
The first graph in
Figure 27
shows the impact of the single-tier depositor preference on
the ability of DGS to intervene based on the LCT for those banks reaching the 8% TLOF
threshold with deposits, by comparing the first combined scenario and the baseline, under
the assumption of an 85% recovery rate. Compared to the baseline scenario (where the
applicable creditor hierarchy is used), under the single-tier preference, 43 additional
banks would be able to reach the threshold without using deposits due to lifting the
ranking of non-preferred deposits, and the DGS could intervene for an additional 38
banks, to an extent that would enable 29 more of them to reach the 8% TLOF. Under the
first combined scenario, the DGS could intervene based on a positive LCT in 85% of the
cases where deposits would bear losses to reach 8% TLOF, compared to 3.3% in the
baseline. In total, the LCT would be negative for seven small and medium-sized banks
out of 48 that would need deposits to reach 8% TLOF. DGS interventions would be
sufficient to reach 8% TLOF in all cases but two for banks earmarked for resolution.
The second graph in
Figure 27
illustrates how the single-tier depositor preference would
be impacted by a greater severity of loss depletion scenario, by comparing the first and
286
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
the second combined scenario. Assuming a depletion of all buffers, leads to a sharp
increase in the number of banks for which deposits are needed to reach 8% TLOF (+148
compared to a scenario without CET1 depletion). Even under this loss scenario, DGS
interventions would remain possible under the LCT for 69% of the banks, considering
the entire sample or only institutions earmarked for resolution. However, the severity of
the less scenario has an impact on the proportion of banks for which the DGS
interventions would be sufficient to reach 8% TLOF, decreasing from 76% in the first
combined scenario to 40% in the second combined scenario. Still, in absolute amount,
the number of banks for which DGS interventions would be possible and sufficient to
reach the 8% TLOF is higher than in the first combined scenario, and the baseline,
indicating the strong impact of the introduction of a single-tier depositor preference.
The third graph in
Figure 27
describes the relative impact of the introduction of a single-
tier depositor preference compared to a three-tier depositor preference, by comparing the
first and the second combined scenarios, i.e. both relying on the same level of CET1
depletion. As already mentioned, maintaining a super-preference of covered deposits
prevents the DGS from intervening under the LCT and severely hampers the possibility
to reach the 8% TLOF.
287
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0289.png
Figure 27: LCT – Combined scenarios
Source: Commission services, based on EBA CfA report and SRB data as of Q4 2019, assuming a recovery
rate of 85%.
288
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0290.png
4.2. Least cost test and DGS interventions (modelling approach) (Step D)
Summary assessment – Least cost test and DGS interventions (modelling approach)
The analysis of the results using SYMBOL-generated losses allows to compare the
ability of DGS interventions to reach 8% TLOF based on economically consistent and
bank-specific characteristics, including considering the banking group’s structures.
Overall, under a recovery rate assumption of 85%, the analysis shows that DGS
interventions would allow reaching the 8% TLOF threshold on average for 7% of
banks facing losses and for which DGS interventions are required under the currently
applicable creditor hierarchy, assuming a stress scenario of a similar intensity as the
2008 global financial crisis. The introduction of a single-tier depositor preference
increases this probability to 81%, enabling DGS interventions to bridge to 8% TLOF
irrespective of the severity of the crisis scenario.
These results confirm the outcome of the statistical static analysis on the ability of a
single-tier depositor preference to reduce the number of banks that need deposits to reach
the 8% TLOF and at the same time unlock more possibilities for DGS to intervene based
on the LCT. As set out previously, maintaining a super-preference for covered deposits
may ultimately reduce the maximum amount of the LCT and thereby limit the ability of
DGS interventions to reach 8% TLOF. At the same time, the magnitude of the
differences compared to the current situation may limit the possibility for changes to the
LCT, including indirect costs or other factors, to yield similar results.
Detailed analysis
The outcome of the previous analyses serves to define the most relevant scenarios
(notably of depositor preference) for the dynamic assessment using SYMBOL-generated
losses. The assessments are conducted based on the generation of a multitude of loss
scenarios, from which three specific loss scenarios are extracted: a scenario with a loss
intensity similar to the global financial crisis in 2008, a second less severe scenario, and a
third more severe scenario. The results consider institutions that, based on the crisis
scenarios, would face losses that need to be absorbed. Cases where banks would either
not face losses or would face losses but not trigger the need for DGS (under the LCT) or
resolution funds to intervene, are not the focus of the analysis.
As in previous sections, the analysis relies on a recovery rate in insolvency of 85% used
to calculate the LCT. Using other recovery rates would impact the findings.
As set out in section 2.4, the modelling approach is based on a set of assumptions:
289
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0291.png
Baseline
Scope
Loss
simulation
Simulated
losses using
SYMBOL
CET1
available for
the purpose of
8% TLOF
calculation
after depletion
of buffers
Recapitalisatio
n in resolution
up to P1 +
P2R
Loss allocation
Creditor
hierarchy
Bail-inable
capacity
Modelling
approach
All
entities
(irrespecti
ve of the
strategy)
Simulated losses
applied to
resolution entities
and subsidiaries
under the
assumption that
the resolution
group structure is
maintained or
breaks
450
Applicable
creditor hierarchy
in Member States
Single-tier
depositor
preference
Three-tier
depositor
preference
Bail-inable
liabilities
(except those
with maturity
below 1
month) with
gradual
exclusion of
deposits
This section provides a detailed view of the expected probabilities for DGS to intervene
under the LCT and whether those interventions would allow reaching the 8% TLOF
threshold in resolution under three scenarios of different crisis intensity.
Error! Reference source not found.
provides the outcome of the simulation under the
modelling approach, indicating the number of institutions for which DGS interventions
are possible (positive LCT) and, for those institutions, whether DGS contributions would
allow reaching a level of 8% TLOF. As for previous analyses, the results concern all
entities, irrespective of their strategy, and assumes that the resolution group structure is
maintained in resolution.
On average, considering the entire sample, DGS interventions would allow reaching the
8% TLOF threshold for 7% of banks for which a DGS intervention is required under the
currently applicable creditor hierarchy and assuming a stress scenario of a similar
intensity as the 2008 global financial crisis. The average number of banks where the
DGS could intervene to allow bridging up the gaps to 8% TLOF is similar for small and
medium-sized banks (on average 7% of banks for which DGS interventions are
required), while DGS interventions would not be sufficient on average for any large bank
to help it reach 8% TLOF. At the same time, banks with a high prevalence of deposits for
which the LCT is positive would see the probability of DGS intervening in sufficient
amounts to reach 8% TLOF in 9% of the cases, compared to generally lower levels when
the prevalence of deposits is reduced.
More specifically, under the currently applicable creditor hierarchy (baseline),
considering the entire sample, the probability that the DGS would need to intervene to
reach the 8% TLOF for at least one bank in a crisis similar to the 2008 one is equal to
450
The single point of entry group resolution strategy is maintained where the losses are allocated at
subsidiary level up until the level of internal loss-absorbing capacity pre-positioned by the parent
(resolution entity); any remaining losses impacting the subsidiary are covered by the parent. When the
group resolution strategy is maintained, this system of upstreaming losses from subsidiary to the resolution
entity ensures that the subsidiary absorbs losses and gets recapitalised without being placed in resolution.
290
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0292.png
100%, for an average of 19.4 banks and an average amount of EUR 3.9 bn. By size, there
is a 96% or 99% probability for medium-sized or small banks respectively that DGS
would intervene and reach 8% TLOF (i.e. at least one intervention is quasi certain).
However, under a crisis similar to the 2008 one, the probability that the DGS funds
needed are not sufficient to bridge the gap to 8% TLOF for at least one banks is equal to
100% for an average of 18 banks and an average amount of EUR 3.8 bn (either because
the LCT does not unlock sufficient funds, or because the DGS cap of 0.4% of covered
deposits per single use is binding).
These results change materially when assuming a single-tier depositor preference. On
average, at the level of the entire sample, DGS interventions would allow reaching the
8% TLOF in 81% of the cases where the LCT is positive, i.e. an increase by 74
percentage points compared to the currently applicable creditor hierarchies. This effect is
particularly important for banks with a mid to high prevalence of deposits as well as for
small and medium-sized institutions where DGS interventions would allow reaching 8%
in 80% and 57% of the cases where a DGS intervention is required, respectively. The
three-tier depositor preference, by keeping a super-preference for covered deposits,
generally leads to comparable results as the baseline.
At the same time, the introduction of a single-tier depositor preference reduces the likely
number of DGS interventions: considering the entire sample, an average of 11 banks
would be subject to a DGS intervention under a single-tier depositor preference,
compared to an average of approximately 19 banks based on currently applicable creditor
hierarchies. Similarly, the number of banks where the LCT is not enough to enable a
sufficient DGS contributions towards 8% TLOF despite the need to absorb further
losses
451
falls from an average of 18 under the applicable depositor preference to 10
under a three-tier preference and an average of approximately two when a single-tier
preference is considered. This also applies when restricting the sample to entities with
resolution strategy.
These results confirm the outcome of the statistical static analysis on the ability of a
single-tier depositor preference to reduce the number of banks that need deposits to reach
the 8% TLOF and at the same time unlock more possibilities for DGS to intervene based
on the LCT. As set out previously, maintaining a super-preference for covered deposits
may ultimately reduce the maximum amount of the LCT and thereby limit the ability of
DGS interventions to reach 8% TLOF. At the same time, the magnitude of the
differences compared to the current situation may limit the possibility for changes to the
LCT, including indirect costs or other factors, to yield similar results.
Finally, assuming a different crisis intensity does not change the overall conclusions, as
the trend keeps applying irrespective of the scenario used, but makes the DGS
interventions to facilitate the access to 8% TLOF more or less likely depending on the
451
For the purpose of the analysis, the inability to reach the 8% TLOF may be due either to an insufficient
LCT or the limit set by the cap of 0.4% of covered deposits applicable for DGS interventions set out in
Article 109(5) BRRD. However, the analysis suggests that the results are driven by the LCT that may often
be too limited to allow reaching 8% TLOF threshold. In particular, as shown in the statistical analysis, the
number of DGS interventions under the LCT is very limited as losses often do not reach covered deposits,
that are taken into account for the purpose of the LCT calculations.
291
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0293.png
scenario. In particular, a less severe crisis may lead to a situation where a smaller amount
of deposits may be hit, resulting in a smaller LCT that may not be sufficient to reach the
8% TLOF, threshold and conversely in case of higher losses. In each case, the difference
brought by the type of depositor preference is substantial.
Table 22: Percentage of average number of banks where DGS interventions would be
sufficient to reach 8% TLOF (average number of banks where the DGS intervention
would be sufficient to reach 8% TLOF over average number of banks where DGS
interventions are required, assuming the resolution group structure is maintained)
Global financial crisis (2008)
Less severe crisis
Baseline
%
More severe crisis
Depositor
Baseline
preference
%
Single-
tier
%
Three-
tier
%
Single- Three-
Single- Three-
Baseline
tier
tier
tier
tier
%
%
%
%
%
Small
Medium
Large
Resolution
Liquidation
Low
Mid
Mid-High
High
All
7%
7%
0%
7%
7%
6%
1%
2%
9%
7%
80%
57%
13%
74%
72%
10%
45%
38%
80%
81%
8%
9%
0%
9%
8%
8%
1%
1%
10%
9%
7%
7%
0%
7%
6%
6%
0%
1%
9%
7%
77%
51%
10%
70%
68%
9%
37%
33%
77%
78%
8%
8%
0%
8%
7%
7%
1%
1%
9%
8%
8%
8%
0%
8%
8%
8%
1%
2%
11%
8%
86%
65%
21%
82%
77%
15%
59%
50%
84%
84%
10%
12%
0%
10%
9%
14%
2%
2%
12%
10%
Source: Commission services, based on EBA CfA report and SRB data as of Q4 2019, assuming an 85%
recovery rate.
Error! Reference source not found.
shows the impact of the simulation when the
resolution group structure is not maintained, i.e. simulating a break of the resolution
group leaving individual subsidiaries without the possibility to pass-on losses to the
resolution entity and subject to being placed in resolution themselves. In these cases, the
loss allocation follows the waterfall of claims at each individual entity level until all
losses are covered and no transfer of losses is taking place from subsidiaries to the
resolution entities. The number of observations underlying the figures contained in this
table exceeds the one in other analyses (carried out at resolution/parent entity level)
because the analysis is conducted at individual level for the subsidiaries (where possible
due to data availability).
Overall, the average results are slightly different from the situation where the resolution
group structure is maintained. More specifically, under the currently applicable creditor
hierarchy (baseline), considering the entire sample, the probability that the DGS would
need to intervene to reach the 8% TLOF for at least one bank in a crisis similar to the
2008 one is equal to 100%, for an average of 36.9 banks and an average amount of EUR
7.6 bn. However, under the same type of crisis, the probability that the DGS funds
needed are not sufficient to bridge the gap to 8% TLOF for at least one banks is equal to
292
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0294.png
100% for an average of 33.8 banks and an average amount of EUR 7.3 bn (either because
the LCT does not unlock sufficient funds, or because the DGS cap of 0.4% of covered
deposits per single use is binding).
Overall, DGS interventions would allow reaching 8% TLOF on average in 8% and 13%
of the cases (i.e. at the level of the subsidiaries that would have to absorb losses
individually and not pass them trough up to the resolution entity) when considering the
currently applicable creditor hierarchies or the introduction of a three-tier depositor
preference. On the contrary, single-tier depositor preference ensures that DGS
interventions, when needed and possible under the LCT, often allow reaching the 8%
TLOF threshold.
Table 23: Percentage of average number of banks where DGS interventions would be
sufficient to reach 8% TLOF (average number of banks where the DGS intervention
would be sufficient to reach 8% TLOF over average number of banks where DGS
interventions are required, assuming the resolution group structure is not maintained)
Global financial crisis
(2008)
Single- Three-
Baseline
tier
tier
%
%
%
Less severe crisis
Baseline
%
More severe crisis
Baseline
%
Depositor
preference
Small
Medium
Large
Low
Mid
Mid-High
High
All
Single- Three-
tier
tier
%
%
Single- Three-
tier
tier
%
%
11%
5%
0%
3%
0%
1%
14%
8%
85%
63%
14%
12%
47%
49%
84%
81%
15%
10%
0%
4%
1%
1%
17%
13%
12%
5%
0%
3%
0%
1%
14%
9%
84%
59%
11%
10%
41%
43%
82%
81%
15%
9%
0%
4%
1%
1%
17%
14%
10%
6%
0%
3%
1%
1%
14%
8%
87%
68%
24%
15%
62%
59%
85%
81%
14%
11%
1%
7%
2%
1%
16%
13%
Source: Commission services, based on EBA CfA report and SRB data as of Q4 2019, assuming an 85%
recovery rate.
293
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0295.png
4.3. Use of resolution funds (Step E)
Summary assessment – Use of resolution funds
The analysis of the use of resolution funds shows that, assuming a single-tier depositor
preference and a stress scenario similar to the 2008 financial crisis, resolution funds
would make a contribution for an average of 1.5% of the banks with resolution
strategy in the sample on the basis the 8% TLOF is reached and further losses need to
be absorbed. Interventions are less likely under the currently applicable creditor
hierarchies or a three-tier depositor preference.
Resolution funds would also be more likely to intervene for large banks or, under a
single-tier depositor preference, when the prevalence of deposits in the balance sheet
structure is higher, pointing at the possible higher contribution of the bank’s internal
loss absorbing capacity and, in the latter case, the higher likelihood of DGS
interventions based on the LCT.
Under an assumed recovery rate of 85%, the resolution funds’ contributions would, on
average, amount to EUR 1.5 bn when considering the currently applicable creditor
hierarchy, and be reduced to EUR 1.3 bn in case of a single-tier depositor preference,
under a similar crisis as 2008. When considering a more severe crisis, interventions
from resolution funds could amount to EUR 3.9 bn or 3 bn, respectively.
These amounts must be considered with caution for three reasons. First, important
caveats must be mentioned such as the limitation of resolution fund usage only for
loss-absorption and recapitalisation (e.g. excluding liquidity measures or
compensation of NCWO risks), the reliance on a sample that does not represent the
entire banking sector and on specific methodological assumptions (e.g. no
discretionary exclusions from bail-in). Second, the limited size of the resolution fund
contribution may also be explained by the progress made in terms of risk reduction
and strengthening of the banking sector as a whole, thanks to post-crisis regulatory
reforms, contributing to increased robustness in terms of prudential capital, bail-inable
capacity and market discipline. Third, without prejudice to the need for mutualised
safety nets to promote financial stability and ensure market discipline, further analysis
could be conducted in the future to explore whether and how the calibration of safety
nets (RF/SRF and DGS/EDIS) may yield further cost synergies.
Detailed analysis
Building on the previous results, this section assesses to what extent the maximum
contribution of the RF/SRF can absorb all the remaining losses for institutions for which
DGS interventions were deemed possible under the LCT and allowed reaching a level of
8% TLOF, assuming a recovery rate of 85%. Article 44(5)(b) BRRD states that the
contribution of the RF/SRF should not exceed 5% TLOF of the institution under
resolution, measured at the time of resolution action. For the purpose of this analysis, the
maximum contribution of RF/SRF is calculated using the reported TLOF amounts, in
absence of credible forecasts of banks’ balance sheets prior to resolution.
294
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
This analysis relies on the previous LCT computations and assessments of DGS
interventions. It aims to show the number of cases where resolution fund contributions
could absorb the simulated losses (i.e. within the cap of 5% TLOF), following DGS
intervention in resolution, based on the different approaches of depositor preference.
Table 33
shows the average proportion of banks for which resolution funds would
intervene under various stress scenarios and depositor preference, on the basis of the
entire sample. For the purpose of this analysis, the resolution group structure is
maintained in resolution. In addition, the probabilities do not take into account the factors
that allowed an institution to reach the 8% TLOF threshold, i.e. through its own internal
loss-absorbing capacity or via a DGS intervention based on the LCT.
Assuming a single-tier depositor preference, resolution funds would make a contribution
for an average of 1.6% of the banks with resolution strategy in the sample on the basis
the 8% TLOF is reached and further losses need to be absorbed. Interventions are less
likely under the currently applicable creditor hierarchy or a three-tier depositor
preference. Resolution funds would also be more likely to intervene for large banks or,
under a single-tier depositor preference, when the prevalence of deposits in the balance
sheet structure is higher, pointing at the possible higher contribution of the bank’s
internal loss absorbing capacity and, in the latter case, the higher likelihood of DGS
interventions based on the LCT.
As described in
Table 34
considering a crisis of a similar intensity as the global financial
crisis in 2008, there is a probability of 92% that the resolution funds would intervene for
at least one bank, for an average of 4.1 banks assuming the currently applicable creditor
hierarchy. The introduction a single-tier depositor preference would increase the number
of interventions to an average of 5.9 banks, linked to the more frequent probability to
reach 8% TLOF.
295
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0297.png
Table 24: Average proportion of banks for which resolution funds would intervene (in
percentage of all banks in the sample, assuming the resolution group’s structure is
maintained)
Global financial crisis (2008)
Depositor
Single- Three-
Baseline
preference
tier
tier
%
%
%
Less severe crisis
More severe crisis
Single- Three-
Single- Three-
Baseline
Baseline
tier
tier
tier
tier
%
%
%
%
%
%
Small
Medium
Large
Resolution
Liquidation
Low
Mid
Mid-High
High
All
1.7%
1.2%
2.4%
1.6%
1.1%
1.7%
2.6%
2.3%
1.5%
1.1%
2.2%
1.8%
2.4%
1.6%
2.0%
1.1%
3.3%
3.0%
2.7%
1.6%
1.2%
1.3%
2.3%
1.0%
1.1%
1.1%
2.6%
2.5%
1.4%
0.8%
1.4%
1.1%
2.3%
1.3%
1.0%
1.5%
2.6%
2.2%
1.3%
0.9%
1.7%
1.5%
2.4%
1.3%
1.6%
1.1%
3.0%
2.6%
2.2%
1.2%
1.0%
1.2%
2.2%
0.9%
0.9%
1.1%
2.5%
2.2%
1.2%
0.7%
2.8%
1.4%
2.8%
2.4%
1.7%
2.4%
3.0%
2.9%
2.3%
1.9%
3.8%
2.8%
2.8%
2.8%
3.5%
1.3%
4.4%
4.5%
4.7%
3.0%
1.8%
1.7%
2.5%
1.5%
1.7%
1.3%
2.9%
3.3%
2.1%
1.4%
Source: Commission services, based on EBA CfA report and SRB data as of Q4 2019.
Table 25: Average number of banks for which resolution funds would intervene
Global financial crisis (2008)
Single- Three-
Baseline
tier
tier
4.12
5.89
3.01
Less severe crisis
More severe crisis
Single- Three-
Single- Three-
Baseline
Baseline
tier
tier
tier
tier
3.30
4.53
2.47
7.14 11.07
5.24
Depositor
preference
All
Source: Commission services, based on EBA CfA report and SRB data as of Q4 2019.
The contribution of the resolution fund would, on average, amount to EUR 1.5 bn when
considering the currently applicable creditor hierarchy, and be reduced to EUR 1.3 bn in
case of a single-tier depositor preference, under a similar crisis as in 2008. When
considering a more severe crisis, interventions from the resolution funds could amount to
EUR 3.9 bn or 3 bn, respectively.
These results must be read with caution. First, the analysis only covers for the usage of
resolution funds for loss-absorption and recapitalisation, and not interventions to provide
liquidity support or compensate certain classes of creditors when mitigating NCWO
risks. The analysis also considers that all bail-inable capacity excluding deposits (e.g.
including derivatives and structured notes, where applicable) is used in order to reach the
8% TLOF threshold, i.e. without considering potential discretionary exclusions from
bail-in pursuant to Article 44(3) BRRD. The results must also be considered taking into
account that the sample used for the impact assessment represents approximately a third
of the amount of covered deposits in the EU.
296
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
Second, the limited size of the resolution funds contribution may also be explained by the
strengthening of balance sheets since the last financial crisis and the resulting lower
impact of a similar loss scenario on more robust asset and liability structures at EU level.
The progress made on risk reduction, via the reduction of non-performing loans or the
build-up of capital ratios and MREL capacity may render the use of contributions from
resolution funds for loss-absorption and recapitalisation purposes more limited. Without
prejudice of the need for mutualised safety nets to promote financial stability and ensure
market discipline, further analysis could be conducted to explore whether and how the
calibration of the safety nets may be revisited at a later stage.
Table 35
shows the impact of the simulation under the assumption that the resolution
group structure is not maintained. The number of observations underlying the figures
contained in the table is larger than in the previous analysis because the assessment is
conducted at individual level including subsidiaries.
On average, resolution funds would intervene for an average of 0.5% to 1.0% of the
banks in the sample depending the depositor preference, especially for large banks or,
under a single-tier depositor preference, for banks with a high prevalence of deposits in
the balance sheet. Consequently, in a crisis similar to 2008, on average between seven
and nine banks would need an intervention of the RF/SRF under a single-tier preference,
and on average 17 banks in case of a more severe crisis. Similarly, the three-tier
depositor preference lowers the probabilities for resolution funds to intervene, also
compared to the baseline.
When considering the amounts, assuming the resolution group’s structures break
increases the amounts of the interventions to EUR 1.9 bn under the currently applicable
creditor hierarchies, compared to EUR 1.9 bn or EUR 1 bn under a single-tier and three-
tier depositor preference, respectively. Assuming a more severe crisis, interventions
could amount up to EUR 4.3 bn under a single-tier depositor preference, i.e. allowing for
a more frequent use of resolution funds.
297
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0299.png
Table 26: Average proportion of banks for which resolution funds would intervene (in
percentage of all banks in the sample, assuming the resolution group’s structure is not
maintained)
Global financial crisis (2008)
Depositor
Single-
Three-
Baseline
preference
tier
tier
%
%
%
Less severe crisis
More severe crisis
Single- Three-
Single- Three-
Baseline
Baseline
tier
tier
tier
tier
%
%
%
%
%
%
Small
Medium
Large
Low
Mid
Mid-High
High
All
1.1%
0.7%
2.1%
1.3%
1.1%
0.8%
1.1%
0.8%
1.2%
1.0%
2.1%
0.6%
1.4%
1.1%
2.1%
1.0%
0.7%
0.6%
1.9%
0.6%
1.1%
0.8%
1.1%
0.5%
0.9%
0.6%
2.0%
1.1%
1.1%
0.7%
0.9%
0.7%
0.9%
0.8%
2.0%
0.6%
1.3%
0.9%
1.6%
0.8%
0.5%
0.6%
1.9%
0.5%
1.0%
0.7%
0.9%
0.4%
1.7%
1.0%
2.4%
1.9%
1.4%
1.1%
1.8%
1.4%
2.2%
1.8%
2.4%
0.8%
1.9%
1.7%
3.7%
1.9%
1.1%
1.0%
2.2%
0.8%
1.2%
1.1%
1.8%
1.0%
Source: Commission services, based on EBA CfA report and SRB data as of Q4 2019.
4.4. Availability of DGS funds and EDIS (Steps F, G and H)
The objectives of this section are to: (i) compare the DGS funding needs (in resolution
and insolvency) with the DGS financial means, both under the statistical and modelling
approaches in order to identify potential DGS liquidity shortfalls per Member State, (ii)
assess the efficiency of EDIS models versus national DGS in providing funding.
In resolution, the DGS funds would be used to bridge the gap towards 8% TLOF for
banks that cannot reach this threshold without imposing losses on deposits. The amount
of DGS funds is capped by the LCT, calculated as the amount of affected covered
deposits in insolvency, taking into account a recovery rate in the insolvency
counterfactual of 85%. In addition, the amount of DGS funds used in resolution is also
capped by a limit of 50% of the DGS available financial means per intervention, in line
with the BRRD.
In insolvency, the DGS fund can contribute to alternative measures up to the limit
provided by the LCT. This method has two biases: (i) an alternative measure may be less
costly than the limit provided by the LCT, and (ii) payout cases are not taken into
account. The same LCT calculation applies in insolvency as in resolution, however, the
50% limit on DGS funds per individual intervention does not apply.
Given the sample size limitations and to ensure comparability of results, the amounts of
DGS available financial means are restated for the sample for the purpose of this analysis
(i.e. 0.8% contribution rate applied to covered deposits in the sample per Member State).
While it does not reflect the real amounts of DGS financial means in Member States, this
298
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0300.png
adjustment is key in avoiding overestimating the DGS financial means
452
. This method
also assumes that the DGS target level is reached in all Member States.
4.4.1. Statistical analysis – Baseline versus combined scenarios
Summary assessment – Baseline versus combined scenarios
Under the baseline scenario and considering a recovery rate of 85% in the insolvency
counterfactual, due to negative LCT, the DGS would not be allowed to finance the gap
to the 8% TLOF threshold in almost all cases.
The combined scenario 1 has two main impacts: (i) it reduces the number of banks
unable to reach the 8% TLOF threshold and; (ii) it unlocks significantly more DGS
funds. However, for 35% of the banks unable to reach the 8% TLOF threshold, the
LCT is still not sufficient to bridge the gap. Including indirect costs in the LCT
calculation could be considered to mitigate this shortcoming. Assuming the DGS were
allowed to fully finance the gap to the 8% TLOF under the LCT, three DGSs would
face a liquidity shortfall.
Detailed analysis
When considering the entirety of the sample under the baseline scenario, under the
baseline creditor hierarchy and assuming a recovery rate of 85%, the DGSs would not be
allowed to bridge the gap to 8% TLOF in 88 cases (negative LCT) and under the LCT,
DGS interventions would be allowed in only three cases. The LCT would only allow the
DGS to finance EUR 0.05 bn while the gap to reach 8% TLOF would be EUR 18.3 bn.
In case the DGSs would be able to finance the gap towards 8% TLOF, 6 DGSs would
face a liquidity shortfall.
Under the combined scenario 1 (no CET1 depletion and single-tier depositor preference),
creating one single preferred category for all deposits has the following impacts. In
general, as also explained in Annex 8, it leads to a better protection of deposits and a
lower protection of senior unsecured creditors. The number of banks where deposits
would be impacted in order to reach 8% TLOF decrease significantly from 91 under the
baseline to 48 under the single-tier deposit preference.
However, among the different categories of deposits, the non-preferred deposits would
be better protected and the covered ones would become theoretically more exposed
453
than under the baseline: EUR 17.2 bn of non-preferred deposits under the baseline
versus
EUR 2.7 bn under the single-tier preference. Conversely, EUR 0.25 bn of covered
deposits are affected by the 8% TLOF threshold under the baseline
versus
EUR 2.82 bn
under the single-tier preference. In terms of LCT impact, the single-tier deposit
preference would unlock the largest amount of DGS funds to allow for a more effective
substitution of potential depositors losses by the DGS. However, even under a revised
single-tier hierarchy of claims, the LCT would still not provide all the funds necessary to
452
Otherwise, the DGS funding needs would be based on the sample of banks, while the DGS financial
means would be reflecting the real banking sectors.
453
Covered deposits are always protected.
299
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0301.png
reach the 8% TLOF in all cases. Among the 48 banks unable to reach the 8% TLOF
without deposits, 17 banks would have a negative or an insufficient LCT.
Besides, in almost all cases, the cap corresponding to the maximum amount a DGS can
use in resolution (i.e. 50% of the DGS financial means) does not seem binding. The LCT
is the main driver explaining the inability of the DGS to finance the gap to the 8%
threshold.
The combined scenarios 2 and 3 were also analysed. However, while the results of these
combined scenarios are relevant for other parts of the annex, such scenarios involving
significant capital depletion simultaneously for all the banks in the sample should be
carefully considered in the context of assessing the DGS financial means
454
.
Under the combined scenario 2, the number of banks unable to reach the 8% TLOF
without affecting the deposits is quite important for the DGSs funding capacity (198
institutions). The LCT would allow 54 banks to reach the 8% but most of the DGSs
would face liquidity shortfalls.
As regards combined scenario 3, the number of banks unable to reach the 8% TLOF and
the amounts of DGS funds necessary to reach this threshold are similar as under
combined scenario 2. However, the LCT, based on a three-tier depositor preference,
would only allow three banks to reach the 8% TLOF.
When considering only the 187 banks with resolution strategies, the main conclusions of
the analysis do not change. Under the baseline scenario, among the 42 banks that could
not reach the 8% TLOF threshold without touching deposits, only 1 would have a
sufficient LCT to allow for DGS intervention. In case the DGSs would be able to finance
the gap towards 8% TLOF, 5 DGSs would face a liquidity shortfall
455
. Under the
combined scenario 1, the single-tier depositor preference leads to a lower number of
banks unable to reach the 8% TLOF threshold and unlock more DGS funds.
454
The assumption of simultaneous failures for all members of a DGS is not a realistic assumption for the
purpose of this analysis.
455
When identifying the DGS shortfalls, the uses of funds both in resolution and alternative measures in
insolvency are taken into account. In insolvency, it is assumed that the LCT represents the cost for the
DGS.
300
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0302.png
Table 27: DGS financial means – Static statistical analysis (all sample of resolution
entities)
Baseline scenario
Of which:
resolution
strategies
Institutions unable to reach the 8% TLOF without deposits
of which positive LCT and sufficient to reach 8% TLOF
of which the positive LCT, but insufficient to reach 8% TLOF
of which negative LCT
Count
Count
Count
Count
EUR bn
Count
EUR bn
EUR bn
Combined scenario 1
Of which:
resolution
strategies
91
2
1
88
18
6
0
22
42
1
0
41
14
5
0
22
48
31
10
7
6
3
1
22
20
14
2
4
5
2
1
22
Total amount of DGS funds needed to reach the 8% TLOF
Number of DGSs facing a liquidity shortfall, where DGSs
allowed to finance all the gap to the 8% TLOF
Maximum amount used by all the DGSs under the LCT
Total DGSs financial means
(restated to the sample)
Source: Commission services, based on EBA CfA report, data as of Q4 2019, assuming an 85% recovery
rate.
4.4.2. Modelling analysis
Summary assessment
The modelling analysis confirms the general conclusions of the static statistical analysis.
In most of the cases, assuming an 85% recovery rate in the insolvency counterfactual, the
current hierarchy of claims does not allow the DGSs to finance the gaps to the 8% TLOF
threshold. The single-tier preference has two main impacts. It reduces the number of
banks that need DGS funds, while unlocking more DGS funds to finance the remaining
gaps to the 8% TLOF threshold.
The results vary substantively depending on whether the structures of the resolution
groups are assumed to be maintained. Considering that the resolution structures break
leads to an increase of the amount of DGS funding and consequently of the number of
DGSs facing a liquidity shortfall. Indeed, the number of DGSs facing a liquidity shortfall
increases significantly when assuming the break-up of resolution structures (from three
to nine DGSs under a crisis as severe as in 2008).
An estimation of the probabilities and of the amounts of liquidity shortfall for the DGSs
and the EDIS designs aim at assessing the relative effectiveness of EDIS in providing the
funding needed. It shows that, while it is likely that the DGSs face liquidity shortfalls,
EDIS would strongly mitigate this risk. However, these results should be interpreted with
caution as they are subject to many assumptions and caveats that may lead to
significantly underestimate the results.
301
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0303.png
Detailed analysis
Under crisis simulations as severe as in 2008, 5.28% of the banks would need DGS funds
to reach the 8% TLOF threshold under the current creditor hierarchy. However, 97.11%
of the funds needed to reach this threshold could not be financed by the DGSs, mainly
due to an insufficient LCT. The cap of 0.4% of the covered deposits does not appear
binding in most of the simulations. Changing the intensity of the crisis simulations or
assuming that the resolution group structures are not maintained do not change this
general conclusion
456
. However, in case the DGS would be allowed to finance the gap,
between six and 15 DGSs would face a liquidity shortfall. The number DGSs facing a
liquidity shortfall mainly depends on the resolution group structure holding or breaking
up. When assuming that the resolution group structures are maintained, the parent entities
absorb the losses of their subsidiaries. Consequently, the DGS funding needs are
minimised, as is the number of DGSs facing a liquidity shortfall (between six and 10
depending on the intensity of the crisis). Conversely, when assuming that the resolution
group structures are not maintained, more subsidiaries fail as the parents do not absorb
their losses, leading to more DGS funding needs and a higher number of DGSs facing a
liquidity shortfall (between nine and 15 depending on the intensity of the crisis).
Compared to the baseline, the single-tier preference has two main impacts. First, it
reduces the number of banks where deposits would be on the line to take losses and
requiring DGS funds to reach the 8% TLOF threshold, lowering the amount of DGS
funding needed. In addition, it unlocks more DGS funds to finance the remaining gap,
significantly increasing the number of banks that would be able to reach the threshold.
Under crisis simulations as severe as in 2008, around 80% of the banks that need DGS
funds would be able to reach the 8% TLOF threshold (versus only 7% under the baseline
and 9% under the three-tier preference).
The inclusion of indirect costs in the LCT calculation may be envisaged in order to
unlock more DGS funds and allow a higher percentage of banks to reach the 8% TLOF
threshold. Under the single-tier preference, on average, the gap to reach the 8% TLOF
represents 0.25% of covered deposits
457
. Assuming as objective covering this entire gap,
indirect costs would need to be calibrated accordingly. However, this amount should be
seen as a preliminary result due to the following considerations: (i) the amount of indirect
costs needed to unlock sufficient DGS funds range from 0.02% to 0.70% of covered
deposits among the DGSs; (ii) the LCT is based on an 85% recovery rate that may not be
appropriate in all cases. For instance, assuming a lower recovery rate would unlock more
DGS funds under the current LCT, potentially lowering the level of indirect costs
required in the LCT calculation.
Assuming that the resolution group structures are not maintained has a significant impact
on the number of DGSs facing liquidity shortfalls. Under a crisis as severe as in 2008, on
456
For instance, under more severe crisis simulations, the share of banks that would need DGS funds
would increase, as well as the amount of DGS funds needed to reach the 8% TLOF. However, the LCT
would still prevent the DGSs from providing around 97% of the funds needed.
457
The percentage does not change significantly when increasing the severity of the crisis simulations.
302
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0304.png
average the amount of DGS funds needed would increase from EUR 1.2 bn to EUR
2.73 bn and some DGSs would not be able to service their liquidity needs. The number of
DGSs facing a liquidity shortfall would increase from three to nine under these
assumptions.
The three-tier depositor preference would lead to similar DGS funding needs as under the
single-tier preference. However, in most of the cases, the DGSs would not be able to
finance the gap to the 8% TLOF threshold as a result of an insufficient LCT.
Table 33 presents the results under the assumption that all the resolution group structures
are maintained, leading to minimise the amount of DGS funds needed and the number of
DGSs facing a liquidity shortfall. Table 34 presents the results under the assumption that
all the resolution group structures break down, leading to maximise the amount of DGS
funds needed and the number of DGSs facing a liquidity shortfall.
Table 28: DGS financial means – Modelling analysis (all sample of resolution entities
– resolution structures are maintained)
Resolution structure is
maintained
Global financial crisis (2008)
Baseline
Average % of
banks that need
DGS funds to
reach the 8%
TLOF threshold
Among which,
average % of
banks that cannot
reach the 8%
threshold
Less severe crisis
Baseline
Single-
tier
Three-
tier
More severe crisis
Baseline
Single-
tier
Three-
tier
Single-
tier
Three-
tier
%
5.28
3.01
3.01
4.04
2.30
2.30
9.28
5.35
5.35
%
92.99
19.18
91.43
93.21
21.59
91.77
92.39
16.15
90.15
Average amount
of DGS funds
needed to reach
EUR bn
the 8% TLOF
threshold,
Among which,
average % of the
needed amount
that cannot be
provided
3.94
1.17
1.17
2.77
0.84
0.84
8
2.41
2.41
%
97.11
29.88
94.01
97.11
34.22
94.30
96.77
23.86
92.84
Number of DGSs
facing a liquidity
shortfall, if
DGSs were
Count
7
3
3
6
3
3
10
4
allowed to
finance all the
gap to the 8%
TLOF threshold
Source: Commission services, based on EBA CfA report, data as of Q4 2019, assuming an 85%
recovery rate.
4
303
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0305.png
Table 29: DGS financial means – Modelling analysis (all sample of resolution entities
– resolution structures are not maintained)
Resolution structure is
not maintained
Global financial crisis
(2008)
Single- Three-
Baseline
tier
tier
Less severe crisis
Baseline
Single-
tier
Three-
tier
More severe crisis
Baseline
Single-
tier
Three-
tier
Average % of
banks that need
DGS funds to
reach the 8%
TLOF threshold
Among which,
average % of
banks that cannot
reach the 8%
threshold
%
4.28
2.14
2.14
3.25
1.64
1.64
7.64
3.78
3.78
%
91.77
18.83
86.74
91.47
19.45
86.27
92.17
19.06
87.22
Average amount
of DGS funds
needed to reach
EUR bn
the 8%
threshold,
Among which,
average % of the
needed amount
that cannot be
provided
7.62
2.73
2.73
5.38
1.95
1.95
15.71
5.85
5.85
%
96.39
25.16
92.04
96.22
24.69
91.71
96.34
27.25
92.25
Number of
DGSs facing a
liquidity
shortfall, if
DGSs were
Count
9
9
9
8
8
8
15
11
allowed to
finance all the
gap to the 8%
TLOF threshold
Source: Commission services, based on EBA CfA report, data as of Q4 2019, assuming an 85%
recovery rate.
11
Table 35 and
Table 40
compare the probabilities and the amounts of liquidity shortfalls
in the Banking Union, considering in turn only the DGSs and different ways to design
EDIS
458
.
Under a high-ambition hybrid EDIS, a target level of 0.6% of covered deposits is
considered, where 75% of the funds are in the central fund and 25% remaining in the
national DGSs. A medium-ambition hybrid EDIS considers a target level of 0.7% of
covered deposits, where 50% of the funds are in the central fund and 50% remaining in
the national DGSs. A low-ambition hybrid EDIS considers a 0.8% covered deposits
target level with 25% of the funds in the central fund and 75% in the national DGSs.
The results show an important probability that at least one DGS faces a liquidity shortfall
in the Banking Union in case of financial crisis. For instance, under a financial crisis as
severe as in 2008 and considering a single-tier depositor preference, there is 30.78%
probability that at least one DGS faces a liquidity shortfall. On average, the amount of
the liquidity shortfall would amount to EUR 0.3 bn. Assuming that the resolution group
structures break down has a significant impact on the results. The probability of DGS
458
See Annex 10 for more details on the hybrid model designs.
304
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0306.png
liquidity shortfall would raise from 30.78% to 74.78% and the amount of liquidity
shortfall would increase on average from EUR 0.3 bn to EUR 0.8 bn. In addition,
increasing the severity of the crisis simulations would have a significant impact on the
probability of shortfall (58.17% if the resolution group structure is maintained and
91.34% if the resolution group structure is not maintained).
The hybrid EDIS models would significantly mitigate the risk of liquidity shortfall. The
high-ambition hybrid EDIS would reduce the probability of liquidity shortfall to a
negligible level in all situations. The low-ambition hybrid EDIS would also reduce the
probability of liquidity shortfall. In case the resolution group structures are maintained,
the probability of liquidity shortfall is negligible, but it raises to 6.68% in the worst case
scenario including crisis simulations more severe than in 2008 and considering a break-
up of the resolution group. The shortfall amount would be limited.
These results should be interpreted with great caution, as the probabilities and the
amounts of liquidity shortfalls are may be significantly underestimated:
-
First, the results do not include payout cases, which are much more cash
consuming. Including them would significantly increase the funding needs of the
DGSs and hybrid EDIS models, leading to higher probabilities and amounts of
liquidity shortfalls both for the DGSs and the hybrid EDIS models.
Second, the analysis is based on an 85% recovery rate. Assuming a lower
recovery rate would unlock more funds, leading to higher probabilities and
amounts of shortfalls for the DGSs and the hybrid EDIS models.
Third, the results are based on restated amounts of DGS and hybrid EDIS
financial means that may not be fully representative for all Member States
459
. In
addition, a larger sample of banks would automatically increase the probabilities
and the amounts of liquidity shortfall.
-
-
459
Given that the analysed sample only covers a share of the EU banks, the size of the DGS funds and
hybrid EDIS funds have been restated for comparability reasons.
305
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0307.png
Table 30: Performances of the DGSs and the hybrid EDIS in providing funding in
resolution (Resolution structure is maintained)
Resolution structure is maintained
Global financial crisis
(2008)
Single-tier
Less severe crisis
Single-tier
More severe crisis
Single-tier
Probability of
%
30.78
22.06
58.17
liquidity shortfall
DGSs only
Amount of liquidity
EUR
0.3
0.3
0.5
shortfall
bn
High
Probability of
%
0
0
0
ambition
liquidity shortfall
hybrid
Amount of liquidity
EUR
0
0
0
EDIS
shortfall
bn
Medium
Probability of
%
0
0
0
ambition
liquidity shortfall
hybrid
Amount of liquidity
EUR
0
0
0
EDIS
shortfall
bn
Low
Probability of
%
0.05
0
0.25
ambition
liquidity shortfall
hybrid
Amount of liquidity
EUR
0
0
0
EDIS
shortfall
bn
Source: Commission services, based on EBA CfA report, data as of Q4 2019, assuming an 85%
recovery rate.
Table 31: Performances of the DGSs and the hybrid EDIS in providing funding in
resolution (Resolution structure is not maintained)
Resolution structure is not maintained
Global financial crisis
(2008)
Single-tier
Less severe crisis
Single-tier
More severe crisis
Single-tier
91.34
1.4
0.5
0.01
2.48
0.07
6.68
0.28
an 85%
Probability of
%
74.28
63.02
liquidity shortfall
DGSs only
Amount of liquidity
EUR
0.8
0.6
shortfall
bn
High
Probability of
%
0.1
0.05
ambition
liquidity shortfall
hybrid
Amount of liquidity
EUR
0
0
EDIS
shortfall
bn
Medium
Probability of
%
0.5
0.25
ambition
liquidity shortfall
hybrid
Amount of liquidity
EUR
0.02
0.01
EDIS
shortfall
bn
Low
Probability of
%
1.74
0.99
ambition
liquidity shortfall
hybrid
Amount of liquidity
EUR
0.08
0.05
EDIS
shortfall
bn
Source: Commission services, based on EBA CfA report, data as of Q4 2019, assuming
recovery rate.
4.5. Sensitivity analysis of the impact of the recovery rates in insolvency
The recovery rates in insolvency are extremely heterogeneous across banks and Member
States and are impacted by many factors, such as the bank’s individual characteristics
(asset quality, other financial fundamentals), the market situation, the national insolvency
laws and national judicial regimes as well as the severity of the crisis.
306
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
In this context, the results of the analyses are very sensitive to the value of the haircuts
and corresponding recovery rates applied to the assets in insolvency that serves as a basis
for the calculation of the LCT. Lower recovery rates (i.e. higher haircuts) lead to
comparatively larger losses in insolvency due to the inability to recover all proceeds from
the liquidation of the assets, and would result in a higher probability to reach covered
deposits in the hierarchy of claims in the insolvency counterfactual. As a consequence,
more banks may face a positive LCT on the basis of low recovery rates on assets.
These results affect the magnitude of the different options tested in the quantitative
analysis, but do not alter the conclusions related to the banks’ ability to reach 8% TLOF
without DGS interventions nor to the comparison between the various scenarios of
depositor preference.
In fact, changing the level of haircuts does not affect the liability structure and, as a
result, the capacity of institutions to access the 8% TLOF without deposits, or to what
extent certain forms of deposits would have to bear losses in order to reach that
threshold. However, higher haircuts impact the frequency with which DGS could
intervene under the LCT as well as the ability of the DGS’s intervention to help reaching
8% TLOF. The number of banks with a positive LCT and the maximum amount of DGS
funds unlocked by the LCT increases significantly with a recovery rate of 50% compared
to the primary assumption of 85%.
More specifically, assuming a 50% recovery rate, the currently applicable creditor
hierarchies and no CET1 depletion, 232 institutions would have a positive LCT
irrespective of their ability to reach the 8% TLOF threshold, against eight when
considering an 85% recovery rate. In this case, 63% of the small banks, 76% of the
medium-sized and 64% of the large banks would have a positive LCT. At least 90% of
the banks in the sample would have a positive LCT in eight Member States.
Under a single-tier depositor preference, the number of banks with a positive LCT would
increase from 150 assuming a recovery rate of 85% to 300 with a recovery rate of 50%
(out of a total sample of 343 institutions). Under this scenario, 84% of the small banks,
92% of the medium-sized and 86% of the large banks would have a positive LCT. When
considering the funding structure, 98% of the banks in the sample with a prevalence of
deposits higher than 70% of TLOF would have a positive LCT. Similarly, at least 90% of
the banks in the sample would have a positive LCT in 14 Member States.
In terms of amounts of DGS funds unlocked under the LCT, lowering the recovery rate
increases the maximum amount for DGS intervention to EUR 15.8 bn assuming a 50%
recovery rate, the currently applicable creditor hierarchies and no CET1 depletion,
compared to EUR 0.23 bn with a recovery rate of 85%. Results are similar for scenarios
3 and 4 of depositor preference. This amount increases from EUR 1.15 bn to EUR
20.8 bn when considering a single-tier creditor hierarchy, and from EUR 0.40 bn to EUR
18.7 bn under scenario 5 of depositor preference. While the magnitude of the increase is
higher for all other scenarios, the single-tier depositor preference remains the option
under which the maximum amounts of DGS funds can be mobilised under the LCT, even
assuming a 50% recovery rate, while being the most protective of depositors given the
number of banks able to reach the 8% TLOF without deposits, as shown in section 3.2.3.
307
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0309.png
5.
C
AVEATS AND DISCLAIMERS
Overview of main caveats and disclaimers
Caveat/disclaimer
Representativeness of the
sample
Description
The sample of banks underpinning
all analyses in this Annex is based
on the data collected by the EBA as
part of their annual exercise
whereby national resolution
authorities report banks’ liability
data and MREL decisions to the
EBA. The sample include 368
banks when considering parent-
level entities and 862 banks when
counting also subsidiaries. A
number of entities have been
eliminated from the sample due to
data quality issues. The banks in
the sample represent approximately
52% (when also considering third
country assets) to 73% (when only
considering domestic assets) of the
total banking asset in the EU. The
covered deposits of the banks in the
sample represent 38.3% of the
covered deposits reported for the
entire EU as of Q4 2019.
The number of additional banks
that would go in resolution under
the policy options cannot be
estimated upfront, as the PIA
remains a case-by-case assessment
by resolution authorities, retaining
elements of discretion and highly
dependent on the financial
condition of the bank at the
moment of failure. Moreover, the
strategy set out for a bank at the
planning stage (resolution vs
liquidation) is a presumptive path
based on backward looking
information, which allows
deviations to take account of the
specific situation at the time of
failure.
Mitigating factor(s)
The sample represents 73% of the
total EU domestic banking assets,
excluding third country assets.
For the purpose of assessing the
DGS intervention against the DGS
financial means, the level of DGS
financial means has been
recalibrated to match the banks in
the sample.
Expansion of the PIA as per
policy options in Chapters 5
and 6 could not be quantified.
The calculations and analyses
carried out in this Annex illustrate
the results on two perimeters:
-
the entire sample of banks
(parent level) irrespective of
their
resolution
strategy
(resolution or liquidation). This
would show the impacts
assuming all banks would be
placed in resolution; and
-
only banks with strategy
resolution as per 2019 data.
308
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0310.png
Insolvency
haircut
(loss)
assumption of 15% of total
assets (corresponding to a
recovery rate of 85%) in the
context of calculating the
LCT.
The recovery rates and therefore,
the losses in insolvency, range
widely across Member States as
they are impacted by national
insolvency laws and judicial
regimes. Moreover, recovery rates
are also highly case-dependant.
For the purpose of the analyses
carried out in, one primary
assumption has been used (15%
haircut in insolvency corresponding
to a recovery rate of 85%), however
results corresponding to a 50%
haircut and recovery rate have also
been presented.
To mitigate the uncertainties
deriving from these limitations,
qualitative
clarifications
are
provided in order to show how the
results would be impacted if
higher or lower recovery rates
were considered.
The impact of using different
insolvency haircuts or
corresponding recovery rates
on the results cannot be
clearly attributed to a single
factor – such as the need to
harmonise insolvency laws.
The recovery rates which are
extremely heterogeneous across
banks and Member States are
impacted by many factors, such as:
the bank’s individual characteristics
(asset quality, other financial
fundamentals), the market situation,
the national insolvency laws and
national judicial regimes as well as
the severity of the crisis. While one
may argue that further
harmonisation of insolvency laws
may reduce the heterogeneity in
recovery rates, this may not be
necessarily the case, as a direct
relationship cannot be established
between these two elements. The
impact of insolvency laws on
recovery rates cannot be
disentangled from the impact of
other relevant factors.
Each national creditor hierarchy has
been adjusted to follow a common
list of insolvency ranking based on
a simpler standard structure to
perform the analysis in sections 3
and 4. Individual liabilities reported
in the dataset have been mapped
accordingly.
Transparency is ensured in the
reading of the results throughout
this Annex, with respect to the
impact of various recovery rates
on the results. However, the
variation in results cannot be
clearly attributed to one particular
cause.
Creditor hierarchy applicable
in each Member State
The ranks under the national
hierarchies have been mapped to a
standard ladder keeping the
relative seniority between the
main categories of liabilities, in
particular deposits, and taking into
account the most frequent rank
reported for each form of
liabilities to cater for cases where
contractual features affect the rank
of a given liability.
309
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0311.png
The analyses reflect the
balance sheet data as of Q4
2019 when banks were still in
transitional period to comply
with their MREL
requirements.
Modelling or estimating potential
changes in balance sheets as of
2024 when most banks are expected
to reach compliance with their
MREL requirements was not
attempted in this analysis due to the
complexity of such a task and the
additional required assumptions
that would require extrapolation
across the sample.
A scenario was added assessing
the impact of reaching 8% TLOF
and allowing for DGS
intervention by considering
MREL requirements (assuming all
banks will comply with their
requirements by 2024) rather than
the bail-inable capacity as of Q4
2019. However, this scenario was
not relevant as for almost all
banks (except one), the bail-inable
capacity as of Q4 2019 exceeded
their MREL requirement.
The results are presented for three
selected simulated crises, to which
the reader can easily relate. The
CMDI framework was enacted in
the wake of the 2008 global
financial crisis, therefore
presenting simulations of a crisis
similar to that particular crisis, as
well as less and more severe crises
is a sensible approach.
As shown by the report
monitoring risk reduction
indicators as of May and
November 2021 by the
Commission, the ECB and the
SRB, the consequences of the
COVID-19 pandemic have not led
to a material deterioration of
Banking Union institutions’
solvency or liquidity position.
This is in part due to the
extraordinary policy measures
taken in response to the COVID-
19 pandemic including in
particular the introduction of loan
moratoria and public guarantee
schemes. The borrower relief and
liquidity support measures have
mitigated the impact of the
pandemic on bank balance sheets,
and as these measures have or are
being phased out, banks remained
resilient.
See also the analysis of the
evolution of balance sheets
changes in section 6 ‘Other
methodological considerations’.
The results of the model-
based approach are based on
three scenarios of crises: one
similar to the 2008 global
financial crisis and two other
crises, one less severe and one
more severe.
A multitude of crises with different
intensities have been simulated
using the SYMBOL model.
However, for reasons related to
complexity, readability and
relevance, not all results are
presented in this analysis.
Impact of COVID-19 crisis on
presented results
The figures presented in this Annex
reflect the situation as of Q4 2019,
prior to the set-up of the COVID-19
crisis.
310
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0312.png
6.
O
THER METHODOLOGICAL CONSIDERATIONS
General information on data
The analysis in this annex is based on resolution data reported under Commission
Implementing Regulation (EU) 2018/1624 of 23 October 2018 (ITS on resolution
reporting) by institutions included in the scope of the BRRD and submitted to the EBA.
The analysis is complemented with data on formally adopted MREL decision that were
reported to the EBA for the reference date 31 December 2019. Where formally adopted
MREL decision were not yet available at the point of reporting, indicative decisions are
considered. Where neither formal nor indicative MREL decisions were included, an
MREL proxy was considered, as explained in the assumptions and scenarios section 2.3.
General information on the sample and data quality checks
The sample of covered institutions includes 368 entities when counting all parent-level
institutions and 862 entities when also including the subsidiaries. The composition of the
sample and the exclusion of certain entities is driven by number of institutions
participating in the data collection exercise and data quality criteria
460
.
General information on the reference date for data analysis
The quantitative assessments included in this annex are based on data as of 31 December
2019, in line with the analysis published in the EBA’s CfA report on 22 October 2021.
The recent evolution of key indicators of banks’ balance sheets shows that the
conclusions drawn in this annex would not change if they were based on the latest
available data points (e.g. end-2022).
-
Evolution of the liability structure
In the EU, banks’ total liabilities increased by 8.7% between end-2019 and end-2022
461
.
This evolution is partly driven by an increase in deposits and other MREL eligible
liabilities.
At the level of the EU, covered deposits increased by 14.3% between end-2019 and end-
2021
462
. However, despite this nominal increase, the share of deposits from households
and non-financial corporations as percentage of the total liabilities remained stable (on
average, 47.6% of total liabilities as of end-2022, compared to 44.9% as of end 2019),
suggesting the absence of material changes in banks’ liability structure
463
.
460
EBA (22 October 2021),
Call for advice regarding funding in resolution and insolvency.
As shown by
the EBA CfA report, the loss simulation requires a minimum set of three variables (total assets, total risk
exposure amount (TREA) and CET1 capital) to be reported by each entity to be included in the analysis.
Entities, for which this information is missing are excluded from the analysis. Prior to excluding entities
without reported total assets, reported TLOF is used as a proxy for non-systemic and smaller institutions
(< EUR 50 bn TLOF).
461
EBA risk dashboards
462
EBA Deposit Guarantee Schemes data
463
EBA risk dashboards
311
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0313.png
In fact, based on data covering the Banking Union, the aggregated amount of MREL
eligible liabilities held by banks within the SRB remit increased by 14.8% between end-
2019 and Q3-2022. The stock of eligible liabilities in percentage of TREA (i.e.
considering the risk profile of the banks) increased in most Member States during that
period
464
. In the EU, and with a focus on smaller banks, data shows that the share of
MREL resources, in percentage of TREA, generally increased for domestically systemic
banks (by 1.6% for the larger ones, and approximately 4% for systemic banks with less
than EUR 10 billion balance sheet) as well as for other smaller lenders (by approximately
6% for non-systemic banks with less than EUR 5 billion balance sheet). These groups of
banks often rely on deposits to comply with MREL requirements, representing up to 5-
6% TREA for the smaller banks
465
.
As a result, the impact on banks’ ability to reach 8% TLOF without deposits would
remain neutral because of these two conflicting trends: the increase of loss-absorbing
capacity improves banks’ resilience using internal resources, which are often ranking
lower than deposits in the hierarchy of claims, reducing the need to rely on deposits to
reach 8% TLOF; at the same time, part of the increase of these MREL eligible
instruments takes the form of deposits.
In addition, the amount of assets, which is used to estimate the losses in SYMBOL, has
increased in the same proportion as the liabilities, in particular the amount of loss-
absorbing capacity. Higher potential losses stemming from the increased asset base are
therefore commensurate to an observed higher amount of loss-absorbing capacity,
maintaining the conclusion as regards the ability to reach the 8% TLOF without deposits.
The absence of a relative shift in the share of deposits in banks’ balance sheets also
supports the assumption that the evolution of the liability composition is not likely to
fundamentally affect the analysis of banks’ ability to access resolution funding
arrangements.
Similarly, these evolutions are not expected to materially impact DGS’s ability to
intervene based on the least cost test to support the access to resolution funding
arrangement. In fact, two independent effects can be drawn from the evolution of banks’
liability structure. On one hand, the least cost test may lead to a higher amount of
possible support due to the increased volumes of covered deposits that would have to be
paid out in insolvency. This may facilitate the bridge to the 8% TLOF threshold. On the
other hand, the stable proportion of deposits in banks’ total liabilities, compared to other
loss-absorbing resources, would not materially affect the triggers based on which DGS
can intervene (i.e. when loss absorption needs reach deposits). As a result, the possible
higher volume of DGS support would not necessarily be accompanied by a more
frequent ability of DGS to intervene compared to the situation as of end 2019.
464
465
SRB MREL Dashboard, Q3 2022
EBA quantitative MREL reports
2019
(27 May 2021) and
2020
(22 April 2022).
312
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0314.png
-
Evolution of the asset quality and prudential requirements
In addition, data shows that the quality of the assets have not materially changed, nor
deteriorated over the last years despite the impact of the COVID pandemic, which had
led to an expectation of credit risk deteriorations. Importantly, banks keep fulfilling
prudential requirements.
Banks risk-weighted assets slightly increased between end-2019 and end-2022, with an
increase of 6.4% mainly since end-2021, driven by credit risk
466
. In this context, the
gross non-performing loans (NPL) ratios continued to decrease between 2020 and 2022
for the majority of Member States while remaining largely stable for the remaining
Member States and closed at 1.8% in Q4 2022 respectively. The feared negative impact
of the Covid-pandemic did not materialize. The gross and net NPL ratios continued to
decrease in 2021 and 2022, in almost all Member States, highlighting the absence of
significant negative shift in asset quality. These evolutions could be explained by the
effectiveness of the various policy measures introduced to cushion the impact of the
COVID-19 pandemic. Since the start of the pandemic, all Member States, with the
support of SURE and Next Generation EU, implemented various forms of support for
households (furlough) and non-financial corporations including some form of
moratorium on payments of credit obligations
467
.
At the same time, prudential ratios, both on solvency and liquidity, remained high,
showing a resilience of the banking sector despite the economic environment.
Compliance with MREL requirements also improved over the period
468
.
In this context, the crisis scenarios simulated by the SYMBOL model would apply to a
population of banks, which is essentially unchanged, in particular not riskier and
displaying a resilience level comparable to the evidence as of end-2019. Since the impact
of the recent evolution of banks’ balance sheet did not lead to major shift in terms of
liability structure or general riskiness, one may assume that the models used in this
assessment would lead to comparable results even if fed with more recent data.
These elements provide comfort that the conclusions of the assessment performed on the
ability to access the resolution fund and the possible use of DGS would not be materially
affected by adding more recent data. In fact, banks’ balance sheets have not changed
fundamentally over the recent years and the risks remain contained.
-
Evolution of DGS available financial means
Finally, recent trends in banks’ balance sheets would not affect the robustness of the
safety nets tested in this analysis either, in particular on the ability of DGS to provide the
necessary funding. Data shows that the DGS available financial means in the EU
increased by 33.4% between end-2019 and end-2021. As of end-2021, available financial
means stood at 0.75% of covered deposits, in aggregated terms (0.64% as of end-2019),
466
467
EBA risk dashboards
Monitoring reports on risk reduction indicators (Commission, ECB, SRB),
May 2021, November 2021
468
Idem.
313
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0315.png
remaining high despite the significant increase of covered deposits observed during the
period. However, there are still important differences among Member States and deposit
guarantee schemes (even within some jurisdictions when they have several deposit
guarantee schemes)
469
.
Noteworthy, the analysis performed in this annex assumes that target levels are reached
(the deadline foreseen in DGSD is July 2024). As a result, the evolution of the DGS
available financial means does not change the assumptions nor the outcome of the
simulations.
Other considerations
The analyses in this annex are based on the solo balance sheet data of the entities
included in the sample. This is to reflect that resolution action such as bail-in of eligible
liabilities in order to access resolution financing arrangements (if needed) is applied to
the parent entity, assuming that the resolution group structure holds.
Statistics in this annex show results covering the entire perimeter of the sample at parent
entity level as well as the sub-sets of banks with resolution and liquidation strategies
reflecting the PIA decisions as of Q4 2019. Offering results for the entire perimeter
caters for a potential expansion of the PIA to more banks. Still, results displayed in the
various sections provides for a breakdown per type of resolution strategy.
In the tables in section 3 of this annex, the figures expressed as percentage of TLOF have
as denominator the total TLOF of the banks where each type of deposits would be
impacted (non-preferred, preferred, covered deposits), broken down by the perimeter of
banks concerned (e.g. by size, funding profile, strategy, etc.).
469
EBA Deposit Guarantee Schemes data
314
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0316.png
A
NNEX
8: I
MPACT ASSESSMENT OF TECHNICAL TOPICS THAT
WERE NOT EXHAUSTIVELY COVERED IN THE MAIN BODY OF THE
IMPACT ASSESSMENT
1.
E
XPERIENCES WITH BAILING
-
IN DEPOSITORS
The liability structure of banks shows substantial differences across the European
banking sector. In this regard, recent experiences demonstrated that bailing-in
470
certain
liabilities - such as uncovered deposits - could entail a certain risk of depositor runs
thereby putting the overall financial stability at risk. In some instances, a bank run
occurred although a harmonised depositor protection was already in place
471
. In
particular, during and after the global financial crisis, Cyprus, Greece and Iceland
adopted several types of administrative measures to stop financial instability and
contagion. In Italy precautionary measures were required to maintain depositor
confidence. Conversely, the resolution of a small Danish bank in 2016 apparently did not
influence depositor confidence although uncovered depositors were bailed-in.
Non-exhaustive list of observed depositor runs/outflow in the context of bail-in
The case of
Northern Rock
472
in
England
in 2007 represents one of the emblematic
examples of bank runs. Throughout that summer, serious concerns emerged about the
viability of Northern Rock’s business model (heavy reliance on wholesale market
funding leading to considerable liquidity risk), which were compounded by the
developments in the US sub-prime mortgage market. Both elements combined led
Northern Rock seeking assistance from the Bank of England in September 2007, which
sparked a dramatic bank run with GBP 3 bn of deposits withdrawn in the span of three
days
473
.
In 2008 in
Iceland,
a loss of market access caused three systemic cross-border banks to
default on their foreign liabilities and led to a widespread financial distress resulting in
470
From January 1, 2015, all EU Member States were required to transpose the BRRD into their national
law. A key element of the new powers is the bail-in tool (as of January 1, 2016), requiring banks to absorb
losses and recapitalise thanks to own resources. Some Member States had already similar tools available in
their national laws.
471
The original DGS Directive of 1994 only required a minimum level of harmonisation between domestic
deposit guarantee schemes in the EU. It proved disruptive for financial stability and the internal market,
especially during the financial crisis of 2007-2009. An amending Directive in 2009 required EU countries
to increase their protection of deposits firstly to a minimum of EUR 50,000, and then to a uniform level of
EUR 100,000 by the end of 2010. In 2014, the EU adopted Directive 2014/49/EU (DGSD). It requires EU
countries to introduce laws setting up at least one DGS that all banks must join and to ensure a harmonised
level of protection for depositors on the basis of protected types of deposits.
472
Reference research gate (2009),
The Northern Rock Crisis: a multi-dimensional problem.
473
In February 2008, Northern Rock was nationalised. By using emergency legislation to pass the Banking
(Special Provisions) Act, which enabled HM Treasury to carry out direct transfers of securities, liabilities
and property. Two years later, the bank was eventually split into two to facilitate its return to the private
sector and Virgin Money, in 2012, completed their purchase of NR, costing approximately GBP 1 bn (see:
(PDF) The Northern Rock Crisis: a multi-dimensional problem in previous footnote.
315
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0317.png
intense deposits outflows, accompanied by a currency depreciation. The banking crisis in
Iceland
474
was unprecedented in certain aspects, as the three banks Kaupthing,
Landsbanki and Glitnir (over 80% of the Icelandic financial system) collapsed within a
few days. The main causes of the collapse were multidimensional
475
. In September 2008,
Glitnir Bank was the first amongst the three to request Emergency Liquidity Assistance
(ELA) from the Central Bank of Iceland as it had exhausted its market options. The
request was declined by the Central Bank of Iceland and suggestions about a partial
nationalisation were raised instead. The announcement of the latter caused credit default
swap spreads to jump, leading to funding problems for several other banks. This was
coupled with an important deposit withdrawal by retail depositors that brought the entire
Icelandic banking system on the brink of collapse by October 2008. As the crisis erupted,
several measures were taken in relation to deposits, starting with the government’s
announcement of a blanket guarantee for all domestic deposits. The aim of the
announcement was to stop the run on the banks. It was limited to covered deposits in
domestic banks in Iceland, given the limited resources of the Deposit Guarantee Fund
and the Ministry of Finance’s inability to provide a credible backstop. Further, it was
required to introduce a depositor preference in the creditor hierarchy via the Emergency
Act (regardless whether they were collected through domestic or foreign branches). Until
then, deposits were general claims and were therefore more likely to bear losses. The
change in the creditor hierarchy was expected to reduce losses to depositors, both in
branches and subsidiaries in Iceland and abroad
476
. A government bailout could not be
realised as the State’s resources unmatched the size of the problem. Furthermore, the
Central Bank of Iceland was unable to act as a lender of last resort in foreign currency
given that its foreign credit lines and FX reserves could not cope with the banks’ needs.
Therefore, each bank was resolved through the transfer of domestic activities to a new
bank and the economic and financial assistance of the IMF programme was provided
where capital controls and the restructuring of private debt were introduced.
In 2013 in
Cyprus,
depositors suffered losses in two systemic banks (following the bail-
in of retail investors), which undermined the short-term confidence leading to significant
outflows of deposits, especially from the affected banks. The Cypriot banking sector was
474
Financial Stability Institute (FSI) (2020), FSI crisis management series No.1,
The banking crisis in
Iceland.
475
First, the Icelandic banking system grew at a significant pace in the years prior to the crisis, which
subsequently led to liquidity and funding concerns as the three banks increasingly relied on funding
abroad. Second, there were undetected asset quality issues, where the prudential rules on large exposures
could often be circumvented, enabling banks to build up important concentration risk. Finally, Iceland was
particularly vulnerable to the global financial crisis due to its own imbalances. A high proportion of the
banks’ assets and liabilities were denominated in foreign currency and larger banks were even
interconnected through credit links. Reference: FSI crisis management series papers, see link in previous
footnote.
476
Several other emergency measures introduced were directed towards deposits: (i) domestic branches
transferred their guaranteed deposits to new banks and remained unaffected by the crisis, (ii) payment
systems continued to be operational throughout the resolution process and all bank branches remained
open, (iii) in 2011, a new separated guarantee fund within the deposit guarantee fund was established. The
resources in the new fund are devoted to cover deposits in the new Icelandic banks, without the risk of
being claimed by the depositors in the old banks. Besides other features the 0.15% limit on banks’
contributions was abolished. Reference: FSI crisis management series papers, the banking crisis in Iceland,
see link in previous footnote.
316
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0318.png
increasingly cut off from international market funding and major financial institutions
recorded substantial capital shortfalls against the backdrop of the exposure to the Greek
economy and deteriorating loan quality in Cyprus
477
. Research confirms that concerns
about the safety and soundness of the banking system are very likely to result in a
reallocation of deposit holdings towards cash. As part of the agreement for the Economic
Adjustment Program for Cyprus (the Cypriot Program), in March 2013
478
, Cyprus
implemented an estimated EUR 7 bn bail-in solution
479
to recapitalise the largest
systemic bank (Bank
of Cyprus, BoC).
The second largest bank (Cyprus
Popular
Bank, Laiki)
was subject to the sale-of-business tool merging it with BoC. For the first
time in the euro area, unsecured depositors were called upon to recapitalise their banks
raising the risk of a system wide run. As a result, capital controls and certain other
administrative measures (like bank holidays, limits on cash withdrawals and domestic
transfers) were imposed
480
. By the time the final agreement on the Cypriot program was
reached
481
, the two banks had experienced deposit outflows of about EUR 10-17 bn.
Through the intense outflows, fewer deposits remained available for the bail-in and
exacerbated the loop between bank and sovereign balance sheets (including cross-border
in Greece). To ring-fence exposure of Cyprus to Greek risks
482
, all Greek-related assets
(loans and fixed assets) and customer deposits of all Cypriot banks in Greece (including
of the third largest, Hellenic Bank) were sold to Piraeus Bank at a net asset value
estimated using an adverse valuation scenario (around EUR 3.2 bn)
483
.
477
European Commission (2013),
The economic adjustment programme for Cyprus,
Occasional Papers,
149.
478
In March 2013, the Eurogroup reached a political agreement with the Cypriot authorities on the key
elements necessary for a future macroeconomic adjustment programme. The European Commission, the
European Central Bank (ECB) and the International Monetary Fund (IMF) agreed an economic adjustment
programme with the Cypriot authorities on 2 April 2013. The programme covered the period 2013-16 and
the financial package covered up to EUR 10 bn with the ESM providing up to EUR 9 bn, and the IMF
contributing around EUR 1 bn.
479
World Bank Group,
Bank resolution and “bail-in” in the EU: selected case studies pre and post BRRD.
On March 22 2013, the Parliament urgently approved a new law enabling the Central Bank of Cyprus to
resolve insolvent institutions (Cyprus Resolution Law (2013)). A new bail-out plan was announced on
March 25 2013, which did not require further parliamentary approval. The new bank resolution law now
provided a legal basis to implement change: Laiki was resolved immediately with full contribution from
shareholders, bondholders and uninsured depositors. Selected Laiki assets and EUR 9 bn of ELA were
folded into the BoC with uninsured depositors converted to shareholders (at a rate determined after a
detailed asset valuation by the summer of 2013 but expected at the time to be between 40-50%).
480
IMF publication (2020),
Managing systemic bank crises, new lessons and lessons relearned.
481
The Cypriot authorities requested financial assistance from the EU and the IMF on 25 June 2012, while
a political agreement on the key elements necessary for the Cypriot program was reached between the
Eurogroup and the Cypriot authorities on 16 March 2013.
482
European Commission (2013),
The economic adjustment programme for Cyprus,
Occasional Papers,
149. Concerning their Greek exposure, Cypriot banks were vulnerable on two fronts. First, they
considerably expanded their loan operations in Greece from 2005 onwards. The second channel of
exposure consisted of investments in Greek government bonds. With respect to loan quality in Cyprus,
impaired credits for real estate projects in particular were behind the deterioration linked to the high
indebtedness of the private sector and the worsening macroeconomic environment. As a consequence,
confidence in the banking sector waned and liquidity pressures mounted.
483
World Bank,
Bank resolution and “bail-in” in the EU: selected case studies pre and post BRRD.
317
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0319.png
In 2018,
Cyprus Cooperative Bank (CCB)
– by then the second largest credit
institution in Cyprus – witnessed intense liquidity outflows
484
as press rumours spread
suggesting a possible depositor haircut
485
, which echoed the 2013 events and led to a
depletion of EUR 3 bn (with EUR 300 m in a few days only) out of around EUR 11 bn of
deposits
486
. The bank was entirely funded through deposits and it did not have any senior
or subordinated debt. In 2018, the bank was split into a good and a bad bank, with the
operating bank network sold to Hellenic Bank
487
. As the restructuring of CCB started on
the basis of the national resolution law before the EU rules entered into force (namely the
BRRD/SRMR), the process remained governed by Cypriot national law and managed by
national authorities (see also Annex 9)
488
.
The bail-in of depositors in Cyprus triggered certain cross-border spill-overs effects. For
instance, in
Romania
the
branch of BoC
experienced intense liquidity outflows
following the resolution measures implemented by the Cypriot authorities, which
included, as aforementioned, a bail-in depositors of BoC and Laiki. Indeed, initially, it
was envisaged to also bail-in the depositors of that branch, but the plan could not be
implemented. The branch ran out of liquidity and eligible collateral for the refinancing
operations with the Romanian National Bank which led to the temporary closure of the
branch. The Romanian authorities tried to avoid any negative financial stability impact
and hence, to bail-in depositors. After almost four weeks of closure and intense
cooperation between the Romanian and Cypriot bank supervisors, the branch was
successfully integrated into Marfin Bank, the Romanian subsidiary of Laiki Bank. The
transfer concerned all local deposits, cash, liquid assets and a sufficient amount of loans.
This solution satisfied all involved parties and proved to be a good example of cross
border home-host supervisory cooperation in a crisis situation. Albeit, the percentage of
total assets of Cypriot banks, in the Romanian banking sector were rather low, there was
also a risk of contagion to the Greek banks. The Romanian subsidiaries of the Greek
banks were confronted with deposit outflows since the start of the Greek crisis and
although their situation stabilised in the second half of 2012, their deposit base remained
highly sensitive to any adverse developments in the euro area.
In
Greece,
successive rounds of deposit outflows took place throughout the period 2010-
2012 due to a collapse in depositor confidence, caused by economic and political turmoil,
coupled with speculations about a disorderly default, an exit from the Eurozone and a
forcible currency redenomination. Overall, during the period mid-January 2010 to June
484
According to the press (2009),
Cyprus co-operative bank.
485
European Commission (2018),
Post-Programme Surveillance Report- Spring 2018,
institutional papers,
p.83. This coincided with the final steps in the restructuring process of the CCB, which was initiated by the
Cypriot authorities in February 2014 and modified in December 2015. Contrary to initial expectations, the
CCB was unable to return to viability: it failed to recover much money from its very significant portfolio of
non-performing loans (NPLs), partly because of the CCB’s own governance failures and partly because of
obstacles created by the Cypriot legal framework to work out NPLs.
486
According to the press (2009),
Cyprus co-operative bank.
487
According to the press, the operating bank network sold to Hellenic Bank: EUR 9.7 bn in deposits,
performing loans of EUR 4 bn, Cyprus government bonds of EUR 4bn and EUR 1bn in cash. Most of the
non-performing assets (EUR 8.3 bn) were handed over to Kedipes (the Cyprus Asset Management
Company).
488
European Commission (2018),
State Aid SA.35334 (2018/N-2);
OJ C 406, 9.11.2018, p. 1–12.
318
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0320.png
2012, private sector deposits plummeted by 37%, as Greek households and businesses
withdrew domestic deposits of roughly EUR 87 bn. Deposits stabilised only after the
parliamentary elections of June 2012 as the new coalition government declared its
intention to implement the terms of the economic adjustment programme agreement.
However, the January 2015 elections triggered a new wave of “Grexit” fears and a
deposit run. The liquidity pressures created by the deposit flight amplified, as during
December 2014 to June 2015, households and businesses withdrew EUR 43 bn from
banks (nearly a quarter of the total deposits). In February 2015, the ECB withdrew the
waiver on eligibility of Greek government bonds as acceptable collateral for the
Eurosystem refinancing operations leading to the reliance of Greek banks on the more
costly ELA mechanism. Nevertheless, again banks runs were triggered when the ECB
Governing Council decided on 28 June 2015 not to increase the amount of ELA available
to Greek banks because of the uncertainty created by the Greek government’s surprise
decision to call a snap referendum. As almost all banks ran out of cash, the Greek
government imposed sweeping capital controls on 28 June 2015 and introduced a bank
holiday period to stem deposit outflows. On 18 July 2015, a new legislative act was
passed, with which the bank holiday period ended and banks re-opened. However,
certain restrictions on cash withdrawals and transfers of funds remained. Capital controls
were gradually relaxed in line with a conditions-based roadmap, but were fully lifted
only on 1 September 2019.
In November 2015 in
Italy,
the resolution of four small banks
489
(combined market share
of around only 1%), raised concerns how to maintain depositor confidence. The bank of
Italy
490
put the four banks under special administration with the aim to apply the just
transposed resolution tools introduced by the BRRD. However, the bail-in tool was only
available as of 1 January 2016. Four temporary bridge banks were set up that took over
the respective banks’ good assets and liabilities, while preserving their regular business
and employment. In line with the applicable State aid rules
491
, part of the losses incurred
were borne by the banks’ shareholders and subordinated bondholders (including retail
investors)
492
. Since some of the bailed-in retail investors were also depositors, it was
required to limit the risk of deposit outflows and to stabilise the deposit base of the newly
created bridge banks. Therefore, on 22 November 2015, Italy decided to set up a
solidarity fund to compensate losses and restore investor confidence
493
. The solidarity
fund was endowed with EUR 100 m funded by contributions of Italian banks and
managed by the Italian Deposit Guarantee Fund (FITD)
494
. In addition, an arbitration
mechanism was set up to deal with the damages claimed by retail subordinated
489
Banca delle Marche, Banca Popolare dell’Etruria e del Lazio, Cassa di Risparmio della Provincia di
Chieti, Cassa di Risparmio di Ferrara.
490
Bank of Italy (2015),
Information on resolution.
491
European Commission (2016),
Commission decision of 29.04.2016 on the State Aid SA.39543
(2015/N), SA.41134 (2015/N), SA.41925 (2015/N), SA.43547 (2015/N) implemented by Italy Amendment to
the resolution of Banca Marche, Banca Etruria, Carife and Carichieti.
492
According to the press (2015),
Who paid for saving the four Italian banks.
493
Bank of Italy (2016),
Speech by the Governor of the Bank of Italy Ignazio Visco.
494
Italian Deposit Guarantee Fund (FITD),
Solidarity Fund
and Official Journal of the Italian Republic
(2016),
Law Decree 59, 3 May 2016.
319
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0321.png
bondholders from banks that may have violated rules on consumer protection in
investment services.
In 2016, the
Danish
case of
Andelskassen JAK Slagelse
495
was one of the first BRRD
bail-in cases including the write-down of unsecured depositors and contributions of the
DGS, while ensuring uninterrupted access to the bank’s deposits and critical functions
and hence without observed loss of depositor confidence.
Recently, cases in
Spain
demonstrated that political events have the potential to cause
bank runs. In particular, the cases of CaixaBank and Banco Sabadell have underlined the
occasional political nature of bank runs. The Catalan crisis significantly impacted the
financial sector in the area, with clients boycotting the independence movement and
removing their savings from Catalan banks. It further prompted a general fear that, in the
event of independence, clients would not be able to access their savings and that banks
would not have access to the ECB refinancing operations. According to the information
provided by both entities
496
, Caixabank experienced an outflow of EUR 7 bn of deposits
and Sabadell of EUR 4.6 bn. Overall, more than 1300 companies – including CaixaBank
and Banco Sabadell – decided to transfer their legal headquarters out of Catalonia as
result of the ongoing uncertainty.
2.
D
EPOSITOR RANKING IN THE HIERARCHY OF CLAIMS
Existing CMDI framework
In terms of terminology, the existing framework distinguishes among four main types of
deposits:
(1) covered deposits (eligible deposits
497
whose amounts are protected by DGS funds
up to the coverage level set out by the DGSD (EUR 100 000)),
(2) non-covered preferred deposits (eligible deposits from natural persons and SMEs
exceeding the DGSD coverage level),
(3) non-covered non-preferred deposits (large corporate deposits (non-SME)
exceeding the DGSD coverage level), and
(4) non-eligible deposits excluded from repayment by the DGS pursuant to Article
5(1) DGSD, which currently include deposits held by public authorities, financial
sector entities and pension funds. In the hierarchy of claims, non-eligible deposits
rank the same as non-preferred non-covered deposits.
Under the existing CMDI framework, Article 108(1) BRRD creates a
three-tier
depositor preference
in the hierarchy of claims. It provides that covered deposits and
the claims of DGSs in insolvency (subrogating to the right and obligations of covered
deposits following a payout) must rank above non-covered preferred deposits ((deposits
495
Finansiel Stabilitet Group, a public limited company owned by the Danish State through the Ministry of
Business and Growth (2016),
Annual Report 2016.
The lack of effective corporate governance coupled
with prior careless lending led to numerous Danish banks, notably small and medium-sized financial
institutions, to significant distress. By December 2016, the portfolio of financial assets of Andelskassen
amounted to DKK 275 mn in comparison to DKK 1.3 bn in 2015.
496
According to the press (2020),
El Pais article.
497
An ‘eligible deposit’ is a deposit that is eligible to be protected by a DGS.
320
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0322.png
by natural persons and SMEs exceeding EUR 100 000). In turn, the latter must rank
above the claims of ordinary unsecured creditors (senior debt). Therefore, the DGS has
the same ranking as covered deposits, which is preferred relative to all other types of
non-covered deposits.
There are, however, two types of deposits whose ranking is not contemplated in Article
108(1) BRRD: the non-covered non preferred deposits (e.g. corporate non-SME deposits
exceeding the coverage level of EUR 100 000) and the non-eligible deposits excluded
from repayment by the DGS. While Article 108(1) BRRD does not allow these deposits
to rank alongside the preferred deposits mentioned therein, thus setting out a three-tier
approach to the ranking of deposits, the directive is otherwise silent on what level of the
insolvency creditor hierarchy they should be placed, leaving that choice to the national
legislator. In most Member States, the deposits not covered by Article 108(1) BRRD
rank in insolvency alongside ordinary unsecured claims, including senior debt
instruments eligible for MREL (section A of below figure), while in a minority of
Member States, they already rank above ordinary unsecured claims (section B of below
figure).
Figure 28: Stylised view of the three-tier depositor preference in the current creditor
hierarchies in insolvency laws (baseline)
Source: Commission services
Nevertheless, in recent years, an increasing number of Member States have granted a
legal preference in insolvency to those deposits under their national laws
498
. In
compliance with the three-tier approach required by Article 108(1), in those Member
States, the deposits of large corporates and the excluded deposits rank below covered
498
Other Member States may be considering similar amendments in their national insolvency legislation.
321
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0323.png
deposits, DGS claims and eligible deposits of natural persons and SMEs, but above
ordinary unsecured claims.
Table 32: Forms of depositor preference in the EU under the existing hierarchies of
claims
Form of depositor preference
Depositor preference compared to senior unsecured
claims, under a three-tier approach
No depositor preference, where non-preferred non-
covered deposits rank
pari passu
with other senior
unsecured claims
Source: Commission services
Member States
8 Member States (BG, CY, EL,
HR, HU, IT, PT, SI)
19 Member States (AT, BE, CZ,
DE, DK, EE, ES, FI, FR, IE, LV,
LT, LU, MT, NL, PL, RO, SE, SK)
These relevant differences in the creditor hierarchy in insolvency among Member States
lead to a divergent treatment of deposits across the EU and pose complications when
calculating the relevant insolvency counterfactual for the purposes of the NCWO
assessment and the least cost test.
The impact of DGS ranking in the hierarchy of claims on the least cost test (LCT)
The super-preference of the DGS in the current framework, i.e. the fact that it ranks
above other deposits, and its impact on the least cost test (LCT), is the main reason why
the DGS funds can almost never be used outside a payout event of covered deposits in
insolvency.
The objective of the LCT safeguard is to ensure that any DGS intervention other than
paying out of covered deposits would not expose the DGS to losses greater than the ones
it would incur in a payout of covered depositors in an insolvency counterfactual. The
DGS can only provide an amount up to the losses it would bear in case of a hypothetical
payout in insolvency. These losses are given by the difference between the amount
disbursed by the DGS in case of a payout and the proceeds the DGS would recover from
the liquidation/sale of the bank’s assets in insolvency. Given the super-preferred ranking
of the DGS in the hierarchy of claims, the DGS has the hypothetical possibility to
recover most or all of its expenditure in insolvency. Importantly, with such a super-
preference, the DGS would benefit from these recovered amounts before other creditors,
including eligible uncovered depositors (preferred and non-preferred). However, in some
Member States, the recovery rate can be low, mostly depending on the efficiency and
performance of judicial systems, the quality of assets to be liquidated, the time required
to conduct the insolvency proceedings and other factors
499
.
Under the existing framework, the DGS can almost never be used for measures other
than the payout of covered deposits in insolvency, such as use in resolution provided
under Article 109 BRRD. The high ranking of the DGS and consequently high likelihood
to get its claims paid from the insolvency estate, before other creditors, make the
counterfactual of a payout in insolvency appear artificially less costly, despite the fact
that a DGS contribution to resolution or an alternative measure could be more cost
efficient (involve a lower need for cash disbursement from the DGS to support a sale of
499
Given the heterogeneity in recovery rates, Annex 7, which is based on the EBA’s reply to the call for
advice, takes a conservative assumption for an 85% recovery rate. It also shows how a higher or lower
recovery rate would impact the LCT.
322
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0324.png
business strategy, compared to a full payout of all covered deposits), better preserve
depositors’ confidence and facilitate a more efficient crisis management. On one hand,
paying out covered deposits in insolvency is likely to require a very significant upfront
cash disbursement by the DGS (especially in cases of predominantly deposit-funded mid-
sized banks with significant amounts of covered deposits) (see reference to ECB paper
below). On the other hand, an intervention in resolution to support the transfer of a
failing bank to a buyer may require only a portion of those DGS financial means.
Transfer transactions can unfold in many ways, depending on the quality of assets and
the funding/liabilities to match these, as well as the appetite of the buyer and the offered
price. Considering the likely need to plug a gap between the value of assets and deposits
to be transferred to a buyer, the DGS/resolution fund contribution to support such
transfer may be much lower than the total value of covered deposits that would need to
be paid out in insolvency. Under the current set-up, the DGS super-priority ends up
protecting the financial means of the DGS and of the banking industry from possible
replenishment burden by hindering any DGS intervention, without bringing a better
protection for covered deposits. The protection of covered deposits does not depend on
their ranking in the hierarchy of claims; rather, it is insured through the obligation to be
paid out under the DGSD when accounts become unavailable and the mandatory
exclusion from bearing any losses in resolution.
To overcome these limitations, certain Member States include indirect costs in the LCT
in order to facilitate the use of DGS and counteract at least to some extent the super-
preference of the DGS. Other Member States are concerned about including indirect
costs as some of them may be difficult to quantify and have the potential to weaken the
LCT safeguard.
Regarding the argument of cost-efficiency associated with the use of DGS funds in
resolution or alternative measures
versus
the cost of a payout of covered deposits in
insolvency, an ECB paper on DGS alternative measures
500
shows that 261 banks,
banking groups or hosted subsidiaries in the Banking Union could individually deplete
their fully-filled DGSs with a single payout of covered deposits in insolvency. While 129
of these banks are significant institutions likely to involve resolution rather than a
depositor payout in insolvency, the remaining 132 are less significant institutions, which
also have covered deposits exceeding the target level of their DGSs and are spread across
all Banking Union Member States. We can conclude for this reason that, it is appropriate
to allow for cheaper, more cost-efficient alternative uses of the DGS in resolution, to
support a transfer of assets and liabilities (deposits) followed by market exit.
Relevant policy options analysed in the context of the CMDI reform
Withdrawing the super-preference of the DGS and envisaging a more harmonised
depositor preference when compared to the current situation is instrumental in providing
adequate funding in resolution and making resolution effective for smaller and medium-
sized banks that would involve the transfer of the business and market exit of the failed
bank. The main reasoning behind this proposal relies on the notion that the super-
preference of covered deposits and DGS claims subrogating to covered deposits in the
500
ECB (October 2022)
Protecting depositors and saving money - why DGS in the EU should be able to
support transfers of assets and liabilities when a bank fails.
323
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0325.png
current framework significantly reduces the likelihood that a DGS would be exposed to
losses in a hypothetical insolvency considered as the counterfactual for DGS
interventions other than payout. As a result, the capacity of a DGS to contribute to the
alternative measures or in resolution is limited or null.
Two changes to the BRRD rules on the ranking of deposits are key across all the option
packages considered in Chapter 6 of this impact assessment (except the baseline), to
make the framework function in practice and make the access to funding in resolution
truly credible.
First, the legal preference at EU level would be extended to include all deposits (general
depositor preference). This entails that all deposits, including eligible deposits of large
corporates and excluded deposits
501
, would rank above senior unsecured claims.
Second, the different rankings of deposits (i.e. the three-tier approach) would be removed
and replaced either with a two-tier depositor preference (option 2), whereby covered and
preferred deposits rank
pari passu
and above non-preferred non-covered deposits or with
a single ranking (options 3 and 4), whereby all deposits rank at the same level amongst
themselves (single-tier depositor preference). The EBA’s reply to the call for advice and
Annex 7 further describe the different depositor preference scenarios assessed (five
scenarios)
502
, varying in scope and relative ranking among deposits and concluded that
only those without the super-preference of the DGS are worth considering for the CMDI
review (see also Box 3 in Chapter 6). They also describe the reasons why the general
depositor preference with a single-tier ranking best addresses the objective of the
framework, largely because it: (i) protects deposits by reducing the amount of deposits
that would be otherwise bailed-in to reach 8% TLOF and access the RF/SRF and (ii) it
unlocks the largest amounts of funds that the DGS could contribute to measures other
than payout under the least cost test, which is critical for facilitating the use of DGS
funds as proposed by the packages of options.
501
As mentioned, under the policy option described in Annex 6, the deposits of public authorities would
no longer be deemed as excluded deposits.
502
The five possible scenarios of harmonising the depositor preference in the hierarchy of claims have
been tested by the EBA in its reply to the call for advice: (i) baseline or current framework (three-tier
depositor preference with super-preference for DGS and covered deposits); (ii) single-tier depositor
preference (all types of deposits rank
pari passu
among themselves and above ordinary unsecured claims);
(iii)a three-tier depositor preference (covered deposits rank above preferred deposits in all Member States,
which rank above non-preferred deposits, the latter also ranking above ordinary unsecured claims); (iv)
two-tier depositor preference (covered deposits and DGS are super-preferred to preferred deposits, which
rank
pari passu
with non-preferred deposits, the latter ranking above ordinary unsecured claims) and (v)
two-tier depositor preference (covered deposits rank
pari passu
with preferred deposits, all of which rank
above non-preferred deposits, the latter ranking above ordinary unsecured claims).
324
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0326.png
Figure 29: Stylised view of creditor hierarchy in insolvency with a single-tier and two-
tier depositor preference without super-preference of DGS/covered deposits:
Source: Commission services
Impacts of generalising depositor preference versus ordinary unsecured claims
Granting a stronger preference to all deposits
503
, compared to ordinary unsecured claims,
would be beneficial for their protection in resolution and be equally warranted from an
insolvency policy perspective. It would facilitate the bail-in of ordinary unsecured
claims, which could contribute to market discipline and potentially decrease the
likelihood of inflicting losses on deposits. By preferring all deposits versus the ordinary
unsecured category of claims, the repayment that the remaining senior creditors would be
expected to receive in insolvency decreases, which in turn would mitigate the NCWO
risks arising from their bail-in. This would significantly contribute to enhancing the
credibility and implementation of the bail-in tool in resolution, as the bail-in of senior
debt becomes more effective and credible. By mitigating the NCWO impediments to the
bail-in of senior debt, the general depositor preference leads to an increase in the total
amount of claims, other than deposits, that can contribute to loss absorption and
recapitalisation of the institution under resolution. The consequences of a cleaner
category of ordinary unsecured claims on the resolvability of institutions are twofold: the
ability to comply with minimum bail-in of 8% TLOF rule to access the RF/SRF
increases
504
, and the need for contributions from the RF/SRF (or the amount of funding
needed from the RF/SRF) decreases. At the same time, such a change would improve the
transparency and legal certainty of the resolution framework. It moreover results in an
alignment with past experiences of handling banks’ failures, where State aid was granted
503
In the US, the hierarchy of claims also foresees a general depositor preference where all deposits,
whether insured or not, rank
pari passu.
This facilitates the contributions of the deposit insurance fund to
resolution action.
504
As shown in Annex 7.
325
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0327.png
inter alia
with the aim of protecting depositors and where the use of those public funds
did not require the burden sharing of any depositor
505
.
A move towards general preference for all depositors would also be beneficial from a
cross-border and level playing field perspective. A more harmonised insolvency ranking
across the EU would facilitate the resolution of cross-border groups, in particular when
carrying out the NCWO assessment. Disparities in the treatment of depositors across the
EU can be problematic, particularly where they lead to the perception that depositors that
rank
pari passu
with unsecured creditors are more likely to be bailed-in.
At the same time, the granting of a stronger preference to all deposits would be equally
warranted from an insolvency policy perspective. An enhanced protection is aligned with
the central role deposits play in the real economy, being the primary tool for savings and
for payments, as well as in the banking activity, where they represent an important source
of funding and are the main pillar for the confidence that supports the banking system,
which becomes of particular relevance in times of market stress.
Impacts of a single-tier depositor preference without super-preference of DGS
As shown in the EBA call for advice and Annex 7 section 4, placing all deposits in the
same ranking in insolvency increases significantly the likelihood of a DGS being able to
participate in resolution under the LCT, or to fund alternative measures in insolvency, as
well as the amount of funds it can provide.
It should be highlighted that such a change would not translate into a worse treatment for
covered deposits as, in reality, their protection comes from the payout by the DGS up to
the EUR 100 000 level and not from their preferred ranking in insolvency (covered
deposits are paid within seven days from the moment their accounts become unavailable
and they never rely on their ranking in the hierarchy of claims to receive proceeds from
the insolvency estate). Their mandatory exclusion from bail-in is likewise not affected in
the options envisaged in this impact assessment. The single-tier ranking would have the
merit of ensuring that the banking industry does not receive better protection in
insolvency than depositors, even non-covered ones. Replacing the super-priority of DGS
claims with a single-tier ranking for all deposits would enable the use of DGS funds
under the LCT in resolution to resolve smaller and mid-sized banks via transfer strategies
with market exit, without imposing losses on depositors. Such reform would contribute to
reinforcing depositor confidence and safeguarding financial stability by preventing the
risk of bank runs.
The general depositor preference with a single-tier ranking would best address the
objective of the revised framework, because it would: (i) protect deposits in resolution by
reducing the amount that would be otherwise bailed-in
506
to reach 8% TLOF and allow
access to the RF/SRF; (ii) maintain intact the protection enjoyed by covered deposits
which does not depend on their ranking and (iii) unlock the largest amounts of funds that
the DGS could contribute to measures other than the payout of covered deposits under
505
Paragraph 42 of the 2013 Banking Communication explicitly sets out that contribution from deposits is
not required as a mandatory component of burden sharing under State aid rules.
506
For non-covered deposits because covered deposits are already excluded from bail-in.
326
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0328.png
the least cost test, which is critical for facilitating more cost-efficient interventions by the
DGS.
While it may expose the DGS industry-funded safety nets to more frequent contributions
by the banks, it would reduce the likelihood and extent of recourse to taxpayer money,
improve financial stability and depositor protection and safeguard the financial means of
the DGS to a greater extent than a payout of covered deposits in insolvency. This is
especially important for cases of a more systemic nature, i.e. going beyond the failure of
a single institution. Under the current set-up there is a much higher risk that in a systemic
crisis a single failure could deplete the available means of a DGS through the payout of
covered deposits, and it would not be possible to replenish it in good time before it needs
to payout again in a subsequent bank failure. This, in turn, increases the risk of the
sovereign having to step in and provide necessary funds to the DGS to preserve its
payout function. Our proposed changes would allow the DGS to act in a cheaper, more
cost-efficient way in resolution, thereby better preserving its financial means and
liquidity position and possibly allowing it to be used in more than one case during a crisis
of more systemic nature.
Impact of a two-tier depositor preference without super-preference for DGS
The implementation of a two-tier depositor preference without the super-preference of
DGS and covered deposits would entail that covered and preferred deposits rank
pari
passu
and above non-preferred non-covered deposits.
The removal of the DGS super-preference would increase to a relative extent, compared
to the baseline, the amount of funds the DGS could contribute for measures other than
payout under the LCT. However, because the DGS would still be a preferred creditor in
relation to non-covered non-preferred deposits, the increase in DGS funds unlocked
under the least cost test for these measures would be significantly lower than under a
single-tier depositor preference where all deposits would rank
pari passu
in the hierarchy
of claims (see Box 3 in Chapter 6). Based on the sample analysed in Annex 7, section
4.1.3, the funding unlocked through the least cost test under a single-tier depositor
preference would be 20 times higher than under the current framework, while it would be
five times higher than under a two-tier depositor preference. Such a change in the
hierarchy of claims would not deliver on all objectives of the CMDI reform, which
would remain very close to the status quo (alternative measures including bail-outs
would continue to be used for small and mid-sized banks).
Stakeholder views
In what concerns the
general depositor preference,
consultations with stakeholders
revealed that the bail-in of any deposits is deemed to carry a significant contagion risk to
the financial system and to entail political sensitivities (see also point 1 of Annex 8), so
much so that, despite only covered deposits being in the list of mandatory exclusions
from bail-in in Article 44(2) BRRD, resolution authorities generally expect to have to
exclude other deposits on a discretionary basis from bearing losses in resolution under
Article 44(3) BRRD. When some of those deposits rank
pari passu
with senior bail-
inable liabilities, their exclusion has the potential to create NCWO problems, particularly
considering that they tend to represent a significant percentage of the total senior class.
327
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0329.png
The stakeholders against the general depositor preference mostly said that there was a
lack of rationale for differentiating the treatment of non-covered deposits from large
corporates and from financial institutions from the treatment given to other types of
senior claims, particularly for those instruments which are legally considered deposits but
are very similar to bonds or other securities. It should be noted, however, that this
differentiation already exists in the current framework, considering that deposits from
large enterprises are covered by the protection granted by a DGS. It was also argued that
such a change could have an impact on the funding costs of institutions, although it
should be kept in mind that a more favourable ranking of these deposit claims under
normal insolvency proceedings would become a more accurate indicator of their
associated risk of losses in resolution and, therefore, could lead to a more accurate
pricing, thus offsetting increases in the cost of funding of senior debt. Similarly, the
pricing of senior debt would also become more indicative of the associated risk of losses
in resolution, which would increase transparency and legal certainty for creditors. The
alleged marginally higher issuance costs for ordinary unsecured debt (and by extent to
marginally higher funding costs for banks) raised by some banks is not supported by
empirical evidence
507
. Moreover, any potential marginal cost impact must be weighed
against the added benefits that depositor preference brings in terms of enforcing market
discipline on financial investors to monitor banks’ risks more closely, once their
expectation that they will be bailed-in (instead of being bailed-out under a less effective
CMDI framework) becomes more credible.
Finally, some stakeholders claims that general depositor preference would leave
resolution authorities without flexibility in determining the scope of the bail-in tool. In
this respect, it is important to note that it is not being proposed to mandatorily exclude
non-covered deposits from bail-in, which means that resolution authorities still maintain
the possibility to impose losses on those deposits if and when deemed necessary and
appropriate.
Regarding views on the
single-tier depositor preference,
some stakeholders (including
a few Member States and banks) argue that preserving a super-priority for DGS in the
hierarchy of claims is instrumental in ensuring the recovery of funds used to payout
covered deposits in insolvency, even if the creditor payout in insolvency can take many
years (depending on the judicial system in each Member State and the approach to
liquidate assets
508
). These stakeholders claim that a single-tier depositor preference in the
creditor hierarchy would increase the costs and liquidity needs of the DGS and would
deviate from the minimisation moral hazard and from the guiding resolution principle of
ensuring that losses are borne by shareholders and creditors. Other Member States are
fully supportive of removing the super-preference of the DGS from the hierarchy of
507
See for example, the IMF Working Paper 13/172 (July 2013),
Bank Resolution Costs, Depositor
Preference, and Asset Encumbrance,
from a review of previous studies it concludes that introducing a
single-tier depositor preference in the US had “little “systemic effect” on overall bank funding costs.
508
In some Member States and in specific cases, the approach to liquidate assets in insolvency is to sell
those assets to buyers which may take several years to complete. In other cases, depending on the bank’s
business, a solvent wind-down of assets may be pursued, meaning that proceeds are recovered by
respecting the reimbursement schedule of assets, which for certain loan portfolios such as mortgages can
take tens of years.
328
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0330.png
claims as they see this as the only credible alternative to make funding in resolution
available when needed.
Importantly, the amount of cash the DGS must disburse in a payout in insolvency
corresponds to the total amount of covered deposits in the bank (plus other direct costs)
and, as shown in the evaluation (sections 7.1.4.4. and 7.2.2.6 in Annex 5 of the IA), it is
likely to be significantly higher than the amount the DGS would need to contribute to
fund the gap between assets and liabilities for facilitating a transfer strategy in resolution
or in the context of an alternative measure. Additionally, by facilitating transfer strategies
in resolution, the franchise value of the failing bank’s assets is preserved as opposed to
insolvency
509
and so is the client relationship, which is transferred to a new bank rather
than being interrupted, avoiding thus potential contagion effects, risks of bank runs and
impacts on financial stability. Therefore, the difference in costs for the DGS between
pursuing more resolution
versus
insolvency lies in the more efficient usage of funds,
facilitated by removing the super-preference of DGS in the hierarchy of claims.
Facilitating the use of DGS funds through changes to the depositor ranking positively
contributes to financial stability and depositor confidence, while also better preserving
the DGSs’ available financial means in case other crises occur. The rationale for allowing
a broader scope of DGS interventions is further explained in Annex 10.
It should be highlighted that such a change would not translate into a worse treatment for
covered deposits as, in reality, their protection comes from the payout by the DGS and
not from their preferred ranking in insolvency. Their mandatory exclusion from bail-in is
likewise not affected in the options envisaged in this impact assessment. The super-
priority ends up protecting the financial means of the DGS and the banking industry, who
are called to replenish those funds through contributions. The single-tier ranking would
have the merit of ensuring that the banking industry does not receive better protection in
insolvency than depositors, even non-covered ones. Replacing the super-priority of DGS
claims with a single-tier ranking for all deposits would contribute to reinforcing depositor
confidence and safeguarding financial stability by preventing the risk of bank runs.
3.
M
ANDATORY EXCLUSIONS FROM BAIL
-
IN
Another aspect regarding the harmonisation of the hierarchy of claims relates to the
priority ranking under national insolvency laws of liabilities which are mandatorily
excluded from bail-in under Article 44(2) BRRD (see
Table 33
for a listing of excluded
liabilities). The ranking of these liabilities diverges significantly across Member States,
in line with national specificities pertaining to areas such as taxation, employee
protection, social security or civil law. In some Member States, some of these excluded
liabilities rank above deposits, in others, some rank below or among deposits.
The possibility to give a legal preference to these exclusions in the hierarchy of claims,
combined with requiring that those preferred claims excluded from bail-in rank above the
claims of the DGS subrogating to covered deposits, so as to reduce the risk of NCWO
509
According to the valuation methodology, the haircut imposed on assets in a transfer transaction is lower
than the haircut that could be imposed in some situations in insolvency. This may not be the case in a wind-
down liquidation which may take a very long time to complete.
329
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0331.png
when applying the bail-in tool was discussed with Member States. However, the large
majority of Member States did not favour the introduction of such changes in the national
creditor rankings, as this would unduly interfere with other areas of their national laws
and legal traditions that are not harmonised at EU level. Member States noted that
liabilities excluded from bail-in do not form a homogenous group and that the reasons
justifying their protection in a resolution scenario where the bank is to remain in going
concern, generally linked with the need to ensure the continuity of critical functions and
to reduce the risk of systemic contagion, may not be present in a liquidation scenario,
particularly in those Member States where the activity of the bank does not continue in
insolvency. Concerns were also raised regarding the compatibility with constitutional
principles of providing the same types of creditors with a different treatment in
insolvency depending on who the debtor is (i.e., a bank or a non-financial entity) and the
operational difficulties in implementing these legal preferences.
In order to judge the relative importance of each type of excluded liability,
Table 33
shows the share of each type of mandatorily excluded liabilities out of the total of
mandatory exclusions, depending on the size classification and strategy. For smaller
banks, covered deposits represent the bulk of excluded liabilities (80%), while for
medium sized banks this share decreases (57.8%) and for large banks it is almost on a par
(47.4%) with secured liabilities (43.5%) which are more material.
Table 33: Share of each type of mandatory exclusions out of total excluded liabilities
(resolution entities, %)
(% of mandatory exclusions)
Small
Medium
Large
Resolution
50.1%
41.0%
4.5%
1.1%
1.4%
0.3%
0.8%
0.2%
0.4%
0.1%
Liquidation
50.6%
43.6%
2.5%
1.9%
0.1%
0.2%
0.6%
0.2%
0.3%
0.0%
Covered deposits
81.5%
54.8%
47.3%
Secured liabilities
13.4%
38.4%
43.2%
Liability to institutions <7 days
2.0%
2.1%
5.3%
Client liabilities
0.7%
3.1%
0.4%
Fiduciary liabilities
0.7%
0.4%
1.7%
System liabilities
0.3%
0.1%
0.3%
Employee liabilities
0.5%
0.5%
0.9%
Critical services liabilities
0.3%
0.1%
0.2%
Tax liabilities
0.4%
0.3%
0.5%
DGS liabilities
0.1%
0.0%
0.1%
Source: Commission services, based on EBA CfA report, data as of Q4 2019
330
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0332.png
Figure 30: Share of each type of mandatory exclusions out of total excluded
liabilities (resolution entities, %)
Source: Commission services, based on EBA CfA report, data as of Q4 2019
Table 34
shows the amount of liabilities mandatorily excluded from bail-in, expressed in
% TLOF per size category and strategy, at the level of the entire sample. Institutions’
liability structure is composed of significant amounts of liabilities statutorily excluded
from bail-in. On average, these represent 47.2% of TLOF for small and non-complex
banks, 51.2% for medium and 40.5% for large institutions. Covered deposits represent
the highest share of excluded liabilities, followed by secured liabilities, significantly less
prominent for the smallest institutions, and to a lesser extent liabilities to institutions
below 7 days. Other forms of excluded liabilities represent much lower amounts, across
all types of institutions. The differences are not material when breaking down the
population by strategy.
Table 34: Largest types of mandatory exclusions from bail-in (%TLOF)
(%TLOF)
Small
47.2%
38.5%
6.3%
0.9%
Medium
51.2%
28.1%
19.7%
1.1%
Large
40.5%
19.2%
17.5%
2.1%
Resolution
43.5%
21.8%
17.8%
2.0%
Liquidation
38.2%
19.3%
16.7%
1.0%
Mandatory exclusions
Of which: covered deposits
Of which: secured liabilities
Of which: liability to institutions <7 days
Source: Commission services, based on EBA CfA report, data as of Q4 2019
331
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0333.png
Figure 31: Largest types of mandatory exclusions from bail-in (% TLOF)
Source: Commission services, based on EBA CfA report, data as of Q4 2019
On average for all entities in the sample, mandatory exclusions account for up to 50% of
the TLOF at national level in eight Member States, and up to 70% in 14 additional
Member States.
Table 35: Mandatory exclusions from bail-in (%TLOF), Member State level
(%TLOF)
Count Member States*
2
8
13
3
IE, LU
AT, BE, DE, EE, FI, FR, NL, SE
BG, CY, ES, EL, HR, IT, LT, LV, MT, PL, PT, RO, SI
CZ, DK, SK
Below 30%
Between 30 and 50%
Between 50 and 70%
Above 70%
* Figures for HU not available.
Source: Commission services, based on EBA CfA report, data as of Q4 2019
Despite the large amounts of mandatory exclusions, the analysis shows that the
proportion of exclusions over their respective ranking in the applicable creditor hierarchy
is moderate. For the purpose of this analysis, the simplified creditor hierarchy used in
Annex 7 has been used to ensure comparability.
Table 36
shows the amount of
mandatory exclusions ranking senior to senior non-preferred and junior to non-preferred
deposits (or preferred deposits in jurisdictions with a general depositor preference) in
percentage of the concerned ranks in insolvency pursuant to the applicable hierarchy in
each Member State
510
. This perspective does not consider excluded liabilities ranking at
the high end of the hierarchy of claims and focuses on those ranks that are likely to be
impacted by the bail-in.
510
With one exception covering liabilities
pari passu
with senior non-preferred due to the presence of
excluded liabilities at this level of the hierarchy of claims.
332
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0334.png
Table 36: Mandatory exclusions from bail-in (exclusions ranking between senior non-
preferred and non-preferred or preferred deposits depending on the applicable
depositor preference, % of liabilities with similar ranking)
(% ordinary unsecured - hypothetical)
Small
5.2%
0.1%
4.0%
Medium
4.4%
0.5%
6.2%
Large
5.8%
1.6%
8.2%
Resolution Liquidation
5.7%
0.7%
6.5%
4.1%
0.0%
4.0%
Mandatory exclusions (average)
Mandatory exclusions (first quartile)
Mandatory exclusions (third quartile)
Source: Commission services, based on EBA CfA report, data as of Q4 2019
On average, those mandatory exclusions represent less than 6% of the respective liability
classes, with a widely spread distribution around the average, as 25% of the resolution
entities (first quartile) have a portion of excluded liabilities at most equal to 0.1% or
1.6% for small and large institutions, respectively.
These results are not indicative of actual NCWO risks, which remain a case-by-case
assessment based on each bank’s liability structure. They provide, however, an overview
of the magnitude of the exclusions in those layers more prone to generate NCWO risks.
Having in mind the legal and operational difficulties presented above and the arguments
put forward by Member States during the consultation stage, together with the limited
impact on the reduction of NCWO risks, the possibility of introducing a legal preference
for all liabilities mandatorily excluded from bail-in and ranking them above the claims of
DGSs subrogating to covered deposits was discarded and was therefore not considered in
any of the options described in this impact assessment.
4.
E
ARLY INTERVENTIONS MEASURES
The purpose of early intervention measures is to allow interventions by competent
authorities at an earlier stage of financial deterioration of a bank with a view to limit or
avoid its impact. However, these measures have been rarely applied so far. The EBA
indicated that, in most situations where the EIM triggers were met, competent authorities
preferred to address the situation through other supervisory powers
511
.
The early intervention powers conferred on competent authorities on the basis of national
laws implementing the BRRD overlap to an extent with the supervisory powers, provided
in the CRD (and also mirrored in the SSMR)
512
. This overlap creates legal uncertainty
and procedural challenges for competent authorities and could explain to some extent
their scarce application. Also, in the Banking Union, the provisions on early intervention
powers contained in the BRRD are not replicated in a uniform and directly applicable
legal basis, meaning that their application by competent authorities, including the ECB,
may hinge on potentially diverging national transposition measures.
511
See EBA (27 May 2021),
Report on the application of EIMs in the EU in accordance with Articles 27-
29 BRRD,
EBA/REP/2021/12, p 17-19.
512
More specifically, some of the early intervention measures listed in Article 27(1) BRRD partially or
fully overlap with other supervisory powers in Article 104(1) CRD and Article 16(2) SSMR.
333
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0335.png
The EIMs available to competent authorities should be revised to improve legal clarity
and eliminate the overlaps with supervisory measures provided in CRD and SSMR
513
. A
single legal basis for their direct application in the Banking Union (i.e. a regulation)
would also reduce the difficulties caused by diverging transpositions of the current
BRRD provisions in national laws. Moreover, the need for sufficiently early coordination
between resolution and competent authorities should also be ensured in the EIM process.
Based on the observation that, so far, EIMs have been used rarely
514
, the Commission
would not consider the possibility of simply preserving the status quo as appropriate.
Instead, two options were considered:
removing these measures entirely from the BRRD and allowing their use as
supervisory powers according to SSMR and CRD;
amending the provisions in BRRD only to the extent necessary to address the
overlap between the EIMs and supervisory measures, and providing a single
legal basis for their application by the ECB in SRMR.
The first option would substantially increase the margin of manoeuvre and discretion of
supervisors in applying EIMs. In particular, subsuming these measures under supervisory
powers would entail that, rather than having to meet specific triggers (as is the case now)
to be able to use EIMs, supervisors would be able to use them based on their general
discretion and proportionality considerations, as it happens for all supervisory measures.
This option, however, has several substantial drawbacks. First, it appears
disproportionate to the objectives pursued. The complete elimination of all EIMs from
BRRD is not necessary to address the issue of overlaps, particularly considering that the
overlap is only partial
515
. Also, the transfer of all the EIMs into supervisory legislation
entails the amendment of the relevant provisions in CRD and SSMR so as to include
powers currently not provided therein. This would be an additional complication,
particularly considering that the legal basis for changes to SSMR requires unanimity of
Member States to implement legislative changes. Also, the first option would move EIMs
entirely under the remit of the supervisory framework, which is regulated by the general
principle of proportionality
516
, leaving supervisors with substantial discretion when
choosing whether to apply supervisory powers and which one. In particular, the
supervisory framework does not provide specific triggers to assess whether the
conditions to apply the powers overlapping with EIM are met. Also, it does not provide
any “escalation ladder” between less invasive and more invasive powers. As a result, this
approach appears disproportionate also with respect to the impact of the different
measures. While it may be not be appropriate to establish a strict escalation ladder with
specific hard triggers for each measure, at least some distinction between those which
513
514
See Annex 5 (Evaluation).
See EBA (27 May 2021),
Report on the application of early intervention measures in the European
Union in accordance with Articles 27-29 of the BRRD,
EBA/REP/2021/12, p 17 to 19.
515
In particular, an overlap exists between the measures in Article 27(1)(b), (d), (f) and (g) BRRD and
articles 104 CRD and article 16 SSMR.
516
Connected to an actual or likely breach of the requirements in CRD or CRR.
334
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0336.png
may have a limited impact on the bank and those which may be more disruptive seems
desirable.
This is in turn relevant to ensure coordination between supervisors and resolution
authorities. In the absence of a clear demarcation between the more and less invasive
measures available to the supervisor, the only options in this respect would be to either
require the supervisor to coordinate with the resolution authority anytime it applies any
supervisory measures (including less relevant supervisory powers which do not indicate a
risk of important deterioration of the bank’s financial situation and have no clear link
with the initiation of resolution), or eliminate the need for coordination. Notwithstanding
the practical arrangements that may already exist between the relevant competent and
resolution authorities, BRRD and SRMR should ensure that cooperation between those
authorities takes place in an appropriate and timely way, to ensure sufficient preparation
for resolution and even a timely trigger of FOLF.
Finally, for completeness, it should be clarified that, from the perspective of market
reputation, and specifically when it comes to the application of the Market Abuse
Regulation
517
, there is no difference between the use of supervisory powers or early
intervention measures. In particular, this regulation qualifies as ‘insider information’ any
information which, if disclosed, “would
be likely to have a significant effect on the prices
of those financial instruments”
518
. Such qualification would lead to the application of a
set of obligations and safeguards contained in the Market Abuse Regulation. However,
for the purposes of its application, there is no difference between the application of a
supervisory measure or an EIM. In both cases, the information that such a measure has
been applied may be qualified as insider information depending on the specific
circumstances of the case. From this perspective, therefore, there is no reason to prefer
one of the mentioned approaches to the other.
On this basis, the second and more targeted approach has been retained. In particular, it is
sufficient to amend BRRD provisions only to the extent necessary to address issues with
the EIMs, which directly overlap with supervisory measures. In this respect, there can be
scope for further amendments on the requirements to activate these measures in BRRD
with a view to ease their application and the internal sequencing between EIMs. The
reform could anyway maintain some form of a distinction between measures considered
less invasive and those considered more invasive
519
.
Moreover, a single and directly applicable legal basis for the use of EIMs should be
introduced in SRMR to ensure an effective and consistent application by the ECB
(without having to rely on potentially diverging transpositions of the BRRD provisions).
Finally, the reform should ensure efficient and swift coordination between supervisors
and resolution authorities in the context of EIMs. The proposed approach would also be
517
Regulation (EU) No 596/2014 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 16 April 2014 on
market abuse (market abuse regulation) and repealing Directive 2003/6/EC of the European Parliament and
of the Council and Commission Directives 2003/124/EC, 2003/125/EC and 2004/72/EC (OJ L 173,
12.6.2014, p. 1–61).
518
Article 7 of the Market Abuse Regulation.
519
Several of the elements which form part of this option were discussed and supported by most Members
in the context of the Commission expert group (EGBPI).
335
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0337.png
consistent with the F4F Platform recommendations for eliminating the overlap between
EIMs and supervisory powers
520
.
5.
T
RIGGERING OF
FOLF
The timing of the FOLF determination is crucial with respect to the amount of private
resources left in the bank to execute the resolution strategy. The earlier FOLF is
triggered, the more liquidity, capital and other bail-inable resources are available in the
bank. Conversely, a tardive FOLF determination, which is likely to be related to the
important implications of the decision (including in terms of legal risk), combined with
the discretion granted to the supervisors in this respect, often leads to a more severe
depletion of equity, liquidity and potentially other instruments than under a timelier
FOLF determination
521
, which as a result may endanger the effective application of the
most appropriate resolution strategy. Since the FOLF assessment is under the discretion
of the competent authority
522
, it is crucial to ensure a timely assessment of FOLF through
adequate governance, cooperation and timely exchange of information between
competent and resolution authorities, so as to support a smooth continuum between going
and gone concern.
Supervisory discretion is important to ensure that all the elements of a specific case are
properly taken into account, in particular by considering the likely evolution of the
financial distress as well as potential alternatives (i.e. such as the presence of available
private buyers). Moreover, the discretion is needed to account for the potential
implications in terms of market and reputational impact, which are naturally associated
with the determination of a bank’s failure.
The Commission examined three options in view of addressing the identified problem:
first, preserving full supervisory discretion, to ensure that the specific
circumstances of each case are always considered with the maximum
flexibility (status quo);
second, imposing stricter quantitative triggers for FOLF; and
third, providing for framed supervisory discretion with focus on the degree of
the bank’s financial deterioration.
The first approach was discarded because it would not address the problems of
insufficient legal certainty and would not contribute to the objective of activating crisis
measures earlier. This in turn affects the available financial resources in resolution (or
insolvency) and subsequently the capacity to access additional funding sources. In
particular, while there is merit in considering full flexibility in the run up to a bank’s
failure, the risk of considerable losses and/or liquidity runs, which would need to be
520
521
See Annex 2.
As the situation of the bank deteriorates further, short-term funding providers may refrain from rolling
over their commitments and depositors may potentially run on the bank.
522
Although the resolution framework also allows the resolution authority to initiate FOLF. In the Banking
Union, all FOLF determinations of banks under the SRB’s direct remit were launched by the ECB and the
timing of the relevant assessments varied depending on individual circumstances in each case.
336
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
covered in resolution/insolvency proceedings in the event that a prospective buyer or any
other private solution does not materialise, cannot be disregarded.
A second possibility would be to provide for stricter triggers for the authorities to
determine a bank as being FOLF. In particular, the current provisions in Article 32
BRRD do not contain any hard triggers to be used by supervisors (and, eventually, by
resolution authorities) for this purpose. The requirement is rather to consider whether the
conditions which would justify a withdrawal of the bank’s license (as per the applicable
supervisory framework) are met or are likely to be met in the near future. Similarly, the
supervisor is required to consider if a situation of illiquidity of the bank (i.e. the bank
cannot repay its obligations when due) or balance sheet insolvency (i.e., the assets of the
bank are less than its liabilities) has occurred or is likely to occur in the near future.
These rather general conditions could be articulated in a more specific and quantifiable
manner within the legislative text.
This second approach would improve the clarity and certainty of the supervisor’s
decisions and would in turn improve legal certainty and predictability for banks and for
the markets. Also, if correctly set up, it would ensure that the bank’s failure is declared at
a time when sufficient liquidity and loss absorption resources are retained, to be used for
an effective restructuring of the bank in the event of resolution, and ensuring that more
resources are available to repay creditors if the bank is instead put into national
insolvency. At the same time, however, this approach creates a substantial risk of
arbitrary decisions, which may end up damaging banks and the markets. Considering the
complexity of a bank’s business and the many circumstances, which may contribute to
create a situation of failure or likely failure, it seems difficult for the legislator to set up
strict hard triggers which can sufficiently encompass the various circumstances occurring
at the time of the bank’s financial deterioration. This creates, for example, a risk of
forcing supervisors to take decisions on banks which may actually still be sold to a buyer
or managed through other tools than insolvency or resolution, or inversely the risk of not
being able to declare FOLF sufficiently early because the strict legal conditions are not
yet met. This option is therefore deemed too rigid and it would not allow sufficient
margin for supervisors to assess important elements at the time of a bank’s financial
deterioration, creating a substantial risk of incorrect (too early or too late) decisions,
which may end up damaging banks, their customers and the markets.
Against these considerations, the retained approach (third option) would be to instead
frame the discretion of the supervisor, so as to ensure a better balance between clarity
and predictability of their decisions and the need to account for flexible action.
In particular, the reform should ensure that the current rules on the FOLF determination,
while leaving room to still take into account the existence of private solutions to address
the failure of the bank, do not risk excessively delaying the process for the preparation of
a potential resolution or insolvency. To achieve this, the supervisor should be required to
notify sufficiently early the resolution authority as soon as it considers that there is a
material risk that an institution or entity meets the conditions for being assessed as failing
or likely to fail. On this basis, the resolution authority should be empowered to assess, in
close cooperation with the competent authority, what it considers to be a reasonable
timeframe for the purposes of looking for solutions, of private or administrative nature,
337
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
able to prevent the failure. The supervisor should maintain its discretion to explore the
possibility of private solutions, as they may prevent the bank’s failure.. Should it be
concluded that the deterioration of the bank’s financial conditions has reached such a
stage that its resolvability would be endangered, authorities should take this element into
due account in their decision to declare the FOLF and in setting a timeline to take action.
Where the competent authority concludes that the institution or entity is failing or likely
to fail, it should formally communicate this to the resolution authority. The resolution
authority should then determine whether the conditions for resolution are met.
This option, which is common across all packages of policy options presented in Chapter
6, would improve legal certainty and in turn, foster the use of crisis measures at a
sufficiently early time to ensure adequate financing resources and therefore the likelihood
of meeting the requirements to access the resolution fund.
6.
I
NTERACTION BETWEEN
FOLF
TRIGGERS AND INSOLVENCY
National insolvency proceedings are very heterogeneous across EU Member States. One
difference concerns the trigger to initiate such proceedings. Only few Member States
aligned the triggers for commencing national insolvency proceedings with the FOLF
triggers in the BRRD. In general, the trigger to initiate insolvency is only met later than
FOLF triggers, when the bank reaches a state of financial insolvency (which generally
entails the bank’s inability to repay its debts). This may give rise to a situation where a
failing bank for which there is no public interest in using resolution, can also not be
placed in insolvency because the trigger to initiate the proceedings is not met. This can
happen, for example, when a bank is declared FOLF based on a likelihood of breach of
capital requirements, without the bank being in actual breach or insolvent yet.
To address this potential “limbo” situation, the 2019 Banking Package introduced
Article 32b BRRD, requiring Member States to ensure the orderly winding up in
accordance with the applicable national law of failing banks, which cannot be resolved
due to negative PIA. However, the implementation of this article in the national legal
framework in the current form seems insufficient to address all residual risks of standstill
situations. In particular, there is still uncertainty as to what the concept of “winding up in
accordance with national law” entails, and whether it requires the exit of the bank from
the market and within which timeframe. Due to the variety of actions that can be taken
under national rules, the winding up of banks across the EU may lead to a long period of
restructuring during which the bank continues operating. There is, therefore,
inconsistency and uncertainty across Member States regarding managing banks that are
not resolved.
BRRD II partly addressed this issue by introducing a provision (Article 32b) which
requires that, in the event of FOLF with no public interest, a bank must be wound down
according to the procedure available under national laws. This provision still leaves a
margin of uncertainty as to which procedure should apply in these cases, and particularly
whether only insolvency laws (or at least and namely procedures labelled as “national
insolvency proceedings” under BRRD) should apply – or all the national procedures
available are acceptable – and what the wording “winding up” exactly entails. At the
same time, it should be observed that the choice to use the open language contained in
338
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0340.png
the provision was the result of a specific decision in the course of the negotiation
between co-legislators, to avoid excessively limiting the avenues available at national
level and avoid a harmonisation of the existing procedures.
Three options were considered:
the baseline option i.e. keeping the current legislative provision allowing for
substantial margin for available solutions at national level;
Establishing an automatic correspondence in the law between the conditions
which can justify a FOLF determination and the triggers for insolvency in
national law;
Providing further framing to the existing provisions, and particularly to
Article 32b, while maintaining a degree of diversification in the procedures
available at national level.
A first available solution would be to retain the legislative text in its current form,
leaving substantial margin for available solutions at national level. This would avoid a
risk of unwanted limitations, and would in particular allow solutions at national level,
which can be beneficial in preserving the bank’s value (e.g. through restructuring or sale
measures), as well as avoid a disorderly liquidation procedure, which may cause
disruptions in the market or loss of value. At the same time, this avenue would do little in
improving clarity and would still maintain uncertainty as to the outcome of such
procedures. For example, it cannot be excluded that, in some cases, it would lead to very
long periods of restructuring, which do not necessarily improve the viability of the bank,
before a decision is taken on forcing a bank’s exit from the market. This option was
therefore discarded.
A second possibility would be to establish in the law an automatic correspondence
between FOLF triggers and insolvency triggers. This would ensure complete clarity and
predictability and would guarantee that if, resolution does not follow a FOLF declaration,
an insolvency proceeding according to national laws would instead take place and the
bank would exit the market. However, this option has the disadvantage of limiting
substantially the available measures under national law. A number of viable procedures
are not qualified as insolvency in the narrow sense, as they do not entail the immediate
closure of the bank’s business and its liquidation or sale, but allow other intermediate
steps to be taken, for example a period of restructuring to avoid insolvency or to look for
potential buyers. Also, this option would require some relevant changes to national
insolvency laws, particularly with respect to the triggers to initiate the insolvency
procedures. This is challenging in practice and in some cases not possible under national
laws, as it would require the competent insolvency authority (in many cases a court) to
act on the basis of prospective assessments of the bank’s situation carried out by a
supervisor. This is not legally or constitutionally feasible in many Member States. The
non-desirability of this solution was also confirmed in the context of the discussion in the
CWP under the German Presidency
523
. As such, this option was discarded.
523
European Council (November 2020),
German Presidency progress report on strengthening the
Banking Union.
339
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0341.png
The third and retained option
524
in this respect is to provide further framing and
clarifications as to the functioning and consequences of Article 32b BRRD. This would
entail, in particular, a set of clarifications and additional elements on the concept of
“winding up under the applicable national law” contained in this provision. The objective
of these clarifications is to ensure that such procedures lead to the market exit of the
bank. It is acceptable to leave a margin at national level as to how this market exit should
occur (i.e., whether through a sale or otherwise). However, clarity on the need to produce
this outcome, and possibly a clearer reference to a time frame for the exit, would improve
clarity and certainty and reduce the possibility of standstill situations. In this context, it is
also appropriate to further enhance the role of the withdrawal of the bank’s license when
FOLF is declared and no resolution ensues. Further clarity on the interactions between
the FOLF determination and the withdrawal of the license by the supervisor, and, to the
extent possible, a better framing of how this power should be exercised, would improve
the functioning of the framework in this respect. It is important, in particular, to ensure
that the supervisor can withdraw the license in all cases in which a bank has been
declared FOLF.
7.
DGS
BRIDGE TO
8% TOLF
FOR TRANSFER STRATEGIES
The policy options described in Chapter 6 of the impact assessment allow the DGS to
facilitate the transfer of deposits, including by providing a bridge to meet the access
conditions for the RF/SRF.
Figure 32
illustrates different stylised scenarios
525
to
visualise who would pay and who would be protected. The limit to the amount of the
intervention of the DGS and the conditions for the SRF to cover depositors vary
depending on the option in the IA.
Under scenario 1, the bank’s internal loss absorption capacity would suffice to reach the
8% TLOF threshold and access the RF/SRF. In this case, the SRF is available and the
DGS may also be potentially available.
Scenarios 2-5 show different cases, where the internal loss absorption capacity of the
bank is not sufficient to reach the 8% TLOF threshold. In those scenarios, depositors may
need to suffer losses in order to access financing by the RF/SRF under the current rules.
This could be avoided by allowing the DGS to shield depositors (not only covered) from
such losses.
Under scenario 2, the LCT would allow the DGS to contribute exactly the amount
sufficient to reach the access conditions for the SRF. Once the DGS has contributed such
an amount, the SRF intervenes in addition to the DGS, given that the DGS contribution
alone is still not sufficient to cover all the losses accumulated.
Under scenario 3, DGS would only cover part of the gap between the assets and the
deposits transferred, as the LCT would not allow for more. The other part of the gap
would have to be covered by the resolution fund.
524
525
This option was supported by the majority of member in the Commission expert group (EGBPI).
A variety of other scenarios are possible.
340
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0342.png
Under scenario 4, the amount provided by the DGS would be lower than what the LCT
would allow for, however this would be sufficient to reach 8% TLOF.
Under scenario 5, to protect deposits from bearing losses, the DGS would intervene but
with an amount lower than the one allowed under a positive LCT (no need to get as high
as 8% TLOF and access the fund).
Figure 32: Visual on who pays and who is protected
Scenario 1:
SRF funding only accessible when
loss absorbing capacity reaches 8% TLOF
Scenario 2:
If losses exceed 8% TLOF and loss
absorbing capacity is below 8% TLOF, DGS
could fill the gap if LCT allows
341
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0343.png
Scenario 3:
If losses exceed 8% TLOF and loss
absorbing capacity is below 8% TLOF, DGS
could fill the gap if LCT allows (LCT <8%)
Scenario 4:
If losses exceed 8% TLOF and loss
absorbing capacity is below 8% TLOF, DGS
could fill the gap if LCT allows (LCT >8%)
Scenario 5:
If losses are below 8% TLOF and
loss absorbing capacity is below 8% TLOF,
DGS could fill the gap to loss coverage if LCT
allows. No SRF intervention needed.
Notes: * The amount of deposits which may be exposed to losses to reach 8% TLOF depends on the specific
situation at hand, and particularly on the amount of assets that are transferred to a buyer; **In scenario 4, SRF
is used to shield deposits from losses only if they meet specific requirements; *** The amount of DGS funding
depends on the scenario. In scenario 2 the whole amount given by the LCT is used (even beyond 8%), in scenario
4 the lower between the LCT and 8%.
Source: Commission Services
8.
T
REATMENT OF LIQUIDATION ENTITIES IN THE
MREL
FRAMEWORK
Under the MREL framework, resolution authorities are required to adopt a MREL
decision for all banks under their remit, regardless of the strategy chosen during
resolution planning in case of their failure
526
. This includes the banks likely to be wound
up under normal insolvency proceedings or other equivalent national procedures
according to the resolution plan (the so-called “liquidation entities”). As a rule, the
526
See the reply to question 38 in
Commission Notice relating to the interpretation of certain legal
provisions of the revised bank resolution framework in reply to questions raised by Member States’
authorities (2020/C 321/01).
342
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0344.png
MREL set for liquidation entities does not exceed the loss absorption amount as
determined by the applicable minimum capital requirements. There is no additional
requirement in terms of the liquidation entities’ liability structure nor any increased loss
absorption capacity in comparison to the prudential requirements.
While there is no publicly available data on the number of liquidation entities in each
Member State in the Banking Union, it can be reasonably expected that a majority of
institutions that are not in the direct remit of the SRB would be liquidation entities – even
more so in domestic markets characterised by a large number of institutions (often
relatively smaller)
527
.
This represents a non-negligible administrative burden not just for resolution authorities,
who have to issue MREL decisions at least on an annual basis, but also for the affected
liquidation entities. While the latter are already excluded from the MREL reporting
provided under Article 45i BRRD, they are still expected to monitor compliance with the
MREL decision. In terms of distribution of impact, the requirement to adopt MREL
decisions and communicate them to banks under liquidation strategies impacts the
administrative burden on banks and resolution authorities asymmetrically across Member
States, i.e. to a greater extent in Member States with less concentrated banking markets
than in Member States with few banks under liquidation strategies. The existence of such
a decision also means that liquidation entities are required to obtain prior permission
from resolution authorities before calling, redeeming, repaying or repurchasing their
eligible liabilities
528
and, if they are part of a daisy chain, their own funds and eligible
liabilities held by other entities in that daisy chain need to be deducted
529
.
Based on the above considerations, the Commission considered the following options:
Maintaining the status quo;
Waiving the obligation to adopt a MREL decision in relation to liquidation
entities whose MREL would not exceed the loss absorption amount;
Continue to require the adoption of a MREL decision for these liquidation
entities but waiving the need to update them on an annual basis.
The first option was discarded as the current MREL framework for liquidation entities
does not add value from a resolvability perspective. The third option would alleviate the
administrative burden for resolution authorities but only marginally, but not for the
institutions themselves, which would still be captured by the rules concerning prior
permission and daisy chain deductions and was therefore also discarded.
Ultimately, the second option was retained, as it was the one most conducive to reducing
the regulatory burden for both the concerned entities and the resolution authorities,
without affecting the prudential soundness of the framework or the resolvability of the
entities or groups. It is also in line with existing provisions of the MREL framework,
527
According to the
SRB's 2020 Annual Report,
the five Member States in the Banking Union with the
highest number of LSIs expected to be covered by resolution planning as of 1 January 2020 were: Germany
(1 336), Austria (413), Italy (128), France (71) and Spain (55).
528
As per Article 78a CRR.
529
See the
Commission’s ‘quick-fix’ legislative proposal addressing the operationalisation of the indirect
issuance of internal MREL instruments within a resolution group (the so-called ‘daisy chain’ deductions).
343
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0345.png
namely the exclusion of liquidation entities from the MREL reporting and from the
obligation to include contractual clauses recognising the effects of the bail-in powers in
contracts governed by third country laws.
The obligation on resolution authorities to adopt a decision for those liquidation entities
whose MREL exceeds the loss absorption amount is not affected, nor is the requirement
to draw up and review resolution plans for all liquidation entities.
Finally, targeted adjustments are implemented in MREL reporting, introducing a
statutory simplified reporting regime for those liquidation entities for whom MREL
exceeds the loss absorption amount. This obligation on the concerned liquidation entities
is necessary to ensure that resolution authorities are able to monitor compliance with
MREL. It is also understood that resolution authorities already envisage ad hoc reporting
requests in these situations. Therefore, this change will not represent much additional
burden on the sector, also considering that only a few liquidation entities actually have
MREL set at a level above the loss absorption amount, while at the same time ensuring a
harmonised and coherent treatment of liquidation entities across the EU.
9.
O
THER POTENTIAL TOPICS TO BE ADDRESSED IN THE REVIEW
In the following, some additional amendments of technical nature which are expected to
require a reflection as part of the potential changes in the CMDI reform are briefly
presented.
Precautionary measures under BRRD
BRRD provides for a set of precautionary measures (in the form of recapitalisation or
guarantees/liquidity) which can be granted to solvent banks to address issues identified in
a stress test or equivalent exercise. BRRD provides for strict conditions and safeguards to
grant support in this form, to ensure that the support does not benefit a bank that is too
close to failure and to avoid (for precautionary recapitalisation) that the support is used to
cover losses that were already incurred by the bank or are likely to be incurred.
Past practice in the application of these measures has provided the opportunity for the
Commission to identify issues which may require an interpretive effort and to clarify
them as part of its practice
530
. In order to ensure further clarity of the legislative text and
improve the legislation, there is scope to integrate some of the lessons learnt in the
relevant provisions.
Potential clarifications in this respect can include considerations on the concept of
solvency, as well as the determination of the amount of support allowed, particularly
with respect to the distinction between incurred, likely and unlikely losses. Furthermore,
the legislative text could benefit from additional clarity as to the use of precautionary
recapitalisation to support impaired asset measures (such as the transfer of impaired
assets to an Asset Management Company). This possibility was already confirmed by the
530
See also Chapter 2, section 2.1.1 for a problem analysis.
344
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0346.png
Commission, subject to strict conditions, in the AMC blueprint
531
but a specific reference
in the legislative text could provide further certainty in this respect.
Access condition to RF/SRF for liquidity provision
The framework is currently ambiguous regarding the condition to access the RF/SRF for
providing liquidity to a bank in resolution, creating legal uncertainty. The current legal
interpretation stemming from past cases is that the RF/SRF could be tapped for liquidity
provision without the 8% TLOF minimum bail-in condition. The current initiative aims
to clarify that in the legal text, which would improve the legal certainty of the
framework.
Treatment of contingent liabilities in bail-in
In general terms, liabilities are considered as contingent when they are recorded against
an event which is not certain and may occur at some point in the future. There can be
several instances which generate a contingent liability, ranging from guarantees (only
activated if the underlying event occurs) to liabilities connected to potential legal claims
(which come into existence and are quantified only once a judgement confirms an
underlying obligation).
From a resolution perspective, contingent liabilities become relevant when it comes to
their bail-inability. The BRRD currently does not provide specific rules to address
contingent liabilities in this context. This circumstance had the potential of creating
uncertainty as the treatment of such liabilities, which in turn may affect consideration on
other related issues, such as resolvability and the implementation of a resolution strategy.
In light of this, it is appropriate to consider this issue as part of the review and reflect on
whether there is scope to further clarify the legislative provisions in BRRD to address
some of the identified uncertainties.
Operationalisation of transfer strategies
Transfer strategies, such as the sale of (all or part of the) business to an acquirer, the use
of bridge bank and transferring bad assets to an asset management vehicle, are provided
in the current framework, alongside the open-bank bail-in strategy (absorption of losses
and recapitalisation of the bank through conversion of creditors into new shareholders).
However, so far open bank bail-in strategies have been predominant in resolution plans
as standalone tool.
On this basis, there is scope to consider, as part of the reform, potential avenues to
further clarify the legislative text to provide additional incentives for resolution
authorities to consider transfer strategies in their resolution planning, for instance by
ensuring a more proportionate calibration of MREL requirements.
531
See Commission Staff Working Document (March 2018),
AMC Blueprint,
SWD(2018)72 final, p.35.
345
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0347.png
10.
B
USINESS MODEL SPECIFICITIES OF SMALL AND MEDIUM
-
SIZED BANKS
This section aims to provide additional information on the business model of smaller and
medium-sized banks, also called less significant institutions (LSIs) which are at the
centre of the CMDI reform. More specifically, it looks at the types of depositors served
by small and medium-sized banks across the EU, considering the policy options
described in Chapter 6 aiming to shield more depositors from bearing losses by making
more use of industry-funded safety nets, such as the DGS funds and/or and RF/SRF.
According to the ECB’s 2019 report on LSIs
532
, the LSI sector represents a relevant share
of the wider European banking industry, representing roughly 19% of total banking
assets in the euro area. The geographical distribution of LSIs varies. In certain Member
States (Luxembourg, Germany, Austria, Ireland), the importance of LSIs is particularly
high, as they account for one third of the domestic banking sector. In contrast, the LSI
sector is relatively small in Member States where the banking sector is more
concentrated (France, Spain, Greece). In absolute value, the LSI sector in Germany is by
far the largest, hosting over 1,400 institutions which together represented 55% of the LSI
assets at EU level as of 2019
533
.
Most smaller and medium-sized banks still follow the traditional business model (i.e.
collection of deposits and granting of loans) and are predominantly financed by equity
and deposits. The LSI sector is dominated by retail banks and diversified banks (the latter
have a higher percentage of exposures to corporate clients, including SMEs). These LSIs
belong mainly to the cooperative and savings bank sectors. They are typically active
locally, being fully anchored in the “local economic fabric” of their home regions and
service local customers. In terms of balance sheet structure, on the liability side,
customer deposits represent by far the largest source of funding, while the issuance of
debt securities as well as the trading of derivatives remains only of minor importance for
these banks. Overall, retail deposits remain a main source of funding of LSIs, making up
for 67.7% of total funding on average, against 36.9% for significant institutions.
This information is very relevant in view of certain stakeholder views that only covered
deposits as well as retail and SME deposits (above the coverage level) should be
protected from losses, while “wholesale” deposits held by corporates or more
sophisticated counterparties should not benefit from additional protection from losses,
especially by using DGS funds. These stakeholders argue that shielding all deposits from
losses by making more use of safety nets in resolution or alternative measures in
insolvency could lead to moral hazard. However, data as quoted above shows that the
overwhelming majority of deposits held by smaller and medium-sized banks are retail or
corporate/SME deposits held by local clients. Typically, these deposits tend to be sticky
in a crisis, meaning they tend to be left with the bank until its failure, while deposits
made by large firms or more sophisticated investors tend to run at first signs of distress.
Given the preponderance of such sticky deposits in smaller and medium-sized banks, it is
important to have the tools and the funding to enable a deposit book transfer as part of a
532
533
ECB (2019),
Risk report on less significant institutions.
See part 1.1 of the ECB’s 2019 Risk report on LSIs.
346
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
sale of business transaction in case of failure (in or outside resolution). The alternative is
to handle the failure of such banks by making recourse to public support or inflicting
losses on retail and SME deposits in resolution in order to reach the 8% access condition
to the resolution fund.
11.
H
IGHLIGHTS OF THE
US
FRAMEWORK
(FDIC
APPROACH
)
Since its creation in 1933 in the aftermath of the Great Depression, the Federal Deposit
Insurance Corporation (FDIC) has developed a crisis management framework for most
deposit-taking institutions combining resolution, liquidation and deposit insurance (as
well as supervisory) functions in a single federal authority based on a single legal
framework. This enables the FDIC to act decisively and apply the most fitting (and least
costly) solution in each particular crisis case. In contrast, in the EU, those competencies
are split across different authorities and legal frameworks at European and national level.
In the US, the distinction between “resolution” and “insolvency” does not exist, unlike in
the EU: the failure of banks is handled by the FDIC using the tools and powers at its
disposal. In case of failure, the FDIC is appointed as a receiver (i.e. liquidator) of the
failed institution. The preferred tool of the FDIC is the purchase and assumption (P&A)
transaction, whereby the FDIC transfers assets and deposits (and possibly other
liabilities) of the failed bank to a purchaser, or even sells the whole bank. It may also
organise a bridge bank to continue the operations of the failed bank until it is sold or
liquidated. Although the FDIC does not have a statutory bail-in tool (one of the four tools
in the EU framework), the FDIC powers can achieve a comparable outcome as part of a
liquidation process of the residual failed bank.
The FDIC has to select the least costly way forward for dealing with any bank,
encouraging interested purchasers to bid for the failing bank. Based on its experience,
transfer strategies proved to be less costly than pay-out in most cases. The FDIC may
also payout insured depositors (up to USD 250 000) when this is less costly than a P&A
transaction. There are no hard limits for support from the Deposit Insurance Fund,
financed by the industry, as long as the ‘least cost principle’ is respected – in particular,
there are no minimum bail-in conditions to access that Fund, unlike in the EU.
In terms of creditor hierarchy, the US system includes a single-tier depositor preference
where all deposits (including insured ones) rank
pari passu
and which greatly facilitates
the use of the Deposit Insurance Fund to support such transfer transactions under the
least cost test.
The FDIC may use their fund for many purposes other than payout: support a merger
with another bank, support transfers of assets and liabilities, fund a bridge bank and
provide liquidity in resolution. The US framework also provides for an exception to the
least cost requirement when a “systemic risk determination” is made to the effect that
compliance with that requirement would have serious adverse effects on economic
347
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0349.png
conditions or financial stability, and the provision of assistance would avoid or mitigate
such adverse effects
534
.
Between 2000 and 2020, 95% of the FDIC’s interventions to preserve access to deposits
in a failed bank were P&As (US equivalent of a transfer tool) with deposit insurance
fund support, and only 5% were payouts of covered deposits. The FDIC estimates that
between 2008 and 2013, the use of transfer tools saved USD 42 billion, or 43%,
compared with the estimated cost of using payouts.
Similarly, the Deposit Insurance Corporation of Japan (DICJ) notes that “The pay-out
method should [therefore] be avoided as far as possible.” (DICJ, 2005)”
535
.
For these reasons (no distinction between resolution and insolvency, one centralised
authority for dealing with failing banks, one centralised fund, one approach to assessing
the least cost principle and extensive experience with marketing/sale of failing banks),
the US regime is often, also in the EU discussions, raised as an example to follow.
The extensive experience and excellent track record of the US FDIC, spanning over
many decades, where failing smaller and mid-sized banks are routinely
restructured/transferred to a buyer with the support of a common fund financed by the
contributions of the industry, can reveal how some features of the CMDI framework
could be improved.
534
Financial Stability Institute, (July 2022),
Counting the cost of payout: constraints for deposit insurers
in funding bank failure management.
See Table 3 on p. 15 and p.19.
535
ECB (October 2022)
Protecting depositors and saving money - why DGS in the EU should be able to
support transfers of assets and liabilities when a bank fails
348
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0350.png
A
NNEX
9: S
ELECTED CASES OF APPLICATION OF THE
CMDI
FRAMEWORK SINCE
2015
This annex provides an overview of selected cases when the CMDI framework was applied since 2015. The cut-off date is 18 November 2022.
1. P
REVENTIVE PRIVATE OR MARKET
-
CONFORM PUBLIC MEASURES
536
Bank
Balance sheet size
at time of
intervention
EUR 146.9 bn
(2019)
Home
jurisdiction
DE
Date measure
taken
December 2019
Description of measure taken
Amount / Source of
assistance (if
applicable)
EUR 2.8 bn
investment,
EUR 0.8 bn capital
relief
(of which
EUR 0.8 bn
provided by the IPS
and EUR 2.8 bn was
a public market
conform measure)
EUR 318.2 m and
EUR 301 m
Current
status of bank
In operation
NORD/LB
537
Received public support, for strengthening capital and
restructuring, which the Commission has assessed as market-
conform.
Banca
Carige(*)
538
EUR 23 bn
(Jan 2020)
IT
December 2019
Banca
Carige
EUR 23 bn
(Jan 2020)
IT
April 2022
The voluntary arm of the IT DGS (private measure) and, in
accordance with Article 11(3) DGSD, the IT DGS (private measure
in accordance with Tercas case law) provided contributed to the
capital increase of the bank.
The IT DGS (private measure in accordance with Tercas case law)
provided a further capital contribution of EUR 530 m to facilitate
the sale of the bank to BPER.
Acquired
EUR 530 m
Acquired
536
537
In the market-conform public measures the State invested in a market-conform manner together with the DGS.
Case SA.49094 (2019/N)
538
Cases marked with (*): no (individual) SA decision exists.
349
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0351.png
Bank
Balance sheet size
at time of
intervention
EUR 13.6 bn
(Jun 2019)
Home
jurisdiction
IT
Date measure
taken
May 2020
Description of measure taken
Amount / Source of
assistance (if
applicable)
EUR 1.2 bn
Current
status of bank
In operation
Banca
Popolare di
Bari (*)
The voluntary arm of the IT DGS provided capital (private
measure).
2. P
RECAUTIONARY PUBLIC MEASURES
Bank
Balance sheet size Home
at
time
of jurisdiction
intervention
EUR 143.5 bn
(2017)
IT
Date
taken
measure
Description of measure taken
Amount / Source of
assistance
(if
applicable)
EUR 15 bn
(liquidity
guarantee),
EUR 5.4 bn
(recapitalisation)
Up to EUR 3 bn
EUR 3 bn,
EUR 2.2 bn
EUR 3.5 bn,
EUR 1.4 bn
EUR 2.7 bn
Current status
of bank
In
operation,
restructuring
Banca Monte
dei Paschi di
Siena
539
December 2016;
July 2017
Received precautionary liquidity support (state guarantee) and
recapitalisation.
Banca
Carige
540
Banca
Popolare di
Vicenza
541
Veneto
Banca
542
National
Bank
543
of
Greece
539
540
EUR 22 bn
(2018)
EUR 34.4 bn
(2016)
EUR 28 bn
(2016)
IT
IT
January 2019
January,
2017
April
Received precautionary liquidity support in the form of
remunerated guarantees that are restricted to solvent banks.
Received precautionary liquidity support in the form of guarantees.
In
operation,
restructuring
Acquired
IT
EL
January, April
2017
December 2015
Received precautionary liquidity support in the form of guarantees.
Received precautionary recapitalisation
Acquired
In operation
Case SA.47081 (2016/N) & Case SA.47677 (2017/N)
Case SA.52917 (2019/N)
541
Case SA.47149 (2016/N) & Case SA.47940 (2017/N)
542
Case SA.47150 (2016/N) & Case SA.47941 (2017/N)
350
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0352.png
Bank
Balance sheet size Home
at
time
of jurisdiction
intervention
EL
Date
taken
measure
Description of measure taken
Amount / Source of
assistance
(if
applicable)
EUR 2.7 bn
Current status
of bank
In operation
Piraeus
Bank
544
November 2015
Received precautionary recapitalisation
3. F
AILING OR LIKELY TO FAIL BANKS
:
NATIONAL INSOLVENCY PROCEEDINGS
(
NEGATIVE
PIA)
Bank
Balance sheet size Home
at time of
jurisdiction
intervention
EUR 34.4 bn
(2016)
EUR 28 bn
(2016)
IT
Date
measure taken
June 2017
Declared FOLF by ECB; negative PIA by SRB; entered
compulsory administrative liquidation under management of Bank
of Italy and granted cash injection and guarantees by the State in
order to facilitate the transfer to Intesa Bank.
Description of measure taken
Amount / Source of
assistance (if applicable)
EUR 4.8 bn cash
injection and up to
EUR 12.7 bn guarantees
for the combined sale of
Banca Popolare di
Vicenza and Veneto
Banca.
The Italian DGS (FITD)
provided contribution for
the transfer of assets and
liabilities to the acquirer.
No funds from the State
budget.
Current status
of bank
Acquired
Banca
Popolare
di
545
Vicenza
Veneto Banca
IT
June 2017
Acquired
Banca
Sviluppo
N.A.
IT
July 2018
ABLV Bank
EUR 3.6 bn (Q3
2017)
LV (and
subsidiary in
LU)
February 2018
Declared FOLF with subsequent negative PIA by the Bank of Italy;
entered into compulsory administrative liquidation under the
management of Bank of Italy, while assets and liabilities were
transferred to Banca Agricola Popolare di Ragusa.
Declared FOLF by ECB; negative PIA by SRB; ABLV entered
into self-liquidation. ABVL LU entered into normal insolvency
proceedings under LU law, following an extended period under a
moratorium regime.
Acquired
In liquidation
543
544
Case State Aid SA.43365 (2015/N)
Case SA.43464 (2015/N)
545
Case SA.45664 (2017/N)
351
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0353.png
Bank
Balance sheet size Home
at time of
jurisdiction
intervention
EUR 0.6 bn (Q1
2019)
N.A.
LV
Date
measure taken
August 2019
Description of measure taken
Amount / Source of
assistance (if applicable)
No funds from the State
budget.
The Italian DGS (FITD)
provided contribution for
the transfer of assets and
liabilities to the acquirer.
Current status
of bank
In liquidation
PNB Banka
Declared FOLF by ECB; negative PIA by SRB; entered normal
insolvency proceedings under LV law.
Declared FOLF with subsequent negative PIA by the Bank of
Italy; entered into compulsory administrative liquidation under the
management of Bank of Italy, while assets and liabilities were
transferred to Banca Ifis.
Aigis
Banca
546
IT
May 2021
Acquired
546
Source : EBA
Notification on the use of available financial means of Italian DGS FITD - Article 11(6) of Directive 2014/49/EU
352
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0354.png
4. F
AILING OR LIKELY TO FAIL BANKS
:
RESOLUTION
(
POSITIVE
PIA)
Bank
Balance sheet size Home
at
time
of jurisdiction
intervention
EUR 22.7 bn,
EUR 12.3 bn,
EUR 6.9 bn,
EUR 4.7 bn
(latest published
figures at the
time of the
measures)
IT
Date
taken
measure
Description of measure taken
Amount / Source of
assistance (if applicable)
No funds from the State
budget. The national
resolution
fund
contributed EUR 3.6 bn
(EUR 1.7 bn to absorb
losses, EUR 1.8 bn to
capitalise the bridge
banks and EUR 0.1 bn to
capitalise the AMV),
EUR 0.4 bn (guarantees
on the AMV’s liabilities)
No public funds used
and no funds used from
the resolution fund.
No funds from the State
budget.
The
DGS
absorbed losses in lieu of
covered deposits. The
national resolution fund
capitalised the bridge
institution.
Current status
of bank
Acquired
Banca delle
Marche,
Banca Etruria,
Cassa
di
risparmio di
Ferrra, Cassa
di risparmio
di Chieti
547
November 2015;
The four banks were put in resolution with the use of four bridge
banks and an asset management vehicle (AMV). The Italian
resolution fund provided support to the bridge banks to cover the
difference between assets and liabilities and to capitalise them. It
also provided guarantees for the transfer of assets to the AMV.
The decision pre-dates the entry into force of the BRRD
provisions on bail-in. Therefore only the burden sharing
requirements under State aid rules (requiring shareholders and
subordinated debt holders to be written down) were applied.
Banco
Popular
Español
548
KØBENHAV
NS
ANDELSKA
SSE(*)
549
EUR 147 bn
(2017)
DKK 370 m
ES
June 2017
DK
September 2018
Determined as failing or likely to fail (FOLF) by ECB; placed
into resolution by the SRB; losses absorbed by equity and
subordinated debt; sale to Banco Santander S.A. for EUR 1
Was declared FOLF and put in resolution by the Danish
authorities. All creditors, with the exclusion only of covered
deposits and non-bailinable liabilities, were bailed-in in full. The
DGS contributed to support cover depositors. New capital
provided by a bridge bank (which became the owner of the
bank).
Acquired
In operation,
restructuring.
547
548
Case SA.39543 (2015/N) & Case SA.43547 (2015/N)
Commission Decision
of 7 June 2017 endorsing the resolution scheme for Banco Popular.
549
Source: EBA (2018),
EBA acknowledges notifications from Finansiel Stabilitet
353
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0355.png
Bank
Balance sheet size Home
at
time
of jurisdiction
intervention
N.A.
DK
Date
taken
measure
Description of measure taken
Amount / Source of
assistance (if applicable)
No funds from the State
budget. The national
resolution
fund
capitalised the bridge
institution. The DGS
absorbed losses in lieu of
covered deposits.
No funds from the State
budget. The national
resolution fund covered
the funding gap and
provided guarantees.
No funds from the State
budget. The national
resolution fund covered
the funding gap (up to
EUR 99.6 m).
MKB was a fully state
owned Bank at the time
of
resolution.
State
shares were fully bailed-
in.
The
national
resolution fund financed
the transfer of bad loans.
Current status
of bank
Acquired
Andelskassen
J.A.K.
Slagelse(*)
550
October 2015
Write-down and conversion of capital instruments, bail-in tool
and bridge institution tool.
Idea Bank(*)
PLN 15 000 bn
(approx.-Aug.
2020)
PL
December 2020
Sale of business tool
Acquired
Cooperative
Bank
of
Peloponnese
551
EUR 97 m
EL
December 2015
Sale of business tool
Acquired
MKB
552
HUF 1 944 bn
(end-2014,
consolidated)
HU
December 2015
Asset separation tool and sale of business tool.
Acquired
550
551
Source:
EBA
Case SA.43886 (2015/N)
552
Case SA.40441 (2015/N)
354
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0356.png
Bank
Balance sheet size Home
at
time
of jurisdiction
intervention
Around
EUR 300 m
HR
Date
taken
measure
Description of measure taken
Amount / Source of
assistance (if applicable)
No funds from the State
budget.
The
DGS
absorbed losses in lieu of
covered deposits.
The national resolution
fund
covered
the
remaining funding gap
and recapitalised the
transferred activities and
supported a transfer of
part of NPL to an
AMV
553
No funds from the State
budget. The national
resolution fund covered
the funding gap.
The bridge bank was
supported with cash
injections of around
EUR 1.4 bn (PLN 6.9
bn), which were
provided by the
resolution fund and the
deposit guarantee
scheme. In addition, the
Polish Commercial
Current status
of bank
Acquired
Jadranska
banka
d.d.
Šibenik.(*)
October 2015
Bail-in tool, asset separation tool and sale of business tool.
Panellinia
Bank
554
N.A.
EL
April 2015
Sale of business tool.
Acquired
Getin
Noble Bank
SA
555
PLN 44 bn
(around EUR
9.2 bn)
PL
October 2022
Bail-in tool, bridge bank tool.
In operation as
a bridge bank,
until its
eventual sale to
a suitable
buyer.
553
554
Source:
Croatian Deposit Insurance Agency (2017).
Case SA.41503 (2015/N)
555
Case SA. 100687 (2022/N)
355
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0357.png
Bank
Balance sheet size Home
at
time
of jurisdiction
intervention
Date
taken
measure
Description of measure taken
Amount / Source of
assistance (if applicable)
Banks’ Protection
System (SOBK)
comprising the 8 largest
commercial banks in the
PL market, voluntarily
decided to support the
operation (i) with around
EUR 735 m (PLN 3.5
bn) to absorb further
losses and (ii)
temporarily purchase a
49% share in the bridge
bank, which did not
constitute State aid.
The sale of business
operation
received
support to the amount of
EUR 2.255 bn, of which
EUR 489 m
by
the
Portuguese
resolution
fund and EUR 1.766 bn
by the Portuguese State.
The bonds issued by the
AMV, in an amount of
EUR 746 m,
were
guaranteed
by
the
Resolution Fund and
counter-guaranteed by
the Portuguese State.
Current status
of bank
Banco
Internacional
do Funchal,
S.A.
(BANIF)
556
EUR 12.8 bn
PT
December 2015
The business of BANIF and most of its assets and liabilities were
transferred to Banco Santander Totta for EUR 150 m, under the
sale of business tool. The Portuguese resolution fund and the
Portuguese State provided support intended to cover future
contingencies. Additionally, some of BANIF’s assets were
transferred to an AMV. The transfer of those assets was paid by
the AMV through the issuance of bonds (included in the assets
transferred to Banco Santander Totta), which were guaranteed by
the resolution fund and counter-guaranteed by the State. BANIF
kept a very limited set of assets that were included in its
insolvency estate once it entered into liquidation procedures, as
well as the liabilities from shareholders, subordinated creditors
and related entities.
Acquired
556
Case SA.43977 (2015/N)
356
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0358.png
5. T
HE
S
BERBANK RESOLUTION CASE
Sberbank Europe AG was a universal bank, owned by a Russian parent entity, operating in Austria, with a branch in Germany, subsidiaries in Croatia,
Slovenia, Czech Republic and Hungary and outside the EU, in Bosnia and Herzegovina and the Republic of Serbia. It operated 185 branches and had
more than 3,933 employees. Sberbank Europe AG reported EUR 13.64bn total assets at consolidated level and EUR 6.82bn in the Banking Union entities
in Austria, Croatia, and Slovenia (aggregated)
557
. On 28 February 2022, the ECB declared Sberbank Europe AG and its two subsidiaries in the Banking
Union, Sberbank d.d. in Croatia and Sberbank banka d.d. in Slovenia, failing or likely to fail, owing to a deterioration of their liquidity situation from
significant deposit outflows
558
, which resulted from the reputational impact of geopolitical tensions. The SRB adopted resolution schemes for the two
Banking Union subsidiaries in Croatia and Slovenia, however, for the parent entity in Austria, the SRB assessed that there was no public interest for
resolution
559
. Consequently, the Croatian and Slovenian subsidiaries were placed in resolution and sold to the Croatian PostBank and NLB, respectively,
without any support from the resolution fund or public fund support. The Austrian parent Sberbank Europe AG was prohibited from continuing business
operations and the bank has voluntarily initiated self-liquidation, while the Austrian DGS has paid out the covered depositors
560
. The Czech and
Hungarian authorities also decided to close and wind down the Czech and Hungarian subsidiaries and pay out the covered depositors through the
Czech
561
and Hungarian
562
DGS respectively
563
.
557
558
Source:
SRB.
Source:
ECB
559
Source:
SRB
560
Source:
FMA
561
Source:
EBA
562
Source:
EBA
563
See section 7.1.4.4 of the Annex 5 (evaluation) for more information on the impact of the payouts on the national DGSs in the case of the Austrian parent.
357
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0359.png
A
NNEX
10: R
ATIONALE AND DESIGN FEATURES FOR A COMMON
DEPOSITOR PROTECTION IN THE
B
ANKING
U
NION
The Commission’s legislative proposal on
EDIS of 24 November 2015
has been
contentious since its adoption. While political negotiations in the European Parliament
and the Council stalled, technical discussions in Council Working Party (CWP) and High
Level Working Group (HLWG) elaborated other models such as liquidity support in
reinsurance, mandatory lending and a hybrid option combining the two. The so-called
hybrid model emerged as a possible compromise between the Member States supporting
the 2015 proposal, and those underlining the pre-condition of risk reduction before
agreeing to share the banking sector risks
564
.
However, the rationale for a common depositor protection in the Banking Union is still
valid and arguably reinforced by the Covid-19 outbreak and the challenging geopolitical
situation. Depositor protection in the EU is a national responsibility and liability.
However, this results in a misalignment of liability and control within the Banking
Union. Because supervision and resolution have been centralised with respectively the
European Central Bank (Single Supervisory Mechanism) and the Single Resolution
Board (Single Resolution Mechanism) being the responsible central bodies, their
decisions have the potential to create liabilities for the DGSs at national level with
respect to depositor protection. Moreover, a common scheme for depositor protection
would benefit from an increased firepower and would reduce the vulnerability of national
DGSs to large asymmetric local shocks. It is key for financial stability and depositor
confidence in the Banking Union. It could also unlock further market integration and
cross-border consolidation. Last but not the least, it would reduce the bank-sovereign
nexus.
EDIS would be a natural complement of the CMDI framework because of the role of
national DGSs in the crisis management to protect depositors, prevent bank runs and so
preserve financial stability. The CMDI review seeks to reinforce the prominence of
national DGSs in the continuum of crisis management. It would address the hurdles that
so far hindered the DGSs and authorities when using the existing tools at their disposal.
The proposed policy options would facilitate the interventions by DGSs to finance the
sale of medium-size and smaller deposit-based banks, in particular bridging the access to
the resolution fund for banks unable to reach the 8% TLOF requirement without
necessarily bailing in deposits. The benefits of this policy avenue would be undermined
if EDIS were not in place to address the risks of liquidity shortfalls in the available
financial means of national DGSs, which in the past was conducive to the recourse to
additional public financing.
564
See Annex 5, Evaluation – Chapter
Error! Reference source not found.
– Section “State of play of
the common deposit guarantee scheme in the Banking Union”.
358
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0360.png
1. C
OMMISSION
S PROPOSAL ON
EDIS
OF
24 N
OVEMBER
2015
The 2015 proposal considered the establishment of EDIS in three successive stages: a
reinsurance scheme for participating national DGSs in a first period of three years, a co-
insurance scheme for participating national DGSs in a second period of four years, and
full insurance for participating national DGSs in the steady state. EDIS would provide
funds for payout or in resolution. In all three stages, EDIS would also cover ultimate
losses incurred by the participating DGS following depositors’ compensation or
contribution to resolution. It provided for a progressive transfer of funds of national
DGSs towards a deposit central fund (so-called DIF) until a target level of 0.8% of
covered deposits was attained. A national DGS would only benefit from EDIS if its funds
were built up in line with a funding path and upon compliance with essential
requirements under Union law. The SRB would be responsible for administering EDIS,
releasing funds where clearly defined conditions are met. It would also monitor national
DGSs that would remain responsible for handling depositor claims.
During the initial discussions in the CWP, a significant number of Member States
considered the implementation of a third pillar of the Banking Union as a priority and
welcomed the proposal. Some of them supported a faster mutualisation process, taking
the view that the substance of the provisions and the timing of the entry into force should
be even more ambitious. Some Member States strongly objected to the proposal and its
timing, contesting the necessity and appropriateness of the proposal and the lack of
impact assessment. Among the latter, some were therefore not in a position to discuss
details of the proposal. A number of others, while generally supporting the proposal,
have raised concerns
565
. These positions have not materially changed over the years.
The technical discussions in the CWP have been ongoing since 2016. These have built on
the Commission services’ effects analysis carried out in 2016 to remedy the lack of the
impact assessment
566
. These discussions focused on the general concepts of the roll out
of EDIS, including loss coverage, as well as on the specific elements of the 2015
proposal, sometimes proposing concrete adjustments. Overtime, the various progress
reports under successive Council Presidencies highlighted the emerging divergent views
and tendency to depart from the 2015 proposal. In addition to the fundamental concerns
regarding risk sharing and risk reduction, the main elements put forward as reasons for
requiring a substantial departure from the 2015 proposal are described below.
IPSs
567
The 2015 proposal was silent about the treatment of IPSs, which led to criticism that the
specific business model of the IPS based on failure prevention measures (beyond the
“paybox” function) and its stabilising role were not recognised. IPSs can also be
recognised as a DGS within the scope of the DGSD and are subject to the same
requirements, including the target level of 0.8% of covered deposits.
565
European Council (14 June 2016),
Presidency Progress report - Strengthening of the Banking Union,
p.3.
566
European Commission (11 October 2016),
Effect analysis on EDIS,
p. 53-54.
567
See glossary.
359
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0361.png
The effects analysis on EDIS explored several policy options, including considering the
IPS membership as a risk-mitigating factor leading to lower contributions to EDIS from
IPS members that finance preventive and/or alternative measures. In recent CWP
debates, some argued that IPSs and their failure prevention measures should be covered
by EDIS and that their potential lower risk profile could be reflected via lower levels of
EDIS contributions. Others supported covering them only from national funds (within or
above the target level). Some Member States suggested excluding IPSs from EDIS
because of their core functions as framed under the CRR and the cost neutrality
principle
568
. However, others considered such an exclusion as suboptimal from the
perspective of the coherence of the legal framework because IPSs are integrated in the
SSM and SRM. Other arguments put forward in favour of the integration of IPSs in EDIS
were: the order of magnitude of covered deposits in the IPSs, the risks in terms of
financial stability if significant institutions were excluded from the common scheme, and
the level playing field
569
. Overall, a majority of Member States seemed to support the
inclusion of IPSs and their members in the scope of EDIS.
Box 19: IPS in the EU
IPSs operate in seven Member States (AT, DE, ES, IT, LT, PL). In two Member States,
the
IPSs are recognised as DGSs.
Divergences exist among the IPSs. While in some IPSs, members’ contributions are
capped if own viability is at risk, other IPSs have an obligation to support their members
(i.e. there is a legal claim to receive support). Approaches also vary with respect to
funding, with specific rules on sequencing. Some IPSs have additional funds that cannot
be commingled with the DGS funds and must first be exhausted before using the DGS.
Other IPSs have only one fund fulfilling both the IPS and DGS function.
In terms of the order of magnitude, they protect covered deposits amounting to 20.8% of
total covered deposits in the Banking Union and 18.8% of total covered deposits in the
EU (EUR 7.029 bn).
Hybrid IPSs (currently three also recognised as DGSs) encompass both less significant
and significant banks and, consequently, are subject to joint monitoring by the ECB and
the national authorities.
Cases where DGS funds were used in the early monitoring process to prevent banking
failures are relatively rare (see for example the non-confidential decision
49094(2019/N).
Non-CRR entities and third-country branches
The 2015 proposal covered all credit institutions affiliated to a DGS. In some Member
States, this includes entities exempted from the scope of the CRD/CRR – so called non-
CRR entities – and third country branches.
568
European Council (November 2020),
Presidency progress report on the strengthening of the Banking
Union.
569
European Council (May 2020),
Presidency progress report on the strengthening of the Banking Union,
p. 4, n. 9, P. 1 Portuguese Presidency progress report.
360
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0362.png
In the context of the debates in the CWP, several policy options were discussed. Some
preferred including non-CRD/CRR entities both within the scope of EDIS and
CRD/CRR to ensure the alignment of the three pillars of the Banking Union. Others
supported either including these entities within the scope of EDIS, complemented by an
adjustment of risked-based contributions, or excluding such entities from the scope of
EDIS (and covering them from national funds). Another option entailed introducing a
conformity test at European level encompassing the regulation and supervision of these
entities as a condition for their inclusion into the scope of EDIS.
In this respect, some Member States expressed concerns regarding the integration within
the scope of EDIS certain entities that are not subject to common supervision under the
CRR/CRD framework. It was argued that, while such entities are regulated at national
level, possibly comparatively lower regulatory and supervisory standards could increase
the risk exposure of EDIS. To reduce such a risk, some suggested including such entities
under the CRR/CDR framework with either a preferential or more proportionate
treatment in terms of prudential requirements
570
. Nevertheless, Member States, in which
non-CRR entities are a material part of the banking markets, reiterated their stance that
the proportionality provisions in the CRD/CRR framework were not suitable for all such
entities. Similar concerns and preferences were voiced in relation to the third country
branches
571
.
Box 20: Non-CRR entities
Compared to the situation described in the effects analysis
572
, the following updates are
available for Member States in which non-CRR entities play the most important role. In
most of these Member States, the numbers of entities and share of covered deposits have
slightly declined.
In Ireland, credit unions provide deposits to 3.45 million consumers subject to specific
legislation and
Fitness and Probity Regime.
62 of these 226 credit unions are over
EUR 100 million in assets, representing 64% of that sector’s assets. Conversely, there are
164 credit unions below EUR 100 million in assets. The largest credit union in Ireland has
less than EUR 400 million in deposits, amounting to approximately 0.3% of the DGS. It is
worth noting that there is a Savings Protection Scheme for Credit Unions established in
1989. The latter is a discretionary scheme funded by credit unions affiliated to the Irish
League of Credit Unions. Similar to IPSs, the scheme operated by the Irish League of
Credit Unions may intervene to provide support to a credit union in difficulty.
In Lithuania, a
reform
strengthening the credit union sector has been underway since 2018.
Each credit union has to belong to a group led by a Central Credit Union (CCU). Currently
570
In 2019, the proportionality embedded in the prudential requirements was reinforced for entities subject
to CRR/CRD, relative to the type and size of banking activities conducted by an entity. In particular these
revisions include: reduced requirements for reporting and disclosures, a simplified net stable funding ratio
(NSFR) for small and non-complex institutions and simplified approaches for calculating capital
requirements for counterparty credit risk and for market risk.
571
European Council (May 2020),
Presidency progress report on strengthening the Banking Union,
p. 4,
and European Council (2 June 2021),
Portuguese
Presidency Progress Report
on strengthening the
Banking Union,
p.7.
572
European Commission (2016),
Effects analysis,
p.45-50. The non-CRD/CRR entities are often
exempted from the CRD/CRR framework based on the principle of proportionality as their business
operations are often limited to certain business of relevance for local needs.
361
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0363.png
there are two CCU groups with a total of 56 members (not counting the leading CCUs
themselves). CCUs as solo entities are subject to CRR requirements and are included in the
SSM. CCU groups are treated as consolidated financial groups. National prudential
requirements applicable to CCU groups on consolidated level are de facto equivalent to
CRR requirements. Four credit unions are currently independent. The CCUs and their
members are jointly liable for mutual solvency safeguarding. Among others, the CCU has
to accumulate and hold at least 1% of its total assets in the Stabilisation Fund, raised by
members’ contributions.
Total
assets as
share of
MS’
banking
sector
TA (in
%)
2.6%
0.69%
2.02%
Covered
Deposits
as share
of total
covered
deposits
(in %)
14.00
0.00
3.78
Type
DGS
member-
ship
SSM
Nb. of
entities
Total
assets held
by entities
(EUR)
Covered
Deposits
held by
entities
(EUR)
16.5 bn
0.20 m
632.20 m
IE
LT
PL
PT
Credit unions
Central credit
unions (CCUs)
Credit unions
under either of
CCU
Credit Unions
(under
restructuring)
Credit unions
Savings banks
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
(Yes
from
2023)
No
No
226
2
56
19.623 bn
268.33 m
787.75 m
Yes
Yes
Yes
4
23
3
177.18 m
2.099 bn
379 m
0.45%
0.49%
0.09 %
164.11 m
1.905 bn
245
0.98
0.90
0.19
ONDs
The 2015 proposal opted for preserving a degree of discretion to accommodate national
specificities. The treatment of ONDs set out in the DGSD also gave rise to numerous
discussions, analysing their interaction with the 2015 proposal and exploring possible
options
573
.
The possible options were further harmonisation of ONDs in the DGSD, their general
exclusion from EDIS or a two-tier system. Some Member States also supported covering
some of the options from the mutualised funds during the reinsurance or liquidity support
phase, because the latter would be repaid to the DIF
574
. In the recent discussions, the
majority of members supported harmonising these options and discretions to the extent
possible to cover them, at least to a certain degree, by EDIS. Several Member States
argued in favour of harmonising substantive regimes on the use of preventive and
alternative measures in EDIS, in particular in what concerns the least cost test
575
. As for
the extent of coverage by EDIS, the views were split between allowing coverage by
EDIS, in view of their enhanced efficiency with a positive financial impact on the funds,
573
European Council (November 2019),
Finnish Presidency
Progress report
of 25 November 2019, p. 4;
Effect analysis on EDIS
p. 5, 39-57.
574
European Council (12 June 2018),
Bulgarian
Presidency Progress report
on European Deposit
Insurance Scheme, p. 9.
575
See Chapter 6, sections 6.1.3.3 and 6.1.4.3.
362
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0364.png
and maintaining these measures at national level. Some were of the view that the
inclusion of these measures under EDIS would require a larger DIF
576
.
2. H
YBRID
EDIS
577
2.1. Key features, benefits and drawbacks
The hybrid EDIS is built around the idea of a network of national DGSs coexisting with
deposit insurance fund at central level while funds remain within the national DGSs
578
.
The setting of the parameters of the model allows for an array of options. The gradual
rollout of hybrid model (starting from a liquidity phase) could be more palatable to the
co-legislators through a transition to a loss-sharing phase and thanks to a multitude of
calibration options for the main parameters. The Commission services’ survey on the
hybrid model collected the views of Member States on individual parameters,
summarised in Box 21
579
.
Box 21: Member States’ views on the hybrid model (CWP of November 2020)
This table summarises the outcome of the responses from 24 Member States received to
the Commission services’ survey on the hybrid model circulated in the context of CWP in
July 2020. This summary focuses on the main technical views and points raised in the
responses, not necessarily reflecting all the nuances. The brackets reflect the number of
respondents supporting a particular feature. The numbers do not add up where
respondents did not respond to every (sub-)question.
It follows from this survey that, while 8 respondents favoured a fully-fledged EDIS as the
final objective, 9 respondents considered the hybrid model as a compromise to bridge the
divergent views on the transition towards a fully-fledged EDIS. 4 respondents stated the
contingency of any decision on EDIS, including loss sharing on the risk reduction.
Some positions on the below features might have been refined during the subsequent
discussions on the hybrid model in the CWP. However, these discussions, as documented
in the progress reports, appear less representative absent the feedback from a high
number of Member States.
Allocation of funds
Caps on liquidity support
on central fund
Cap on mandatory lending
Build-up of the central
fund and of the mandatory
576
in favour of a large in favour of even in favour of a limited
central fund (5)
allocation (5)
central fund (4)
in favour (8)
Against (6)
in favour (17)
Against (2)
In favour of parallel In favour of build- In favour of prior
build-up of the two up of mandatory build-up of the central
European Council (2 June 2021),
Portuguese
Presidency Progress report
on strengthening the Banking
Union.
577
This section aims to summarise technical discussions that took place in Council working parties on
EDIS for the benefit of transparency to all stakeholders. It does not prejudge the Commission’s position as
the 2015 EDIS proposal is still on the table.
578
Whereas the available financial means could either remain in the national DGSs or be transferred to
individual compartments associated to each Member State within the DIF (see further 2.3.1).
579
European Council (23 November 2020), German
Presidency progress report,
p.18.
363
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0365.png
lending component
(8)
Should the loan be repaid
with interest rates?
What should be the
duration of loan
maturities?
In favour (16)
lending component fund (1)
before the central
fund (3)
Against (3)
What is the sequence of
repaying the loan to the
hybrid EDIS (the DGS
would be repaid the last)?
When should the DGS in
need raise ex post
contributions?
What crisis management
tools should be included in
the scope of intervention?
Should non-CRR entities
be included in the scope?
Should ONDs be financed
by the common schemes?
Should IPSs be included
in the scope?
(3 flagged limited
experience)
Path to loss coverage
Majority of respondents were open to a compromise on the trade-
off involving financial stability in the banking sector of the
beneficiary DGS and the need for replenishment of the central
fund or the lending DGSs. A higher number of respondents
supported maturities longer than 5 years.
In favour of repaying first the In
favour
of
repaying
mandatory lending component mandatory lending and central
prior to the central fund (10)
fund in parallel (2)
Before the liquidity support (2)
After the liquidity support (17)
Payout and
resolution (9)
In favour (8)
In favour (9)
Payout, resolution
All measures (7)
and alternative
measures (4)
Against (8)
Against (6)
- in favour of financing
Against (1)
preventive measures from the
common scheme (2)
- in favour of financing from
national funds within or above
the target level (5)
- in favour of the same percentage of loss sharing for funds coming
from the central funds and for funds coming from mandatory
lending: 8
- against using the mandatory lending for loss sharing: 2
- loss sharing could start once the liquidity scheme is fully built-
up: 5
In a first phase, the hybrid EDIS would provide liquidity in case of shortfall in a national
DGS. The DIF would provide liquidity support to a beneficiary DGS, once the latter has
exhausted its funds (or the mandatory share thereof, if the DGS funds were in excess of
the required minimum target level). If the DIF were depleted at the time an intervention
is needed, the SRB, on behalf of the DIF, would be able to borrow from national DGSs
through a mandatory lending mechanism.
As one of the main benefits, the pooling of resources would increase the firepower of
national DGSs, as compared to the status quo, reduce the likelihood of shortfall and
subsequently possible recourse to public funds. Depositors would benefit because of their
continued access to deposits and enhanced confidence in the robustness of the safety
nets. It would also allow lowering bank contributions while maintaining an appropriate
firepower and ensuring a more sustainable replenishment. Hence, the banking sector
would be in a better position to face structural challenges (transition to digital,
consolidation, low interest rate environment, etc.) and international competition.
364
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0366.png
The concept of the hybrid EDIS mitigates moral hazard concerns as national funds are
used before requesting support from the pooled resources. The co-existence of the DIF at
central level and national DGSs allows for a modulation of the interventions between the
two levels to reassure the concerns raised by Member States that want to keep national
sovereignty and/or discretion but also accountability (moral hazard argument).
Accordingly, the hybrid EDIS would also facilitate the integration of the IPSs, in view of
their concerns about the compatibility of the 2015 proposal with their prevailing business
model based on failure prevention. Similarly, the concept would also provide a solution
for the debate on the national options and discretions set out in the DGSD. The latter
raised concerns that pooled resources should not finance the claims that accommodate
national specificities across Member States, sometimes leading to a higher protection of
some depositors. The hybrid model creates an environment where, after further
harmonisation, some aspects could benefit from the coverage by EDIS and other kept as
an option for the national level.
Therefore, this concept could alleviate the main concerns that emerged during the past
discussions on the Commission proposal of 2015. Unlike the latter, the hybrid EDIS
would as a first step provide liquidity support only whereby the ultimate loss are borne at
the national level. While retaining the original ambition through its evolutive nature, it
inspires an incremental approach to build trust between Member States while continuing
to assess and tackle risks in the banking sector with the view to prepare the ground for
loss coverage.
The drawback would be an increased complexity of the hybrid EDIS as compared to the
2015 proposal, which envisaged one fund at the end of the third stage. In addition, the
hybrid EDIS, restricted to liquidity support and involving no loss sharing, would not
fully mitigate the bank-sovereign loop. Therefore, it would still maintain discrepancies in
depositor protection and only partially address financial stability risks in case of strong
financial disturbance. The success of the hybrid model would be reliant on a seamless
cooperation and robust governance set up between the involved authorities and DGSs.
2.2. Overview of the main possible design features and parameters
Taking into account the feedback from the CWP, a hybrid EDIS model could be based on
different assumptions representing varying levels of ambition measured with the degree
of allocation between the national funds and the DIF and the extent to which the national
funds can be mobilised for mandatory lending.
Table 37
presents the overview of the
main parameters in more detail.
Table 37: Main parameters of possible designs of hybrid-EDIS
Low-ambition hybrid
EDIS
(0.8% target level)
The DIF is allocated
with 25% of funds,
while 75% of the funds
remain at the national
level.
With a 0.8% target
Medium-ambition
hybrid EDIS
(0.7% target level)
The DIF is allocated
with 50% of funds,
while 50% of the funds
remain at the national
level.
With a 0.7% target
High-ambition
hybrid EDIS
(0.6% target level)
The DIF is allocated
with 75% of funds,
while 25% of the
funds remain at the
national level.
With a 0.6% target
Allocation of the
funds
(the numbers are
based on the amount
of covered deposits
as of end 2020)
365
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0367.png
level, EUR 55 bn
allocated in:
(i) DGSs: EUR 41 bn
(0.6% covered
deposits).
(ii) DIF: EUR 14 bn
(0.2 covered deposits).
level: EUR 48 bn
allocated in:
(i) DGSs: EUR 24 bn
(0.35% covered
deposits).
(ii) DIF: EUR 24 bn
(0.35% covered
deposits).
level: EUR 41 bn
allocated in
(i) DGSs: EUR 10 bn
(0.2% covered
deposits).
(ii) DIF: EUR 31 bn
(0.4% covered
deposits).
Mandatory lending
(In case the DIF is
depleted, the DGS in
need is allowed to
solicit a loan from
other DGSs. Its
amount would be
capped
to protect
the funds remaining
in the DGSs).
Scope of
intervention
Maximum 30% of the Maximum 50% of the funds remaining in the
funds remaining in the DGSs could be mobilised for mandatory
DGSs
could
be lending to the DIF.
mobilised for mandatory
lending to the DIF.
The support from the
DIF and mandatory
lending could finance
various types of DGS
interventions. The least
cost test would be
harmonised.
From an economic point of view, it would be
relevant that DGSs would be entitled to a
support from the DIF to finance all types of
interventions outside the payout of covered
deposits. Indeed, the least cost test would be
harmonised, ensuring level playing field and
avoiding any excessive uses of DGS and EDIS
funds. Consequently, the least costly option
would always be applied, ensuring efficiency
for the EDIS scheme.
National options
and discretions
Maturity of the
loans
Interest rates
Repayment
sequencing
Extraordinary
contributions and
alternative funding
arrangements
Governance
With EDIS in place, the CMDI review could
rely on important funds available to deal with
smaller and medium-sized banks failures.
If harmonised, national options and discretions would be financed by the
DIF and mandatory lending. National options and discretions that are not
harmonised could be financed at the national level, with funds above the
target level.
Maximum 6 years from loans coming from the DIF and from the
mandatory lending component.
Interest rates would be equal to the ECB marginal facility rates, increased
by 1% after 3 years in order to encourage fast repayment.
The payments of the beneficiary DGS would be repaid in the following
sequence: first to reimburse the mandatory lending component and then
the DIF. After full repayment of the loans, the DGS would start its own
replenishment.
Extraordinary contributions and alternative funding arrangements obtained
by the beneficiary DGS would be used to reimburse the loan. These could
be seen as an ultimate guarantee of reimbursement.
The governance could follow the principle to align liability and control
580
and imply the following:
- A more decentralised decision-making under a low ambition hybrid
EDIS. With the majority of funds remaining at the national level, the
national authorities would have a greater role, in particular in case
580
See also European Council (2 June 2021),
Portuguese
Presidency Progress Report
on strengthening the
Banking Union
in which some Member States supported the alignment of liability and control.
366
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0368.png
-
-
-
only national funds are used, subject to appropriate involvement of the
central authority as a safeguard.
A more centralised decision-making under a medium and high-
ambition hybrid EDIS. The role of the central authority (SRB) would
increase with the ambition of EDIS.
The activation of the liquidity support and its subsequent
replenishment would require involvement of the central authority for
assessing compliance of the measure decided at the national level.
The concrete application and implementation of measures and
conditions under all options would require the involvement at central
level in the context of the hybrid EDIS, entailing a network of national
DGSs and a central fund. The type of the involvement would range
from the monitoring, consultation and approvals depending on the
option to ensure a harmonised application of the measures and
sufficient safeguards across the Member States.
2.3. Effectiveness and efficiency of the hybrid EDIS
Effectiveness
The Commission services performed various simulations to test the robustness of the
hybrid EDIS in reimbursing depositors in case of payout, under various scenarios of
financial crisis of different severity
581
. It demonstrated the effectiveness of various
designs of the hybrid EDIS compared to the status quo (i.e. national DGSs only). Pooling
resources has a strong positive impact on depositor confidence and financial stability.
This analysis compares (i) the different designs of hybrid EDIS and (ii) the status quo
where 19 national DGSs guarantee deposit protection in the Banking Union. The
following assumptions apply:
Only liquidity support in the payout scenario is analysed under various designs of
hybrid EDIS, i.e. hybrid EDIS with different degree of pooled resources and a so
called ‘full liquidity pooling’ which corresponds to the pooling of all DGS funds
in line with the Commission 2015 proposal for liquidity support only (first
phase). Loss coverage (genuine mutualisation of the risks) is not analysed.
The pooled funds include the financial means in the DIF and the part of funds in
national DGSs that could be mobilised for mandatory lending. In this analysis, a
hybrid EDIS with a large DIF and a high share of national funds that can be
mobilised for mandatory lending represents a high degree of pooling.
The analysis evaluates the effectiveness of various hybrid models based on the
following two criteria: (i) the presence of a DGS liquidity shortfall (i.e. the
inability of one DGS to fully reimburse the depositors), and (ii) the amount of
these liquidity shortfalls. It uses the SYMBOL model to simulate a very high
number of financial crisis leading to banks’ failures and payout of covered
depositors.
581
See JRC report (Annex 12).
367
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0369.png
It concludes that all variants of hybrid EDIS are able to protect a higher amount of
covered deposits than under the status quo.
All designs of the hybrid EDIS and the full liquidity pooling significantly reduce
the likelihood and the sizes of liquidity shortfalls, even under a systemic event.
The more resources are pooled, the more effective and robust the depositor
protection is.
It presented the results based on three crisis scenarios of different intensity: (i) a
comparable to the financial crisis in 2008, (ii) less serious and (iii) more
serious
582
.
For instance, under a financial crisis as severe as in 2008
583
:
-
The hybrid EDIS would reduce the probability of a liquidity shortfall from
87% (i.e. probability of liquidity shortfall under the current framework) to
47%-56% (depending on the degree of pooling of funds
584
).
In extreme cases where a liquidity shortfall would occur both under the status
quo and under a hybrid EDIS, the amount of shortfall would be significantly
lower under the hybrid EDIS. The hybrid EDIS would cover from 60% to
68% (depending on the degree of pooling of funds) of liquidity shortfalls that
would otherwise be unprotected under the current framework.
The hybrid EDIS would have the capacity to reimburse larger amounts of
covered deposits. On average, under the current framework, EUR 22 bn of
covered deposits would be reimbursed to depositors and EUR 31-36 bn under
the hybrid/EDIS (depending on the degree of pooling of funds).
-
-
Even in case of a systemic crisis, the hybrid EDIS outperforms the status quo. The
probability of liquidity shortfall and the amount of covered deposits that would not
be protected are lower:
-
-
The probability of a liquidity shortfall is 87% under the status quo, 46%-56%
under the hybrid EDIS (depending on the parameter settings).
The hybrid EDIS covers 60%-68% of liquidity shortfalls that otherwise
remain unprotected under the status quo.
Under the status quo, all national DGS protect EUR 22 bn on average, while
the hybrid EDIS allow covering EUR 31-36 bn of covered deposits on
average.
-
582
583
See JRC analysis on “Measuring the effectiveness and the pooling effect of EDIS” p.21.
The relative effectiveness of the status quo and the hybrid EDIS does not change under other severities
of crisis.
584
Hybrid models with a low degree of pooling of funds are close to 56% and hybrid models with a high
degree of pooling are close to 47%.
368
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0370.png
Efficiency, pooling effect and target levels
Pooling of resources increases the probability of full protection of the covered deposits
without liquidity shortfall. Therefore, it delivers a higher efficiency for various hybrid
EDIS designs creating room for lowering the target level and, consequently, reducing the
cost for the banking sectors across Member States.
The possibility to collect lower amount of
ex ante
funding by the industry without
jeopardising the current level of depositors’ protection was also explored. This analysis
compared the performance of the hybrid EDIS under various shares of pooled resources
and reduced target levels with the status quo. The main results point to the possibility to
maintain or even increase the current level of depositor protection with a lower target
level. The more resources are pooled, the lower the target level could be. As a result,
depending on the design of the hybrid model, the target level could be set between 0.5%
and 0.8%, without lowering depositor protection.
For instance, under a target level of 0.7% of covered deposits, the probability that a
hybrid EDIS would allow a better depositor protection than under the status quo is
around 99.8%
585
. Under a significantly reduced target level (0.5-0.6%), there is a 95%
probability that a hybrid model
586
provides a better protection than under the status quo.
This quantitative analysis supports the potential reduced target level under an ambitious
EDIS. However, this quantitative work only considers the hybrid models for payout,
under the current creditor hierarchy. A single category of claims for all deposits and a
more frequent use of measures like transfer strategies was also taken into account. The
impact of two latter create upward or downward pressure on the amount of funds used by
the DGS and hybrid EDIS that are hard to precisely calculate. The net impact is likely to
be positive for the DGS and hybrid EDIS funds and is explained in more details below
(see
Error! Reference source not found.:
Implications of the scope on the uses of DGS
and hybrid EDIS funds).
2.3.1. How do the main parameters of the different hybrid EDIS designs
compare?
The possible designs of hybrid EDIS vary in the degree of allocation between the
national funds and the DIF and the extent to which the national funds can be mobilised
for mandatory lending. The likelihood of the recourse to the mandatory lending is
directly proportional to the amount of available funds in the DIF. The other parameters
are common to the various designs and relate to the modalities of the repayment of the
liquidity support, i.e. maturity of loans, interest rates, repayment sequencing and
replenishment, and the scope of coverage.
2.3.1.1. Low-ambition hybrid EDIS
585
99.8% for hybrid EDIS with reduced shared of pooled resources and 99.9% for hybrid EDIS with high
shares of pooled resources.
586
95% for hybrid EDIS with reduced shares of pooled resources and 98% for hybrid EDIS with high
shares of pooled resources.
369
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0371.png
In this scenario, hybrid EDIS would imply a larger role for national solutions and
resources and a smaller role for central funding.
Allocation of the funds and mandatory lending
The allocation of funds would maintain 75% of the funds at national level. Accordingly,
25% of DGS funds would be transferred to the DIF, while 30% of the funds remaining in
the national DGS could be mobilised for mandatory lending (i.e. cap amounting to 30%).
Unlike in the case of mandatory lending, there is no cap on the DIF. Indeed, while setting
such a cap would arguably protect the funds in the DIF, it would increase the complexity
of the hybrid EDIS and lower the capacity of an effective crisis response. Moreover, the
probability of recourse to the mandatory lending would be higher, more prone to
operational challenges than accessing the resources in the DIF and less effective in terms
of crisis response due to the limited amount in national DGSs.
587
This scenario would be more efficient than the status quo for the banking industry
because it would address more effectively the risk of shortfalls. However, the relatively
lower pooling effect leads to a higher risk of DGS liquidity shortfall than under a high-
ambition model (as well as the middle-way option). Therefore, by providing limited
scope for synergies it would maintain the target level (i.e. 0.8% of the covered deposits).
Scope of intervention
In line with the limited share of funds transferred to the DIF and the cap on mandatory
lending, the available firepower in hybrid EDIS would only allow to finance DGS
interventions for payout and in resolution. The preventive and alternative measures
would be financed at the national level.
Under this scenario, members of IPSs would be required to transfer 25% of their DGS
financial means to the DIF (corresponding to the 25% earmarked for payouts). This
would also imply that IPSs would finance preventive measures with the funds remaining
at national level, in line with their business model. Compared to the baseline scenario,
the change would imply a transfer of a certain portion of their DGS funds at central level,
combined with the changes affecting the revised conditions of application (Annex 6).
This would, however, not affect the amount available for preventive measures because,
under the current framework, if the available financial means fall below 25%, the
affiliated institutions must immediately provide the means used for preventive measures,
e.g. in the form of extraordinary contributions.
2.3.1.2. High-ambition hybrid EDIS
In this scenario, hybrid EDIS would have a strong centralised component, ensuring a
large firepower conducive to synergies to reduce the costs to the industry.
Allocation of the funds and mandatory lending
A combination of a large DIF and a significant part of funds remaining at the national
level available for mandatory lending would imply a large firepower. To this end, a large
587
The mandatory lending would require prior collection of funds from all national DGSs.
370
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
share of the national funds (i.e. 75%) is transferred to the DIF. In case the DIF is
depleted, 50% of the funds remaining in national DGSs could be mobilised for
mandatory lending. The cap on the amount potentially mobilised for mandatory lending
would be set at 50% of the funds remaining in the national DGS. Like under option 3, no
cap would be applied on the DIF.
Compared to a low-ambition model, the larger firepower would allow to exploit
maximum synergies as a result of the pooling effect and would reduce the cost of
funding, putting the banking sector in a better position to face the current challenges and
contribute in the ongoing economic recovery. According to the quantitative analysis
performed by the JRC, the combined target level for the Banking Union Member States
would be reduced from the current 0.8% to 0.6%. Such a lower target level would
correspond to a 25.5% cost reduction (around EUR 14 bn) for the banking sectors in the
Banking Union.
Scope of intervention
The economic rationale for allowing support from the DIF to national DGSs to finance
preventive and alternative measures is clear. Indeed, the least cost test would be
harmonised, ensuring level playing field and avoiding any excessive uses of DGS and
EDIS funds. Consequently, the least costly option would always be applied, ensuring
efficiency for the EDIS scheme.
This approach would provide incentives to integrate the members of IPSs (recognised as
DGS) within the European system of safety nets. Similar to other banks, members of
IPSs would be included in the scope of the hybrid EDIS and eligible for liquidity support
for all EDIS interventions. Through the funds remaining at the national level and the
target level reduction, they would also have large amount of funds at the IPS level to
finance the preventive measures. Consequently, IPSs would retain their current business
model based on the failure prevention using preventive measures, subject to the
modifications proposed in Annex 6. In particular, like any other DGS, IPSs would be
subject to a least cost test and more harmonised conditions when financing preventive
measures. In addition, a specific mechanism could determine an appropriate reduction
from the contribution to the DIF to reflect a lower risk profile and effectiveness of the
monitoring functions. For the sake of completeness, an alternative approach would be
required in case preventive measures were subject to a tailored least cost test reflecting
the features of IPS, e.g. the presence of a legal commitment to intervene.
2.3.1.3. Medium-ambition hybrid EDIS
In this scenario, hybrid EDIS would have a medium centralised component, ensuring a
medium firepower conducive to certain synergies to reduce the costs to the industry.
Allocation of the funds and mandatory lending
Under this scenario, the allocation of funds would maintain 50% of the funds at national
level and 50% of DGS funds transferred to the DIF. In case the DIF is depleted, 50% of
the funds remaining in the national DGS would be mobilised for mandatory lending. The
371
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
cap on the amount potentially mobilised for mandatory lending would be set at 50% of
the funds remaining in the national DGS, while no cap would be applied to the DIF.
Compared to a low-ambition model, a larger firepower would generate certain synergies
because of the pooling effect and reduce the cost of funding, putting the banking sector in
a better position to face the current challenges and contribute in the ongoing economic
recovery. According to quantitative analysis, the combined target level for the Banking
Union Member States would be reduced from the 0.8% of covered deposit to 0.7%. On
average, it would lead to a 12.7% cost reduction for the banking sector (contributions
corresponding to the target level would decrease from EUR 55 bn to EUR 48 bn).
Scope of intervention
Like in a high-ambition model, it would be economically efficient to include all DGS
interventions in the scope of EDIS.
This approach would provide the same incentives to integrate the IPSs within the
European system of safety nets, while preserving their business model, as described
above for a high-ambition model.
2.3.2. Focus on the remaining parameters
Features of the loans from the DIF and mandatory lending
The liquidity support would take the form of a loan from the DIF, including resources
from paid-in means and/or those mobilised via the mandatory lending mechanism.
Taking into account the discussions in the CWP, the best policy option would be to
provide for high-level features of the loan, such as loans and interests, set out in a
repayment plan to be agreed in advance between a national DGS and the SRB as the
central authority. This approach would also be broadly in line with the feedback of
members in the CWP where a higher number of members supported a maturity longer
than five years as well as the interest rates. Nevertheless, also in line with this feedback,
these rules would also require a specified degree of embedded flexibility to reflect the
effect on financial stability on a case by case basis.
When setting the loan maturities, the main trade-offs involve an incentive for the
beneficiary DGS to reimburse the loan within a short period and, thereby, ensuring a fast
replenishment of the DIF (including the national DGSs involved in mandatory lending)
balanced against the financial stability objectives in the beneficiary DGS’ banking sector.
While a short maturity is susceptible to put a national DGS under pressure, a long
maturity would limit the funding capacity of the DIF for years. Accordingly, the best
option would be to set a maximum threshold of up to 6 years for the loans to a
beneficiary DGS. This approach would be consistent with Article 10(2) DGSD on the
replenishment of the available financial means to ensure a level playing field in the single
372
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0374.png
market.
588
Hence, the same replenishment rules should apply in the Member States
within and outside the Banking Union.
The loans would be subject to interest rates. When determining the level of interest rates,
the interest rates should compensate the opportunity cost of the DIF and the national
DGSs as they have to lend to a beneficiary DGS instead of investing their funds in low-
risk assets, while encouraging a fast repayment of the liquidity support. Consequently,
the best option would be to set the interest rates at the ECB marginal lending facility
rate
589
, plus 1% for years 3 to 6.
In this respect, the discussions in the CWP highlighted the importance of avoiding any
first mover advantage, i.e. where the first mover gains access to the central fund under
better conditions than a second beneficiary DGS. For this reason, the same maturity and
interest rates from loans coming from the DIF and from the mandatory lending
component would appear the most suitable means to avoid any first mover advantage.
The alternative option would be to subject the loans to different conditions, e.g. higher
interest rates if they come from mandatory lending. This would imply that, depending on
the actual funding capacity of the DIF, the second beneficiary DGS would have no
choice than to request support from the DIF relying on mandatory lending of the hybrid
EDIS.
Sequencing of the repayment
In line with the feedback received in the CWP, a specific sequencing mechanism would
be appropriate to prioritise the replenishment of the loans provided by other DGSs over
the loan from the paid-in means in the DIF. Accordingly, the beneficiary DGS would
repay the liquidity support in instalments, to be specified in the repayment plan, to the
DIF. The latter would repay first the other national DGSs involved in the mandatory
lending and, second, would replenish the amount due to the DIF itself. Consequently, the
loans from mandatory lending component is likely to be subject to a maturity shorter than
six years. The national DGS would replenish their own funds as a last resort.
Replenishment by extraordinary contributions and alternative funding arrangements
Beneficiary DGSs would repay the liquidity support in line with the rules set out in
Article 10(8) DGSD. According to this provision, in case the available financial means
are insufficient, DGS members shall pay extraordinary contributions, and the
ex post
contributions should not exceed 0.5% of the covered deposits of DGS members per
calendar year. Among the policy options discussed, extraordinary contributions would be
raised either before requesting support from the hybrid EDIS or subsequently. The trade-
off to consider would be between financial stability in the concerned banking sector
versus
the protection of the means of the DIF and incentive compatibility.
588
Article 10(2) DGSD provides: “If,
after the target level has been reached for the first time, the
available financial means have been reduced to less than two-thirds of the target level, the regular
contribution shall be set at a level allowing the target level to be reached within six years.”
589
Potentially with a floor at 0%.
373
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
In line with the feedback received, the best policy option would be to raise
ex post
contributions after receiving liquidity support in order to repay the loan. In this scenario,
the DGS would receive fast liquidity support, facilitating the DGS’ intervention and
strengthening the confidence of depositors. Together with alternative funding
arrangements under Article 10(9) DGSD, to be reinforced as proposed in Annex 6,
extraordinary contributions may be seen as a reliable ultimate guarantee of
reimbursement, contributing to build trust among the participants in the hybrid EDIS.
Governance
The discussions in the CWP on governance highlighted the importance of the alignment
of liability and control. There was a general support for the SRB as a central authority
administering EDIS. A number of members also acknowledged that, whilst dependent on
the design of EDIS, the governance arrangements should not be overly complex to ensure
effective decision-making. For several members, it would be important to envisage a role
for national DGSs in the decision-making process and allow access to the national
resources in the central fund (in the individual compartment) irrespective of the central
authority’s authorisation.
The low- and high-ambition models would each involve either a more decentralised or
more centralised approach, subject to appropriate safeguards and in line with the
principle of subsidiarity. A possible alternative middle-way option involving an equal
split of resources at national and central level would require a more balanced approach
between the two options conducive to a system of shared governance. All options should
result in a balanced combination of a centralised, involving a participation by national
authorities and where appropriate, national DGSs, and a decentralised approach, where
national authorities take the lead under consultation mechanism involving the central
authority.
Non-CRR entities and third country branches
In view of the importance of such non-CRR entities in a small number of banking
markets, the non-CRR entities could be covered by EDIS because the liquidity support
would be repaid in any case. Taking into account the feedback received, the best option
to address the concerns regarding their supervision would be to provide for a transitional
period during which the non-CRR entities could be repatriated under the CRD/CRR
framework’s provisions that have recently reinforced the embedded proportionality.
Depending on the developments around the common authorisation requirements in the
ongoing review of the CRD/CRR framework, the third country branches could be
included in the scope of EDIS. Alternatively, they should be protected by national funds
above the target level.
ONDs
The revised framework should provide incentives to finance as many ONDs as possible.
Moreover, given any liquidity support provided would be entirely repaid, it would be
sensible for the hybrid EDIS to finance at least the major ONDs. This would also be
beneficial in terms of administrative burden for the DGS that would otherwise have been
required to distinguish the OND-related claims, not eligible for EDIS coverage, from
374
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0376.png
other depositor claims. Moreover, this would also be in line with the rationale and
analysis substantiating further harmonisation of several ONDs explained in the EBA
opinions and in Annex 6.
During the last CWP discussion on the treatment of ONDs in the context of EDIS, the
feedback received supported a creation of as harmonised system as possible to preserve
level playing field. The majority of Member States considered that ONDs should be
harmonised, where possible, and covered at least to a certain degree by EDIS. Some
Member States nevertheless underlined the need for flexibility to preserve national
specificities. Others mentioned their preference to keep the ONDs in the current form and
cover them by national DGS only, possibly with funds above the target level. Others
were willing to consider eliminating some of the ONDs.
The following table provides an overview of ONDs, based on the findings of the CEPS
study as concerns their estimated impact in terms of either covered deposits or available
financial means and the number of Member States in which each OND was transposed.
The ONDs were distinguished according to their impact which is either financial for the
DGS, with effects on depositor confidence, or other impact that would represent a higher
exposure for EDIS.
Table 38: Other ONDs and the corresponding provision under the DGSD
(*
590
)
Proposed for
Covered by EDIS
Impact*
Rele-
further
vance*
harmonisation
1. ONDs THAT MAY HAVE AN UPWARD FINANCIAL IMPACT ON EDIS (I.E. THEY IMPACT THE
AMOUNT, AND THUS THE RISK PROFILE OF NATIONAL DGS/EDIS) AND POSSIBLE IMPACT ON
DEPOSITOR CONFIDENCE AND/OR THE LEVEL PLAYING FIELD
Coverage level and payout procedure
Coverage of Pension Schemes (Article 5(2)a)
No
No
Up to 1.4%
4
Deposits held by small local authorities
(Article 5(2)b)
Temporary high balances relating to certain
transactions (Article 6(2))
Old-age provision products and pensions
(Article 6(3))
Contributions and available financial means
Payment commitments
Participations by branches from outside the EU
(Article 15(1) 2nd subpara)
Lower contributions for members of IPSs
(Article 13(1) 3rd subpara)
Yes (to be
removed)
**
Yes
**
No
It is proposed to
cover public
authorities
Yes
Up to 0.1%
6
1.
2.
3.
Up to 10%
27
4.
No
Up to 22%
2
5.
6.
7.
Yes
**
Yes
**
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Up to 63%
n/a
24
27
8.
(to be
5
addressed in
risk-based
contributions)
Lower contributions for low-risk sectors
Yes (to be
No
not used in
4
(Article 13(1) 2nd subpara)
removed)
practice
2. ONDs THAT MAY HAVE AN IMPACT ON THE DEPOSITOR CONFIDENCE AND/OR THE LEVEL
PLAYING FIELD BUT NO UPWARD FINANCIAL IMPACT ON EDIS
590
The impact of each OND is measured either in terms of covered deposits or, in the case of payment
commitments, in terms of available financial means. The relevance sets out the number of Member States
that transposed the respective ONDs.
375
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0377.png
9.
10.
11.
12.
Coverage level and payout procedure
Treated as single depositor (Article 7(2))
Set-off of depositor liabilities (Article 7(5))
Longer repayment period for certain deposits
(Article 8(3))
Deadline on validity of repayment claims
(Article 9(3))
Contributions
Minimum contribution (Article 13(1) 5th
subpara DGSD)
No
Yes (to be
removed)
**
Yes
**
Yes
**
Yes
Yes
No
No impact
No impact
Up to 9%
Up to 5.9%
Up to 2%
Up to 0.2%
13
17
21
20
13.
Yes
(to be
addressed in
risk-based
contributions)
8
14.
15.
16.
3. ONDs THAT DO NOT HAVE ANY IMPACT ON EDIS
Coverage level and payout procedure
Exclusion of deposits to pay off a loan on
No
private immovable property (Article 5(3))
Exclusion of deposits fulfilling a social
No
purpose (Article 7(8))
Contributions and available financial means
Contribution to existing mandatory schemes
Yes (to be
(Article 10(4))
removed)
Voluntary lending between DGSs (Article
12(1))
Use of a uniform risk-weight affiliates of
central bodies (Article 13(1) 4th subpara)
** See Annex 6
No
No
No
No
Up to 22%
Up to 25%
3
1
No
n/a
0
17.
18.
No
No impact
591
n/a
n/a
14
6
The above table indicates the ONDs for which further harmonisation would be proposed,
as set out in Annex 6, so that they can be covered by the DIF (at least to a certain extent).
For example, the temporary high balances are one of the options that could have an
upward financial impact on EDIS, although they appear to be rare. In line with EBA’s
recommendations, the option would be harmonised by setting a minimum harmonised
threshold. Consequently, while some Member States would be required to increase the
current threshold, others that already have a higher threshold would be entitled to retain
it. While the latter would benefit from a guaranteed coverage by EDIS of up to
EUR 500 000, they would be required to cover any amount in excess of the minimum
harmonised threshold from the funds above the target level. Under a high-ambition
model envisaging a lower target level than the current 0.8%, this approach would be cost-
neutral. The same would apply to the alternative middle-way option. Under a low-
ambition model, the limited risk that a DGS would cover a portion of such temporary
high balances from national funds above the target level would mitigate the impact on
cost neutrality because the increased coverage level should cover the majority of
estimated temporary high balances.
Conversely, ONDs, for which no harmonisation is proposed, would not be eligible for
liquidity support from EDIS and would remain covered by national funds above the
target level (still cost neutral as the result of the reduced target level under a high-
ambition model and a possible middle-way option). This approach appears as the most
591
The amount of contributions would be re-distributed among the different entities within the same
group, without affecting the total amount of contributions to be paid to EDIS.
376
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0378.png
suitable because these ONDs are applicable in very few Member States (some outside the
Banking Union). Other ONDs would not have impact in terms of coverage by EDIS and
could be retained in the current form or subject to more harmonisation when reflected in
the risk-based contributions
592
.
2.3.3. Implications of the scope on the uses of DGS and hybrid EDIS funds
The financing of resolution measures could have positive implications for the resources
available in the DGS and in the hybrid EDIS. As explained above in the case of ONDs
and compared to the status quo, there could be elements under the revised rules that
could create upward or downward pressure on amount of funds used by the network of
DGSs and the hybrid EDIS. Nevertheless, the net impact is impossible to assess
accurately, given a number of variables.
On the one hand, whilst not altering the depositor protection up to EUR 100 000, the
change to the creditor hierarchy would significantly affect the outcomes of the least cost
test, increasing the frequency of DGS uses due to higher financial cap for any DGS
intervention. In the calculation of the revised least cost test, the likelihood of DGS’
ultimate losses in case of payout would be higher compared to the current preferential
ranking of covered depositors.
593
On the other hand, facilitating the use of other measures like transfer strategies, whether
in resolution
594
or in insolvency, would be more efficient. It would lower the costs for the
DGS and hybrid EDIS and better preserve its funding capacities. It would also release the
pressure on emergency of replenishment and reduce pro-cyclicality. Moreover, this
positive effect would be reinforced by the pooling of resources, also incrementally
increasing the effectiveness and efficiency of the hybrid EDIS compared to the status
quo. The rationale of the advantages of DGS interventions alternative to depositor
payouts is explained in
Error! Reference source not found.
Box 22: Rationale for the broad scope of interventions by DGS and EDIS
Considerations concerning the cost of payout versus cost of other DGS interventions
The cost of DGS interventions includes two dimensions: i) the immediate disbursement
need and ii) the potential ultimate loss.
In terms of immediate disbursement need, payout is very expensive, as the DGS has to
immediately pay the whole amount of covered deposits to depositors and wait for
recovery of its disbursement during lengthy insolvency proceedings.
595
Consequently, a
payout could deplete the financial means of the DGS for years, or lead to replenishments
contributions by banks potentially putting a strong financial pressure on the banking
sector.
592
593
This is the case of OND 9 and 15. See also section
Error! Reference source not found..
The change in the creditor hierarchy would increase the likelihood of DGS losses in case of failure.
594
Mostly in resolution due to the proposed changes to the PIA.
595
See the
EBA opinion on DGS funds,
p. 23-24. Some Member States reported on payouts cases prior to
2015 where the insolvency proceedings was not yet completed. Some insolvency proceeding may take
around 10 years, e.g. decision regarding
DSB Bank N.V.
in the Netherlands (also
here).
377
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0379.png
In the long term, the final loss for the DGS would depend on the recovery rate. If the
latter is high, the ultimate loss would be relatively low and consequently impose a lower
net burden on the DGS. The recovery rates in insolvency are driven not only by the
ranking of the covered deposits in the creditor hierarchy, but also the quality of assets of
the failed bank, the national insolvency laws and the efficiency of insolvency
proceedings.
596
For DGS interventions other than payout, the costs and the immediate disbursement need
for the DGS are dependent on the tools that are used. Some tools can be highly cash
efficient, such as guarantees, in the sense that they preserve the DGS funding capacity.
Other tools could strongly limit the potential final loss but be more cash consuming, such
as loans. All tools entail a certain degree of uncertainty: a loan involves a credit risk, a
guarantee may or may not be called, and a capital injection may be paid back but with a
strong uncertainty as regards the selling price. Another variable that could lower the cost
is the presence of a buyer.
The transactions, similar to so-called purchase & assumptions agreements predominantly
used in the United States, are likely to be more efficient for the DGS than a payout.
Indeed, the transfer of the (whole or partial) business would preserve the franchise value
to a greater extent than under a piecemeal liquidation approach. It would avoid the
destruction of the business brand and/or ensure preserving the commercial relationships
of the exiting bank with the clients. Consequently, this approach would strive to maintain
or improve the profitability of and the return on the assets, and thereby minimising the
cost for the DGS.
Lastly, the least cost assessment would limit the cost of this type of DGS interventions
(in insolvency and in resolution) compared to the cost of the payout. In that sense,
developing the role of other DGSs interventions in the CMDI is efficient for the DGS
(lowering the immediate replenishment needs) and for the economy in general (with a
lower destruction of value).
Use of DGS funds in the revised CMDI
Currently, a DGS is unlikely to finance other measures than payout subject to the least
cost test based on the preferential ranking of covered deposits (see section 4.1.1 in Annex
7). Changes appear necessary to make such a least cost test more realistic and there are
clear trade-offs to be made.
The change in the creditor hierarchy would facilitate the uses of more efficient tools that
preserve the liquidity of the DGS and/or EDIS and, consequently, also the financial
stability. Moreover, this approach exploring more efficient tools than payout would bring
about a number of positive effects on the depositor confidence:
In payout events, depositors must be reimbursed within 7 days. However, interrupted
access to accounts, social benefits and credit facilities for even a short period in
prevalently cashless societies, using or operating with credit and debit cards and
electronic systems, could impact the overall economy. Conversely, under other DGS
interventions, the depositor access to deposits would be unimpaired.
Changing the creditor hierarchy would increase the protection of a wider scope of
596
See the
EBA opinion on DGS funds,
p. 23-24. The empirical evidence suggests that the recovery rates
can be very different, ranging from 1% to 100%.
378
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0380.png
depositors by creating an environment where their deposits and commercial relationship
are transferred to another bank. Consequently, this would minimise the occurrence of
depositor payouts and the likelihood of DGS’ subrogation into depositor claims under
‘less preferential’ creditor hierarchy.
Therefore, the revised framework should improve the incentives for alternatives to
depositor payout, via a more realistic least cost test. Depositor payout would constitute a
fallout option in case there is no potential buyer for a viable part of the bank. Last but not
the least, in many cases, the counterfactual of the extensive use of DGS is ultimately the
need for taxpayer money to cover the shortfall, which is more likely in the case of
payouts (high cost in the short term).
2.3.4. Build-up of the DIF and contributions
Once the funding of all national DGSs has at least reached a pre-defined target level, the
DIF managed by the SRB could be built up by raising subsequent bank contributions or
by transferring already collected contributions from national DGSs. All national DGSs
are underway to reach the target level of 0.8% of covered deposits by 2024 and most of
them have already reached it.
597
Consequently, the policy option retained in the 2015 proposal to build up the DIF
directly from banks’ contributions calculated at the Banking Union level would not be
appropriate as it would impose an additional cost on the industry. Among the policy
options discussed, the paid-in resources transferred to the DIF could either be deposited
in individual compartments or be mutualised in one fund. Alternatively, the share of
funds remaining in the national DGSs to be mobilised for mandatory lending could be
placed in such compartments next to the DIF (one compartment per Member State)
facilitating its operationalisation.
598
In line with the feedback received, the DIF would be built-up with a one-off transfer of a
share of the target level collected at national level already based on a percentage
calculated according to risk-based methodology to be agreed in a delegated act
599
. This
methodology would also determine the approach to some ONDs related to risk-bank
contributions to ensure level playing field. The latter option would be sensible under a
low-ambition model. In view of the higher target levels of the DIF envisaged under a
high-ambition model (and a possible middle-way option), the best option would be to
build up the DIF following a gradual funding path.
Risk-based contributions
597
598
See also Annex 5 (evaluation).
This option was supported by many members noting the lesser complexity who noted that it is
administratively less complex and more likely to ensure a timely support from the DIF. Some members
expressed their preference to leave the funds in the national DGSs emphasising the importance of the funds
being under direct national control. A few members proposed an alternative option where the central fund
would be entirely composed of individual compartments, departing from the hybrid model (see European
Council (2 June 2021),
Portuguese
Presidency Progress Report
on strengthening the Banking Union,
p. 6).
599
For instance, under a low ambition hybrid EDIS, in order to transfer, in total, 75% of the DGS funds to
the DIF, some DGSs would transfer 74% and others 76%.
379
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0381.png
Under the status quo, each DGS has to reach a target level of 0.8% of covered deposits
and the contributions take into account the amount of covered deposits and the degree of
risk incurred by each credit institution relative to all other credit institutions affiliated to
the same participating DGS.
Under both options, it would be crucial to maintain a risk-based approach to maintain the
DGS target level and to build up the DIF. The risk-based method is an important
incentive for banks to reduce their risks and also contribute to build a fair deposit
insurance scheme where the more risky banks pay higher contributions than the others.
The impact of the different designs on the level of contributions would be twofold.
First, the pooling of funds would create synergies that could be exploited to reduce the
costs for the banking sectors in the Banking Union. Consequently, the target level would
be reduced under more ambitious models susceptible to lower the level of contributions
for the banking sectors (for simplification referred to as “national
reference measure”).
Conversely, a low-ambition model would maintain the target level at 0.8% of covered
deposits because of limited synergies.
Second, in line with the feedback received, the build-up of the DIF would imply a
calculation of contributions based on the amount of covered deposits and the degree of
risk of each credit institution relative to all other credit institutions covered by EDIS
(referred to as “Banking
Union reference measure”).
Accordingly, in the EDIS, the
contributions would be calculated based on the Banking Union reference measures for
the share of the funds transferred to the DIF, while the contributions to the national DGSs
would continue using a national reference measure. The other policy options discussed
were that the contributions to the DIF could be built up using the national reference
measures in the reinsurance phase, implying liquidity support only, or a hybrid one,
based on both a national and a Banking Union reference.
An ambitious model would imply a redistribution effect due to changes in the basis for
calculating a certain portion of the contributions. This would mean that, compared to the
status quo, some banks would pay more and others less. Such redistribution effect would
be more material for higher ambitious models because of the higher share of funds in the
DIF, and, by contrast, would be limited under a low-ambition model, envisaging a lower
share of funds in the DIF.
Table 39
sets out the anonymised level of contributions per each Member State,
calculated based on a database collected from Member States with data as of end 2018.
100 represents the current level of contributions, calculated at the national level, with a
0.8% target level. The impacts of reducing the target level and calculating part of the
contributions at Banking Union level are presented for the various designs of hybrid
EDIS. The methodology for calculating the contributions follows the indicators in the
EBA guidelines
600
.
600
EBA
Guidelines
on methods for calculating contributions to deposit guarantee schemes.
380
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0382.png
Table 39: Impact of the redistribution effect and reduced target level
601
Source:
European Commission services estimations based on JRC quantitative analysis (see JRC report on
EDIS risk-based contributions, Annex 12)
This table shows that, under the medium- and high-ambition models, for all banking
sectors, the combined impact of the redistribution effect and the reduced target level
would lead to lower the contributions compared to the status quo
602
.
Under a low-ambition model, as there is no target level reduction, the redistribution
effect would lead to higher contributions for 10 national banking sectors and lower
contributions for 11 banking sectors. The impacts on the contributions would range from
a reduction of contributions of 3% to an increase of 7%.
2.4. Transition towards loss coverage and review clause
The 2015 proposal introduced a loss coverage since the start. The latter turned out to be
the most contentious element, advocated by some and opposed by others. The position of
certain Member States on the introduction of loss sharing was contingent on further risk
reductions in the banks’ balance sheets, sometimes including amendments concerning the
capital requirement on sovereign exposures.
Box 23 illustrates that hybrid EDIS would provide sufficient flexibility for a gradual
introduction of loss sharing. In view of the difficult political compromise on the steady-
state, the best policy option would be to start with a hybrid EDIS focusing only on
liquidity support as the reduction of risks in the banking sectors continues with the view
601
602
This table is based on the JRC’s report included in Annex 12, p. 60.
Under a high ambition hybrid EDIS, the national banking sectors would pay from 30% to 12% less
compared to the status quo. For comparison, under the middle way option, the cost reduction would range
from -17% to -1%.
381
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
to prepare the ground for loss coverage. During the liquidity support phase, only the
member institutions of the beneficiary DGS would pay contributions to replenish the
DIF. In order to maintain this ambition in the steady state, a review clause would be
inserted to re-engage the discussions around the path towards EDIS with a loss-sharing
component.
Ultimately, the benefits of a fully-fledged EDIS, with loss coverage, would imply a
harmonised level of depositor protection for all depositors in the Banking Union,
regardless of the geographical location of the bank, with the view to enhance financial
stability and break the bank-sovereign nexus. The element of loss sharing would make
the third pillar of the Banking Union more robust as all the banks in the Banking Union
would contribute to the replenishment of the DIF, ensuring a faster replenishment
capacity. Similarly, sharing the losses at the Banking Union level would lower the
financial strain on one single national banking sector, significantly mitigating adverse
effects on financial stability and weakening of the sovereign-banks nexus. Lastly, the
introduction of loss sharing would have positive benefits for the market integration in the
Banking Union.
There is a clear trade-off to be made between the policy options of a fully-fledged EDIS
inherent in the 2015 proposal, subject to political stalemate and contingent on additional
conditionality to be agreed at political level, and the roll out of liquidity support that
could be achieved in the shorter term. According to this trade-off, the hybrid EDIS would
be suboptimal compared to a fully-fledged EDIS (e.g. implying a slower replenishment,
taking into account the financial strain on the beneficiary DGS, constituting partial
safeguards for host Member States). However, in the absence of political agreement on a
fully-fledged EDIS, the liquidity support would better address the financial stability
objectives to avoid liquidity shortfalls when dealing with bank failures. Therefore, the
hybrid EDIS would constitute a significant improvement of the status quo.
382
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0384.png
Box 23: Considerations on the transition to the steady state
603
From a long-term perspective, the introduction of loss coverage would entail significant
changes for the parameters of the hybrid EDIS. Going forward, the following policy
options would require further analysis and discussion:
The introduction of the loss-sharing component could be progressive towards the
steady state according to a specified transition timeline from the liquidity phase to
the steady state. In the steady state, the funds of the national DGSs could be
progressively transferred to the DIF. Alternatively, a certain share of funds could
remain at national level to mitigate moral hazard and potentially finance residual
national options and discretions. Under both options, the national DGS would carry
out their roles in the crisis management and handling of depositor claims.
The concept of loss sharing could be subject to different definitions. Under one
definition, both the national DGS and the DIF would share a certain percentage of
the losses with respect to each intervention. Under a second definition, the national
DGSs would be required to exhaust their funds before the DIF would intervene,
taking a share of losses.
Further analysis will be required on the interaction between the loss coverage and
other parameters of the hybrid EDIS, such as the allocation of the funds between the
national and the DIF levels. The build-up of the loss-sharing component would
require on a significant size of the DIF. For example, under a low ambition EDIS,
the DIF would be too limited and would not be able to support a significant share of
the losses, rendering the loss-sharing component rather artificial. Consequently,
progressing from such a scenario to loss sharing would require a significant increase
in the size of the DIF.
603
See European Council (2 June 2021),
Portuguese
Presidency Progress Report
on strengthening the
Banking Union.
383
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0385.png
A
NNEX
11: EBA
RESPONSE TO THE
C
ALL FOR
A
DVICE
We refer to the Call for Advice report by the EBA entitled “Call for advice regarding
funding in resolution and insolvency – part of the review of the crisis management and
deposit insurance framework” and published on 22 October 2021
604
. With this report, and
at the request of Commission services, the EBA provides targeted technical advice to
assess the reported difficulty for some small and medium-sized banks to issue sufficient
loss absorbing financial instruments, to examine the current requirements to access
available sources of funding in the current framework, including in view of the funding
structure of the above mentioned banks, and to assess the quantitative impacts of various
possible policy options, as specified by the Commission services, in the area of funding
in resolution and insolvency and their effectiveness in achieving the policy objectives.
Summary
The EBA response to the Call for Advice provides a quantitative analysis on banks’
capacity to access available sources of funding under the current framework and under
various creditor hierarchies, and with regards to the minimum requirement for own funds
and eligible liabilities (MREL).
The EBA response provides a descriptive analysis on banks’ capacity to access resolution
financing arrangements based on banks’ balance sheets and their business models, as
well as an analysis based on a modelling approach to simulate crisis scenarios.
The descriptive analysis shows the change to banks’ internal loss-absorption capacity
under four scenarios of depositor preferences compared to the current creditor hierarchy
applicable in each Member State. The analysis, whose findings are presented under
several different capital depletion scenarios, draws two main conclusions: (i) preferring
deposits to other ordinary unsecured claims increases the number of banks that are able
to meet the requirements to access resolution financing arrangements without the bail-in
of any type of depositors and (ii) a single-tier depositor preference (i.e. all types of
depositors rank
pari passu)
comes with the highest impact on covered deposits and the
highest contributions from deposit guarantee schemes compared to the other policy
options and the current situation. The modelling approach, which simulates an economic
scenario similar to the global financial crisis confirms the findings.
In a third part, the report also investigates the issue of market access for MREL
instruments for small and medium-sized banks to. A limited number of these institutions
had not yet issued senior MREL eligible instrument or AT1 and Tier 2 instruments as of
end-2019.
604
EBA (22 October 2021),
Call for advice regarding funding in resolution and insolvency.
384
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0386.png
A
NNEX
12: A
NALYTICAL WORK BY THE
J
OINT
R
ESEARCH
C
ENTRE
We refer to the Joint Research Centre technical report entitled ‘Quantitative analysis on
selected deposits insurance issues for purposes of the impact assessment’ (JRC132364,
available on the
EU Science Hub).
In this report, and at the request of Commission
services, the Joint Research Centre assessed (i) temporary high balances and the impact
of harmonising them, (ii) the effectiveness and the pooling effect of a central deposit
insurance scheme, and (iii) different approaches to risk-based contributions to EDIS.
Review of temporary high balances
The report assesses the financial impact of harmonising the coverage of temporary high
balances under Article 6(2) of the DGSD. Building on past exercises, the report
quantifies the size of deposits generated from real estate transactions and insurance pay-
outs linked to life events and criminal injuries protected under the DGSD. It assesses the
cost for the DGS and banks when providing extra protection to these deposits. The
analysis also introduces a novel angle to the problem. It looks at the impact on the wealth
of households involved in real estate transaction absent the DGS protection. This double
perspective on costs and benefits enables a better understanding of the implication of
different policy options.
Measuring the effectiveness and the pooling effect of EDIS
The report addresses how DGS pay-out capacity would change if the current national
DGS system is replaced or complemented by EDIS and whether synergies arise from
pooling effects in the contributions. The analysis is based on the SYMBOL model, which
simulates bank failures and the corresponding multiple pay-outs hitting the Deposits
Guarantee Schemes and the common fund.
The report finds that EDIS is more effective than the status quo. A system with common
financial means is able to protect a higher amount of covered deposits than under the
status quo. The more resources are mutualised, the more effective the system is. All
variant of EDIS considered in the analysis significantly reduce the likelihood and the size
of liquidity shortfall even under a systemic event. In addition, the pooling of resources
increases the probability of full protection of the covered deposits without liquidity
shortfall and delivers a higher efficiency for various EDIS designs creating room for
lowering the target level and consequently the cost for the baking sector.
Different approaches to risk-based contributions to EDIS
The technical framework for determining these contributions is based upon EBA
guidelines on methods for calculating contributions to deposits guarantee schemes. EBA
developed such guidelines pursuant to Article 13(3) of the Directive 2014/49/EU of the
European Parliament and of the Council and they set alternative methodologies and risk
indicators to compute risk-based contributions.
Starting from this report, the JRC developed and tested alternative scoring methods and
presents the results of this analysis in the present report.
385
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0387.png
A
NNEX
13: O
THER QUANTITATIVE ANALYSES
1.
O
BJECTIVE AND SCOPE
The objective of this Annex is to provide detailed quantitative information to support the
assessment of the policy options set out in Chapters 5, 6 and 7 as well as certain aspects
of the evaluation (Annex 5). In terms of scope, this Annex covers:
-
-
-
-
-
-
2.
An overview of the methodology
An overview of the application of the public interest assessment (PIA)
An overview of the operationalisation of transfer strategies
An overview of issues regarding MREL requirements
Caveats and disclaimers
Other methodological considerations
O
VERVIEW OF THE METHODOLOGY
Data sources and references
Each area of analysis outlined in section 1 builds on the data provided by the SRB and
the data used in the EBA response to the Call for Advice report collected by the EBA
directly from resolution authorities.
Table 40
provides a mapping of the data sources
used in this Annex:
Table 40: Mapping data sources and references
Section #
Application of the PIA
Transfer strategies
MREL
-
MREL build-up
-
Issuances of own funds and
eligible liabilities
-
Holdings of own funds and
eligible liabilities
Data sources and references
- EBA CfA report
605
- SRB data
- EBA quantitative MREL report as of 31 December
2019 of June 2021
606
and as of 31 December 2020 of
April 2022
607
- SRB MREL Dashboards
608
and Annual Reports
609
- European Commission, ECB and SRB joint Risk
Reduction Monitoring Reports of November 2020
610
,
May 2021
611
and November 2021
612
- EBA quantitative MREL reports as of 31 December
2019 of June 2021, as of 31 December 2020 of April
2022 and as of 31 December 2021 of January
2023
613
605
606
EBA (October 2021),
Call for advice regarding funding in resolution and insolvency
EBA (June 2021),
EBA Quantitative MREL report,
as of 31 December 2019.
607
EBA (April 2022),
EBA Quantitative MREL report,
as of 31 December 2020.
608
SRB (Q2 2020 to Q3 2022),
MREL Dashboards.
609
SRB (2015 – 2020),
SRB Annual reports.
610
European Commission, ECB, SRB (November 2020),
Monitoring report on risk reduction indicators.
611
European Commission, ECB, SRB (May 2021),
Monitoring report on risk reduction indicators.
612
European Commission, ECB, SRB (November 2021),
Monitoring report on risk reduction indicators.
613
EBA (January 2023),
EBA MREL quantitative monitoring report and impact assessment
386
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0388.png
Section #
Data sources and references
- ECB data on MREL holdings
-
S&P data
Detailed information on methodological assumptions is available in each section where
these analyses are presented.
3.
P
UBLIC INTEREST ASSESSMENT
The objective of this section is to present descriptive statistics related to the outcome of
the implementation of the PIA for resolution planning purposes to date
614
. The
information is based on the application of the PIA under the existing rules (baseline).
This section does not estimate the extension of the PIA application under the packages of
options described in Chapter 6 for the reasons described in that chapter (i.e. retained
discretion by authorities, PIA decision at planning phase is a presumptive path which
could change at the moment of failure in function of concrete case by case
circumstances).
Table 41
provides an overview, per size classification and per funding structure, taking
into account the prevalence of deposits in the banks’ liabilities
615
, of the implementation
of the PIA.
Based on data referred to in the EBA CfA report and SRB input, at the level of the EU,
90% of the large banks, including all G-SIIs and a majority of O-SIIs have a positive
PIA, leading the vast majority of the systemically important banks to have resolution as
presumptive path in case of failure.
The outcome of the assessment changes significantly depending on the size
classification, in particular when the size of the institution decreases. In particular, while
few of the largest institutions have a negative PIA, the share of institutions with a
positive PIA decreases to 70% for medium-sized institutions across the EU, and down to
29% for small and non-complex institutions. In total, 187 banks out of 368 (51%) in the
sample are earmarked for resolution. The proportion is similar in the Banking Union
616
(49%).
When considering the funding structure, banks with a high prevalence of deposits (i.e.
proportion of deposits over 80% of TLOF) tend to be more often earmarked for
liquidation (only 39% of cases with a positive PIA). However, the lower levels of
prevalence of deposits do not have a material effect on the distribution between negative
and positive PIA, as the proportion of banks earmarked for resolution is generally stable
between 57% and 62%.
614
Irrespective of the resolution authorities’ decision regarding the PIA when an institution is at the
moment of failure or likely to fail (Article 32 BRRD).
615
In accordance with the methodology used in the EBA CfA Report.
616
Considering all banks in the Banking Union (significant and less significant institutions).
387
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0389.png
Table 41: Outcome of the implementation of the PIA in the EU
Institutions with
positive PIA
Count
%
N.
Small
Medium
Large
Low
Mid
Mid-High
High
195
124
49
107
44
63
154
56
87
44
63
25
39
60
29%
70%
90%
59%
57%
62%
39%
368
187
Total
51%
Source: Commission services, based on EBA CfA report and SRB data, as of Q4 2019
4.
OPERATIONALISATION OF TRANSFER STRATEGIES
In case of positive PIA, the choice of the resolution strategy and the appropriate
resolution tools relies on resolution authorities’ judgement and discretion. In particular,
relying on the use of a transfer tool (e.g. sale of business, bridge institution or asset
separation) depends on several factors aimed at supporting the feasibility and credibility
of a full or partial transfer of activities to a third party in resolution. So far, evidence
shows that transfer strategies have been mostly used for small or mid-sized institutions,
for which the transferability is seen as more achievable compared to other, larger groups.
According to the EBA 2023 quantitative report on MREL, as of December 2021,
approximately 81% of EU-27 banks’ domestic assets were covered by a strategy other
than liquidation: 77.3% of assets were covered by a bail-in strategy and 3.5% by a
strategy relying on the use of a transfer tool. Bail-in strategies continue to be the first-
choice approach for the largest banks, with a total of 144 MREL decisions covering EUR
23.5 tn in assets. Instead, the use of transfer tools is the preferred strategy for 146 banks
representing approximately EUR 1.1 tn in assets, covering mostly resolution groups or
stand-alone resolution entities that are relatively limited in size, with only six of them
classified as O-SIIs and 140 of them classified as other (non-systemic) banks.
Table 42: Overview of resolution strategies (based on MREL decisions, as of December
2021)
617
Resolution
Total assets
% of
Number of
strategy
(EUR bn)
assets
decisions
Bail-in
23 537
95%
144
Transfer
1 051
5%
146
Source: EBA quantitative MREL report 2021.
% of
decisions
43%
43%
617
In addition, 47 decisions – not included in this table – have been taken for banks subject to liquidation,
for which MREL has been set above own funds requirements in accordance with the BRRD.
388
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0390.png
Due to a lack of available and accurate information on the precise resolution strategy, a
more detailed break-down based on the sample of banks used in the EBA CfA report was
not possible.
5.
MREL
5.1. MREL build-up
Overview of compliance with external MREL requirements
According to the EBA 2023 MREL quantitative report
618
which analysed MREL
compliance for a sample of 245 EU resolution groups and individual resolution entities
as of Q4 2021, the average MREL target (weighted by TREA) was 22.6% TREA, with a
combined buffer requirement of 3.3% of TREA. Subordination requirements, including
CBR, were set at a level of 18.5% TREA. Out of the total sample of 245 banks subject to
an external MREL, subordination requirements have been set for 169 resolution groups.
As of Q4 2021, 70 resolution groups had an MREL shortfall estimated at EUR 33 bn,
down from EUR 67.6 bn for 110 resolution groups as of Q4 2020 and 102 bn for 111
resolution groups as of Q4 2019. The reduction in shortfalls should be considered against
strong issuance levels over the period.
-
G-SIIs: The average MREL target for G-SIIs was 22.9% TREA, including a
subordination requirement of 17.6% TREA. On top of this requirement comes the
combined buffer requirement of 3.6% on a weighted average basis to be met with
CET1. The aggregate MREL shortfalls for G-SIIs declined most significantly
between Q4 2019 and Q4 2020, from EUR 19 bn to EUR 3.8 bn attributable to
one G-SII. As of Q4 2021, all G-SIIs comply with their end-state MREL targets.
O-SIIs: The average MREL target for O-SIIs was 22.8% TREA, plus an average
combined buffer requirement of 3.1% TREA. The average MREL requirement
are broadly similar across O-SIIs irrespective of their size. MREL shortfalls for
O-SIIs also declined from EUR 64 bn as of Q4 2019 to EUR 46.9 bn as of Q4
2020, attributable to 45 banks, further down to EUR 14.4 bn as of Q4 2021,
attributable to 34 banks. The level of MREL eligible resources was higher for
larger O-SIIs, particularly top-tier O-SIIs, than for smaller banks. Apart from the
overall level, there was a high divergence in the distribution of eligible resources.
While larger O-SIIs exhibit a lower level of common equity Tier 1 compared to
smaller banks, they hold a higher level of senior non-preferred instruments, which
was scarcer in the group of O-SIIs with assets lower than EUR 50 bn. Contrary to
previous periods, smaller O-SIIs held subordinated debt as of Q4 2021.
Other banks: The average MREL target for other banks was 20.8% TREA for
banks not considered as G-SII nor O-SII, supplemented by an average combined
buffer requirement of 2.5% TREA. Compared to systemic entities, other banks
were set a lower MREL as a percentage of TREA, reflecting the prevalence of
transfer strategies for which adjustment to MREL calibration are introduced by
-
-
618
EBA (January 2023),
EBA MREL quantitative monitoring report and impact assessment,
as of 31
December 2021.
389
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0391.png
resolution authorities. The aggregate MREL shortfalls for other banks reach 18.6
bn, attributable to 36 banks, down by 27% compared to end 2020 on a
comparable basis. Compared to systemic institutions, other banks held a higher
level of common equity Tier 1 capital and senior liabilities. On the contrary, they
exhibited lower levels of additional Tier 1 instruments, Tier 2 capital and senior
non-preferred debt.
In terms of resources, the EBA MREL quantitative reports provide an overview of the
structure of the MREL resources for G-SIIs, O-SIIs and other banks, highlighting the
relative importance of AT1, Tier 2 and senior non-preferred liabilities across various size
groups, more prone to be part of the funding mix of larger institutions than small and
mid-size banks, even when qualified as O-SIIs in their jurisdiction.
This is also reflected in the composition of the liability structure of the resolution entities
included in the EBA CfA report. As highlighted in
Table 43,
issuances of senior non-
preferred liabilities, senior unsecured liabilities, but also AT1 and Tier 2 instruments are
relatively more important for larger institutions. In addition, the issuances of certain
subordinated liabilities is concentrated in some Member States: no senior non-preferred
liabilities are present for resolution entities in 12 Member States, other subordinated
liabilities are either not present or in very limited amount in five Member States, but with
large shares in three other Member States (DE 1.28% TLOF, HR 1.12% or AT 0.95%),
senior unsecured liabilities represent on average more than 24% of TLOF in four
Member States (FI, FR, NL and SE), against less than 5% TLOF in 17 other Member
States.
Table 43: Composition of liability structure (resolution entities, % TLOF)
Small
Medium
Large
Resolution Liquidation
1.3%
2.7%
22.4%
8.1%
0.9%
0.2%
6.9%
65.5%
100.0%
Subordinated liabilities
Senior non-preferred liabilities
Senior unsecured liabilities
Own funds
- Tier 2
- AT1
- CET1
Other liabilities
Total
0.1%
1.1%
0.3%
0.4%
0.0%
1.8%
3.2%
2.9%
2.7%
5.4%
13.4%
10.7%
13.2%
7.9%
8.3%
8.4%
0.6%
1.0%
1.5%
1.4%
0.2%
0.3%
0.8%
0.7%
12.4%
6.6%
6.1%
6.3%
84.0%
83.8%
74.8%
77.6%
100.0% 100.0% 100.0%
100.0%
Source: Commission services, based on EBA CfA report, data as of Q4 2019.
In the Banking Union, as per SRB’s MREL Dashboard as of Q3 2022
619
, the average
final MREL target represented 23.3% TREA, and 26.4% TREA when including the
combined buffer requirement. The average MREL subordination target including the
combined buffer requirement amounted to 19.3% TREA. In terms of build-up of eligible
instruments, the average stock of MREL eligible liabilities and own funds reached 31.2%
TREA. In absolute terms, the stock reached EUR 2 353 bn, increasing by 6% or EUR
619
SRB (February 2023),
SRB MREL Dashboard Q3 2022
390
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0392.png
134.2 bn year-on-year. This trend is in line with the banks’ funding plans to meet the
biding final MREL targets by 1 January 2024. The average MREL shortfalls against the
final target (2024) amounted to 0.2% TREA (EUR 18.1 bn) in Q3 2022, and 0.4% TREA
(EUR 30.5 bn) when including the combined buffer requirement. These levels represent a
year-on-year decrease, despite the recent economic uncertainty, showing the authority’s
progress in delivering more MREL decisions despite the increase in the sample of banks.
While compliance with MREL targets is a matter of transitional period and most banks
are expected to fulfil their requirements once the transitional period expired, certain
banks may be facing more structural issues to comply with their requirement (see section
5.2).
MREL calibration for transfer strategies
The SRB’s MREL policy
620
describes the calibration of MREL for transfer strategies and
for open bank bail-in strategies
621
. Banks with transfer strategy as the preferred
resolution strategy are required to hold MREL instruments to cover for loss absorption
and recapitalisation, where the latter is adjusted downwards with a factor between 15-
25% of the recapitalisation amount, on a case by case basis, when compared to open
bank bail-in strategy. This adjustment could be added to other adjustment factors
applicable to the recapitalisation amount. The rationale for a lower recapitalisation
amount for transfer strategies lies with the lack of need to recapitalise banks whose (part
of the) business would be transferred to a buyer. At the same time, under the current
policy, the MREL calibration goes beyond own funds (loss absorption) for banks under
transfer strategies in order to cater for certain situations (such as a negative transfer price,
i.e. lower than the net asset value or if the transfer does not materialise at all).
Overview of compliance with internal MREL requirements
The requirement for subsidiaries, which are part of single point of entry (SPE) resolution
groups and which are not resolution entities themselves, to issue internal MREL eligible
instruments to the resolution entity entered into force with the BRRD II/SRMR II in June
2020 and became applicable from 28 December 2020, upon transposition. Therefore, due
to the relatively recent legal basis, calibrating and communicating internal MREL
decisions to entities is still in progress. Moreover, given the large number of entities in
scope of the internal MREL requirement, a prioritisation and sequencing of the work was
necessary. The SRB started preparing internal MREL decisions for entities under its
remit under the 2020 MREL policy and has successively expanded the scope by
prioritising entities representing at least 2% of the resolution group’s TREA, or leverage
exposure, or total operating income or which provide critical functions or those with total
assets exceeding EUR 5bn
622
.
620
621
SRB (June 2022),
SRB MREL policy,
section 2.4.2.
While the BRRD requires that the MREL calibration reflects the resolution strategy and tools, the
level 1 text is not prescriptive in terms of quantifying the differences in calibration in function of strategy.
622
SRB (June 2022),
SRB MREL policy,
section 4.1.
391
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0393.png
5.2. Issuances of own funds and eligible liabilities
The objective of this section is to provide quantitative elements related to the issuances
of own funds and eligible liabilities to support the assessment of the ability of institutions
to meet their MREL requirements. A specific emphasis is put on small and mid-sized
banks in view of any challenges experienced in reaching the required levels of MREL
buffers and the possible impact of the policy options related to an extension of the PIA.
The section is based on data from the SRB (covering the Banking Union through regular
monitoring of MREL issuances), EBA (covering specifically small and medium-size
banks in the context of the reply to the CfA) and publicly available information at the
level of the EU.
MREL issuances in the Banking Union (SRB remit)
Based on SRB data
623
covering a sample of 75 to 82 groups, the stock of MREL eligible
liabilities at the level of the Banking Union reached as of Q3 2022 an amount of
EUR 2 353 bn, increasing by EUR 134.2 bn year-on-year. The increase was also
significant for own funds and subordinated liabilities, amounting to EUR 1 989 bn in Q3
2022.
In Q3 2022, MREL issuances amounted to EUR 75 bn, up by 11% compared to Q2 2022.
Overall, year-to-date issuance volume remained rather elevated (equal to EUR 226.3 bn),
increasing with respect to the same period of 2021 (up by around 20% or EUR 38.1 bn),
while remaining broadly in line with the same period of 2020. Issuances by G-SIIs
accounted for 37% of the total issuances in Q3 2022. The SRB also noted that issuers’
preference in Q3 2022 was towards senior bonds (40% of total issuances), senior non-
preferred liabilities (34%), AT1 (10%) and Tier 2 instruments (4%).
623
SRB (Q2 2020 to Q3 2022),
MREL Dashboards.
392
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0394.png
Figure 33: MREL gross issuances by type of instrument, EUR bn
Source: SRB MREL Dashboard – Q3 2022
In particular, SRB data shows that MREL gross issuances until Q3 2022 took place in
several Member States, despite the economic impact of the COVID-19 outbreak. In Q3
2022, banks showed some heterogeneity in the volume of issuances, with Top Tier banks
being particularly active. Banks with total assets below EUR 100 bn accounted for 11%
of the total issuance amounts.
Figure 34: MREL gross issuances by country, EUR bn and %TREA
393
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0395.png
Source: SRB MREL Dashboard – Q3 2022
5.3. Focus on small and medium-sized banks
5.3.1. General considerations on issuance capacity
Extending the PIA will impact small and medium-sized banks for which resolution
authorities will more frequently consider resolution strategies at the time of resolution
planning. The determination of the relevant resolution strategies will remain at the
discretion of the resolution authorities, but these new candidates for resolution will
likely, at least partly, be subject to strategies relying on transfer tools (such as sale of
business, bridge institution or asset separation tools) given their limited size and systemic
importance compared to other, larger banks. As a result, these banks would be subject to
appropriate and proportionate levels of MREL requirements, in line with BRRD and
SRMR.
While some banks may have sufficient own funds and other eligible instruments to be
compliant with such requirements, for other banks, as MREL levels may exceed the loss
absorption amount (own funds)
624
, additional funding needs may emerge. The net effect
of MREL-related additional costs on banks, due to the expansion of the PIA cannot be
estimated because it would depend on bank-specific MREL targets set by authorities
following the determination of a positive PIA and the stock of outstanding eligible
instruments on these banks’ balance sheets.
In this context, a study based on publicly available information extracted from S&P
database, summarised in section 5.3.3, provides anecdotal evidence on the existence of
issuances of various forms of instruments, subordinated and senior unsecured liabilities,
across all size of institutions, including for those with a balance sheet lower than EUR 10
or 30 bn. This study shows that, while issuances are concentrated in a few Member States
and that the largest institutions, as seen previously, represent the majority of the issuers
in number and volume, some small and mid-sized banks have also issued subordinated
and senior resources likely to support the compliance with MREL requirements, where
not already achieved.
624
The MREL calibration for transfer strategies is smaller when compared to open bank-bail-in strategies
due to the adjustments currently envisaged in various jurisdictions to cater for the banks’ business models
and resolution strategies relying on transfer tools.
394
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0396.png
This analysis has a number of important caveats, such as the absence of clear delineation
between MREL eligible instruments and the concentration of observations in certain
issuers or in certain Member States, de facto constraining the presentation of the results.
The moderate number of issuances for these specific types of institutions may be
explained by transitional or more structural difficulties to access capital markets.
On one hand, structural challenges are mostly linked to: (i) the general features of the
banks’ business model and funding structure, in particular the reliance on deposits and
CET1 to finance traditional lending activities, (ii) the absence of past issuance programs,
ratings or listed shares (see Box 24) that may hamper the ability to access internationally
active capital markets, (iii) the level of development and depth of local capital markets
and (iv) the implied costs linked to the issuance of debt securities and their impacts on
profitability, in particular in jurisdictions where markets are less liquid and where
sovereigns have relatively lower credit ratings compared to other Member States.
On the other hand, transitional challenges mostly relate to: (i) limited issuance
requirements due to high capital positions or the absence of MREL targets above capital
requirements having regard to the applicable strategy in case of failure (i.e. liquidation),
(ii) timeframes for MREL setting by resolution authorities based on which certain
institutions, in particular the least systemic ones, may have only been notified recently
about their requirements, (iii) transition periods potentially beyond 2024 allowing for a
delay in issuance in order to limit impacts on profitability (interest margin) and (iv) a
logic of sequencing with the AT1 and Tier 2 layers to meet prudential capital
requirements and to favour subsequent senior issuances insofar as they meet the MREL
requirements.
These considerations call for caution when drawing general conclusions about the
explanatory factors linked to the issuances of own funds and eligible liabilities by small
and mid-sized banks and the potential additional costs of such issuances.
5.3.2. EBA report on difficulties of certain banks to issue MREL eligible liabilities
A recent EBA report
625
provided an analysis of possible factors that may explain the
issuance activity of MREL eligible liabilities, or lack thereof, by certain small banks.
Based on data as of Q4 2021, the EBA highlighted the following aspects:
-
The impact on profitability of MREL issuances, estimated via the cost of long-
term unsecured debt. The study shows that, while the overall situation appeared
manageable at the time (notwithstanding the changes of economic conditions and
the recent general rise of interest rates), the spreads
of unsecured funding
were
significantly higher for smaller banks than for their larger peers.
The ability of certain small banks to issue MREL over the period analysed in the
report seems linked, for certain issuers, to intrinsic financial health issues
(evidenced by low credit ratings), but it is also constrained by external factors
such as the sovereign rating or the apparent lack of deep markets in their home
jurisdiction.
-
625
EBA (January 2023),
EBA MREL quantitative monitoring report and impact assessment
395
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0397.png
The conclusions of the report must be assessed with caution, given the limited focus on
certain groups of banks and the absence of a holistic assessment. Nevertheless, the study
confirms the complexity of the issue and the need to recognise the heterogeneity of the
situation of small banks, given that their ability to issue MREL eligible instruments may
be impacted by several factors that goes beyond their intrinsic financial position or
business model.
Box 24: Small and medium-sized banks: ratings and listed entities
Based on ECB data, 115 banks out of 1 978 operating in the Banking Union have a
rating at entity level. The presence of rating strongly decreases in conjunction with
the size of the bank: while 41% of entities with a balance sheet of more than
EUR 100 bn have a rating, the percentage falls to 6% of the smallest banks with a
balance sheet below EUR 10 bn. At aggregated level, 6% of the entities have a rating
(this figure takes into account all banks for which the total asset size is not available
and that were not included in any other category).
Table 44: Share of banks with a rating (entity level, % of total)
Banks with a
rating (%)
Above EUR 100 bn
EUR 100-50 bn
EUR 50-30 bn
EUR 30-10 bn
Below EUR 10 bn
Total
41%
18%
23%
14%
6%
6%
Source: ECB computations, data as of Q4 2021
The variation is also significant, but with higher absolute levels, with respect to the
share of banks that are listed in the Banking Union. While almost all banks with a
balance sheet higher than EUR 50 bn are listed, the share decreases progressively
down to 42% for banks with a balance sheet size lower than EUR 10 bn. At
aggregated level, 34% of the entities are listed (this figure takes into account all banks
for which the total asset size is not available and that were not included in any other
category).
Table 45: Share of banks listed (% of total)
Banks with a
rating (%)
Above EUR 100 bn
EUR 100-50 bn
EUR 50-30 bn
EUR 30-10 bn
Below EUR 10 bn
Total
98%
96%
81%
78%
42%
34%
Source: ECB computations, data as of Q4 2021
Some of these banks, on an individual level, may not necessarily be standalone
entities and may be part of larger banking groups and, therefore, embedded into
group-wide funding structures.
396
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0398.png
5.3.3. Evaluation of the funding capacity – Study of public issuances
The subsequent study
626
is based on a sample covering 7 721 issuances by 298 issuers
with a balance sheet below EUR 100 bn
627
. Issuances take the form of subordinated and
senior unsecured debt securities with a maturity higher than one year, with a minimum
ticket of EUR 20 million, from January 2018 to January 2023, i.e. a time period which is
consistent with the progressive path followed by resolution authorities in setting MREL
requirements in the EU, including under the revised Banking Package adopted in 2019.
The dataset does not include a clear delineation to single out MREL eligible instruments.
As such, some liabilities included in the sample may be issued by institutions that are not
resolution entities or may not comply with all the eligibility conditions set out in Article
72b CRR for MREL eligible liabilities.
Main takeaways:
-
Overview of the issuers
Over the last five years, 298 issuers located in the EU, with a balance sheet size below
EUR 100 bn, reported a total of 7 721 issuances of subordinated and senior debt
instruments. The observations show that issuers are concentrated in a few Member
States: AT, DE, FR, IT, LU and SE represent more than 65% of the issuers and 89% of
the number of issuances, while there are only a limited number of issuances reported in
eight Member States, predominantly in Central and Eastern Europe.
626
627
Source: S&P data as of 19 January 2023, Commission services computations.
Data quality checks led to the exclusion of a limited amount of observations, in particular when the
type of instrument or the size of the issuer were not available.
397
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0399.png
Table 46: Number of issuers (per Member State*
and balance sheet size)
Size (EUR billion)
<10
AT
BE
BG
CY
CZ
DE
DK
EE
EL
ES
FI
FR
HR
HU
IE
IT
LT
LU
LV
MT
NL
PL
PT
RO
SE
SI
SK
Total
15
1
2
0
2
9
8
1
2
1
3
15
1
9
2
41
0
4
1
1
4
0
0
0
14
2
2
140
[10-30[
10
1
1
1
3
11
2
0
0
2
2
17
2
2
3
14
0
2
0
1
3
1
2
4
2
1
2
89
[30-50[
2
1
0
0
0
4
1
0
0
0
1
4
0
0
0
2
0
2
0
0
0
2
2
0
1
0
0
22
[50-100[
2
1
0
0
1
8
2
0
5
4
1
7
0
1
0
6
0
2
0
0
2
3
2
0
0
0
0
47
Total
29
4
3
1
6
32
13
1
7
7
7
43
3
12
5
63
0
10
1
2
9
6
6
4
17
3
4
298
* an issuing bank may be part of a group headed in another Member State
Source: Commission services computations, based on S&P data as of 19 January 2023.
The number of issuers should be viewed in perspective of the total number of banks
operating in the EU. Based on ECB data as of Q4 2020, approximately 1 150 banks with
total assets below EUR 100 bn
628
are operating in the Banking Union Member States. As
already noted, on an individual level, these banks are not necessarily standalone entities
and may be part of larger banking groups and therefore embedded into group-wide
funding structures. Similarly, not all banks would in any case be subject to resolution
strategies and may not have to issue MREL eligible instruments beyond their capital
requirements.
628
In addition to 803 banks for which the total assets size was not reported, for a total, including all asset
size groups, of 1,998 banks.
398
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0400.png
-
Overview of the issuances (types and amounts)
Bearing in mind the caveats on the limited number of observations, issuances of
subordinated instruments represent no more than 5% of the total issuances in each size
group. Banks with smaller balance sheet report issuances of subordinated instruments,
but in limited numbers compared to the number of issuers in most jurisdictions. Data
shows that nine Member States report 10 or less issuances of subordinated and senior
unsecured debt instruments. Senior issuances represent the majority of instruments issued
in all size groups. In total, senior instruments account for 98% of all issuances.
Table 47: Number of issuances (per Member States* and balance sheet size)
<10
Sub
AT
BE
BG
CY
CZ
DE
DK
EE
EL
ES
FI
FR
HR
HU
IE
IT
LT
LU
LV
MT
NL
PL
PT
RO
SE
SI
SK
Total
% per size
group
[10-30[
Senior
955
1
1
0
3
57
24
0
9
4
26
314
3
45
55
132
0
36
0
0
80
0
0
0
134
4
2
1,885
97.5%
[30-50[
Senior
122
1
1
1
12
190
21
0
0
4
40
112
4
7
21
82
0
16
0
0
29
1
2
16
6
2
18
708
95.0%
[50-100[
Senior
Sub
10
0
0
0
0
4
6
0
3
3
8
0
0
1
0
10
0
0
0
0
2
2
1
0
0
0
0
50
4.8%
Total
Senior
83
1
0
0
3
195
28
0
11
13
60
189
0
4
0
125
0
90
0
0
166
9
15
0
0
0
0
992
95.2%
Sub
17
0
0
0
0
0
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
3
0
1
0
2
1
1
2
2
0
4
0
37
5.0%
Sub
0
2
0
0
0
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
5
0
0
0
0
1
0
4
0
0
17
0.4%
28
0
1
0
1
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
6
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
48
2.5%
76
2
0
0
0
973
2
0
0
0
21
8
0
0
0
2
0
2,825
0
0
0
31
6
0
38
0
0
3,984
99.6%
1,291
7
3
1
19
1,427
86
2
24
24
155
623
7
57
78
361
0
2,973
1
3
278
44
27
18
182
10
20
7,721
Source: Commission services computations, based on S&P data as of 19 January 2023. * An issuing bank
may be part of a group headquartered in another Member State.
The 7 721 issuances represent an amount of EUR 1 236 bn, of which EUR 1 209 bn
senior instruments. In general, issuances account for a larger percentage of the
institutions’ total assets for the smallest banks: on average, senior unsecured debt
399
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0401.png
securities represent 5.98% of total assets for banks with a balance sheet size smaller than
EUR 10 bn, with averages in certain Member States reaching up to 11% to 46% of total
assets respectively, by far exceeding average levels for other size groups. Issuances of
subordinated instruments represent on average 0.04% of the total assets for banks with a
balance sheet size smaller than EUR 10 bn, generally higher than other size groups.
In general, several banks may be willing to ensure a layer of subordinated debt in the
form of AT1 and T2 above what is required to be held as CET1 before issuing other
forms of liabilities, such as senior non-preferred instruments. This progressive path
allows for prudential capital requirements to be met at a lower cost than CET1 and for
satisfactory capital ratios that enhance the rating of senior liabilities.
In total, small and mid-sized banks issued EUR 10.5 bn of subordinated debt (102
issuances) over the period.
Table 48: Issued amounts (per type of instrument and balance sheet size, EUR m)
<10
Sub
AT
BE
BG
CY
CZ
DE
DK
EE
EL
ES
FI
FR
HR
HU
IE
IT
LT
LU
LV
MT
NL
PL
PT
RO
SE
SI
SK
Total
2.560
0
30
0
100
145
202
200
100
0
0
0
0
0
0
264
0
0
200
55
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Senior
340.982
40
120
0
300
3,190
1,051
0
1,158
145
1,463
24,590
393
4,208
9,411
6,865
0
3,583
0
0
204,784
0
0
0
6,484
665
1,030
[10-30[
Sub
678
0
0
0
0
0
600
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
470
115
0
125
0
400
250
194
100
250
0
510
0
Senior
8.134
650
160
100
2.493
22,565
2,822
0
0
1,600
1,622
30,423
636
929
6,142
5,360
0
1,578
0
0
4,453
52
400
2,131
362
382
1,418
[30-50[
Sub
0
1.000
0
0
0
377
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
300
0
577
0
0
0
0
425
0
288
0
0
Senior
25.173
1.000
0
0
0
35,246
1,396
0
0
0
12,062
426
0
0
0
600
0
122,802
0
0
0
23,327
2,225
0
3,986
0
0
[50-100[
Sub
770
0
0
0
0
2,028
1,650
0
1,150
1,100
5,020
0
0
650
0
2,684
0
0
0
0
1,000
175
134
0
0
0
0
Senior
4.711
300
0
0
1.246
66,474
6,034
0
5,884
5,575
12,426
88,777
0
987
0
19,329
0
10,250
0
0
48,024
2,664
3,670
0
0
0
0
383,008
2,990
310
100
4,139
130,024
13,756
200
8,292
8,420
32,593
144,217
1,029
6,774
16,023
35,516
0
138,916
200
455
258,510
26,412
6,954
2,381
11,120
1,557
2,448
Total
3,856 610,460
3,692
94,411
2,967 228,244
16,360 276,352 1,236,342
Source: Commission services computations, based on S&P data as of 19 January 2023.
400
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0402.png
Table 49: Issued amounts (per type of instrument and balance sheet size, % total
assets, average)
<10
Sub
AT
BE
BG
CY
CZ
DE
DK
EE
EL
ES
FI
FR
HR
HU
IE
IT
LT
LU
LV
MT
NL
PL
PT
RO
SE
SI
SK
Average
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.04%
0.98%
2.60%
15.76%
5.98%
0.00%
3.96%
1.97%
0.00%
1.54%
0.00%
0.00%
46.10%
1.39%
0.04%
0.43%
0.12%
0.09%
0.00%
0.39%
0.00%
0.03%
0.00%
0.68%
0.11%
0.47%
0.76%
0.56%
0.30%
0.36%
0.66%
0.00%
0.15%
0.02%
0.34%
0.02%
0.22%
0.00%
0.14%
1.75%
0.74%
0.01%
0.03%
0.01%
0.30%
0.42%
0.26%
0.04%
0.47%
0.00%
0.10%
0.00%
0.17%
0.11%
3.96%
1.44%
1.53%
1.31%
0.39%
0.85%
0.43%
1.00%
0.61%
0.80%
0.03%
0.11%
1.46%
0.33%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.04%
2.40%
0.63%
0.58%
0.00%
3.78%
11.96%
1.95%
1.19%
2.46%
2.18%
11.78%
1.07%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.14%
0.01%
1.65%
0.31%
1.18%
1.10%
1.26%
1.80%
0.40%
0.30%
0.60%
0.02%
0.17%
0.17%
0.26%
0.00%
0.00%
1.53%
0.15%
0.10%
0.10%
0.08%
0.00%
0.53%
0.51%
0.19%
0.71%
0.05%
0.00%
0.26%
Senior
6.83%
0.51%
1.03%
[10-30[
Sub
0.03%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.14%
Senior
0.31%
5.38%
1.23%
0.53%
0.90%
0.59%
0.68%
0.00%
0.00%
0.11%
1.41%
0.00%
0.01%
0.06%
0.63%
0.38%
0.22%
[30-50[
Sub
0.00%
0.51%
Senior
1.00%
0.51%
[50-100[
Sub
0.02%
0.00%
Senior
0.10%
0.57%
2.56%
1.12%
1.26%
0.53%
0.85%
0.25%
0.39%
1.46%
0.72%
0.71%
0.42%
0.83%
1.39%
1.06%
3.81%
0.27%
Average
Source: Commission services computations, based on S&P data as of 19 January 2023.
5.3.4. Holdings of own funds and eligible liabilities
The objective of this section is to provide quantitative elements related to the holdings of
own funds and eligible liabilities to support the assessment of the ability of institutions to
meet their MREL requirements. Beyond the capacity to issue specific types of
instruments, that may partly be due to operational or structural constraints, a key
determinant of the assessment remains the nature of the investors ready to subscribe to
these instruments.
This analysis is particularly relevant to single out certain types of banks, in particular
small and medium-sized institutions or certain jurisdictions where financial markets may
have varying levels of developments.
401
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0403.png
Based on ECB data covering issuers in the Banking Union and using a combination of
several datasets subject to specific confidentiality rules, this section provides information
on the holdings of instruments as of Q4 2021 by certain types of holders, broken down
by type of issuers according to their size and geographical location:
-
Own funds and eligible instruments:
o
CET1 and AT1
o
Tier 2
o
Other subordinated securities
o
Senior non-preferred securities
o
Senior unsecured securities
Types of holders:
o
Financial institutions
629
, of which banks, insurance companies and
pension funds
o
Public authorities and central banks
o
Households and non-profit institutions
o
Other, non-financial institutions
630
Size of banks (total assets):
o
Below EUR 10 bn
o
EUR 30-10 bn
o
EUR 50-30 bn
o
EUR 100-50 bn
o
EUR 300-100 bn
o
Above EUR 300 bn
-
-
Geographical location (clusters
631
):
o
AT/FI/DE
o
FR/IT
o
BE/IE/LU/NL
o
PT/ES
o
CY/GR/MT
o
BG/HR/SK/SI
o
EE/LV/LT
The data is based on specific methodological assumptions that are listed in section 6 of
this Annex.
-
5.3.4.1.Overview of the distribution of holdings for Banking Union issuers
629
Category comprising: deposit taking corporations, money market funds, investment funds, other
financial corporations, financial vehicle corporations, insurance corporations, pension funds, monetary
financial institutions and other insurance and pension funds.
630
Category comprising: non-financial corporations, non-financial investors (third party holdings),
investors from non-euro area countries other than central banks and general governments, and unallocated
holders.
631
Groupings were necessary to prevent confidentiality issues.
402
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0404.png
On aggregate, financial institutions represent the majority of holders for all forms of
instruments. In particular, 58% of the reported holdings of CET1 and AT1 and up to 71%
of senior non-preferred instruments are held by financial institutions. Banks, insurance
and pension funds often represent a large proportion of this category, in particular for
Tier 2 and senior instruments, but relatively less for CET1 and AT1 where they only
account for 28%, the rest being held by other types of holders such as asset management
funds.
Other non-financial holders also represent a large share of holders for all categories of
instruments, while holdings by public authorities and central banks mostly relate to
senior instruments. Importantly, households and non-profit institutions represent a large
proportion of the holders of CET1 and AT1 instruments (6% of the holdings) and
particularly for other subordinated liabilities (18% of the holdings).
Table 50: Holdings of instruments per type of holder (% of the instrument type)
632
Financial institutions
Of which:
banks
Public
Households
Other, non-
authorities
and non-
financial
Of which:
and central
profit
institutions
insurance and
banks
institutions
pensions funds
9%
38%
27%
33%
17%
CET1 and AT1
Tier 2
Subordinated debt
58%
66%
55%
19%
13%
31%
25%
47%
1%
2%
1%
2%
13%
6%
3%
18%
1%
5%
34%
30%
26%
26%
23%
Senior non-preferred
71%
Senior
59%
Source: ECB data as of Q4 2021.
5.3.4.2.Focus on small and medium-sized banks
The following tables provide a granular breakdown of the holdings, for each instruments,
per nature of holders by type of issuers according to their size and geographical location.
They include figures for small and medium-sized institutions, as well as for largest
entities to enhance the comparability of the results.
In general, figures highlight the prevalence of holdings by financial institutions, although
not necessarily banks and insurance or pension funds, across all types of instruments, but
point at specific features in some Member States or for specific categories of banks
where public authorities and central banks, or households, represent an important
proportion of the holders. This is particularly relevant for CET1, AT1 and subordinated
debt held by households in certain Member States, or the absence of reported holdings of
Tier 2 and senior non-preferred for many types of institutions in several jurisdictions.
632
Example: 58% of the reported holdings of CET1 and AT1 instruments are held by financials. Banks
represent 19% of the holders of CET1 and AT1 instruments classified as financials. The sum of the
columns financials, public authorities and central banks, households and non-profit institutions, and other
non-financial holders is equal to 100%, covering the entire amount of reported holdings of each instrument.
403
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0405.png
The outcome of the assessment suggests that the access to a wide investor base able to
absorb different types of liabilities to meet MREL requirements is uneven across
Member States and varies across banks.
CET1 and AT1:
-
Financial institutions represent a large proportion of holders of CET1 and AT1
instruments for many issuers in all jurisdictions. The distribution remains
heterogeneous in particular for small institutions with balance sheet lower than
EUR 10 bn where the proportion of financials move from less than 20% to up to
99% of the holdings.
Public authorities and central banks generally represent a small proportion of
holdings of CET1 and AT1 instruments except in limited cases (e.g. publicly-
owned institutions).
Households represent an important proportion of holders of CET1 and AT1
instruments, in particular for the smallest banks with a balance sheet below
EUR 10 bn, in several groups of Member States: 59% in ES/PT, 35% in
EE/LV/LT, 37% in DE/AT/FI and 28% in FR/IT where this proportion remains
high also for larger institutions.
-
-
-
Table 51: Holdings of CET1 and AT1 instruments (% of holdings)
Financials
CET1 and AT1
Below EUR 10 billion
EUR 30-10 billion
DE_AT_FI
EUR 50-30 billion
EUR 100-50 billion
EUR 300-100 billion
Below EUR 10 billion
EUR 30-10 billion
IT_FR
EUR 50-30 billion
EUR 100-50 billion
EUR 300-100 billion
Below EUR 10 billion
EUR 30-10 billion
NL_BE_LU_IE EUR 100-30 billion
EUR 300-100 billion
Below EUR 10 billion
ES_PT
EUR 30-10 billion
EUR 100-30 billion
Above 100 billion
35%
60%
60%
58%
63%
16%
54%
63%
46%
55%
39%
49%
65%
72%
13%
0%
55%
59%
Of which:
banks
20%
26%
11%
25%
30%
31%
8%
24%
11%
-1%
13%
17%
6%
10%
22%
22%
17%
0%
0%
6%
14%
Of which:
insurance and
pensions funds
4%
3%
3%
2%
6%
7%
6%
12%
5%
17%
8%
7%
3%
1%
19%
19%
23%
55%
0%
9%
8%
Public
authorities and
central banks
3%
0%
0%
1%
0%
1%
0%
0%
0%
1%
1%
1%
1%
0%
0%
4%
1%
0%
0%
0%
2%
Households
Other,
and non-
non-
profit
financial
institutions
37%
5%
12%
13%
4%
6%
28%
37%
9%
38%
25%
5%
4%
17%
5%
1%
1%
59%
0%
13%
6%
26%
36%
27%
29%
32%
39%
55%
10%
27%
16%
19%
34%
56%
35%
29%
23%
35%
28%
0%
32%
34%
Above EUR 300 billion 54%
Above EUR 300 billion 60%
Above EUR 300 billion 63%
404
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0406.png
Below EUR 30 billion
EUR 50-30 billion
GR_CY_MT EUR 100-50 billion
EUR 300-100 billion
Above EUR 300 billion
Below EUR 10 billion
EUR 30-10 billion
BG_SI_SK_HR
EUR 50-30 billion
EUR 100-50 billion
EUR 300-100 billion
Above EUR 300 billion
Below EUR 10 billion
EUR 30-10 billion
EE_LV_LT
EUR 50-30 billion
EUR 100-50 billion
EUR 300-100 billion
Above EUR 300 billion
Source: ECB data as of Q4 2021.
54%
0%
44%
0%
0%
98%
99%
0%
0%
0%
0%
24%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
59%
0%
53%
0%
0%
0%
82%
0%
0%
0%
0%
1%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
13%
0%
2%
0%
0%
89%
11%
0%
0%
0%
0%
6%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
82%
0%
45%
0%
0%
0%
1%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
12%
0%
9%
0%
0%
2%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
35%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
3%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
41%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
Tier 2:
-
-
Financial institutions represent a large proportion of holders of Tier 2 instruments
together with other non-financial holders, across all jurisdictions.
Holdings of Tier 2 instruments are mostly relevant for institutions with a balance
sheet size of at least EUR 50 bn. In several Member States, no holdings are
reported.
Table 52: Holdings of Tier 2 instruments (% of holdings)
Public
Households
authorities and non- Other, non-
Of which:
Of which:
profit
financial
insurance and
and central
banks
banks
institutions
pensions funds
Financials
0%
0%
0%
64%
72%
57%
63%
0%
0%
53%
70%
65%
0%
47%
65%
79%
0%
0%
0%
15%
18%
11%
24%
0%
0%
15%
14%
14%
0%
8%
16%
17%
0%
0%
0%
41%
24%
28%
24%
0%
0%
12%
30%
42%
0%
11%
10%
30%
Tier 2
Below EUR 10 billion
EUR 30-10 billion
DE_AT_FI
EUR 50-30 billion
EUR 100-50 billion
EUR 300-100 billion
Above EUR 300 billion
Below EUR 10 billion
EUR 30-10 billion
IT_FR
EUR 50-30 billion
EUR 100-50 billion
EUR 300-100 billion
Above EUR 300 billion
Below EUR 10 billion
NL_BE_LU_IE
EUR 30-10 billion
EUR 100-30 billion
EUR 300-100 billion
0%
0%
0%
9%
1%
1%
0%
0%
0%
0%
1%
2%
0%
1%
0%
1%
0%
0%
0%
0%
8%
10%
13%
0%
0%
34%
5%
2%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
28%
19%
32%
24%
0%
0%
13%
24%
31%
0%
52%
35%
21%
405
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0407.png
Above EUR 300 billion
Below EUR 10 billion
ES_PT
EUR 30-10 billion
EUR 100-30 billion
Above 100 billion
Below EUR 30 billion
EUR 50-30 billion
GR_CY_MT EUR 100-50 billion
EUR 300-100 billion
Above EUR 300 billion
Below EUR 10 billion
EUR 30-10 billion
BG_SI_SK_HR
EUR 50-30 billion
EUR 100-50 billion
EUR 300-100 billion
Above EUR 300 billion
Below EUR 10 billion
EUR 30-10 billion
EE_LV_LT
EUR 50-30 billion
EUR 100-50 billion
EUR 300-100 billion
Above EUR 300 billion
Source: ECB data as of Q4 2021.
45%
0%
0%
66%
72%
0%
0%
60%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
31%
0%
0%
8%
10%
0%
0%
39%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
31%
0%
0%
19%
41%
0%
0%
2%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
2%
0%
0%
0%
1%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
2%
1%
0%
0%
3%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
53%
0%
0%
33%
26%
0%
0%
37%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
Other subordinated securities:
-
Financial institutions represent a large proportion of holders of subordinated
instruments, sometimes together with other non-financial holders in certain
jurisdictions.
Similarly to own funds instruments, public authorities and central banks often
represent a limited proportion of holders, and are largely outweighed by
households and non-profit institutions which may represent up to 40% of the
holders of subordinated instruments.
In general, holdings by households and non-profit institutions seem to remain high
irrespective of the size of the institutions, although slightly more important for
banks with balance sheet up to EUR 50 bn, in those jurisdictions where they
account for a large proportion of the issuers.
-
-
406
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0408.png
Table 53: Holdings of other subordinated instruments (% of holdings)
Public
authorities
Of which:
Of which:
insurance and
and central
banks
banks
pensions funds
Financials
54%
34%
42%
74%
53%
63%
70%
68%
100%
50%
64%
51%
51%
51%
75%
70%
44%
0%
96%
91%
63%
43%
0%
0%
0%
0%
68%
81%
0%
0%
0%
0%
57%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
53%
20%
13%
35%
32%
70%
79%
63%
100%
5%
28%
17%
32%
13%
1%
7%
12%
0%
4%
97%
18%
37%
0%
0%
0%
0%
69%
75%
0%
0%
0%
0%
5%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
15%
17%
48%
21%
34%
11%
5%
11%
0%
19%
19%
35%
39%
17%
62%
33%
17%
0%
94%
14%
44%
16%
0%
0%
0%
0%
26%
8%
0%
0%
0%
0%
12%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
Other subordinated
Below EUR 10 billion
EUR 30-10 billion
DE_AT_FI
EUR 50-30 billion
EUR 100-50 billion
EUR 300-100 billion
Above EUR 300 billion
Below EUR 10 billion
EUR 30-10 billion
IT_FR
EUR 50-30 billion
EUR 100-50 billion
EUR 300-100 billion
Above EUR 300 billion
Below EUR 10 billion
EUR 30-10 billion
NL_BE_LU_IE EUR 100-30 billion
EUR 300-100 billion
Above EUR 300 billion
Below EUR 10 billion
ES_PT
EUR 30-10 billion
EUR 100-30 billion
Above 100 billion
Below EUR 30 billion
EUR 50-30 billion
GR_CY_MT EUR 100-50 billion
EUR 300-100 billion
Above EUR 300 billion
Below EUR 10 billion
EUR 30-10 billion
BG_SI_SK_HR
EUR 50-30 billion
EUR 100-50 billion
EUR 300-100 billion
Above EUR 300 billion
Below EUR 10 billion
EUR 30-10 billion
EE_LV_LT
EUR 50-30 billion
EUR 100-50 billion
EUR 300-100 billion
Above EUR 300 billion
Source: ECB data as of Q4 2021.
Households
and non-
profit
institutions
22%
40%
17%
6%
14%
12%
19%
22%
0%
32%
26%
23%
0%
8%
2%
1%
25%
0%
2%
32%
5%
18%
0%
0%
0%
0%
1%
2%
0%
0%
0%
0%
28%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
Other, non-
financial
22%
23%
37%
20%
33%
24%
11%
10%
0%
16%
10%
25%
48%
39%
22%
30%
31%
0%
2%
27%
32%
4%
0%
0%
0%
0%
30%
17%
0%
0%
0%
0%
15%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
3%
2%
5%
0%
1%
0%
0%
0%
0%
2%
0%
1%
0%
1%
2%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
34%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
407
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0409.png
Senior non-preferred securities:
-
-
Holdings of non-senior preferred instruments are not reported for institutions
below EUR 30 bn in assets, except in a few Member States.
Financials remain the most important category of holders of these instruments,
sometimes with other non-financial holders in certain jurisdictions. Contrary to
subordinated instruments, households and non-profit institutions only represent a
marginal proportion of holders of senior non-preferred instruments.
Similarly to Tier 2 instruments, no holdings are reported in several Member
States.
-
Table 54: Holdings of senior non-preferred instruments (% of holdings)
Financials
Senior non-preferred
Below EUR 10 billion
EUR 30-10 billion
DE_AT_FI
EUR 50-30 billion
EUR 100-50 billion
EUR 300-100 billion
Above EUR 300 billion
Below EUR 10 billion
EUR 30-10 billion
IT_FR
EUR 50-30 billion
EUR 100-50 billion
EUR 300-100 billion
Above EUR 300 billion
Below EUR 10 billion
EUR 30-10 billion
NL_BE_LU_IE EUR 100-30 billion
EUR 300-100 billion
Above EUR 300 billion
Below EUR 10 billion
ES_PT
EUR 30-10 billion
EUR 100-30 billion
Above 100 billion
Below EUR 30 billion
EUR 50-30 billion
GR_CY_MT EUR 100-50 billion
EUR 300-100 billion
Above EUR 300 billion
Below EUR 10 billion
EUR 30-10 billion
BG_SI_SK_HR EUR 50-30 billion
EUR 100-50 billion
EUR 300-100 billion
0%
59%
81%
63%
76%
62%
0%
0%
0%
88%
82%
72%
0%
74%
63%
68%
71%
0%
0%
79%
73%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
Of which:
banks
0%
32%
67%
35%
55%
30%
0%
0%
0%
29%
18%
22%
0%
15%
19%
20%
22%
0%
0%
25%
18%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
Of which:
insurance and
pensions funds
0%
10%
7%
31%
8%
21%
0%
0%
0%
24%
42%
38%
0%
28%
29%
27%
42%
0%
0%
27%
35%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
Public
authorities
and central
banks
0%
2%
4%
3%
3%
1%
0%
0%
0%
1%
1%
2%
0%
2%
1%
2%
3%
0%
0%
2%
2%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
Households
Other,
and non-
non-
profit
financial
institutions
0%
1%
2%
0%
1%
2%
0%
0%
0%
1%
1%
0%
0%
1%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
1%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
39%
13%
34%
20%
35%
0%
0%
0%
11%
16%
25%
0%
23%
36%
30%
26%
0%
0%
19%
24%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
408
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0410.png
Above EUR 300 billion
Below EUR 10 billion
EUR 30-10 billion
EE_LV_LT
EUR 50-30 billion
EUR 100-50 billion
EUR 300-100 billion
Above EUR 300 billion
Source: ECB data as of Q4 2021.
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
Senior unsecured securities:
-
Financials also represent the largest proportion of holders of senior unsecured
instruments, with a relatively high share for banks, insurance and pension funds
compared to other forms of instruments.
On average, public authorities and central banks represent a larger share of
holders of senior unsecured instruments compared to other, more subordinated,
instruments. For certain categories of banks, they may represent up to 27% of the
holders, without specific trend with respect to the size of the issuers.
Households and non-profit institutions generally represent a large proportion of
the holders of senior unsecured instruments in many jurisdictions, and in
particular for small and medium-sized institutions where the share can represent
up to 52% of the holdings for the smallest banks below EUR 10 bn in assets.
-
-
Table 55: Holdings of senior unsecured instruments (% of holdings)
Financials
Senior unsecured
Below EUR 10 billion
EUR 30-10 billion
DE_AT_FI
EUR 50-30 billion
EUR 100-50 billion
EUR 300-100 billion
Above EUR 300 billion
Below EUR 10 billion
EUR 30-10 billion
IT_FR
EUR 50-30 billion
EUR 100-50 billion
EUR 300-100 billion
Above EUR 300 billion
Below EUR 10 billion
EUR 30-10 billion
NL_BE_LU_IE EUR 100-30 billion
EUR 300-100 billion
Above EUR 300 billion
ES_PT
Below EUR 10 billion
EUR 30-10 billion
51%
70%
51%
54%
68%
69%
42%
76%
95%
60%
78%
74%
59%
70%
52%
46%
69%
100%
81%
Of which:
banks
59%
75%
56%
43%
83%
58%
52%
38%
24%
42%
42%
47%
38%
28%
36%
46%
48%
0%
22%
Public
Households
authorities and non- Other, non-
Of which:
profit
financial
insurance and
and central
banks
institutions
pensions funds
6%
5%
18%
9%
4%
9%
12%
7%
2%
8%
22%
18%
6%
10%
38%
29%
18%
88%
32%
3%
5%
19%
2%
4%
1%
0%
1%
0%
12%
7%
1%
16%
1%
23%
27%
2%
0%
1%
25%
14%
7%
24%
20%
16%
52%
10%
0%
4%
3%
6%
1%
0%
1%
0%
1%
0%
0%
20%
11%
22%
20%
8%
14%
6%
13%
5%
24%
12%
19%
24%
29%
24%
27%
28%
0%
18%
409
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0411.png
EUR 100-30 billion
Above 100 billion
Below EUR 30 billion
EUR 50-30 billion
GR_CY_MT EUR 100-50 billion
EUR 300-100 billion
Above EUR 300 billion
Below EUR 10 billion
EUR 30-10 billion
BG_SI_SK_HR
EUR 50-30 billion
EUR 100-50 billion
EUR 300-100 billion
Above EUR 300 billion
Below EUR 10 billion
EUR 30-10 billion
EE_LV_LT
EUR 50-30 billion
EUR 100-50 billion
EUR 300-100 billion
Above EUR 300 billion
Source: ECB data as of Q4 2021.
84%
75%
68%
0%
81%
0%
0%
91%
74%
0%
0%
0%
0%
69%
61%
0%
0%
0%
0%
67%
24%
49%
0%
48%
0%
0%
58%
22%
0%
0%
0%
0%
15%
13%
0%
0%
0%
0%
5%
25%
8%
0%
6%
0%
0%
36%
33%
0%
0%
0%
0%
50%
37%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
3%
0%
0%
1%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
2%
1%
0%
2%
0%
0%
0%
13%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
1%
0%
0%
0%
0%
16%
21%
32%
0%
16%
0%
0%
9%
13%
0%
0%
0%
0%
30%
38%
0%
0%
0%
0%
6.
O
THER METHODOLOGICAL CONSIDERATIONS
The analyses conducted in this Annex rely on different samples of banks, depending on
the source of information. Although not directly comparable due to the heterogeneity of
the data sources used, these samples allow for robust analyses on a standalone basis in
order to support the assessment of the policy options. All samples have been subject to
data quality checks that resulted in exclusions of certain observations.
-
Overview of the application of the PIA
The analysis pertaining to the application of the PIA is based on the information from the
EBA CfA report. The analysis in the EBA CfA report is based on a sample of 343 banks,
out of which 165 entities with resolution strategy, according to Q4 2019 data. This is the
same sample of banks underpinning the analyses presented in Annex 7.
The classification of banks into large, medium and small banks as well as the split by
deposit prevalence (i.e. share of deposits in the total amount of liabilities and own funds)
follows the same methodology as described in the EBA CfA report and Annex 7.
-
Overview of the operationalisation of transfer strategies
The analysis regarding the allocation of banks by resolution strategies is based on the
EBA’s 2020 and 2021 quantitative MREL reports (based on Q4 2019 and Q4 2020 data,
respectively)
633
. These reports are based on the MREL decisions for a scope of 238 and
260 resolution groups and individual resolution entities, respectively covering the EU-27.
633
EBA (June 2021),
EBA quantitative MREL report,
as of 31 December 2019.
410
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0412.png
-
MREL
The analyses pertaining to the MREL build-up are based on the following sources of
data, each featuring specificities in terms of sample size and composition:
o
EBA quantitative 2020 MREL report: sample of 238 resolution groups
and individual resolution entities, consisting of 10 G-SIIs, 83 O-SIIs split
into four categories according to their size and 145 other banks also split
into four categories of size. Figures on MREL requirements, eligible
liabilities and shortfalls are weighted by TREA. The EBA’s quantitative
MREL 2020 report based on Q 2019 data reflects the implementation of
BRRD I. Internal MREL targets and statistics not considered in the report.
o
EBA quantitative 2021 MREL report: sample of 260 resolution groups
and individual resolution entities, consisting of 10 G-SIIs, 88 O-SIIs split
into five categories according to their size and 162 other banks also split
into four categories of size. Figures on MREL requirements, eligible
liabilities and shortfalls are weighted by TREA. The EBA’s quantitative
MREL 2021 report based on Q4 2020 data reflects the implementation of
BRRD II. Internal MREL targets are also considered in the report.
o
SRB MREL dashboards (presented in section 5.2 of this Annex): the most
recent SRB MREL dashboard presented MREL-related information and
data as of Q1 2022 for a sample of 82 resolution groups and individual
resolution entities, reflecting the BRRD II MREL policy. The MREL
issuances-related information is based on a sample of 82 resolution
groups. The aggregated MREL targets (% TREA) are the weighted
average of targets of resolution entities per Member State.
o
European Commission, ECB and SRB joint Risk Reduction Monitoring
Reports of May and November 2021: the overview of MREL targets,
outstanding stock of eligible liabilities and shortfalls as of Q4 2019 and
Q4 2020 is based on a sample of 101 and 98 resolution groups,
respectively.. These samples included nine G-SII and G-SII entities in the
Banking Union. The report reflects BRRD II MREL policies, however
internal MREL targets and statistics are not considered in the report.
o
ECB data on holdings: sample of Banking Union issuers of own funds and
eligible liabilities as of Q4 2011, based on the combination of several
ECB data sets. The information focuses on the buy-side (investors) of
these instruments. The classification of the banks in the sample according
to size was done in function of six thresholds of total assets. In order to
prevent confidentiality concerns, the presentation of the issuances
according to their geographical location follows seven clusters of Member
States. In addition, individual observations where key data fields were
missing (such as the absence of values related to the issuer’s total assets or
values or the indication whether senior liability were secured or not) were
excluded from the analysis. Finally, the sample of issuances might not
systematically capture liabilities that comply with all criteria set out in
CRR to qualify as MREL eligible. The data extracted from the relevant
ECB data sets is based on a proxy of MREL eligibility.
411
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0413.png
o
S&P data extracted as of 19 January 2023: sample covering 7 721
issuances by 298 issuers with a balance sheet below EUR 100 bn.
Individual observations where key data fields were missing were also
excluded from the analysis. The sample of issuances does not provide
clear delineation to identify MREL eligibility.
412
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0414.png
A
NNEX
14: O
PTIONS DISCARDED AT AN EARLY STAGE
Additional policy options were analysed and discarded at an early stage: (i) resolution as
the sole procedure for banks needing restructuring, (ii) set-up of a parallel harmonised
national regime in insolvency – an orderly liquidation tool, (iii) withdrawal of the 2015
Commission EDIS proposal without replacement and (iv) incompatible permutations
between elements in the option packages presented in Chapter 6.
Under the
first discarded option,
the existing European resolution framework for
dealing with failing banks would become the sole procedure for banks that need
restructuring
634
. Alternative national insolvency procedures that may involve the
possibility of granting liquidation aid under State aid rules, would need to be eliminated
to leave only what is known as “atomistic” piecemeal liquidation in insolvency as
alternative to resolution. This option would eliminate any potential alternative measures
outside resolution to manage a bank failure other than piecemeal liquidation, while the
latter could be difficult to implement outside a minor portion of very small banks.
Accordingly, if certain banks cannot be put in atomistic liquidation, it must be possible to
manage them in resolution. This entails certainty in the ability to access the resolution
fund, as there would be no flexibility to find other solution. The feasibility to resolve a
very large number of banks would therefore become entirely dependent on the
availability of robust funding solutions in resolution. Such an approach would require
considerable certainty that the current rules could be amended in a way that may
accommodate access to resolution funding for also very small institutions, which in turn
require substantial flexibility by Member States on certain key principles, such as
deviating from the current minimum bail-in requirement (8% TLOF) to access the
RF/SRF
635
, in addition to accessing the DGS. This level of certainty or flexibility is not
presently considered politically realistic.
Stakeholder views: Discussions carried out in the Commission’s expert group and the
replies to the targeted and public consultations
636
showed that several Member States are
not favourable to this option. Some object to important and intrusive modifications in
their national insolvency laws to eliminate alternative measures (i.e. transfer tools). Other
Member States, which do not have such alternative measures in their national laws, also
see this option as too rigid. Some degree of flexibility in the framework is required to
deal with various cases of bank failure. Also, the above mentioned required flexibility on
key principles to access the RF/SRF is not supported by some Member States.
Under the
second discarded option,
resolution would be reserved for the largest,
systemic banks and a parallel harmonised regime in insolvency would be set up for the
634
Under the watch of the SRB for the banks under its remit in the Banking Union and under the watch of
NRAs for all the other ones.
635
Flexibility regarding the 8% TLOF minimum bail-in rule to access RF/SRF would be required for those
banks lacking sufficient bail-inable liabilities to reach 8% TLOF. In a scenario where resolution were
applied to a very large number of EU banks as the only alternative to piecemeal liquidation, the shortfalls
towards 8% TLOF are likely to be affecting many banks.
636
See Annex 2.
413
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0415.png
vast majority of banks, which would not meet the narrower public interest to go into
resolution – a so-called harmonised national administrative liquidation procedure.
Creating such a new alternative regime would require harmonisation of certain important
elements of national bank insolvency laws, which would present significant legal and
political challenges. This procedure would be conducted under national governance,
financed with DGS funds at national level with a risk of shortfalls
637
. This would mean
that the funds collected from all banks for the RF/SRF would remain earmarked for a
smaller scope of large banks, which could create asymmetries in terms of who pays and
who has potential access to the fund, with possible effects on level playing field,
competitiveness and single market in banking
638
, potentially opening the possibility to
narrow down the contributors to such funds. By bringing procedures and their funding
back to the national level, this option would backtrack on the progress achieved in the
Banking Union and the original intention of creating a European resolution framework. It
would also create overlaps and duplications between existing restructuring tools available
in the resolution framework and new national restructuring tools available through the
administrative liquidation procedure, further exacerbating the problems related to
misaligned incentives to apply tools and the legal uncertainty and predictability of
outcome.
Stakeholder views: Discussions in the Commission’s Expert Group, the Council’s
Working Party and the replies to the targeted and public consultations
639
revealed that a
majority of Member States do not support this option because it would create overlaps
with the resolution toolkit, as well as significant legal, technical and implementation
challenges. A few stakeholders are favourable to such an option, however without
offering a solution to the overlap issue.
Under a
third discarded option,
the 2015 EDIS legislative proposal would be
withdrawn without replacing it by a new EDIS proposal. Such an action would be
inconsistent with the framework’s objective of achieving greater depositor protection and
the Commission’s priorities to complete and strengthen the Banking Union with its third
pillar
640
. This is primarily because the risks that EDIS is meant to address would continue
to exist, as explained in the problem definition. A withdrawal of EDIS would also
jeopardise the technical explorations achieved over the past years in the High-Level
Working Group on EDIS, the Commission’s Expert Group and the Council’s working
party
641
. Consequently, this option would represent a step backwards in the post-crisis
regulatory reforms.
637
The option of an orderly liquidation tool financed by national DGS funds but governed centrally in the
Banking Union was also discussed and discarded by most Member States who insisted that the governance
should be aligned with the funding.
638
Retaining the broad contribution basis for the SRF is justified nevertheless on the ground of financial
stability preservation, which is a common public good and efficiency gains through better risk
diversification across the whole population of banks. It however creates the need for another
complementing safety net, especially in case of a parallel regime.
639
See Annex 2.
640
European Commission (16 September 2020),
State of the Union address by President von der Leyen at
the European Parliament plenary.
641
See Annex 5 (evaluation), section 6 on the status quo of EDIS.
414
kom (2023) 0228 - Ingen titel
2737181_0416.png
Stakeholder views: With few exceptions, the majority of Member States shares the
ambition to complete the Banking Union with a fully-fledged EDIS, subject to
conditions, and would be expected to disagree with this option. The banking industry
(smaller and larger banks equally) mostly supported a fully-fledged EDIS and
acknowledged the opportunity for reduced costs in terms of yearly contributions, and,
hence, would also disagree with this avenue. One notable exception are the banks
participating in IPSs located in a few Member States, which advocated for their exclusion
from EDIS
642
. Also consumer associations cite EDIS as a key element to ensure a
uniform level of depositor protection and to increase consumer confidence across the EU
and would consequently be expected to disagree with this option
643
.
Finally,
several incompatible combinations of elements across the option packages were
also discarded such as considering an ambitious CMDI review with broad application of
resolution (via legal amendments to the PIA) without the necessary changes to make
funding available. Failing to secure an effective access to common safety nets to all
banks would continue to expose taxpayers to (possibly increased) risks. The mere
extension of resolution would deliver a dysfunctional and asymmetric framework, where
the funding solutions fail to match the scope, putting the credibility and effectiveness of
the EU resolution regime in doubt. Similarly, theoretical alternatives such as more
resolution funding through an increase in the size of the RF/SRF (higher industry
contributions) and/or increasing the flexibility to access it (i.e. loosening the minimum
bail-in condition of 8% TLOF) are possible though likely not realistic, economically
efficient or politically palatable. To the contrary, some industry participants are
supporting a reduction of contributions to the SRF, which has never been used yet in
practice. Similarly, reducing the minimum bail-in condition of 8% TLOF would also
encounter political opposition from other Member States seeking to protect the fund
against depletion and moral hazard. Overall, these combinations would lack cost-
effectiveness by reducing the synergies in the safety nets and increasing costs for the
industry (no mitigation in terms of lower contributions to DGS) without attaining the
same robustness of the safety nets. It would weaken the capacity to achieve several
objectives such as limiting the recourse to public funds, weakening the bank-sovereign
link, level playing field and robust depositor protection.
Stakeholder views: The EU banking industry and several Member States voiced strongly
the principle of cost neutrality (or possibly a cost reducing impact) of this package.
642
German savings banks association (DSGV) (August, 2020),
This is not the time to centralise deposit
guarantee schemes in Europe
and certain IPSs (April 2021),
Institutional protection schemes in Europe
publish joint declaration in support of a strong Banking Union
and responses to the consultation.
643
See responses to the
public
and
targeted
consultations.
415